Extracted text (via pymupdf)
1391274 characters
EXHIBIT B
Project Name: Water System Upgrades Program
Page B-1
Project No.: WA2100.402
Rev. 10/23/23
GENERAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Approved date: July 20, 2022
Revised: 7/20/2022
GC-2 of 75
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 - SCOPE OF THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................... 3
SECTION 2 - GENERAL DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................ 3
SECTION 3 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS ........................................................................... 7
SECTION 4 - CONT R ACT OR’S R ES PONS IBILIT IES FOR CONST RUCT ION SE RVIC ES .................................. 8
SECTION 5 - CITY RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................................... 27
SECTION 6 - AGREEMENT TIME ................................................................................................................... 29
SECTION 7 - AGREEMENT PRICE .................................................................................................................. 35
SECTION 8 - PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................. 35
SECTION 9 - CHANGES TO THE AGREEMENT ............................................................................................. 40
SECTION 10 - SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION ...................................................................................... 43
SECTION 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS ..................................................................................................... 44
SECTION 12 - INDEMNIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 49
SECTION 13 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION .......................................................................................................... 49
SECTION 14 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ............................................................................................ 50
SECTION 15 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO GMP AND COST-BASED AGREEMENTS, CHANGE
ORDERS, AND JOB ORDERS ......................................................................................................................... 57
SECTION 16 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO JOB ORDER AGREEMENTS (JOC) ........................ 61
SECTION 17 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES FOR
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK .......................................................................................................... 66
SECTION 18 - APPENDICES ...................................................................................................... APP-1 of 30
Appendix 1 – Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages
Appendix 2 – Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals for Design Bid Build Agreements
Appendix 3 – Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims
Appendix 4 – Forms of Performance Bond
Appendix 5 – Forms of Payment Bond
Appendix 6 – Dispute Resolution
Appendix 7 – Certificate of Completion
Appendix 8 – Construction Sign Detail
Appendix 9 – Cost of the Work (Applicable solely to Construction Manager at Risk and
Job Order Contracting)
Appendix 10 Landscape Establishment Period
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-3 of 75
SECTION 1 - SCOPE OF THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS
These General Conditions encompass provisions that apply, and are incorporated into all
construction Agreements entered into by the City of Chandler, unless otherwise specifically excluded in
the executed Agreement.
SECTION 2 - GENERAL DEFINITIONS
Allowance : A specific amount for a specific item of Work, if any, that City agrees has not been sufficiently
designed, detailed, or selected (including design changes from 90% to 100% as authorized by and at
the discretion of the City) at the time the Agreement Price is agreed to for Contractor to provide a definitive
price.
Alternate Systems Evaluations or Alternative Analysis: Alternatives for design, means and methods or
other scope considerations that are evaluated using value analysis principles and have the potential to
reduce construction costs while still delivering a quality and functional Project that meets City
requirements.
Change Order: A written instrument issued after execution of the Agreement Documents signed by
City and Contractor, stating their agreement upon all of the following: the addition, deletion or revision
in the scope of services or deliverables; the amount of the adjustment to the Agreement Price, the
extent of the adjustment to the Agreement Time, or modifications of other agreement terms. The
Agreement Price and the Agreement Time may be changed only by Change Order.
Consultant: Person or firm that provides professional services.
City (Owner or OWNER): City of Chandler, a municipal corporation, with whom Contractor has entered
into the Agreement and for whom the Work or Services are to be provided pursuant to the Agreement(s).
Contingent Bid Items: This is a minor bid item which is likely, but not certain, to occur during the course
of work. If the Engineer determines that this work is required, the Contractor will accomplish the work
and payment will be made based on the contingent unit bid price included in the proposal. Since the
quantity listed in the proposal is primarily for bid comparison, the amount of work required by the
Engineer may vary materially from this.
Agreement: The written agreement executed between City and Contractor, including all of the Agreement
Documents.
Agreement Documents: The documents which together form the Agreement between City and
Contractor, as identified in Article 2 of the Agreement, or are otherwise incorporated into the
Agreement, including the Agreement, the exhibits thereto, these General Conditions, any Notice to
Proceed, and any Job Order (if applicable), the Plans and Specifications, Project Schedule, written
and properly executed Change Orders, MAG Specifications and City’s amendments thereto, and any
other documents so designated in the Agreement.
Agreement Price: The agreed-upon price to be paid to Contractor for full, timely, and acceptable
completion of the Work or Services under the terms of the Agreement.
Agreement Time(s): The number of calendar days or the dates related to the applicable phase,
Substantial Completion, or Final Acceptance as stated in Agreement Documents. Agreement Time starts
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-4 of 75
with the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and ends with Final Acceptance. The Agreement Time is set forth in
the Agreement and is based upon the Project Schedule agreed to by City in writing.
Contractor: The person or business association with whom City has entered into an agreement for
construction related Work or Services in relation to the Project at issue.
Contractor Payment Request: The form that is accepted by City and used by Contractor in requesting
progress payments or final payment and which must include such supporting documentation as is
required by the Agreement Documents or City.
Construction Budget: The City’s budget for construction of the Project.
Construction Documents: The Plans, Specifications, and Drawings prepared and issued by the Design
Professional and approved by City for construction, meaning the documents are sealed by the
Design Professional (as required), acceptable for permitting and incorporated into the Agreement by
this reference. All amendments and modifications to the Construction Documents must be approved in
writing by City prior to incorporation into the Agreement.
Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work will mean costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the
proper performance of the Work. Such costs will be at rates not higher than the standard paid at the
place of the Project except with prior consent of City.
Critical Path Method (CPM): A scheduling technique which identifies the logical sequence of the activities
occurring in a Construction Project, the anticipated time required to complete each activity in the
Project, and the activities that must be completed on schedule to finish the Project within the anticipated
time. Typically, activities are arranged in a network that shows both activities and their dependencies.
CPM is also used as a management technique which enables contracting parties to predict when
activities may occur so that resources can be effectively used and limitations can be identified.
Critical Path: Critical Path is the sequence of project network activities which add up to the longest overall
duration. Once established in the Project Schedule, the Critical Path for the Project must not be
changed without prior written approval of City.
Day: Calendar day(s) unless otherwise specifically stated in the Agreement Documents.
Design Professional: The qualified, licensed person, firm or corporation who furnishes design and
construction administration services required under the Agreement Documents. These services may
include, but are not limited to: development of Construction Drawings and Documents, review of
Contractor Submittal(s), review of and response
to
Requests for Information, approval and
certification of progress payment
applications,
construction administration, and construction
agreement close out.
Differing Site Conditions: Concealed or latent physical conditions or subsurface conditions at the Site
that, (i) materially differ from the conditions indicated in the Agreement Documents, or (ii) are of an
unusual nature, differing materially from the conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized
as inherent in the Work at the general area of the Site. Caliche, rock, hard-digging or sandy/silty soil
encountered on a project is not considered a “Differing Site Condition.”
Drawings (Plans): Documents, which visually represent the scope, extent and character of the Work to
be furnished and performed by Contractor during the construction phase and which have been prepared
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-5 of 75
or approved by the Design Professional and City. These documents include Drawings that have reached
a sufficient state of completion and released by Design Professional solely for the purposes of review
and use in performing constructability or bid-ability reviews by Contractor and in preparing cost
estimates (e.g. Master Planning and Programming, Schematic Design, Design Development, and
Construction Drawings), but “not for construction.” Shop Drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Final Acceptance: The City’s acceptance of the facility or project from the Contractor after all Work is
completed, tested, and inspected in accordance with the Agreement requirements. Final Acceptance
results in a Letter of Acceptance (LOA).
Fixed Price: A fixed price or amount for an Agreement Price, Scope of Work, materials, or other item
under an Agreement, Change Order, or other agreement, which City agrees, in writing, to pay instead
of the actual cost.
Float: The number of Days by which an activity can be delayed without lengthening the Critical Path and
extending the Agreement Time. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing, all Float belongs to City.
Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements: Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances,
codes and orders applicable to the Project of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities
and courts having jurisdiction and any applicable provisions of the Development Agreement for the
Project (if any), including, without limitation, those provisions relating to the design and construction
of the Project.
Line Item: The individual elements of Work identified on a bid or other schedule and associated with a
price or a unit price and quantity particular to that individual element of the Work. Also refers to
individual items of work within the Schedule of Values.
Liquidated Damages: Designated damages for the City to collect as compensation upon a specific breach
(example: late delivery).
Long-Lead Item: Long-lead item refers to the equipment, product, or system that is identified at the
earliest stage of a project to have a delivery time long enough to affect directly the Critical Path/the overall
lead time of the project.
MAG: The Maricopa Association of Governments.
MAG Specifications: The most current version of the Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction published by MAG.
MAG Standard Details: The most current version of the Uniform Standard Details as published by MAG.
Minor change: A change in the Work having no impact on cost or time or the City-approved design intent,
as determined by City.
Notice to Proceed (NTP): A written notice given by City to Contractor fixing the date on which
Contractor will start to perform Contractor’s obligations under the Agreement.
Project: The Project specified in the Agreement (including a Job Order).
Project Manager: The Project Manager designated in Article 1 of the Agreement, or any successor thereto
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-6 of 75
designated by City. The Project Manager has the authority to act on behalf of City, as delineated and
limited by the Agreement Documents and applicable law. And City will communicate with Contractor
through the Project Manager. However, the Project Manager has no authority to bind City or City
Council in contravention of any City code, State or Federal statute or regulation, or these General
Conditions.
Project Schedule: The schedule for the completion of the Project agreed to and required by City.
Project Specific Conditions: Additional conditions which apply to the specific Project and Scope of Work
which are set forth in Exhibit D of the Agreement.
Project Team: The Project Team consisting of the Design Professional, Contractor, Project Manager, and
such others as City may designate.
Punch List: The list initially prepared by Contractor pursuant to the Agreement Documents, reviewed
and supplemented by the Project Manager (and at the sole option of the Project Manager, the Design
Professional) and approved by City containing items of incomplete work not impacting Substantial
Completion, if allowed for under the Agreement, and to be completed or corrected by Contractor after
Substantial Completion and before Final Acceptance in accordance with the Agreement Documents.
Quality Assurance (QA) Testing: Testing performed to verify the accuracy and applicability of the QC
testing results and to ascertain that the materials installed meet the specified levels of quality in
accordance with the Agreement Documents.
Quality Control (QC) Testing: Testing performed to assure that the materials installed comply with the
requirements in the Agreement Documents.
Requests for Information (RFIs): Formal written request from Contractor to City or Design Professional
for the Project seeking clarification or additional information needed for Contractor to properly
complete the Work or Services under the Agreement. City may require RFI’s to be submitted on a specific
form or in a specified format.
Schedule of Values (SOV): The specified document prepared by Contractor, and approved and accepted
by City, which divides the Agreement Price into pay items, such that the sum of all pay items equals
the Agreement Price for the construction phase Work, or for any portion of the Work having a separate
specified Agreement Price.
Scope of Work: The scope of work agreed to or required by City and incorporated into the Agreement as
Exhibit A.
Shop Drawings: All drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared for the Work
by Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to
illustrate some portion of the Work.
Site: The land or premises on which the Project is located.
Specifications: The part(s) of the Agreement Documents for the construction phase consisting of written
technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as
applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Where specified, the Project
must be constructed using the current Uniform Standard Specifications and Details for Public Works
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-7 of 75
Construction as furnished by the Maricopa Association of Governments, as amended by City.
Subconsultant: A person, firm or corporation having an Agreement with Consultant/Contractor to
furnish services required as its independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the
Project.
Subcontractor: An individual or firm having a direct Agreement with Contractor or any other individual or
firm having an Agreement with the aforesaid contractors at any tier, who undertakes to perform a part
of pre-construction services or construction phase Work at the Site for which Contractor is responsible.
Subcontractors must be selected
through the Subcontractor selection process described in the
Agreement Documents, if any.
Substantial Completion: The date when the City determines that the Work (or separable units of Phases
as provided in the Agreement Documents) is essentially and satisfactorily complete in accordance with
the Agreement Documents such that the Project is ready for use by the City for its intended purpose,
opening to the general public, full occupancy or use by City (including, without limitation, all separate
units, or rooms, facilities, access, income-generating areas, and all areas serving the general public, as
applicable, must be ready for full operation without material inconvenience or discomfort), including, to
the extent applicable to the Work, the following: all materials, equipment, systems, controls, features,
facilities, accessories, and similar elements are installed in the proper manner and in operating
condition, inspected, and approved; surfaces have been painted; masonry and concrete cleaned with
any sealer or other finish applied; utilities and systems connected and functioning; site work
complete; permanent heating, ventilation, air conditioning, vertical transportation, and other systems
properly operating with proper controls; lighting and electrical systems installed, operable and
controlled; paving completed, signage installed, and other work as applicable, has been performed to
a similar state of essential and satisfactory completion.
Supplier: A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, or vendor having a direct Agreement with Contractor
or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the construction
phase Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor.
Total Float: Number of Days by which pre-construction services or construction phase Work or any part
of the same may be delayed without necessarily extending a pertinent Agreement Time or schedule
milestone in the Project Schedule.
Work: The entire completion of construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof,
required to be furnished during the construction phase. Work includes and is the result of performing
or furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporating materials, resources and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and documents as required by the Agreement
Documents for the construction phase.
Writing: Typing, printing, photography and other modes of representing or reproducing words in a
visible form, including email, and expressions.
SECTION 3 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS
3.1
City operates under the latest revision of the MAG Specifications and MAG Standard
Details as amended by City. City’s current amendment to the MAG Specifications, part of
the City’s Unified Development Manual, may be found and downloaded from City’s website
at http://www.chandleraz.gov.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-8 of 75
3.2
Copies of the MAG Specifications and MAG Standard Details are available at the
Maricopa Association of Governments office, 302 N. 1st Avenue, Suite 300, Phoenix,
Arizona.
They
may
also
be
downloaded
from
their
website
at:
http://www.azmag.gov/Newsroom/Publications
3.3
The MAG Specifications and Standard Details and City’s amendments thereto are
incorporated into the Agreement by this reference.
SECTION 4 - CONT R ACT OR’S R ES PONS IBILIT IES FOR CONST RUCT ION SE RVIC ES
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1
Contractor must construct the Work in accordance with the Agreement Documents and as
outlined in Exhibit A of the Agreement to the satisfaction of City, exercising the degree of
professional care, skill, diligence, quality and judgment that a professional construction
manager engaged, experienced and specializing in the construction management of
construction and facilities of similar scope, function, size, quality, complexity and detail in
urban areas throughout the United States comparable to Chandler, Arizona would exercise
at such time, under similar conditions. Contractor must, at all times, perform the Work in
conformance with sound and generally accepted engineering principles and construction
management and construction contracting practices.
4.1.2
If Contractor observes errors, discrepancies or omissions in the Agreement Documents,
Contractor must promptly notify the Design Professional and City and request clarification.
If Contractor, with the exercise of reasonable care, should have recognized such error,
inconsistency, omission, or difference and fails to report it to City, and if Contractor
proceeds with the Work affected by such observed errors, discrepancies or omissions,
without receiving such clarifications, Contractor does so at its own risk and will be liable to
City for damages resulting from proceeding without clarification.
4.1.3
Project Team and agents of each of them, testing agencies and governmental agencies with
jurisdictional interests will be provided access to the Work at reasonable times for their
observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor must provide proper and safe conditions
for such access.
4.1.4
Contractor must comply with, and require all Subcontractors to comply with, the Arizona
Contractors’ license laws, including all requirements with respect to being duly registered
and licensed.
4.1.5
Contractor must ensure that all employees performing any Work for which Contractor is
responsible have a legal right to live and work in the United States. In addition, all
compensation of any such employee must meet all applicable requirements of the Fair Labor
Standards Act (FLSA) and Federal Minimum Wage laws.
4.1.6
Contractor must comply with the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA).
Contractor understands and acknowledges the applicability of the IRCA activities.
Contractor agrees to comply with the IRCA while performing their work and to permit City
inspection of Contractor personnel records to verify such compliance.
4.1.7
Pursuant to MAG Specifications §§ 107.4, Contractor must report immediately any discovery
of archeological ruins or artifacts. Excavation must stop immediately so that City can decide
on the pertinent steps to follow such discovery.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-9 of 75
4.1.8
All property owners that may be affected by the proposed construction activities must be
notified of the scope, duration of the construction activities and possible interference with
their day-to-day activities by Contractor prior to start of construction. In addition, individual
residential or commercial interferences, such as driveway restrictions, water outages, and
all other Work adjacent to residence/business, require 48-hour notification in advance of
specific adjoining Work. Notification may be through door hangers or other procedures
approved by the City.
4.1.9
Access must be maintained to adjacent properties at all times during construction. Where
property has more than one point of access, no more than one access will be restricted or
closed at any one time. Access to adjacent private driveways will be maintained during all
non-working hours.
4.1.10
Contractor must furnish and erect construction signs in accordance with Project
Specifications. The signs must be professionally prepared and subject to approval by City,
must be maintained by Contractor for the duration of the project, and must be removed by
Contractor during the final project clean up.
4.1.11
The number of signs required, the size, shape, installation requirements and information to
be included for construction signs is established on the detail sheet, provided, however,
signs must be a minimum of 4 foot by 8 foot and must be installed so that the bottom of
the sign is at least 4 foot above grade. No direct payment will be made for furnishing and
erecting construction signs. The cost thereof must be included in other items for which
direct payment is made. Sign locations will be determined by City.
4.1.12
All required construction signs must be installed by Contractor within 7 Days of Notice to
Proceed.
4.1.13
The Work to be accomplished under these Agreement Documents has been designed for
City by a Design Professional retained by City for this purpose. It is understood that normal
construction Administration for the purpose of interpretation of the Agreement Documents
is provided by City. Should any services of the Design Professional be required to assist in
the corrections of errors or omissions by Contractor, or services of the Design Professional
be required because of changes in structure or equipment where Contractor has requested
approval of substitute methods or material, or any other items detailed herein below, those
services will be provided by the Design Professional at the standard hourly rates previously
negotiated with City and must be paid for by the Contractor.
4.1.14
Contractor must reimburse City for costs incurred by the Design Professional for additional
services to the Project through no fault of City or the Design Professional including, but not
limited to, the following conditions:
a. Additional Site visits, investigations, inspections, design work or reports by
the Design Professional which are required due to damages to existing
facilities or completed Work caused by the Contractor in his performance,
Contractor’s negligence, or Contractor’s Work which is rejected as defective
or as failing to conform to the Agreement Documents;
b. Design Professional construction phase services rendered on the project
during the time the project remains incomplete after the Agreement date of
final completion will be charged to Contractor at a rate previously negotiated
City; and
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-10 of 75
c. All retesting required due to the failure of Contractor’s Work to meet the
requirements of the Agreement Documents will be at Contractor’s expense.
All standby and travel time by the City’s testing lab, the Design Professional
or City due to Contractor’s inability to be prepared for testing at the agreed
upon time will be at the Contractor’s expense.
4.1.15
City may withhold from any payment otherwise due to Contractor any amounts necessary
to pay the Design Professional for such additional services as provided herein above.
4.1.16
Contractor will not be required to bear additional costs incurred by City due to errors by the
Design Professional.
4.2
CONTRACTOR’S PRE-AGREEMENT AND PRE-WORK DELIVERABLES
4.2.1
Prior to award of the Agreement, Contractor must execute Agreement and deliver to City.
Failure to do so may delay Agreement award. Contractor must also provide to City its
Contractor’s License classification and number and its Federal Tax I.D. number.
4.2.2
Before beginning any Work under the Agreement, Agreement must be fully executed by
City.
4.2.3
After Agreement award, City will issue to Contractor an award letter. At that time Contractor
must deliver to City such bonds and certificates of insurance with endorsements in such
amounts (and other evidence of insurance requested by City) required under Section 11 of
these General Conditions, and as the Agreement requires.
4.2.4
As evidence of Workmen’s Compensation Insurance, Contractor must, upon request,
provide a letter of certification from the Industrial Commission of Arizona that Contractor
is insured by the State Compensation Fund or is an authorized self-insurer or a certificate
of insurance issued by an insurance company authorized by the Insurance Department
of Arizona to write Workmen’s Compensation and Occupational Disease Insurance in the
State of Arizona.
4.2.5
Within 10 Days of the date of the executed Agreement letter issued by City, Contractor must
submit to City for review and acceptance the following items:
4.2.5.1
Comprehensive construction Project Schedule including a Critical Path Method (CPM)
diagram schedule as described in Section 6.2. Project Schedule must be in Microsoft Project
standard file format. Within 10 Days of receipt of City’s comments, Contractor must make
all required corrections, adjustments, and additions to complete the Project Schedule and
resubmit to City for review.
4.2.5.2
Preliminary schedule of submittals and Shop Drawings. Within 10 Days of receipt of City’s
comments, Contractor must submit the corrected and completed schedule of Shop
Drawings submissions for approval. Contractor’s schedule of Shop Drawings and sample
submittals will be acceptable to City if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and
processing the required submittals.
4.2.5.3
Schedule of Values in a form specified by City reflecting the subcontracts and other
categories that will be used to submit Pay Applications for the Work. The total amount of
the Schedule of Values must not be greater than the Agreement Price. The Schedule of
Values will be reviewed at the Pre-Construction Conference and revised by Contractor within
10 Days after Pre-Construction Conference in response to comments and questions from
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-11 of 75
City.
Once accepted by City in writing, the Schedule of Values for the Project must not be
changed without the prior written approval of City.
4.2.6
Video Recording Requirement. Prior to performing any Work, Contractor must document
the existing conditions of the Site, all other areas where Work will occur and all adjacent
areas that may be impacted by the Work via digital video format. Contractor must video
record and index all areas, features, buildings and other public and private improvements
that could potentially be impacted by the Work. Video recording must be coordinated with
City. When video recording private property, Contractor must also coordinate the video
recording with the private property owner, if possible. Contractor must provide City with a
copy of said digital video format prior to performing any Work.
4.2.7
Aerial Drone Construction Photography.
4.2.7.1
If Agreement duration is greater than 90 calendar days, Contractor must engage a
professional unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) aerial pilot to photograph the Site prior to
construction mobilization, at three-month intervals during construction, and following final
inspection. Drone camera specifications must meet the following minimum requirements:
a. 1-inch CMOS
b. Pixels: 20M
c. FOV 84 8.8 mm/24 mm (35 mm format equivalent) f/2.8-f/11 auto focus at 1 m-
d. For photographing: 16.9 Aspect Ratio: 5472x3078
e. For video shooting: MP4/MOV/H.264
f.
FHD: 1920x1080 120p @100Mbps
g. File format: High Definition (HD) JPEG for digital photos and HD MPEG 4 for
digital video.
h. All metadata to be recorded including GPS data and preserved with photographs
provided.
Interval
JPEG
3 month intervals
At an altitude (AGL) between
70-90 ft.
3 month intervals
Images to be taken every 50-
100 ft. to be determined based
on project scope.
4.2.7.2
Drone photos to be taken in sequential geographical order and then organized and provided in
the same manner unless otherwise specified.
4.2.7.3
Photos to be provided digitally via an online file share service and/or by a USB drive to contractor.
4.2.7.4
Drone pilots to obey ALL local (city, county, state) UAV regulations as well as FAA UAV
guidelines including, but not limited to, conducting all flights during daylight hours, not exceeding
maximum altitude ceilings (depending on area), not flying over people, yielding to other aircraft.
4.2.7.5
Drone pilots must fly drone within visual line of sight (VSOL) and have visual spotter when
needed. Drone pilots only to operate in favorable weather conditions when minimum visibility is
3 miles or greater.
4.2.7.6
Drone pilots to conduct a preflight checklist and visually inspect the entire flight path prior to flying
to ensure a safe flight.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-12 of 75
4.2.7.7
Airspace Authorizations. Operations in Class G airspace are allowed without air traffic control
(ATC) permission. Operations in Class B, C, D and E airspace need ATC authorization. Drone
pilots to schedule each flight in advance and based on airspace if required will notify nearby
airports/control towers, etc.
4.2.8
Government Approvals and Permits.
4.2.8.1
Contractor must obtain all necessary permits for the Work and pay all applicable fees,
unless otherwise noted on the Plans and in the Specifications. City permit fees will be paid
internally by City. For bidding purposes, an allowance for all permit fees is included in the
bid schedule under the item “allowance for permit fees.” The Contractor will be paid for
the actual cost of the permit fees upon submitting a receipt showing the fee Contractor
has paid. Excluded from the above allowance are items such as all costs incurred by the
Contractor in securing the permit except for the actual permit fee established by the
agency, cost for all shutdowns or outages, cost for pole bracing, cost of permits for
construction water, cost of construction water, cost for any additional insurance
requirements, cost for any licenses, and other similar type costs. Contractor is specifically
notified of the need to obtain the necessary environmental permits or file the necessary
environmental and regulatory permit notices.
4.2.8.2
Copies of all permits and the associated notices must be provided to City prior to starting
the permitted activity.
4.3
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
4.3.1
Prior to the commencement of any Work, City will schedule a Pre-Construction Conference.
4.3.2
The purpose of this Conference is to establish a working relationship between Contractor,
the utility firms, and various City agencies. The agenda will include critical elements of the
Work schedule, submittal schedule, cost breakdown of major lump sum items, Payment
Requests and processing, coordination with the involved utility firms, and emergency
telephone numbers for all representatives involved in the course of construction.
4.3.3
Minimum attendance by Contractor at any mandatory meeting with City must be (1)
Contractor’s Representative, who is authorized to execute and sign documents on behalf
of the firm, (2) Contractor’s on-site Superintendent, and (3) Contractor’s Safety Office,
or other employee responsible for safety.
4.4
PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK (INCLUDING FIELD MEASUREMENTS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, AND SUPPLIERS)
4.4.1
Unless otherwise provided in the Agreement Documents to be the responsibility of City or a
separate Contractor, Contractor must provide through itself or Subcontractors the
necessary supervision, labor, inspection, testing, start-up, material, equipment, machinery,
temporary utilities and other temporary facilities to permit Contractor to complete the
Work consistent with the Agreement Documents.
4.4.2
Contractor must perform all construction activities efficiently and with the requisite
expertise, skill and competence to satisfy the requirements of the Agreement Documents.
Contractor must at all times exercise complete and exclusive control over the means,
methods, safety, sequences and techniques of construction.
4.4.3
Contractor’s Superintendent must be present at the Site at all times that material Work
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-13 of 75
under this Agreement is taking place. Contractor’s Superintendent or designee must be
present at the Site at all times any other Work under this Agreement is taking place.
Superintendent must not be replaced without written notice to City. Whenever the
Superintendent is not present at a particular part of the Work where the City or Design
Professional may desire to inform the Contractor relative to interpretation of the Drawings
and Specifications or to disapproval or rejection of materials or Work performed, the City
or Design Professional may provide such information in writing to the foreman or other
worker in charge of the particular part of the Work in reference to which the information is
given. Information so given will be as binding as if given to the Superintendent.
4.4.4
All elements of the Work must be under the direct supervision of a foreman or his
designated representative on the Site who must have the authority to take actions required
to properly carry out that particular element of the Work.
4.4.5
Working Hours. Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons or the Work
or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated, all Work at
the Site must be performed during regular working hours, and Contractor will not permit
overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without
City’s written consent given after prior written notice to City. If it will become absolutely
necessary to perform Work at night or on Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays, the City
must be informed at least 24 hours in advance of the beginning of performance of such
Work. Only such Work will be done at night as can be done satisfactorily as determined by
the City. Good lighting and all other necessary facilities for carrying out and inspecting the
Work must be provided and maintained at all points where such Work is being done.
Further, unless such non-normal work hours are performed at City’s request or required by
the Agreement Documents, Contractor must pay to City all additional costs incurred by City
by reason of such non-normal working hours. Expenses incurred by City for overtime
compensation must be reimbursed by Contractor as follows: (i) City staff at the rate set forth
in current City Fee Schedule as published on City website, (ii) Design Professional and staff
at the standard hourly rates previously negotiated with City, and (iii) all others at actual cost
plus ten percent administrative overhead. Such costs may be deducted by City from any
payments due to Contractor. Provided, however, if overtime work or work during other
than normal hours is at the request of City and not due to Contractor delay, City will pay the
cost of City overtime expenses.
4.4.6
Where the Agreement Documents require that a particular product be installed or applied
by an applicator approved by the manufacturer, it is Contractor’s responsibility to ensure
the Subcontractor employed for such work is approved by the manufacturer. All materials
and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Agreement Documents; but no
provisions of any such instructions will be effective to impose on City of Design Professional
responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction or for safety precautions incident thereto.
4.4.7
Before starting the Work, Contractor must carefully study and compare the various
Plans, Drawings, other Agreement Documents, and Specifications relative to that portion
of the Work, as well as the information furnished by City, must take field measurements of
any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and must observe any conditions
at the Site affecting it. The exactness of grades, elevations, dimensions, or locations given
on any Drawings, or the Work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by City.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-14 of 75
4.4.8
Before ordering materials or doing Work, Contractor and each Subcontractor must verify
measurements at the Site and will be responsible for the correctness of such
measurements. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed because of differences
between actual dimensions and the dimensions indicated on the Agreement Documents,
including the Drawings.
4.4.9
Ground Level Construction Photography.
4.4.9.1
The Contractor must furnish progress photographs of the project. The photographer
selected by the Contractor must be approved by the City and must be either a commercial
photographer or an individual experienced and equipped for such photography.
4.4.9.2
The Contractor must deliver to City all photographs taken during that period with each
application for payment. If the current photographs do not accompany the application, the
application will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor as incomplete.
4.4.9.3
Photographs must be identified by use of typewritten labels affixed to the back of the
photograph. The label must provide a description of the view, the direction from which the
photograph was taken, the name of the project, City’s project number, the name of
Contractor and the date of the photography. The stationing must also be included for all
pipeline installations.
4.4.9.4
Photographs must be taken during the construction period and must be of aesthetic
composition and depict the progress of the Work from the beginning of construction
through and including the finished product. City may vary the specified frequency so that
significant progress or changes can be recorded on the photographs.
4.4.10
Underground Facilities.
4.4.10.1
The existence and number of facilities as shown on the Plans are estimated from
information furnished by the particular utility. Contractor is responsible for field verification
and location of all utilities prior to the start of construction. No field work will be allowed to
start until Contractor has contacted Arizona 811 and all affected utilities have been located.
In addition, Contractor must expose and physically locate all potentially conflicting utilities
prior to construction. The actual locations of the utilities must be compared to locations
shown on the Plans and any required changes in alignment and grade must be made at the
time of construction in consultation with Project Manager. It is generally recognized and
Contractor should anticipate that information from Arizona 811 or information from utility
companies during project design, frequently fails to disclose all underground facilities. The
fact that more utility lines or other underground facilities are located in the Project Site than
shown on the Project Plans does not constitute an “unforeseen Condition” and such
undisclosed underground facilities do not differ materially from the conditions which
Contractor should expect. The provisions of Sections 105.4, 105.6, 107.11 and 109.8.1 of the
MAG Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction apply and are
incorporated herein by this reference.
4.4.10.2
Contractor is responsible for all coordination with utility companies. The provisions of
Sections 105.4, 105.6, 107.11 and 109.8.1 of the MAG Uniform Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction strictly apply and no additional compensation will be paid to
Contractor for delays due to utility work on the project.
4.4.11
Relocation of Existing Water Meters. When a service line has been extended and a line
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-15 of 75
setter installed in a meter box, City forces will re-install meter. No compression fittings will
be utilized.
4.4.12
Water Turn-On or Turn-Off.
4.4.12.1
Contractor must coordinate all water line turn-ons and turn-offs through the City.
Application must be made to the Municipal Utility Division and Contractor must pay the
established charges. The City will close existing valves, but will not guarantee a bone-dry
Shutdown.
4.4.12.2
Contractor must notify all customers affected by the turn-off not less than 48 hours in
advance. Notification must be in writing, must give the reason for the turn-off and must
give the estimated time and duration that water service will be interrupted. Contractor is
also notified that water turn-off will not be permitted on the Day before and after
Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day.
4.4.12.3
No direct payment will be made to Contractor for turn-ons or turn-offs. Costs associated
therewith will be included in other items for which direct payment is made.
4.4.13
Tests and Inspections.
4.4.13.1
Contractor must give City timely (at a minimum, twenty-four hours) notice of readiness of
the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals. Contractor must give timely notice
to City in advance of backfilling or otherwise covering any part of the Work so that city
representative may, if desired, observe such part of the Work before it is concealed.
Whenever Contractor varies the normal period during which Work or any portion of it is
carried on each Day, Contractor must give timely notice to City so that city representative
may, if desired, be present to observe the Work in progress. If Contractor fails to give such
timely notice, any Work done in the absence of city representative will be subject to
rejection. If Contractor gives such notice to City, but then is not ready for such inspections,
tests, approvals or observations at the time so noticed, Contractor must reimburse City for
all costs incurred by the attendance of city representatives.
4.4.13.2
If any law, ordinance, rule, regulation, code, or orders of any public body having jurisdiction
requires any Work (or part thereof) to be inspected, tested or approved, Contractor (unless
another party is specified in the Agreement Documents) must assume full responsibility
therefor, pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish City the required certificates of
inspection, testing, or approval. Contractor must also be responsible for and must pay all
costs in connection with any inspection or testing required by the Specifications in
connection with City's acceptance of a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor of
materials or equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials or
equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation
in the Work. The cost of all other inspections, tests and approvals required by the
Agreement Documents will be paid by City (unless otherwise specified).
4.4.13.3
All inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by law, ordinance, rule,
regulation, code or order of any public body having jurisdiction must be performed by
organizations acceptable to City and by the Design Professional if so specified.
4.4.13.4
Neither observations by City, the Design Professional nor inspections, tests or approvals by
others will relieve Contractor from their obligations to perform the Work in accordance with
the Agreement Documents.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-16 of 75
4.4.14
Uncovering Work. If any Work that is to be observed, inspected, tested or approved is
covered without written concurrence of City, it must, if requested by City be uncovered for
observation. Unless Contractor has given City timely notice of Contractor's intention to
cover such Work and City has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such
notice, Contractor must furnish all necessary labor, material and bear all the expenses of
such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
reconstruction, including compensation for additional professional services, and an
appropriate deductive Change Order will be issued.
4.4.15
In all cases of interconnection of its Work with existing or other Work, Contractor must verify
at the Site all dimensions relating to such existing or other Work. Any errors due to
Contractor’s failure to so verify all such grades, elevations, locations or dimensions must
be promptly rectified by Contractor without any increase in the Agreement Price. Any
design errors or omissions noted by
Contractor during this review must be reported
promptly to City.
4.4.16
Contractor must establish and maintain all construction grades, lines, levels, and
benchmarks, and will be responsible for accuracy and protection of same. This Work
must be performed or supervised by a licensed civil engineer or surveyor in the State of
Arizona.
4.4.17
Contractor must photograph all buried piping of greater than four (4) inches in diameter
prior to backfill.
4.4.18
Contractor is responsible for the proper performance of the work of Subcontractors and any
acts and omissions in connection with such performance. Nothing in the Agreement
Documents is intended or deemed to create any legal or contractual relationship
between City and any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor, including but not limited to any
third-party beneficiary rights.
4.4.19
Contractor must coordinate the activities of all Subcontractors. Contractor must
coordinate performance of the Work with City’s Public Works & Utilities Department and
other departments or agencies within City. The Design Professional and other contractors
or parties involved in the Project. If City performs other work on the Project or at the Site with
separate contractors under City’s control, Contractor agrees to cooperate and coordinate
its activities with those of such separate contractors so that the Project can be completed
in an orderly and coordinated manner without unreasonable disruption.
4.4.20
Contractor will not substitute or change any Subcontractor or Supplier without the prior
written approval of City. Any substitute or replacement Subcontractor or Supplier must
be required to meet the same qualifications and selection criteria and process as the
original Subcontractor or Supplier. If a Subcontract/Supplier selection plan has been
approved by City, Contractor will follow that plan unless otherwise approved by City in
writing.
4.4.21
Contractor must not change or replace any members of its Project team, including
Contractor’s Representative, Project Manager, or Superintendent, without an explanation for
the change being given to City, and receiving prior written approval of the change from City,
which approval will not be unreasonably withheld.
4.4.22
Subcontractors whose scope of work has a value greater than 15% of the total Agreement
Price are required to furnish performance and payment bonds to Contractor, unless
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-17 of 75
otherwise approved in writing by City.
4.4.23
Contractor must comply with MAG Specification § 108.2 (E) unless otherwise specified in
Agreement Documents.
4.5
CONTROL OF THE PROJECT SITE
4.5.1
Throughout all phases of construction, including suspension of Work, Contractor must keep
the Site reasonably free from debris, trash and construction wastes to permit Contractor to
perform its construction services efficiently, safely and without interfering with the use of
adjacent land areas.
Prior to Final Acceptance of the Work, or a portion of the Work,
Contractor must remove all debris, trash, construction wastes, materials, equipment,
machinery and tools arising from the Work or applicable portions thereof to permit City
to occupy the Project or a portion of the Project for its intended use.
4.5.2
Contractor must take whatever steps, procedures or means necessary to prevent dust
nuisance due to construction operations. The dust control measures must be maintained
at all times to the satisfaction of City and in accordance with the requirements of the
Maricopa County Bureau of Air Pollution Control Rules and Regulations.
4.5.3
Contractor must maintain Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and American National
Standards
Institute (ANSI) accessibility requirements during construction activities,
including
without
limitation compliance with the 2010 regulations governing
implementation of the ADA to the extent applicable.
ADA and ANSI accessibility
requirements must include, but not be limited to, parking, building access, areas of refuge,
and emergency exit paths of travel. Contractor i s responsible for the coordination of all
Work to minimize disruption to residents and the public.
4.5.4
Only materials and equipment used directly in the Work will be brought to and stored on the
Site by Contractor. When equipment is no longer required for Work, it must be removed
promptly from the Site. Protection of construction materials and equipment stored at the
Site from weather, theft, damage and all other adversity is solely the responsibility of the
Contractor.
4.5.5
Contractor agrees all persons working on the Site must act at all times in the best interest
of the Project and will comply with all applicable rules and regulations reasonably set forth
by City related to the Site. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in this Agreement to
the contrary, City may remove from the Site any individual who City deems in their
reasonable discretion to be creating a disturbance or causing any problem on the Site.
4.5.6
Contractor will be responsible to City for the acts and omissions of Contractor’s employees,
Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and any other person performing any of
the Work under an Agreement with Contractor, or claiming by, through or under Contractor,
for all damages, losses, costs and expenses resulting from such acts or omissions.
4.5.7
City may conduct criminal, drive history, and all other requested background checks of
Contractor and Subcontractor personnel performing Work or who have access to City’s
information, data, or facilities in accordance with City’s current background check policies,
or the provisions of the Project Specific Conditions. Any officer, employee or agent that
fails to background check must be replaced immediately.
4.5.8
City will have a final authority, based upon security reasons: (i) to determine when
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-18 of 75
security clearance of Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s personnel is required; (ii) to determine
the nature of the security clearance, up to and including fingerprinting personnel; and
(iii) to determine whether or not any individual or entity may provide Services or perform
Work under the Agreement.
4.5.9
If City objects to any personnel for any reasonable cause, then Contractor must, upon notice
from City, remove such individual from the Project.
4.6
PROJECT SAFETY
4.6.1
The Project and all Work performed in relation thereto is governed by applicable provisions
of the federal laws, including but not limited to, the latest amendments of the following:
a. Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety & Health Act of 1970, Public Law, 91-596.
b. Part 1910 and Part 1926 – Occupational Safety and Health Standards,
Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations.
c. Part 1518 – Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Chapter XIII of
Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations.
4.6.2
Contractor is responsible for safety of the job Site for employees of Contractor as well
as for members of the general public and others who may drive or walk through or be at
the Site.
4.6.3
Contractor recognizes the importance of performing the Work in a safe manner so as to
prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all individuals at the Site, whether working or visiting;
(ii) the Work, including materials and equipment incorporated into the Work and stored On-
Site or Off-Site; and (iii) all other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees,
shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for
removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction; and (iv) the owners or
tenants of adjacent property and their patrons, employees and invitees.
4.6.4
Contractor assumes responsibility for implementing and monitoring all safety precautions
and programs related to the performance of the Work.
4.6.5
Contractor must provide a “competent person’ as required by O.S.H.A regulations. The
“competent person” must be identified at the Pre-Construction Conference with City
advised in writing of any changes.
4.6.6
The “competent person” must make routine daily inspections of the Site and must hold
weekly safety meetings with Contractor’s personnel, Subcontractors and others as
applicable.
4.6.7
Contractor and Subcontractors must comply with all legal and regulatory requirements
relating to safety, as well as any City specific safety requirements set forth in the Agreement
Documents, provided that such City-specific requirements do not violate any applicable
legal and regulatory requirements.
4.6.8
Contractor will immediately report in writing any safety-related injury, loss, damage or
accident arising from the Work to Project Manager and, to the extent mandated by Legal
Requirements, to all government or quasi-government authorities having jurisdiction over
safety-related matters involving the Project or the Work.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-19 of 75
4.6.9
Contractor’s responsibility for safety under this Section is not intended in any way to
relieve Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors of their own contractual and legal
obligations and responsibility for (i) complying with all Legal Requirements, including those
related to health and safety matters, and (ii) taking all necessary measures to implement
and monitor all safety precautions and programs to guard against injury, losses, damages
or accidents resulting from their performance of the Work.
4.6.10
As between City and Contractor, Contractor is responsible to City for any and all the safety
issues relating to the Work on the Project. Contractor must administer and manage the
safety program. This will include, but not necessarily be limited to review of the safety
programs of each Subcontractor. Contractor must monitor the establishment and
execution of compliance with all applicable regulatory and advisory agency construction
safety standards. Contractor’s responsibility for review, monitoring, and coordination of the
Subcontractor’s safety programs will not extend to direct control over execution of the
Subcontractors’ safety programs. Notwithstanding Contractor’s safety obligations to City,
it is agreed and understood that each individual Subcontractor will remain controlling
employer responsible for the safety programs and precautions applicable to its own work
and the activities of other’s work in areas designated to be controlled by such Subcontractor
for purposes of workers compensation insurance coverage.
4.6.11
Nothing in this agreement will relieve Contractor of his responsibility to maintain traffic,
structures, etc., as noted on the Plans, Specifications, and Project Specific Conditions.
Contractor is responsible to provide all necessary shoring, bracing and trench support as
is necessary to maintain traffic structures, etc., as stipulated in the Plans, Specifications, and
Special Provisions. If the stability of adjoining building, walls, roadways, etc., is endangered
by Contractor’s excavation, shoring, bracing, or under pinning must be provided as
necessary to ensure project safety. Cost for shoring, bracing, underpinnings, and trench
support will be included in the appropriate items listed in the Agreement Price, and no
additional payment will be made for this work.
4.7
MATERIALS QUALITY, SUBSTITUTIONS, AND SHOP DRAWINGS
4.7.1
Quality Control and Quality Assurance Testing.
4.7.1.1
All construction materials to be used or incorporated in the Project are subject to
inspection, Quality Control & Quality Assurance Testing, and approval or rejection by City.
Any material rejected by City must be removed immediately and replaced in an acceptable
manner to City at no additional cost to City. When QC/QA tests indicate noncompliance
with the Agreement Documents, retesting must be performed by the same testing
laboratory that performed the tests that indicated noncompliance.
4.7.1.2
The Contractor must establish, provide, and maintain an effective Quality Control Testing
Program (QCTP). The Contractor must develop his own program or procure the services of
a consultant. In either case, the party performing the tests must be currently certified by the
National Bureau of Standards in the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for construction
services or the AASHTO Accreditation Plan (AAP) for Soils,
Asphalt and Concrete. The Contractor must provide all support necessary to perform QC
and QA testing and sampling (i.e. shoring for testing trench backfill, backhoes, motor
graders, loaders, etc. to facilitate testing and sampling). The City will perform the QA testing.
4.7.1.3
The Contractor must submit a written QCTP to the City as a required submittal. The
Contractor must not begin Work until the Quality Control Program has been reviewed and
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-20 of 75
accepted by the City. Resumes of all personnel that will be associated directly or indirectly
with the QCTP must be included.
4.7.1.4
The QCTP must include, but not be limited to, on-site/field and laboratory testing of all
material delivered to the Site and any existing materials or conditions pertinent to the
project.
4.7.1.5
All testing must be under the direction of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of
Arizona, knowledgeable in Materials Testing. All “Test Report” forms must be stamped by
said Engineer.
4.7.1.6
The written QCTP will set forth the responsibilities of the engineer, project manager,
supervisory personnel and each technician assigned to this project. Substitutions or
replacement of personnel must require prior written approval by the City. All personnel must
be proficient within their assigned duties and possess certification(s) commensurate with
their position and responsibilities. The minimum certification(s) for each technician must
be NICET Level II, Arizona Technical Testing Institute, American Concrete Institute, or other
nationally recognized program applicable to the project and approved by the City of
Chandler. The written QCTP must include a description of the required field and
construction materials laboratory tests, including required frequencies that meet the
minimums established herein.
4.7.1.7
The Contractor must establish a system to record and report all material test results. The
daily test reports must include, but not be limited to:
a. Test designation;
b. Date of test;
c. Name of tester;
d. Location of test/sample (station and offset);
e. Product suppliers and product codes (as applicable);
f.
Depth/elevation of test/sample;
g. Test result;
h. Control requirement(s);
i.
Cause of rejection (if applicable);
j.
Results of retests (if applicable); and
k. Remedial action (if applicable).
4.7.1.8
The Contractor must submit test results to the designated City representative.
4.7.1.9
The Contractor must also submit a weekly report to the City summarizing the testing
and construction activities completed by emailing the report to the email addresses noted
above. All weekly reports must be submitted simultaneously to the Contractor and the
City of Chandler. The report must include individual summary sheets for each utility line,
structure, and portion of the pavement section. Cores must be numbered sequentially
throughout the Project. Re-cores must reference the original core by number and must
contain the averaged values for thickness and density. Total pavement thickness must be
reported. Vertical location of tests for underground utilities must indicate the depth of the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-21 of 75
excavation at the location of the test (i.e., cut to flow line [if applicable], depth to bottom
or top of pipe, etc.). Density tests must be numbered sequentially. If the minimum number
of tests has not been performed per the written QCTP, this must be stated in the weekly
summary report with an explanation of the circumstances.
4.7.1.10
The City will maintain a copy of the Project test results and weekly reports in the Project
file. In cases where quality control activities do not comply with the Agreement provisions,
the City may:
a. Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified quality control
personnel.
b. Order the Contractor to stop operations until appropriate corrective action is
taken.
4.7.1.11
Although minimum testing requirements are specified herein, the Contractor bears full
responsibility for the quality of the materials and their installation and may elect to
perform additional testing beyond the requirements set forth herein to ensure compliance.
4.7.1.12
The Quality Control requirements contained in this Section are in addition to and separate
from Quality Assurance Testing, which will be performed by the City of Chandler or its
representative. If the Quality Assurance test results are not in agreement with the Quality
Control test results, the Contractor will have the option to retain a third party consultant for
referee tests. The third party consultant must meet the same requirements as the
consultant performing the Quality Control Testing. The results of the third party will be
binding. All cost incurred by the referee testing will be the Contractor’s expense. If the
Contractor elects not to retain a third party for referee testing, the City of Chandler test
results will prevail.
4.7.1.13
Except as otherwise noted within this Section, Work or materials required by this Section are
non- pay items. Per MAG Section 101, a non-pay item is an item of Work for which no
separate payment will be made, the cost of which is to be included as an incidental cost
for associated item(s) included on the Bid Schedule or Schedule of Values.
4.7.2
Trade Names and Substitutions.
4.7.2.1
Substitutions prior to bid will only be considered if in compliance with Arizona Revised
Statute § 34-104.
4.7.2.2
Contractor, if requested by City, must submit Samples or any additional information that
may be necessary to evaluate the acceptability of the substitution.
4.7.2.3
City will make the final decision and will notify Contractor in writing as to whether the
substitution has been accepted or rejected.
4.7.2.4
If City does not respond within 15 working days, Contractor must continue to perform the
Work in accordance with the Agreement Documents and the substitution will be considered
rejected.
4.7.3
Shop Drawings.
4.7.3.1
Contractor must prepare and submit Shop Drawings which show details of all Work to insure
proper installation of the Work using those materials and equipment specified under the
approved Plans and Specifications.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-22 of 75
4.7.3.2
Contractor must submit a schedule of Shop Drawing submissions, which avoids bulk
submissions to the extent reasonably possible, with the Project Schedule for City approval.
The schedule of Shop Drawing submissions must include all of the items for which Shop
Drawings are required by the Agreement Documents, including the Specifications. Unless
otherwise noted, Shop Drawings will not be required for items specified or detailed in
the Uniform Standard Specifications and Details or the Technical Specifications.
4.7.3.3
Shop Drawings must be numbered consecutively for each Specification section and must
accurately and distinctly present the following:
a. All working and erection dimensions.
b. Arrangements and sectional views.
c. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections
between work under this Agreement and work under other Agreements.
d. Kinds of materials and finishes.
e. Parts list and description thereof.
4.7.3.4
Each Drawing or page must include:
a. Project Name, City of Chandler Project Number and descriptions.
b. Submittal date and space for revision dates.
c. Identification of equipment, product or material.
d. Name of Contractor and Subcontractor.
e. Name of Supplier and Manufacturer.
f.
Relation to adjacent structure of material.
g. Physical dimensions clearly identified.
h. ASTM and Federal Specifications references.
i.
Identification of and justification for deviations from the Agreement
Documents.
j.
Contractor’s stamp, initialed or signed, dated and certifying the review
of submittal, certification of field measurements and compliance with
Agreement.
k. Location at which the equipment or materials are to be installed.
4.7.3.5
Location will mean both physical location and location relative to other connected or
attached material. City will return unchecked any submittal, which does not contain
complete data on the Work and full information on related matters.
4.7.3.6
Stock or standard drawings will not be accepted for review unless full identification and
supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or typewritten form.
4.7.3.7
Contractor must schedule, prepare and submit all Shop Drawings in accordance with a time-
table
that will allow its suppliers and manufacturers sufficient time to fabricate,
manufacture, inspect, test and deliver their respective products to the project Site in a
timely manner so as to not delay the complete performance of the Work.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-23 of 75
4.7.3.8
If the Shop Drawings show departures from the Agreement requirements, Contractor
must make specific mention thereof in the Letter of Transmittal; otherwise review of such
submittals by City will not constitute review of the departure. Review of the Drawings will
constitute review of the specific subject matter for which the Drawings were submitted
and not of any other structure, material, equipment, or apparatus shown on the Drawings.
4.7.3.9
The review of Shop Drawings will be general and will not relieve Contractor of responsibility
for the accuracy of such Drawings, nor for the proper fitting and construction of the Work,
nor for the furnishing of materials or Work required by the Agreement. No construction
called for by Shop Drawings will be initiated until such Drawings have been reviewed and
approved by City.
4.7.3.10
The procedure in seeking review of the Shop Drawings will be as follows:
a. Contractor must submit complete sets of Shop Drawings and other
descriptive data as specified in this Section.
b. After Contractor’s submittal or resubmittal of Shop Drawings, if Contractor
has submitted Shop Drawings in accordance with the City-approved
submittal schedule, or upon resubmission, City will be provided with three
(3) calendar weeks for review. Should City require additional review time
above and beyond the three (3) calendar weeks, Contractor may ask for a
time extension or monetary compensation, if they can present valid, factual
evidence that actual damages were incurred by Contractor. City will
determine
the amount of the time extension or the monetary
compensation to be awarded Contractor, if any, in accordance with City’s
Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages, Appendix 1.
4.7.3.11
Contractor will be responsible for all extra costs incurred by City caused by Contractor’s
failure to comply with the procedure outline above.
4.7.4
Long Lead Time Items. Contractor must submit Shop Drawings, as required by the Engineer,
on all long lead items to be furnished and installed as part of the project within 10 Days
after the date of the executed Agreement letter issued by City. In addition,
Contractor must order all long lead items to be furnished and installed as part of this
Project within 3 Days after receiving approved Shop Drawings. For all long lead times for
which Shop Drawings are not required, Contractor must order said long lead items within
15 Days after the date of the executed Agreement letter issued by City. Within 2 Days
after ordering long lead items, Contractor must supply copies of all purchase orders,
along with an accurate delivery schedule from the supplier.
4.7.5
Construction Water. If Contractor uses water from City’s water system for construction
water, Contractor must obtain a fire hydrant meter from City of Chandler Utility Services
(480-782-2280) and all construction water must be obtained through the hydrant meter.
Contractor must pay all fees related to the hydrant meter and all water bills for construction
water. All cost for meters and construction water will be included in the Agreement Price.
4.8
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
4.8.1
During the construction period, Contractor must maintain at the jobsite a full-size set of
prints of the Construction Document Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record
Document purposes.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-24 of 75
4.8.2
Contractor must mark these Drawings to indicate the actual installation where the installation
varies from the original Construction Documents. Contractor must give particular attention
to information on elements that will be concealed, which would be difficult to identify or
measure and record later. Items required to be marked include but are not limited to:
a. Dimensional changes to the Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
e. Actual equipment locations.
f.
Changes made by Change Order or Addendum.
g. Details not on original Agreement Drawings.
4.8.3
Contractor must mark completely and accurately Project Record Drawing sets of
Construction Documents.
4.8.4
Contractor must mark Project Record Drawings sets with red erasable colored pencil.
4.8.5
Contractor must note Request for Information (RFI) Numbers and Change Order numbers,
etc., as required to identify the source of the change to the Construction Documents.
4.8.6
Contractor must submit Project Record Drawing sets and Shop Drawings to City or its
representative for review and comment.
4.8.7
Upon receipt of the reviewed Project Record Drawings from City, Contractor must correct
any deficiencies and omissions to the Drawings and submit the final original of the Project
Record Drawings to City prior to Final Payment.
4.8.8
Project Manager will review the Project Record Drawings monthly prior to the date
established for the Payment Request and will be the sole judge of acceptance of these
Drawings.
4.9
WARRANTY AND CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
4.9.1
Contractor warrants to City that the construction, including all materials and equipment
furnished as part of the Work, will be new unless otherwise specified in the Agreement
Documents, of good quality, and free of defects in materials and workmanship. Contractor’s
warranty obligation excludes defects caused by abuse, alterations, or unreasonable failure
to maintain the construction by persons other than Contractor, subcontractors, or others
under Contractor’s control. Nothing in this warranty will limit any manufacturer’s warranty
which provides City with greater warranty rights than set forth herein or in the Agreement.
Contractor will provide City with all manufacturers’ warranties and operation and
maintenance manuals upon substantial completion of the Work. Contractor’s warranty
must be for one (1) year, in accordance with MAG Specification § 108.8, and will commence
for all portions of the Work upon Final Acceptance of the entire Work as determined by City
under the Agreement. All statutory or other warranties, express or implied, related to latent
defects will remain in force and are not limited by this provision.
4.9.2
City May Stop the Work. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient
skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, City may order Contractor to stop the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-25 of 75
Work without cost to City, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of City to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the
part of City to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other party.
4.9.3
Correction or Removal of Defective Work.
4.9.3.1
If required by City, Contractor must promptly, without cost to City and as specified by City,
either correct any defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if
the Work has been rejected by City, remove it from the Site and replace it with non-defective
Work. Contractor must correct any Work which may be displaced in correcting, removing or
replacing defective Work. No compensation will be allowed Contractor for such removal,
replacement or remedial Work. Contractor must reimburse City for costs incurred by City
due to such correction or removal including but not limited to additional expenses for
inspection, testing or observation and for repeated reviews by the City or Design
Professional.
4.9.3.2
Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply within a reasonably prompt time with
any written order of City to correct or remove defective Work, City has authority to cause
nonconforming materials or rejected Work to be remedied, removed, or replaced at the
Contractor's expense and to deduct the costs from any moneys due or to become due the
Contractor.
4.9.4
City May Correct Defective Work. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written
notice of City to proceed to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work
as required by City or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the
Agreement Documents (including any requirements of the progress schedule), City may,
after 7 Days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. To the
extent necessary to complete corrective and remedial action, City may exclude Contractor
from all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take
possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the
Site and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which
City has paid Contractor, but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor must allow City, city
representatives, agents and employees such access to the Site as may be necessary to
enable City to exercise City’s rights under this Section. All direct and indirect costs of City in
exercising such rights will be charged against Contractor in an amount verified by City
representative, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in
the Agreement Documents and a reduction in the Agreement Price. Such direct and indirect
costs will include, in particular but without limitation, compensation for additional
professional services required and all costs of repair and replacement of Work or others
destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective
Work. Contractor will not be allowed an extension of the Agreement Time because of any
delay in Contractor’s performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by City or City's
rights hereunder.
4.9.5
Correction or Removal of Unauthorized Work.
4.9.5.1
Any Work done beyond the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or established by the
Design Professional or any changes in, additions to, or deductions from the Work done
without written authority will be considered as unauthorized and will not be paid for. Work
so done may be ordered remedied, removed, or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
4.9.5.2
Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply promptly with any order of the City,
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-26 of 75
City will have authority to cause unauthorized Work to be remedied, removed, or replaced
at the Contractor's expense and to deduct the costs from any moneys due or to become
due the Contractor.
4.9.6
Correction Period - One Year Guarantee.
4.9.6.1
If, within one year after the date of Final Acceptance, or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the
Agreement Documents, or by any specific provision of the Agreement Documents, any Work
is found to be defective, Contractor must promptly, without cost to City and in accordance
with City's written instructions, either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected
by City, remove it from the Site and replace it with non-defective Work. If Contractor does
not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay
would cause serious risk of loss or damage, City may have the defective Work corrected or
the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all direct and indirect costs of such removal
and replacement, including compensation for additional professional services, must be paid
by Contractor. Such action by the City will not relieve the Contractor of the guarantees
required by this Section or elsewhere in the Agreement Documents.
4.9.6.2
If, in the opinion of the City, defective Work creates a dangerous condition or requires
immediate correction or attention to prevent further loss to the City or to prevent
interruption of operation of the City, the City will attempt to give the notice required by this
Section. If the Contractor cannot be contacted or does not comply with the City's request
for correction within a reasonable time as determined by the City, the City may,
notwithstanding the provisions of this Section, proceed to make such correction or provide
such attention; and the costs of such correction or attention will be charged against the
Contractor. Such action by the City will not relieve the Contractor of the guarantees
required by this Section or elsewhere in the Agreement Documents.
4.9.6.3
This Section does not in any way limit the guarantee on any items for which a longer
guarantee is specified or on any items for which a manufacturer or supplier gives a
guarantee for a longer period. The Contractor agrees to act as co-guarantor with such
manufacturer or supplier and must furnish the City all appropriate guarantee or warranty
certificates upon completion of the Project. No guarantee period, whether provided for in
this Section or elsewhere, will in any way limit the liability of Contractor or their sureties or
insurers under the indemnity or insurance provisions of these General Conditions and the
Project Specific Special Conditions.
4.9.7
Acceptance of Defective Work.
4.9.7.1
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, City may
accept Work when in the best interest of the City to do so with appropriate monetary credit
from Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, a Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Agreement Documents, including
appropriate reduction in the Agreement Price; or, if the acceptance occurs after final
payment, an appropriate amount must be paid by Contractor to City.
4.9.7.2
Alternatively, City may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense, a special
performance guarantee or other surety prior to acceptance of defective work.
4.9.8
The Warranty period begins on the Final Acceptance date noted in the Certificate of
Completion, irrespective of early completion by some Subcontractors of their work.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-27 of 75
4.9.9
Contractor’s warranty obligation must be in accordance with MAG Specifications.
4.9.10
Nothing in the warranties contained in the Agreement Documents are intended to limit any
manufacturer’s warranty which provides City with greater warranty rights than set forth
in this Section or the Agreement Documents. Contractor must provide City with all
manufacturers’ warranties
prior to Substantial Completion, if applicable, or Final
Acceptance.
4.9.11
Contractor agrees that it will be responsible to manage and administer the correction of any
Work that is not in conformance with the Agreement Documents during the warranty
periods set forth in this Section, or during any longer periods to the extent required by the
Agreement Documents. A progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the
Project by City, will not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Agreement
Documents.
4.9.12
When notified of a warranty issue, Contractor must respond in writing within 48-hours and
must perform warranty Work as soon as material for said repairs are available (as judged
solely by City), and in any event Contractor must, take immediate steps to commence and
complete correction of nonconforming Work no later than the time period set forth in
City’s written notification in accordance with the Agreement Documents. This includes the
correction, removal or replacement of the nonconforming Work and any damage caused
to other parts of the Work affected by the nonconforming Work. If defects develop which
are determined by City to be an emergency, City will notify Contractor, via the most
expeditious means regarding the nature and condition of the defects. In turn, Contractor
must immediately dispatch necessary forces to correct the defect or the emergency
condition in accordance with Agreement Documents.
4.9.13
The time periods referenced in this Section apply only to Contractor’s obligation to
correct nonconforming Work and is not intended to constitute a period of limitations for any
other rights or remedies that City may have regarding Contractor’s other obligations under
the Agreement Documents.
4.9.14
Without limiting the foregoing or anything in these General Conditions or the Agreement
to the contrary, Contractor must obtain and provide to City all warranties for any portion
of the Project offered by the manufacturer, installer or provider thereof. City and the user
of the facility will have the right to the full value and benefit of all such warranties.
Contractor must ensure all such warranties are fully transferrable to facilitate the full value
of this Section.
4.9.15
Contractor’s warranty excludes damages or defects caused by abuse, alterations to the Work
not executed by or through Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper
operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage.
4.9.16
In the event of any noncompliance with this entire Section 4, City may require Contractor to
stop or suspend the Work in whole or in part.
SECTION 5 - CITY RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
CITY PROJECT MANAGER AND INSPECTORS
5.1.1
Project Manager is responsible for providing City-supplied information and approvals in a
timely manner to assist Contractor to fulfill its obligations under the Agreement Documents.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-28 of 75
5.1.2
Project Manager will also provide Contractor with prompt notice when it observes any
failure on the part of Contractor to fulfill its contractual obligations, including any default
or defect in the Project or non-conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
5.1.3
City may utilize Field Inspectors to assist Project Manager during construction in
observing performance of Contractor. City’s use of Inspectors is for the purpose of assisting
Project Manager.
5.1.4
The Inspectors are authorized to inspect all Work and materials furnished. Such inspections
may extend to all or part of the Work and to preparation, fabrication or manufacture of the
materials to be used. The Inspectors have the authority to issue instructions contrary to
the Construction Documents if approved and coordinated with the directions of Project
Manager.
5.1.5
The Inspectors have the authority to reject work or materials until any questions at issue can
be decided by Project Manager.
5.1.6
The use of Inspectors by City will not make City responsible for or give City control
over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures or for safety
precautions or programs or responsibility for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in
accordance with Agreement Documents. The Inspectors are not authorized to direct any of
Contractor’s activities, employees or Subcontractors.
5.2
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL SERVICES
City may contract separately with one or more Design Professionals to provide
construction administration of the Project. The Design Professional’s Agreement, as well as
other firms hired by City may be furnished to Contractor. Contractor does not have the right
to limit or restrict or reject any Agreement modifications that are mutually acceptable to City
and Design Professional.
5.3
CIT Y ’S SEP AR AT E CONT R ACT ORS
City is responsible for all work performed on the Project or at the Site by separate
contractors retained by City. City will contractually require its separate contractors to
reasonably cooperate with, and reasonably coordinate their activities so as not to interfere
with Contractor in order to enable Contractor to timely complete the Work consistent with
the Agreement Documents. Contractor must immediately notify the Project manager,
and address the matter in the next monthly status report, if any activities of such separate
contractors are expected to interfere, or are interfering, with Contractor and such
interference will or could result in any delay in Contractor’s performance of the Work.
5.4
PERMIT REVIEW AND INSPECTIONS
5.4.1
If requested by Contractor, Project Manager will provide assistance and guidance in
obtaining necessary reviews, permits and inspections.
5.4.2
The regulating agencies of City, such as Development and Sustainability, Fire and
Planning Departments, enforce legal requirements. The enforcement activities of City are
independent and separate from this Agreement.
5.5
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO THE CONTRACTOR.
Contractor will be provided up to five copies of the Agreement Documents as are
reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished,
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-29 of 75
upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
SECTION 6 - AGREEMENT TIME
6.1
AGREEMENT TIME
6.1.1
The Agreement Time will start with the Notice to Proceed (“NTP”) and end with Final
Acceptance.
6.1.2
Beginning on the date of the NTP, Contractor must begin to fulfill Contractor’s obligations
under the Agreement. Contractor’s obligations include providing City and other
agencies with any submittals required by the Project Specific Special Provisions, including
but not limited to, an approved Project Schedule, Traffic Control Plans, and a Stormwater
Pollution Prevention Plan. Contractor must submit all such required submittals before
any physical construction work commences on the Site. NTP does not authorize
construction work until all a greement insurance, bonds, and schedules are submitted to
and accepted by the City.
6.1.3
The Agreement Time will be as set forth in the Project Schedule. Contractor agrees that
it will commence performance of the Work and complete the Project through both
Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance within the Agreement Time.
6.1.4
Time is of the essence of this Agreement, for the Project, for the Work, and for each phase
and designated Milestone thereof.
6.1.5
Failure of Contractor to perform any covenant or condition contained in the Agreement
Documents within the time periods specified herein, will constitute a material breach of this
Agreement entitling City to terminate the Agreement unless Contractor applies for and
receives an extension of time, in accordance with the procedures set forth in the Agreement
Documents.
6.1.6
Failure of City to insist upon the performance of any covenant or condition within the time
periods specified herein, will not constitute a waiver of Contractor’s duty to perform every
other covenant or condition within the designated periods, unless a specific waiver is
granted in writing for each such covenant or condition.
6.1.7
City’s agreement to waive a specific time provision or to extend the time for performance
will not constitute a waiver of any other time provisions contained in the Agreement
Documents. Failure of Contractor to complete performance promptly within the additional
time authorized in the waiver or extension of time agreement constitutes a material breach
of this Agreement entitling City to all the remedies set forth herein or provided by law.
6.2
PROJECT SCHEDULE
6.2.1
The Project Schedule must be in Microsoft Project standard file format, must be updated and
maintained throughout the Agreement Time, and must contain the following:
6.2.1.1
Detailed representation of all activities for the project, both on-site construction and major
procurement. All significant activities together with the resource loading requirements for
each and all items appearing on the schedule of values or bid schedule for progress
payments must be shown on the Project Schedule or in attached transmittal letter as
described in Section 6.2.8.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-30 of 75
6.2.1.2
Dependencies between activities must be indicated so that it may establish as to the effect
the progress of any one activity would have on other activities and on the Schedule.
6.2.1.3
Activities for submission, review, and approval of all required submittals.
6.2.1.4
An amount of time will be established prior to the final completion date for “punch list and
cleanup”. No other activities will be scheduled during this period. Punch list and cleanup
must be shown on the Project Schedule and must be entirely completed prior to the
expiration of the Agreement Time.
6.2.2
Within 10 Days of receipt of City’s comments, Contractor must make all required
corrections, adjustments, and additions to complete the Project Schedule and resubmit to
City for review. City’s review of and response to the Project Schedule is for the purpose of:
(1) City planning and staffing for the Project as may be required from time to time; (2)
ensuring Contractor’s general conformance with the scheduling requirements of the
Agreement Documents and completion of the Project within the Agreement Time; and (3)
monitoring and evaluating the construction status for purposes of approving monthly
progress payments. Acceptance of a submitted schedule by City should in no way be
construed as an affirmation or admission that the schedule is reasonable or workable by
Contractor. The responsibility for completing the Work on the Project within the
Agreement Time remains the obligation of Contractor. City’s review does not relieve
Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the Agreement Documents or
be construed as relieving Contractor of its complete and exclusive control over the
means, methods, sequences and techniques for executing the work.
6.2.3
The Project Schedule must show milestones, including milestones for City-furnished
information, and must include activities for City-furnished material and construction by
other contractors when those activities are interrelated with Contractor activities.
6.2.4
The Project Schedule must be revised as required by conditions and progress of the Work,
but such revisions do not relieve Contractor of its obligations to complete the Work
within the Agreement Time, as adjusted in accordance with the Agreement Documents.
No modification to the Agreement Documents or the Agreement Time will be effective
unless approved in advance by City.
6.2.5
For all items of materials and equipment that are critical or may require long lead times to
acquire, the Project Schedule must show dates for submission, review and approval of
submittals, ordering, and delivery.
6.2.6
An updated Project Schedule must be submitted monthly to City as part of the Payment
Request. The monthly submittal must include one full size plot of the entire schedule and
one electronic copy containing the schedule in Microsoft Project standard file format. In
addition, Contractor must, upon request by City, provide a copy of all submitted schedule
data in electronic
format which must be clearly labeled with the Project description,
scheduling program name and version number, and schedule print/data date.
6.2.7
Contractor must provide City with a monthly status report with each Project Schedule
detailing the progress of the Work, including: (i) if the Work is proceeding according to
schedule, (ii) any discrepancies, conflicts, or ambiguities found to exist in the Agreement
Documents that require resolution, and (iii) other information detailing items that require
resolution so as not to jeopardize the ability to complete the Work in the Agreement Time.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-31 of 75
6.2.8
With each Project Schedule submittal, Contractor must include a transmittal letter
including the following:
a. Description of problem tasks, referenced to field instructions or requests
for information (RFI’s), as appropriate.
b. Current and anticipated delays including:
(i)
Cause of the delay.
(ii)
Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay.
(iii)
Known or potential impacts and their delay on other activities,
milestones, and their impact on the Substantial Completion and
Final Acceptance dates.
(iv)
Changes in construction sequence.
c. Pending items and status thereof including but not limited to:
(i) Time Extension requests;
(ii)
Substantial Completion date status;
(iii)
Final Acceptance date status.
d. If ahead of schedule, the number of calendar Days ahead.
e. If behind schedule, the number of calendar Days behind.
f.
Other Project or scheduling concerns.
6.2.9
Critical Path Method (CPM).
6.2.9.1
Unless otherwise specified in the Agreement, the Project Schedule must include a Critical
Path
Method (CPM) diagram schedule showing the sequence of activities, the
interdependence of each activity and identifies the Critical Path.
6.2.9.2
The CPM diagram schedule must be in calendar Days and indicate duration, earliest and
latest start and finish dates for all activities, and total Float Times for all activities except
critical activities. The CPM diagram must be presented in a time scaled graphical format for
the Project as a whole.
6.2.9.3
The CPM diagram schedule must indicate all relationships between activities.
6.2.9.4
The activities making the Project Schedule must contain sufficient detail to assure that
adequate planning has been done for proper execution of the Work and such that it provides
an appropriate basis for monitoring and evaluation the progress of the Work. Individual
activities must not exceed 30 Days in length, in most cases.
6.2.9.5
The CPM diagram schedule must be based upon activities, which coincide with the Schedule
of Values.
6.2.9.6
The CPM diagram schedule must show all submittals associated with each work activity and
the review time for each submittal.
6.2.10
Float Time.
6.2.10.1
The total Float Time within the overall schedule is for the exclusive use of City, but City
may approve Contractor’s use of Float as needed to meet Agreement Milestones and
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-32 of 75
the Project completion date.
6.2.10.2
Contractor will not be allowed to sequence, hide, or reallocate Float Time through
such strategies, as extending activity duration estimates to consume available Float, using
preferential logic, or using extensive crew/resource sequencing, tec. No time extensions
will be granted nor delay damages paid until a delay occurs which extends the Work beyond
the Agreement Time.
6.2.11
City-Caused Delays. City-caused delays on the Project, if any, may be offset by City-caused
time savings (i.e., Critical Path submittals returned in less time than allowed by the
Agreement, approval of substitution requests and credit changes which result in savings of
time to Contractor, etc.) In such an event, Contractor will not be entitled to receive a time
extension or delay damages until all City-caused time savings are exceeded and the
Agreement Time is also exceeded.
6.2.12
Rain-Related Delays. Contractor is required, in preparing the Project Schedule to take into
account all relevant weather conditions, including normal rainfall and distribution. No
additional compensation will be given for any rain-related delays or impacts on the Work
or the Project Schedule. No time extension will be granted in the Project Schedule unless
the rainfall during the construction of Work is unusually severe, was not reasonably
anticipated, and the total rainfall was significantly in excess of the normal rainfall for the
Project Site location. Normal rainfall for the Project will be determined from the 10-year
average rainfall for the Site as measured by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration or comparable source of reliable information for rainfall in Chandler,
Arizona. In addition, the excessive rainfall must have actually impacted Work activities on
the Critical Path and caused delay beyond any remaining Float at the time of the rain- caused
delay. The burden of documenting normal rainfall, the excessive rainfall and the impact on
Critical Path activities is on Contractor. All other provisions in the Agreement Documents
relating to claims, including without limitation notice requirements, apply to any claim by
Contractor for a rain delay.
6.2.13
City’s “Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages,” Appendix 1 to these
General Conditions, will apply to all claims of delay and delay damages.
6.2.14
Force Majeure. If Contractor is delayed or prevented from the performance of any Work
required under this Agreement by reason of acts of God or other causes beyond the control
and without fault of Contractor (financial inability excepted), performance of that Work will
be excused, but only for the period of the delay. The time for performance of the Work will
be extended for a period equivalent to the period of delay. In addition, the parties agree if
Contractor’s delayed or suspended performance directly arises out of or directly results
from the COVID-19 pandemic, Contractor’s delayed or suspended performance may be
excused as set forth in this clause. Provided, however; Contractor must give the City written
notice within 30 days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to COVID-19 pandemic
related delayed or suspended performance. For COVID-19 pandemic related delay or
suspended performance, the parties must agree in writing to the length of the excused
delay or suspended performance. Further, Contractor must obtain the City’s written
approval to use any allowance established as part of the project for delays and costs related
to the COVID-19 pandemic.
6.3
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
6.3.1
When Contractor considers that the Work, phase or a portion thereof, which City agrees in
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-33 of 75
writing to accept separately, is substantially complete, City will prepare and submit to
Contractor a comprehensive Punch List of items to be completed or corrected prior to Final
Acceptance and Final Payment. Failure to include an item on such Punch List does not alter
the responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Agreement
Documents.
6.3.2
Upon receipt of Contractor’s Punch List, Project Manager will make an inspection to
determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.
Project Manager may, at Project Manager’s sole option, be assisted in such inspection by
the Design Professional for the Project. If the inspection by the Project Manager discloses
any item, whether or not included on Contractor’s Punch List, which is not sufficiently
completed in accordance with the Agreement Documents so that City can occupy or utilize
the Work, phase or designated portion thereof for its intended use, Contractor must,
before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such
item upon notification by Project Manager. In such case, Contractor must then submit a
request for another inspection by Project Manager to determine Substantial Completion.
6.3.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
6.3.3.1
The Project Manager will not issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion unless and until
the Work (or separable units or Phases as provided in the Agreement Documents) is
essentially and satisfactorily complete in accordance with the Agreement Documents, such
that the Project is ready for use by City for its intended purpose, opening to the general
public, full occupancy or use by City (including, without limitation, all separate units, or
rooms, facilities, access, income-generating areas, and all areas serving the general public,
as applicable, must be ready for full-operation
without material inconvenience or
discomfort), including, to the extent applicable to the Work, the following: all materials,
equipment, systems, controls, features, facilities, accessories and similar elements are
installed in the proper manner and in operating condition, inspected and approved;
surfaces have been painted; masonry and concrete cleaned with any sealer or other finish
applied; utilities and systems connected and functioning; site work complete; permanent
heating,
ventilation, air condition, vertical transportation and other systems properly
operating with proper controls; lighting and electrical systems installed, operable and
controlled; paving completed, signage installed, and other Work as applicable, has
been performed to a similar state of essential and satisfactory completion. A minor
amount of Work, as determined by and at the discretion of the Project Manager, such
as installation of minor accessories or items, a minor amount of painting, minor
replacement of defective work, minor adjustment of controls or sound
systems, or
completion or correction of minor exterior work that cannot be completed as a result of
weather conditions, will not delay determination of Substantial Completion. If prior
written approval is obtained from City for purposes of Substantial Completion, specified
areas of the entire Work or Project may be individually certified as Substantially
Complete. In no event will Substantial Completion be deemed to have occurred unless
and until: (i) a temporary certificate of occupancy has been issued by the appropriate
Governmental Authorities (as applicable) and (ii) all terms and Work required under this
Agreement have been fulfilled by Contractor and same will have also been approved and
accepted by City, subject only to the Punch List items.
6.3.3.2
If requested by City, Contractor must complete and turn-over to City the Project on a phased
basis. Each phase will have a separate inspection by the Project Manager, a Punch List
generated, and then an inspection by City with final approval and acceptance only after the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-34 of 75
Project Manager’s Punch List.
6.4
PARTIAL UTILIZATION
6.4.1
City at City’s option may use and occupy any substantially completed parts of the Work
which has specifically been identified in the Agreement Documents, or which City, the
Design Professional and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable
part of the Work that can be used by City for its intended purpose, without significant
interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, provided,
however, if the portion of the Work to be used or occupied has not been found to be
substantially complete, City must do so in accordance with Section 6.3 prior to such
occupancy.
6.4.2
In lieu of the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion as to part of the Work, City
may take over operation of a facility constituting part of the Work whether or not it is
substantially complete if such facility is functionally and separately usable; provided that
prior to any such takeover, City and Contractor agree in writing as to the division of
responsibilities between City and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance,
correction period, heat, utilities and insurance with respect to such facility.
6.4.3
Substantial Completion of or City's beneficial occupancy of a part of the Project will not alter
the fact that the one-year warranty for the whole Project starts at the date of Final
Completion of the whole Project.
6.5
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
6.5.1
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, Final Acceptance must be obtained
by no later than 30 Days (60 Days for federally funded agreements) after the date of Substantial
Completion. Failure to timely obtain Final Acceptance will be a material breach of the
Agreement.
6.5.2
Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, City
and Contractor will jointly inspect to verify that the remaining items of Work have been
completed. There will be no partial acceptance. Final Acceptance will not occur until all
items of Work, including Punch List Items, have been completed to City’s satisfaction as
reflected in the written Final Acceptance.
6.5.3
Final Payment will not be due, owing, or paid by City until Final Acceptance is issued.
6.5.4
Landscape Establishment Period. Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, the
Landscape Establishment Period will begin on the date of Final Acceptance of the Project and
will run 90 Calendar Days thereafter. Landscape Establishment Period requirements are
detailed in General Conditions Appendices, attached herein.
6.6
CONTINUATION OF WORK
6.6.1
Permitting Contractor to continue and finish the Work or any part of it after the time fixed
for its completion (whether milestone, phase, Substantial Completion or Final Acceptance)
or after the date to which the time fixed for any completion may have been extended, does
not operate as a waiver by City of any rights under the Agreement Documents, law or equity.
6.6.2
Furthermore, the timely completion of the Work being of the utmost importance under
this Agreement, notwithstanding the existence of one or more disputes between the parties
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-35 of 75
concerning the scope of the Work, the Project Schedule, Agreement Time, payments or any
other matter, and further notwithstanding a party’s invocation of the Dispute Resolution
provisions specified in Appendix 6 of these General Conditions, unless City suspends
the Agreement or Contractor’s performance pursuant to Section 10 of these General
Conditions, Contractor will continue to prosecute the Work, including any Change Order
work or Extra Work Orders, in a diligent and timely manner and not stop, slow down or
impede by action or inaction the progress of the Work, including commencing performance
of and thereafter completing any additional work called out in any Change Order or Extra
Work Order issued by Project Manager with the approval of City, so long as City makes
payment to Contractor in accordance with Section 8 of these General Conditions.
SECTION 7 - AGREEMENT PRICE
7.1
UNIT PRICE AGREEMENTS
7.1.1
The Agreement Price for all Unit Price Agreements will be the amount set forth in the
Agreement or Change Order multiplied by the verified quantity provided.
7.1.2
Measurements of quantities to determine the total Agreement Price must be in accordance
with MAG Specification §§ 109.1 and 109.2.
7.1.3
The Unit Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 below.
7.2
CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.1
Unit Price Change Orders. The Change Order Price for all Unit Price Change Orders will be
the amount set forth in the Change Order multiplied by the verified quantity provided.
7.2.2
Measurements of quantities to determine the total Change Order Price must be in
accordance with MAG Specifications §§ 109.1 and 109.2.
7.2.3
The Unit Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 below.
7.2.4
MAG Specification § 109.4.1 is modified as follows: Before § 109.4.1, the following is added:
Any deduction or increase in the Agreement Price must be supported by a signed,
written Change Order fully executed by City, and supported by such backup as the Project
Manager may require.
7.3
SALES TAX
Contractor is required to pay all applicable sales tax in accordance with the law of the state of
Arizona and this cost must be included in all Agreement Prices. When equipment, materials
or supplies generally taxable to Contractor are eligible for a tax exemption due to the nature
of the Project, Contractor must assist City in applying for and obtaining such tax credits and
exemptions which will be paid or credited to City.
SECTION 8 - PAYMENT
8.1
PAYMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
8.1.1
Payment for the Work will be made in accordance with MAG Standard Specification § 109
as amended below.
8.1.2
Contractor must submit to City for review a completed Contractor Payment Request signed
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-36 of 75
by Contractor, covering the Work completed as of the date of the Request and accompanied
by such supporting documentation as is required by the Agreement Documents and also
as City may reasonably require. A Contractor Payment Request will not be considered
complete unless it is accompanied by an updated Project Schedule and a certification that
the on-site, red lined, as built Drawings are up to date. If payment is requested on the basis
of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably,
securely stored at the Site or at another location (such as a bonded warehouse) agreed to
in writing, the Contractor Payment Request must also be accompanied by such data,
satisfactory to City, as will establish City's title to the material and equipment and protect
City's interest therein, including applicable insurance. Each subsequent Contractor Payment
Request must include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments
received on account of the Work have been applied to discharge in full all of Contractor's
obligations reflected in prior Contractor Payment Requests.
8.1.3
Except for Work performed under a JOC Agreement, the Contracting Agency will retain 10
percent of all estimates as a guarantee for complete performance of the Agreement in
accordance with Arizona Revised Statutes Section 34-221 or 34-607. The Contractor may
elect to deposit securities in lieu of retention in accordance with Arizona Revised Statutes
Section 34-221, Paragraph C.5. or 34-607, Paragraph B.5.
8.1.4
The payment process functions as follows: Prior to the payment cycle date, Contractor must
send a draft Contractor Payment Request to Project Manager. The Project Team will review
the Request and agree upon any necessary adjustments. Contractor must certify the final
Request by signing and returning to Project Manager.
8.1.5
When construction of the Project is fifty percent (50%) completed, Contractor may
request payment of one-half of the retention pursuant to A.R.S. § 34-609(B)(3), subject to all
of City’s rights to withhold or offset payments, and other rights of City, under the Agreement.
8.1.6
City reserves the right under A.R.S. § 34-609(B)(3) to reinstate the ten percent (10%) retention
if City determines that satisfactory progress is not being made.
8.1.7
Contractor’s Warranty of Title.
8.1.7.1
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered
by any Contractor Payment Request, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass
to City at the time of payment, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and
encumbrances, provided that this will not preclude the Contractor from installing metering
devices or other equipment of utility companies or municipalities, the title of which is
commonly retained by the utility company or municipality.
8.1.7.2
No materials, supplies, or equipment for the Work under this Agreement will be purchased
subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by
which an interest therein, or any part thereof, is retained by the seller or supplier.
8.1.7.3
Nothing contained in this Section will defeat or impair the right of such persons furnishing
materials or labor under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any right
under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor in the hands of
the City. The provisions of this Section must be inserted in all subcontracts and material
agreements, and notices of its provision must be given to all persons furnishing materials
for the Work when no formal agreement is entered into for such materials.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-37 of 75
8.2
PAYMENT UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
8.2.1
No payment will be made upon Substantial Completion, except for a regularly-scheduled
monthly progress payment, as allowed by Section 8.2.2.
8.2.2
No further payments will be made to Contractor until Final Acceptance.
8.3
FINAL PAYMENT
8.3.1
Subject to all of City’s rights to withhold or offset payment, and other rights under the
Agreement, Final Payment including remaining retainage will be paid only after:
a. Work has been fully completed (including completion of all incorrect or
incomplete work items) and the written Final Acceptance has been issued by
City;
b. Necessary operating manuals, any excess materials and supplies necessary
for matching materials and supplies incorporated into the Work,
acceptable sewer video results (if applicable), and complete “as-built”
Drawings (including the Building Information Model, if required by the
Agreement Documents) have been delivered to City, as specified in this
Section 8.3;
c. Full and unconditional lien waivers and releases by Contractor and any
person performing labor or supplying material, machinery, fixtures, or tools
for the Work have been delivered to Contractor;
d. All conditions and requirements imposed by City or any financing entity
for the corresponding disbursement have been met; and
e. Contractor delivers to City a Contractor Payment Request requesting Final
Payment.
8.3.2
Contractor must also submit a signed copy of Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding Settlement
of Claims, Appendix 3 to these General Conditions, and Certificate of Completion, Appendix 7
to these General Conditions, prior to Final Payment.
8.3.3
In addition, if required under the Project Specific Special Provisions, Contractor must
compile a complete equipment list and maintenance manual to be submitted to City
as a precondition to Final Payment. The list must include the following items for all
equipment supplied under the Plumbing, Electrical, Air Conditioning, Elevator, and other
Special Equipment Specifications:
a. Name, Model and Manufacturer.
b. Complete parts lists and Drawings.
c. Local source of supply for replacement parts along with suppliers’ telephone
numbers.
d. Local service organizations serving the equipment and their telephone
numbers.
e. All tags, inspection slips, instruction packages, etc., removed from
equipment must be properly identified as to pieces of equipment from
which they were taken.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-38 of 75
8.3.4
Contractor must also deliver to City, prior to Final Payment, one (1) digital (in the format
specified by City), and if requested by City, one (1) hard copy, of any applicable
Maintenance manuals. Each manual must include all manufacturer’s operation and
maintenance instructions and “as-built” Drawings with the list herein specified. It must also
include all other diagrams and instructions necessary to properly operate and maintain the
equipment, the name, address and telephone number of Contractor and all Subcontractors
involved.
8.4
CIT Y ’S RIGHT TO WITHHOLD PAYMENT
City may withhold payment to such extent as may be necessary in City’s opinion to protect
City from loss for which Contractor is responsible, including, without limitation, if any of
the following conditions exist:
a. Defective Work not remedied;
b. Third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of
such claims unless security acceptable to City is provided by Contractor;
c. Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for
labor, materials or equipment;
d. Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid
balance of the Agreement Price;
e. Damage to City or another Contractor;
f.
Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the
Agreement Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to
cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
g. Failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Agreement Documents;
or
h. Contractor is in default of any of its other obligations under the Agreement
Documents.
8.5
JOINT/DIRECT CHECKS
To promote the timely completion and progress of the Work or when appropriate and
necessary, payments to Contractor may be made jointly to Contractor and its employees,
agents, Subcontractors and suppliers, or any of them. For federally funded agreements,
see federal provisions for additional requirements for the joint check process.
8.6
PAYMENT NOT A WAIVER
No payment (nor use or occupancy of the Project by City) will be deemed acceptance or
approval of the Work or as a waiver of any claims, rights, or remedies of City.
8.7
LIENS AND BOND CLAIMS
Contractor must make all payments, in the time required, of all labor and materials
furnished to Contractor in the course of the Work and must promptly furnish evidence of
such payments as City may require. Contractor must pay when due all claims arising out of
performance of the Work covered by this Agreement for which a lien may be filed either
against the real estate or leasehold interest of City, or against payments due from City to
Contractor, or for which a claim may be made against any payment or performance bond
or both. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees that no liens or other
claims in the nature of a lien against the real estate, leasehold, or other interest of City,
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-39 of 75
against payment due from City to Contractor, or against any payment or performance
bond, must be filed or made in connection with the Work by any party who has supplied
professional services, labor, materials, machinery, fixtures, tools, or equipment used in or
in connection with the performance of this Agreement, and Contractor agrees to remove or
to cause to be removed any such liens or claims in the nature of a lien or bond claim within
10 Days upon receiving notice or obtaining actual knowledge of the existence of such liens
or claim. In addition, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless City
from and against any and all such liens and claims. This paragraph does not apply to claims
and liens of Contractor due to non-payment for work performed.
8.8
FIN AN CI AL R ECORDKE EPI NG AND C IT Y ’S AUD I T RIGHT
8.8.1
Records for all Agreements between City and Contractor must, upon reasonable notice, be
open to inspection and subject to audit, scanning, and reproduction during normal
business working hours. Such audits may be performed by any City’s representative or any
outside representative engaged by City for the purpose of examining such records. City or
its designee may conduct such audits or inspections throughout the term of this Agreement
and for a period of five years after Final Payment or longer if required by law. City’s
representatives may (without limitation) conduct verifications such as counting employees
at the Site, witnessing the distribution of payroll, verifying information and amounts through
interviews and written confirmations with Contractor employees, field and agency labor,
Subcontractors, and vendors.
8.8.2
Contractor’s “records” must include any and all information, materials and data of every kind
and
character, including without limitation, records, books, papers, documents,
subscriptions, recordings, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments,
arrangements, notes daily diaries, superintendent reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and
memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that
may in City’s judgment have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or
obligations under or covered by any Agreement Document. Such records must include (hard
copy, as well as computer readable data if it can be made available), written policies and
procedures; time sheets; payroll registers; payroll records; cancelled payroll checks;
subcontract files (including proposals of successful and unsuccessful bidders, bid recaps,
negotiation notes, etc.); original bid estimates; estimating work sheets; correspondence;
Change Order files (including documentation covering negotiated settlements); back-
charge logs and supporting documentation; invoices and related payment documentation;
general ledger, information detailing cash and trade discounts earned, insurance rebates
and dividends; and any other Contractor records which may have a bearing on matters of
interest to City or the Project in connection with Contractor’s dealings with City or the
Project (all foregoing
hereinafter referred to as “records”) to the extent necessary to
adequately permit evaluation and verification of any or all of the following:
a. Compliance with Agreement requirements for deliverables;
b. Compliance with approved Plans and Specifications;
c. Compliance with § 14.9 below;
d. Compliance with Agreement provisions regarding the pricing of Change
Orders;
e. Accuracy of Contractor representations regarding the pricing of invoices; or
f.
Accuracy of Contractor representations related to claims submitted by
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-40 of 75
Contractor or any of their employees.
8.8.3
Contractor must require all payees (examples of payees include Subcontractors, Suppliers,
Insurance Carriers, etc.) to comply with the provisions of this Section by including the
requirements hereof in a written agreement between Contractor and payee. Contractor will
ensure that all payees (including those entering into lump sum agreements) have the same
right to audit provisions contained in this Agreement included in their agreements with
Contractor.
8.8.4
City’s authorized representative(s) (including, without limitation, Project Manager) must have
reasonable access to Contractor’s facilities, must be allowed to interview all current or former
employees to discuss matters pertinent to the performance of this Agreement and must be
provided adequate and appropriate work space, in order to conduct audits in compliance
with this Section.
8.8.5
If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this Section, discloses overpricing
or overcharges to City (of any nature) by Contractor or Contractor’s Subcontractors in excess
of $100,000 in addition to making adjustments for the overcharges, the reasonable actual
cost of City’s audit must be reimbursed to City by Contractor. Any adjustments or payments
which must be made as a result of any such audit or inspection of Contractor’s invoices or
records must be made within a reasonable amount of time (not to exceed 90 Days) from
presentation of City’s findings to Contractor.
8.8.6
In addition to the normal paperwork documentation Contractor typically furnishes to City,
Contractor agrees to furnish, upon written request from City, any of the documentation
necessary for City to exercise its audit rights under this Section 8.8 in computer readable file
formats (Word, Excel, or .pdf), as City may designate.
8.8.7
City, its authorized representative, and the appropriate agency, reserve the right to
audit Contractor’s records in compliance with local, state or federal policies, statutes
or at City’s discretion, within three (3) years of Final Acceptance of the Work.
SECTION 9 - CHANGES TO THE AGREEMENT
9.1
FIELD ORDERS
City may authorize minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the
Agreement Price or the Agreement Times, which are consistent with the overall intent of
the Agreement Documents. These may be accomplished by a written Field Order on the
standard form approved and executed by City. Such Field Orders must be binding and
Contractor must perform the change promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order
justifies an increase in the Agreement Price or Agreement Time, Contractor may make a
claim therefor as provided in Section 7.2.
9.2
EXTRA WORK/CHANGES IN THE WORK
9.2.1
City reserves the right to make such changes in the Plans and Specifications for the Work,
as it may deem appropriate and any such change as set forth in a written Change Order
must be deemed a part of this Agreement as if originally incorporated herein.
9.2.2
In the event City and Contractor cannot agree on the terms of a Change Order, or
when circumstances otherwise require, the Project Manager has the authority to direct the
Contractor to perform extra work, if the work in question is an item not provided for in the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-41 of 75
Agreement as awarded. The Project Manager will have the authority to determine, based
upon factual evidence presented by the Contractor, whether the work in question is an
item not provided for in the Agreement as awarded. If the Project Manager directs the
Contractor to perform extra work, the Project Manager’s instructions will include a price
that the Contractor cannot exceed in charging the City for the extra work. Upon receipt of
the Project Manager’s directions to perform extra work, the Contractor must promptly
proceed with the extra work and document the actual cost thereof. Contractor’s right to
payment for extra work will be determined under Subsection 9.2.4 below. The Contractor is
responsible to manage the extra work to ensure that the price limits set by the Project
Manager are not exceeded. Contractor must perform the extra work and submit
documentation for the actual cost of the extra work to the City. A Change Order will be
issued to cover this work.
9.2.3
Contractor will not be entitled to payment for extra work unless a written Change Order, in
form and content prescribed by City, has been executed by City. On all requests for Change
Orders, Contractor must specify the increased or decreased costs and whether it
believes any extensions of time will be necessary to complete its Work as modified by the
Change Order. If extra work is performed under Subsection 9.2.2 above, a corresponding
Change Order will be prepared, approved and processed by City before payment can be
made to Contractor.
9.2.4
In general, pricing for Change Orders will include the same mark-up percentages that were
in effect when the Agreement was awarded. The cost or credit to the City resulting from a
change in the Work is subject to Appendix 1 (Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and
Damages) and will be determined, based on the type of pricing for the Agreement involved,
as follows:
a. By mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized in a form acceptable
to City;
b. By unit prices stated in the Agreement Documents;
c. When the City determines that a Unit Price Book Job Order associated with
a Job Order Agreement requires a Change Order, by using the same Total
Cost Data and CCI that are in effect when the Change Order is anticipated to
be issued; or
d. By actual cost and a percentage fee covering overhead and profit, as follows:
(i)
Contractor will perform the extra work and be compensated for actual
cost of labor, materials and equipment.
(ii)
Contractor will have the right to add the fee percentage applicable
to the Work under the Agreement, or if no such fee has been agreed
to by the parties, not more than five percent (5%) to the
Subcontractor’s prices for authorized extra work performed solely
by Subcontractors. Such percentage will include all of Contractor’s
charges for overhead, profit, administration and supervision.
(iii)
Contractor or Subcontractor will have the right to add the fee
percentage applicable to Work under the Agreement for self-
performed extra work, or if no such fee has been agreed to by the
parties, Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s maximum total allowable
additions for overhead, profit, administration and supervision will
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-42 of 75
not exceed ten percent (10%) of actual verifiable labor, materials
and equipment for such self- performed extra work.
9.2.5
Any agreement which modifies the terms of the Agreement (including Change Orders)
will be approved in writing by the Project Manager. Once properly executed by both
parties, these modifications to the Agreement will have the same effect as if they had been
included in the original Agreement.
9.3
ACCURACY OF CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION
9.3.1
Subject to Sections 9.3.2 through 9.3.4, signature by the contracting parties constitutes full
accord and satisfaction between City and Contractor for all costs, damages, and expenses
of whatever kind of nature, including delay, impact or acceleration damages, which may be
occasioned by a Change Order of other modification of the Agreement agreed to in writing.
9.3.2
Accurate Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees that it is responsible for
submitting accurate cost and pricing data to City to support its Fixed Price, Unit Price, or
Cost Plus Change Order Proposals or other Agreement Price adjustments under the
Agreement. Contractor further agrees to submit Change Order proposals with cost and
pricing data which is accurate, complete, current, and in accordance with the terms of
the Agreement with respect to pricing of change orders. Contractor agrees that any “buy-
out savings” on Change Orders will accrue 100% to Owner. “Buy-out savings” are defined
as any savings negotiated by the Contractor with a Subcontractor or a Material Supplier
after receiving approval of a Change Order amount that was designated to be paid to a
specific Subcontractor or Supplier for the Approved Change Order work.
9.3.3
Right to Verify Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees that City, through
its designated representative, will have the right to examine, copy, and scan the records
of the Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor’s records (during the Agreement
period and up to three years after final payment is made on the Agreement) to verify
the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price all Change Order
proposals or claims. Contractor agrees that if City determines the cost and pricing data
submitted (whether approved or not) was inaccurate, incomplete, not current, or not in
compliance with the terms of the Agreement regarding pricing of Change Orders, an
appropriate Agreement Price adjustment will be made. Such post-approval Contact Price
adjustments will apply to all levels of contractors and Subcontractors and to all types of
Change Order proposals, specifically including Fixed Price, Unit Price, and Cost Plus Change
Orders.
9.3.4
Requirements for Detailed Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees to
provide a detailed breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost (i.e., base wage
rate of applicable classifications of workers, payroll taxes, and insurance and benefits
costs). This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden
related to Change Order work. It is intended that this information represent an accurate
estimate of the Contractor’s actual labor and labor burden cost components. Information
is not intended to establish fixed billing or Change Order pricing labor rates. However, at the
time Change Orders are priced, the submitted cost data for labor rates may be used to price
Change Order work. The accuracy of any such agreed upon labor rate cost components
used to price Change Orders will be subject to later audit. Approved Change Order
amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor cost
components if the agreed upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-43 of 75
9.4
EMERGENCIES
In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor will act, at its
discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any change in the Agreement Price
or Agreement Time resulting from emergency work will be determined as provided in this
Section.
9.5
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS
9.5.1
If Differing Site Conditions are encountered at the Project Site, then notice by the observing
party must be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed (to the extent
practicable) and in no event later than 14 Days after first observance of the conditions.
City will promptly investigate such conditions and, if City determines that Differing Site
Conditions exist and they materially cause an increase in the cost of, or time required for,
performance of any part of the Work, Contractor will be entitled to equitable adjustment
in the Agreement Price or Construction Schedule (and other time requirements), or both.
If it is determined by City that the conditions at the Project Site are not Differing Site
Conditions and no change is justified, then City will so notify Contractor in writing, stating the
reasons. Claims in opposition to such determination must be made within 14 Days after
City has given notice of its decision. If City and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment
in the Agreement Price or Construction Schedule (and other time requirements), the
adjustment may be submitted to dispute resolution as provided these General Conditions.
9.6
CHANGES IN LAWS, REGULATIONS, OR LEGAL REQUIREMENTS OR TAXES
In the event of a material change in applicable Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements, or
taxes subsequent to the date of the Agreement by the parties, Contractor may be entitled
to a Change Order, in City’s discretion, to the extent Contractor can document to the
satisfaction of City that such change significantly increases Contractor’s actual cost of
performance of the Work.
SECTION 10 -SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION
10.1
SUSPENSION
City may suspend the Agreement and Contractor’s performance in accordance with MAG
Specifications § 105.1 and 108.7.
10.2
TERMINATION BY THE CITY FOR CAUSE
10.2.1
MAG Specifications § 108.11 applies to the Agreement.
10.2.2
City may also terminate the Agreement if City determines, in its sole discretion that
Contractor has:
a. After prior written notice, refused or failed to supply enough properly skilled
workers or proper materials;
b. After prior written notice, failed to make payment to Subcontractors for
materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between
Contractor and the Subcontractors;
c.
After prior written notice, disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or
orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;
d. After prior written notice, repeatedly failed to comply with written directives
from City;
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-44 of 75
e. Is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent;
f.
Made a general assignment for the benefit of creditors;
g. Appointed a trustee or receiver for itself or any of its property;
h. Filed a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or to reorganize under
the bankruptcy or similar laws; or
i.
Otherwise breached a provision of the Agreement Documents or any other
Agreement between City and Contractor.
10.2.3
When any of the above reasons exist, City may terminate the Agreement, without prejudice
to any other rights or remedies of City, after giving Contractor and Contractors’ surety, if
any, 7 Days written notice of City’s intent to terminate the Agreement and Contractor’s
failure to cure any such reasons. Upon such termination, City may: (1) take possession of
the Site and of all materials thereon owned by Contractor; or (2) finish the Work by whatever
reasonable method City may deem expedient. When City terminates the Agreement for one
of the reasons state above, Contractor will not be entitled to receive further payment until
the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Agreement Price existing at the time of
such termination exceeds the costs and expenses of finishing the Work and any other
damages incurred by City, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such costs, expenses
and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor must pay the difference to City. This
obligation for payment will survive termination of the Agreement.
10.3
TERMINATION BY CITY FOR CONVENIENCE
City may also terminate the Agreement at any time for its convenience upon 7 Days written
notice to Contractor specifying the termination date. In the event of termination which is
not the fault, in whole or in part, of Contractor, City will pay to Contractor only such
compensation, including reimbursable expenses, due for Work properly performed on
the Project prior to the termination date. Upon any termination of the Agreement, no
further payments will be due from City to Contractor.
10.4
A.R.S. § 38-511
The Agreement is subject to, and may be terminated by City in accordance with, the
provisions of A.R.S. § 38-511.
SECTION 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
11.1.1
After Agreement award, the Contractor must furnish the City a certificate of insurance on a
standard insurance industry ACORD form. The ACORD form must be issued by an insurance
company authorized to transact business in the State of Arizona possessing a current A.M.
Best, Inc. rating of A-7, or better and legally authorized to do business in the State of Arizona
with policies and forms satisfactory to City. Provided, however, the A.M. Best rating
requirement may not be deemed to apply to required Worker’s Compensation coverage.
11.1.2
The Contractor and any of its Subcontractors must procure and maintain, until all of their
obligations have been discharged, including any warranty periods under this Agreement are
satisfied, the insurances set forth below.
11.1.3
The insurance requirements set forth below are minimum requirements for this Agreement
and in no way limit the indemnity covenants contained in this Agreement.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-45 of 75
11.1.4
The City in no way warrants that the minimum insurance limits contained in this Agreement
are sufficient to protect Contractor from liabilities that might arise out of the performance
of the Agreement services under this Agreement by Contractor, its agents, representatives,
employees, or Subcontractors and the Contractor is free to purchase any additional
insurance as may be determined necessary.
11.1.5
Failure to demand evidence of full compliance with the insurance requirements in this
Agreement or failure to identify any insurance deficiency will not relieve the Contractor
from, nor will it be considered a waiver of its obligation to maintain the required insurance
at all times during the performance of this Agreement.
11.1.6
Use of Subcontractors: If any Work is subcontracted in any way, the Contractor must
execute a written agreement with Subcontractor containing the same Indemnification
Clause and Insurance Requirements as the City requires of the Contractor in this
Agreement. The Contractor is responsible for executing the Agreement with the
Subcontractor and obtaining Certificates of Insurance and verifying the insurance
requirements.
11.2
MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE
11.2.1
The Contractor must provide coverage with limits of liability not less than those stated
below.
11.2.1.1
Commercial General Liability-Occurrence Form. Contractor must maintain “occurrence”
form Commercial General Liability insurance with a limit of not less than $2,000,000 for each
occurrence, $4,000,000 aggregate. Said insurance must also include coverage for products
and completed operations, independent contractors, personal injury and advertising injury.
If any Excess insurance is utilized to fulfill the requirements of this paragraph, the Excess
insurance must be “follow form” equal or broader in coverage scope than underlying
insurance.
11.2.1.2
Automobile Liability-Any Automobile or Owned, Hired and Non-Owned Vehicles. Contractor
must maintain Business/Automobile Liability insurance with a limit of $1,000,000 each
accident on Contractor owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles assigned to or used in the
performance under this Agreement. If any Excess or Umbrella insurance is utilized to fulfill
the requirements of this paragraph, the Excess or Umbrella insurance must be “follow
form” equal or broader in coverage scope than underlying insurance.
11.2.1.3
Workers Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance. Contractor must maintain
Workers Compensation insurance to cover obligations imposed by federal and state
statutes having jurisdiction of Contractor employees engaged in the performance of Work
under this Agreement and must also maintain Employers’ Liability insurance of not less than
$1,000,000 for each accident and $1,000,000 disease for each employee.
11.2.1.4
Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor bears all responsibility for loss
to all equipment or Work under construction. Unless waived in writing by the City the
Contractor will purchase and maintain in force Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance
on the entire Work until completed and accepted by the City. This insurance will be Special
Causes of Loss policy form, (minimally including perils of fire, flood, lightning, explosion,
windstorm and hail, smoke, aircraft and vehicles, riot and civil commotion, theft, vandalism,
malicious mischief, and collapse), completed value, replacement cost policy form equal to
the Agreement Price and all subsequent modifications. The Contractor’s Builders’
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-46 of 75
Risk/Installation Floater insurance must be primary and not contributory.
a. Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance must cover the entire Work
including reasonable compensation for architects and engineers’ services
and expenses and other “soft costs” made necessary by an insured loss.
Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance must provide coverage from the
time any covered property comes under the Contractor’s control and or
responsibility, and continue without interruption during course of
construction, renovation and or installation, including any time during which
any Project property or equipment is in transit, off Site, or while on Site for
future use or installation. Insured property must include, but not be limited
to, scaffolding, false work, and temporary buildings at the Site. This
insurance must also cover the cost of removing debris, including demolition
as may be legally required by operation of any law, ordinance, regulation or
code.
b. The Contractor must also purchase and maintain Boiler and Machinery
insurance with the same requirements as Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater
insurance cited above if the Work to be performed involves any exposures
or insurable property normally covered under a Boiler and Machinery
insurance policy or made necessary as required by law or testing
requirements in the performance of this Agreement. The Contractor will be
responsible for any and all deductibles under these policies and the
Contractor waives all rights of recovery and subrogation against the City
under the Contractor- Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance described
herein.
c. Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater Insurance must be maintained until
whichever of the following first occurs: (i) final payment has been made; or,
(ii) until no person or entity, other than the City, has an insurable interest in
the property required to be covered.
d. The Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance must be endorsed so that
the insurance will not be canceled or lapse because of any partial use or
occupancy by the City.
e. The Builders Risk/Installation Floater insurance must include as named
insureds, the City, the Contractor, and all tiers of Subcontractors and others
with an insurable interest in the Work who will be named as additional
insureds unless they are able to provide the same level of coverage with the
City and Contractor named as additional insureds. Certificates must contain
a provision that the insurance will not be canceled or materially altered
without at least 30 Days advance notice to the City. The City must also be
named as a Loss Payee under the Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater coverage.
f.
The Builders Risk/Installation Floater insurance must be written using the
Special Causes of Loss policy form, replacement cost basis.
g. All rights of subrogation under the Builders Risk/Installation Floater
insurance are, by this Agreement, waived against the City, its officers,
officials, agents and employees.
h. The Contractor is responsible for payment of all deductibles under the
Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance policy.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-47 of 75
11.2.1.5
Pollution Liability Insurance (Including Errors and Omissions). For Job Orders, Pollution
Liability Insurance is only required if applicable and determined on a project specific basis.
Contractor must maintain Pollution Liability Insurance with a limit of not less than
$5,000,000 per loss, $5,000,000 aggregate for losses caused by pollution conditions
including coverage for bodily injury, property damage, defense costs, clean-up costs, and
completed operations that arise from the operations of Contractor as described in this
Agreement.
a. The policy must provide for complete professional service coverage,
including coverage for pollution liability that is a result of a breach of
professional duties.
b. The policy must provide for protection again claims for third-party bodily
injury, property damage, or environmental damage caused for pollution
conditions resulting from general contracting activities for which Contractor
is legally liable.
c. The policy must provide for cleanup costs when mandated by governmental
entities, when required by law, or as a result of third-party claims.
d. Completed Operations Coverage must be kept in place for up to the statute
of repose.
e. The policy must be endorsed to include the following additional insured
language: “City, its elected officials, trustees, employees, agents, and
volunteers must be named as additional insureds with respect to liability
arising out of the activities performed by, or on behalf of Contractor”.
f.
If Work under this Agreement requires the transportation of any hazardous
material or regulated substances, Contractor must carry Auto Liability with a
CA 9948 endorsement or equivalent.
g. If Work under this Agreement requires the disposal of any hazardous
materials from the job site, Contractor must obtain a certificate of insurance
for Pollution Legal Liability from the disposal site operator with a limit of not
less than $5,000,000 per loss, $5,000,000 aggregate.
11.3
ADDITIONAL POLICY PROVISIONS REQUIRED
11.3.1
Self-Insured Retentions or Deductibles. Any self-insured retentions and deductibles must
be declared and approved by the City. If not approved, the City may require that the insurer
reduce or eliminate any deductible or self-insured retentions with respect to the City, its
officers, officials, agents, employees, and volunteers.
11.3.2
The Contractor’s insurance must contain broad form contractual liability coverage.
11.3.3
The Contractor's insurance coverage must be primary insurance with respect to the City, its
officers, officials, agents, and employees. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by
the City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees will be in excess of the coverage
provided by the Contractor and must not contribute to it.
11.3.4
The Contractor's insurance must apply separately to each insured against whom claim is
made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability.
11.3.5
Coverage provided by the Contractor must not be limited to the liability assumed under the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-48 of 75
indemnification provisions of this Agreement.
11.3.6
The policies must contain a severability of interest clause and waiver of subrogation against
the City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees, for losses arising from Work
performed by the Contractor for the City.
11.3.7
The Contractor, its successors and or assigns, are required to maintain Commercial General
Liability insurance as specified in this Agreement for a minimum period of 3 years following
completion and acceptance of the Work. The Contractor must submit a Certificate of
Insurance evidencing Commercial General Liability insurance during this 3 year period
containing all the Agreement insurance requirements, including naming the required
Additional Insureds set forth herein.
11.3.8
If a Certificate of Insurance is submitted as verification of coverage, the City will reasonably
rely upon the Certificate of Insurance as evidence of coverage but this acceptance and
reliance will not waive or alter in any way the insurance requirements or obligations of this
Agreement.
11.3.9
Insurance Cancellation During Agreement Term.
11.3.9.1
If any of the required policies expire during the life of this Agreement, the Contractor must
forward renewal or replacement Certificates to the City within 10 Days after the renewal
date containing all the required insurance provisions.
11.3.9.2
Each insurance policy required by the insurance provisions of this Agreement must provide
the required coverage and must not be suspended, voided or canceled except after 30 Days
prior written notice has been given to the City, except when cancellation is for non-payment
of premium, then 10 Days prior notice may be given. Such notice must be sent directly to
Chandler Law-Risk Management Department, Post Office Box 4008, Mailstop 628, Chandler,
Arizona 85225. If any insurance company refuses to provide the require notice, the
Contractor or its insurance broker must notify the City of any cancellation, suspension, non-
renewal of any insurance within 7 Days of receipt of insurers’ notification to that effect.
11.3.10
City as Additional Insured. The above-referenced policies are to contain, or be endorsed to
contain, the following provisions:
11.3.10.1
The Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability policies are to contain, or be
endorsed to contain, the following provisions: The City, its officers, officials, agents, and
employees are additional insureds with respect to liability arising out of activities performed
by, or on behalf of, the Contractor including the City's general supervision of the Contractor;
Products and Completed Operations of the Contractor; and automobiles owned, leased,
hired, or borrowed by the Contractor.
11.3.10.2
The City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees must be additional insureds to the full
limits of liability purchased by the Contractor even if those limits of liability are in excess of
those required by this Agreement.
11.4
BONDS AND OTHER PERFORMANCE SECURITY
11.4.1
After Agreement award, Contractor must provide a Performance Bond and a Payment
Bond, each in an amount equal to the full amount of the Agreement Price.
11.4.2
Each such bond must be executed by a surety company or companies holding a Certificate
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-49 of 75
of Authority to transact surety business in the State of Arizona, issued by the Director of the
Arizona Department of Insurance and must be named in the current list of "Companies
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable
Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of
Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. A copy of the Certificate of Authority must accompany
the bonds. The Certificate must have been issued or updated within two (2) years prior to
the execution of this Agreement. The bonds must be written or countersigned by an
authorized representative of the surety who is either a resident of the state of Arizona or
whose principal office is maintained in this state, as by law required.
11.4.3
The bonds must be made payable and be acceptable to City. The bond forms for the
performance and payment bonds must be in the forms required under A.R.S. § 34-221, et.
Seq., as in Appendices 4 and 5 of these General Conditions.
11.4.4
Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds
covering payment of obligations arising under the Agreement Documents, Contractor must
promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or must permit a copy to be made.
11.4.5
All bonds submitted for this Project must be provided by a company which has been rated AM
Best rating of A- or better for the prior four quarters by the latest edition of the ‘Results
Best’s Key Rating Guide (Property/Casualty)” published by the A.M. Best Company.
11.4.6
Personal or individual bonds are not acceptable.
11.4.7
If the surety on any Bond furnished by Contractor is declared a bankrupt or becomes
insolvent, or Contractor’s right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of
the Project is located, or it ceases to meet the requirements of this Section 11.4, Contractor
must within 5 Days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be
acceptable to City.
SECTION 12 - INDEMNIFICATION
12.1
To the extent permitted by law, the Contractor and its owners, officers, directors, agents,
employees, and subconsultants (collectively "lndemnitor") must indemnify, save, and hold
harmless the City and its officers, officials, agents, and employees (collectively "lndemnitee")
from any and all claims, actions, liabilities, damages, losses, or expenses (including court
costs, attorneys' fees, and costs of claim processing, investigation, and litigation) (collectively
"Claims") caused or alleged to be caused, in whole or in part, by the negligent, reckless,
wrongful, or willful acts, errors, or omissions of Indemnitor in connection with this
Agreement. This indemnity includes any Claim or amount arising out of or recovered under
workers' compensation laws or on account of Indemnitor's failure to conform to any federal,
state, or local law, statute, ordinance, rule, regulation, or court decree. Indemnitor must
indemnify lndemnitee from and against any and all Claims, except those arising solely from
lndemnitee's own negligent, reckless, wrongful, or willful acts, errors, or omissions.
Indemnitor is responsible for primary loss investigation, defense, and judgment costs where
this indemnification applies. In consideration of the award of this Agreement, Indemnitor
agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against lndemnitee for losses arising from or
related to this Agreement. Indemnitor's obligations under this provision survive the
termination or expiration of this Agreement.
SECTION 13 -DISPUTE RESOLUTION
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-50 of 75
13.1
All disputes arising out of or relating to the Agreement, the Work or the Project, other than
termination under Section 10, will be resolved pursuant to the Dispute Resolution
process set forth in Appendix 6 of these General Conditions, and not pursuant to MAG
Specifications § 110.
13.2
Contractor agrees that during any dispute between the parties, Contractor will continue to
perform its obligations under the Agreement until such dispute is resolved.
13.3
Notwithstanding any other provision in this Agreement, City has the right to immediately file
in court and pursue an action for a temporary restraining order and injunctive relief against
Contractor if City determines that such action is necessary to protect its interests under the
Agreement, to obtain specific performance of any provision of the Agreement, to advance
the completion of the Project, or to protect health, welfare and safety.
SECTION 14 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14.1
AGREEMENT DOCUMENTS
14.1.1
The Agreement Documents are intended to permit the parties to complete the Work
and all obligations required by the Agreement Documents within the Agreement Times for
the Agreement Price. The Agreement Documents are intended to be complementary and
interpreted in harmony so as to avoid conflict, with words and phrases interpreted in a
manner consistent with construction and design industry standards.
14.1.2
It is the intent of the Agreement Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or
part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Agreement Documents. Any labor,
documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the
Agreement Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to
produce the intended result must be provided by Contractor whether or not specifically
called for at no additional cost to City.
14.1.3
The Agreement Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include
the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Agreement Documents), Contractor's Bid or
Proposal (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to Agreement award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the
accepted Project Schedule, the Notice to Proceed, the Performance Bond, the Payment
Bond, Project Design, Engineering and Specifications, these General Conditions, the Project
Specific Special Provisions, Technical Specifications, Agreement Drawings, as the same may
be more specifically identified in the Agreement, Change Orders, Work Change Directives,
Field Orders and the written interpretations and clarifications of the Design Professional or
City representative and Modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. Approved
Shop Drawings and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not
Agreement Documents.
14.1.4
In the event of any inconsistency, conflict, or ambiguity between or among the Agreement
Documents, the Agreement Documents will take precedence as follows from highest to
lowest: Change Orders, Addenda, Agreement, Project Specific Special Provisions, General
Conditions, Technical Specifications, Drawings/Plans, Chandler Amendments to MAG
Standard Specifications and Chandler Standard Details, and MAG Uniform Standard
Specifications and Details for Public Works Construction. If applicable to this Agreement,
Federal Provisions prevail.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-51 of 75
14.1.5
On the Drawings, given dimensions will take precedence over scaled measurements and
large scale drawings over small-scale drawings.
14.1.6
Clarifications and interpretations of the Agreement Documents will be issued by the Design
Professional through the City.
14.1.7
The headings used in this Agreement or any other Agreement Documents, are for ease of
reference only and must not in any way be construed to limit or alter the meaning of any
provision.
14.1.8
The Agreement Documents form the entire agreement between City and Contractor.
No oral representations or other agreements have been made by the parties except as
specifically stated in the Agreement Documents.
14.1.9
The Agreement Documents may not be changed, altered, or amended in any way except in
writing signed by a duly authorized representative of each party in the form of a Change
Order.
14.1.10
Re-Use of Documents. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier or distributor will have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the
Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or
bearing the seal of the Design Professional; and they must not re-use any of them on
extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of City and the Design
Professional and specific written verification or adaptation by the Design Professional.
14.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
14.2.1
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society,
organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific
or by implication, will mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or
Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the
Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the
Agreement Documents.
14.2.2
The provisions of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a
Supplier will not change the duties or responsibilities of City, Contractor, Design
Professional or Project Manager, or any of their Subcontractors, consultants, agents, or
employees from those set forth in the Agreement Documents, nor will any such provision
or instruction assign to City, Contractor, Design Professional, or any of their agents, or
employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any
duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the
Agreement Documents.
14.3
COMPLIANCE WITH ARIZONA LAW AND FEDERAL LAW
14.3.1
Compliance with A.R.S. § 41-4401. Pursuant to the provisions of A.R.S. § 41-4401, the
Contractor hereby warrants to the City that the Contractor and each of its subcontractors
(“Subcontractors”) must comply with all Federal Immigration laws and regulations that
relate to the immigration status of their employees and the requirement to use E-Verify set
forth in A.R.S. §23-214(A).
14.3.2
A breach of the Contractor Immigration Warranty constitutes a material breach of this
Agreement and subject to penalties up to and including termination of this Agreement.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-52 of 75
14.3.3
The City retains the legal right to inspect the papers of any Contractor or Subcontractor
employee who works on this Agreement to ensure that the Contractor or Subcontractor is
complying with the Contractor Immigration Warranty. The Contractor agrees to assist the
City in the conduct of any such inspections.
14.3.4
The City may, at its sole discretion, conduct random verifications of the employment records
of the Contractor and any Subcontractors to ensure compliance with Contractors
Immigration Warranty. The Contractor agrees to assist the City in performing any such
random verifications.
14.3.5
The provisions of this Article must be included in any agreement the Contractor enters into
with any and all of its subcontractors who provide services under this Agreement or any
subcontract. “Services” are defined as furnishing labor, time or effort in the State of Arizona
by a contractor or subcontractor. Services include construction or maintenance of any
structure, building or transportation facility or improvement to real property.
14.4
HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
14.4.1
Contractor will not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered
or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or
identified in the Agreement Document to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor will
be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials
brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom
Contractor is responsible.
14.4.2
If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone
for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
Contractor must immediately:
a. Secure or otherwise isolate such condition;
b. Stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected
thereby; and
c. Notify City and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing.
14.4.3
City will promptly retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective
action, if any.
14.4.4
Contractor will be responsible for any and all civil or criminal penalties, fines, damages, or
other charges imposed by any regulatory agency or court for sewage discharges that are in
violation of applicable statutes and laws and that are a result, direct or indirect, of work
performed under this Agreement. Contractor will also be responsible for reimbursement
to City for administration, reporting, and tracking expenses required as a result of any spill
event. In the event the regulatory agency or court imposes a probationary period,
Contractor must post bond for the probationary period to ensure that all such costs are
reimbursed to City. This responsibility will apply whether penalties are imposed directly on
Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the City of Chandler. Contractor must defend
and indemnify City against such penalties. Regulatory agencies may include, but are not
limited to, the Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) and the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA).
14.5
COOPERATION AND FURTHER DOCUMENTATION
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-53 of 75
Contractor agrees to provide City such other duly executed documents as may be
reasonably requested by City to implement the intent of the Agreement Documents.
14.6
ASSIGNMENT
Neither Contractor nor City will, without the written consent of the other assign, transfer or
sublet any portion of this Agreement or part of the Work or the obligations required by
the Agreement Documents, any such assignment will be void, will transfer no rights to the
purported assignee, and would be a material breach of the Agreement.
14.7
SUCCESSORS
Contractor and City intend that the provisions of the Agreement Documents are binding
upon the parties, their employees, agents, heirs, successors and assigns.
14.8
LAWFUL PRESENCE
Pursuant to A.R.S. §§ 1-501 and 1-502, City is prohibited from awarding an agreement to any
natural person who cannot establish that such person is lawfully present in the United
States. To establish lawful presence, a person must produce qualifying identification and
sign a City-provided affidavit affirming the identification provided is genuine. This
requirement will be imposed at the time of agreement award. This requirement does not
apply to business organizations such as corporations, partnerships, or limited liability
companies.
14.9
NO BOYCOTT OF ISRAEL CERTIFICATION
By Contractor's signature on this Agreement, Contractor certifies under A.R.S. § 35-393.01
that Contractor is not currently engaged in and for the duration of this Agreement will not
engage in a boycott of Israel.
14.10
NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY
Nothing under the Agreement Documents will be construed to give any rights or benefits
in the Agreement Documents to anyone other than City and Contractor, and all duties and
responsibilities undertaken pursuant to the Agreement Documents will be for the sole and
exclusive benefit of City and Contractor and not for the benefit of any other party, unless
otherwise expressly set forth in the Agreement Documents.
14.11
GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE
The Agreement and all Agreement Documents will be deemed to be made under, and will
be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of Arizona without
regard to the conflicts or choice of law provisions thereof. Any court action to enforce any
provision of the Agreement or to obtain any remedy with respect hereto must be brought
in the Superior Court, Maricopa County, Arizona, and for this purpose, each party hereby
expressly and irrevocably consents to the jurisdiction and venue of such Court.
14.12
SEVERABILITY
If any provision of the Agreement Documents or the application thereof to any person or
circumstance will be invalid, illegal or unenforceable to any extent, the remainder of the
affected provision, the remainder of the Agreement Documents, and the application
thereof will not be affected and will be enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law.
14.13
LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
At all times relevant to its entry into this Agreement and performance of the Services and
the Work, Contractor must fully comply with all Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements
applicable to City, the Project, and the Agreement, including, without limitation, those set
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-54 of 75
forth on Exhibit C of the Agreement.
14.14
PARTIAL INVALIDITY
If any provision of the Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid,
void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions will nevertheless continue in full force
without being impaired or invalidated in any way.
14.15
ATTORNEYS' FEES
Should either party to the Agreement bring an action to enforce any provision of the
Agreement, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys' fees and
costs in connection therewith.
14.16
CONFLICT OF INTEREST
14.16.1
Contractor agrees to disclose any financial or economic interest with the Project property,
or any property affected by the Project, existing prior to the execution of the Agreement.
Further, Contractor agrees to disclose any financial or economic interest with the Project
property, or any property affected by the Project, if Contractor gains such interest during
the course of this Agreement. If Contractor gains financial or economic interest in the
Project during the course of this Agreement,
this may be grounds for terminating this
Agreement. Any decision to terminate the Agreement must be at the sole discretion of City.
14.16.2
Contractor will not engage the services on this Agreement of any present City employee who
was involved as a decision maker in the selection or approval processes, or who negotiated
or approved billings or Agreement Modifications for this Agreement.
14.16.3
Contractor agrees that it will not perform services on this Project for a contractor,
subcontractor, or any supplier, not covered under this Agreement.
14.17
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is and must be an independent contractor. Any provisions in the Agreement
Documents that may appear to give City the right to direct Contractor as to the details of
accomplishing the Work or to exercise a measure of control over the Work means that
Contractor must follow the wishes of City as the results of the Work only. These results
must comply with all applicable laws and ordinances.
14.18
NOTICE OF INJURY
Should City or Contractor suffer injury or damage to their person or property because of
any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim must be made in
writing to the other party within 7 Days of the first observance of such injury or damage.
14.19
CONFIDENTIALITY
Contractor, for the benefit of City, hereby agrees it will not release or cause or permit
to be released to the public any press notices, publicity (oral or written) or advertising
promotion relating to, any statement regarding, or any other public announcement or
disclosure or cause or permit to be publicly announced or disclosed, in any manner
whatsoever, the specific terms and conditions of this Agreement or any comment relating
to the Project or the Site. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor will be entitled to
disclose the terms of the Agreement to the extent required by law or in the course of
enforcing or defending a claim or action hereunder. Contractor must give City reasonably
prompt notice of any disclosure or statement made pursuant to this provision.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-55 of 75
14.20
DATA CONFIDENTIALITY
14.20.1
As used in the Agreement, “data” means all information, whether written or verbal, including
plans, specifications, renderings, photographs, studies, investigations, audits, analyses,
samples, reports, calculations, internal memos, meeting minutes, data field notes, work
product, proposals, correspondence and any other similar documents or information
prepared by, obtained by, or transmitted to the City in the performance of this Agreement.
14.20.2
Contractor agrees that all data, regardless of form, including originals, images, and
reproductions, prepared by, obtained by, or transmitted to City in connection with the
Contractor’s performance of this Agreement is confidential and proprietary information
belonging to City.
14.20.3
Except as specifically provided in this Agreement, Contractor or its Subcontractors must not
divulge data to any third party without prior written consent of City. Contractor or its
Subcontractors must not use data for any purposes except to perform Work required under
this Agreement. These prohibitions will not apply to the following data provided Contractor
has first given the required notice to City:
a. Data which was known to Contractor or its Subcontractors prior to its
performance under this Agreement unless such data was acquired in
connection with Work performed for City;
b. Data which was acquired by Contractor or its Subcontractors in its
performance under this Agreement and which was disclosed to Contractor
or its Subcontractors by a third party, who to the best of Contractor’s or its
Subcontractor’s knowledge and belief, had the legal right to make such
disclosure and Contractor or its Subcontractors are not otherwise required
to hold such data in confidence; or
c. Data which is required to be disclosed by virtue of law, regulation, or court
order, to which the Contractor or its Subcontractors are subject.
14.20.4
In the event the Contractor or its Subcontractors are required or requested to disclose data
to a third party, or any other information to which the Contractor or its Subcontractors
became privy as a result of any other agreement with City, the Contractor must first notify
City as set forth in this Section of the request or demand for the data. The Contractor or its
Subcontractors must give City sufficient facts so that City can be given an opportunity to
first give its consent or take such action that City may deem appropriate to protect such
data or other information from disclosure.
14.20.5
Unless prohibited by law, within 10 Days after completion of services for a third party on
real or personal property owned or leased by City, the Contractor must promptly deliver, as
set forth in this Section, a copy of all data to City. All data will continue to be subject to the
confidentiality agreements of this Agreement.
14.20.6
Contractor or its Subcontractors assume all liability for maintaining the confidentiality of
the data in its possession and agree to compensate City if any of the provisions of this
Section are violated by Contractor, its employees, agents, or Subcontractors. Solely for the
purposes of seeking injunctive relief, it is agreed that a breach of this Section will be deemed
to cause irreparable harm that justified injunctive relief in court. Contractor agrees that the
requirements of this Section will be incorporated into all subcontracts entered into by
Contractor. A violation of this Section may result in immediate termination of this
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-56 of 75
Agreement without notice.
14.21
SURVIVAL
All warranties, representations and indemnifications by Contractor must survive the
completion or termination of this Agreement.
14.22
COVENANTS AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES
Contractor warrants that no person has been employed or retained to solicit or secure
this Agreement upon an agreement or understanding for a commission, percentage,
brokerage, or contingent fee, and that no member of City Council, or any employee of
City has any interest, financially, or otherwise, in the firm. For breach or violation of this
warrant, City will have the right to annul the Agreement without liability or at its discretion
to deduct from the Agreement Price or consideration, the full amount of such commission,
percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee.
14.23
NO WAIVER
The failure of either party to enforce any of the provisions of the Agreement Documents or
to require performance of the other party of any of the provisions hereof must not be
construed to be a waiver of such provisions, nor will it affect the validity of the Agreement
Documents or any part thereof, or the right of either party to thereafter enforce each and
every provision.
14.24
NONEXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
The remedies set forth in this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive, and failure to
exercise any remedy (including, without limitation, any right to terminate) will not preclude
any party from exercising any other right in seeking any other remedy available to it at law
or in equity.
14.25
PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS
14.25.1
All communications concerning the performance of the Work or the Project will be provided
to the designated Project Manager and Contractor’s Representative set forth in Article 1
of the Agreement. City may change the designated Project Manager and, subject to
Section 4.4.20 of
these General Conditions, Contractor may change Contractor
Representative, by written notice to the other.
14.25.2
Project communications may be exchanged by e-mail, but email communications cannot
change the terms of the Agreement or the Scope of Work, or effectuate any change that
requires a written Change Order.
14.25.3
When any provisions of the Agreement Documents requires Contractor or the Design
Professional to give written notice to City, it will be deemed to have been validly given if
delivered in person or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid,
to the Parties indicated in Agreement Article 1, incorporated by reference.
14.25.4
When any provisions of the Agreement Documents requires City, Project Manager, or the
Design Professional to give written notice to Contractor, it will be deemed to have been
validly given if delivered in person to the person designated in the Agreement Documents
as Contractor’s Resident Superintendent, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail, postage prepaid, to Contractor at the last address in the Agreement Documents or
such substitute address which Contractor designates in writing, or to the business address
known to the giver of notice.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-57 of 75
14.26
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE PROGRAM
14.26.1
City has adopted a policy establishing a drug free workplace for itself and as a requirement
for Contractors doing business with City, to ensure the safety and health of employees
working on City projects.
14.26.2
Contractor must require a drug free workplace for all employees working under the
Agreement. Specifically, all employees of Contractor who are working under an
agreement with City must be notified, in writing, by Contractor that they are prohibited
from the manufacture, distribution,
dispensation, possession or unlawful use of a
controlled substance in the workplace.
14.27
Failure to require a drug free workplace in accordance with the City’s policy may result
in termination of the Agreement and possible debarment form bidding on future City
projects.
SECTION 15 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO GMP AND COST-BASED AGREEMENTS,
CHANGE ORDERS, AND JOB ORDERS
15.1
ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Section 2 apply to GMP and Cost-Based Agreements, Change
Orders, and Job Orders, together with the additional definitions set forth below.
Baseline Cost Model –
A breakdown and estimate of the scope of the Project developed by CM@Risk pursuant to Section 17.5
of these General Conditions.
CM@Risk or Construction Manager at Risk –
The person or firm selected by City to provide pre-construction and/or construction services as
detailed in a Construction Manager at Risk Agreement with City. In these General Conditions, the
term “Contractor” includes CM@Risk under both Pre-Construction and Construction Services
Agreements.
CM@Risk Fee or Contractor’s Fee –
An agreed to percentage in an accepted GMP that represents the Contractor’s fee for performance of
the Work.
Agreement Documents –
Where compensation under the Agreement is based upon a GMP accepted by City, the term
“Agreement Documents” also includes the accepted GMP Proposal.
Agreement Price –
Where compensation under the Agreement based upon a GMP accepted by City, the term
“Agreement Price” refers to the GMP.
Cost-Based Agreement, Change Order, or Job Order –
A Agreement, Change Order, or Job Order where the Agreement Price is based upon the actual
cost of performing the Work, subject to the terms of the Agreement Documents, including this
Section 15. These would include those generally referred to as “Cost of the Work plus a Fee with
a GMP,” “Time and Materials,” or “Cost Plus a Fee.”
Cost of the Work –
The direct costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the proper, timely, and complete performance
on the Work. The Cost of the Work will include only those costs set forth in Section 15.2 of these
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-58 of 75
General Conditions.
Deliverables –
The work products prepared by Contractor in performing the scope of work described in the
Agreement. Some of the major deliverables to be prepared and provided by Contractor during pre-
construction may include but are not limited to: the Baseline Cost Model and Schedule that validate
City’s plan and budget, Construction Management Plan, Detailed Project Schedule, Schedule of Values,
alternative system evaluations, procurement strategies and plans, Detailed Cost Estimates,
construction market surveys, cash flow projections, GMP Proposals, Subcontractor procurement plan,
Subcontractor agreements, Subcontractor bid packages, Supplier agreements, Constructability
Review, Cost Control Log, Traffic control and phasing plans and others as indicated in this Agreement
or required by the Project Team.
Pre-Construction Services Agreement –
The Agreement entered into between City and the CM@Risk for Pre-Construction Services to be
provided by the CM@Risk, including, without limitation, the generation of a GMP Proposal. If the GMP
Proposal is accepted by City and a Construction Agreement is entered into between City and CM@Risk,
the duties, obligations and warranties of the CM@Risk under the Pre-Construction Services
Agreement survive and are incorporated into the resulting Construction Agreement.
Pre-Construction Services –
The services to be provided under the Pre-Construction Services Agreement, including Section 17 of
these General Conditions.
Detailed Project Schedule –
The Detailed Project Schedule developed by the CM@Risk for the review and approval of the Project
Manager in accordance with Section 17.3 of these General Conditions, if applicable.
General Conditions Costs –
Those costs set forth in Section 4 of Appendix 9 to these General Conditions.
GMP Plans and Specifications –
The plan and specifications upon which the Guaranteed Maximum price Proposal is based.
GMP Proposal –
The proposal of Contractor submitted pursuant to Section 17.7 of these General Conditions for the
entire Work and/or portion (phases) of the Work.
Guaranteed Maximum Price or GMP –
The Guaranteed Maximum Price set forth in the Agreement, Change Order, or Job Order if applicable.
15.2
AGREEMENT PRICE
15.2.1
The Agreement Price for all Agreements, Change Orders, and Job Orders based upon
payment of the Cost of the Work plus a Fee with a GMP, time and materials, or cost-plus a
fee will be the Cost of the Work incurred plus the Fee agreed to in writing by City, limited to
the amount of the GMP, if agreed to. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement,
Change Order, or Job Order, all Cost Based pricing will be subject to and limited to GMP.
15.2.2
The Agreement Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 above.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-59 of 75
15.2.3
Only costs specifically designated as reimbursable costs are eligible for payment by City or
may be charged against the Agreement Price. All other costs will not be paid by City and will
not be chargeable against the Agreement Price.
15.2.4
Cost-Based Agreements. For Agreements, Change Orders, or Job Orders, reimbursable
costs must be determined pursuant to Appendix 9 to these General Conditions, Cost of the
Work, and not by MAG Specifications §109.5.
15.3
ALLOWANCES
15.3.1
Contractor must include in the Agreement Price all Allowances stated in the Agreement
Documents and agreed to in writing by City. Items covered by these Allowances must be
supplied for such amounts and by such persons as City may direct, provided Contractor will
not be required to employ persons against whom Contractor makes a reasonable objection.
Materials, labor, and equipment under an Allowance will be selected by City in accordance
with a schedule to be mutually agreed upon by City, Design Professional and Contractor or
otherwise in reasonably sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work.
15.3.2
Unless otherwise provided in the Agreement Documents:
15.3.2.1
These Allowances must cover the cost to Contractor, less any applicable trade discount, of
the materials, labor, and equipment required by the Allowances, delivered at the Site, and
all applicable taxes;
15.3.2.2
Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses relating to materials, labor, and equipment required by the
Allowance must be included in the Agreement Sum and not in the Allowance; and
15.3.2.3
Whenever the cost is more or less than the Allowance, the Agreement Sum must be
adjusted accordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will recognize the difference
between actual costs for an Allowance item and the amount of the Allowance item and
changes, if any, in handling costs on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and
other expenses.
15.4
CONTINGENCY
An agreed to amount in the GMP that may only be used in accordance with the terms set
forth in these General Conditions and with prior written approval by the City.
15.4.1
Construction Contingency. This GMP includes a dollar amount listed as a Construction
Contingency which will be readily available for increased costs for subcontractors, material,
and equipment subject to prior approval of City, which approval will not be withheld
unreasonably. The Construction Contingency may also be used, at the discretion of City, to
reimburse CM@Risk for unexpected costs due to (a) scope gaps between trade
subcontractors; (b) agreement default by trade subcontractors; (c) unforeseen field
conditions, but only as defined in Section 9.5 above; (d) work completed to meet the intent
of the design, but which was not indicated on the plans; (e) costs overruns not covered by
allowances; (f) costs of corrective work not provided for elsewhere; and (g) implementation
of any Recovery Plan. Cost for which CM@Risk desires to be paid from the Construction
Contingency must be documented by CM@Risk on a time and materials basis and are
subject to verification by City. If agreed to by City, a “Use of Contingency” form will be
executed by both parties authorizing the actual cost of the work to be paid and included in
the Work Item Direct Costs. The Construction Contingency is not allocated to any particular
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-60 of 75
item of the Project but may be used for any portion of the work as determined above. Any
amount not used in the Construction Contingency will belong to City and will reduce the
GMP.
15.4.2
Owner’s Contingency. This GMP also includes a dollar amount listed as an Owner’s
Contingency which may be used only by the City (owner department) for upgrades and
changes in scope or other changes not already included within the intent of the Project
Program. City will provide CM@Risk with a Work Change Directive authorizing CM@Risk to
perform the additional work and to transfer funds from the Owner’s Contingency to the
Work Item Direct Costs category to be paid with such direct costs. These additional costs
will be in an amount mutually agreed upon by CM@Risk and City or will be documented by
CM@Risk on a time and materials basis and are subject to verification by City. Any amount
not used in the Owner’s Contingency will belong to the City and will reduce the GMP.
15.5
REDUCTION IN RETENTION
If the Agreement Price is based upon a GMP, in order to receive payment of one-half of the
retention as set forth in Section 8.1.5 above, Contractor must also submit to the Project
Manager a complete accounting of the Actual Reimbursable Cost of the Work to date,
including all such documentation (including, without limitation, invoices, subcontract,
subcontractor change orders, purchase orders, records of payment, etc.) as City may require,
to establish whether the payments made to Contractor equal, exceed, or are less than the
actual reimbursable Cost of the Work to date. Any excess payments by City, as determined
by the Project Manager, will be deducted from the one-half retention payment to be made
to Contractor, and any additional excess amounts paid to Contractor will be refunded by
Contractor to City. The Project Manager’s determinations as to Actual Reimbursable Cost
of the Work will be the basis of payment until final Project Closeout and Final Payment
under the Agreement.
15.6
FINAL PAYMENT
If the Agreement Price is based upon a GMP, as a further condition precedent to Final
Payment by City, Contractor must submit to the Project Manager a complete final
accounting of the Actual Reimbursable Cost of the Work, including all such documentation
(including, without limitation,
invoices, subcontracts, subcontractor change orders,
purchase orders, records of payment, etc.) as City may require, to establish whether the
payments made to Contractor equal, exceed, or are less than the Actual Reimbursable Cost
of the Work to date. Any excess payments by City, as determined by the Project Manager,
will be deducted from the one-half retention payment to be made to Contractor, and any
additional excess amounts paid to Contractor will be refunded by Contractor to City.
Disputes relating to the Final Cost of the Work will be subject to City’s audit rights under
Sections 8.8 above and 15.7 below, and the dispute resolution process under Section 13
above.
15.7
OPEN BOOK
On any GMP-based or Cost-Based Agreement, Job Order, or Change Order, City may attend
any and all meetings or discussions pertaining to the Project, including bid openings, and
must have access to all books, invoices, accounts, memoranda, correspondence, and
written communications or records of any kind pertaining to the Project, including without
limitation, those stored in electronic format.
15.8
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS AND/OR CHANGE IN LAWS
A Change Order for increased costs under Section 9.5 or 9.6 above will only be considered
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-61 of 75
or granted by City to the extent such actual, documented costs are justified.
SECTION 16 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO JOB ORDER AGREEMENTS (JOC)
16.1
ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Sections 2 and below will apply to all Job Order Agreements and
Job Orders. In addition, the definitions set forth in Section 15.1 above will apply to all Cost-
Based Job Orders.
Agreement –
Includes the Job Order Master Agreement and Job Order Project Agreements issued and agreed to by City
and JOC Contractor.
JOC Contractor’s Coefficient –
A numerical factor that represents JOC Contractor total costs (indirect and direct costs, sales tax,
profit, etc.) and other adjustments for market conditions.
Job Order Request for Proposal (RFP) –
The Request for Proposals issued by City for each Job Order Project Agreement relating to a specific
Project.
Job Order Cost Proposal –
The Proposal submitted by JOC Contractor in response to a Job Order Request for Proposal (RFP) issued
by City to develop a Job Order Project Agreement for a specific Project.
Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) Job Order –
Job Order under which JOC Contractor is compensated for actual costs incurred.
Job Order Project Agreement (Job Order) –
The agreement for a specific project, as it may be modified by all Change Orders, executed by the
Parties, which incorporates the terms and conditions of the Job Order Master Agreement.
16.2
ORDERING AND PROCESSING PROCEDURES FOR JOB ORDERS
16.2.1
The process for developing and issuing a Job Order for a particular Project consists of three
(3) procedures: (1) issuance of a RFP by City; (2) JOC Contractor’s response to the RFP in the
form of JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal; and (3) Issuance of a Job Order by City, as
set for below.
16.2.2
RFP’s For Job Orders
16.2.2.1
City will provide to JOC Contractor RFP with a Scope of Work (SOW) describing the Work to
be performed, which may include special instructions and conditions, material submittal
requirements, and, if applicable, a complete set of sketches, construction drawings and
specifications for the Job Order.
16.2.2.2
Some Job Order RFP’s will be issued by City without detailed sketches, drawing and
specifications and will rely on JOC Contractor to produce them for City review and approval
and is considered to be Pre-Construction and incidental design services included in JOC
Contractor’s overhead for GMP Job Orders. In addition JOC Contractor will not be
reimbursed for any Pre-Job Order costs, including proposal preparation, attendance during
negotiations, or site visits.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-62 of 75
16.2.3
JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal
16.2.3.1
JOC Contractor must respond within ten (10) calendar days of the RFP date or site visit,
whichever is later or as otherwise indicated on a case-by-case basis, by submitting JOC
Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal to the City representative.
16.2.3.2
Unless otherwise required under the terms of the RFP, JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost
Proposal must include the following.
a. JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal in PDF and electronic format;
b. A Project Schedule and schedule of values that reflects the costs of each work
element on the schedule. The schedule must show all milestones (e.g.,
permits, submittals, ordering materials, demolition, work phases, closeout
and completion date); and
c. Necessary documentation will be required to indicate that adequate scoping,
layout, setup and planning to accomplish the Work has been done.
Examples of documentation that might reasonably be expected include
sketches, drawings, calculations, catalog cuts and specifications produced
to a level of detail and skill that could be expected of experienced,
competent Project Managers with five or more periods experience in their
respective trade.
16.2.3.3
JOC Contractor must select Subcontractors based on qualifications alone or on a
combination of qualifications and price and must not select Subcontractors based on
price alone. A qualifications and price selection may be a one-step selection based on
a combination of qualifications and price or two-step selection. In a two-step selection,
the first step must be based on qualifications alone and the second step may be based or
a combination of qualifications and price or on price alone.
16.2.3.4
Upon request, JOC Contractor must provide City with copies of Subcontractor quotes and
the basis for selection of each Subcontractor.
16.2.3.5
If City objects to a selected Subcontractor, City will make the objection and the reasons for
the objection known to the JOC Contractor. JOC Contractor must then present an
acceptable Subcontractor for the applicable discipline. City will not unreasonably object
to or withhold approval of a Subcontractor.
16.2.3.6
For self-performed work, the City retains the right to have the JOC Contractor establish JOC
Contractor’s costs by bidding their costs against at least three (3) other interested trade
Contractors. No self- performed work will be allowed to be performed on a lump sum basis.
16.2.4
Issuance of Job Order
16.2.4.1
City Representative will compare the JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal with the City’s
estimate,
schedules and other requirements, and then, if the City Representative
determines it is in the best interest of City, arrange a meeting with JOC Contractor, at which
time the JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal will be discussed and negotiated.
16.2.4.2
If the City Representative determines that it is in the best interest of the City, City will then
issue a Job Order to JOC Contractor for execution.
16.2.4.3
Specific Job Orders may vary, but unless agreed to by City in writing otherwise, the content
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-63 of 75
of Job Orders under the Agreement will generally be as follow, all of which will be signed
and/or initialed by JOC Contractor’s designated representative:
a. The description of the Scope of the Work and Project Schedule (attached as
Exhibit A to the Job Order);
b. The address or location of the Work;
c. The Agreement Price for Work (Construction) included in the Project
(attached as Exhibit B to the Job Order);
d. The name of the JOC Contractor representative for the Project;
e. The Drawings and Specifications for the Project;
f.
If any shop drawings, project date and/or samples are required for the Job
Order, the date for delivery of each required item (included in the Project
Schedule, Exhibit A to the Job order); and
g. Project Specific Provisions, if any, in Exhibit A to the Job Order,
including, without limitation, whether any of the following are required:
Pre-Construction Conference, weekly progress meetings, field office,
storage enclosure, materials and equipment handling facility, submittals,
shop drawings, product data, equipment list, samples, project manual,
schedule of values, Construction progress schedule, narrative reports,
progress report, progress charts, progress photographs, materials status
report, Construction diagram, Construction status report, operation and
maintenance data, operating maintenance instructions and parts list, and
as-build drawings.
16.2.5
Job Order Intent. Each Job Order will be interpreted to include all items reasonably
necessary to complete the Project under that Job Order as described in the scope of the
Work in that Job Order. All Work must be performed in a professional manner and all
materials used must be new and of the highest quality and of the type best adapted to
their purpose, unless otherwise specified. The Notice to Proceed date, and the award date
established therein, will be deemed an integral part of the Job Order the same as if set forth
therein.
16.3
INCIDENTAL DESIGN SERVICES
16.3.1
This effort includes all “extensions of design” for systems that are typically specified in
a performance oriented manner by consultants and designers. Examples include: fire
sprinkler systems, fire alarm and sprinkler systems, DDC controls, control systems,
prefabricated metal building and similar situations. These designs are normally provided
under submittals as a shop drawing with engineering backup and as appropriate, seals of
registered engineers specializing in the particular system.
16.3.2
Incidental design includes all documents, sketches, schematic diagrams, floor plan
layouts, equipment schedules and other documents produced by the JOC Contractor to
define the work required for projects that the City does not develop formal or abbreviated
designs requiring a seal by a registered engineer. Incidental design does not include
preparation of designs requiring an architect or engineer seal.
16.3.3
JOC Contractor represents, covenants, and agrees, and contractually assumes the
obligation to furnish, all of the required Design Services through properly licensed and
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-64 of 75
experienced Design Professionals in complete accordance with all of the duties imposed
on a Design Professional under the Agreement Documents, Laws, Regulations, or Legal
Requirements, and the common law.
16.3.4
All Design Documents (and all other Project-related documents, models, computer
drawings and other electronic expression, photographs and other expressions CADD, and
BIM files and images included) that JOC Contractor and/or JOC Contractor’s Design
Professional(s) prepare in connection with a Job Order and the copyrights therein
(collectively, the “Instruments of Service”) will be the property of City. JOC Contractor
covenants and agrees to execute any additional document reasonably requested by City
to confirm such assignment without any additional compensation.
16.4
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
16.4.1
The following subsections of this Section 16.4 set forth requirements beyond those set forth
in Section 4 above which apply to Construction Services performed under a Job Order.
16.4.2
JOC Contractor must perform the Work using only those firms, team members and
individuals designated by JOC Contractor consistent with each Job Order or otherwise
approved by City pursuant to the General Conditions. No other entities or individuals may
be used without the prior written approval of the Project Manager.
16.4.3
Construction Phasing
16.4.3.1
City use of the facilities is anticipated while the Work is being performed. The Work must
be planned and accomplished so that there will be a minimum of interference and
inconvenience to occupants in the building and agencies in the vicinity and to other
craftsmen who may have to do work in the affected facilities. Any blockage of building
exits or driveways must be coordinated in advance.
16.4.3.2
If applicable, furniture, portable office equipment and wall appurtenances not rigidly
fastened to the walls must be moved by JOC Contractor, protected from damage and
replaced to the original position upon completion of the work. If the work required by
the Job Order will not allow furniture and portable office equipment to be replaced to its
original position, new locations will be designated by City. Incidental costs associated with
moving one-piece furnishings up to approximately 150 pounds to perform such tasks as
painting, carpet or tile replacement, etc., are considered a general cost of building
renovation and must be included in the JOC Contractor’s Coefficient. Costs for large scale
or wholesale removal and replacement of large quantities of
desks or modular
workstations, copiers, multiple full file cabinets, etc. to another location or storage outside
the work space, or disassembly and reassembly of modular furniture is not considered
part of the JOC Contractor’s Coefficient and will be priced separately.
16.4.3.3
The work must, so far as practicable, be done in definite sections or divisions and confined
to limited areas which must be completed before work in other sections or divisions are
begun.
16.4.4
Work Site Conflicts. In the event of a conflict between JOC Contractor and others in an
occupied facility or where other Contractors are performing work on the same facility
under other Agreements, City will decide to dispute and that decision will be final.
16.4.5
Ownership of Work Product. Work Product prepared or otherwise created in connection
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-65 of 75
with the performance of this Agreement, including the Work, are to be and remain the
property of City. For purposes of this provision, “Work Product” will include all designs,
drawings, plans, specifications, ideas, renderings and other information or matter, in
whatever form created (e.g., electronic or printed) and in all media now known or
hereinafter created. All Work Product will be considered Work Made for Hire as defined
in the United States Copyright Act 17 U.S.C. §101 (Copyright Act). If for any reason any such
Work is found not to be a work for hire, JOC Contractor hereby transfers and assigns
ownership of the copyright in such Work to City. The rights in this Section are exclusive to
City in perpetuity.
16.5
OPTIONAL LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
16.5.1
Specific Job Orders. City will have the right to assess liquidated damages in relation to
any specific JOC Project Agreement as set forth below.
16.5.2
Substantial Completion Liquidated Damages. JOC Contractor acknowledges and agrees
that if JOC Contractor fails to obtain Substantial Completion of the Work within the
Agreement Time, City will sustain extensive damages and serious loss as a result of such
failure. The exact amount of such damages will be extremely difficult to ascertain.
Therefore, City and JOC Contractor agree that if JOC Contractor fails to achieve Substantial
Completion of the Work within the Agreement Time, City will be entitled to retain or
recover from JOC Contractor, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum per
calendar day as indicated in MAG § 108.9.
16.5.3
Final Acceptance Liquidated Damages. For the same reasons set forth in Section 16.5.2
above, City and JOC Contractor further agree that if JOC Contractor fails to achieve Final
Acceptance of the Work within the Agreement Time, City will be entitled to retain or recover
from JOC Contractor, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum per calendar
day as indicated in MAG § 108.9 commencing from the actual date of Substantial
Completion or Final Acceptance as required under any specific JOC Project Agreement.
16.5.4
MAG Liquidated Damages. Liquidated damages provisions in MAG § 108.9 may apply to any
specific JOC Project Agreement.
16.5.5
City may deduct liquidated damages assessed pursuant to this Section 16.5 from any
unpaid amounts then or thereafter due JOC Contractor under the Agreement or any
specific JOC Project Agreement between JOC Contractor and City. Any liquidated damages
not so deducted from any unpaid amounts due JOC Contractor must be payable to City
at the demand of City, together with interest from the date of the demand at the highest
lawful rate of interest payable to JOC Contractor.
16.6
PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
16.6.1
Performance Assessment. After the Final Acceptance of Work under each Job Order, City
will complete a written evaluation of the performance of JOC Contractor on the Job Order.
16.6.2
Consideration in Assignment of Work. JOC Contractor’s record of cost, schedule and
quality performance and comparative assessments will be significant considerations in
City’s determination whether to award future Job Orders. JOC Contractor agrees that any
determination by City not to not award future Job Orders or Option periods based on
performance will be at the sole discretion of City.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-66 of 75
SECTION 17 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES FOR
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK
17.1
ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Section 2 and 15.1 above will apply to all Pre-Construction
Services Agreements.
17.2
GENERAL
17.2.1
CM@Risk must perform the Services required by, and in accordance with the Agreement
Documents and as outlined in Exhibit A of the Agreement to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager, exercising the degree of care, skill, diligence and judgment a professional
construction manager experienced in the performance of such services for construction
and/or facilities of similar scope, function, size, quality, complexity and detail to the
Project in urban areas throughout the United States, would exercise at such time, under
similar conditions. CM@Risk must, at all times, perform the required services consistent
with sound and generally accepted engineering principles and construction management
and construction contracting practices.
17.2.2
As a participating member of the Project Team, CM@Risk must provide to City and Design
Professional a written evaluation of City’s Project Program and budget, each in terms of
the other, with recommendations as to the appropriateness of each. CM@Risk must
prepare a Baseline Cost Model that validates City’s budget. The Baseline Cost Model must
include all assumptions and basis of estimates in enough detail so that the Project Team
can compare future detail estimates to the Baseline Cost model for variances. City and
Design Professional will provide all the reasonably required data that is available in
order to reach agreement between the team members that the Baseline Cost Model is an
accurate projection of the costs of the Project.
17.2.3
CM@Risk must attend Project Team meetings, which may include, but are not limited to,
bi- weekly Project management meetings, Project workshops, special Project meetings,
construction document rolling reviews, public meetings and partnering sessions. CM@Risk
attendance at design or other meetings in which CM@Risk is provided the opportunity but
does not actively participate and/or is not properly prepared is not acceptable. Repeated
instances of non-participation and/or lack of preparedness will be grounds for termination
of CM@Risk Agreement for default.
17.2.4
CM@Risk must provide Pre-Construction Services, described herein, in a timely manner
and consistent with the intent of the most current Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk
must promptly notify City in writing whenever CM@Risk determines any Drawings or
Specifications are inappropriate for the Project and/or cause changes in the scope of Work
that deviates more than the allowed contingencies within the Baseline Cost Model or
requires an adjustment in the Baseline Cost Model, Detailed Cost Estimate, Detailed
Project Schedule, GMP Proposals and/or in the Agreement Time for the Work, to the extent
such as established.
17.2.5
CM@Risk when requested by City, must attend, make presentations and participate as may
be appropriate in public agency and or community meetings, relevant to the Project.
CM@Risk must provide drawings, schedule diagrams, budget charges and other materials
describing the Project when their use is required or appropriate in any such public agency
meetings.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-67 of 75
17.2.6
Ownership of Work Product. All Work Product prepared or otherwise created in connection
with the performance of this Agreement, including the Work, are to be and remain the
property of City. For purposes of this provision, “Work Product” will include all designs,
drawings, plans, specifications, ideas, renderings and other information or material, in
whatever form created (e.g., electronic or printed) and in all media now know or hereinafter
created. All Work Product will be considered Work Made for Hire as defined in the United
States Copyright Act 17 U.S.C.
§101 (Copyright Act). If for any reason any such Work is found not to be a work for
hire, Contractor hereby transfers and assigns ownership of the copyright in such Work to
City. The rights in this Section are exclusive to City in perpetuity.
17.2.7
CM@Risk represents to City in completing Pre-Construction Services and providing the
reports
and analysis required thereunder, that Work can be properly and timely
constructed within the GMP Proposal, if accepted. CM@Risk does not assume any design
responsibilities unless specifically called for in the scope of work, but CM@Risk will be
responsible for their errors, omissions or inconsistencies included in the Work.
17.3
DETAILED PROJECT SCHEDULE
17.3.1
The fundamental purpose of the Detailed Project Schedule is to identify, coordinate and
record the tasks and activities to be performed by all of the Project Team members and
then for the Project Team to utilize that Deliverable as a basis for managing and
monitoring all member’s compliance with the schedule requirements of the Project.
Each Project Team member is responsible for its compliance with the Detailed Project
Schedule requirements. CM@Risk must, however, develop and maintain the Detailed
Project Schedule on behalf of and to be used by the Project Team based on input from the
other Project Team members. The Baseline Project Schedule must be developed as part
of the Baseline Cost Model. The Detailed Project Schedule must use the Critical Path
method (“CPM”) technique, unless required otherwise, in writing by City. CM@Risk must
use scheduling software acceptable to City to develop the Detailed Project Schedule.
The Detailed Project Schedule must be presented in graphical and tabular reports as
agreed upon by the Project Team. If Project phasing as described below is required, the
Detailed Project Schedule must indicate milestone dates for the phases once
determined. As part of construction phase, City may require CM@Risk to prepare a
“resource loaded” schedule for all work, including work performed by Subcontractors,
detailing each of the project tasks and the required/anticipated number of personnel per
day for each task. CM@Risk must also indicate on the schedule its ability to meet said
required/anticipated personnel requirements.
17.3.2
CM@Risk must include and integrate in the Detailed Project Schedule the services and
activities required of City, Design Professional and CM@Risk including all construction
phase activities based on the input received from City and the Design Professional.
The Detailed Project Schedule must define activities as determined by City to the extent
required to show: (a) the coordination between preliminary design and various pre-
construction documents, (b) any separate long-lead procurements, (c) any permitting
issues, (d) any land, right-of-way, or easement acquisition, (e) bid packaging strategy and
awards to Subcontractors and Suppliers, (f) major stages of construction, (g) start-up and
commissioning, and (h) occupancy of the completed Work by City. The Detailed Project
Schedule must include by example and not limitation, proposed activity sequences and
durations for design, procurement, construction and testing activities, milestone dates for
actions and decisions by the Project Team, preparation and processing of shop drawings
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-68 of 75
and samples, delivery of materials or equipment requiring long-lead time procurement (if
any), milestone dates for various construction phases, Total Float for all activities to the
extent authorized by City, relationships between the activities,
City’s occupancy
requirements showing portions of the Project having occupancy priority, and proposed
dates for Final Acceptance.
17.3.3
A Baseline Project Schedule must be initiated with the project Baseline Cost Model and
agreed to by the project team at the same time. CM@Risk must update and maintain a
detailed Project Schedule throughout pre-construction such that it will not require major
changes at the start of the construction phase to incorporate CM@Risk’s plan for the
performance of the construction phase Work. CM@Risk must provide updates and/or
revisions to the Detailed Project Schedule for use by the Project Team, whenever required,
but no less often than at the Project Team meetings. CM@Risk must include with such
submittals a narrative describing its analysis of the progress achieved to-date vs. the
Baseline Project Schedule, including any concerns regarding delays or potential delays, and
any recommendations regarding mitigating actions.
17.3.4
If phased construction is deemed appropriate at the time of developing the Baseline Cost
Model or during the development of the Detailed Project Schedule, and City approves,
CM@Risk must review the design and make recommendations regarding the phased
issuance of Construction Documents to facilitate phased construction of the Work, with
the objective of reducing the Project Schedule and/or Cost of the Work. CM@Risk must take
into consideration such factors as natural and practical lines of work severability,
sequencing effectiveness, access and availability constraints, total time for completion,
construction market conditions, labor and materials availability, and any other factors
pertinent to saving time and cost.
17.3.5
Long Lead Time Items. As part of developing the Detailed Project Schedule, CM@Risk must
identify all long lead time materials, fabrications, equipment, or other items which may
impact the Project Schedule and may require early action on the part of the Project Team.
Dates for selecting and ordering long lead time items will be included and highlighted
in the Detailed Project Schedule
17.3.6
Equipment Plan. Contractor must develop an Equipment Plan that addresses all rental
and owned equipment, regardless of whether such equipment will be provided by
CM@Risk or subcontractor(s), that will be necessary to construct the Project and the cost
of which will be included as a Cost of the Work in the GMP Proposal. The Equipment Plan
will seek to minimize the cost of the equipment to City and maximize the efficient and
coordinated use of the equipment for completion of the Project. The Equipment Plan will
not only include the costs and allowable lease rates for the equipment, but will also include
an equipment schedule that will be incorporated into the Detailed Project Schedule and the
Schedule of Values submitted with the GMP Proposal.
17.4
DESIGN DOCUMENT REVIEWS
17.4.1
CM@Risk must evaluate periodically the availability of labor, materials/equipment, cost-
sensitive aspects of the design; and other factors that may create an unacceptable variance
to the Baseline Cost Model and/or Baseline Project Schedule.
17.4.2
CM@Risk must recommend, in conjunction with the Project Team, those additional surface
and subsurface investigations that, in its professional opinion, are required to provide the
necessary
information for CM@Risk to construct the Project.
These additional
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-69 of 75
investigations, if agreed to
be necessary by the Project Manager and the Design
Professional, will be acquired by City and copies of the reports will be provided to CM@Risk.
17.4.3
CM@Risk must meet with the Project Team as required to review designs during their
development. CM@Risk must familiarize itself with the evolving documents through
pre-
construction. CM@Risk must proactively advise the Project Team and make
recommendations on factors related to construction costs, and concerns pertaining to the
feasibility and practicality
of any proposed means and methods, selected materials,
equipment and building systems, and, labor and material availability. CM@Risk must
furthermore advise the Project Team on proposed site improvements, excavation and
foundation considerations, as well as, concerns that exist with respect to coordination of
the Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk must use established value analysis principles
in recommending cost effective alternatives.
17.4.4
CM@Risk must routinely conduct constructability and bid-ability reviews of the Drawings
and Specifications as necessary to satisfy the needs of the Project Team. The reviews must
attempt to identify all discrepancies and inconsistencies in the Construction Documents
especially those related to clarity, consistency, completeness and coordination of Work of
Subcontractors and Suppliers.
17.4.4.1
CM@Risk must evaluate whether: (a) the Drawings and Specifications are configured to
enable efficient construction; (b) design elements are standardized; (c) construction
efficiency
is
properly
considered
in
the
Drawings
and
Specifications;
(d)
module/preassembly design is prepared to facilitate fabrication, transport and installation;
(e) sequences of Work required by or inferable from the Drawings and Specifications are
practicable; (f) the design has taken into consideration efficiency issues concerning access
and entrance to the site, laydown and storage
of materials, staging of site facilities,
construction parking, and other similar pertinent issues; and (g) the design maintains
continued operation of the existing City systems and maintains traffic on adjacent
roadways. CM@Risk must also review the Drawings and Specifications to ensure that what
is depicted therein can be constructed as designed and must promptly inform the Project
Team of any issues.
17.4.4.2
CM@Risk must check cross-reference and complementary Drawings and sections within
the Specifications and in general evaluate whether: (a) the Drawings and Specifications
are sufficiently clear and detailed to minimize ambiguity and to reduce scope interpretation
discrepancies; (b) named materials and equipment are commercially available and are
performing well, or otherwise, in similar installations; (c) Specifications include alternatives
in the event a requirement cannot be met in the field; and (d) in its professional opinion, the
Project is likely to be subject to Differing Site Conditions.
17.4.4.3
The results of the reviews must be provided to Project Team in formal, written reports
clearly
identifying all reviewed documents and the discovered discrepancies and
inconsistencies in the Drawings and Specifications with notations and recommendations
made on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents. CM@Risk must meet with
Project Team to discuss any findings and review reports.
17.4.4.4
CM@Risk’s reviews must be from a Contractor’s perspective, and though it will serve to
eliminate/reduce the number of RFIs) and changes during the construction phase,
responsibility for the Drawings and Specifications will remain with the Design Professional
and not CM@Risk.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-70 of 75
17.4.5
It is CM@Risk’s responsibility to assist the Design Professional in ascertaining that, in
CM@Risk’s professional opinion, the Construction Documents are in accordance with
applicable Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements, building codes, sound engineering
principle’s rules and regulations. If CM@Risk recognizes that portions of the Construction
Documents are at variance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes,
sound engineering principle’s rules and regulations, it must promptly notify the Project Team
in writing, describing the apparent variance of deficiency. However, the Design Professional
is ultimately responsible for the compliance of the Drawings and Specifications with those
laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations.
17.4.6
The Project Team will routinely identify and evaluate using value analysis principles and
alternate systems, approaches, design changes that have the potential to reduce Project
costs while still delivering a high quality and fully functional Project consistent with
the Project Program. If the Project Team agrees, CM@Risk in cooperation with the Design
Professional, will perform a cost/benefit analysis of the alternatives and submit such in
writing to the Project Team. City, through the Project Manager, will direct which alternatives
will be incorporated into the Project. The Design Professional will have full design
responsibility for the review and incorporation of CM@Risk suggested alternatives into
the Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk must analyze the costs and schedule impacts of
the alternatives against the Baseline
Cost Model and Schedule and provide a
recommendation for the Project Team’s consideration and City’s approval prior to the
establishment of the GMP.
17.5
BASELINE COSTS MODEL, DETAILED COST ESTIMATES, AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES
17.5.1
At the conclusion of the Master Planning and Programming, if required, CM@Risk will
review all available information regarding the design and scope of the Project using
CM@Risk’s experience in performing similar work, knowledge of similar projects and
current and projected construction costs and, based upon that review, must develop a
Baseline Cost Model for review by the Project Team and approval by City. Once approved
by City, the Baseline Cost Model will be continually referenced as detailed estimates are
created as the design progresses throughout Pre-Construction until the final GMP for the
entire Project is established. A final GMP for the entire Project must be established and
approved by City prior to the start of construction. It is the responsibility of CM@Risk
to ensure City has sufficient information to evaluate and approve a final GMP prior to
the time necessary to start construction so construction can be completed within the
Agreement Time. The Project Detailed Cost Estimate will be the best representation from
CM@Risk of what the complete functional Project’s construction costs will be as indicated
by the most current available documents and will be constantly checked against the
Baseline Cost Model. CM@Risk must communicate to the Project Team and assumptions
made in preparing the Baseline Cost Model. The Baseline Cost
Model must support
CM@Risk’s Detailed Cost Estimates and may be broken down initially as dictated by the
available information, as required by City.
17.5.2
After receipt of the Design Professional’s most current documents from certain specified
pre- construction milestones, CM@Risk must provide a draft Detailed Cost Estimate
including a detailed written report detailing any variances to the Baseline Cost Model and
Baseline Project Schedule. The Design Professional and CM@Risk will reconcile any
disagreements on the estimate to arrive at an agreed upon Detailed Cost Estimate for the
construction costs based on the scope of the Project through that specified pre-
construction milestone. Pre-Construction milestones applicable to this paragraph are:
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-71 of 75
Master Planning and Programming, Schematic Design, 50% Design Development, 100%
Design Development, and 50% Construction Drawings, If no consensus is reached, City will
make the final determination. If the Project Team requires additional updates of the
Detailed Cost Estimate beyond that specified in this paragraph, CM@Risk must provide the
requested information in a timely manner.
17.5.3
If at any point the Detailed Cost Estimate submitted to City exceeds the previously
accepted Baseline Cost Model or previously approved Detailed Cost Estimate agreed to as
set forth in Section 17.5.2 above, CM@Risk must make appropriate recommendations to
project Team on means/methods, materials, and or other design elements that it
believes will reduce the estimated construction costs, such that it is equal to or less than
the established Project Team’s Baseline Cost Model.
17.5.4
Unless other levels of completion are agreed to in writing in the Construction Documents,
at 50% Construction Drawings and included with the associated report, CM@Risk must
also submit to the Project Team for review and approval a Schedule of Values that complies
with the following requirements. The Schedule of Values must be based on City standard
bid schedule and highlight significant variances from any previously submitted Schedule
of Values. The Schedule of Values must be directly related to the breakdowns reflected in
the Detailed Project Schedule and CM@Risk’s Detailed Cost Estimate. In addition, the
Schedule of Values must: (a) detail unit prices and quantity take-offs, (b) detail all other
contingencies and unit price Work shown and specified in the detailed design documents.
17.5.5
CM@Risk is to track, estimate/price and address the Project Team’s overall project cost issues
that arise outside of the Baseline Cost Model and the latest approved Detailed Cost
Estimate such as: City generated changes, Project Team proposed changes, alternate
system analysis, constructability items and value engineering analysis. The system used
to implement this process will be referred to as the Design Evolution Log. This is to be
addressed between the Baseline Cost Model and the Master Planning and Programming
Detailed Cost Estimate, and then (unless other levels of completion are agreed to in writing
in the Construction Documents) between the Detailed Cost Estimates for each of the pre-
construction milestones thereafter, Schematic Design, 50% Design Development, 100%
Design Development, and 50% Construction Documents, and the bid packages for all
Phases.
17.5.6
Upon request by City, CM@Risk must submit to City a cash flow projection for the Project
based on the current updated/revised Detailed Project Schedule and the anticipated level of
payments for CM@Risk during the design and construction phases. In addition, if requested
by City and based on information provided by City, CM@Risk must prepare a cash flow
projection for the entire Project based on historical records for similar types of projects
to assist City in the financing process.
17.5.7
Construction Water. CM@Risk must estimate the quantity of water to be used and include
the cost thereof in each Detailed Cost Estimate and GMP Proposal provided by City.
17.6
SUBCONTRACTOR AND MAJOR SUPPLIER SELECTIONS
17.6.1
There are two ways to select Subcontractors and major Suppliers prior to submission of a
GMP Proposal: (1) qualifications-based selection; or (2) a combination of qualifications
and price. Except as noted below, the selection of Subcontractors/Suppliers is the sole
responsibility of CM@Risk. In any case, CM@Risk is solely responsible for the performance
of the selected Subcontractors/Suppliers, and for compliance with the requirements of
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-72 of 75
Title 34 of the Arizona Revised Statutes in the selection of a Subcontractors/Suppliers,
to the extent applicable. CM@Risk must comply with its Subcontractor Selection Plan
submitted with its Statement of Qualifications.
17.6.2
City may approve the selection of a Subcontractor(s) or Suppliers(s) based only on their
qualifications when CM@Risk can demonstrate it is in the best interest of the Project. All
Work that is performed, after such a qualifications-based selection, for a price that is
negotiated by CM@Risk will be billed in accordance with the GMP for actual costs and may
be subject to audit by City.
17.6.2.1
Qualifications based selection of a Subcontractor(s)/Supplier(s) should only occur prior to
the submittal of the GMP Proposal.
17.6.2.2
If a Subcontractor/Supplier selection plan was submitted and agreed to by City, CM@Risk
must apply the plan in the evaluation of the qualifications of a Subcontractor(s) or
Supplier(s) and provide City with its review and recommendations.
17.6.2.3
CM@Risk must receive written City approval for each selected Subcontractor(s) and
Supplier(s).
17.6.2.4
CM@Risk must negotiate costs for services/supplies from each Subcontractor/Supplier
selected under this method.
17.6.3
All Work must be competitively bid unless a Subcontractor or Supplier was selected pursuant
to Section 17.6.2 above.
17.6.3.1
CM@Risk must develop Subcontractor and Supplier interest, submit the names of a
minimum of three qualified Subcontractors or Suppliers for each trade in the Project for
approval by City and solicit bids for the various Work categories. If there are not three
qualified Subcontractors/Suppliers available for a specific trade or there are extenuating
circumstances warranting such, CM@Risk may request approval by City to submit less
than three names. Without prior written notice to City, no change in the recommended
Subcontractors/Supplies will be allowed.
17.6.3.2
If City objects to any nominated Subcontractor/Supplier or to any self-performed Work for
good
reason, CM@Risk must nominate a substitute Subcontractor/Supplier that is
acceptable to City.
17.6.3.3
CM@Risk must distribute Drawings and Specifications, and when appropriate, conduct a
Pre- Bid Conference with prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers.
17.6.3.4
If CM@Risk desires to self-perform certain portions of the Work, it must request to be one of
the approved Subcontractor bidders for those specific bid packages. CM@Risk’s bid will
be evaluated in accordance with the process identified below. If events warrant and City
concurs that it is necessary in order to ensure compliance with the Project Schedule
and/or the most recent Detailed Cost Estimate, CM@Risk may be authorized to self-
perform Work without bidding or rebidding the Work. When CM@Risk self-performs work
without bidding, only the actual costs associated with performing the Work in accordance
with the approved GMP will be billed and may be subject to audit by City.
17.6.3.5
CM@Risk must receive, open, record and evaluate the bids; provided, however, that if
CM@Risk or one of its affiliates is bidding to self-perform the Work that is the subject of the
bid, then the bids must be received, opened, recorded and evaluated by Project Manager
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-73 of 75
instead of CM@Risk. Bids for each category of Work must be opened and recorded at a
pre-determined time. The apparent low bidders must be interviewed to determine the
responsiveness of their proposals. In evaluating the responsiveness of bid proposals
CM@Risk, in addition to bid price, may consider the following factors: past performance
on similar projects, qualifications and
experience of personnel assigned, quality
management plan, approach or understanding of the
Work to be performed, and
performance
schedule
to
complete
the
Work.
The
final
evaluation
of
Subcontractor/Supplier bids must be done with Project Manager in attendance to observe
and witness the process. CM@Risk must resolve any Subcontractor/Supplier bid withdrawal,
protest or disqualification in connection with the award at no increase in the Cost of Work.
17.6.4
CM@Risk will be required to prepare two different reports on the subcontracting process.
17.6.4.1
Within fifteen days after each major Subcontractor/Supplier bid opening process;
CM@Risk must prepare a report for City’s review and approval identifying the
recommended Subcontractors/Supplier for each category of Work. The report must detail:
(a) the name of the recommended Subcontractor/Supplier and the amount of the
Subcontractor/Supplier bid for each sub-agreement; (b) the sum of all recommended
Subcontractor/Supplier bids received; (c) and trade work and its cost that CM@Risk intends
to self-perform, if any.
17.6.4.2
Upon completion of the Subcontractor/Supplier bidding process, CM@Risk must submit
a summary report to City of the entire Subcontractor/Supplier selection process. The report
must indicate, by bid process, all Subcontractors/Suppliers contacted to determine
interest, the Subcontractors/Suppliers solicited, the bids received and costs negotiated,
and the recommended Subcontractors/Suppliers for each category of Work.
17.6.5
The approved Subcontractors/Suppliers will provide a Schedule of Values with their bid
proposals, which will be used to create the overall Project Schedule of Values.
17.6.6
If after receipt of sub-bids or after award to Subcontractors and Suppliers, City objects to
any nominated Subcontractor/Supplier or to any self-performed Work without any
reasonable basis, CM@Risk must nominate a substitute Subcontractor or Supplier,
preferably if such option is still available, from those who submitted Subcontractor bids
for the Work affected. Once such substitute Subcontractors and Suppliers are consented
to by City, CM@Risk’s proposed GMP for the Work or portion thereof must be
correspondingly adjusted to reflect any higher or lower costs form any such substitution.
17.7
GMP PROPOSAL
17.7.1
When a GMP Proposal is submitted for a phase of the Work, the GMP will have a Detailed Cost
Estimate of the Costs of the Work (as set forth in Section 15.2) in each phase of the Work
that is being proposed plus the current estimate for all other Work. City will not approve
the GMP for the phase of work without a total estimate for the complete Project. City may
request a GMP Proposal for all or any portion of the Project and at any time during pre-
construction. Any GMP Proposals submitted by CM@Risk must be based on and consistent
with Baseline Cost Model and the current update/revised Detailed Cost Estimate at the
time of the request and include any clarifications or assumptions upon which the GMP
Proposal(s) are based.
17.7.2
A GMP Proposal for the entire Project will be the sum of the Cost of the Work, CM@Risk Fee,
and General Conditions Cost. CM@Risk guarantees to complete the Project at or less than
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-74 of 75
the final GMP Proposal amount plus approved Change Orders. CM@Risk will be responsible
for any costs for expenses that would cause the Cost of the Work actually incurred,
including the Construction Fee and General Conditions Costs, to exceed the GMP.
17.7.3
CM@Risk must prepare its GMP Proposal in accordance with City’s request for GMP Proposal
requirements based on the most current completed Drawings and Specifications at that
time, which unless otherwise directed by City in writing, will be at 100% Construction
Drawings. CM@Risk must mark the face of each document of each set upon which its GMP
Proposal is based.
These documents must be identified as the GMP Plans and
Specifications. CM@Risk must send one set of those documents to the Project Manager,
keep one set and return the third set to the Design Professional.
17.7.4
An updated/revised Detailed Project Schedule, Equipment Plan, and Schedule of Values
must be included in any GMP Proposal(s), all of which must reflect the GMP Plans and
Specifications the Detailed Project Schedule must be shown in relationship to the Project
Schedule and identify any variance to the Baseline Project Schedule. Any such Detailed
Project Schedule updates/revisions must continue to comply with the requirements of
Section 17.3.1 through 17.3.5.
17.7.5
GMP Proposals(s) Review and Approval
17.7.5.1
CM@Risk must meet with the Project Team to review the GMP Proposal(s) and the written
statement of its basis. In the event the Project Team discovers inconsistencies or
inaccuracies
in the information presented, CM@Risk must make adjustments as
necessary to the GMP Proposal.
17.7.5.2
If during the review and negotiation of GMP Proposals design changes are required, City
may authorize and cause the Design Professional to revise the GMP Plans and Specifications
to the extent necessary to reflect the agreed-upon assumptions and clarifications contained
in the final approved GMP Proposal. Such revised GMP Plans and Specification will be
furnished to CM@Risk. CM@Risk must promptly notify the Project Team in writing if any
such revised
GMP Plans and Specifications are inconsistent with the agreed upon
assumptions and clarifications.
17.7.6
All portions of or items comprising the GMP Proposal are subject to audit by City, as
deemed appropriate by City, including, without limitation, any based upon unit prices or
Work to be self- performed by CM@Risk, or its affiliates.
17.8
PAYMENT PROCEDURE FOR PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
17.8.1
Requests for monthly payments by CM@Risk for Pre-Construction Services must be
submitted monthly and must be accompanied by a progress report, detailed invoices
and receipts, if applicable. Any requests for payment must include, as a minimum, a
narrative description of the tasks accomplished during the billing period, a listing of any
Deliverables submitted, and copies of any Subconsultants’ requests for payment, plus
similar narrative and listings of Deliverables associated with their Work. Payment for
services negotiated as a lump sum will be made in accordance with the percentage of work
completed during the preceding month.
17.8.2
In no event will City pay more than seventy-five (75%) of the Agreement Price until
acceptance of ALL Pre-Construction Services and award of the final approved Construction
Services Agreement for the entire Project by City Council. If CM@Risk does not prepare a
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-75 of 75
GMP Proposal that is acceptable to City, or the GMP Proposal exceeds the City’s
Construction Budget, then CM@Risk understands and acknowledges that it will forfeit any
right to receive the 25% of the Agreement Price being retained by City.
17.8.3
CM@Risk agrees that no charges or claims for costs or damages of any type will be made by
it for any delays or hindrances beyond the reasonable control of City during the progress of
any portion of Pre-Construction Services specified in this Agreement. Such delays or
hindrances, if
any, will be solely compensated for by an extension of time for such
reasonable period and may be mutually agreed between the parties. It is understood
and agreed, however, that permitting CM@Risk to proceed to complete any such Services,
in whole or in part after the date to which the time of completion may have been extended,
will in no way act as a waiver on the part of City of any of their respective legal rights herein.
17.8.4
No compensation to CM@Risk will be allowed contrary to Article I, Chapter I, Title 34 of the
Arizona Revised Statutes.
17.8.5
If any service(s) executed by CM@Risk is abandoned or suspended in whole or in part, for
a period of more than 180 days through no fault of CM@Risk, CM@Risk is to be paid for
the services performed prior to the abandonment or suspension.
17.9
SURVIVAL OF THE DESIGN SERVICES AGREEMENT, DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS AND
WARRANTIES
If the GMP Proposal is accepted by City and a Construction Agreement is entered into
between City and CM@Risk, the duties, obligations and warranties of CM@Risk under the
Pre- Construction Services Agreement survive and are incorporated into the resulting
Construction Agreement.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-1 of 33
General Conditions Appendices
SECTION 15 – APPENDICES
The following Appendices attached hereto are referenced in the General Conditions and
are incorporated herein.
Appendix 1 – Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages
Appendix 2 – Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals for Design Bid Build Agreements
Appendix 3 – Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims
Appendix 4 – Forms of Performance Bond
Appendix 5 – Forms of Payment Bond
Appendix 6 – Dispute Resolution
Appendix 7 – Certificate of Completion
Appendix 8 – Construction Sign Detail
Appendix 9 – Cost of the Work (Applicable solely to Construction Manager at Risk and
Job Order Contracting)
Appendix 10 Landscape Establishment Period
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-2 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
CALCULATING DELAYS AND DAMAGES
The purpose of this policy statement is to establish guidelines and procedures for negotiation between
the Contractor and City of Chandler relating to compensation for delays pursuant to Arizona Revised
Statutes (A.R.S.) 34-221(F). This policy statement contains notice requirements in addition to those set
forth in the Agreement Documents, and will be the Agreement Provision contemplated by that statute.
NOTE: As used herein, the term “Engineer” will refer to the City of Chandler City Engineer or
his/her designated representative. Nothing in this Policy Statement will be construed to void any
provision in the Agreement which requires timely notice of delays or provides for arbitration or
any other procedure for settlement or provides for liquidated damages.
I.
TYPES OF DELAYS:
For the purposes of this document, there are essentially four types of delays encountered by
City of Chandler Construction Contractors; excusable/compensable, excusable/non-
compensable, non- excusable, and concurrent. Only delays that extend Agreement
Completion Time set forth in the Agreement Document will be considered for issues
relating to Agreement extensions or additional compensation. All other delays are
considered to be activity delays and do not entitle the Contractor to either time extensions
or additional compensation. Agreement Completion Time will be defined as the date set forth
in Maricopa Association of Governments (MAG) Uniform Standard Specification Section 101
and as may be modified by the Agreement Documents.
A.
Excusable/Compensable:
These are delays caused solely by the City’s actions or inactions, are unreasonable
under the circumstances, and which were not within the contemplation of the
parties to the Agreement at or prior to the time of execution of the Agreement.
Since the Contractor presumably has no control over the events causing the delay,
he may be entitled to both Agreement time extensions and additional compensation
for delay damages. Further, he/she may be entitled to additional compensation from
the impact of that delay on other work. Examples of excusable/compensable (E/C)
delays include: failure to properly locate an underground City-owned utility within 2
feet of the actual location; failure to relocate City-owned utilities far enough in
advance of construction in an area where the Contractor is scheduled to work that
it delays start or completion of the Contractor’s regularly scheduled work; failure
to provide City-furnished equipment or materials in a timely manner if required by
the Agreement; failure to acquire necessary Right-of-Way or Public Utility Easements
prior to the Contractor beginning Work in the area; failure to timely return Shop
Drawings or other Agreement Submittals in accordance with the Agreement;
unreasonable delay by the City in making decisions which affect critical activities;
surveying errors when the City is contractually responsible for providing Project
Surveying. This list is not meant to be all inclusive, but is intended merely as examples
of the type of City action or inaction which can result in a Contractor’s claim for
additional time and compensation.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-3 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
B.
Excusable/Non-compensable:
These are delays over which neither the City nor the Contractor had control. Since
both parties to the Agreement have been potentially damaged by the delay, but
neither have caused it, only Time Extensions are warranted. Examples of excusable,
non-compensable (E/N) delays include: unusually severe weather; fire; acts of God;
failure of non-City owned utilities (SRP, CenturyLink, Cable TV, Southern Pacific
Railroad, and Southwest Gas, etc.) to properly or timely locate accurately; failure of
non-City owned utilities to relocate in advance of construction; the voluntary or
involuntary filing for Bankruptcy protection by a Supplier or Subcontractor which
causes the Supplier/Subcontractor to fail to meet a contractual deadline provided the
Contractor can provide documentation that he/she executed the required Purchase
Orders/Subcontract Agreements and received delivery schedules which, if met,
would have eliminated the delay; delays as a result of an incomplete shutdown of a
City or non-City owned utility main (the City does not guarantee a complete
shutdown). This list also is not necessarily all inclusive but merely indicative of type
and class of E/N delays.
C.
Non-excusable/Non-compensable:
These are delays caused by the actions or inactions of Contractor or an officer,
employee, agent, Subcontractor, Supplier or any other party for whom the Contractor
is responsible. Since the Contractor has assumed responsibility for the risks
associated with the events that caused the delay, he/she are not entitled to either time
extensions or monetary delay damages. All non-excusable delays are also non-
compensable. Examples of non- excusable, non-compensable (N/N) delays include:
failure to perform by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and/or Suppliers (except as
noted in section I.B above); failure to provide adequate labor, materials, and/or
equipment on the Project; failure to perform contractually-required coordination
with utilities, agencies and other Contractors; failure to notify the Engineer, in writing,
of delay impacts within two working days, as required by MAG 104.2.3, or the next
work day, as required by MAG 109.8.2; failure to timely submit Shop Drawings; failure
to pothole or otherwise visually locate utilities sufficiently ahead of the Work to allow
the Engineer to direct corrective action when necessary; delays due to retesting of
previously failed work, re-inspection, and/or restaking resulting from faulty
workmanship, poor quality control, or lack of compliance with Agreement
Specifications. Again, this list is not necessarily all inclusive.
D.
Concurrent:
When two or more delays occur simultaneously or overlap, each delay is analyzed
separately to determine its impact on the overall project completion date based on
when that delay started. Once again, only those delays which actually extend the
Agreement completion time are considered as delays. The concurrent delay is
considered an additional delay only to the extent it prolongs the delay to the
Agreement Completion Time beyond the date that the one it is concurrent with had
already delayed that date. For example, if two delays are concurrent, and one is five
days long and the second is seven days long, the second concurrent delay will only
extend the Agreement Completion Time by two days. The same method of analysis is
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-4 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
used when there are multiple concurrent delays. Only those extending the Project
Completion Date are considered to be delays for the purposes of this policy. The
portion of each concurrent delay that delays the completion of the work is classified
in the same manner as described previously for individual delays and being either E/C,
E/N or N/N.
An example of a concurrent delay is where the City delays furnishing material, but
the Contractor could not have installed it anyway due to unusually severe weather. The
effect of the first delaying activity will extend for the full duration and will be
considered controlling on the Contractor’s schedule. A subsequent, concurrent delay
will thereafter only be considered to effect the project completion (if at all) once the
first delaying activity has ceased to impact the project completion. In this case, if the
unusually severe weather continued and delayed the work after the material was
delivered, the first portion of the delay would be classified E/C (delay for material)
and the second as E/N (delay due to unusually severe weather). Using the procedure
set forth above, the entire concurrent portion would be considered E/C as shown in
the chart which follows.
Example of a Concurrent Delay:
E/C Delay
E/N Delay
City Related Material Delay
Rain Delay
II.
ANALYZING THE DELAY:
The Contractor must provide all documents required or requested by the Engineer to analyze the
delay(s). It is important to understand that, prior to the delay analysis, delays and their impacts are
alleged issues. The information the Contractor provides will be compared with the Inspector’s Daily
Log, Schedules and other available Project information and together they will support or refute that
delays occurred and, if so, how they impact other work and the overall project completion. The
Contractor’s delay in providing these documents will be considered prima facie evidence that either
the delay did not occur or it did not impact the Project Completion Date and any claim for time
extension or damages will be denied.
The Engineer will accept delay analyses in CPM format, as these may demonstrate to his/her
satisfaction whether or not Project Completion has been impacted by a specific event. If the Contractor
chooses not to use CPM scheduling procedures, then the burden will be on the Contractor to prove
to the Engineer’s satisfaction that the Project Completion has been impacted. The procedures
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-5 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
below assume that the Contractor is using CPM scheduling methods. As a minimum the Contractor
must provide the following materials to the Engineer:
A.
As-Planned Schedule. The initial construction schedule, required by the Agreement
Documents, will be considered the baseline schedule. It is to the Contractor’s
advantage that the As-Planned (baseline) Schedule be as detailed as possible in order
for delays, as they occur, to be incorporated into the schedule in representative
locations. It is also to the Contractor’s advantage to use a computer software program
to generate the schedule since updated schedules are required monthly by the
Agreement Documents and since updated schedules are required to support
delays and requests for additional compensation for delays. The As-Planned
(baseline) Schedule must be presented in network format which clearly shows the
interrelationships of the activities. The Contractor must also provide a printout of the
activities showing early start, early finish, late start, late finish, duration and float. The
activity list printout must also indicate predecessor and successor activities.
B.
As-Built Schedules. The as planned (baseline) schedule must be updated with
complete progress-to-date information (actualized) up to the date of the start of the
alleged delay. Each updated schedule will serve as the as-built schedule for analyzing
the alleged delay and provide a new baseline as-planned schedule for the next delay.
This process must be repeated for each alleged delay as it occurs. In updating the
baseline schedule, the alleged delay must be treated as an activity and inserted into the
schedule as a predecessor to the impacted activity (ies). When an activity that has
already started is impacted, it is preferable to divide this activity into two parts and
show the impact affecting the second part. For schedules which incorporate a time
line (or data date), the delay activity must be inserted at the time it actually occurred.
Some software scheduling programs have a PAUSE-RESUME feature that can be
used to facilitate the requirements. The updated schedule must also be accompanied
by a listing of activities as with the baseline schedule. This activities list must contain
the alleged delay as an activity showing the duration and the activities which are
predecessors and successors to it. When computer generated schedules are used,
the Contractor must provide, in electronic media format, the complete data files for
the updated schedule that included the delay activity, preferably either in Suretrak
or in Microsoft Project. Each electronic media must contain a label identifying the
Project name, Contractor’s name, program name and version number, data date
and project finish date.
C.
Other Documents: In order to determine the amount of the alleged delay and if it
is compensable, the Contractor must provide all backup documentation relevant to the
issue and as required by the Engineer. This documentation must include copies of
such items as: purchase orders; delivery schedules; correspondence; memoranda of
telephone calls; force account daily worksheets (initialed by the Inspector); payroll
data; estimating (bid) worksheets; and any other materials which may be requested
by the Engineer.
D.
Procedure: Only after receipt of sufficient documentation will the Engineer analyze
each alleged delay and determine if it is supported or refuted. If supported, the
Engineer will determine if it is excusable or non-excusable, compensable or non-
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-6 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
compensable. If the Engineer determines that the delay did not affect the Project
Completion, the as-planned schedule, which has been updated to the date of the
alleged delay, must be revised to indicate this. If the Engineer determines the delay
did occur but was N/N, then no time extension will be granted. It is imperative that
an actualized schedule be submitted as soon as the occurrence of the alleged delay
is known. In no event will the Contractor submit an actualized updated schedule
later than 60 days after the occurrence of the alleged delay becomes known.
If the Engineer determines the delay did occur and was excusable but, due to a
reason listed in section I.B. is non-compensable, he/she will determine the length of
the E/N delay and prepare a Change Order to add that time to the Agreement. The
Engineer’s decision will be final.
If the Engineer determines the delay was excusable and compensable, he/she will
determine the length of the E/C delay and proceed to review the Contractor’s damage
calculations in accordance with Section III. The Engineer will check the Contractor’s
calculations, review the backup documentation provided, and prepare a Change
Order to cover both the additional compensation and the time extension. The
Engineer’s decision on both the time extension and additional compensation for the
delay will be final.
If the issue involves a concurrent delay, the Engineer will analyze available data
to determine the portions which are E/C, E/N, and/or N/N as described above. The
Engineer will proceed to determine the length of E/C delay and verify the Contractor’s
delay damage calculations, if any are provided. Upon completion of this review, the
Engineer will prepare a Change Order for the Contractor’s review and signature.
The Engineer’s decision regarding excusable delay and additional compensation for
the delay is final.
The amount of time the Engineer will require to analyze the alleged delay(s) will
depend upon the Engineer’s workload, the complexity of the delay analysis,
availability of supporting data, extent of cooperation by the Contractor, and other
factors beyond the Engineer’s control. It is entirely possible other delay(s) may occur
while the Engineer is analyzing particular claim for delay(s). The Engineer’s failure to
respond to the Contractor in a set period of time will not be used as the basis for
a further delay claim or as justification for extending and existing delay claim. The
time required for delay analysis by the Engineer will not be counted against the time
allotted for processing Final Payment as required by (MAG Section 109.7(B)) or the
release of retention and Final Payment as prescribed by A.R.S. Arizona Revised
Statutes §34-221.
III.
CALCULATING MONETARY DELAY DAMAGES:
Additional compensation for delay, when authorized by the Engineer, will be calculated in accordance
with MAG Section 109.5 ACTUAL COST WORK with the following exceptions:
A.
No additional compensation or other monetary damages will be awarded or paid for
any loss of anticipated profits by the Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-7 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
B.
No additional compensation or other monetary damages will be awarded for home
office overhead or non-project general conditions of the Contractor, Subcontractors
or Suppliers.
C.
Equipment:
1.
Contractor-owned equipment rate calculations must be computed in
accordance with Section 109.04(D)(3), Arizona Department of Transportation
“Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,” 2008 or latest
edition and as modified herein. Year and regional adjustment factors must be
based on the most recent publications of the Rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction
Equipment, published
by
the
Equipment
Guide-Book
Company, San Jose, CA, same as provided by ADOT and in print as of the
date of alleged delay. In no event will the compensation for Contractor-
owned equipment exceed the purchase price, including tax, paid by the
Contractor for the equipment. Compensation will not be allowed for small tools
or equipment that show a daily equipment rental rate of less than $5.00 per
day or for unlisted equipment that has a value of less than for hundred
dollars ($400.00).
2.
For leased and rented equipment or equipment not otherwise listed in the
Blue Book, rental contracts, or other supporting data will be used to establish
the hourly rate. No hourly operating expense will be allowed for delay on
standby equipment. In no case will equipment be considered for rental which
exceeds the hourly rate for the first eight hours and the daily rate divided
by eight for all additional hours as compared with similar equipment listed in
the Blue Book. The hourly standby rate must be computed as the lesser of:
a.
Dividing the monthly invoice or rental value by 176 hours
per month when the equipment is utilized by the Contractor
for more than three weeks;
b.
Dividing the monthly invoice or rental value by 40 hours per
week when the equipment is utilized by the Contractor for
more than three days.
In no event will compensation be paid for delay at more than
8 hours per day or 40 hours per week.
3.
Except for vehicles used by supervisory personnel, all equipment will be paid
at the “standby” rate during the delay period.
4.
Equipment brought solely to mitigate the delay (such as pumps, light plants,
etc.) may be paid in accordance with ADOT section 109.04(D) (3).
5.
The Blue Book regional adjustment will apply in determining rental rates.
D.
Material:
Allowable material charges may include, in addition to material incorporated in the
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-8 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
work material used to mitigate the delay such as barricades, plates, shoring, cold
mix, etc. Except in emergencies the Contractor will not employ such material
without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
E.
Labor:
1.
Except for Supervisory Personnel (Superintendent, Project Engineer, and
Foremen), labor wages will not be paid after the first one-half day of claimed
delay or impact. It is expected the Contractor will reassign or layoff
unneeded employees.
2.
For Foreman wages to be included, that Foreman must have been actively
employed on the project prior to the commencement of the delay and be
directly responsible for the activity being delayed.
3.
Labor burden must be actual amounts incurred but must not exceed the
ADOT approved rate.
F.
All costs (equipment, material, and labor) must be substantiated by the City of
Chandler’s Daily Work Reports.
IV.
DOCUMENT REQUIRED FOR CLAIM ANALYSIS:
For purposes of reviewing the Contractor’s request for additional compensation, it will be required
that the Contractor submit the following listed information. Information requested must be prepared
on forms which are substantially similar to the City of Chandler’s Daily Work Report form, a copy of
which is attached as an exhibit.
A.
Labor:
For each employee, laborer, and foreman, for which compensation is requested:
Name, classification, dates of work performed, daily hours worked, total hours worked,
labor rates, labor burden rates, overtime or premium time charges. Further, the
Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the Engineer the
following listed documentation.
1.
Certified payroll reports for the period of work claimed.
2.
Accounting of Fringe Benefits – certified by a CPA.
3.
Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s daily field reports and daily diaries.
B.
Materials:
For all materials for which compensation is requested, if any, total quantities of
materials, prices, extensions and transportation costs must be provided on a daily
basis. Further, the Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the
Engineer the following listed documentation.
1.
Invoices for all materials incorporated.
2.
Weigh tickets.
3.
Purchase orders.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-9 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
4.
Delivery schedules.
5.
Quotes or proposals from manufacturers or supplier.
6.
Freight bills, Bills of Lading, or other documentation to show transportation
costs.
7.
Restocking charges-invoices from vendor.
C.
Equipment:
For all equipment, the Contractor must provide the Engineer with the designation,
dates and hours of usage, dates and hours of standby, if any, daily hours, total hours,
rental rates and extension for each unit of equipment and machinery. Rental
rates will be as established in Section III. Further, the Contractor must make available
for inspection and copying to the Engineer the following listed documentation.
1.
Owned:
a.
Purchase contracts(s).
b.
Depreciation schedule(s).
c.
Invoices for fuel, lube, repairs and other operating costs.
2.
Leased:
a.
Lease agreement with hourly rate, overtime rate, double shift rate, etc.
b.
Invoices or other documentation showing hours worked on a daily
basis.
D.
Subcontractors/Owner-Operators:
In the event the Contractor submits a claim which includes requests for compensation
for Subcontractors of Owner-Operators, the same information requested of the
Contractor must be provided by the Subcontractor/Owner-Operator. Further, the
Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the Engineer the
following listed documentation.
1.
Bid/Estimate work sheets and/or spreadsheets.
2.
Subcontract Agreements or Agreements with Owner-Operator.
3.
All invoices and billing statements received from the Subcontractor/Owner-
Operator which relates to the amount requested.
E.
Miscellaneous:
Further, the Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the Engineer
the following listed documentation.
1.
Evidence of payment for bonds and insurance premiums (MAG 109.5.6).
2.
Taxes – unless the Contractor can show otherwise, taxes are reimbursable at
65% of the total cost (less bonds and insurance).
V.
TIME LIMIT ON SUBMISSIONS OF CLAIM FOR DELAY OR IMPACT DAMAGES:
No claims for delay or impact damages will be considered or allowed more than 45 days after the
event or occurrence which the Contractor claims gives rise to the delay or impact. In no event will a
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-10 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
claim for delay or impact damages be considered after submission by the Contractor of the Final
Payment Request.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-11 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
COST REDUCTION INCENTIVE PROPOSALS
FOR DESIGN BID BUILD AGREEMENTS
The Contractor may submit to the Engineer proposals for modifying the Plans, Specifications, or
other requirements of the Agreement for the sole purpose of reducing the total cost of Project
construction. The proposals must not impair in any manner the essential functions or characteristics
of the project; including but not limited to service life, economy of operations, ease of maintenance,
desired appearance, compatibility with existing or planned equipment, standardization of systems,
or design and safety standards.
It must not be inferred from this Policy that the Engineer is required to consider any proposal
submitted.
Submissions that propose changes in the basic design of a bridge, propose changes in pipe line
size, materials, bedding conditions, pipe specifications; or that propose any change in pavement design
will not be considered.
Proposals submitted pursuant to this Policy will be identified as Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals.
They must be submitted in writing and, at a minimum, contain the following.
1.
Complete the attached or similar cost reduction incentive proposal form.
2.
A description of both the existing Agreement Requirements for performing the work
and the proposed changes.
3.
All Engineering Drawings and computations necessary for the thorough and
expeditious evaluation.
4.
An itemization of the existing Agreement Requirements that must be changed if the
Proposal is adopted and a recommendation as to the manner in which the change
should be made.
5.
A detailed estimate of the cost of performing the Work under the existing
Agreement and under the proposed changes, including the cost of developing and
implementing the changes.
6.
The Agreement items affected by the proposed changes and any variations in
quantities resulting from the changes.
7.
An objective estimate of any effects the proposal will have on collateral cost to the
City, costs of related items, and cost of maintenance and operation.
8.
A statement as to the effect that the Proposal will have on the time for the completion
of the Project.
9.
A statement as to the time by which a Change Order adopting the Proposal must
be executed or when the Engineer must have given verbal approval.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-12 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
Proposals will be processed expeditiously; however, the City will not be liable for any delay in acting
upon any Proposal nor for any failure to accept any Proposal pursuant to this Special Provision.
The Engineer will be the sole judge of the acceptability of a Proposal and of the estimated net savings
in construction costs from the adoption of all or any part of the Proposal. The Contractor will be
notified in writing by the Engineer as to whether his/her Proposal has been accepted. The decision by
the Engineer is final.
When the City deems such action to be appropriate, it reserves the right to require the Contractor to
share equally in the cost to the City of investigating, evaluating, and processing the proposal as a
condition for the consideration of such Proposal. Such cost must be shared whether the Proposal is
accepted or rejected. When such a condition is imposed, the City will estimate these costs and the
Contractor must indicate his acceptance thereof in writing. Such acceptance will authorize the City to
deduct the Contractor’s share of the costs from any monies due or that may become due to the
Contractor under the Agreement.
If the Contractor’s Proposal is accepted in whole or in part, the necessary Agreement Modifications
and Agreement Price Adjustments will be affected by the execution of a Change Order which will
specifically state that it is executed pursuant to this Special Provision.
The Contractor must continue to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the
Agreement until a Change Order incorporating the Proposal has been executed or until he/she has
been given verbal approval by the Engineer that his/her Proposal has been accepted. If the Change
Order has not been executed or he/she has not been given verbal approval on or before the date
specified on the attached cost reduction incentive proposal form or on or before such other date as the
Contractor may have subsequently specified in writing, the Proposal may be deemed to be rejected.
The executed Change Order will incorporate the changes in the Plans, Specifications, or other
requirements of the Agreement which are necessary to permit the Proposal, or such part of it which
has been accepted, to be put into effect, and will include any condition – upon which the City’s
approval thereof is based, if such approval is conditional. The executed Change Order may also
extend the time for the completion of the Agreement if such an extension has been deemed to be
warranted by the Engineer as a result of his evaluation of the Proposal.
The executed Change Order will also establish the estimated net savings in the cost of performing
the Work attributable to the Proposal effectuated by the Change Order. In determining the net
savings, the right is reserved to the Engineer to disregard the Agreement bid prices if, in his/her
judgment, such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value of the Work to be performed or
to be deleted. The net savings will be established by determining the Contractor’s cost of performing
the Work, taking into account his/her cost of developing the Proposal and implementing the change,
and reducing this amount by any ascertainable collateral costs to the City. The executed Change
Order may provide that the Contractor be paid 50 percent of the estimated net savings amount.
The executed Change Order may also provide for the adjustment in Agreement prices. Agreement
prices may be adjusted by subtracting the City’s share of the accrued net savings.
The amount specified to be paid to the Contractor in the executed Change Order which effectuates a
Cost Reduction Proposal will constitute full compensation to the Contractor for the Cost Reduction
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-13 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
Proposal and the performance of the work thereof pursuant to the said Change Order.
Upon acceptance of a Cost Reduction Incentive Proposal, any restrictions imposed by the
Contractor on its use or on disclosure of the information will become void, and the City thereafter
will have the right to use all or any part of the Proposal without obligation or compensation of any
kind to the Contractor.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-14 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
COST REDUCTION INCENTIVE PROPOSAL FORM
TO:
CIP City Engineer
FROM:
PROJECT NAME:
WATER SYSTEM UPGRADES PROGRAM
CITY PROJECT NUMBER:
WA2100.402
DATE:
Summary of Change (Brief description of proposed change including advantages and disadvantages):
ESTIMATED COST SUMMARY (Attached detailed estimate):
A.
Original Cost:
$
B.
Proposed Cost:
$
C.
Construction Savings (A-B):
$
D.
Gross Savings (Included OH
%, Bond
%)
$
E.
Contractor Implementing
$_
F.
City Implementing Cost:
$_
Reduction in Agreement Price (C+D-E-F) x 50%:
$
Date by which a Change Order must be issued so as to obtain maximum cost reduction:
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-15 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 3
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT REGARDING SETTLEMENT OF CLAIMS
________________________, Arizona
Date ____________________________
Project Name: Water System Upgrades Program
City Project No.: WA2100.402
To the City of Chandler, Arizona
Gentlemen:
This is to certify that all lawful claims for materials, rental of equipment and labor used in connection
with the construction of the above project, whether by subcontractor or claimant in person, have been
duly discharged.
The undersigned, for the total compensation of $________________________, as set out in the final pay
application, as full and complete payment under the terms of the Agreement, hereby waives and
relinquishes any and all further claims or right of lien under, in connection with, or as a result of the
above described project. The undersigned further agrees to indemnify and save harmless the City of
Chandler against any and all liens, claims or liens, suits, actions, damages, charges and expenses
whatsoever, which said City may suffer arising out of the failure of the undersigned to pay for all labor
performances and materials furnished for the performance of said installation.
Signed and dated at ________________, this _________ day of _______________ 20_____.
__________________________________
CONTRACTOR
By _______________________________
STATE OF ARIZONA
)
) SS
COUNTY OF MARICOPA
)
The foregoing instrument was subscribed and sworn to before me this __________ day of
__________________ 20 _________.
___________________________________
Notary Public
___________________________________
My Commission Expires
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-16 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 5
PERFORMANCE BOND
ARIZONA STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND
PURSUANT TO TITLES 28, 34, AND 41, ARIZONA REVISED STATUTES
(Penalty of this bond must be 100% of the Agreement amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT:___________________________________________________
(hereinafter "Principal"), and __________________________________________________________ (hereinafter "Surety"), a
corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ______________ with its principal office in the City
of _____________________________, holding a certificate of authority to transact surety business in Arizona issued by the
Director of Insurance pursuant to Title 20, Chapter 2, Article 1, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
__________________________(hereinafter "Obligee") in the amount of __________________________________________ (Dollars)
($___________), for the payment whereof, Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Agreement with the Obligee, dated
the ____________ day of _______________________, 20___ for construction of WA2100.402, Water System Upgrades
Program which Agreement is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copies
at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal faithfully performs
and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, and conditions of the Agreement during the original term of the
Agreement and any extension of the Agreement, with or without notice of the Surety, and during the life of any
guaranty required under the Agreement, and also performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms,
conditions, and agreements of all duly authorized modifications of the Agreement that may hereafter be made,
notice of which modifications to the Surety being hereby waived, the above obligation is void. Otherwise it remains
in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2,
Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this bond will be determined in accordance with the provisions of Title
34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, to the same extent as if it were copied at length in this Agreement.
The prevailing party in a suit on this bond may recover as part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees
that may be fixed by a judge of the court.
Witness our hands this ________________ day of ____________________, 20__.
____________________________________
PRINCIPAL
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT OF RECORD
By _________________________________
____________________________________
SURETY
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT ADDRESS
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-17 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 5
PAYMENT BOND
ARIZONA STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND
PURSUANT TO TITLES 28, 34, AND 41, OF THE ARIZONA REVISED STATUTES
(Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of the Agreement amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT:________________________________________________
(hereinafter "Principal"), as Principal, and _________________________________________(hereinafter "Surety"), a
corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of __________________ with its principal office in the
City of __________________, holding a certificate of authority to transact surety business in Arizona issued by the
Director of the Department of Insurance pursuant to Title 20, Chapter 2, Article 1, as Surety, are held and firmly
bound
unto
________________________
(hereinafter
"Obligee")
in
the
amount
of
______________________________________________ (Dollars) ($___________), for the payment whereof, the Principal and
Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Agreement with the Obligee, dated the _________ day of
_______________________, 20___ for construction of WA2100.402, Water System Upgrades Program which Agreement
is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal promptly pays all
moneys due to all persons supplying labor or materials to the Principal or the Principal's subcontractors in the
prosecution of the work provided for in said Agreement, this obligation is void. Otherwise it remains in full force
and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2
Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this bond will be determined in accordance with the provisions,
conditions and limitations of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, to the same extent as if it were
copied at length in this Agreement.
The prevailing party in a suit on this bond may recover as part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees
that may be fixed by a judge of the court.
Witness our hands this ________________ day of ____________________, 20__.
____________________________________
PRINCIPAL
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT OF RECORD
By _________________________________
____________________________________
SURETY
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT ADDRESS
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-18 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
DISPUTE RESOLUTION
A.
INFORMAL DISPUTE RESOLUTION
The parties to the Agreement agree that time is of the essence in relation to
performance of the Agreement and completion of the Project, therefore any and all
disputes in relation to the Agreement will initially be referred to the Project Manager,
the Design Professional Representative and/or the Contractor Representative as
applicable to the dispute, for immediate resolution. If, after good faith efforts to reach
a resolution, none is reached, any party to the dispute may submit the dispute to
the Dispute Resolution Representative (“DRR”) process set forth below, which is
intended to be an expedited process.
B.
DISPUTE RESOLUTION REPRESENTATIVE (“DRR”) PROCESS
1.
The Parties under the Agreement agree that all claims and disputes in relation
to the Project which are not resolved in the ordinary course of the Project
(“Claim” or “Claims”) will, as a prerequisite to any mediation, or litigation of
the Claim, first be submitted for resolution between the designated
Dispute Resolution Representatives of the Parties as set forth herein (the “DRR
Process”).
2.
The DRR Process will be initiated through service of a DRR Notice as set forth
below:
a.
For claims by the Contractor or the Design Professional, the DRR
Process will be initiated by the party asserting the claim serving written
notice on the City setting forth in detail: (i) the basis for the claim; (ii) the
effect of the Claim upon the construction of, and/or Project Schedule
for, the Project;
(iii) the specific relief requested, the amount thereof, and how such
was calculated; (iv) the parties involved in the Claim, and how they
are involved; (v) the specific Agreement provisions in the Agreement
Documents (including, if applicable, drawings and specifications) which
apply; and (vi) efforts made to date to resolve the Claim.
b.
For claims by the City, the DRR process will be initiated by the City
providing written notice to the other parties of the basis and amount
of its claim, the parties involved in the Claim, and how they are
involved, the provisions in the Agreement Documents that apply, and
the relief requested.
c.
The DRR Notice will be hand-delivered and e-mailed to the other
parties’ designated Dispute Resolution Representatives.
3.
The other parties will respond in writing to the DRR Notice (“DRR Response”)
within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of the DRR Notice, setting forth those
items set forth in the DRR Notice that they agree with, dispute, and/or have
questions concerning. The DRR Response will be hand-delivered and e-mailed
to the other parties’ Dispute Resolution Representatives.
4.
The designated Dispute Resolution Representatives for the Parties to the
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-19 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
claim will then meet as soon as possible and in any event within twenty (20)
calendar days of submission of the DRR Notice (regardless of whether a DRR
Response has been submitted by all parties involved in the dispute), at a
mutually agreed upon time and place, to attempt to resolve the Claim based
upon the DRR Notice and DRR Response.
5.
At any time after the first meeting required above, either party may terminate
the DRR Process by written notice to the other party.
6.
The parties may agree, in writing, to extend or modify the time limits or
other provisions of the DRR process in relation to a specific pending Claim.
7.
Unless otherwise designated in a written notice to the other parties, the City
and the representatives of the Contractor and of the Design Professional will
act as the parties’ designated Dispute Resolution Representatives.
8.
If a resolution of the Claim is reached, that resolution must be set forth in
writing and must be signed by the Parties’ designated Dispute Resolution
Representative. If the resolution involves a change in any Agreement
Documents, the Agreement Price, the Project Schedule, or any other change
requiring a written Change Order or Amendment, the parties must execute
an appropriate written Change Order or Amendment pursuant to the terms
of the Agreement Documents.
C.
MEDIATION
1.
Unless extended by written agreement of the parties involved in the dispute,
any Claim not resolved through the DRR process set forth above within
five (5) calendar days after the meeting required under B (4) above, or after
the DRR is terminated pursuant to B (5) above, whichever is earlier, will be
submitted to mediation as a condition precedent to litigation by either party.
2.
The mediation will be commenced by written demand upon the other party
for mediation. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator within ten (10)
calendar days of the written demand, either party may make a request to the
Civil Presiding Judge of the Maricopa County Superior Court to appoint a
mediator. The mediation will occur within forth (40) calendar days of the
written demand for mediation, unless the parties agree, in writing, to a longer
period of time.
3.
The qualifications for the mediator will be that he/she be: (a) an experienced
mediator, arbitrator or litigator of construction disputes; and (b) having
engaged a significant portion of his/her time involving and/or resolving
construction disputes for at least the past five (5) years.
4.
Each party will provide to the other party and the mediator all of the
information and documentation required under B(1) and (2) above, together
with any additional information and documentation which the party believes
relevant. In addition, the parties will exchange, and provide to the mediator
such additional memoranda, information and/or documentation, as the
mediator may request, and in the form and at such times, as the mediator may
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-20 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
direct.
5.
The parties will share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The
mediation will be held in Chandler, Arizona, unless another location is
mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation will be specifically
enforceable in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
D.
LITIGATION
Any claim arising out of or related to the Agreement, except Claims relating to aesthetic
effect and except those claims waived as provided for in the Agreement
Documents, must be resolved through litigation in the Maricopa County, Arizona
Superior Court.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-21 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 7
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
PROJECT NAME:
WATER SYSTEM UPGRADES PROGRAM
CITY PROJECT NO.:
WA2100.402
If Federally Funded:
FEDERAL NO.:
ADOT NO:
(This section to be completed by Prime)
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT ALL GOODS AND/OR SERVICES REQUIRED BY CITY OF CHANDLER FOR THIS
PROJECT HAVE BEEN DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AGREEMENT DOCUMENTS AND BID
SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL ACTIVITIES REQUIRED BY THE AGREEMENTOR UNDER THE AGREEMENT HAVE
BEEN COMPLETED AS OF THE COMPLETION DATE LISTED HERE:
FINAL ACCEPTANCE DATE:
PRIME CONTRACTOR:
FIRM NAME:
PRINCIPAL:
TITLE:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
CERTIFIED BY [INSERT NAME AND TITLE OF PARTY THAT OVERSEES CONSTRUCTION]:
FIRM NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
PROJECT ACCEPTED BY CITY OF CHANDLER:
NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-22 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 8
CONSTRUCTION SIGN DETAIL
8'
3"
CITY OF CHANDLER
5"
3"
PUTTING YOUR FUNDS TO WORK
5"
3"
PROJECT TITLE:
5"
4'
3"
PROJECT NUMBER:
3"
2"
PROJECT COST:
3"
2"
CONTRACTOR:
3"
2"
MANAGED BY:
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
3"
CAPITAL PROJECTS DIVISION
3"
<--- 4" X 4" POSTS --->
NOTES:
SIGN(S) MUST BE FURNISHED AND ERECTED PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION. POSTS
MUST BE ANCHORED A MINIMUM OF TWO FEET INTO THE GROUND. BOTTOM OF SIGN MUST BE A
MINIMUM OF FOUR FEET ABOVE THE GROUND.
TYPICAL PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN FOR GENERAL PROJECTS MUST BE NON-REFLECTORIZED GREEN
BACKGROUND, AND NON-REFLECTORIZED WHITE LETTERS AND NUMERALS.
ONE SIGN MUST BE ERECTED FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER LIMITED AREA SINGLE SITES. FOR MULTIPLE
SITES, ONE SIGN MUST BE ERECTED AT EACH SITE.
FOR LINEAR PROJECTS ONE HALF MILE OR LONGER, PLACE ONE SIGN AT EACH END OF THE PROJECT.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-23 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
COST OF THE WORK
(APPLICABLE SOLELY TO CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK AND JOB ORDER CONTRACTING)
SECTION 1 – COSTS TO BE REIMBURSED
1.1 Cost of the Work
The term Cost of the Work will mean costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the proper
performance of the Work. Such costs must be at rates not higher than the standard paid at the place
of the Project except with prior consent of City. The Cost of the Work will include only the items set
forth in this Section 1.
1.2 Labor Costs
1.2.1
Wages of construction workers directly employed by the Contractor to perform the
construction of the Work at the site or, with City’s approval, at off-site workshops. Cost to
be reimbursed will be the actual wages paid to the individuals performing the work.
1.2.2
Wages or salaries of the Contractor’s supervisory and administrative personnel when
stationed at
the site with City’s approval. No Contractor personnel stationed at the
Contractor’s home or branch offices will be charged to the Cost of the Work. Non-field office
based Contractor management and support personnel are expected to provide service and
advice from time to time throughout the job and his/her time devoted to Project matters is
considered to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.2.3
Wages and salaries of Contractor’s supervisory or administrative personnel who would
normally be stationed at the field office in accordance with Section 1.2.2 but who become
engaged, at factories,
workshops or on the road, in expediting the production or
transportation of materials or equipment required for the Work, but only for that portion of
his/her time required for the Work. Employee
bonuses and/or costs associated with
Employee Stock Ownership Plans (“ESOP”) will not be considered reimbursable labor or
labor burden costs and will be considered non-reimbursable costs considered to be covered
by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.2.4
Costs paid or incurred by Contractor for taxes, insurance, contributions, assessments and
benefits required by law or collective bargaining agreements and, for personnel not
covered by such agreements, customary benefits such as sick leave, medical and health
benefits, holiday, vacations and pensions, provided such costs are based on wages and
salaries included in the Cost of the Work under Subparagraphs 1.2.1 through 1.2.3.
1.2.4.1 Cost of the Work will include the actual net cost to Contractor for worker’s compensation
insurance attributable to the wages chargeable to the Cost of Work per this Agreement. The
actual
net cost of worker’s compensation must take into consideration all cost
adjustments due
to
experience modifiers, premium discounts, policy dividends,
retrospective rating plan premium adjustments, assigned risk pool rebates, any applicable
weekly maximums, etc. Contractor may
charge an estimated amount for worker’s
compensation insurance costs, but will make appropriate cost adjustments to actual costs
within 45 days of receipt of actual cost adjustments from the insurance carrier.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-24 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
1.2.4.3 Overtime wages paid to salaried personnel (if approved in advance in writing by City) will
be reimbursed at the actual rate of overtime pay paid to the individual. No time charges for
overtime hours worked on the Project will be allowed if the individual is not paid for the
overtime worked.
1.2.4.4 Any overtime premium or shift differential expense to be incurred by Contractor for hourly
workers will require City’s advance written approval before the incremental cost of the
overtime premium or shift differential will be considered a reimbursable cost. If the
Contractor is required to work overtime as a result of an inexcusable delay or other
coordination problems caused by the Contractor or anyone he/she is responsible for,
the overtime premium and/or shift differential expense portion of the payroll expense and
related labor burden costs will be considered as cost not to be reimbursed.
1.2.4.5 Reimbursable labor burden costs will be limited to payroll taxes, worker’s compensation
insurance, the employer’s portion of union benefit costs for union employees working on the
Project, and the actual verifiable fringe benefit costs incurred by Contractor for non-union
individuals working on the Project subject to the following maximum percentages for the
following reimbursable non-union fringe benefit costs. The following maximums (as a
percentage of reimbursable actual wages by individual) will apply for each of the following
types of fringe benefit costs specifically attributable to each of the non-union personnel
working on the Project:
•
Medical Insurance, Dental, Life & AD&D Insurance:
12.00%
•
Holiday, vacation and other paid time not worked:
10.00%
• Pension Plan Contributions to Vested Employee Account,
Simplified Employee Pension Plans, or 401K matching plans
(Note: ESOP related costs are covered by the Contractor Fee)
10.00%
For non-union personnel, no other fringe benefit costs (other than the three specific
categories listed immediately above, will be considered reimbursable Cost of Work. Any labor
burden costs that are in excess of the amounts considered reimbursable or are otherwise
not considered reimbursable under the terms of this agreement are intended to be covered
by the Contractor Fee.
1.3
Subcontract Costs
1.3.1
Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors in accordance with the requirements of
the subcontracts.
1.3.2
For Scope of Work Bid Packages typically performed by Subcontractors, Contractor may
“self- perform” such work on an actual cost basis subject to an agreed upon Guaranteed
Maximum Price for the “self-performed work”. The Contractor must, unless agreed to by City
in writing, bid his/her proposed guaranteed Maximum Price for the work to be “self-
performed” against at least three other interested trade Contractors. All savings under any
such Subcontract for “self-performed work” must be applied to reduce the Cost of Work under
the Agreement and the Guaranteed Maximum Price. For purposes of defining “self-
performed work” subject to this provision, any division of Contractor, or any separate
Contractor or Subcontractor that is partially owned or wholly owned by the Contractor or any
of his/her employees or employee’s relatives will be considered a related party entity and
will be subject to this provision regarding “self-performed work”. No self-performed work will
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-25 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
be allowed to be performed on a Fixed Price basis.
1.3.3
Contractor (with respect to its Suppliers, Subcontractors and all lower tier Subcontractors)
must provide City advance written notice and must obtain City’s approval for any proposed
Subcontract Change Order, Material Purchase Order, or other financial commitment in an
amount in excess of $5,000 prior to placing such order or entering into such agreement
(regardless of whether or not any such commitment will affect the prime Agreement
Guaranteed Maximum Cost). It is agreed that sums applicable to any Subcontract Change
Order, Purchase Order or other financial commitment entered into in violation of the above
notice and approval requirement will not be included in the amounts owning to Contractor,
Subcontractors or Suppliers whether as Costs of the Work or as reasonable termination costs
in the event of termination.
1.4
Costs of Material and Equipment Incorporated in the Completed Construction
1.4.1
Costs, including transportation and storage, of materials and equipment incorporated or
to be incorporated in the completed construction.
1.4.2
Costs of materials described in the preceding Subparagraph 1.4.1 in excess of those
actually installed to allow for reasonable waste and spoilage. Unused excess materials, in
any, will become City’s property at the completion of the Work or, at City’s option, may be
sold by the Contractor. Any amounts realized from such sales must be credited to City as a
deduction from the Cost of Work.
1.4.3
Proceeds from the sale of recyclable materials, scrap, waste, etc. will be credited to job cost.
1.5
Costs of Other materials and Equipment, Temporary Facilities and Related Items
1.5.1
Costs, including transportation and storage, installation, maintenance, dismantling and
removal of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment and hand tools
not customarily owned by construction workers, that are provided by the Contractor at the
site and fully consumed in the performance of the Work; and cost (less salvage value) of such
items if not fully consumed, whether sold to others or retained by Contractor. Cost for items
previously used by Contractor will mean fair market value.
1.5.2
Rental charges for temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools not
customarily owned by construction workers that are provided by Contractor at the site,
whether rented from Contractor or others, and costs of transportation, installation, minor
repairs and replacements,
dismantling and removal thereof. Rates and quantities of
equipment rented will be subject to City’s prior written approval.
1.5.2.1 The Projected usage for each piece of equipment to be rented for use on the Project and
the estimated total rentals must be considered by Contractor before the piece of equipment
is rented so that an appropriate rent versus buy decision can be made. Purchased
equipment must be considered “job owned”. At the completion of the Project, Contractor
must transfer title and possession of all remaining job-owned equipment to City, or
Contractor may keep any such equipment for an appropriate fair market value credit to job
cost, which will be mutually agreed to by City and Contractor.
1.5.2.2 Each piece of equipment to be rented must have hourly, daily, weekly and monthly rates and
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-26 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
the most economical rate available will be reimbursed based on the circumstances of actual
need and usage of the piece of equipment while it is stationed at the jobsite. When the
piece of equipment is no longer needed for the work, no rental charges will be reimbursed
if the piece of equipment remains at the jobsite for the convenience of Contractor.
1.5.2.3 Equipment Rental Rates
1.5.2.3.1 Compensation for equipment used on the Project will be paid in accordance with the
Equipment Plan submitted by Contractor in the accepted GMP Proposal and no payments
will be made in excess of the rates set forth in the Equipment Plan, or actual documented
costs, whichever is less.
1.5.2.3.2 All equipment rental rates and costs are subject to City’s right to audit when submitted as
part of Equipment Plan and/or at any time during the Project.
1.5.2.4 The aggregate rentals chargeable for each piece of Contractor owned tools or equipment must
not exceed 50% of the fair market value of such equipment at the time of its commitment to
the Work. The original purchase price and date of purchase of the equipment will be
documented with a copy of the purchase invoice for the piece of equipment. Such aggregate
limitations will apply and no further rentals will be charged even if a piece of equipment is taken
off the job and is later replaced by a similar piece of equipment. For purposes of computing
the aggregate rentals applicable to aggregate rental limitations, rental charges for similar
pieces of equipment will be combined if the pieces of equipment were not used at the same
time.
1.5.2.5 Fair market value for used material and equipment as referred to in the Agreement
Documents will mean the estimated price a reasonable purchaser would pay to purchase
the used material or equipment at the time it was initially needed for the job. Note: This is
usually lower than the price a reasonable purchaser would pay for similar new construction
material or construction equipment.
1.5.2.6 All losses resulting from lost, damaged or stolen tools and equipment will be the sole
responsibility of Contractor, and not City, and the cost of such losses will not be reimbursable
under the Agreement.
1.5.2.7 Contractor will be required to maintain a detailed equipment inventory of all job-owned
equipment (either purchased and charged to job cost or job-owned through aggregate
rentals) and such inventory must be submitted to City each month. For each piece of
equipment, such inventory should contain at a minimum (1) original purchase price or
acquisition cost (2) acquisition date (3) approved Fair Market Value at the time the piece of
equipment was first used on the job and (4) final disposition.
1.5.2.8 All costs incurred for minor maintenance and repairs will be reimbursed at actual cost. Such
costs include routine and preventative maintenance, minor repairs and other incidental costs.
Repairs and/or replacement of a capital nature are considered to be covered by the rental
rates. Major repairs and overhauls are not considered routine and ordinary; consequently
such costs are not reimbursable and are intended to be covered by the rental rates.
1.5.3
Costs of removal of debris from the Site.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-27 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
1.5.4
Costs of document reproductions, facsimile transmissions and long-distance telephone
calls, postage and parcel delivery charges, telephone service at the site and reasonable
petty cash expenses of the site office.
1.5.5
That portion of the reasonable expenses of Contractor’s personnel incurred while traveling
in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
1.5.5.1 No travel expenses will be reimbursed to Contractor’s representatives unless Project related
travel required them to travel to a destination more than 100 miles from the Project location.
Any travel
involving airfare will require advance written approval by an authorized City’s
representative.
1.5.6
Costs of materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a mutually acceptable
location, if approved in advance by the City.
1.5.7
Reproduction costs will be the actual costs of reproduction subject to a maximum of five
cents ($.05) per square foot for prints and a maximum of five cents ($.05) per 8 ½ by 11-inch
page for offset print or photo copied agreement documents, specifications, etc. Telephone
costs will be the actual costs paid to the third party telephone company for the field office
telephone.
1.6
Miscellaneous Costs
1.6.1
That portion of insurance and bond premiums that can be directly attributed to the Agreement.
The City will reimburse Contractor for contractually required bond at time of first pay
application for GMP and Cost-Based Agreements upon receipt of proof of payment from
the Contractor. If the Contractor completes Work for less than the Agreement Price,
Contractor must credit the City a pro- rated amount for the unused portion of the bond
payment
1.6.1.1 Contractor’s actual cost for insurance will be considered to be included within the Maximum
limit for General Conditions Costs. All premiums for any insurance and bonds required for
the Project must reflect the net actual costs to Contractor after taking into consideration cost
adjustments due to experience modifiers, premium discounts, policy dividends, retrospective
rating plan premium adjustments, assigned risk pool rebates, refunds, etc.
1.6.1.2 The amount to be reimbursed to Contractor for all contractually required insurance will be
actual costs not to exceed a total of 2% of the Agreement Value, unless Contractor
establishes to City’s satisfaction that the actual cost is higher and City agrees to such actual
higher cost in writing. If Contractor’s cost of contractually required insurance is greater
than the amount agreed to be reimbursed per this Agreement Provision, the difference will
be considered to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee. The City will reimburse Contractor
for contractually required insurance on a monthly basis for GMP and Cost-Based
Agreements. If Contractor can demonstrate substantial savings by paying for all insurance in
advance, the City may agree to reimburse all insurance costs at time of first pay application
for GMP and Cost-Based Agreements with proof of payment from Contractor.
1.6.2
Sales, use or similar taxes imposed by a governmental authority that are related to the Work.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-28 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
1.6.3
Fees and assessments for the building permit and for other permits, licenses and inspections
for which Contractor is required by the Agreement Documents to pay.
1.6.4
Fees of laboratories for tests required by the Agreement Documents, except those related to
defective or nonconforming Work and which do not fall within the scope of ¶ 1.7.3 below.
1.6.5
Royalties and license fees paid for the use of a particular design, process or product required
by the Agreement Documents; the cost of defending suites or claims for infringement of
patent rights arising from such requirement of the Agreement Documents; and payments
made in accordance with legal judgments against Contractor resulting from such suites or
claims and payments of settlements made with City’s consent. However, such costs of legal
defenses, judgments and settlements must not be included in the calculation of the
Contractor’s Fee or subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price.
1.6.6
Data processing costs related to the Work. However, any such data processing costs will be
limited to the cost of personal computer hardware used at the field office in the normal
day to day administration, management and control of the Project. The aggregate charges
for any such hardware must not exceed the Fair Market Value of the hardware at the time it
was brought to the field office. If the total charges for any particular piece of hardware reach
an amount equal to the Fair Market Value, that particular piece of hardware must be turned
over to City whenever it is no longer needed for the Project. If Contractor elects to keep the
particular piece of hardware, the job costs must be credited with a mutually agreeable
amount which will represent the Fair Market Value of the particular piece of hardware at the
time it was no longer needed for the job. Software or other costs associated with the use of
computer programs will not be considered to be a reimbursable cost and will be considered
to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.6.7
Deposits lost for causes other than Contractor’s negligence or failure to fulfill a specific
responsibility to City as set forth in the Agreement Documents.
1.6.8
Legal, mediation and arbitration costs, including attorneys’ fees, other than those arising
from
disputes between City and Contractor, reasonably incurred by Contractor in the
performance of the Work and with City’s prior written approval; which approval will not be
unreasonably withheld.
1.6.9
Expenses incurred in accordance with Contractor’s standard personnel policy for relocation
and temporary living allowances of personnel required for the Work, if pre-approved by City
in writing.
If City authorizes the reimbursement of relocation costs, the reimbursable
relocation expenses will be limited to a maximum of $50,000 per person. Any relocation
cost incurred by Contractor in excess of the amount reimbursed by City will be considered to
be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.7
Other Costs and Emergencies
1.7.1
Other costs incurred in the performance of the Work if and to the extent approved in advance
in writing by City.
1.7.2
Costs due to emergencies incurred in taking action to prevent threatened damage, injury or
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-29 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
loss in case of an emergency affecting the safety of persons and property.
1.7.3
Costs of repairing or correcting damaged or nonconforming Work executed by Contractor,
Subcontractors or Suppliers, provided that such damaged or nonconforming Work was not
caused by negligence or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility of Contractor and only to the
extent that the cost of repair or correction is not recoverable by Contractor from insurance,
sureties, Subcontractors or Suppliers.
1.8
Related Party Transactions
1.8.1
The term “related party” will mean a parent, subsidiary, affiliate or other entity having
common ownership or management with Contractor; any entity in which any stockholder in,
or management employee of, Contractor owns any interest in excess of ten percent in the
aggregate; or any person or entity which has the right to control the business or affairs of
Contractor. The term “related party” includes any member of the immediate family of any
person identified above.
1.8.2
If any of the costs to be reimbursed arise from a transaction between Contractor and a
related party, Contractor must notify City in writing of the specific nature of the contemplated
transaction, including the identity of the related party and the anticipated cost to be incurred,
before any such transaction is consummated or cost incurred. If City, after such notification,
authorizes in writing the proposed transaction, then the cost incurred will be included as a
cost to be reimbursed, and Contractor must procure the Work, equipment, goods or service
from the related party, as a Subcontractor. If City fails to authorize the transaction,
Contractor must procure the Work, equipment, goods or service from some person or entity
other than a related party.
SECTION 2 – COSTS NOT TO BE REIMBURSED
2.1
The Cost of Work must not include:
2.1.1
Salaries and other compensation of Contractor’s personnel stationed at Contractor’s principal
office or offices other than the site office, except as specifically provided in Subparagraphs
1.2.2 and 1.2.3.
2.1.2
Expenses of Contractors’ principal office and offices other than the site office.
2.1.3
Overhead and general expenses, except as may be expressly included in Section 1.
2.1.3.1 Costs of Contractor’s home office computer services or other outside computer processing
services will be considered overhead and general expense. Accordingly, Contractor should
not plan to perform any such computer related services or alternatives at the field office when
such services or functions can be performed at Contractor’s home or branch offices, or
other outside service locations.
2.1.4
Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work.
2.1.5
Rental costs of machinery and equipment, except as specifically provided in subparagraph
1.5.2.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-30 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
2.1.6
Except as provided in Subparagraph 1.7.3 of the Agreement, costs due to the negligence or
failure to fulfill a specific responsibility of Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts of them may be liable.
2.1.7
Any cost not specifically and expressly described in Section 1.
2.1.8
Costs, other than costs included in Change Orders approved by City that would cause the GMP
to be exceeded.
SECTION 3 – DISCOUNTS, REBATES, REFUNDS AND SAVINGS
3.1
Cash discounts obtained on payments made by Contractor will accrue to City if (1) before
making the payment, Contractor included them in an Application for Payment and
received payment therefore from City, or (2) City has deposited funds with Contractor with
which to make payments; otherwise, cash discounts will accrue to Contractor. Trade discounts,
rebates, refunds and amounts received from sales or surplus materials and equipment will
accrue to City, and Contractor must make provisions so that they can be secured.
3.1.1
Cost of the Work will be credited with all insurance policy discounts, performance and
payment bond rebates or refunds, refunds or return premiums from any Subcontractor
default insurance, refunds or rebates from any Contractor controlled insurance programs
applicable to the Project,
merchandise rebates of any nature, refunds of any nature,
insurance dividends; and a portion of any volume rebates or free material credits earned with
purchase of material or other goods and services charged to the job.
3.1.2
“Cash” discounts which may accrue to Contractor will be limited to a maximum of 1.5% of
invoice cost. Any portion of “Cash” discounts greater than 1.5% will automatically accrue
to City if Contractor is eligible to take advantage of the discounts.
3.2
Amounts that accrue to City in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 3.1 will be
credited to City as a deduction from the Cost of the Work.
3.3
Any and all savings on the GMP, or any separately guaranteed items comprising the GMP, will
belong to City, subject to any express right in the Agreement for Contractor to share in
savings. Savings are subject to City’s right to audit, and may be audited separately.
SECTION 4 – GENERAL CONDITIONS COSTS
4.1
General Conditions Costs may include, but are not limited to, the following types of costs
incurred by Contractor during construction of the Work to the extent they are reimbursable
Costs of the Work as delineated above: payroll costs for Work conducted at the site, payroll
costs for the superintendent and full-time general foremen, payroll costs for management
personnel resident and working on the site workers not included as direct labor costs
engaged in support (e.g. loading/unloading, clean-up, etc.), administrative office personnel,
costs of offices and temporary facilities including office materials, office supplies, office
equipment, minor expenses, utilities, fuel, sanitary facilities and telephone services at the
site, costs of liability insurance premiums not included in labor burdens for direct labor
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-31 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
costs, costs of bond premiums, costs of consultants not in the direct employ of Contractor or
Subcontractors, fees for permits and licenses.
4.2
General Conditions Costs may be paid on a percentage of the Agreement Price or on a
lump/stipulate sum basis as set forth in the Agreement. All costs included in the General
Conditions Costs will not be separately invoiced to or paid by City.
4.3
The total amount of General Conditions Costs for the Work may be divided by the number of
days allowed for performance of the Work, to determine a fixed daily rate for General
Conditions Costs that may be used in computing the General Conditions Costs allocated to any
period of time, or for any adjustments in the General Conditions Costs agreed to in
writing by City.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-32 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 10
LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
Section 1 – Description and General
Contractor is in direct control of work performed under the Landscape Establishment Period. If work is
subcontracted, a representative of the Contractor will be present at the site of the work for all hours
that the subcontractor works. Subcontracting of Landscape Establishment work will be permitted for
weed eradication with herbicides, because of special licensing. A licensed temporary service may be
used to supply labor to Contractor if Contractor has received approval from City Representatives.
Contractor will submit the required subcontract documentation.
Contractor must provide adequate personnel to accomplish the required maintenance of the plant
materials at intervals acceptable to City Representatives.
If not healthy at the end of the maintenance period, the maintenance must be continued until the plant
material is approved by City.
1.1 Time and Schedule
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, the Landscape Establishment Period will be
per General Conditions Section 6.5.4.
1.2 Planted Stock and Seeding Establishment
1.2.1
Tree planting and staking must be per City of Chandler Standard Detail C-801.
1.2.2
All trees will stand erect on their own without stakes when brought to this site. If the tree
cannot stand on its own when nursery stakes are removed, the tree will be removed and
replaced.
1.3 Pre-Emergent Herbicide and Weed Control
1.3.1
Contractor will provide three applications of an approved pre-emergent herbicide on all
unpaved areas of the project, as directed by City Representatives, to control weed growth in
all areas of the project. The number of applications may be increased as directed by the City
Representative, and at no additional cost to City, if the City Representative deems additional
applications are required to control weed growth.
1.3.2
Application sequence will be approved in advance by City. The first application of pre-
emergent will be completed prior to the application of Decomposed Granite and will be
included with the cost of the Decomposed Granite as specified and part of the Construction
Phase portion of work. The second application of pre-emergent will be completed after
installation of the Decomposed Granit and no later than half-way through the Landscape
Establishment Period. The third and final application of pre-emergent will be applied 15 days
prior to completion of the Landscape Establishment portion of the project. The second and
third pre-emergent applications will be included with the cost of Landscape Establishment.
Watering will be completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, as
included and as related to each application.
1.3.3
The pre-emergent herbicide will be applied in accordance with the Technical Specifications
and the recommendations of the pre-emergent herbicide manufacturer, as approved by City
Representatives.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-33 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 10
1.3.4
The control of weeds will be accomplished by the use of herbicides. Manual removal of weeds
will be required, after herbicides have taken affect.
1.3.5
Contractor is responsible for the removal and disposal of all trash and debris that during the
Landscape Establishment Period. Contractor will keep the project in a neat and orderly
manner during the duration of the Landscape Establishment Period.
1.4 Water
The water used during Landscape Establishment to properly maintain the plant material will be
furnished by City, at designated sources from within the project limits, at no charge to Contractor.
Contractor will be responsible for all equipment, materials and labor necessary to load, transport and
unload water for watering purposes.
1.5 Plant Material Replacements
The plant material replacement will be considered as included in the work for Landscape
Establishment, and will be made at no charge to the City.
1.5.1
Shrub and Plant Replacement - During the second half of the Landscaping Establishment
period, Contractor will provide, where required, plant replacements as follows:
Original Size
Replacement Size
1 gallon
5 gallon
5 gallon
15 gallon
15 gallon
24-inch box
36-inch box
48-inch box
1.5.2
Tree Replacement – During the second half of the Landscape Establishment Period,
Contractor will provide plant material replacements for existing plants that die as follows:
Existing Plant Material Sizes
Replacement Size
Trees:
2-inch Caliper
24-inch box
4-inch Caliper
36-inch box
6-inch Caliper and greater
54-inch box
Shrubs:
All Existing Shrubs
15 gallon
1.6 Measurement and Payment
See Technical Specifications for Measurement Payment provisions.
EXHIBIT C
Project Name: Water System Upgrades Program
Page C-1
Project No.: WA2100.402
Rev. 1/16/2024
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
City of Chandler
Pecos Surface Water Treatment Plant
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
Chandler Water System Program
PSWTP Improvements
August 2025
GMP2
VOLUME 1 OF 1
SECTION 00 01 01
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
Chandler Water System Program
PSWTP Improvements
August 2025
Professional Engineer Certifications
Jason Curl, PE
Jeff Wimmer, PE
Pouya Shahsana, PE
License No. _________
License No. _________
License No. _________
Divisions 00, 01, 40
Divisions 02, 31, 32
Divisions 03
Daniel Thompson, PE
License No. _________
Divisions 26
A
R
I
Z
O
N
A
U
.
S
.
A
.
R
e
g
i
s
t
e
r
e
d
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
(
C
i
v
il
)
D
a
t
e
S
i
g
n
e
d
JASON M.
CURL
81592
C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
N
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A
R
I
Z
O
N
A
U
.
S
.
A
.
R
e
g
i
s
t
e
r
e
d
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
(
C
i
v
il
)
D
a
t
e
S
i
g
n
e
d
JASON M.
CURL
81592
C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
N
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Expires: 09-30-2027
08/15/25
12/ 31/ 27
08
15
25
81592
43854
71538
74382
A
R
I
Z
O
N
A
U
.
S
.
A
.
R
e
g
i
s
t
e
r
e
d
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
(
C
i
v
il
)
D
a
t
e
S
i
g
n
e
d
POUYA
SHAHSANA
71538
C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
N
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
08/15/25
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
00 01 10-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 − GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section
Title
01 11 00
Summary of Work
01 14 00
Coordination with Owner’s Operation
01 20 00
Measurement and Payment
01 25 00
Substitution Procedures
01 29 73
Schedule of Valves
01 31 19
Project Meetings
01 32 00
Construction Progress Schedule
01 33 00
Submittal Procedures
01 42 00
References
01 45 23
Testing Services Furnished by Contractor
01 45 33
Special Inspections
01 51 00
Temporary Utilities
01 61 00
Product Requirements and Options
01 65 00
Product Delivery Requirements
01 66 00
Product Storage and Protection Requirements
01 71 33
Protection of Work and Property
01 73 00
Demolition and Execution of Work
01 74 00
Cleaning and Waste Management
01 78 39
Project Record Documents
01 78 43
Spare Parts and Extra Material
DIVISION 02 − EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section
Title
02 41 00
Site Demolition
101321LR
8/15/2025
00 01 10-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 03 − CONCRETE
Section
Title
03 11 00
Concrete Formwork
03 21 00
Reinforcing Steel
03 30 00
Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 39 00
Concrete Curing
DIVISION 26 − ELECTRICAL
Section
Title
26 05 00
Basic Electrical Requirements
26 05 53
Identification for Electrical Systems
26 05 73
Power System Studies
26 09 16
Electric Controls and Relays
26 12 19
Pad-Mounted, Liquid-Filled, Medium-Voltage Transformers
26 24 13
Low Voltage Switchboards
26 24 19
Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
26 29 23
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
26 43 13
Surge Protective Devices
DIVISION 31 − EARTHWORK
Section
Title
31 00 01
Earthwork
31 10 00
Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation
31 23 13
Foundation Preparation
31 23 24
Flowable Fill
31 23 25
Dynamic Compaction
8/15/2025
00 01 10-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section
Title
32 11 00
Surface Restoration
32 31 13
Steel Fencing
DIVISION 40 − PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS
Section
Title
40 05 24.23A
Steel Pipe for Water and Wastewater Service
40 06 20A
Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 11 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section lncludes:
1.
Summary
2.
Location and Description of Work
3.
Construction Contracts, This Project
4.
Construction Contracts, Other Projects
5.
Work by Others
6.
Work by Owner - None
7.
Owner Furnished Equipment and Materials - None
8.
Owner Assigned Procurement Contracts
9.
Owner Pre-selected Equipment and Materials
10.
Sequence and Progress of Work
11.
Contractor’s Use of Site
12.
Easements and Rights-of-Way
13.
Notices to Owners and Authorities of Properties Adjacent to the Work
14.
Salvage of Equipment and Materials
15.
Partial Utilization by Owner
1.02
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Work is located at the following Site:
1.
Pecos Surface Water Treatment Plant, 1475 E Pecos Rd, Chandler, AZ 85286
8/15/2025
01 11 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
A new Post-Filter Granular Activated Carbon (PF-GAC) Facility, currently under
design, will further reduce Total Organic Carbon (TOC) levels in treated water. The
facility will include:
a.
Ten new concrete GAC contactors with a nominal total capacity of 30 MGD
b.
A new influent pump station
c.
Yard piping connections
d.
Site improvements
e.
Ancillary support systems
f.
A new electrical building
3.
The PF-GAC system will divert a portion of the filtered effluent from facility filters
(via post-filter seal water chamber) to the GAC contactors for additional TOC
removal. The treated water will then blend with the remaining filter effluent prior to
entry into the Finished Water Reservoirs, achieving target TOC levels.
4.
This project represents an early works construction package for subsurface
preparation for the PF-GAC Facility and procurement of long-lead electrical
equipment required for multiple facilities.
B. The Work to be performed under this Contract includes, but is not limited to, constructing
the Work described below and all appurtenances related to the Work. This includes the
furnishing and installation of equipment, materials, superintendence, labor, skill and all
other items necessary for the installation of each element described below. The CMAR
Contractor shall perform all work required for such construction in accordance with the
Contract Documents and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract, complete
and ready for use. Principal features of the work include, but are not limited to, the
following
1.
Civil earthwork and subgrade preparation for the PF-GAC facility, influent pump
station, seal weir structure, electrical facility, and relocation of the site retention
basin in the PF-GAC footprint.
2.
Procurement and installation of PF-GAC underslab piping and below-grade yard
piping, including GAC effluent, backwash waste, and waste-to-drain pipelines
(WSP and DIP) encased in reinforced concrete under the footprint of the structure
and backfilled with cementitious flowable fill..
3.
Procurement of rebar and ready-mix concrete (not installation)
4.
Demolition of sections existing 8-ft. high CMU wall in the PF-GAC footprint
8/15/2025
01 11 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
Installation of temporary fencing and erosion control measures
6.
Demolition and temporary rerouting of polymer lines serving Filters 1 -12
7.
Relocation and partial replacement of site fiber optic infrastructure in the PF-GAC
footprint
8.
Additionally, the scope of work includes allowance for procurement of long-lead
electrical equipment:
a.
Medium-voltage oil-filled transformers
b.
Panelboards
c.
Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
d.
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs)
C. These early works are critical to advance the PF-GAC facility construction and support
long-lead procurement necessary to maintain the project schedule and represent critical
path activities for the overall PSWTP upgrade program.
1.03
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS, THIS PROJECT
A. The Contracts under which the Project will be constructed are:
1.
Work specified in Divisions 01 through 46 (inclusive) of the Specifications.
2.
Work shown on all Project Drawings sheets (inclusive).
1.04
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS, OTHER PROJECTS
A. This project utilizes the Construction Manager at Risk (CMAR) delivery method. The
definitive package for this scope of work is GMP 2: Long Lead Package.
B. The final number of GMPs will be determined in coordination with the CMAR.
1.05
WORK BY OTHERS
A. All aspects of rerouted fiber optic lines and related integration shall be by Others.
Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for related coordination.
8/15/2025
01 11 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.06
HAZEN AND SAWYER SHALL PERFORM ENGINEERING SERVICES DURING
CONSTRUCTION.WORK BY OWNER
A. Owner will perform the following in connection with the Work: Operate all existing valves,
gates, pumps, equipment, and appurtenances that will affect Owner’s operation, unless
otherwise specified or indicated.
1.07
OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS - NONE
1.08
OWNER ASSIGNED PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS - NONE
1.09
OWNER PRE-SELECTED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Items of equipment and material to be provided by Contractor that have been pre-
selected and with Bid Form price listed shall be as defined in applicable GMP bid forms:
B. Contractor shall provide equipment and material in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.10
SEQUENCE AND PROGRESS OF WORK
A. Requirements for sequencing and coordinating with Owner’s operations, including
maintenance of plant operations during construction, and requirements for tie-ins and
shutdowns, are in Section 01 14 00 − Coordination with Owner’s Operations.
1.11
CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE
A. Contractors’ use of the Site shall be confined to the areas shown. Contractors shall
share use of the Site with other contractors and others specified in this Section.
B. Contractor shall move stored products that interfere with operations of Owner, other
contractors, or others performing work for Owner.
1.12
EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY
A. Refer to General Conditions Section 4.5 for restrictions on use of project site, rights-of-
way, and adjacent properties. The following information supplements that requirement.
B. Easements and rights-of-way will be provided by Owner in accordance with the General
Conditions. Confine construction operations to within Owner’s property, public rights-of-
way, easements obtained by Owner, and the limits shown. Use care in placing
construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and products to be incorporated into
the Work to avoid damaging property and interfering with traffic. Do not enter private
property outside the construction limits without permission from the owner of the
property.
8/15/2025
01 11 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.13
NOTICES TO OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES OF PROPERTIES ADJACENT TO THE
WORK
A. Notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when execution of the Work may affect
their property, facilities, or use of property.
B. When it is necessary to temporarily obstruct access to property, or when utility service
connection will be interrupted, provide notices sufficiently in advance to enable affected
persons to provide for their needs. Conform notices to Laws and Regulations and,
whether delivered orally or in writing, include appropriate information concerning the
interruption and instructions on how to limit inconvenience caused.
C. Notify utility owners and other concerned entities at least 48 hours prior to cutting or
closing streets or other traffic areas or excavating near Underground Facilities or
exposed utilities.
1.14
SALVAGE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Existing equipment and materials removed and not shown or specified to be reused in
the Work will be Contractor’s property, except as noted on Contract Drawings.
B. Existing equipment and material removed by Contractor shall not be reused in the Work,
except where specified or indicated.
C. Carefully remove in manner to prevent damage all equipment and materials specified or
indicated to be salvaged and reused or to remain property of Owner. Store and protect
salvaged items specified or indicated to be used in the Work. Replace in kind or with
new items equipment, materials, and components damaged in removal, storage, or
handling through carelessness or improper procedures.
D. Contractor may furnish and install new items, with Engineer’s approval, instead of those
specified or indicated to be salvaged and reused, in which case such removed items will
become Contractor’s property.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 14 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 14 00
COORDINATION WITH OWNER’S OPERATIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Requirements for coordinating with Owner’s operations during the Work and
included requirements for tie-ins to complete the Work without impact on Owner’s
operations except as allowed in this Section.
2.
Contractor shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals shown,
specified and required to coordinate with Owner’s operations during the Work.
B. General Requirements:
1.
Perform the Work such that Owner’s facility remains in continuous satisfactory
operation during the Project. Schedule and conduct the Work such that the Work
does not: impede Owner’s production or processes, create potential hazards to
operating equipment and personnel, reduce the quality of the facility’s products or
effluent, or cause odors or other nuisances.
2.
Work not specifically covered in this Section or in referenced Sections may, in
general, be completed at any time during regular working hours in accordance with
the City General Conditions and requirements in this Section.
3.
Contractor has the option of providing additional temporary facilities that can
eliminate or mitigate a constraint without additional cost to Owner, provided such
additional temporary facilities: do not present hazards to the public, personnel,
structures, and equipment; that such additional temporary facilities do not
adversely affect Owner’s ability to comply with Laws and Regulations, permits, and
operating requirements; that such temporary facilities do not generate or foster the
generation of odors and other nuisances; and that requirements of the Contract
Documents are fulfilled.
4.
Do not shut off or disconnect existing operating systems, unless accepted by
Engineer in writing. Operation of existing equipment will be by Owner unless
otherwise specified or indicated. Where necessary for the Work, Contractor shall
seal or bulkhead Owner-operated gates and valves to prevent leakage that may
affect the Work, Owner’s operations, or both. Provide temporary watertight plugs,
8/15/2025
01 14 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
bulkheads, and line stops as required. After completing the Work, remove seals,
plugs, bulkhead, and line stops to satisfaction of Engineer.
C. Continuous Treatment Provision:
1.
Federal regulations prohibit bypassing of untreated or partially treated wastewater
or sewage during construction Work.
2.
Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals to provide
continuous treatment to the level prior to construction Work.
3.
Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary pumping facilities,
systems, piping, valve, appurtenances, equipment, materials, and temporary
utilities necessary to complete the Work without treatment bypassing.
D. Related Sections:
1.
Section 01 11 00 − Summary of Work
2.
Section 01 25 00 − Substitution Procedures
3.
Section 01 73 00 − Demolition and Execution of Work
1.02
REFERENCES - NONE
1.03
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1.
Review installation procedures under other Specification sections and coordinate
Work that must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section.
2.
Notify other contractors in advance of Work requiring coordination with Owner’s
operations, to provide other contractors sufficient time for work included in their
contracts that must be installed with or before Work specified in this Section.
B. Sequencing:
1.
Perform the Work in the specified sequence. Certain phases or stages of the Work
may require working 24-hour days or work during hours outside of regular working
hours. Work may be accelerated from a later stage to an earlier stage if Owner’s
operations are not adversely affected by proposed sequence change, with
Engineer’s acceptance. Stages specified in this Section are sequential in
performance of the Work.
C. Scheduling:
8/15/2025
01 14 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Work that may interrupt normal operations shall be accomplished at times
convenient to Owner.
2.
Furnish at the Site, in close proximity to tie-in work areas, tools, equipment, spare
parts and materials, both temporary and permanent, necessary to successfully
complete the work. Complete to the extent possible, prefabrication of piping and
other assemblies. Demonstrate to Engineer’s satisfaction that Contractor has
complied with these requirements before commencing relocations and or tie-ins.
3.
If Contractor’s operations cause an unscheduled interruption of Owner’s
operations, immediately re-establish satisfactory operation for Owner.
4.
Unscheduled shutdowns or interruptions of continued safe and satisfactory
operation of Owner’s facilities that result in fines or penalties by authorities having
jurisdiction shall be paid solely by Contractor if, in Engineer’s opinion, Contractor
did not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or was negligent
in the Work, or did not exercise proper precautions in conducting the Work.
5.
Temporary, short-term shutdowns of smaller piping, conduits, equipment, and
systems may be required. Coordinate requirements for such shutdowns with
Engineer and Owner.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Action/Informational Submittals:
1.
Substitute Sequence Submittal: When deviation from specified sequence is
proposed, provide submittal explaining in detail the proposed sequence change
and its effects, including evidence that Owner’s operations will not be adversely
affected by proposed change. List benefits of proposed sequence change,
including benefits to Progress Schedule. Submit in accordance with Section 01 25
00 − Substitution Procedures.
1.05
SITE CONDITIONS
A. General Constraints: Specified in the Contract Documents are the sequence and
shutdown durations, where applicable, for Owner’s equipment, systems, and conduits
that are to be taken out of service temporarily for the Work. New equipment, materials,
and systems may be used by Owner after the specified field quality controls and testing
are successfully completed and the materials or equipment are Substantially Complete.
B. The following constraints apply to coordination with Owner’s operations:
1.
Operational Access: Owner’s personnel shall have access to equipment and areas
that remain in operation.
8/15/2025
01 14 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Schedule and perform equipment and system start-ups for Monday through
Thursday. Equipment and systems shall not be placed into operation on Friday,
Saturday, and Sunday without prior approval of Owner.
3.
Dead End Valves or Pipe: Provide blind flanges, watertight bulkheads, or valves at
temporary and permanent terminuses of pipes and conduits. Blind flanges and
bulkheads shall be suitable for the service and braced and blocked, as required, or
otherwise restrained as directed by Engineer. Temporary valves shall be suitable
for their associated service. Where valve is provided at permanent terminus of
pipe or conduit, also provide on downstream side of valve a blind flange with
drain/flushing connection.
4.
Electrical, Control, Communication, and Monitoring Systems:
a.
Owner’s existing SCADA system and fiber optic network shall remain
functional, subject to the constraints herein.
b.
Fiber optic communications and network connectivity to the Facility Electrical
Building shall remain operational during construction. If this communication
link is deemed necessary to take offline at any point during construction for
relocation by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying
the Owner before taking the communication link offline. The Owner shall
provide specific directions to the Contractor on when this communication link
may be taken offline.
c.
Unless Contractor elects to use existing fiber and/or temporary fiber, at
his/her discretion, at least one communication path through new dual
redundant fiber optic ring to all communication points shall be in place at all
times until substantial completion.
d.
Each process area shall be permitted to have a single, non-concurrent,
scheduled outage for the purpose of making PLC panel hardware
modifications, loading the associated PLC logic, and its field
testing/demonstration. Field testing and demonstration shall immediately
follow modifications.
1.06
SUGGESTED SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. CMAR shall perform the Work in the specified sequence approved by the Engineer.
Certain phases or stages of the Work may require working 24-hour days or work during
hours outside of regular working hours. Work may be accelerated from a later stage to
an earlier stage if Owner’s operations are not adversely affected by proposed sequence
change, and with Engineer’s acceptance.
8/15/2025
01 14 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.07
TIE-INS
A. Contractor shall perform tie-ins required to complete the Work as defined in 01 11 00
Summary of Work.
B. Treatment Process Site Access Constraints:
1.
Owner shall have the following unit processes and equipment operational at all
times during the Project, unless specified herein:
a.
All conveyance and existing treatment processes at the Pecos Surface
Water Treatment Plant.
2.
Owner shall have roadway access to all roadways required for ongoing operations
and maintenance activities, including access to the chemical unloading station,
residuals handling areas, and routine equipment servicing locations.
3.
Contractor shall maintain clear access to a minimum 15-foot roadway for Owner
access.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. In addition to requirements of this Section, conform to requirements of the General
Conditions and Section 01 73 00 − Demolition and Execution of Work.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 14 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 20 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 20 00
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section lncludes:
1.
Items listed in this Section refer to and are the same pay items listed in the Bid
Form and constitute all pay items for completing the Work.
2.
Compensation for all services, items, materials, and equipment shall be include in
prices stipulated for lump sum and unit price pay items listed in this Section and
included in the Contract. In the event of a conflict, refer to General Conditions
Section 14.1 regarding precedence of Agreement Documents.
3.
No direct or separate payment will be made for providing miscellaneous temporary
or accessory works, bonds, insurance, or other requirements of the Contract
Documents, unless explicitly allowed under General Conditions Section 15
Appendix 9.
4.
Each lump sum and unit bid price shall include an amount considered by
Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each
separately identified item.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Payments to Contractor: Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
and Agreement.
2.
Changes to Contract Price: Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and Section 01 26 00 − Contract Modification Procedures.
3.
Schedule of Values: Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and
Section 01 29 73 − Schedule of Values.
8/15/2025
01 20 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.02
ENGINEER’S ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES
A. ENGINEER’S and OWNER’s estimated quantities for unit price pay items, as listed in
the Bid Form, are approximate only and are included solely for the purpose of
comparison of Bids. Owner does not expressly or by implication agree that the nature of
the materials encountered below the surface of the ground or the actual quantities of
material encountered or required will correspond therewith and reserves the right to
increase or decrease any quantity or to eliminate any quantity as Owner may deem
necessary. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in a unit bid price as a result
of any change in an estimated quantity unless such adjustment is authorized per
General Conditions 7.1 – Unit Price Agreements.
1.03
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall include all additional Work items, services, goods, resources, and
manpower necessary for installation of the Work to provide a completely functional
system in accordance with the Contract Documents. Refer to General Conditions
Section 4.4 – Performance of the Work. Contractor shall include these costs associated
with providing a completely functional system within the listed items in the General
Conditions Exhibit D CMAR GMP Summary and subsequent Detailed Cost Estimate Bid
Form.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 25 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.
Procedural requirements for product substitutions.
2.
Procedural requirements for substitute construction methods or procedures, when
construction methods or procedures are specified.
B. Requests for substitutions of equipment and material shall conform to the requirements
of the City of Chandler General Conditions, Section 4.7.2 – Trade Names and
Substitutions. Where this Section differs from the General Conditions, the requirements
of the General Conditions shall govern. This section supplements those requirements
by identifying project-specific documentation and technical submittals required for
substitution. References
C. Definitions: The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section,
have the following meaning:
1.
“Acceptable Manufacturers” considered for substitution include Suppliers of
equipment and material of proven reliability, and as manufactured by reputable
manufacturers having experience in the production of specified equipment and
material on projects of similar size and scope within the past 10 years. Equipment
furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the
industry accepted practices and shall operate satisfactorily when installed in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
2.
“Products” includes materials, equipment, machinery, components, fixtures,
systems, and other goods incorporated in the Work. Products do not include
machinery and equipment used for preparing, fabricating, conveying, erecting, or
installing the Work. Products include Owner-furnished goods incorporated in the
Work where use of such goods is specifically required in the Contract Documents.
1.02
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: In submitting request for substitution, Contractor
represents that:
1.
Contractor has investigated proposed substitution and determined that it is
equivalent to item, product, method, or procedure specified, as applicable.
8/15/2025
01 25 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Contractor will provide the same or better guarantees or warranties for proposed
substitution as for the specified product, manufacturer, method, or procedure, as
applicable.
3.
Contractor waives all Claims for additional costs or extension of time related to
proposed substitution that subsequently may become apparent.
4.
Contractor shall submit a minimum of five (5) successful installations of the
manufacturer’s equipment of the same model, size, and type as specified in the
Contract Documents.
5.
All costs associated with incorporation of a substitution shall be borne by the
Contractor, including but not limited to, the cost of redesign and construction
provisions.
B. Engineer’s Review: A proposed substitution will not be accepted for review if:
1.
Approval would require changes in design concept or a substantial revision of the
Contract Documents.
2.
Approval would delay completion of the Work or the work of other contractors.
3.
Substitution request is indicated or implied on a Shop Drawing or other submittal,
or on a request for interpretation or clarification, and is not accompanied by
Contractor’s formal request for substitution.
4.
If the substitution is not clearly substantiated by performance criteria as providing
an equivalent or superior performing installation.
5.
Engineer’s review of a substitution will be conducted per General Conditions and
may result in costs charged to Contractor.
C. If Engineer does not approve the proposed substitute, Contractor shall provide the
specified product, manufacturer, method, or procedure, as applicable.
D. Approval of a substitution request will not relieve Contractor from requirement for
submitting Shop Drawings as set forth in the Contract Documents.
E. Product Substitutions Procedure:
1.
Requests for approval of substitute products or items will be considered for a
period of thirty (30) days as defined in General Conditions Section 4.7.2. If not
stated therein, request shall be thirty (30) days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. Requests submitted after this period will be considered only in case of
unavailability of a specified product or other conditions beyond Contractor’s
control.
8/15/2025
01 25 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Submit copies of request for substitution.
3.
Submit separate request for each substitution.
4.
In addition to requirements of the General Conditions and information required on
substitution request forms, include with request the following:
a.
Product identification, including manufacturer’s name and address.
b.
Manufacturer’s literature with product description, performance and test
data, and reference standards with which product complies.
c.
Samples, if appropriate.
d.
Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and date
of installation.
e.
Certified tests, where applicable, by an independent laboratory attesting the
proposed substitution is equal.
f.
Cost information for the proposed substitution and the specified products.
g.
Lead time information for the proposed substitution and specified products.
h.
All other submittal requirements indicated in the individual Specification
Sections associated with the specified equipment and material.
F. Construction Methods Substitutions Procedures:
1.
Where construction methods or procedures are specified, for a period of 30 days
after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Engineer will consider Contractor’s
written requests for substitute construction methods or procedures specified.
2.
Submit copies of request for substitution.
3.
Submit separate request for each substitution.
4.
In addition to requirements of the General Conditions and information required on
substitution request forms, include with request the following:
a.
Detailed description of proposed method or procedure.
b.
Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the specified method
or procedure.
c.
Drawings illustrating method or procedure.
8/15/2025
01 25 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Other data required by Engineer to establish that proposed substitution is
equivalent to specified method or procedure.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 29 73-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 29 73
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section lncludes:
1.
General requirements for preliminary and final Schedule of Values.
2.
Schedule of Values and the Progress Schedule updates specified in Section 01 32
00 − Construction Progress Schedule, shall be basis for preparing each
Application for Payment. Schedule of Values may be used as a basis for
negotiating price of changes, if any, in the Work. See following City General
Conditions:
a.
Section 8.1 Payment for Construction Services
b.
Section 9.2 Extra Work/Changes in the Work
1.02
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Requirements:
1.
Schedule of Values shall include breakdown of costs for materials and equipment,
installation, and other costs used in preparing the Bid by Contractor and each
Subcontractor. List purchase and delivery costs for materials and equipment for
which Contractor may apply for payment as stored materials.
2.
Include separate amounts for each Specification Section in the Contract
Documents by structure, building, and work area.
3.
Identify each line item with number corresponding to the associated Specification
Section number. List sub-items of major products or systems, as appropriate or
when requested by Engineer.
4.
Include in Schedule of Values unit price payment items with their associated
quantity. Provide in the Schedule of Values detailed breakdown of unit prices when
required by Engineer. See City General Conditions 7.1 Unit Price Agreements.
5.
Include in Schedule of Values itemized list of Work for each major part of the
Contract, for each payment item specified in Section 01 20 00 – Measurement and
Payment.
8/15/2025
01 29 73-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
6.
Sum of individual values shown on the Schedule of Values shall equal the total of
associated payment item. Sum of payment item totals in the Schedule of Values
shall equal the Contract Price. See City General Conditions 8.1 Payment for
Construction Services.
B. Specific Requirements:
1.
Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor’s overhead
and profit. Do not include overhead and profit as separate item(s).
2.
Include separate line item for each allowance, and for each unit price item. See
City General Conditions 15.3 Allowances and 7.1 Unit Price Agreements.
3.
Include line item for bonds and insurance in amount not exceeding two percent of
the Contract Price. This may be applied for in the first Application for Payment.
See City General Conditions SECTION 11 – Insurance and Bonds (11.1–11.4).
4.
Include items for the General Conditions, permits (when applicable), construction
Progress Schedule, and other items required by Engineer. Include such items in
Applications for Payment on schedule accepted by Engineer.
5.
Line items for Site maintenance such as dust control, compliance with storm water
pollution prevention plans and permits, spill prevention control and
countermeasures plans, and for construction photographic documentation;
temporary utilities and temporary facilities, field offices, temporary controls, field
engineering, and similar Work shall be included in the Schedule of Values and
proportioned in Applications for Payment throughout duration of the Work.
6.
Include separate line items under each appropriate payment item for mobilization
and demobilization. Document for Engineer the activities included in mobilization
and demobilization line items.
a.
Mobilization will be limited to two percent of the Contract Price, and will be
paid in two payments, each of 50 percent of total amount for mobilization.
b.
Demobilization shall be at least one percent of the Contract Price and shall
be included with the Application for Payment following Substantial
Completion, or other schedule accepted by Engineer.
7.
Costs for submittals, operations and maintenance manuals, field testing, and
training of operations and maintenance personnel shall be as follows, unless
otherwise accepted by Engineer:
a.
Up to 5% percent of total cost of each item (including overhead and profit),
including materials and equipment, and installation, may be apportioned to
testing and included in the Application for Payment following Engineer’s
8/15/2025
01 29 73-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
acceptance of the associated written Site testing report(s). If different than
General Conditions Section 9.2.4, General Conditions shall govern.
C. Preliminary Schedule of Values: Submit preliminary Schedule of Values to Engineer for
initial review. Contractor shall incorporate Engineer’s comments into the Schedule of
Values and resubmit to Engineer. Engineer may require corrections and re-submittals
until Schedule of Values is acceptable.
D. Time Frame for Submittals:
1.
Submit preliminary Schedule of Values within ten (10) days of date that the
Contract Times commence running in accordance with the Notice to Proceed.
Coordinate with City General Conditions 4.2 Contractor’s Pre-Agreement and Pre-
Work Deliverables for any additional Schedule of Values timing requirements.
2.
Submittal of the Schedule of Values shall be in accordance with the General
Conditions. Engineer will not accept Applications for Payment without an
acceptable Schedule of Values. See General Conditions 8.1 Payment for
Construction Services and 17.5 Baseline Costs Model, Detailed Cost Estimates,
and Schedule of Values.
3.
When required by Engineer, promptly submit updated Schedule of Values to
include cost breakdowns for changes in the Contract Price.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1.
Seven copies of preliminary Schedule of Values.
2.
Seven copies of Schedule of Values.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 31 19-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section lncludes:
1.
Pre-Construction Meeting:
a.
Purpose of conference is to designate responsible personnel, establish
working relationships, discuss preliminary schedules submitted by
Contractor, and review administrative and procedural requirements for the
Project. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for
handling such matters will be established. See City General Conditions
Section 4.3 Pre-Construction Conference.
b.
Date, Time and Location: Conference will be held after execution of the
Contract and before Work starts at the Site. Engineer will establish the date,
time, and location of conference and notify the interested and involved
parties.
2.
Progress Meetings:
a.
These procedures supplement the General Conditions (Sections 4.3 Pre-
Construction Conference and 14.25 Project Communications). In the event
of a conflict, the General Conditions shall govern.
b.
Progress meetings will be held throughout the Project. Contractor shall
attend each progress meeting prepared to discuss in detail all items on the
agenda. See City General Conditions Section 14.25 Project
Communications.
c.
Engineer will preside at progress meetings and will prepare and distribute
minutes of progress meetings to all meeting participants and others as
requested.
d.
Date, Time and Location:
1)
Regular Meetings: Every month on a day and time agreeable to
Owner, Engineer, and Contractor.
2)
At the Site or other location mutually agreed upon by Owner,
Contractor, and Engineer.
8/15/2025
01 31 19-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
e.
Additional meetings may be conducted as progress of Work requires at a
mutually agreed date, time and location.
1.02
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Construction Meeting:
1.
Contractor shall provide pre-construction meeting submittals with sufficient number
of copies for each attendee:
2.
Required Attendees:
a.
Contractor
1)
Project manager.
2)
Site superintendent.
3)
Safety representative.
4)
Major Subcontractors.
b.
Owner.
c.
Engineer.
d.
Owner’s Site Representative (OSR) , when applicable.
e.
Representatives of governmental or other regulatory agencies, when
applicable.
3.
Contractor shall prepare and submit a health and safety plan, including confined
space entry plan, as specified in this Section prior to the pre-construction meeting.
4.
Agenda, minimum:
a.
Procedural requirements:
1)
Designation of responsible personnel
2)
Use of Site and Owner’s requirements, including general regards for
community relations
3)
Delivery of materials and equipment to the Site
4)
Safety and first aid procedures
8/15/2025
01 31 19-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5)
Confined space entry plan
6)
Security procedures
7)
Housekeeping procedures
b.
Administrative requirements:
1)
Distribution of Contract Documents.
2)
Shop Drawing submittal procedures (see City General Conditions
Section 4.7 Materials Quality, Substitutions, and Shop Drawings).
3)
Maintaining record documents at the Site.
4)
Contract modification procedures (see City General Conditions Section
9.1 Field Orders; 9.2 Extra Work/Changes in the Work; 9.3 Accuracy of
Change Order Pricing Information).
5)
Processing of Payment Application (see City General Conditions
Section 8.1 Payment for Construction Services).
c.
Site mobilization requirements:
1)
Working hours, overtime, and holidays.
2)
Field offices, trailers, and staging areas.
3)
Temporary facilities and utilities, including usage and coordination.
4)
Temporary controls, such as sediment and erosion control, noise, dust,
storm water, and other measures.
5)
Access to Site, access roads, and parking for construction vehicles.
6)
Protection of traffic and existing property, including site barriers and
temporary fencing.
7)
Security
8)
Storage of materials and equipment.
9)
Reference points and benchmarks, surveys and layouts.
10)
Site maintenance during the project, including cleaning and removal of
trash and debris.
8/15/2025
01 31 19-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
11)
Site restoration.
d.
Schedules
1)
Preliminary construction schedule
2)
Critical work sequencing
3)
Preliminary Shop Drawing submittal schedule
4)
Preliminary Schedule of Values
e.
Coordination requirements specific to the City’s project expectations.
B. Progress Meetings:
1.
Progress meetings frequency shall be conducted as specified in this Section,
unless modified and agreed upon by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer. Additional
meetings may be conducted as progress of Work requires.
2.
Contractor shall provide submittals specified in this Section prior to each progress
meeting.
3.
Attendance:
a.
Contractor, including project manager, site superintendent, safety
representative, and representatives of Subcontractors and Suppliers as
required.
b.
Engineer, including project manager (or designated representative),
Resident Project Representative (if any), others as required by Engineer.
c.
Owner, including Owner’s Site Representative (if any).
d.
Subcontractors, only with Engineer’s approval or request, as required in the
agenda.
4.
Agenda, minimum:
a.
Review, comment, and amendment (if required) of minutes of previous
progress meeting.
b.
Review of progress since the previous progress meeting.
c.
Planned progress through next 30 – 60 days.
8/15/2025
01 31 19-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Review of Progress Schedule (see City General Conditions Section 6.2
Project Schedule)
1)
Contract Times, including Milestones (if any)
2)
Critical path.
3)
Schedules for fabrication and delivery of materials and equipment.
4)
Corrective measures, if required.
e.
Submittals:
1)
Review of status of critical submittals.
2)
Review revisions to schedule of submittals.
f.
Contract Modifications:
1)
Requests for interpretation
2)
Clarification notices
3)
Field Orders
4)
Proposal requests
5)
Change Proposals
6)
Work Change Directives.
7)
Change Orders.
8)
Claims.
g.
Applications for progress payments.
h.
Problems, conflicts, and observations.
i.
Quality standards, testing, and inspections.
j.
Coordination between parties.
k.
Site management issues, including access, security, maintenance and
protection of traffic, maintenance, cleaning, and other Site issues.
l.
Safety.
8/15/2025
01 31 19-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
m.
Permits.
n.
Record documents status.
o.
Punch list status, as applicable.
p.
Other business.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Pre-Construction Meeting Submittals:
1.
Prior to the conference, submit the following preliminary schedules in accordance
with the General Conditions Section 6.2 Project Schedule:
1)
Progress schedule
2)
Schedule of submittals
3)
Schedule of values
2.
Contractor’s safety and first aid procedures.
3.
Confined space entry plan.
4.
List of emergency contact information
B. Progress Meeting Submittals:
1.
List of Work accomplished since the previous progress meeting.
2.
Up-to-date Progress Schedule.
3.
Up-to-date Schedule of Submittals.
4.
Detailed “look-ahead” schedule of Work planned through the next progress
meeting, with specific starting and ending dates for each activity, including
shutdowns, deliveries of important materials and equipment, Milestones (if any),
and important activities affecting the Owner, Project, and Site.
5.
When applicable, list of upcoming, planned time off (with dates) for personnel with
significant roles on the Project, and the designated contact person in their
absence.
8/15/2025
01 31 19-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.04
EMERGENCY CONTACT INFORMATION
A. Contractor shall provide list of emergency contact information for 24-hour use throughout
the Project. Emergency contact information shall be updated and kept current
throughout the Project. If personnel or contact information change, provide updated
emergency contact information list at the next progress meeting (see City General
Conditions Section 14.25 Project Communications).
B. Contractor’s list of emergency contact information shall include:
1.
Contractor’s project manager’s office, field office, cellular, and home telephone
numbers.
2.
Contractor’s Site superintendent’s office, field office, cellular, and home telephone
numbers.
3.
Contractor’s foreman’s field office, cellular (if available), and home telephone
numbers.
4.
Major Subcontractors’ and Suppliers’ office, cellular, and home telephone numbers
of project manager and foreman (when applicable).
C. Additional Emergency Contact Information:
1.
Owner’s Project Manager: office, cellular, and home telephone numbers.
2.
Owner’s central 24-hour emergency telephone number.
3.
Engineer’s project engineer’s office, cellular, and home telephone numbers.
4.
Owner’s Site Representative’s office, field office, cellular, and home telephone
numbers.
5.
Emergency telephone numbers, including: “Emergency: Dial 911”, and seven-digit
telephone numbers for the hospital, ambulance, police, and fire department
nearest to the Site. Provide names of each of these institutions.
6.
Other involved entities as applicable.
8/15/2025
01 31 19-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 32 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Detailed requirements and/or procedures for, including but not limited
to, the Preliminary Project Schedule, Project Schedule Updates, Project Schedule
development, Time Impact Analysis, and Recovery Schedules
B. The Contractor shall develop, revise, and provide all information and input required for
the Project Schedule for the performance of the Work in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents in general and, in particular, this section. The
Progress Schedule shall incorporate the requirements of General Conditions, City of
Chandler General Conditions Section 6.2 – Project Schedule.
C. Except as otherwise provided herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the
planning, scheduling, coordination, and execution of the Work is the sole responsibility of
the Contractor.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1.
Activity: An element of the construction work that has the following specific
characteristics: consumes time, consumes resources, has a definable start and
finish, is assignable, and is measurable.
2.
Constraint: An imposed date on the Progress Schedule or an imposed tie between
Activities. The Contract Times are Constraints.
3.
CPM Progress Schedule: Computerized Progress Schedule in Critical Path
Method (CPM) format which accounts for the entire Work, defines the
interrelationships between elements of the Work, reflects the uncompleted Work,
and indicates the sequence with which the Work has been completed, indicates
the sequence in which uncompleted Work will be completed, and indicates the
duration of each Activity.
4.
Critical Path: The continuous chain of Activities with the longest duration for
completion within the Contract Times.
5.
Early Start: The earliest possible date an Activity can start according to the
assigned relationships among Activities.
8/15/2025
01 32 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
6.
Early Finish: The earliest possible date an Activity can finish according to the
assigned relationships among the Activities.
7.
Late Finish: The latest possible date an Activity can finish without extending the
Contract Times.
8.
Late Start: The latest possible date an Activity can start without extending the
Contract Times.
9.
Total Float: The total number of days that an Activity (or chain of Activities) can be
delayed without affecting the Contract Times. Total float for each Activity shall be
calculated as the difference between Early Finish and Late Finish.
10.
Network Diagram: A time-scaled logic diagram depicting the durations and
relationships of the Activities.
11.
Work Areas, Area, or System: A logical breakdown of the Project elements or a
group of Activities which, when collectively assembled, are readily identifiable on
the Project (for example, yard piping, a structure or building, a treatment process,
or other logical grouping).
1.03
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Initial Progress Schedule:
1.
Type and Organization of Progress Schedules:
a.
Prepare one Progress Schedule covering the entire Project using Primavera
Planner (P6 or newer), or Microsoft Project scheduling software.
b.
Schedule submittals shall include the electronic native file format (i.e.,
scheduling software file), and a PDF file of the schedule’s logic diagram.
c.
Time Scale: Indicate first date of each work week.
d.
Activity Designations: Indicate title concise description of the Work
represented by the activity and related Specification Section number. The
Work related to each activity shall be limited to one work trade and one
construction area.
2.
Submitted PDF files shall be in a Gantt Chart Format and shall show the following:
a.
Activity identification number.
b.
Activity description.
c.
Activity duration (in workdays).
8/15/2025
01 32 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Activity percent complete
e.
Start, Early Start, Late Start, Finish, Early Finish, and Late Finish Dates
f.
Total Float for each Activity.
g.
Critical Path denoted.
3.
Organization:
a.
Group shop drawings, samples and other submittals into a separate
sub-schedule that is part of the Progress Schedule.
b.
Group deliveries of materials and equipment into a separate sub-
schedule that is part of the Progress Schedule.
c.
Group construction into Work Area sub-schedules (that are part of the
Progress Schedule) by Activity.
d.
Clearly indicate the Critical Path on the Progress Schedule.
e.
Organize each Work Area sub-schedule by Specification Section
number.
4.
Preliminary Progress Schedule:
a.
Contractor shall submit to Engineer the Preliminary Progress Schedule in
accordance with the following General Conditions:
1)
Section 4.2 Contractor’s Pre-Agreement and Pre-Work Deliverables
2)
Section 6.2 Project Schedule
5.
Initial Acceptance of Progress Schedule:
a.
At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment,
Contractor shall schedule a conference at the Site for review of the
Preliminary Progress Schedule.
1)
Attendees shall include Contractor, Engineer, Owner, and others as
required.
2)
Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and
adjustments and to complete and resubmit the Progress Schedule.
8/15/2025
01 32 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3)
Engineer may recommend Owner withhold progress payment if an
acceptable Progress Schedule and supporting documentation are not
submitted.
b.
Initially-accepted Progress Schedule shall be identified as the Baseline
Progress Schedule. The Baseline Progress Schedule shall not be revised
without Owner and Engineer approval.
B. Project Schedule Updates:
1.
Project Schedule Updates shall be prepared on a monthly basis throughout the
entire Contract Time and until Project Final Completion. The Contractor shall
provide a complete Project Schedule Update (including Schedule Narrative
Report) each month to support Engineer’s payment recommendation to Owner.
2.
The update to the Progress Schedule shall be based on retained logic. Progress
override logic is not allowed.
3.
Required scheduling software, and schedule organization, format, and content for
updated Progress Schedules are identical to that required in this Section for initial
Progress Schedules.
4.
For all Project Schedule Updates, the percent complete reported for individual
Activities shall be based on Work accepted and paid for the by Owner in monthly
pay applications. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be result in rejection
of the submitted update. Per General Condition Section 8.4 City’s Right to
Withhold Payment, rejection may result in withholding of payment.
5.
Monthly Progress Schedule Updates shall be accompanied by a Schedule
Narrative Report. The report shall:
a.
Describe Work completed within the preceding month.
b.
Describe Work planned for the following month (including a look-ahead
schedule).
c.
Identify proposed changes or revisions to the Baseline Progress Schedule.
d.
Identify all Work performed out of sequence.
e.
Identify problem areas.
f.
Identify current or anticipated conditions which may delay the Work.
1.04
PROJECT SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT
8/15/2025
01 32 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
A. The schedule shall cover the entire Contact Time, and the Work shall be scheduled to
complete the Project within the Contract Time.
B. The Schedule’s Late Finish Date shall equal the Contract Completion Date.
C. All activities except for the NTP and Final Completion shall have a predecessor and a
successor. No open-ended activities will be permitted. Note that NTP shall have a
successor or successors and Final Completion shall have a predecessor or
predecessors.
D. Proposed durations assigned to each activity shall be the Contractor’s best estimate of
time required to complete the activity, considering the scope and resources planned for
the activity.
E. The durations of activities shall be expressed in whole working days, with a maximum
duration of 20 workdays each, unless otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer or
the Owner. The duration of non-construction activities including mobilization, shop
drawings and sample submittals, fabrication of materials and equipment, and delivery of
materials and equipment may exceed this limitation.
F. The Schedule shall incorporate in detail all elements of the Work contained within the
Contract Documents. Specific elements of the Work to incorporate into the schedule
include but are not limited to the following:
1.
Notice to Proceed.
2.
Mobilization and demobilization.
3.
Submittals including O&M Manuals. Note that durations for Engineer review time
shall be 30 working days unless specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
4.
Fabrication and procurement activities.
5.
Temporary construction activities and relocations
6.
Permitting
7.
Erosion control
8.
Site clearing
9.
Site restoration
10.
All requirements for coordination with Owner operations
11.
Concrete curing and form removal
8/15/2025
01 32 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
12.
All testing activities
13.
Inspections as required by local authorities.
14.
Interim Milestones as defined by this Contact or as deemed critical as the project
progresses.
15.
All requirements related to facility startup and commissioning.
16.
Substantial Completion (including the period for performing the punchlist)
17.
Final Completion
1.05
TIME IMPACT ANALYSIS
A. General:
1.
Prepare and submit a time impact analysis when one or more of the following
occurs:
a.
Change Order proposal is prepared.
b.
Work Change Directive is issued that will affect the Progress Schedule.
c.
When delays are experienced.
2.
Time impact analysis shall illustrate the influence of each Change Order, Work
Change Directive, or delay.
3.
Each time impact analysis shall include a sketch (fragnet) demonstrating how
Contractor proposes to incorporate the changes in the Project or, as applicable,
delays into the Progress Schedule. Fragnet shall include all logic, and additions
required as result of said Change Order, Work Change Directive, or delay.
4.
Fragnet shall show all CPM logic revisions for the Work associated with the
Change Order, Work Change Directive, or delay and its relationship to other
Activities.
5.
Timing of Time Impact Analysis:
a.
Submit each time impact analysis within 7 days after the following, as
applicable:
1)
Start of the delay.
2)
After the submittal of Change Order proposal to Engineer
8/15/2025
01 32 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3)
After Contractor’s Receipt of Work Change Directive.
b.
Failure to Submit Time Impact Analysis: When General Contractor does not
submit time impact analysis for a specific change or delay under the General
Contract, within the specified period of time for such submittal, such non-
submittal shall be construed as a waiver of entitlement to time extension
unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
B. Evaluation by Engineer and Acceptance:
1.
Engineer’s evaluation of each time impact analysis comprised of complete
information will be completed in timely manner after Engineer’s receipt. Changes
in the Contract Times will be made only by Change Order.
2.
When mutual agreement is reached between the parties, on effect of the change
or delay in the Project, incorporate into the next Progress Schedule and update the
associated fragnets illustrating the influence of changes and delays.
1.06
RECOVERY SCHEDULES
A. General:
1.
When updated Progress Schedule indicates that the ability to comply with the
Contract Times falls 30 or more days behind schedule, and there is no excusable
delay, Change Order, or Work Change Directive to support an extension of the
Contract Times, Contractor shall prepare and submit a Progress Schedule
demonstrating Contractor’s plan to accelerate the Project to achieve compliance
with the Contract Times (i.e., “recovery schedule”) for Engineer’s acceptance.
2.
Submit recovery schedule within 14 days after submittal of updated Progress
Schedule where need for recovery schedule is indicated.
B. Implementation of Recovery Schedule:
1.
At no additional cost to Owner, Contractor shall do one or more of the following:
a.
Furnish additional labor and construction equipment.
b.
Employ additional work shifts.
c.
Expedite procurement of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the
Work.
d.
Other measures necessary to complete the Work within the Contract Times.
2.
Upon acceptance of recovery schedule by Engineer, incorporate recovery
schedule into the next Progress Schedule update.
8/15/2025
01 32 00-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. Lack of Action: Contractor’s refusal, failure or neglect to submit a recovery schedule,
shall constitute reasonable evidence that Contractor is not prosecuting the Work or
separable part thereof with the diligence that will ensure completion within the Contract
Times. Such lack of action shall constitute sufficient basis for Owner to exercise
remedies available to Owner under the Contract Documents
1.07
USE OF FLOAT
A. Total Float and Contract Float belong to the Project and may be used by Owner,
Engineer, or Contractor to accommodate modifications, regardless of origination, in the
Work or to mitigate the effect of events that may delay performance or completion of the
Work. Use of float shall be coordinated with the Owner and documented in schedule
updates.
B. Changes or delays that influence scheduled Work Activities with Float and that do not
extend the critical path will not be justification for an extension in Contract Times.
1.08
SUBMITTALS
A. Action/Informational Submittals:
1.
Initial Progress Schedules:
a.
Preliminary Progress Schedule
b.
Acceptable Progress Schedule (Baseline)
2.
Progress Schedule Updates:
a.
Progress Schedule updates shall comply with requirements of this Section
and shall include updated Progress Schedule and Schedule Narrative
Report.
b.
Submit updated Progress Schedule at each progress meeting. If a Progress
Schedule remains unchanged from one progress meeting to the next, submit
a written statement to that effect.
3.
Time Impact Analyses: Submit in accordance with this Section.
4.
Recovery Schedule: Submit in accordance with this Section.
5.
Qualifications: Progress Schedule preparer, and other personnel that will assist
Progress Schedule preparer in preparing and maintaining the Progress Schedule.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
8/15/2025
01 32 00-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 33 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.
Contractor shall provide submittals in accordance with the General Conditions as
modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. In the event of
conflict, the City of Chandler General Conditions shall take precedence.
2.
Contractor is responsible to confirm and correct dimensions at the Site, for
information pertaining to the fabrication processes and to techniques of
construction, and for coordinating the work of all trades. Contractor’s signature of
submittal’s stamp and letter of transmittal shall be Contractor’s representation that
Contractor has met their obligations under the Contract Documents relative to that
submittal.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Section 01 25 00 − Substitution Procedures.
2.
Section 01 78 23 − Operation and Maintenance Data.
3.
Section 01 78 39 − Project Record Documents.
4.
Section 01 78 43 − Spare Parts and Extra Material.
5.
Section 01 79 00 − Instruction of Owner’s Personnel.
1.02
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Types of Submittals: When type of submittal is not specified and is not specified in this
Section, Engineer will determine type of submittal.
1.
Action/Informational Submittals:
a.
Shop Drawings.
b.
Product data.
c.
Delegated design submittals in accordance with the General Conditions and
as modified by the Supplemental Conditions.
8/15/2025
01 33 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Samples.
e.
Testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations.
f.
Design data not sealed and signed by a design professional retained by
Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier.
g.
Pre-construction test and evaluation reports, such as reports on pilot testing,
subsurface investigations, potential Hazardous Environmental Conditions,
and similar reports.
h.
Supplier instructions, including installation data, and instructions for
handling, starting-up, and troubleshooting.
i.
Sustainable design submittals (other than sustainable design closeout
documentation).
j.
Lesson plans for training and instruction of Owner’s personnel.
2.
Closeout Submittals:
a.
Maintenance contracts.
b.
Operations and maintenance data.
c.
Bonds, such as maintenance bonds and bonds for a specific product or
system.
d.
Warranty documentation.
e.
Record documentation.
f.
Sustainable design closeout documentation.
g.
Software.
3.
Maintenance Material Submittals:
a.
Maintenance materials schedule and checklist.
b.
Spare parts.
c.
Extra stock materials.
d.
Tools.
4.
Quality Assurance Submittals:
8/15/2025
01 33 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
Performance affidavits.
b.
Certificates.
c.
Source quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and
testing limitations), including results of shop testing.
d.
Field or Site quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures,
and testing limitations), including results of operating and acceptability tests
at the Site.
e.
Supplier reports.
f.
Special procedure submittals, including health and safety plans and other
procedural submittals.
g.
Qualifications statements.
B. Submittal Requirements:
1.
Contractor shall submit electronic copy of submittals for Engineer’s review via
Procore Document Management, unless otherwise specified in individual
Specification Sections. Acceptable electronic formats are Adobe PDF, Microsoft
Word, Autodesk DWF and AutoCAD.
2.
Submittals shall be furnished in two dimensional PDF.
3.
Submittal shall be accompanied by letter of transmittal containing date, project
title, Contractor’s name, number and title of submittal, list of relevant Specification
Sections, notification of deviations from Contract Documents, and other material
required for Engineer’s review.
4.
Electronic Submittal File Format Requirements:
a.
Files shall be electronically searchable for submitted equipment and
material.
b.
Provide bookmarks within files in excess of 20 pages for submitted
equipment and material including, but not limited to, the following:
1)
Each chapter and subsection listed in the files table of contents
2)
Each figure, table, and appendix.
3)
Each drawing.
C. Scheduling:
8/15/2025
01 33 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Provide submittals well in advance of the Work following Engineer’s approval or
acceptance of the associated submittal. Work covered by a submittal will not be
included in progress payments until approval or acceptance of related submittals
has been obtained in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2.
Submittals shall be provided by Contractor with at least fifteen (15) working days
for review and processing.
1.03
SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Submittals, as specified in this Section:
1.
Timing:
a.
Provide submittal within time frames specified in the Contract Documents.
See the following for specific requirements:
1)
Section 4.2 Contractor’s Pre-Agreement and Pre-Work Deliverables
2)
Section 4.7 Materials Quality, Substitutions, and Shop Drawings
3)
Section 6.2 Project Schedule
b.
Provide updated Schedule of Submittals with each submittal of the updated
Progress Schedule.
2.
Content: In accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the
Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. Requirements for content of
preliminary Schedule of Submittals and subsequent submittals of the Schedule of
Submittals are identical.
a.
Identify submittals required in the Contract Documents. Updates of Schedule
of Submittals shall show scheduled dates and actual dates for completed
tasks. Indicate submittals that are on the Project’s critical path.
b.
Indicate the following for each submittal:
1)
Date when submittals are requested and received from Supplier.
2)
Date when certification is received from Supplier and when submitted
to Engineer.
3)
Date when submittals are submitted to Engineer and returned with
disposition from Engineer.
4)
Date when submittals are revised by Supplier and submitted to
Engineer.
8/15/2025
01 33 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5)
Date when submittals are returned with “Furnish as Submitted” (FAS)
or “Furnish as Corrected” (FAC) disposition from Engineer.
6)
Date when approved submittals are returned to Supplier.
7)
Date of Supplier scheduled delivery of equipment and material.
8)
Date of actual delivery of equipment and material.
9)
Whether submittal will be for a substitution or “equal”. Procedures for
substitutions and “or equals” are specified in the General Conditions
and the Section 01 25 00 − Substitution Procedures.
10)
For submittals for materials or equipment, date by which material or
equipment must be at the Site to avoid delaying the Work and to avoid
delaying the work of other contractors.
3.
Prepare Schedule of Submittals using same software, and in same format,
specified for Progress Schedules.
4.
Coordinate Schedule of Submittals with the Progress Schedule.
5.
Schedule of Submittals that is not compatible with the Progress Schedule, or that
does not indicate submittals on the Project’s critical path, or that places
extraordinary demands on Engineer for time and resources, is unacceptable. Do
not include submittals not required by the Contract Documents.
6.
In preparing Schedule of Submittals:
a.
Considering the nature and complexity of each submittal, allow sufficient
time for review and revision.
b.
Reasonable time shall be allowed for: Engineer’s review and processing of
submittals, for submittals to be revised and resubmitted, and for returning
submittals to Contractor.
c.
Identify and accordingly schedule submittals that are expected to have long
anticipated review times.
1.04
ACTION/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following Submittals in accordance with the individual Specification Sections,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Product Data:
a.
Catalog cut-sheets
8/15/2025
01 33 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
b.
Descriptive bulletins/brochures/specifications
c.
Material of construction data, including details on all components including
applicable ASTM designations.
d.
Lifting, erection, installation, and adjustment instructions, and
recommendations.
e.
Finish/treatment data, including interior and exterior shop coating systems.
f.
Equipment/material weight/loading data, including total uncrated weight of
the equipment plus the approximate weight of shipped materials. Support
locations and loads that will be transmitted to bases and foundations
following installation. Size, placement, and embedment requirements of
anchor bolts.
g.
Complete information regarding location, type, size, and length of all field
welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.0 of the
American Welding Society. Special conditions shall be fully explained by
notes and details.
h.
Motor data including horsepower; enclosure type; voltage; insulation class;
temperature rise and results of dielectric tests; service-rating; rotative speed;
motor speed-torque relationship; efficiency and power factor at ½, ¾, and full
load; slip at full load; running, full load, and locked rotor current values; safe
running time-current curves; motor protective devices; and interconnection
diagrams.
i.
Engineering design data, calculations, and system analyses
j.
Digital system documentation
k.
Operating sequence descriptions
l.
Software/programming documentation
m.
Manufacturer’s instructions
2.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Equipment and material layout drawings, including panel layout drawings.
b.
System schematics and diagrams including, but not limited to, piping
systems; HVAC and ventilation systems; process equipment systems;
electrical operating systems; wiring diagrams; controls, alarm and
communication systems.
8/15/2025
01 33 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
Layout and installation drawings (interior and exterior) for all pipes, valves,
fittings, sewers, drains, heating and ventilation ducts, all electrical, heating,
ventilating and other conduits, plumbing lines, electrical cable trays, lighting
fixture layouts, and circuiting, instrumentation, interconnection wiring
diagrams, communications, power supply, alarm circuits, etc.
d.
Layout and installation drawings shall show connections to structures,
equipment, sleeves, valves, fittings, etc.
e.
Drawings shall show the location and type of all supports, hangers,
foundations, etc., and the required clearances to operate valves, equipment,
etc.
f.
Drawings for pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., shall show all 3 inch and larger
electrical conduits and pressure piping, electrical cable trays, heating and
ventilation ducts or pipes, structure, manholes or any other feature within
four (4) feet (measured as the clear dimension) from the pipe duct, conduit,
etc., for which the profile is drawn.
g.
Equipment and material schedules.
3.
Delegated design submittals, which include documents prepared, sealed, and
signed by a design professional retained by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier
for materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed Work.
Delegated design submittals do not include submittals related to temporary
construction unless specified otherwise in the related Specification Section.
Delegated design submittals include: design drawings, design data including
calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such
design professional.
B. Samples:
1.
General Requirements:
a.
Conform submittal of Samples to the General Conditions as modified by the
Supplementary Conditions, this Section, and the Specification Section in
which the Sample is specified.
b.
Furnish at the same time Samples and submittals that are related to the
same unit of Work or Specification Section. Engineer will not review
submittals without associated Samples and will not review Samples without
associated submittals.
c.
Samples shall clearly illustrate functional characteristics of product, all
related parts and attachments, and full range of color, texture, pattern, and
material.
8/15/2025
01 33 00-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Submittal Requirements:
a.
Securely label or tag Samples with submittal identification number. Label or
tag shall not cover, conceal, or alter appearance or features of Sample.
Label or tag shall not be separated from the Sample.
b.
Submit number of Samples required in Specifications. If number of Samples
is not specified in the associated Specification Section, provide at least one
identical Samples of each item required for Engineer’s approval. If
Contractor requires Sample(s) for Contractor’s use, notify Engineer in writing
and provide additional Sample(s). Contractor is responsible for furnishing,
shipping, and transporting additional Samples.
c.
Deliver one Sample to Engineer’s field office at the Site. Deliver balance of
Samples to location directed by Engineer.
1.05
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following Closeout Submittals in accordance with the individual Specification
Sections, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Maintenance contracts
2.
Bonds for specific products or systems
3.
Warranty documentation
4.
Sustainable design closeout documentation.
5.
Software programming and documentation.
B. On documents such as maintenance contracts and bonds, include on each document
furnished original signature of entity issuing the document.
C. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 −
Operations and Maintenance Data.
D. Record Documentation: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 39 − Project Record
Documents.
E. Disposition: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational
Submittals.
8/15/2025
01 33 00-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.06
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. For spare parts, extra stock materials, and tools, submit quantity of items specified in
associated Specification Section. Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 43 − Spare
Parts and Extra Materials.
B. Disposition: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational
Submittals.
1.07
CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall review, coordinate, and verify submittals with Subcontractors,
Manufacturers, and Suppliers, including field measurements at Site, in accordance with
the General Conditions and as modified by Supplemental Conditions prior to submitting
material for Engineer’s review.
B. Contractor shall clearly and concisely indicate and mark equipment and material being
submitted to meet the intent of the Contract Documents. Equipment and material not
being submitted shall be deleted, stricken through, or otherwise designated not being
submitted. Equipment and material data sheets shall be included once with cross
references throughout the submittal. Multiple equipment and material data sheets for
the same item within a submittal may receive a rejected disposition until corrected.
C. Contractor shall provide Contractor’s stamp of approval certifying submittal material has
been reviewed and conform to the Contract Documents prior to submitting material for
Engineer’s review.
D. Contractor shall provide written notice of deviations or variations that submittal may have
with the Contract Documents.
E. Contractor shall provide bound, dated, labeled, tabulated, and consecutively numbered
submittals as specified in the individual Specification Section. Label shall contain the
following:
1.
Specification Section.
2.
Referenced Drawing number.
3.
Subcontractor or Supplier name.
4.
Type of equipment and/or materials.
F. Contractor shall perform the following after receiving Engineer’s review disposition:
8/15/2025
01 33 00-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Order, fabricate, or ship equipment and materials included in the submittal
(pending Engineer’s review of source quality control submittals) with the following
disposition:
a.
“Furnish as Submitted” (FAS).
b.
“Furnish as Corrected” (FAC).
c.
“Furnish as Corrected – Confirm” (FACC), only portions of Work that do not
require resubmittal for Engineer’s review.
2.
Resubmittal requirements:
a.
Partial resubmittal of “Furnish as Corrected – Confirm” (FACC) returned
dispositions, until Engineer’s disposition is either “Furnish as Submitted”
(FAS) or “Furnish as Corrected” (FAC).
b.
Full resubmittal of material with Engineer’s disposition of “Revise and
Resubmit” (R&R), until Engineer’s disposition is “Furnish as Submitted”
(FAS), “Furnish as Corrected” (FAC), or “Furnish as Corrected – Confirm”
(FACC) that requires a partial resubmittal.
c.
Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner if submittals
are not approved within the number of specified submittals in accordance
with the General Conditions Section 8.4 City’s Right to Withold Payment.
Engineer’s charges shall include, but not limited to, additional review effort,
meetings, and conference calls with Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier.
1.08
ENGINEER’S REVIEW
A. Engineer’s review of the Contractor’s submittal shall not relieve Contractor’s
responsibility under the Contract Document in accordance with the General Conditions
Section 4.7 Materials Quality, Substitutions, and Shop Drawings (refer to 4.9.4 City May
Correct Defective Work).
B. . An acceptance of a submittal shall be intended to mean the Engineer does not have
specific objection to the submitted material, subject to conformance with the Contract
Drawings and Specifications.
C. Engineer’s review of Contractor’s submittal shall be confined to general arrangement
and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall not be for the purpose of
checking dimensions, weights, clearances, fittings, tolerances, interferences,
coordination of Subcontractor work, etc.
D. Review Dispositions:
8/15/2025
01 33 00-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
“Furnish as Submitted” (FAS) – No exceptions are taken.
2.
“Furnish as Corrected” (FAC) – Minor corrections are noted for Contractor’s
correction.
3.
“Furnish as Corrected – Confirm” (FACC) – Corrections are noted and partial
resubmittal shall be made as noted.
4.
“Revise and Resubmit” (R&R) – Corrections are noted and complete resubmittal
shall be made. Submittal does not conform to applicable requirements of the
Contract Documents and is not acceptable. Revise submittal and re-submit to
indicate acceptability and conformance with the Contract Documents.
5.
“Receipt Acknowledged” (RA) –
a.
Information included in submittal conforms to the applicable requirements of
the Contract Documents and is acceptable. No further action by Contractor
is required relative to this submittal, and the Work covered by the submittal
may proceed, and products with submittals with this disposition may be
shipped or operated, as applicable.
b.
Information included in submittal is for Project record purposes and does not
require Engineer’s review or approval.
6.
“Rejected” (R) – Information included in submittal does not conform to the
applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is unacceptable.
Contractor shall submit products and materials as specified in the Contract
Documents or provide required information for substitution as specified in the
Contract Documents for consideration by Engineer.
E. Electronic Submittal Return to Contractor: Electronic submittals shall be returned
electronically with dispositions provided.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 42 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Definitions and terminology applicable to all the Contract Documents are included below
. Where conflicts or ambiguities exist between this Section and the City of Chandler
General Conditions (Exhibit B), the following shall govern:
1.
City General Conditions Section 2 – General Definitions
2.
Section 14.2 – Reference Standards
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: Common abbreviations that may be found in the Contract
Documents are listed below:
alternating current
a-c
ampere
A
Architectural Barriers Act
ABA
Americans with Disabilities Act
ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines
ADAAG
ante meridian
a.m.
average
avg
biochemical oxygen demand
BOD
brake horsepower
bhp
British thermal unit
Btu
Centigrade (or Celsius)
C
chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
CPVC
Code of Federal Regulations
CFR
cubic inch
cu in
cubic foot
cu ft
8/15/2025
01 42 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
cubic yard
cdu yd, or CY
cubic feet per minute
cfm
cubic feet per second
cfs
degree Centigrade (or Celsius)
degrees C or
ºC
degrees Fahrenheit
degrees F or
ºF
diameter
dia
direct current
d-c
dollars
$
each
ea
efficiency
eff
Fahrenheit
F
feet
ft
feet per hour
fph
feet per minute
fpm
feet per second
fps
figure
Fig
flange
flg
foot-pound
ft-lb
gallon
gal
gallons per hour
gph
gallons per minute
gpm
gallons per second
gps
gram
g
grams per liter
g/L
Hertz
Hz
horsepower
hp or HP
hour
hr
human-machine interface
HMI
8/15/2025
01 42 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
inch
in.
inches water gage
in. w.g.
inch-pound
in.-lb
inside diameter
ID
iron pipe size
IPS
thousand pounds
kips
thousand pounds per square inch
ksi
kilovolt-ampere
kva
kilowatt
kw
linear foot
lin ft or LF
liter
L
maximum
max
mercury
Hg
milligram
mg
milligrams per liter
mg/l or mg/L
milliliter
ml
millimeter
mm
million gallons per day
mgd or MGD
million gallons
MG
minimum
min
national pipe threads
NPT
net positive suction head
NPSH
net positive suction head available
NPSHA
net positive suction head required
NPSHR
nominal pipe size
NPS
number
no.
operator interface terminal
OIT
ounce
oz
8/15/2025
01 42 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
ounce-force
ozf
outside diameter
OD
parts per hundred
pph
parts per million
ppm
parts per billion
ppb
polyvinyl chloride
PVC
post meridian
p.m.
pound
lb
pounds per square inch
psi
pounds per square inch absolute
psia
pounds per square inch gauge
psig
pounds per square foot
psf
process control system
PCS
programmable logic controller
PLC
revolutions per minute
rpm
second
sec
specific gravity
sp gr or SG
square
sq
square foot
sq ft or sf
square inch
sq in.
square yard
sq yd or SY
standard
std
standard cubic feet per minute
scfm
total dynamic head
TDH
B. Definitions: Terminology used in the Specifications includes:
1.
“Indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings,
or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar locations in
the Contract Documents.
8/15/2025
01 42 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
“Shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used to help the user locate the
reference without limitation on the location.
3.
“Installer”, “applicator”, or “erector” is Contractor or another entity engaged by
Contractor, either as an employee or subcontractor, to perform a particular
construction activity, including installation, erection, application or similar Work.
Installers shall be experienced in the Work that installer is engaged to perform.
4.
“Experienced”, when used with the term “installer” means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this
Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; being familiar with
Laws and Regulations; and having complied with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, and complying with requirements of the Supplier of the material
or equipment being installed.
5.
Trades: Use of a term such as “carpentry” does not imply that certain construction
activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a
corresponding generic name, such as “carpenter”, unless otherwise indicated in
the Contract Documents or required by Laws or Regulations. Such terminology
also does not imply that specified requirements apply exclusively to trade
personnel of the corresponding generic name.
6.
“Assigned specialists” and similar terms: Certain Sections of the Specifications
require that specific construction activities be performed by specialists recognized
as experts in those operations. Engage said specialists for those activities, and
their engagement is a requirement over which Contractor has no option. These
requirements do not conflict with enforcement of building codes and other Laws
and Regulations. Also, such requirements are not intended to interfere with local
trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments
shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for complying with the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
C. Reference Standards:
1.
Refer to General Conditions to resolve discrepancies between reference standards
and the Contract Documents. Provisions of reference standards are in effect in
accordance with the Specifications and General Conditions Section 14.2 –
Reference Standards.
2.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in the Work shall be familiar with
reference standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable
reference standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where reference
standards are needed for a construction activity, obtain copies of standards from
the publication source.
8/15/2025
01 42 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.
Abbreviations and Names: Where reference standards, specifications, codes,
manuals, Laws or Regulations, or other published data of international, national,
regional or local organizations are referred to in the Contract Documents, the
organization issuing the standard may be referred to by their acronym or
abbreviation only.
4.
Following acronyms or abbreviations that may appear in the Contract Documents
shall have the meanings indicated below. Listing is alphabetical by acronym.
AA
Aluminum Association
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI
American Concrete Institute
ACIFS
American Cast Iron Flange Standards
ACS
American Chemical Society
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
ADSC
International Association of Foundation Drilling.
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies
AF&PA
American Forest and Paper Association
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association (formerly Anti- Friction
Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA))
AGA
American Gas Association
AGMA
American Gear Manufacturers Association
AHDGA
American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association
AI
Asphalt Institute
AIA
American Institute of Architects
AIChE
American Institute of Chemical Engineers
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
ALSC
American Lumber Standards Committee
8/15/2025
01 42 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
AMA
Acoustical Materials Association
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association
AMP
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers,
Architectural Metal Products Division
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APA
The Engineered Wood Association
API
American Petroleum Institute
APHA
American Public Health Association
AREA
American Railway Engineering Association
ARI
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASA
American Standards Association
ASAE
American Society of Agricultural Engineers
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASNT
American Society for Non-Destructive Testing
ASQ
American Society for Quality
ASSE
American Society of Safety Engineers
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWCI
Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
AWPI
American Wood Preservers Institute
AWS
American Welding Society
AWWA
American Water Works Association
BAAQMD
Bay Area Air Quality Management District
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA
Brick Industry Association
BOCA
Building Officials and Code Administrators
8/15/2025
01 42 00-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
CBMA
Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association
CDA
Copper Development Association
CEMA
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
CISCA
Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CMAA
Crane Manufacturers Association of America
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute
DIN
Deutsches Institut fur Normung eV (German Institute for
Standardization)
DIPRA
Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
ETL
Intertek Testing Services, Inc. (formerly ETL Testing Laboratories,
Inc.)
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
FEMA
Federal Emergency Management Agency
FHWA
Federal Highway Administration
FM
Factory Mutual (FM Global)
FRPI
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastics Institute
FS
Federal Specification
GA
Gypsum Association
GANA
Glass Association of North America
HEW
United States Department of Health, Education and Welfare
HI
Hydraulic Institute
HMI
Hoist Manufacturers Institute
8/15/2025
01 42 00-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
HUD
United States Department of Housing and Urban Development
IBC
International Building Code
ICC
International Code Council
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
IFI
Industrial Fasteners Institute
IFCEA
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
IRI
Industrial Risk Insurers
ISA
Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (formerly
Instrument Society of America)
ISO
Insurance Services Office
IOS
International Organization for Standardization
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
MIA
Marble Institute of America
ML/SFA
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
MS
Military Specifications
MSS
Manufacturers’ Standardization Society
MMA
Monorail Manufacturers Association
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE
National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NAPF
National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc.
NARUC
National Association of Regulatory Utilities Commissioners
NBHA
National Builders Hardware Association
NBS
United States Department of Commerce, National Bureau of
Standards
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
NEC
National Electric Code
NELMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers’ Association
8/15/2025
01 42 00-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NESC
National Electrical Safety Code
NETA
International Electrical Testing Association
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
NGA
National Glass Association
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
NHPMA
Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association
NIST
United States Department of Commerce, National Institute of
Standards and Technology
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSF
National Sanitation Foundation
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand, and Gravel Association
NTMA
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA
Portland Cement Association
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PEI
Porcelain Enamel Institute
PFI
Pipe Fabrication Institute
PPI
Plastics Pipe Institute
PGMC
Primary Glass Manufacturers Council
PS
Product Standards Section, United States Department of Commerce
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections (part of AISC)
RMA
Rubber Manufacturers Association
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers
SBCCI
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
SCAQMD
Southern California Air Quality Management District
8/15/2025
01 42 00-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SCPRF
Structural Clay Products Research Foundation
SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
SDI
Steel Door Institute
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association
SPI
Society of the Plastics Industry
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
SSPC
Society for Protective Coatings
SWI
Steel Window Institute
TCNA
Tile Council of North America
TEMA
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries
Alliance
UBC
Uniform Building Code
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
USAB
United States Access Board
USDOE
United States Department of Energy
USEPA
United States Environmental Protection Agency
USGBC
United States Green Building Council
USGS
United States Geological Survey
USPHS
United States Public Health Service
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
WCMA
Wood Component Manufacturers Association
MDMA
Window and Door Manufacturers Association
WWEMA
Water and Wastewater Equipment Manufacturers Association
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
8/15/2025
01 42 00-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 45 23-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 45 23
TESTING SERVICES FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This specification addresses requirements for testing services specifically required to be
provided by the Contractor. This section does not apply to any testing required to be
provided by the Owner or Owner’s representative.
B. This section does not apply to any Special Inspections as required by Section 01 45 33.
Special Inspections cannot be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the
Governing Building Code.
C. Contractor shall employ and pay for independent testing entity to perform specified
services covered by this specification. Entity selected shall be subject to approval by
Engineer and the City. All costs shall be borne by the Contractor, consistent with City
General Conditions Section 4.7.
D. Inspection, sampling, and testing shall be as specified in the individual Specification
Sections.
E. Related Sections, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Section 01 45 33 – Special Inspections
2.
Section 01 88 16 – Watertightness Testing of Concrete Structures
3.
Section 31 00 01 − Earthwork
4.
Section 31 05 16 − Aggregate Materials
5.
Section 31 23 24 − Flowable Fill
6.
Section 32 10 00 − Paving and Surfacing
7.
Section 33 05 61 − Utility Structures
8.
Section 33 41 13 − Foundation Drainage Systems
9.
Section 03 21 00 − Reinforcing Steel
10.
Section 03 30 00 − Cast-in-Place Concrete
8/15/2025
01 45 23-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
11.
Section 07 13 50 − Waterproofing
1.02
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor’s Responsibilities:
1.
Provide to laboratory representative samples of materials to be tested, in required
quantities.
2.
Provide labor and facilities:
a.
To provide access to the Work to be tested, and where required, to
Suppliers’ operations.
b.
To obtain and handle samples at the Site.
c.
To facilitate inspections and tests.
d.
For testing entity’s exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.
e.
Forms for preparing concrete test beams and cylinders.
3.
Notify testing entity and Engineer sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for
assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
4.
Arrange with testing entity and pay for additional services, sampling, and testing
required for Contractor’s convenience. (see City General Conditions Section 4.7
for related requirements).
5.
Provide to testing entity the preliminary design mix proposed for concrete, and
other material mixes that require testing by the testing laboratory.
B.
Testing Entity’s Responsibilities:
1.
Cooperate with Contractor and Engineer and provide qualified personnel promptly
when notified.
2.
Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials, and methods of
construction; comply with applicable standards. Services shall be coordinated with
City inspection requirements in accordance with City General Conditions Section
5.4 Permit Review and Inspections.
3.
Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies in the Work
observed during performance of services.
8/15/2025
01 45 23-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
Submit specified quantity of report copies of inspections and tests to Contractor
and Engineer.
5.
Perform additional tests and services as required to ensure compliance with the
Contract Documents.
C. Report Requirements:
1.
Electronic Submittal of testing reports.
2.
Include the following information:
a.
Date issued.
b.
Project title, number, and name of the Site.
c.
Testing laboratory name and address.
d.
Name and signature of inspector or person obtaining samples.
e.
Date of inspection or sampling.
f.
Record of temperature and weather.
g.
Date of test.
h.
Identification of material or product tested and associated Specification
Section.
i.
Location in the Project.
j.
Type of inspection or test.
k.
Results of tests and observations regarding compliance with the Contract
Documents.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of material and product test reports where required by the Contract
Documents and as requested by Engineer.
B. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1.
Qualifications statement indicating experience and facilities for tests required
under the Contract Documents.
8/15/2025
01 45 23-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Copy of report of inspection of facilities during most recent NIST inspection tour.
Include memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported during inspection.
3.
Copy of certificate of calibration for each instrument or measuring device proposed
for use, by accredited calibration agency.
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies
Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing.
B. Laboratory shall be authorized to operate in the same State or Commonwealth as the
Site. Where applicable, laboratory shall be certified by the authority having jurisdiction
for the types of testing required.
C. Testing equipment used by laboratory will be calibrated at maximum twelve month
intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either NIST’s Standard Reference Materials
(SRM), ISO 17025, General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and
Calibration Laboratories, or certified by State, Commonwealth, or local bureau of weights
and measures, or values of natural physical constants generally accepted in the
engineering and scientific community.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 45 33-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 45 33
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. This Section defines the requirements for Special Inspections as required by Section
1704 of the International Building Code (IBC) and any State or local amendments. In the
event of a conflict between this Section and the City of Chandler General Conditions
(Exhibit B), the City General Conditions shall govern.
B. Either the Engineer of Record (EOR) or Registered Design Professional in Responsible
Charge (RDPIRC) will prepare a Statement of Special Inspections, which identifies the
type and extent of required Special Inspections.
C. The Owner will retain one or more Special Inspections Agencies to perform Special
Inspection services. These Agencies shall be independent from the Contractor. The
EOR may perform Special Inspection services where qualifications for a specific
inspection task are met. Retention of Agencies by the Owner does not modify
Contractor obligations for access, notice, or correction of non-conforming Work per the
following General Conditions Sections:
1.
Section 4.4 Performance of Work
2.
Section 4.7 Materials Quality, Substitutions and Shop Drawings
3.
Section 4.9 Warranty and Correction of Defective Work
D. The Contractor shall plan and conduct operations as to schedule and allow Special
Inspections, providing adequate time and safe access for inspections. The Contractor
shall coordinate requirements for Special Inspections with the Special Inspections
Agency.
E. Special Inspections shall be in addition to inspections performed by Building Officials
that are specified in IBC Section 104.
F. Special Inspections shall be in addition to any Structural Observations required by IBC
Section 1704.6.
G. Special Inspections do not supersede other inspections and testing required by the
Contract Documents to satisfy the Contractor’s quality control responsibility. Contractor
shall be responsible for all costs associated with quality control requirements as required
by other Sections of the Specifications.
8/15/2025
01 45 33-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
H. Special Inspections shall not relieve Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete
work in accordance with Contract Documents. Results of Special Inspections activities,
including any discrepancies that are noted or not noted, shall never constitute an
acceptance of work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
I.
This Section does not apply to construction equipment, shoring, earth retention systems,
and temporary structures used by the Contractor in construction and not detailed in the
Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for means, methods,
techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction and any associated building code
requirements.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Special Inspections requirements apply to work detailed in other Sections of the
Specifications. Special Inspections requirements shall be in addition to any other
inspection or quality control requirements detailed in other Sections of the Specifications.
See individual Specification Sections for type of work in question.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Periodic Special Inspections: The part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring
Special Inspection by a Special Inspector who is present in the area where the work has
been or is being performed and at the completion of the work.
B. Continuous Special Inspections: The full-time observation of work requiring Special
Inspection by a Special Inspector who is present in the area where the work is being
performed.
C. Engineer of Record (EOR): The engineer of each system in responsible charge for the
design of each specific building system including structural, mechanical, electrical, and
architectural components
D. Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge (RDPIRC): The RDPIRC in
charge of Special Inspections during construction for each specific building system
including structural, mechanical, electrical, and architectural components. The RDPIRC
shall be a currently Registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in
which the project is located. The EOR may serve in this role.
E. Special Inspections Agency: An established and recognized agency regularly engaged
in conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, which has been approved by the
Building Official and is retained by the Owner. The EOR may serve in this role where
qualifications for specific inspection tasks are met.
F. Special Inspector: Individual employed by or retained by the Special Inspections Agency
who is qualified in inspection of specific aspects or components of the construction and
8/15/2025
01 45 33-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
conducts inspection activities in these specific aspects of the construction, as required
by this Section. The EOR may serve in this role where qualifications for specific
inspection tasks are met.
G. Statement of Special Inspections: Document prepared by the EOR or RDPIRC and
submitted to the Building Official which identifies the type and extent of required Special
Inspections.
H. Approved Fabricator: Fabricator who has been registered and approved by the Building
Official to manufacture or fabricate specific components of the construction without
Special Inspections.
1.04
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work
herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents and all
other documents referenced in the Specifications. All referenced Specifications, codes,
and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid.
1.
International Building Code
2.
ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
3.
AISC – Code of Standard Practice
4.
AISC 348 – Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts
5.
ADMI – Aluminum Design Manual: A Specification for Aluminum Structures
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -
Submittal Procedures. Submittal routing and communications shall also comply with
General Conditions Sections
1.
4.7 Materials Quality, Substitutions and Shop Drawings and
2.
14.25 – Project Communications.
B. Where the Building Official requires direct submittal from the Special Inspections
Agency, the Contractor remains responsible for coordination and schedule integration.
1.
The Contractor shall submit qualifications of any fabricators they intend to use that
may qualify as Approved Fabricators to the Special Inspections Agency for review.
C. The Special Inspections Agency shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01
33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Copies of all required submittals and reports shall also be
8/15/2025
01 45 33-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
provided to the City per General Conditions Section 5.1 and 5.4, in addition to recipients
listed herein.
1.
The Special Inspections Agency shall provide a statement of qualifications
showing relative experience, training, and certification(s) for each Special
Inspector to the Building Official, if requested.
2.
The Special Inspections Agency shall review fabricator qualifications and submit
them to the Building Official for approval as an Approved Fabricator if requested.
3.
Special Inspectors shall keep detailed inspection records, including all inspections,
tests, similar services, and any discrepancies and corrections. Any discrepancies
and corrections shall be reported to the Building Official, the EOR, and the
RDPIRC in all required reports, unless otherwise required by the Building Official.
4.
The Special Inspections Agency shall submit Interim Reports to the Building
Official and the RDPIRC documenting required Special Inspections and correction
of any discrepancies at the frequency specified in the Statement of Special
Inspections.
5.
The Special Inspections Agency shall submit to the Building Official and the
RDPIRC a Final Report documenting required Special Inspections and correction
of any discrepancies. The Final Report shall be submitted at a point in time agreed
upon by the Owner and the Building Official at the Pre-inspection Meeting.
6.
Where work is done by Approved Fabricators, the Special Inspections Agency
shall coordinate the submittal of a certificate of compliance to the Building Official,
the EOR, and the RDPIRC.
1.06
SPECIAL INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. Special Inspectors shall meet minimum qualifications established by the Building Official
and shall be approved by the Building Official.
1.07
OFF-SITE FABRICATIONS
A. When structural elements or assemblies are fabricated off site, Special Inspections shall
be performed in the fabricator’s shop unless the fabricator is an Approved Fabricator.
Special Inspections are not required if work is done on the premises of an Approved
Fabricator.
B. Fabricators shall maintain detailed fabrication and quality control procedures to ensure
workmanship and conformance with Contract Documents and reference standards. The
Special Inspections Agency shall review the fabricator’s quality control procedures and
coordinate required Special Inspections with the fabricator and the Contractor.
8/15/2025
01 45 33-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. The Contractor shall submit qualifications of fabricators seeking Approved Fabricator
status to the Special Inspections Agency for review. Approval as an Approved Fabricator
shall be given by the Building Official upon the recommendation of the Special
Inspections Agency or upon review of the fabricator’s written fabrication procedures and
quality control manuals that provide a basis for control of materials and workmanship,
with periodic auditing of fabrication and quality control practices by an Approved Agency
or the Building Official.
D. At completion of fabrication, the Approved Fabricator shall submit a certificate of
compliance to the Owner or the RDPIRC for submittal to the Building Official stating that
the work was performed in accordance with the approved Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
PRE-INSPECTION MEETING
A. At least two weeks prior to beginning work, a Pre-inspection Meeting shall be held to
discuss the Special Inspection procedures and submittals. The following parties shall
participate: EOR, RDPIRC, Special Inspections Agency representative, Contractor,
Subcontractors, Testing Agencies, and Building Official. The type of meeting (in-person
or teleconference) and location of meeting shall be determined by the Building Official.
3.02
STATEMENT AND SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. The Special Inspections Agency and all Special Inspectors are required to comply with
all requirements of the Statement of Special Inspections and the Schedule of Special
Inspections. Together, these documents identify materials, systems, components, and
work that are required to have Special Inspections, the type and extent of Special
Inspections, and whether they will be continuous or periodic. The Schedule of Special
Inspections is included at the end of this Section. A form which may be used for the
Statement of Special Inspections is also included at the end of this Section.
3.03
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AGENCY REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Special Inspections Agency shall be an established and recognized agency
regularly engaged in conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, which has been
approved by the Building Official and is retained by the Owner. The Agency shall
demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the Building Official, for the inspection of
the specific aspects of construction or operation requiring Special Inspection.
8/15/2025
01 45 33-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. The Special Inspections Agency shall maintain detailed inspection records, including a
copy at the jobsite, and all records shall be available upon request by the EOR, RDPIRC
or the Building Official. The Agency shall submit all required reports to the EOR,
RDPIRC and Building Official. Where EOR approval is required for corrections, the
Special Inspector shall maintain copies of all related correspondence and submit with all
required reports. The Agency shall coordinate all required Special Inspection activities
with the Special Inspectors, the Contractor, and any fabricators and shall coordinate
designation of fabricators as Approved Fabricators when requested.
3.04
SPECIAL INSPECTORS’ REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
A. All Special Inspectors shall meet the qualification requirements determined by the
Building Official for the specific type of inspection services they will be providing and
shall be approved by the Building Official. Special Inspectors shall submit written
documentation demonstrating their competence and experience or training to the
Building Official for approval of their qualifications.
B. Special Inspections shall be performed in accordance with all requirements of the
Statement of Special Inspections, the Schedule of Special Inspections, the IBC, and any
State or local amendments. Special Inspectors shall maintain detailed inspection
records, including a copy at the jobsite, and all records shall be available upon request
by the EOR, RDPIRC, or the Building Official. Special Inspectors shall submit all
required reports to the RDPIRC and the Building Official. Where EOR approval is
required for corrections, the Special Inspector shall maintain copies of all related
correspondence and submit with all required reports. Special Inspectors shall coordinate
inspection requirements and time when inspections can be conducted with the
Contractor.
C. Any discrepancies in work noted by the Special Inspector shall be brought to the
immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. Special Inspectors shall coordinate
correction of discrepancies with the Contractor. Any corrections of discrepancies that
result in changes to the work as shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by
the EOR. If noted discrepancies are not corrected, the Special Inspector shall notify the
Contractor, the EOR, the RDPIRC and the Building Official. All noted discrepancies and
corrections shall be documented in all inspection records and all required reports.
3.05
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements of Special Inspections with the Special
Inspections Agency and the Special Inspectors and shall provide adequate time and
access to conduct inspections. The Contractor is solely responsible for providing safe
access and any necessary safety equipment required to conduct inspections. The
Special Inspector shall not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be
responsible for the Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures
of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any
8/15/2025
01 45 33-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
failure of the Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the
performance of the Work.
B. Special Inspections shall not relieve the Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete
work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Results of Special Inspections
activities, including any discrepancies that are noted or not noted, shall never constitute
an acceptance of work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. The Contractor shall provide advance notice of work to be conducted that will require
Special Inspections. If the Special Inspector is delayed in inspecting the work due to
inadequate notice or completion of the work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner
for the cost of additional subsequent Special Inspections.
D. The Contractor shall promptly correct any discrepancies noted by the Special Inspectors.
Any corrections of discrepancies that result in changes to the work as shown on the
Contract Documents shall be approved by the EOR. Where EOR approval is required,
the Contractor shall report the discrepancy to the EOR in accordance with provisions of
the General Conditions. The EOR will authorize any changes to the Contract Documents
required for the correction in accordance with provisions of the General Conditions.
Copies of all correspondence related to the correction shall be submitted concurrently to
the Special Inspections Agency.
3.06
BUILDING OFFICIAL OR AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Building Official will approve qualifications of the Special Inspections Agency, all
Special Inspectors, and any Approved Fabricators. The Building Official will approve all
forms submitted by the Contractor, any Approved Fabricators, the EOR, the RDPIRC,
the Special Inspections Agency, and the Special Inspectors. The Building Official and
the Special Inspections Agency shall agree to the frequency of Interim Reports and the
submittal deadline for the Final Report.
3.07
RDPIRC RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The RDPIRC shall complete the Statement of Special Inspections and the Schedule of
Special Inspections, unless previously completed by the EOR. The Statement of Special
Inspections form included in this Section shall be used unless the Building Official has a
preferred form for the Statement of Special Inspections, in which case the Building
Official’s form may be used and shall be completed by the RDPIRC.
B. The RDPIRC shall review and coordinate certain aspects of the project, as determined
by the Building Official, for compatibility with the design of the building, structure or
building system, including, but not limited to, submittal documents prepared by others,
deferred submittal documents and phased submittal documents.
8/15/2025
01 45 33-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.08
OWNER RESPONSIBILITES
A. The Owner will retain a Special Inspections Agency to perform Special Inspections
during construction. The Special Inspections Agency will retain the RDPIRC.
3.09
MINIMUM INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Detailed requirements for Special Inspections are shown in the Statement of Special
Inspections and the Schedule of Special Inspections, which references the IBC,
applicable code standards, and any State or local amendments. Special Inspections
shall be performed in accordance with all requirements of the Statement of Special
Inspections, the Schedule of Special Inspections, the IBC, and any State or local
amendments. Additional requirements for specific materials listed in other Sections of
these Specifications shall also be satisfied. The frequency of inspections shall be
continuous or periodic as indicated in the Schedule of Special Inspections and in
accordance with applicable building codes.
3.10
REPORTS
A. Special Inspectors shall maintain detailed inspection records, including a copy at the
jobsite, and all records shall be available upon request by the EOR, RDPIRC or the
Building Official. The Special Inspections Agency shall submit all required reports to the
Building Official, EOR, and RDPIRC as agreed upon with the Building Official. Reports
shall indicate the inspections and testing performed and whether work inspected was or
was not completed in conformance to Contract Documents and any corrective measures
taken. Where EOR approval is required for corrections, the Agency shall maintain copies
of all related correspondence and submit with all required reports.
3.11
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS
A. This Section includes forms which may be used to meet requirements for written
documentation during the performance of Special Inspections in accordance with the
IBC. These forms may be replaced with forms meeting IBC requirements provided by
the Building Official if available.
8/15/2025
01 45 33-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (IBC 2024 VERSION)
1 - SOILS (IBC 2024)
Inspection Task
Frequency
Applicable
to Project
IBC
Reference
CONT
PER
Y/N
1. Verify materials below shallow foundations
are adequate to achieve the design bearing
capacity.
X
Y
1705.6
1705.6
2. Verify excavations are extended to proper
depth and have reached proper material.
X
Y
3. Perform classification and testing of
compacted fill materials.
X
Y
4. During fill placement, verify use of proper
materials and procedures in accordance with
the Geotechnical Report. Verify densities and
lift thicknesses during placement and
compaction of compacted fill.
X
Y
5. Prior to placement of compacted fill,
inspect subgrade and verify that site has
been prepared properly.
X
Y
8/15/2025
01 45 33-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
PROJECT:
LOCATION:
PERMIT APPLICANT:
APPLICANT’S ADDRESS:
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD:
MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD:
REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE:
This Statement of Special Inspections is submitted in accordance with Section 1704 of the International Building
Code. It shall be considered in conjunction with the Schedule of Special Inspections included in this Specification
Section 01 45 33. If applicable, it includes Requirements for Seismic Resistance and/or Requirements for Wind
Resistance.
Are Requirements for Seismic Resistance included in the Statement of Special Inspections?
Yes
No
Are Requirements for Wind Resistance included in the Statement of Special Inspections?
Yes
No
The Special Inspector(s) shall keep detailed records of all inspections, including a copy at the jobsite. All records shall
be available upon request by the Engineer or the Building Official. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the
immediate attention of the Contractor. If the discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the
attention of the Building Official and the Engineer prior to completion of that phase of work. The Special Inspections
Agency shall furnish Interim Reports to the Building Official and to the Engineer at the frequency indicated in the
Statement of Special Inspections. A Final Report shall be submitted to the Building Official and the Engineer at the
time agreed upon by the Owner and the Building Official.
Frequency of Interim Report submittals to the Building Official:
___ Weekly ___ Bi-Weekly ___ Monthly Other; specify:____________________
Frequency of Interim Report submittals to the Engineer:
___ Weekly ___ Bi-Weekly ___ Monthly Other; specify:____________________
Special Inspections do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents. Jobsite
safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the Contractor.
Statement of Special Inspections Prepared by:
Type or print name
Signature
Date
Building Official’s Acceptance:
Type or print name
Signature
Date
Registered Design Professional’s Seal
8/15/2025
01 45 33-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
INTERIM REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
City/County of:
Project Name/Address:
Inspection Type(s) Coverage:
Continuous
Periodic
Describe Inspections Made, Including Locations:
Tests Made:
Total Inspection
Time Each Day
Date:
Hours:
List items requiring Special Inspection, and any discrepancies and corrections. If Engineer approval is
required for any corrections, note this, and indicate that approval was obtained. Attach copies of all related
correspondence.
Comments:
To the best of my knowledge, work inspected was in accordance with the Contract Documents and
applicable standards except as noted above.
Signed:
Date:
Print Full Name:
I.D.:
Phone Number:
8/15/2025
01 45 33-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
This report is to be submitted to the Building Official and the Engineer. A copy shall be maintained
at the jobsite.
8/15/2025
01 45 33-14
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
PROJECT:
LOCATION:
PERMIT APPLICANT:
APPLICANT’S ADDRESS:
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD:
MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD:
REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE:
To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, Special Inspections required for this Project in
accordance with Section 1704 of the International Building Code and any State or local amendments have
been performed, and all work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and all
applicable standards, except as indicated.
The Special Inspection program does not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to comply with the
Contract Documents. Jobsite safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of
the Contractor.
This Final Report includes information submitted in previous Interim Reports numbered _______ to
__________________, as well as any Special Inspections, discrepancies, and corrections occurring since
the last Interim Report, dated _____________________________.
All items requiring Special Inspection are listed below. All inspections, tests, and similar services that were
performed are listed and any discrepancies and corrections are indicated. If Engineer approval was
required for any corrections, this is noted, and copies of all related correspondence are attached.
(Attach 8 ½”x11” continuation sheet(s) if required to complete the description of corrections)
Prepared By:
Special Inspection Agency:
Type or print name
Signature
Date
Special Inspector’s Seal
8/15/2025
01 45 33-15
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY
Each Contractor responsible for the construction or fabrication of a main-wind- or seismic-force-resisting
system, designated seismic system, or a wind- or seismic-resisting-component listed in the Statement of
Special Inspections must submit this Statement of Responsibility prior to commencement of work on the
system or component.
Project:
Contractor’s Name:
Address:
License No.:
Description of building systems and components included in Statement of Responsibility:
Contractor’s Acknowledgement of Special Requirements
I hereby acknowledge that I have received, read, and understand the Statement of Special Inspections and its requirements.
Name and Title (type or print)
Signature
Date
8/15/2025
01 45 33-16
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
FABRICATOR’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
Each approved fabricator that is exempt from Special Inspection of shop fabrication and implementation
procedures per Section 1704 of the International Building Code must submit this Fabricator’s Certificate of
Compliance at the completion of fabrication.
Project:
Fabricator’s Name:
Address:
Description of structural members and assemblies that have been fabricated:
I hereby certify that items described above were fabricated on my premises in strict accordance with the Contract Documents
and applicable standards.
Name and Title (type or print)
Signature
Date
Attach copy of Building Official’s approval of fabricator as an Approved Fabricator.
8/15/2025
01 45 33-17
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
NOTIFICATION OF FAILURE TO CORRECT DISCREPANCY
City/County of:
Project Name/Address:
List discrepancies, proposed correction, and Contractor response. If Engineer approval is required for any
corrections, note this, and indicate whether approval was obtained. Attach copies of all related correspondence.
Comments:
Signed:
Date:
Print Full
Name:
I.D.:
Phone
Number:
8/15/2025
01 45 33-18
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
This report is to be submitted to the Building Official, the Contractor, and the Engineer.
8/15/2025
01 45 33-19
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 51 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 51 00
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall provide temporary utilities required for the Project, as shown in the
drawing sheets and to complete the Work.
1.
Make arrangements with utility service companies for temporary services and
obtain required permits and approvals for temporary utilities.
2.
Pay utility service costs, including connection fees, required for the Work as
needed.
3.
Continuously maintain adequate utilities for all purposes during the Project, until
removal of temporary utilities and temporary facilities. At minimum, provide and
maintain temporary utilities through Substantial Completion and removal of
temporary field offices and sheds.
4.
Should Owner occupy part of the Project prior to Substantial Completion of the
entire Work, cost of utilities consumed via temporary utilities serving the portion
occupied by Owner will be shared proportionately between Owner and Contractor
as mutually agreed to by the parties.
5.
Maintain, including cleaning, temporary utilities and continuously provide
consumables as required.
6.
Temporary utilities and temporary facilities shall be adequate for personnel using
the Site and requirements of Project.
7.
Provide temporary utilities and temporary facilities in compliance with Laws and
Regulations and, when applicable, requirements of utility owners.
B. Provide the following temporary utilities:
1.
Electricity and lighting.
2.
Telephone and communications.
3.
Sanitary facilities.
4.
Water service.
8/15/2025
01 51 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
First-aid facilities.
6.
Fire protection.
1.02
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Use of Owner’s System:
1.
Existing Utility Systems: Do not use systems in existing buildings or structures for
temporary utilities without Owner’s written permission and mutually acceptable
basis agreed upon by the parties for proportionate sharing of costs between
Owner and Contractor.
2.
Use of Permanent Utility Systems Provided Under the Project:
a.
Permanent lighting, water, heating, ventilating, and fire protection systems
and first-aid facilities may be used to provide temporary utilities and
temporary facilities if the following are met:
1)
Obtain Owner’s written permission to use permanent systems.
2)
Permanent systems to be used for temporary utilities or temporary
facilities shall have achieved Substantial Completion, including
complete functionality of all controls.
3)
Contractor shall pay all costs while using permanent system, including
operation, maintenance, replacement of consumables, and provide
replacement parts.
b.
Do not use the following permanent facilities:
1)
Telephone and communication facilities.
2)
Sanitary facilities.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electricity and lighting:
1.
Contractor shall provide electrical and lighting service for construction field offices,
sheds, storage containers, etc. and as required for the Work.
2.
General 120/240 V service requirements:
a.
Contractor shall provide 120/240 V, single phase, 3-wire temporary system
for small power requirements and general lighting.
8/15/2025
01 51 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
b.
Contractor shall provide main disconnect, overcurrent protection, meter
outlet, branch circuit breakers, and wiring for temporary service to the
Contractor’s field office service connections. Contractor shall provide
equipment and appurtenances in accordance with electricity service provider
and applicable standards and codes
c.
Contractor shall register the 120/240 V electrical service meter in the
Contractor’s name and shall be responsible for electrical charges at no
additional cost to the Owner.
d.
Contractor shall provide electrical service other than 120/240 V, single
phase, 3-wire service as required for the Work at the Contractor’s own
expense.
3.
General lighting requirements:
a.
Contractor shall provide a night lighting circuit for security. Light intensity
shall be a minimum of 2 foot candles.
4.
Contractor shall energize the electrical system 15-minutes prior to and following
regular work day hours at the Site. Required from Monday through Friday, all
inclusive.
5.
Contractor shall energize the night lighting system at end of typical working day
and de-energize at start of typical working day. System shall be continuously
energized on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays.
6.
Contractor shall coordinate usage of temporary electrical system with
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Owner including the following:
a.
Usage is suitable for 120V, single phase, 60 Hz operation with a maximum
operating input of 1,500 volt-amperes.
b.
One unit connected to a single outlet.
c.
Restrict usage in case of overloading circuits to correct loading.
B. Telephone and communications: Contractor shall provide temporary telephone and
communications required for its operations at the Site and for summoning emergency
medical assistance.
C. Sanitary facilities:
1.
Contractor shall provide suitably-enclosed chemical or self-contained toilets for
Contractor’s employees and visitors to the Site. Location of temporary toilets shall
be acceptable to Owner and screened from public observation.
8/15/2025
01 51 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Facilities shall be maintained and provided in accordance with State or
Commonwealth Labor Regulations and local ordinances. Contents shall be
removed and disposed in accordance with local and state or commonwealth
regulations as required.
3.
Contractor shall be prohibited from committing nuisances within, on, or in the
vicinity of the Site.
D. Water service:
1.
Contractor shall provide temporary water service for the Work including for
construction purposes, sanitary facilities, fire protection, field office, and cleaning
purposes.
2.
Contractor shall provide potable water for Contractor’s personnel either by portable
containers or drinking fountains.
3.
Contractor shall provide temporary hose bibs, hoses, and watertight barrels for the
distribution of water.
4.
Contractor shall provide freeze protection for water service.
E. First-aid facilities:
1.
Contractor shall provide temporary first-aid stations at or immediately adjacent to
the Site’s major work areas. Contractor shall provide temporary first-aid stations
inside its temporary field office. Locations of first-aid stations shall be determined
by Contractor’s safety representative.
2.
Contractor shall provide list of emergency telephone numbers at each hardwired
telephone at the Site. List shall be in accordance with the list of emergency contact
information required in Section 01 31 19 − Project Meetings.
F. Fire protection:
1.
Contractor shall comply with NFPA 241, Safeguarding Building Construction,
Alteration, and Demolition Operations, and requirements of fire marshals and
authorities having jurisdiction at the Site.
2.
Contractor shall provide temporary fire exits, fire extinguishers, hoses and safety
devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Contractor shall notify Engineer, Owner, and fire marshals in the event of fire at
the Site including, but not limited to, fuel tanks and similar hazardous utilities and
devices. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner of fuel tank and utilities to prevent
occurrence of fire or explosion.
8/15/2025
01 51 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
Contractor shall perform safety precautions and comply with fire marshal’s
instructions in the event of fire.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for temporary systems may be new or used but shall be
adequate for purposes intended and shall not create unsafe conditions and shall comply
with Laws and Regulations.
B. Provide required materials, equipment, and facilities, including piping, wiring, and
controls.
C. Electrical system requirements: System shall consist of wiring, switches, insulated
supports, poles, fixtures, sockets, receptacles, lamps, guards, cutouts and fuses as
required for completion of the Work.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install temporary facilities in neat, orderly, manner, and make structurally, mechanically,
and electrically sound throughout.
B. Location of Temporary Utilities and Temporary Facilities:
1.
Locate temporary systems for proper function and service.
2.
Temporary systems shall not interfere with or provide hazards or nuisances to: the
Work under this and other contracts, movement of personnel, traffic areas,
materials handling, hoisting systems, storage areas, finishes, and work of utility
companies.
3.
Do not install temporary utilities on the ground, with the exception of temporary
extension cords, hoses, and similar systems in place for short durations.
C. Modify and extend temporary systems as required by progress of the Work.
3.02
MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain temporary systems to provide safe, continuous service as required.
B. Properly supervise operation of temporary systems:
8/15/2025
01 51 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Enforce compliance with Laws and Regulations.
2.
Enforce safe practices.
3.
Prevent abuse of services.
4.
Prevent nuisances and hazards caused by temporary systems and their use.
5.
Prevent damage to finishes.
6.
Ensure that temporary systems and equipment do not interrupt continuous
progress of construction.
C. At end of each work day, check temporary systems and verify that sufficient
consumables are available to maintain operation until work is resumed at the Site.
Provide additional consumables if the supply on hand is insufficient.
D. Contractor shall replace broken and burned out lamps, blown fuses, and damaged wiring
and appurtenances as required to maintain adequate and safe operating conditions.
E. Contractor shall permit subcontractors and others at a mutually agreed arrangement to
use temporary electrical system that meet the following requirements:
1.
Equipment are suitable for 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz operation.
2.
Operating input does not exceed 1,500 volt-amperes.
3.
Single piece of equipment connected to one outlet.
4.
Contractor shall restrict use of equipment as required to prevent overloading
circuits.
3.03
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITES
A. Completely remove temporary utilities, facilities, equipment, and materials when no
longer required. Repair damage caused by temporary systems and their removal and
restore the Site to condition required by the Contract Documents; if restoration of
damaged areas is not specified, restore to preconstruction condition.
B. Contractor is responsible for and shall return to original condition those portions of
permanent electric system used in completing the Work.
C. Where temporary utilities are disconnected from existing utility, provide suitable,
watertight or gastight (as applicable) cap or blind flange, as applicable, on service line, in
accordance with requirements of utility owner.
8/15/2025
01 51 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. When permanent utilities and systems that were used for temporary utilities, upon
Substantial Completion replace all consumables such as filters and light bulbs and parts
used during the Work.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 61 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 61 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND OPTIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.
Common requirements for products.
2.
Contractor’s options for selecting products.
3.
Requirements for consideration of “or equal” products.
4.
Warranty requirements of products.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1.
“Products” includes materials, equipment, machinery, components, fixtures,
systems, and other goods incorporated in the Work. Products do not include
machinery and equipment used for preparing, fabricating, conveying, erecting, or
installing the Work. Products include Owner-furnished goods incorporated in the
Work where use of such goods is specifically required in the Contract Documents.
2.
“Special Warranties” includes additions or modifications to standard warranty
requirements specified in the Contract Documents.
3.
“Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar
so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed
item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with
some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. This
definition is applied together with General Conditions Section 4.7 Materials Quality,
Substitutions, and Shop Drawings. For the purposes of this Paragraph, a proposed
item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so
named if:
a.
In the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:
1)
it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability,
appearance, strength, and design characteristics;
8/15/2025
01 61 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2)
it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the
results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole; and
3)
it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive
service.
b.
Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:
1)
there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract
Times; and
2)
it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item
named in the Contract Documents.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty Log Book:
1.
Submit warranty log book consistent with General Conditions Section 4.9 Warranty
and Correction of Defective Work. Submittal shall include a summary listing of all
equipment and material warranties furnished in the Contract, date received, and
start/end date of warranty period. Individual warranty documentation shall be
provided in the submittal.
2.
Submit prior to submittal of final application for payment.
B. Patent Documentation: Submit licensing arrangement and agreement documentation
early enough to avoid procurement or installation delays for long-lead items identified in
the work.
1.04
REQUIREMENT
A. Common Products:
1.
Provide products that have not been previously incorporated into another project
or facility unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
2.
Provide products of the same generic kind from a single source.
3.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other
items shown, indicated, or required for a complete installation for the indicated use
and performance.
4.
Standard Products: When available, and unless custom or nonstandard options
are specified or indicated, provide standard products of types that have been
produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
8/15/2025
01 61 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
Visual Matching: Where required in the Contract Documents, provide products that
match referenced existing construction, approved mock-ups, or approved Sample,
as determined by Engineer.
6.
Where the Contract Documents include the phrase “as selected” for product color,
finish pattern, option, or similar phrase, provide products selected by Engineer as
follows:
a.
Standard Range: Where the Contract Documents include the phrase
“standard range of colors, patterns, textures” or similar phrase, provide color,
pattern, density, or texture selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s product
line that does not include premium items.
b.
Full Range: Where the Contract Documents include the phrase “full range of
colors, patterns, textures” or similar phrase, Engineer will select color,
pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer’s entire product line, including
standard and premium items.
B. Product Compatibility:
1.
Similar products by the same Supplier shall be compatible with each other, unless
otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
2.
Provide products compatible with products previously selected or installed on the
Project.
C. Product Options:
1.
For products specified only by reference standard or description, without reference
to Supplier, provide products meeting that standard, by a Supplier or from a source
that complies with the Contract Documents.
2.
For products specified by naming one or more products or Suppliers, provide the
named products that comply with the Contract Documents, unless an “or equal” or
substitute product is approved by Engineer.
3.
For products specified by naming one or more products or Suppliers and the term,
“or equal”, when Contractor proposes a product or Supplier as an “or equal”,
submit to Engineer a request for approval of an “or equal” product or Supplier.
4.
For products specified by naming only one product or manufacturer and followed
by words indicating that no substitution is allowed, there is no option and no
substitution will be allowed.
D. Concerning Patents:
8/15/2025
01 61 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Indemnity and licensing obligations here are in addition to requirements of General
Conditions Section 12 Indemnification. Owner shall be provided a guarantee by
Contractor and equipment Supplier that equipment and material furnished in
accordance with the Contract Documents is not the subject of patent litigation.
2.
Patent litigation or controversy shall include, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Actual furnished equipment and material the is subject or could be subject to
patent litigation or is known to infringe on a patent.
b.
Furnished equipment and material that may result in a process that use of
equipment and material in a manner that infringes upon or violates a patent.
3.
When patent infringement may occur, Contractor and Supplier shall submit license
arrangements among parties, including Contractor, Supplier, and patent owner
(controller of patent) at a minimum, which shall permit use of equipment and
material as specified in the Contract Documents.
4.
Supplier shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer against all claims,
costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to any infringement or patent
rights or copyrights incident to the use of equipment and material specified in the
Contract Documents and as required in General Conditions and as modified in the
Supplemental Conditions.
E. “Or Equal” Products:
1.
Submit “or-equal” requests consistent with General Conditions Section 4.7. For
proposed products not named in the Contract Documents and considered as an
“or equal” as defined in the General Conditions, Contractor shall request in writing
Engineer’s approval of the “or equal”. Request for approval of an “or equal”
product shall accompany the Shop Drawing or product data submittal for the
proposed product and shall include:
a.
Contractor’s request that the proposed product be considered as an “or
equal” in accordance with the General Conditions, accompanied by
Contractor’s certifications required in the General Conditions.
b.
Documentation adequate to demonstrate that proposed product does not
require revisions to the Contract Documents, that proposed product is
consistent with the Contract Documents, and that proposed product will
produce results and performance required in the Contract Documents, and
that proposed product is compatible with other portions of the Work.
c.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with the
products and manufacturers named in the Contract Documents. Significant
qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,
8/15/2025
01 61 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
visual effect, performance and specific features and requirements shown or
indicated.
d.
Evidence that proposed product manufacturer will furnish warranty equal to
or better than specified, if any.
e.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
physical addresses of installation along with the names, telephone numbers,
email addresses and physical address of design professionals and owners
associated with the referenced installation, if requested.
f.
Samples, if requested.
g.
Other information requested by Engineer.
1.05
WARRANTY
A. These warranty durations and start triggers supplement General Conditions Section 4.9.
Warranties specified for products shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,
Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee and requirements for the required
correction period. Disclaimers and limitations in specific product warranties do not limit
Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee.
1.
Product manufacturer’s warranty is preprinted written warranty published by
product manufacturer and specifically endorsed by product manufacturer to
Owner.
2.
Equipment and material shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in
workmanship, design, and/or materials for a period of one (1) year unless
otherwise specified in the individual Specification Section for a Special Warranty.
3.
Warranty period shall start on the date of the particular equipment and material is
substantially complete, which includes requirements specified in Section 01 75 00
– Checkout and Startup Procedures for start-up certification and specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
4.
Warranty requirements may be added to or modified in the individual Specification
Sections. Special warranty is written warranty required by or incorporated into the
Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by product
manufacturer’s warranty or to provide increased rights to Owner.
5.
Special warranty information, if any, will be located in the Specification Section for
that product.
8/15/2025
01 61 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Requirements for Special Warranties: Provide written special warranty document that
contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by product
manufacturer and Owner. Submit draft warranty with submittals required for product.
1.
Manufacturer’s Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information
and properly executed by product manufacturer and other parties as appropriate.
2.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included in the Contract Documents,
prepare written document, properly executed by product manufacturer and Owner,
using appropriate form.
3.
Refer to Specifications for content and requirements for submitting special
warranties.
C. Submit product manufacturer’s warranties and special warranties as submittals in
accordance with Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 65 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 65 00
PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.
General requirements for preparing for shipping, delivering, and handling materials
and equipment.
2.
Contractor shall make all arrangements for transporting, delivering, and handling
of materials and equipment required for prosecution and completion of the Work.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements relative to delivery
and handling materials and equipment.
1.03
SHIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with General Conditions Section 4.7 for submittal approval requirements; this
Section adds shipment prerequisites including marking, packaging, and advance notice.
B. When practical, factory-assemble materials and equipment. Match mark or tag separate
parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts
that may be damaged by the elements with strippable, protective coating.
C. Package materials and equipment to facilitate handling, and protect materials and
equipment from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. Mark or tag outside of
each package or crate to indicate the associated purchase order number, bill of lading
number, contents by name, Owner’s contract name and number, Contractor name,
equipment number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing lists and bills of
materials with each shipment.
D. Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry
and dust-free at all times. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion,
discoloration, and other damage. Lubricate bearings and other items requiring lubrication
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
E. Advance Notice of Shipments:
1.
Keep Engineer informed of delivery of all materials and equipment to be
incorporated in the Work.
8/15/2025
01 65 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
F. Do not ship materials and equipment until:
1.
Related Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals have been approved or
accepted (as applicable) by Engineer, including, but not necessarily limited to,
Submittals associated with the materials and equipment being delivered.
2.
Manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, and installing the associated
materials and equipment have been submitted to and accepted by Engineer in
accordance with the Specifications.
3.
Results of source quality control testing (factory testing), when required by the
Contract Documents for the associated materials or equipment, have been
reviewed and accepted by Engineer.
4.
Facilities required for handling materials and equipment in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions are in place and available.
5.
Required storage facilities have been provided.
1.04
DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling and Timing of Deliveries:
1.
The delivery limit and partial payment restrictions here supplement General
Conditions Sections 4.4 and 4.5. Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in
accordance with the accepted Progress Schedule and in ample time to facilitate
inspection prior to installation.
a.
Equipment and material shall not be delivered to the Site prior to 90 days in
advance of scheduled installation.
b.
Partial payment requests will not be processed for materials delivered prior
to 90 days before installation or for materials that are improperly stored.
2.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space required for and duration of storage of
materials and equipment at the Site or delivery location, as applicable.
3.
Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflicting with the Work and conditions at Site, and
to accommodate the following:
a.
Work of other contractors and Owner.
b.
Owner’s operations and maintenance.
c.
Storage space limitations.
8/15/2025
01 65 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Availability of equipment and personnel for handling materials and
equipment.
e.
Owner’s use of premises.
4.
Deliver materials and equipment to the Site during regular working hours.
5.
Deliver materials and equipment to avoid delaying the Work and the Project,
including work of other contractors, as applicable. Deliver anchor system
materials, including anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete or masonry, in ample
time to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Deliveries:
1.
The delivery limit and partial payment restrictions here supplement General
Conditions Sections 4.5 and 4.7. Shipments shall be delivered with Contractor’s
name, Subcontractor’s name (if applicable), Site name, Project name, and contract
designation clearly marked.
2.
Site may be listed as the “ship to” or “delivery” address; but Owner shall not be
listed as recipient of shipment unless otherwise directed in writing by Engineer.
3.
Provide Contractor’s telephone number to shipper; do not provide Owner’s
telephone number.
4.
Arrange for deliveries while Contractor’s personnel are at the Site. Contractor shall
receive and coordinate shipments upon delivery. Shipments delivered to the Site
when Contractor is not present will be refused by Owner, and Contractor shall be
responsible for the associated delays and additional costs, if incurred.
C. Containers and Marking:
1.
Have materials and equipment delivered in manufacturer’s original, unopened,
labeled containers.
2.
Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of materials and equipment to
identify materials and equipment, to allow easy accumulation of parts, and to
facilitate assembly.
D. Inspection of Deliveries:
1.
Immediately upon delivery, Contractor shall inspect shipment to verify that:
a.
Materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents and approved
or accepted (as applicable) submittals.
b.
Quantities are correct.
8/15/2025
01 65 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
Materials and equipment are undamaged.
d.
Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible.
e.
Materials and equipment are properly protected.
2.
Promptly remove damaged materials and equipment from the Site and expedite
delivery of new, undamaged materials and equipment, and remedy incomplete or
lost materials and equipment to furnish materials and equipment in accordance
with the Contract Documents, to avoid delaying progress of the Work.
3.
Advise Engineer in writing when damaged, incomplete, or defective materials and
equipment are delivered, and advise Engineer of the associated impact on the
Progress Schedule.
1.05
HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A. These procedures supplement General Conditions Sections 4.4 and 4.5. Provide
equipment and personnel necessary to handle materials and equipment, including those
furnished by Owner, by methods that prevent soiling or damaging materials and
equipment and packaging.
B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring,
and otherwise damaging materials and equipment and surrounding surfaces.
C. Handle materials and equipment by methods that prevent bending and overstressing.
D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points.
E. Handle materials and equipment in safe manner and as recommended by the
manufacturer to prevent damage. Do not drop, roll, or skid materials and equipment off
delivery vehicles or at other times during handling. Hand-carry or use suitable handling
equipment.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 66 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 66 00
PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. General requirements of storing and protecting equipment and materials.
1.02
STORAGE
A. Store and protect materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall make all arrangements and provisions necessary for, and pay all costs
for, storing materials and equipment. Construction equipment, and materials and
equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be placed to avoid injuring the Work
and existing facilities and property, and so that free access is maintained at all times to
all parts of the Work and to public utility installations in vicinity of the Work. Store
materials and equipment neatly and compactly in locations that cause minimum
inconvenience to Owner, other contractors, public travel, and owners, tenants, and
occupants of adjoining property. Arrange storage in manner to allow easy access for
inspection.
C. Areas available at the Site for storing materials and equipment are shown or indicated in
the Contract Documents, or as approved by Engineer.
D. Store materials and equipment to become Owner’s property to facilitate their inspection
and ensure preservation of quality and fitness of the Work, including proper protection
against damage by freezing, moisture, and high ambient temperatures. Store in indoor,
climate-controlled storage areas all materials and equipment subject to damage by
moisture, humidity, heat, cold, and other elements, unless otherwise acceptable to
Owner.
E. Contractor shall be fully responsible for loss or damage (including theft) to stored
materials and equipment.
F. Do not open manufacturer’s containers until time of installation, unless recommended by
the manufacturer, directed by Engineer or otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents.
G. Do not store materials or equipment in structures being constructed unless approved by
Engineer in writing.
8/15/2025
01 66 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
H. Do not use lawns or other private property for storage without written permission of the
owner or other person in possession or control of such premises.
I.
Contractor shall not store unnecessary equipment and materials at the Site.
J.
Contractor shall prevent structures from being loaded with a weight that endanger its
security and/or safety of persons.
K. Stored equipment and materials shall not be placed within 10 feet of fire hydrants.
L.
Gutters, drainage channels and inlets shall be kept unobstructed at all times.
1.03
PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall provide temporary storage containers/facilities, if required, to protect
equipment and materials at the Site.
B. Equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise
completely enclosed and protected during shipping, handling, and storage, in
accordance with Section 01 65 00 – Product Delivery Requirements.
C. Store all materials and equipment off the ground (or floor) on raised supports such as
skids or pallets.
D. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage.
Painted equipment surfaces that are damaged or marred shall be repainted in their
entirety in accordance with equipment manufacturer and paint manufacturer
requirements, to the satisfaction of Engineer.
1.04
SPECIFIC STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fully Protected:
1.
All materials and equipment shall be stored on supports in buildings or trailers that
have concrete or wooden flooring, roof, and fully closed walls on all sides.
Covering with plastic sheeting or similar material in space without floor, roof, and
walls is not acceptable. Comply with the following:
a.
Provide heated storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged
by low temperatures or freezing.
b.
Provide air-conditioned storage for materials and equipment that could be
damaged by high temperatures.
c.
Protect mechanical and electrical equipment from being contaminated by
dust, dirt, and moisture.
8/15/2025
01 66 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Maintain humidity at levels recommended by manufacturers of electrical and
electronic equipment.
e.
Energize space heaters for electrical equipment and material.
B. Maintenance of Storage: On scheduled basis, periodically inspect stored materials and
equipment to ensure that:
1.
Condition and status of storage facilities is adequate to provide required storage
conditions.
2.
Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis.
3.
Materials and equipment exposed to elements are not adversely affected.
1.05
RECORDS
A. Keep up-to-date account of materials and equipment in storage to facilitate preparation
of Applications for Payment, if the Contract Documents provide for payment for materials
and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site
or at another location agreed to in writing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 71 33-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 71 33
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section lncludes:
1.
Protection of existing utilities and structures.
2.
Protection of installed equipment and materials.
3.
Protection during inclement weather.
4.
Reporting of accidents.
5.
Barricades and warning signals.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for taking all precautions, providing all programs, and
taking all actions necessary to protect the Work and all public and private property and
facilities from damage, as specified in the General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and this Section.
C. To prevent damage, injury, or loss, Contractor’s actions shall include the following:
1.
Storing apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner
that does not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or work of other
contractors or utility companies.
2.
Providing suitable storage facilities for equipment and materials subject to damage
or degradation by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or other cause.
3.
Placing upon the Work or any part thereof only loads consistent with the safety
and integrity of that portion of the Work and existing construction.
4.
Frequently removing and disposing of refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris
caused by Contractor’s operations so that, at all times, the Site is safe, orderly,
and workmanlike in appearance.
D. Contractor has full responsibility for preserving public and private property and facilities
on and adjacent to the Site. Direct or indirect damage done by, or on account of, any act,
omission, neglect, or misconduct by Contractor in executing the Work, shall be restored
by Contractor, at their expense to condition equal to that existing before damage was
done.
8/15/2025
01 71 33-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. Contractor shall comply with safety regulations required by Owner or authorities having
jurisdiction. Contractor shall comply with and correct unsafe conditions created or
caused by Contractor’s personnel. In the event Contractor fails to comply, Owner
receives the right to take necessary measures to correct conditions or practices for
reimbursement by Contractor.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1.
“Existing utilities” shall refer to both publicly-owned and privately-owned utilities
such as, but are not limited to, electric power and lighting, telephone, water, gas,
storm drains, process lines, sanitary sewers and all appurtenant structures.
2.
“Surface structures” are existing buildings, structures, and other facilities at or
above ground surface, including their foundations or any extension below ground
surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to, buildings, tanks, walls,
channels, open drainage, exposed piping and utilities, poles, exposed wires, posts,
signs, markers, curbs, walks, fencing, and other facilities visible at or above
ground surface.
1.03
SITE CONDITIONS
A. Location of Existing Utilities and Structures:
1.
Contractor shall confirm and verify location of existing utilities and structures at the
Site prior to commencing the Work.
2.
Contractor shall notify and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction prior
to performing the Work in the vicinity of the existing utilities and structures.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES
A. General:
1.
Contractor shall satisfy Engineer that methods and procedures for protection have
been approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to proceeding with the Work.
2.
Contractor shall provide temporary support and protection, as required, to existing
utilities and structures during the Work, including support of excavation.
8/15/2025
01 71 33-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
Temporary support and protection of existing utilities shall be provided in
accordance with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.
b.
Temporary support and protection of existing structures shall be provided as
required to ensure structural integrity is not compromised.
3.
Contractor shall be responsible for costs incurred for temporary support or
protection provided by a third-party or authority having jurisdiction to insure safety
of the existing utility, Owner, and public and private parties.
B. Existing Buried Utilities:
1.
Contractor shall perform field investigate to identify conflicts or interferences
between existing utilities and utility Work prior to excavation Work.
a.
Investigation of conflicts and interferences shall be performed on Site
locations, elevations, slopes, etc. of the existing utilities determined during
the field investigations.
b.
Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner in writing of identified conflicts or
interferences. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until written
authorization is provided by the Engineer.
c.
Identified conflicts and interferences shall be handled in accordance with the
Contract Documents
2.
Contractor shall perform the Work to prevent disruption of existing service and
damage to existing utilities.
a.
Temporary connections shall be provided, as required, to provide un-
interrupted service of existing utilities.
b.
Contractor shall repair damage to existing utilities as directed by the
Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction at Contractor’s own expense.
c.
Contractor shall be responsible for damages and repair costs to the authority
having jurisdiction if third-party or authority having jurisdiction personnel
repair damaged existing utilities.
C. Protection of Existing Structures:
1.
Contractor shall sustain existing surface structures in existing place and protect
from direct or indirect injury located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work.
Such sustaining and supporting shall be done carefully and as required by the
party owning or controlling such structure or facility.
8/15/2025
01 71 33-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Contractor shall bear all risks attending the presence or proximity of all surface
structures within or adjacent to limits of the Work, in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
3.
Contractor shall be responsible for damage and expense for direct or indirect injury
caused by their Work to structures and facilities.
4.
Contractor shall repair immediately damage caused by their Work, to the
satisfaction of owner of damaged structure or facility at no cost to the Owner.
5.
Contractor shall provide temporary weather protection for existing structures and
buildings where exterior walls or roofs are modified or disturbed in the Work.
Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate protection of
existing structures and building.
D. Relocation of Surface Structures: Existing surface facilities, including but not limited to
guard rails, posts, guard cables, signs, poles, markers, curbs, and fencing, that are
temporarily removed to facilitate the Work shall be replaced and restored to their original
condition at Contractor’s expense.
3.02
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall protect installed equipment and materials to prevent damage, injury or
loss from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed
prior to completion of the Work.
B. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces.
C. Coverings: Provide coverings to protect materials and equipment from damage.
3.03
PROTECTION DURING INCLEMENT WEATHER
A. Contractor shall not perform Work during inclement or unsuitable weather that will affect
the quality of the completed Work.
B. Contractor shall take necessary precautions in the event of impending inclement
weather to protect equipment, materials and Work from damage or deterioration due to
floods, driving rain, wind, or snow storms.
1.
Owner reserves the right to require additional protection measures beyond
Contractor’s proposed protection measures to protect the Work.
2.
Contractor shall not claim additional compensation for additional protection
measures required by Owner nor for damages to equipment, material, or Work due
to the inclement weather.
8/15/2025
01 71 33-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. When directed by Engineer, Contractor shall stop Work and protect new Work by
protective covering during rain storms for, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Concrete mixing and placement.
2.
Paving placement.
3.
Masonry installation.
4.
Buried piping, valve and appurtenance installation.
5.
Additional inclement weather requirements and limitations are specified in
individual Specification Sections.
3.04
REPORTING OF ACCIDENTS
A. Contractor shall immediately report, in writing, to Engineer and Owner accidents out of,
or in conjunction with, the performance of Work.
1.
Accident reporting includes on Site and adjacent to Site, which cause death,
personal injury, or property damage.
2.
Written report shall provide full details and witness statements.
3.
If claim is made against Contractor, Supplier, or Subcontractor due to accident,
Contractor shall promptly report facts, in writing, to Engineer and Owner, with full
account of the claim.
B. Contractor shall immediately report death, serious injury, or serious damage caused by
telephone or messenger to Engineer and Owner.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 73 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 73 00
DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.
Contractor shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals shown,
specified, and required for execution of the Work as specified in this Section,
including the following:
a.
Construction Electronic Documentation
b.
Demolition
c.
Cutting and Coring
d.
Patching
e.
Installation
2.
Requirements for demolition, removal and disposal of existing buildings,
structures, pavement, curbs, and sidewalks and electrical, plumbing, heating and
ventilation equipment and materials as indicated in the Contract Documents for
demolition.
3.
General requirements for installation of equipment and material. Additional
installation requirements are included in the individual Specification Sections.
4.
General requirements for connections to existing facilities. Requirements for tie-ins
and shutdowns necessary to complete the Work are included in Section 01 14 00
− Coordination with Owner’s Operations.
a.
To extent possible, materials, equipment, systems, piping, and
appurtenances that will be placed into service upon completion of connection
to existing facilities shall be checked, successfully tested, and in condition for
operation prior to making connections to existing facilities, if valves, gates, or
similar watertight and gastight isolation devices are not provided at the
connection point.
5.
Requirements for cutting and coring, and rough and finish patching of holes and
openings in existing construction. Provide cutting, coring, fitting, and patching,
including attendant excavation and fill, required to complete the Work, and to:
042122
8/15/2025
01 73 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
Remove and replace defective Work.
b.
Remove samples of installed Work as specified or required for testing.
c.
Remove construction required to perform required alterations or additions to
existing work.
d.
Connect to completed Work not performed in proper sequence.
e.
Remove or relocate existing utilities and pipes that obstruct the Work in
locations where connections must be made.
f.
Make connections or alterations to existing or new facilities.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Section 01 14 00 − Coordination with Owner’s Operations
2.
Section 01 51 00 − Temporary Utilities
3.
Section 01 61 00 − Product Requirements and Options
4.
Section 01 66 00 − Product Storage and Protection Requirements
5.
Section 01 74 00 − Cleaning and Waste Management
6.
Section 01 79 00 − Instruction of Owner’s Personnel
7.
Section 02 41 00 – Site Demolition
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1.
“Manufacturer’s installation instructions” includes manufacturer’s written
instructions; drawings; illustrative, wiring, and schematic diagrams; diagrams
identifying external connections; and other such information pertaining to
installation of equipment and materials. Installation instructions are printed
instructions, including those attached to the equipment and materials, all inclusive.
2.
“Salvage” items are equipment and materials shown on the Contract Documents
for selective removal by the Contractor to furnish to the Owner. Contractor shall be
responsible for removal, handling, and depositing of equipment and material to
location designated by Owner.
B. Reference Standards:
8/15/2025
01 73 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
29 CFR 1910, OSHA.
2.
ANSI A10, Construction and Demolition Operations
1.03
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1.
Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate Work that
must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section.
2.
Notify other contractors in advance of Work for connections to existing facilities to
prevent delay of the Work.
3.
Remove and dispose of equipment and materials indicated for demolition on the
Contract Documents, unless indicated as salvage items for the Owner. Contractor
shall obtain ownership of removed equipment and materials following Engineer
and Owner approval. Disposal of equipment and materials shall be in accordance
with the Contract Documents
B. Sequencing:
1.
Contractor shall remove and demolish equipment and materials in sequence
specified in Section 01 14 00 − Coordination with Owner’s Operation and following
approval by Engineer and Owner.
2.
Contractor shall replace equipment and materials removed without proper
authorization from Engineer, which are necessary for the operation of the existing
facilities. Re-installation of equipment and materials shall be to the satisfaction of
the Engineer at no cost to the Owner
C. Title to Equipment and Materials:
1.
Equipment and materials indicated for demolition and removal in the Contract
Documents, and not designated as Owner’s salvaged items, shall become the
Contractor’s property following removal from the Site. Contractor shall be
responsible for legally disposing of the equipment and material.
2.
Contractor shall have no right or title to any of the equipment, materials, or other
items to be removed until the elements have been removed from the Site.
3.
Contractor shall not sell or assign or attempt to sell or assign any interest in the
equipment, materials, or other items until removal from Site.
4.
Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner because of the absence of
equipment, fixtures, and materials.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. Salvage Equipment and Materials:
1.
Contract Documents indicate equipment and materials that shall be retained by
Owner. Owner has the right to request any demolished equipment and materials
be retained at their discretion.
2.
Contractor shall move salvaged equipment and materials to storage areas located
at the Site as instructed by Owner.
3.
Architectural equipment and materials may be salvaged for incorporation into the
Work when approved by Engineer.
E. Use of Explosives: Contractor shall not use explosives or blasting equipment and
material in the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Action/Informational Submittals:
1.
Construction electronic documentation as specified in this Section.
2.
Demolition Plan: Submit detailed description of methods, equipment, and
sequence for demolition Work, including means of ensuring stability of structures
during demolition activities.
3.
Cutting and Patching Request:
a.
Submit written request to Engineer, well in advance of executing cutting or
alteration that affects one or more of the following:
1)
Design function or intent of Project.
2)
Work of Owner or other contractors.
3)
Structural value or integrity of an element of the Project.
4)
Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant
elements or systems.
5)
Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational
elements.
6)
Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
b.
Request shall include:
1)
Identification of Project and contract name and number.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2)
Description of affected Work of Contractor and work of others (if any).
3)
Necessity for cutting.
4)
Effect on work of Owner, other contractors (if any), and on structural or
weatherproof integrity of Project.
5)
Description of proposed Work, including scope of cutting and patching;
trades who will be executing the Work; products proposed to be used;
extent of refinishing; schedule of operations; alternatives to cutting and
patching, if any.
6)
Designation of entity responsible for cost of cutting and patching, when
applicable.
7)
Written permission of other contractors (if any) whose work will be
impacted.
4.
Recommendation Regarding Cutting and Patching:
a.
Should conditions of work, or schedule, indicate a change of materials or
methods, submit written recommendation to Engineer including:
1)
Conditions indicating change.
2)
Recommendations for alternative materials or methods.
3)
Items required with substitution request, in accordance with the
substitution request requirements of the Contract Documents and
Section 01 61 00 − Product Requirements and Options.
5.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for the protective compound to
be applied to core-drilled surfaces and cut concrete surfaces, as well as means of
protecting exposed reinforcement or other metal embedments.
6.
Informational Submittal: Submit written indication designating the day and time that
the construction associated with cutting and patching will be uncovered, to allow
observation. Do not begin cutting or patching operations until submittal is accepted
by Engineer.
7.
Comply with submittal requirements of individual Specification Sections for
patching materials.
1.05
SITE CONDITIONS
A. Owner does not assume responsibility for the actual condition of structures and
equipment to be demolished and removed.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Existing Site conditions shall be maintained to the greatest extent possible by the Owner
to the time of Notice to Proceed.
C. Contractor shall perform investigations, explorations, and probes as necessary at the
Site prior to initiating demolition Work to ascertain any required protective measures
before proceeding with demolition and removal. Contractor shall give particular attention
to shoring and bracing requirements to prevent damage to the Work and existing
structures.
D. Contractor shall verify measurements, dimensions and other conditions of each existing
structure, system, equipment, and material indicated in the Contract Documents for new
Work prior to ordering equipment and materials.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. General:
1.
Provide materials and products in accordance with the individual Specification
Sections and the Contract Documents.
2.
Provide materials and products that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to
fullest extent possible for exposed surfaces.
3.
If not indicated in the Contract Documents, provide materials and products that are
identical to existing materials and products affected by the Work.
4.
If identical materials and products are unavailable, provide materials and products
that shall equal or exceed performance requirements of existing materials and
products.
B. Protective Coating Applied to Core-Drilled Surfaces and Cut Concrete Surfaces:
1.
All concrete surfaces exposed due to cutting or core drilling shall be coated with an
epoxy resin coating such as Sikagard 62 by Sika Corporation, Durakote 240 by
Tamms Industries or approved equal.
2.
Reinforcement or other metal embedment exposed by concrete cutting or core
drilling shall be burned back a minimum of ½ inch below surface and resulting void
shall be filled with an epoxy resin binder.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
CONSTRUCTION ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION
A. Pre-Construction Documentation
1.
Contractor shall take photographic and video documentation of the Site where
Work is being performed. Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present
during documentation.
2.
Contractor shall provide both photographic and video documentation at grade-level
and aerial of the Site prior to commence Work.
3.
Contractor shall submit pre-construction documentation to Engineer and Owner for
review. Contractor, Engineer, and Owner shall visit Site to field verify electronic
documentation prior to commencing the Work. Site visit verification shall establish
existing conditions prior to commencing Work.
B. Construction Progress Documentation
1.
Contractor shall document Work progress at locations and construction as directed
by Engineer, at a minimum.
2.
Contractor shall provide electronic documentation prior to and following any
shutdown, switchover, demolition, de-commissioning, cutting, patching, repair, etc.
Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present during documentation.
3.
Contractor shall document following exposure of buried utilities, piping, valve,
appurtenances, and other underground elements.
4.
Engineer reserves the right to provide construction progress documentation to
confirm Contractor electronic documentation.
C. Post-Construction Documentation
1.
Contractor shall take photographic and video documentation of the Site where
Work has been completed and prior to Substantial Completion or partial utilization
by Owner. Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present during
documentation.
2.
Contractor shall provide both photographic and video documentation at grade-level
and aerial of the Site following completion of the Work.
D. Submittal Requirements:
1.
Documentation shall be time stamped for verification, including date and time.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Documentation shall be organized in a logical manner, such as by structure,
building, physical site location, etc. for easy of comparison.
3.
Photographic documentation shall be high resolution electronic versions.
4.
Documentation shall be submitted to Engineer for review and approval prior to
commence Work and at completion of the Work.
3.02
DEMOLITION
A. General:
1.
Demolition Work shall comply with the applicable provisions and recommendation
of ANSI A10, Construction and Demolition Operations standards, all governing
codes, and as specified in this Section.
2.
Contractor shall furnish competent and experienced personnel for the various type
of demolition and removal Work. Demolition and removal Work shall be performed
with regard to the safety of Owner employees, individuals at the Site, and the
public.
3.
Contractor shall confirm absence of embedded utilities prior to cutting, coring, or
demolishing existing concrete and facilities. Verification shall be performed by
portable x-ray, ground penetrating radar, or other non-invasive methods.
a.
Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner if embedded utilities are located
during the investigation. Contractor shall clearly mark and document
location of embedded utilities prior to performing the Work.
b.
Contractor shall be responsible for repair and damages caused by
exploration, investigation, and performance of the Work at no additional cost
to Owner.
4.
Contractor shall remove temporary work, such as enclosures, signs, guards, etc.
when such temporary Work is no longer required or when directed at the
completion of the Work.
5.
Contractor shall perform patching, restoration and Work in accordance with
individual Specification Sections and details shown on Contract drawings.
6.
Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by demolition Work to existing
structures, equipment and materials indicated for reuse or to remain at no
additional cost to Owner.
7.
Contractor shall maintain a clean working environment during the demolition Work
in accordance with Section 01 74 00 − Cleaning and Waste Management.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
8.
Contractor shall proceed with the demolition work in a sequence designed to
maintain the plant in operation in accordance with Section 01 14 00 – Coordination
with Owner’s Operations.
9.
Excavation caused by demolition shall be backfilled with fill free from rubbish and
debris. Select fill or structural fill shall be used where specifically required on
Contract Drawings.
10.
All debris resulting from the demolition and removal work shall be disposed of by
the Contractor at a properly permitted facility as part of the work of this Contract.
All regulations covering material handling and disposal shall be followed. Material
designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site
as directed. All other material shall be disposed of off-site by the Contractor at his
expense. Burning of any debris resulting from the demolition will not be permitted
at the site.
B. Protection during Demolition:
1.
Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain catch platforms, lights, barriers,
weather protection, warning signs and other items as required for proper protection
of the public, occupants of the building, personnel engaged in demolition Work,
and adjacent construction.
2.
Contractor shall provide and maintain weather protection at exterior openings to
fully protect the interior premises against damage from the elements until such
openings are closed by the Work.
3.
Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary protection of the existing structure
designated to remain where demolition, removal and Work is being done,
connections made, materials handled, or equipment moved. Temporary protection
shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 71 33 − Protection of Work and
Property.
4.
Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent dust from rising by wetting
demolished masonry, concrete, plaster, and similar debris. Unaltered portions of
the existing buildings affected by the operations in the Contract Documents shall
be protected by dust proof partitions and other adequate means. Dust control shall
be provided in accordance with Section 01 57 00 − Temporary Controls.
5.
Contractor shall provide adequate fire protection in accordance with Section 01 51
00 − Temporary Utilities and authorities having jurisdiction.
6.
Contractor shall perform the demolition Work with minimum traffic interference.
Contractor shall not close or obstruct walkways, passageways, or stairways.
Contractor shall not store or place materials in passageways, stairs, or other
means of egress.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
7.
Contractor shall minimize disturbances to exterior walls and roofs to small sections
that are readily repaired and patched to maintain watertight conditions in existing
structures and buildings.
C. Performance of Demolition:
1.
Equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances:
a.
Contractor shall drain equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances prior to
demolition Work. Contractor shall be responsible for collection, transport,
and disposal of drained contents at no additional cost to the Owner.
b.
Contractor shall provide line stops, plugs, blind flanges, etc. for equipment,
piping, valves, and appurtenance required to remain in service during the
Project. Contractor shall provide temporary or permanent supports in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
c.
Supports, pedestals and anchors shall be removed with the equipment and
piping unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents.
d.
Concrete bases, anchor bolts and other supports shall be removed to
approximately 1 inch below the surrounding finished area and the recesses
shall be filled with epoxy resin binder.
e.
Wall and roof openings shall be closed, and damaged surfaces shall be
patched to match the adjacent areas, in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as directed by the Engineer.
f.
Wall sleeves, wall pipes, and wall castings shall be plugged or blanked off in
accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer.
g.
Openings in concrete shall be closed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as directed by the Engineer.
2.
Reused and relocated equipment:
a.
Contractor shall receive approval from Engineer prior to removal and
relocation of equipment and material. Equipment and materials removed by
Contractor prior to Engineer’s approval that is required for Owner’s operation
of the facility shall be reinstalled at no cost to the Owner.
b.
Prior to removal and relocation Work, equipment and materials indicated for
reuse and relocation shall be operated by Owner with Contractor and
Engineer present to witness existing functionality and operation.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
Contractor shall provide personnel responsible for reinstallation of equipment
and material for the removal Work.
d.
Contractor shall be responsible and provide storage and protection of
equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01 66 00 − Product
Storage and Protection Requirements until relocation and reinstallation Work
is performed.
e.
Contractor shall provide replacement equipment and material that is
damaged during the removal Work at new cost to the Owner. Contractor
shall be responsible to provide same type, model, electrical components,
etc. equipment and material as approved by Engineer and Owner.
3.
Structural removal:
a.
Contractor shall provide and install temporary shoring, struts, and bracing
required for the demolition Work to ensure stability during entire demolition
process.
b.
Contractor shall cut and remove structural material at the interface of
demolition Work and the existing structural element. Cutting and removal
shall occur in small sections, including masonry units, to prevent instability of
structural elements.
c.
Contractor shall patch, repair, and refinish adjacent surfaces that remain
following demolition Work.
1)
Adjacent surfaces shall be repaired and refinished to the condition
prior to the demolition Work and in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
2)
Adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, loose paint, etc.,
prior to refinishing.
d.
Contractor shall limit cutting of existing roof areas designated to remain to
the limits required for the proper installation of the Work.
1)
Cut and remove insulation, joists, flashing, membranes, shingles, and
metals, etc. in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
directed by the Engineer for installation of the Work.
2)
Provide temporary weather tight protection as required until new
roofing and flashings are installed.
D. Maintenance during Demolition:
8/15/2025
01 73 00-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Contractor shall maintain the buildings, structures, and public properties free from
accumulations of waste, debris and rubbish, generated by the demolition Work.
2.
Contractor shall provide cleaning and waste management of demolition equipment
and materials in accordance with Section 01 74 00 − Cleaning and Waste
Management.
3.03
CUTTING AND CORING
A. General:
1.
Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing and receiving Engineer’s approval prior
to cutting load bearing walls (concrete or masonry) and structural concrete floors.
2.
Perform cutting and coring to limit extent of patching required.
3.
Structural Elements: Do not cut or core structural elements in manner that would
change structural element’s load-carrying capacity or load deflection ratio.
4.
Operating Elements: Do not cut or core operating elements in manner that would
reduce capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut or core operating elements or
related components in manner that would increase maintenance requirements or
decrease operational life or safety.
5.
Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting
and coring Work. Contractor shall use methods that do not void required or
existing warranties.
6.
Provide temporary or permanent bypass provisions prior to cutting existing pipe,
conduit, ductwork, or other utilities serving facilities scheduled to be removed or
relocated in accordance with the Contract Documents.
7.
Inspection: Examine and prepare surfaces prior to commencing Work. Contractor
shall report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Engineer in writing.
Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
8.
Preparation:
a.
Provide temporary support required to maintain structural integrity, to protect
adjacent Work from damage, and to support the element(s) to be cut or
cored.
b.
Protection of Existing Construction During Cutting and Coring:
8/15/2025
01 73 00-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1)
Protect existing structures, equipment, and materials during cutting
and coring to prevent damage.
2)
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions that will be
exposed during cutting and coring Work.
3)
Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas.
9.
Restoration:
a.
Clean equipment, materials, piping systems, valves, conduit and
appurtenances that were damaged due to the Work prior to applying paint or
other finishing materials.
b.
Restore damaged pipe coverings, including insulation, to original condition.
B. Cutting:
1.
General:
a.
Cut existing structures and appurtenances that provide surfaces for
installation or repair of the Work. Cut existing construction using methods to
minimize damage and disturbance to retained and adjoining construction
elements.
b.
Cutting equipment used shall be hand or small power tools suitable for
sawing or grinding. Avoid using hammering or chopping equipment for
cutting Work.
c.
Cut holes and slots as small as possible and to size required for
incorporation of the Work and in accordance with the Contract Documents.
d.
Cut or drill from exposed or finished side to concealed side to avoid marring
finished surfaces.
e.
Provide adequate bracing of area to be cut prior to cutting.
f.
Provide equipment and material to remove cut spoils.
g.
Provide temporary protection for cut openings where and when Work is not
being performed.
2.
Concrete and Masonry:
a.
Cut through concrete and masonry using concrete wall saw with diamond
saw blades.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-14
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
b.
Provide control for slurry generated during sawing on both sides of element
being cut.
c.
After cutting concrete and before installing new Work on or through the
opening, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material
specified in this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Coring:
1.
Core-drill holes through concrete and masonry walls, slabs, or arches, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, unless written authorization is furnished
by Engineer.
2.
Protection: Protect existing structures, equipment, materials, utilities, and adjacent
areas from water and other damage by core-drilling Work.
3.
Coring:
a.
Perform coring with non-impact rotary tool using diamond core-drills.
b.
Size holes for pipe, conduit, sleeves, equipment, or mechanical seals, as
required, to be installed through the penetration and in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
c.
After core-drilling and before installing equipment and material through the
penetration, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material
specified in this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
4.
Cleaning: Vacuum or otherwise remove slurry and tailings from the work area
following core-drilling.
3.04
PATCHING
A. General:
1.
Construction shall be patched by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing-up, and
similar methods at completion of the Work.
2.
Provide equipment and materials in accordance with the Contract Documents for
patching Work. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.
Provide airtight connections to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other
penetrations through surfaces when patching the Work. Provide durable patching
seams that minimize visual appearance.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-15
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
Patched areas shall be tested to demonstrate integrity of installation as directed by
the Engineer. Contractor shall provide testing equipment, material, and services
for patch testing.
B. Restoration:
1.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas to minimize evidence of patching and
refinishing.
2.
Contractor shall extend refinishing and restoration into adjoining areas to blend
patched areas with existing adjacent areas.
a.
Refinish to nearest intersection for continuous surfaces.
b.
Refinish the entire assembly and system for equipment and materials.
c.
Repair and rehang existing ceilings to provide an even-plane surface of
uniform appearance.
d.
Apply plaster and finishes to match adjacent interior walls and partition areas
for openings sealed with brick and/or masonry block.
3.05
INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with the Contract Documents, approved
Shop Drawings, and manufacturer’s installation instructions. When manufacturer’s
installation instructions conflict with the Contract Documents, obtain interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
B. Preparation of surfaces shall be performed prior to installation of equipment and
material.
1.
New floor finishes: Repair and patch with concrete, asphalt latex type emulsion
and underlayment as required for existing surfaces or new flooring surfaces.
2.
Ceramic tile flooring or bases installed over concrete floors: Grind away cove, if
present, for installation of new Work.
C. Concrete surfaces shall achieve compression strength in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to installation of equipment and materials.
1.
Anchor bolts and templates shall be provided by Contractor and as specified in the
individual Specification Sections.
2.
Concrete foundations shall be treated with sealer to prevent oil from seeping into
concrete as specified in the individual Specification Sections.
8/15/2025
01 73 00-16
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. Maintain the work area in a broom-clean condition while installing materials and
equipment.
E. Contractor shall be responsible for equipment for hoisting, lifting, moving, rigging, etc. for
installation of equipment and materials.
1.
Contractor shall be responsible for design of temporary installation system used
for the installation Work, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
2.
Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing structure, equipment, and
material caused prior, during, and following installation of the Work with the
Contractor furnished temporary installation system at no cost to Owner. Repairs
shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, shall return to condition prior
to installation Work, and as directed by the Engineer.
3.
Owner’s hoists, monorails, bridge cranes, rigging, etc. shall not be used by the
Contractor unless written authorization is provided by Owner.
F. Alteration or repair of new equipment and materials shall not be permitted without written
authorization from Engineer.
G. Field welding or burning of new equipment and materials shall not be permitted unless
indicated in the Contract Documents or without written authorization from Engineer.
H. Contractors shall install temporary shoring and bracing where necessary during
installation of the Work where required:
1.
System shall be provided in accordance with the Contract Documents and code
requirements.
2.
Temporary system shall consist of adjustable sound timbers or rolled shapes
easily removable following installation of the Work.
3.
Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing structures and new Work
during installation, utilization, and removal of the temporary system at new
additional cost to the Owner.
I.
Manufacturer’s Installation Services: Provide competent, qualified manufacturer’s
representatives of equipment and material for services specified in the individual
Specification Sections, including, but not limited to:
1.
Supervising installation
2.
Checking the completed installation
3.
Adjusting and testing of equipment and materials
8/15/2025
01 73 00-17
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
Instructing Owner’s operations and maintenance in accordance with Section 01 79
00 − Instruction of Owner’s Personnel.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 74 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 74 00
CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for progress and closeout cleaning at the
Site.
1.
Contractor shall execute cleaning during the Project, at completion of the Work,
and as required by the General Conditions and this Section. Maintain in a clean
manner the Site, the Work, and areas adjacent to or affected by the Work in
accordance with Section 4.5 Control of the Project Site.
2.
Maintain in a clean manner the Site, the Work, and areas adjacent to or affected
by the Work.
B. Administrative and procedural requirements for disposing of non-hazardous excavation
and construction waste.
1.
Contractor shall comply with the requirements and procedures for construction
waste management and disposal, including developing and implementing a plan
for construction waste management and disposal.
2.
Extent of required construction waste management and disposal includes within
the Project limits, as shown or indicated.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1.
“Waste Management Coordinator” is the person responsible for implementing,
monitoring, and reporting the status of the Waste Management Plan. Although
available for other assignments, the Waste Management Coordinator shall be
present at the Site as required by the Contract Documents for the duration of the
Work.
2.
“Construction waste” is building and site improvement materials and other solid
waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations.
Construction waste includes packaging.
3.
“Demolition waste” is building and site improvement materials resulting from
demolition or selective demolition operations.
8/15/2025
01 74 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
“Disposal” is removal to an off-Site location of demolition and construction waste
and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or disposal in a landfill or incinerator
conforming to Laws and Regulations and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Reference Standards: NFPA 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition
Operations
1.3
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Action/Informational Submittals:
1.
Preliminary Waste Management Plan: Prepare in accordance with this Section and
submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed and prior to removing waste from
the Site.
2.
Final Waste Management Plan: Submit within 14 days of receiving Engineer’s
comments on the preliminary waste management plan.
B. Closeout Submittals:
1.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Provide copy of receipt and acceptance
of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Submit
manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Replace loaded containers with empty containers as demand requires.
B. Deposit recyclable materials in containers free from debris.
C. Transport and deposit waste in containers to minimize dust. Close container covers
immediately after materials are deposited.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean the Site, work areas, and other areas occupied by Contractor at least
weekly. Dispose of materials in accordance with the General Conditions and the
following:
8/15/2025
01 74 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Comply with NFPA 241 for removing combustible waste materials and debris.
2.
Do not hold non-combustible materials at the Site more than three days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. When temperature is less
than 80 degrees F, dispose of non-combustible materials within seven days of
their generation.
3.
Provide suitable containers for storage of waste materials and debris.
4.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other
waste. Mark containers appropriately.
B. Work Areas:
1.
Clean areas where the Work is in progress to level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly and immediately report spills to Owner, Engineer,
and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum
entire work area, as appropriate.
4.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the
space.
C. Installed Work: Keep installed Work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of material or equipment installed, using only
cleaning agents and methods specifically recommended by material or equipment
manufacturer. If manufacturer does not recommend specific cleaning agents or
methods, use cleaning agents and methods that are not hazardous to health and
property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
D. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom
from damage and deterioration until Substantial Completion.
E. Cutting and Patching:
1.
Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
2.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or
other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
F. During handling and installation of materials and equipment, clean and protect
construction in progress and adjoining materials and equipment already in place. Apply
8/15/2025
01 74 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
protective covering where required for protection from damage or deterioration, until
Substantial Completion.
G. Clean completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout the construction
period.
3.2
EXCAVATION WORK NEAR PUBLIC OR PRIVATE PROPERTY
A. Contractor shall provide cleaning and either temporary or permanent restoration where
Work is located in or near streets, right of ways, easements, or private property.
Restoration shall comply with General Conditions 4.5 and 6.5.
B. Contractor shall backfill, compact, grade, and restore excavation or disturbed area to
functional condition to permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic and original use of the area
as the Work progresses.
C. Temporary storage of excavation spoils, including earth, stones, boulders, and debris,
shall be removed from the Site or area of disturbance.
3.3
CLOSEOUT CLEANING
A. Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion:
1.
Clean and remove from the Site rubbish, waste material, debris, and other foreign
substances.
2.
Sweep paved areas broom-clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
3.
Hose-clean sidewalks and loading areas.
4.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
5.
Repair pavement, roads, sod, and other areas affected by construction operations
and restore to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to pre-
construction condition.
6.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to dirt-free condition,
free of spatter, grease, stains, fingerprints, films, and similar foreign substances.
7.
Leave the Site clean, and in neat, orderly condition, satisfactory to Owner,
Engineer and in accordance with the Contract Documents.
8/15/2025
01 74 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.4
WASTE MANAGEMENT IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement the waste management plan in accordance with General Conditions
Sections 4.5 and 6.5. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and
other items required to implement the waste management pan during the Project.
B. Training: Train all installers, Subcontractors, and Suppliers as required on proper waste
management procedures required for the Work.
1.
Distribute the waste management plan as required within three days of Engineer’s
approval.
2.
Distribute the waste management plan to Contractor’s personnel, Subcontractors,
and Suppliers prior to these entities starting the Work. Review with installers,
Subcontractors, and Suppliers the waste management plan’s procedures and
locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. Include documentation
of training completion in compliance submittals.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent facilities.
Designate and label specific areas of the Site necessary for separating materials to be
disposed.
3.5
WASTE DISPOSAL
A. General: Except for items or materials to be recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from the Site and properly dispose of waste in facility such as permitted
landfill or incinerator or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Except as otherwise specified, remove from the Site all waste and debris from the
Work as it accumulates. Upon completion of the Work, remove materials,
equipment, waste, and debris and leave the Site clean, neat, and orderly. Comply
with the Contract Documents regarding cleaning and removal of trash, debris, and
waste.
2.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
3.
Properly dispose of waste materials, surplus materials, debris, and rubbish off the
Site.
4.
Do not discharge volatile or hazardous substances, such as mineral spirits, oil, or
paint thinner, into storm sewers or sanitary sewers.
5.
Do not discharge wastes into surface waters or drainage routes.
8/15/2025
01 74 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Burying: Do not bury rubbish and waste materials at the Site.
C. Burning: Do not burn waste materials at the Site.
D. Disposal: Transport waste materials to proper location to an approved offsite location for
disposal in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall be solely
responsible for complying with Laws and Regulations regarding storing, transporting,
and disposing of waste.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
01 74 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 78 39-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section lncludes:
1.
Requirements for recording changes to record documents.
2.
Requirements for electronic files furnished by Engineer.
B. Contractor shall maintain and submit to Engineer with record documents in accordance
with the Specifications and City General Conditions Section 4.8 Project Record
Documents.
1.02
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintenance of Record Documents:
1.
The following record documents shall be maintained in the Contractor’s field office:
a.
Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda.
b.
Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Contractor submittals, including records
of test results, approved or accepted as applicable, by Engineer.
c.
Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, photographic
documentation, survey data, and all other documents pertinent to the Work.
2.
Update record documents on a monthly basis, minimum.
3.
Provide files and racks for proper storage and easy access to record documents.
4.
Make record documents available for inspection upon request of Engineer or
Owner.
5.
Do not use record documents for purpose other than serving as Project record. Do
not remove record documents from Contractor’s field office without Engineer’s
approval.
B. Submittal of Record Documents:
1.
Submit to Engineer the following record documents: Drawings.
032619
8/15/2025
01 78 39-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Prior to readiness for final payment, submit to Engineer one copy of final record
documents. Submit complete record documents; do not make partial submittals.
3.
Submit record documents with transmittal letter on contractor letterhead complying
with letter of transmittal requirements in Section 01 33 00 − Submittal Procedures.
4.
Record documents submittal shall include certification, with original signature of
official authorized to execute legal agreements on behalf of Contractor.
C. Electronic Files Furnished by Engineer:
1.
CADD files will be furnished by Engineer upon the following conditions:
a.
Contractor shall submit to Engineer a letter on Contractor letterhead
requesting CADD files and providing specific definition(s) or description(s) of
how files will be used, and specific description of benefits to Owner
(including credit proposal, if applicable) if the request is granted.
b.
Contractor shall execute Engineer’s standard agreement for release of
electronic files and shall abide by all provisions of the agreement for release
of electronic files.
c.
Layering system incorporated in CADD files shall be maintained as
transmitted by Engineer. CADD files transmitted by Engineer containing
cross-referenced files shall not be bound by Contractor. Drawing cross-
references and paths shall be maintained. If Contractor alters layers or
cross-reference files, Contractor shall restore all layers and cross-references
prior to submitting record documents to Engineer.
d.
Contractor shall submit record drawings to Engineer in same CADD format
that files were furnished to Contractor.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Submittals: Provide record documentation as specified in this Section.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. At the start of the Project, label each record document to be submitted as, “PROJECT
RECORD” using legible, printed letters. Letters on record copy of the Drawings shall be
two inches high.
8/15/2025
01 78 39-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Keep record documents current. Make entries on record documents within two working
days of receipt of information required to record the change.
C. Do not permanently conceal the Work until required information has been recorded.
D. Accuracy of record documents shall be such that future searches for items shown on the
record documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from Engineer-accepted
record documents.
E. Marking of Entries:
1.
Use erasable, colored pencils (not ink or indelible pencil) for marking changes,
revisions, additions, and deletions to record documents.
2.
Clearly describe the change by graphic line and make notations as required. Use
straight-edge to mark straight lines. Writing shall be legible and sufficiently dark to
allow scanning of record documents into legible electronic files.
3.
Date all entries on record documents.
4.
Call attention to changes by drawing a “cloud” around the change(s) indicated.
5.
Mark initial revisions in red. In the event of overlapping changes, use different
colors for subsequent changes.
3.02
RECORDING CHANGES TO DRAWINGS:
A. Record changes on copy of the Drawings. Submittal of Contractor-originated or -
produced drawings as a substitute for recording changes on the Drawings is
unacceptable.
B. Record changes on plans, sections, schematics, and details as required for clarity,
making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record
documentation.
C. Record actual construction including:
1.
Depths of various elements of foundation relative to Project datum.
2.
Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details.
3.
Changes made in accordance with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and
Field Orders.
4.
Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by
Contractor when required to document changes.
8/15/2025
01 78 39-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.03
RECORDING CHANGES FOR SCHEMATIC LAYOUTS:
A. In some cases, on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and
similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray physical layout.
For such cases, the final physical arrangement shall be determined by Contractor
subject to acceptance by Engineer.
B. Record on record documents all revisions to schematics on Drawings, including: piping
schematics, ducting schematics, process and instrumentation diagrams, control and
circuitry diagrams, electrical one-line diagrams, motor control center layouts, and other
schematics when included in the Contract. Record actual locations of equipment, lighting
fixtures, in-place grounding system, and other pertinent data.
C. When dimensioned plans and dimensioned sections on the Drawings show the Work
schematically, indicate on the record documents, by dimensions accurate to within one
inch in the field, centerline location of items of Work such as conduit, piping, ducts, and
similar items
1.
Clearly identify the Work item by accurate notations such as “cast iron drain”, “rigid
electrical conduit”, “copper waterline”, and similar descriptions.
2.
Show by symbol or note the vertical location of Work item; for example,
“embedded in slab”, “under slab”, “in ceiling plenum”, “exposed”, and similar
designations. For piping not embedded, also provide elevation dimension relative
to Project datum.
3.
Descriptions shall be sufficiently detailed to be related to Specifications.
D. Engineer may furnish written waiver of requirements relative to schematic layouts shown
on plans and sections when, in Engineer’s judgment, dimensioned layouts of Work
shown schematically will serve no useful purpose. Do not rely on waiver(s) being issued.
3.04
REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWINGS:
A. In some cases, drawings produced during construction by Engineer or Contractor
supplement the Drawings and shall be included with record documents submitted by
Contractor. Supplemental record drawings shall include drawings provided with Change
Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders and that cannot be incorporated into
the Drawings due to space limitations.
B. Supplemental drawings provided with record drawings shall be integrated with the
Drawings and include necessary cross-references between drawings. Supplemental
record drawings shall be on sheets the same size as the Drawings.
8/15/2025
01 78 39-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. When supplemental drawings developed by Contractor using computer-aided
drafting/design (CADD) software are to be included in record drawings, submit electronic
files for such drawings in AutoCAD (latest version) as part of record drawing submittal.
3.05
RECORDING CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA:
A. Mark each Section to record:
1.
Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item
of equipment actually provided.
2.
Changes made by Addendum, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field
Orders.
3.06
RECORDING CHANGES TO DRAWING MODELS
A. Record changes on Engineer supplied electronic models to generate record drawings.
B. Record changes on plans, sections, schematics, and details as required for clarity,
making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record
documentation.
C. Record actual construction including:
1.
Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details.
2.
Changes made in accordance with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and
Field Orders.
3.
Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by
Contractor when required to document changes.
D. When required, electronic models shall be updated with as-built asset information in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Asset information shall be entered and
coordinated with electronic model files. Asset information includes equipment,
instrumentation, and appurtenance tagging, pipe and valve identification information,
and Owner identified equipment and material.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
01 78 43-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 01 78 43
SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall furnish spare parts data and extra materials for materials and equipment
in accordance with the Contract Documents General Conditions Sections 4.7, 8.1, 8.3,
8.4, 8.7, 15.3.
B. Spare Parts and Extra Materials:
1.
Provide spare parts, extra stock materials, maintenance supplies, and special tools
required for maintenance (“spare parts and extra materials”) for one year of
operation (unless otherwise specified in the individual Specification Section).
a.
Provide Supplier recommended lubricating oil and grease in accordance with
this Section and the Contract Documents General Conditions.
2.
Provide list of Supplier recommended spare parts and extra material.
a.
Include list of four standard lubricants, minimum, that shall be
interchangeable for each type of lubricant required in the Contract
Documents.
b.
Include unit prices in current United States funds
c.
Source(s) of supply for each.
C. Packaging and Labeling:
1.
Furnish spare parts and extra materials in manufacturer’s unopened cartons,
boxes, crates, or other original, protective covering suitable for preventing
corrosion and deterioration for maximum length of storage normally anticipated by
manufacturer.
2.
Packaging of spare parts and extra materials shall be clearly marked and identified
with name of manufacturer, applicable equipment, part number, part description,
and part location in the equipment.
3.
Protect and package spare parts and extra materials for maximum shelf life
normally anticipated by manufacturer.
8/15/2025
01 78 43-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. Finishes: Spare parts and extra material shall have painting, protective coating, and
finishes identical to original installed equipment and material. Where painting, protective
coating, or finishes are not specified, suitable provisions shall be furnished to protect
from corrosion.
E. Special Tools: Contractor shall provide special tools necessary to operate, disassemble,
service, repair, and adjust equipment and material in accordance with the
manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manual. Special tool requirements shall be
the same as spare parts and extra material specified in this Section.
F. Storage Prior to Delivery to Owner: Prior to furnishing spare parts and extra materials to
Owner, store spare parts and extra materials in accordance with the Contract
Documents and manufacturers’ recommendations.
G. Delivery Time and Eligibility for Payment:
1.
Deliver to Owner spare parts and extra materials prior to date of Substantial
Completion for equipment or system associated with the spare parts and extra
materials. Do not deliver spare parts and extra materials before commencing start-
up for associated equipment or system.
2.
Spare parts and extra materials are not eligible for payment until delivered to
Owner and Contractor’s receipt of Owner’s countersignature on letter of
transmittal.
H. Procedure for Delivery to Owner:
1.
Deliver spare parts and extra materials to Owner’s permanent storage rooms at
the Site or area(s) at the Site designated by Owner.
2.
When spare parts and extra materials are delivered, Engineer and Owner will
mutually inventory the spare parts and extra materials delivered to verify
compliance with the Contract Documents regarding quantity and part numbers.
3.
Additional procedures for delivering spare parts and extra materials to Owner, if
required, will be developed by Engineer and complied with by Contractor.
I.
Transfer Documentation:
1.
Furnish on Contractor letterhead a letter of transmittal for spare parts and extra
materials furnished under each Specification Section. Letter of transmittal shall
accompany spare parts and extra materials. Do not furnish letter of transmittal
separate from associated spare parts and extra materials.
2.
Furnish three original, identical, signed letters of transmittal for each Specification
Section. Upon delivery of specified quantities and types of spare parts and extra
8/15/2025
01 78 43-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
materials to Owner, designated person from Owner will countersign each original
letter of transmittal indicating Owner’s receipt of spare parts and extra materials.
a.
Owner will retain one fully signed original.
b.
Contractor shall submit one fully signed original to Engineer.
c.
Contractor shall retain one fully signed original for Contractor’s file.
3.
Letter of transmittal shall include the following:
a.
Information required for letters of transmittal in Section 01 33 00 − Submittal
Procedures.
b.
Transmittal shall list spare parts and extra materials furnished under each
Specification Section. List each individual part or product and quantity
furnished.
c.
Provide space for countersignature by Owner as follows: space for
signature, space for printed name, and date.
J.
Contractor shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to spare parts and extra
materials until spare parts and extra materials are received by Owner.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Action/Informational Submittals: Individual Specification Sections that require spare
parts, extra material, or tools, Contractor shall submit inventory checklist for each
individual Specification Section that includes the following information:
1.
Specification Section number and title.
2.
Name of spare parts, extra material, or tools.
3.
Manufacturer, part number and description.
4.
Quantity specified and furnished.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
02 41 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 02 41 00
SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment in accordance with the
requirements of applicable sections of Divisions 1 and 2.
B. In addition, the Contractor shall demolish and remove all concrete and asphalt paving,
curbs, sidewalk, and miscellaneous yard piping, utilities, and structures as required and
shown on the Contract Drawings during the construction work.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01 14 00 – Coordination with Owner’s Operations
B. Section 01 42 00 – References
C. Section 01 73 00 – Demolition and Execution of Work
1.03
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. References shall be in accordance with reference standards, codes, and specifications
as set forth herein and in Section 31 10 00 – Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 –
Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following:
1.
Copies of all photographs and other records from existing conditions surveys.
2.
Provide pre-demolition documentation of existing conditions in accordance with
General Conditions Sections 4.2.6 and 4.4.9; limit demolition-specific records to
areas directly impacted by this Work.
PART 2 – EXECUTION
2.01
DEMOLITION
A. Existing concrete and asphalt paving, curbs, sidewalk and miscellaneous yard piping,
utilities, and structures within the areas designated for new construction work shall be
05-02-23
8/15/2025
02 41 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
completely demolished and all debris removed from the site. Contractor shall inform the
Owner and the Engineer of any unknown yard piping, utilities, and structures within the
area that are not shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Excavation caused by demolition shall be backfilled with fill free from rubbish and debris.
Select fill or structural fill shall be used where specifically required on Contract Drawings.
C. Work shall be performed in such manner as not to endanger the safety of the workmen
or the public or cause damage to nearby structures.
D. Provide all barriers and precautionary measures in accordance with Owner's
requirements and other authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Where parts of existing pavements or structures are to remain in service, demolish the
portions to be removed, repair damage, and leave the pavement or structure in proper
condition for the intended use. Remove asphalt or concrete pavement, concrete, and
masonry to the lines designated by saw-cutting, drilling, chipping, or other suitable
methods. Leave the resulting surfaces reasonably true and even, with sharp straight
corners that will result in neat joints with new construction and be satisfactory for the
purpose intended. Where existing reinforcement extends into new construction, remove
the concrete so that the reinforcing is clean and undamaged. Cut off other reinforcing
1/2-inch below the surface and fill with epoxy resin binder flush with the surface.
F. Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer shall jointly
survey the condition of the adjoining and/or nearby pavements and structures. Survey
and documentation shall be performed in accordance with General Conditions Section
4.2.6 and 4.4.9; demolition-specific observations shall be noted in the survey record.
2.02
DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
A. All debris resulting from the demolition and removal work shall be disposed of by the
Contractor at a properly permitted facility as part of the work of this Contract. All
regulations covering material handling and disposal shall be followed. Material
designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as
directed. All other material shall be disposed of off-site by the Contractor at the
Contractor’s expense.
B. Burning of any debris resulting from the demolition will not be permitted at the site.
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
03 11 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 03 11 00
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide materials, labor, and equipment required for the design and construction of all
concrete formwork, bracing, shoring and supports in accordance with the provisions of
the Contract Documents.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcing Steel
B. Section 03 30 00 − Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work
herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All
referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available
at the time of Bid.
1.
International Building Code
2.
ACI 318 − Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
3.
ACI 301 − Specifications for Structural Concrete
4.
ACI 347 − Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
5.
U.S. Product Standard for Concrete Forms, Class I, PS 1
6.
ACI 117 − Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
and Commentary
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 − Submittal Procedures.
1.
Manufacturer's data on proposed form release agent
2.
Manufacturer's data on proposed formwork system including form ties
8/15/2025
03 11 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Concrete formwork shall be in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318, and ACI 347.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
FORMS AND FALSEWORK
A. All forms shall be smooth surface forms unless otherwise specified.
B. Wood materials for concrete forms and falsework shall conform to the following
requirements:
1.
Lumber for bracing, shoring, or supporting forms shall be Douglas Fir or Southern
Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard
PS20. All lumber used for forms, shoring or bracing shall be new material.
2.
Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded,
exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Pine high density overlaid (HDO) plywood
manufactured especially for concrete formwork and shall conform to the
requirements of PS1 for Concrete Forms, Class I, and shall be edge sealed.
Thickness shall be as required to support concrete at the rate it is placed, but not
less than 5/8-inch thick.
C. Other form materials such as metal, fiberglass, or other acceptable material that will not
adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form,
line and grade indicated may be submitted to the Engineer for approval, but only
materials that will produce a smooth form finish equal or better than the wood materials
specified will be considered.
2.02
FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a
conical hole to ensure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the
concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, or of other removable
form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 7/8-inch, and all such
fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming.
B. Form ties for water-retaining structures shall have integral waterstops. Removable taper
ties may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. A preformed mechanical EPDM
rubber plug shall be used to seal the hole left after the removal of the taper tie. Plug shall
be X-Plug by the Sika Corporation or approved equal. Friction fit plugs shall not be used.
C. Form release agent shall be a blend of natural and synthetic chemicals that employs a
chemical reaction to provide quick, easy and clean release of concrete from forms. It
8/15/2025
03 11 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
shall not stain the concrete and shall leave the concrete with a paintable surface.
Formulation of the form release agent shall be such that it would minimize formation of
"bug holes" in cast-in-place concrete.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
FORM DESIGN
A. Forms and falsework shall be designed for total dead load, plus all construction live load
as outlined in ACI 347. Design and engineering of formwork and safety considerations
during construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Forms shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position and shape
under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. The
maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view
shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members.
C. All forms shall be designed for predetermined placing rates per hour, considering
expected air temperatures and setting rates.
3.02
CONSTRUCTION
A. The type, size, quality, and strength of all materials from which forms are made shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. No falsework or forms shall be used which are
not clean and suitable. Deformed, broken or defective falsework and forms shall be
removed from the work.
B. Forms shall be smooth and free from surface irregularities. Suitable and effective means
shall be provided on all forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels and
sections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the formation of
ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Joints between
the forms shall be sealed to eliminate any irregularities. The arrangement of the facing
material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to a practical
minimum.
C. Forms shall be true to line and grade and shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent
displacement and sagging between supports. Curved forms shall be used for curved and
circular structures. Straight panels joined at angles will not be acceptable for forming
curved structures. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain their
position and shape under a load of freshly placed concrete. Facing material shall be
supported with studs or other backing which shall prevent both visible deflection marks
in the concrete and deflections beyond the tolerances specified.
D. Forms shall be mortar tight to prevent the loss of water, cement and fines during placing
and vibrating of the concrete. Specifically, the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete
8/15/2025
03 11 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket to prevent loss of fines and paste during
placement and vibration of concrete. Such gasket may be a 1 to 1-1/2-inch diameter
polyethylene rod held in position to the underside of the wall form.
E. All vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, and side forms shall be
provided for all footings, slab edges and grade beams, except where placement of the
concrete against the ground is called for on the Drawings. Not less than 1-inch of
concrete shall be added to the thickness of the concrete member as shown where
concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Such
permission will be granted only for members of comparatively limited height and where
the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will
stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has been placed.
F. All forms shall be constructed in such a manner that they can be removed without
hammering or prying against the concrete. Wood forms shall be constructed for wall
openings to facilitate loosening and to counteract swelling of the forms.
G. Adequate clean-out holes shall be provided at the bottom of each lift of forms.
Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of column forms and wall forms and
at other points to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before the concrete is
deposited. The size, number and location of such clean-outs shall be as acceptable to
the Engineer.
H. Construction joints shall not be permitted at locations other than those shown or
specified, except as may be acceptable to the Engineer. When a second lift is placed on
hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location
and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any
unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. For flush surfaces at construction
joints exposed to view, the contact surface of the form sheathing over the hardened
concrete in the previous placement shall be lapped by not more than 1 inch. Forms shall
be held against hardened concrete to prevent offset or loss of mortar at construction
joints and to maintain a true surface.
I.
The formwork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections in the
formwork due to the weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and due to construction
loads. Set forms and intermediate screed strips for slabs accurately to produce the
designated elevations and contours of the finished surface. Ensure that edge forms and
screed strips are sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds if
the nature of the finish specified requires the use of such equipment. When formwork is
cambered, set screeds to a like camber to maintain the proper concrete thickness.
J.
Positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) for shores and struts shall be provided
and all settlement shall be taken up during concrete placing operation. Shores and struts
shall be securely braced against lateral deflections. Wedges shall be fastened firmly in
place after final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement. Formwork shall be
8/15/2025
03 11 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
anchored to shores or other supporting surfaces or members to prevent upward or
lateral movement of any part of the formwork system during concrete placement. If
adequate foundation for shores cannot be secured, trussed supports shall be provided.
K. Runways shall be provided for moving equipment with struts or legs. Runways shall be
supported directly on the formwork or structural member without resting on the
reinforcing steel.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, formwork shall be constructed so
that the concrete surfaces will conform to the tolerance limits listed in ACI 117.
B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and until final
completion and acceptance of the project, sufficient control points and benchmarks to be
used for reference purposes to check tolerances. Plumb and string lines shall be
installed before concrete placement and shall be maintained during placement. Such
lines shall be used by Contractor's personnel and by the Engineer and shall be in
sufficient number and properly installed. During concrete placement, the Contractor shall
continually monitor plumb and string line form positions and immediately correct
deficiencies.
C. Regardless of the tolerances specified, no portion of the structure shall extend beyond
the legal boundary of the structure.
3.04
FORM ACCESSORIES
A. Suitable moldings shall be placed to bevel or round all exposed corners and edges of
beams, columns, walls, slabs, and equipment pads. Chamfers shall be 3/4 inch unless
otherwise noted.
B. Form ties shall be so constructed that the ends, or end fasteners, can be removed
without causing appreciable spalling at the faces of the concrete. After ends, or end
fasteners of form ties have been removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall
terminate not less than 2 inches from the formed face of the concrete that is exposed to
water or enclosed surfaces above the water surface, and not less than 1 inch from the
formed face of all other concrete. Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be
reamed with suitable toothed reamers to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough
before being filled with mortar as specified in Section 03 35 00 − Concrete Finishes. No
form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the
concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending
through the interior of the concrete member. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling
of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. No snap ties
shall be broken off until the concrete is at least three days old. If steel panel forms are
used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order
to prevent loss of cement paste.
8/15/2025
03 11 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.05
APPLICATION − FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Forms for concrete surfaces that will not be subsequently waterproofed shall be coated
with a form release agent. Form release agent shall be applied on formwork in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.06
INSERTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Sleeves, pipe stubs, inserts, anchors, expansion joint material, waterstops, and other
embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement
prior to concreting. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily
with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids.
3.07
FORM CLEANING AND REUSE
A. The inner faces of all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to concreting. Forms may
be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the Engineer. Light sanding
between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture.
Unused tie rod holes in forms shall be covered with metal caps or shall be filled by other
methods acceptable to the Engineer.
3.08
FORM REMOVAL AND SHORING
A. Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength. Sufficient
strength shall be demonstrated by structural analysis considering proposed loads,
strength of forming and shoring system, and concrete strength data. Shoring shall not be
removed until the supported member has acquired sufficient strength to support its
weight and the load upon it. Members subject to additional loads during construction
shall be adequately shored to sustain all resulting stresses. Forms shall be removed in
such manner as not to impair safety and serviceability of the structure. All concrete to be
exposed by form removal shall have sufficient strength not to be damaged thereby.
B. Provided the strength requirements specified above have been met and subject to the
Engineer's approval, forms may be removed at the following minimum times. The
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the strength of all such components from
which forms are removed prior to the concrete attaining its full design compressive
strength. Shoring may be required at the option of the Engineer beyond these periods.
Ambient Temperature (°F.) During Concrete Placement
Over 95°
70°-95°
60°-70°
50°-60°
Below 50°
Edge Forms for
Slabs on Grade
1 day
1 day
1 day
1 day
Walls
5 days
2 days
2 days
3 days
8/15/2025
03 11 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
Ambient Temperature (°F.) During Concrete Placement
Over 95°
70°-95°
60°-70°
50°-60°
Below 50°
Columns
7 days
2 days
3 days
4 days
Do not remove until
directed by Engineer
(7 days minimum)
Beam Soffits
10 days
7 days
7 days
7 days
Elevated Slabs
12 days
7 days
7 days
7 days
C. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions of the work or weather justify, forms
may be required to remain in place for longer periods of time.
D. An accurate record shall be maintained by the Contractor of the dates of concrete
placings and the exact location thereof and the dates of removal of forms. These records
shall always be available for inspection at the site, and two copies shall be furnished the
Engineer upon completion of the concrete work.
3.09
RESHORING
A. When reshoring is permitted or required the operations shall be planned and subjected
to approval by the Engineer.
B. Reshores shall be placed after stripping operations are complete but in no case later
than the end of the working day on which stripping occurs.
C. Reshoring for the purpose of early form removal shall be performed so that at no time
will large areas of new construction be required to support their own weight. While
reshoring is under way, no construction or live loads shall be permitted on the new
construction. Reshores shall be tightened to carry their required loads but they shall not
be overtightened so that the new construction is overstressed. Reshores shall remain in
place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength, unless otherwise
specified.
D. For floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete, the original supporting shores
shall remain in place or reshores shall be placed. The shoring or reshoring system shall
have a capacity sufficient to resist the anticipated loads and, in all cases, shall have a
capacity equal to at least one-half of the capacity of the shoring system above. Reshores
shall be located directly under a reshore position above unless other locations are
permitted.
E. In multi-story buildings, reshoring shall extend over a sufficient number of stories to
distribute the weight of newly placed concrete, forms, and construction live loads so the
design superimposed loads of the floors supporting shores are not exceeded.
8/15/2025
03 11 00-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
03 21 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 03 21 00
REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all concrete reinforcing including all cutting, bending, fastening and any special
work necessary to hold the reinforcing steel in place and protect it from injury and
corrosion in accordance with the requirements of this section.
B. Provide deformed reinforcing bars to be grouted into reinforced concrete masonry walls.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work
herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All
referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available
at the time of Bid.
1.
International Building Code
2.
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Institute Manual of Standard Practice
3.
ACI MNL-66 - ACI Detailing Manual
4.
ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing
5.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
6.
WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric
7.
ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
8.
ASTM A706 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
8/15/2025
03 21 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
9.
ASTM A 1064 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
10.
ASTM E 3121 – Standard Test Methods for Field Testing of Anchors in Concrete
or Masonry
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 − Submittal Procedures.
1.
Detailed placing and shop fabricating drawings, prepared in accordance with ACI
315 and ACI Detailing Manual - (MNL-66), shall be furnished for all concrete
reinforcing. These drawings shall be made to such a scale as to clearly show joint
locations, openings, and the arrangement, spacing and splicing of the bars.
2.
Detailed placing and shop fabricating drawings, prepared in accordance with ACI
315 and ACI Detailing Manual - (MNL-66), shall be furnished for all deformed bar
reinforcing used in masonry. These drawings shall be made to such a scale as to
clearly show joint locations, openings, and the arrangement, locations, spacing
and splicing of the bars.
3.
Mill test certificates - 3 copies of each.
4.
Description of the reinforcing steel manufacturer's marking pattern.
5.
Requests to relocate any bars that cause interferences or that cause placing
tolerances to be violated.
6.
Proposed supports for each type of reinforcing.
7.
Request to use splices not shown on the Drawings.
8.
Request to weld reinforcement.
9.
Request to use mechanical couplers along with manufacturer's literature on
mechanical couplers with instructions for installation, and certified test reports on
the couplers' performance, including International Code Council–Evaluation
Services Report (ICC-ES ESR).
10.
Request for placement of column dowels without the use of templates.
11.
Request and procedure to field bend or straighten partially embedded reinforcing.
12.
International Code Council–Evaluation Services Report (ICC-ES ESR) for dowel
adhesives.
8/15/2025
03 21 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
13.
Certification that all installers of dowel adhesive systems in horizontal to vertically
overhead applications are certified as Adhesive Anchor Installers in accordance
with the ACI-CRSI Anchor Installer Certification Program.
14.
Adhesive dowel testing plan.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide samples from each load of
reinforcing steel delivered in a quantity adequate for testing. Costs of initial tests will be
paid by the Owner. Costs of additional tests due to material failing initial tests shall be
paid by the Contractor.
B. Provide a list of names of all installers who are trained by the Manufacturer’s Field
Representative on this jobsite prior to installation of products. Record must include the
installer name, date of training, products included in the training and trainer name and
contact information.
C. Provide a copy of the current ACI/CRSI “Adhesive Anchor Installer” certification cards, or
equivalent, for all installers who will be installing adhesive anchors in the horizontal to
vertically overhead orientation.
D. Special inspections for adhesive dowels shall be conducted in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and Specification Section 01 45 33 – Special Inspections.
Downward installations require periodic inspection and horizontal and overhead
installations require continuous inspection.
PART 2 –
PRODUCTS
2.01
REINFORCING STEEL
A. Bar reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615 for Grade 60 deformed
billet-steel reinforcing unless noted otherwise. All reinforcing steel shall be from domestic
mills and shall have the manufacturer's mill marking rolled into the bar which shall
indicate the producer, size, type, and grade. All reinforcing bars shall be deformed bars.
Smooth reinforcing bars shall not be used unless specifically called for on Drawings.
1.
Reinforcement to be welded shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A706,
Grade 60.
B. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 1064 and
the details shown on the Drawings.
8/15/2025
03 21 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. A certified copy of the mill test on each load of reinforcing steel delivered showing
physical and chemical analysis shall be provided, prior to shipment. The Engineer
reserves the right to require the Contractor to obtain separate test results from an
independent testing laboratory in the event of any questionable steel. When such tests
are necessary because of failure to comply with this Specification, such as improper
identification, the cost of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
D. Use of coiled reinforcing steel will not be allowed.
2.02
ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories shall include all necessary chairs, slab bolsters, concrete blocks, tie wires,
dips, supports, spacers, and other devices to position reinforcing during concrete
placement. Wire bar supports shall be plastic protected (CRSI Class 1).
B. Concrete blocks (dobies), used to support and position bottom reinforcing steel, shall
have the same or higher compressive strength as specified for the concrete in which it is
located.
2.03
MECHANICAL COUPLERS
A. Mechanical couplers shall comply with ACI 318 Type 2 and develop a tensile strength
which exceeds 100 percent of the ultimate tensile strength and 125 percent of the yield
strength of the reinforcing bars being spliced. The reinforcing steel and coupler used
shall be compatible for obtaining the required strength of the connection.
B. Where the type of coupler used is composed of more than one component, all
components required for a complete splice shall be supplied by the same coupler
manufacturer.
C. Hot forged sleeve type couplers shall not be used. Acceptable mechanical couplers are
Dayton Superior Dowel Bar Splicer System by Dayton Superior, Dayton, Ohio, or
approved equal. Mechanical couplers shall only be used where shown on the Drawings
or where specifically approved by the Engineer.
D. Tension-compression mechanical splices may only be used where shown on the
Drawings or where specifically approved by the Engineer. Tension-compression
mechanical splices shall be shear screw coupling sleeve type. Acceptable mechanical
couplers are Bar Lock L-series or XL-series couplers by Dayton Superior, Dayton, Ohio,
or approved equal.
E. Dowel bar mechanical splices shall only be used at construction joints where shown on
the Drawings or where specifically approved by the Engineer. Acceptable dowel bar
mechanical couplers are the DBDI Splicing System by Dayton Superior, Dayton, Ohio, or
approved equal.
8/15/2025
03 21 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
F. Where the threaded rebar to be inserted into the coupler reduces the diameter of the
bar, the threaded rebar piece and all components of the coupler system shall be
provided by the same coupler manufacturer.
G. Mechanical couplers shall have a valid evaluation report from ICC-ES in accordance
with the Building Code.
H. All mechanical couplers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2.04
DOWEL ADHESIVE SYSTEM
A. Where shown on the Drawings, reinforcing bars anchored into hardened concrete with a
dowel adhesive system shall use a two-component adhesive mix which shall be injected
with a static mixing nozzle following manufacturer's instructions.
B. All holes shall be drilled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions except that
core drilled holes shall not be permitted unless specifically allowed by the Engineer.
Cored holes, if allowed by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, shall be
roughened in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Thoroughly clean drill holes of all debris, drill dust, and water in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of adhesive and reinforcing bar.
D. Degree of hole dampness shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer
recommendations. Installation conditions shall be dry, or water saturated unless
otherwise permitted by the engineer. If water saturated installation is approved,
appropriate reduction factors in accordance with manufacturer’s design requirements
should be considered. Water filled or submerged holes shall not be permitted unless
specifically approved by the Engineer.
E. Injection of adhesive into the hole shall be performed in a manner to minimize the
formation of air pockets in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Embedment Depth:
1.
If the Contractor submits one of the other named dowel adhesives from the list
below, the Engineer shall evaluate the required embedment and the Contractor
shall provide the required embedment depth stipulated by the Engineer specific to
the approved dowel adhesive.
8/15/2025
03 21 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Where the embedment depth is not shown on the Drawings, the embedment depth
shall be determined to provide the minimum allowable bond strength equal to the
tensile strength of the rebar according to the manufacturer’s ICC-ES ESR.
3.
The embedment depth shall be determined using design parameters listed below.
In no case shall the embedment depth be less than the minimum, or more than the
maximum, embedment depths stated in the manufacturer’s ICC-ES ESR.
4.
Design of adhesive anchor system shall be based on the following parameters:
a.
Actual compressive strength of concrete.
b.
Cracked concrete state.
c.
Dry or water saturated condition for installation.
d.
Base material temperature between 40- and 104-degrees Fahrenheit.
e.
Installation with either a hammer drill with carbide bit or hollow-drill bit
system drilling methods.
f.
Minimum age of concrete of 21 days at time of installation.
G. Engineer's approval is required for use of this system in locations other than those
shown on the Drawings.
H. The adhesive system shall be IBC compliant for use in both cracked and uncracked
concrete in all Seismic Design Categories and shall be "HIT-HY 200 Adhesive Anchoring
System" as manufactured by Hilti, Inc. “SET-3G Epoxy Adhesive Anchors” as
manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. or “Pure 110+ Epoxy Adhesive Anchor
System” by DeWalt. Fast-set epoxy formulations shall not be acceptable. No or equal
products will be considered, unless pre-qualified and approved.
I.
All individuals installing dowel adhesive systems in horizontal to vertically overhead
applications shall be certified as an Adhesive Anchor Installer in accordance with the
ACI-CRSI Anchor Installation Certification Program, or equivalent.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
FABRICATION
A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions and shapes shown on the
Drawings and the fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and
ACI 318, except as modified by the Drawings.
8/15/2025
03 21 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. The Contractor shall fabricate reinforcing bars for structures in accordance with the
bending diagrams, placing lists and placing Drawings.
C. No fabrication shall commence until approval of Shop Drawings has been obtained. All
reinforcing bars shall be shop fabricated unless approved to be bent in the field.
Reinforcing bars shall not be straightened or bent in a manner that will injure the
material. Heating of bars will not be permitted.
D. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wire of W9.5 size or smaller shall be either furnished
in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 inches. Welded wire
fabric with longitudinal wires larger than W9.5 size shall be furnished in flat sheets only.
3.02
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All reinforcing shall be neatly bundled and tagged for placement when delivered to the
job site. Bundles shall be properly identified for coordination with mill test reports.
B. Reinforcing steel shall be stored above ground on platforms or other supports and shall
always be protected from the weather by suitable covering. Reinforcing steel shall be
stored in an orderly manner and plainly marked to facilitate identification.
C. Reinforcing steel shall always be protected from conditions conducive to corrosion until
concrete is placed around it.
D. The surfaces of all reinforcing steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar and
other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. Where delay in
depositing concrete occurs, reinforcing shall be inspected again and if necessary
recleaned.
3.03
PLACING
A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately positioned as shown on the Drawings and shall be
supported and wired together to prevent displacement, using annealed iron wire ties or
suitable clips at intersections. All reinforcing steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic
or plastic protected (CRSI Class 1) metal supports, spacers or metal hangers which are
strong and rigid enough to prevent any displacement of the reinforcing steel. Where
concrete is to be placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be
used in sufficient numbers to support the reinforcing bars without settlement. In no case
shall concrete block supports be continuous.
B. The portions of all accessories in contact with the formwork shall be made of plastic or
steel coated with a 1/8-inch minimum thickness of plastic which extends at least 1/2 inch
from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color.
C. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms to provide the specified concrete coverage.
8/15/2025
03 21 00-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. Reinforcing bars additional to those shown on the Drawings, which may be found
necessary or desirable by the Contractor for the purpose of securing reinforcing in
position, shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Reinforcing placing, spacing, and protection tolerances shall be within the limits
specified in ACI 318 except where in conflict with the Building Code, unless otherwise
specified.
F. Reinforcing bars may be moved within one bar diameter as necessary to avoid
interference with other concrete reinforcing, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are
moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed placing tolerances, the
resulting arrangement of bars shall be as acceptable to the Engineer.
G. Welded wire fabric shall be supported on slab bolsters spaced not less than 30 inches
on centers, extending continuously across the entire width of the reinforcing mat and
supporting the reinforcing mat in the plane shown on the Drawings.
H. Reinforcing shall not be straightened or bent unless specifically shown on the drawings.
Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be used. Coiled
reinforcement shall not be used.
I.
Dowel Adhesive System shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and as required in Article 2.04 above. A representative of the
manufacturer must be on site prior to adhesive dowel installation to provide instruction
on proper installation procedures for all adhesive dowel installers. Testing of adhesive
dowels shall be as indicated below. If the dowels have a hook at the end to be
embedded in subsequent work, an approved mechanical coupler shall be provided at a
convenient distance from the face of existing concrete to facilitate adhesive dowel
testing while maintaining required hook embedment in subsequent work.
J.
All adhesive dowel installations in the horizontal or overhead orientation shall be
conducted by a certified Adhesive Anchor Installer as certified by ACI/CSRI Adhesive
Anchor Installer Certification program, or equivalent, per ACI 318-19 26.7.2.E or ACI
318-19 17.2.3. Current AAI Certificates must be submitted to the Engineer for approval
prior to commencement of any adhesive anchor installations.
K. Adhesive Dowel Testing
1.
At all locations where adhesive dowels are shown on the Drawings, at least 10
percent of all adhesive dowels installed shall be tested to 80% of the yield load of
the reinforcing bar, with a minimum of one tested dowel per group.
2.
Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of dowels to be
tested, load test values, and proposed dowel testing procedure (including a
diagram of the testing equipment proposed for use) prior to conducting any testing.
Proof testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASTM E 3121.
8/15/2025
03 21 00-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.
Where Contract Documents indicate adhesive dowel design is the Contractor’s
responsibility, the Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations
of dowels to be tested and load test values, sealed by a Professional Engineer
currently registered in the State of Arizona. The Contractor shall also submit
documentation indicating the Contractor’s testing procedures have been reviewed
and the proposed procedures are acceptable.
4.
Adhesive Dowel shall have no visible indications of displacement or damage
during or after the load test. Dowels exhibiting damage shall be removed and
replaced. If more than 5 percent of tested dowels fail, then 100 percent of dowels
shall be load tested.
5.
When special inspections are not required for the installation, load testing of
adhesive dowels shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory retained
directly by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs of all
testing, including additional testing required due to previously failed tests. If special
inspections are required for installation, the independent testing laboratory shall be
retained directly by the Owner.
3.04
SPLICING
A. Reinforcing bar splices shall only be used at locations shown on the Drawings. When
necessary to splice reinforcing at points other than where shown, the splice shall be as
acceptable to the Engineer.
B. The length of lap for reinforcing bars, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings shall be
in accordance with ACI 318 for a class B splice.
C. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Adjoining sheets shall
be securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each 2 running feet. Wires shall
be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip.
D. Mechanical splices shall be used only where shown on the drawings or when approved
by the Engineer. Splices shall also meet the requirements of Section 2.03.
E. Mechanical couplers for dowel bar mechanical splices at construction joints which are
located at a joint shall be a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the
concrete surface. The couplers shall be sealed during concrete placement to eliminate
concrete, or cement paste from entering. After the concrete is placed, couplers intended
for future connections shall be plugged and sealed to prevent any contact with water or
other corrosive materials. Threaded couplers shall be plugged with plastic plugs which
have an O-ring seal.
8/15/2025
03 21 00-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.05
WELDING OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Welding of reinforcement shall only occur where shown on the Drawings or where
specifically approved by the Engineer.
B. Welding shall comply with all requirements of AWS D1.4.
C. Welding shall be performed by certified welders in conformance with AWS D1.4.
D. Material of reinforcement to be welded shall be as specified in Section 2.01.A.1.
3.06
INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his intentions to place concrete and shall
allow him adequate time to inspect all reinforcing steel before concrete is placed.
B. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his intentions to place grout in masonry
walls and shall allow him adequate time to inspect all reinforcing steel before grout is
placed.
3.07
CUTTING OF EMBEDDED REBAR
A. The Contractor shall not cut embedded rebar cast into structural concrete without prior
approval.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
03 30 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, and services necessary for the manufacture,
transportation, and placement of all plain and reinforced concrete work, as shown on the
Drawings or as required by the Engineer.
B. The requirements in this section shall apply to the types of concrete listed below. See
Article 2.11 for concrete mix design and properties of concrete.
1.
Class A1 Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete to be used in all structures
qualifying as environmental concrete structures designed in accordance with ACI
350 including any structures containing water, wastewater or any other fluid,
process chemicals, or other materials used in treatment process.
2.
Class A2 Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete in all structures other than
structures as described above, and for all sidewalks and pavement.
3.
Class A3 Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete to be used for interior slabs
where a Type “D” Steel Troweled Finish or Type “G” Hardened Finish is required.
Class A3 concrete shall not contain entrained air.
4.
Class A4 Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete to be used where
specifically called for on Contract Drawings or areas where specifically requested
by Contractor and approved by Engineer. Class A4 concrete is identical to Class
A2 concrete except that coarse aggregate specified in Article 2.08 below shall be
Size #8 in accordance with ASTM C33.
5.
Class B Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete used for duct bank
encasements, catch basins, fence and guard post embedment, concrete fill, and
other areas where specifically noted on Contract Drawings.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 03 11 00 − Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03 15 00 − Concrete Accessories
C. Section 03 15 16 − Joints in Concrete
D. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel
8/15/2025
03 30 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. Section 03 35 00 − Concrete Finishes
F. Section 03 39 00 − Concrete Curing
G. Section 03 60 00 − Grout
1.03
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to or
exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced
specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time
of Bid.
1.
International Building Code 2024
2.
ACI 214 − Guide to Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete
3.
ACI 301 − Specifications for Structural Concrete
4.
ACI 304 − Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
5.
ACI 305 − Specification for Hot Weather Concreting
6.
ACI 306 − Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting
7.
ACI 309R − Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
8.
ACI 318 − Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
9.
ACI 350 − Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures
10.
ASTM C31 − Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field
11.
ASTM C33 − Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
12.
ASTM C39 − Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
13.
ASTM C42 − Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete
14.
ASTM C88 − Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by use of
Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
15.
ASTM C94 − Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
8/15/2025
03 30 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16.
ASTM C114 − Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement
17.
ASTM C136 − Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
18.
ASTM C138 − Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
19.
ASTM C143 − Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
20.
ASTM C150 − Standard Specification for Portland Cement
21.
ASTM C157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic
Cement, Mortar and Concrete
22.
ASTM C172 − Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
23.
ASTM C192 − Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Laboratory
24.
ASTM C231 − Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method
25.
ASTM C260 − Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
26.
ASTM C295 − Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
Concrete
27.
ASTM C457 − Standard Test Method for Microscopical Determination of the Air-
Void System in Hardened Concrete
28.
ASTM C494 − Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
29.
ASTM C595 − Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
30.
ASTM C618 − Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
31.
ASTM C989 − Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and
Mortars
32.
ASTM C1012 – Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution
33.
ASTM C1077 − Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation
8/15/2025
03 30 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
34.
ASTM C1157 – Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement
35.
ASTM C1260 − Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar
Bar Method)
36.
ASTM C1567 − Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica
Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated
Mortar-Bar Method)
37.
ASTM C1579 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
of Restrained Fiber Reinforced Concrete (Using a Steel Form Insert)
38.
ASTM C1602 − Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete
39.
ASTM C1609 – Standard Test Method for Flexural Performance of Fiber
Reinforced Concrete (Using Beam with Third-Point Loading)
40.
ASTM C1778 − Standard Guide for Reducing the Risk of Deleterious Alkali –
Aggregate Reaction in Concrete
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 − Submittal Procedures.
1.
Sources of all materials and certifications of compliance with specifications for all
materials.
2.
Certified current (less than 6 months old) chemical analysis (mill test report) of the
Portland Cement or Blended Cement to be used. The chemical analysis must
include the equivalent alkali content of the Portland Cement or Blended Cement.
For Type IL cement, submit updated cement mill test reports every 6 months while
active concrete work is being performed.
3.
Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis of fly ash or slag cement
to be used.
4.
Aggregate test results showing compliance with required standards, i.e., sieve
analysis, potential reactivity, aggregate soundness tests, petrographic analysis,
mortar bar expansion testing, etc.
5.
Manufacturer's data on all admixtures stating compliance with required standards.
6.
Concrete mix design for each class of concrete specified herein.
7.
Verification that concrete mix and individual constituents in concrete meet
requirements for NSF 61 approval for potable water applications where required.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
8.
Field experience records and/or trial mix data for the proposed concrete mixes for
each class of concrete specified herein.
9.
Drying shrinkage test results for Class A1 concrete.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tests on materials used in the production of concrete shall be required as specified in
Part 2 − Products. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory
approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Trial concrete mixes shall be tested when required in accordance with Article 3.01 at no
additional cost to the Owner. Where field experience records are utilized for mix design
verification, submit certified cement chemical analysis (mill test report) for the historical
concrete.
C. Field quality control tests, as specified in Article 3.12, unless otherwise stated, will be
performed by a materials testing consultant employed by the Owner. However, the
Contractor shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on work
performed which does not meet the Specifications. Any individual who samples and
tests concrete to determine if the concrete is being produced in accordance with this
Specification shall be certified as a Concrete Field-Testing Technician, Grade I, in
accordance with ACI CP-2. Testing laboratory shall conform to requirements of ASTM
C1077.
1.06
CONCRETE COORDINATION CONFERENCE
A. Unless waived by the Engineer, prior to any concrete submittals and at least 35 days
prior to the start of the concrete construction schedule, the Contractor shall conduct a
meeting at the site. The purpose of the meeting is to review the proposed concrete mix
designs, to discuss the proposed approaches and procedures for mixing, transporting,
placing, testing, finishing, and curing of all aspects of concrete work to ensure the
concrete construction is performed in accordance with the Specifications, and to clarify
roles of the parties involved. The Contractor shall send a concrete coordination
conference agenda to all attendees 20 days prior to a mutually agreed upon date for the
conference.
B. As a minimum the agenda shall include:
1.
Concrete Materials and Mix Designs
2.
Inspection Responsibilities
3.
Concrete Sampling and Testing Specification Requirements
4.
Cylinder Storage and Transportation
8/15/2025
03 30 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
Acceptance/Rejection Responsibility and Authority for Fresh Concrete
6.
Concrete finishing
7.
Concrete Curing
8.
Test Report Distribution
9.
Miscellaneous Items
C. The Contractor shall require responsible representatives of every party who is
concerned with the concrete work to attend the conference, including but not limited to
the following:
1.
Contractor’s superintendent
2.
Engineer
3.
Owner’s representative (if they chose to attend)
4.
Laboratory retained for trial batching and construction quality control testing for the
concrete.
5.
Any subcontractors involved in placing, finishing, and curing of concrete.
6.
Concrete supplier
7.
Concrete pumping subcontractor (if pumping is being proposed)
D. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed, and printed by the Contractor and
distributed to all attendees and any other concerned parties within five days of the
meeting.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
NSF/ANSI STANDARD 61 CERTIFIED CONCRETE
A. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 certified concrete is required only where the concrete is
uncoated and in contact with potable water, the volume of water is less than 350,000
gallons, and the ratio of the concrete surface area in contact with potable water to the
volume of water exceeds 0.8 square inches per liter for static water conditions or 0.08
square inches per liter for flowing water conditions. The following structures and utilities
require this certification:
1.
Rapid Mix Chamber
8/15/2025
03 30 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
Sedimentation Basins
3.
Flocculation Basins
B. Potable water is water at the start of flash mixing in drinking water treatment plants, and
at all locations downstream of flash mixing in the water treatment, storage, and
distribution system. Concrete surface area in contact with potable water shall include
submerged surfaces and surfaces above the water where water can condense and drip
back into the water.
C. Where NSF/ANSI certified concrete is required by the paragraphs above, certification of
compliance with NSF/ANSI Standard 61 shall be included with the concrete mix design
submittal(s) and shall be provided by either one of the following two options:
1. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 certified testing of concrete aggregates, hydraulic
cement, and supplemental cementitious materials shall be provided individually
for each constituent showing that each constituent complies with NSF/ANSI
Standard 61
2. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 testing of concrete cylinders formed from the trial batch
concrete containing all the proposed constituents of the concrete shall be
provided showing that the concrete mix complies with NSF/ANSI Standard 61.
D. Regardless of whether NSF/ANSI Standard 61 certified concrete is required by the
paragraphs above, all admixtures used in concrete where the concrete is uncoated and
in contact with potable water shall be individually tested and confirm to follow NSF/ANSI
Standard 61.
2.02
HYDRAULIC CEMENT
A. Portland Cement
1.
Portland Cement shall be Type II conforming to ASTM C150. Type I cement may
be used provided either fly ash or slag cement is also included in the mix in
accordance with Articles 2.03 or 2.04, respectively.
2.
The proposed Portland Cement shall not contain more than 8% tricalcium
aluminate and more than 12% tetracalcium aluminoferrite.
3.
Portland Cement shall also meet performance requirements of ASTM C1157.
B. Blended Cement
8/15/2025
03 30 00-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Blended cements shall be Type IP (Portland Fly Ash Cement), Type IS (Portland
Slag Cement), or Type IL (Portland Limestone Cement) conforming to ASTM
C595.
2.
Type IP cement shall be an inter-ground blend of Portland Cement and fly ash in
which the fly ash constituent is between 15% and 25% of the weight of the total
blend.
3.
Type IS cement shall be an inter-ground blend of Portland Cement and slag
cement in which the slag cement constituent is between 30% and 40% of the
weight of the total blend.
4.
Type IL cement shall be an inter-ground blend of Portland Cement and limestone
in which the limestone constituent is between 5% and 15% of the weight of the
total blend.
5.
Fly ash, slag cement, and limestone used in the production of blended cements
shall meet the requirements of Articles 2.03, 2.04, and 2.05 respectively.
6.
Cements meeting ASTM C1157 shall not be used in manufacture of blended
cements.
7.
Blended cement shall meet the Physical Requirements of Tables 2 and 3 of ASTM
C595 including the requirements for high sulfate resistance in Table 3 as tested
per ASTM C1012.
C. Different types of cement shall not be mixed, nor shall they be used alternately except
when authorized in writing by the Engineer. For Type IP, Type IS or Type I/II cement,
different brands of cement or the same brand from different mills may be used
alternately. For Type IL cement, use of a different cement brand or same brand from a
different mill requires resubmittal of the mix design with current mill test report for review.
A resubmittal will be required if different cements are proposed during the Project.
D. Cement shall be stored in a suitable weather-tight building to prevent deterioration or
contamination. Cement which has become caked, partially hydrated, or otherwise
damaged will be rejected.
2.03
FLY ASH
A. Fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C618 for Class F, except that the loss on
ignition shall not exceed 4%. Fly ash shall also meet the optional physical requirements
for uniformity as shown in Table 3 of ASTM C618. Fly ash shall be considered as a
supplemental cementitious material.
B. For fly ash to be used in the production of Type IP cement, the Pozzolan Activity Index
shall be greater than 75% as specified in Table 3 of ASTM C595.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.08 are used in the concrete mix, the
fly ash constituent shall be as needed to satisfy the concrete alkali loading requirements
stipulated in Article 2.06. The percentage of fly ash shall also be set to meet the mean
mortar bar expansion requirements in provisions of Article 2.08.G.2. Where fly ash is
used, the minimum fly ash content shall be 15%.
D. For Type A1 concrete as required for use in environmental concrete structures, i.e.,
process structures or fluid containing structures, inclusion of fly ash or slag cement in the
concrete mix, is mandatory.
E. Additional fly ash shall not be included in concrete mixed with Type IS or IP cement.
2.04
SLAG CEMENT
A. Slag cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C989 including tests for effectiveness
of slag in preventing excessive expansion due to alkali-aggregate reactivity as described
in Appendix X-3 of ASTM C989.
B. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.08 are used in concrete mix, the slag
cement constituent shall be as needed to satisfy the concrete alkali loading requirements
stipulated in Article 2.06. The percentage of slag cement shall also be set to meet the
mean mortar bar expansion requirements in provisions of Article 2.08.G.2. Where Slag
Cement is used, the minimum Slag Cement content shall be 30%, and the maximum
Slag Cement content shall be 40%.
C. For Type A1 concrete as required for use in environmental concrete structures, i.e.,
process structures or fluid containing structures, inclusion of fly ash or slag cement in the
concrete mix, is mandatory.
D. Additional slag cement shall not be included in concrete mixed with Type IS or IP
cement.
2.05
PORTLAND LIMESTONE CEMENT (TYPE IL)
A. Portland Limestone Cement (Type IL) cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM
C595.
B. Limestone used for blended cement Type IL shall be naturally occurring and meet the
requirements of ASTM C33.
C. Fly ash or slag cement shall be used with Type IL cement to meet requirements for
durability, ASR resistance, sulfate resistance, and use for environmental structures, as
specified herein.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.06
CONCRETE ALKALI LOADING
A. All concrete mixes containing potentially reactive aggregates shall have a maximum
alkali loading of the concrete of 3.0 pounds per cubic yard.
B. The alkali loading of concrete is the Portland Cement equivalent alkali content multiplied
by the Portland Cement content of the mix in pounds per cubic yard divided by 100. The
Portland Cement equivalent alkali content shall be included in the certified chemical
analysis of the Portland Cement.
C. Means of evaluating alkali loading of concrete and proportioning constituents of concrete
to minimize alkali loading of content shall also conform to the guidelines of ASTM
C1778.
2.07
WATER
A. Water used for mixing concrete shall be clear, potable, and free from deleterious
substances such as objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts, and
other impurities.
B. Water shall not contain more than 100 PPM chloride.
C. Water shall not contain more than 500 PPM dissolved solids.
D. Water shall have a pH in the range of 4.5 to 8.5.
E. Water shall meet requirements of ASTM C1602.
2.08
AGGREGATES
A. All aggregates used in normal weight concrete shall conform to ASTM C33.
B. Fine Aggregate (Sand) in the various concrete mixes shall consist of natural or
manufactured siliceous sand, clean and free from deleterious substances, and graded
within the limits of ASTM C33.
C. Coarse aggregates shall consist of hard, clean, durable gravel, crushed gravel, or
crushed rock. Coarse aggregate shall be size #57 or #67 as graded within the limits
given in ASTM C33 unless otherwise specified.
D. For Class A4 and A7 concrete, coarse aggregate shall be Size #8 in accordance with
ASTM C33.
E. Aggregates shall be tested for gradation by sieve analysis tests in conformance with
ASTM C136.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
F. Aggregates shall be tested for soundness in accordance with ASTM C88. The loss
resulting after five cycles shall not exceed 10 percent for fine or coarse aggregate when
using either magnesium sulfate or sodium sulfate.
G. All aggregates shall be evaluated in accordance with ASTM C1778 to determine
potential reactivity. All aggregates shall be considered reactive unless they meet the
requirements below for non-reactive aggregates. Aggregates with a lithology like
sources in the same region found to be reactive in service shall be considered reactive
regardless of the results of the tests above.
1.
Non-reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements:
a.
A petrographic analysis in accordance with ASTM C295 shall be performed
to identify the constituents of the fine and coarse aggregate. Non-reactive
aggregates shall meet the following limitations:
1)
Optically strained, micro-fractured, or microcrystalline quartz,
5.0%, maximum.
2)
Chert or chalcedony, 3.0%, maximum.
3)
Tridymite or cristobalite, 1.0%, maximum.
4)
Opal, 0.5%, maximum.
5)
Natural volcanic glass in volcanic rocks, 3.0%, maximum.
2.
Concrete mixed with reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements:
a.
If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C1778 and fly
ash or slag cement is included in proposed concrete mix design, proposed
concrete mix including proposed aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM
C1567. Mean mortar bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%.
Tests shall be made using exact proportion of all materials proposed for use
on the job in design mix submitted.
b.
If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C1778 and a
straight cement mix without fly ash or slag cement is proposed for concrete
mix design, aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM C1260. Mean mortar
bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%.
c.
If the proposed aggregates are deemed potentially reactive, the concrete mix
shall be evaluated and confirmed to meet the requirements for concrete
alkali loading as stipulated in Article 2.06.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
H. Contractor shall submit a new trial mix to the Engineer for approval whenever a different
aggregate or gradation is proposed.
2.09
ADMIXTURES
A. Admixtures containing intentionally added chlorides shall not be used.
B. Air entraining admixture, if used, shall conform to ASTM C260. The admixture proposed
shall be selected in advance so that adequate samples may be collected, and the
required tests made. Air content of concrete, when placed, shall be within the ranges
given in the concrete mix design.
C. The following admixtures are required or used for water reduction, slump increase,
and/or adjustment of initial set, and enhancing durability. Admixtures permitted shall
confirm to the requirements of ASTM C494. Admixtures shall be non-toxic after 30 days
and shall be compatible with and made by the same manufacturer as the air-entraining
admixtures.
1.
Water reducing admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A and shall contain
no more than 0.05% chloride ions. Acceptable products are “Eucon Series” by the
Euclid Chemical Company, “Master Pozzolith Series or Master Polyheed Series”
by Master Builders Solutions, and “Plastocrete Series” by Sika Corporation.
2.
High range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C494, Type F or G. The high
range water reducer shall be added to the concrete at the batch plant and may be
used in conjunction with a water reducing admixture. The high range water reducer
shall be accurately measured, and pressure injected into the mixer as a single
dose by an experienced technician. A standby system shall be provided and tested
prior to each day’s operation of the job site system. Concrete shall be mixed at
mixing speed for a minimum of 100 mixer revolutions after the addition of the high
range water reducer. Acceptable products are “Eucon 37” or Plastol 5000 by the
Euclid Chemical Company, “Master Rheobuild 1000 or Master Glenium Series” by
Master Builders Solutions, and “Daracem 100 or Advaflow Series” by W.R. Grace.
3.
A non-chloride, non-corrosive accelerating admixture may be used where
specifically approved by the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM
C494, Type C or E. The admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-
corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory (of at least a year’s
duration) using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that
using electrical potential measures. Acceptable products are “MasterSet AC 534 or
MasterSet FP 20” by Master Builders Solutions, “Accelguard 80/90 or NCA” by the
Euclid Chemical Company and “Daraset” by W.R. Grace.
4.
A retarding admixture may be used where specifically approved by the Engineer.
The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type B or D. Acceptable products
are “Eucon NR or Eucon Retarder 100” by the Euclid Chemical Company,
8/15/2025
03 30 00-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
“MasterSet R Series or MasterSet DELVO Series” by Master Builders Solutions,
and “SikaTard®-440” by Sika Corporation.
5.
Workability Retaining Admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type S. The
admixture shall retain concrete workability without affecting time of setting or early-
age strength development. Acceptable products are “MasterSure Z 60” by Master
Builders Solutions, ViscoFlow-2020 by Sika Corporation, PLASTOL AMP-X3 by
Euclid Chemical Company, or equal.
6.
A crystalline permeability reducing admixture shall be used where specifically
indicated on the Drawings or required herein. The admixture shall conform to
ASTM C494, Type S. The admixture shall be of the crystalline type that chemically
controls and permanently establishes a non-soluble crystalline structure
throughout the capillary voids and cracks within the concrete. The crystalline
structure shall assist in sealing the concrete to minimize both infiltration and
exfiltration of liquids from any direction. The admixture shall be capable of sealing
hairline cracks and resisting hydrostatic pressure. Acceptable products are “Xypex
Admix C-500 NF” by Xypex Chemical Corporation, “MasterLife® 300 Series” by
Master Builders Solutions, and “Krystol Internal Membrane (KIM)” by Kryton
International Inc. Submit certified letter from manufacturer of crystalline admixture
stating required dosage rate for job specific concrete mix. Concrete truck ticket
shall confirm crystalline admixture was included in concrete being placed.
7.
A shrinkage reducing admixture shall be used where specifically indicated on the
Drawing or required herein. The admixture shall confirm to ASTM C494, Type S.
Acceptable products include MasterLife SRA 035 by Master Builders, ECLIPSE
4500 by GCP Applied Technologies, Eucon SRA-XT by Euclid Chemical
Company, SikaControl-75 by Sika Corporation, or equal.
D. Admixtures containing calcium chloride, thiocyanate or more than 0.05 percent chloride
ions are not permitted. The addition of admixtures to prevent freezing is not permitted.
E. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data including the chloride ion content of
each admixture and certification from the admixture manufacturer that all admixtures
utilized in the design mix are compatible with one another and properly proportioned
prior to mix design review.
2.10
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. The proportions of cement, aggregates, admixtures, and water used in the concrete
mixes shall be based on laboratory trial mixes in conformance with ACI 301. Trial mixes
shall also conform to Article 3.01 of this Specification. Trial mix data used as the basis
for the proposed concrete mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer along with the
proposed mix.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-14
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Structural concrete shall conform to the following requirements. Cementitious materials
refer to the total combined weight of all cement, fly ash, and slag cement contained in
the mix.
1.
Compressive Strength (28-Day)
Concrete Class A1, A2, A3, A4
4,500 psi (min.), 6,500 psi (max.)
Concrete Class B
3,000 psi (min.), 5,000 psi (max.)
2.
Water/cementitious materials ratio, by weight
Maximum
Minimum
Concrete Class A1, A2, A3, A4
0.42
0.39
Concrete Class B
0.50
0.39
3.
Slump range
a.
4" nominal unless high range water reducing admixture is used.
b.
10” max if high range water reducing admixture is used.
4.
Air Content
Concrete Class A1, A2, A4
3% ±1.5% (non-air -
entrained)
Concrete Class A3, B
3% Max (non-air-entrained)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
TRIAL MIXES
A. Trial mixes shall be used to confirm the quality of a proposed concrete mix in
accordance with ACI 301. An independent qualified testing laboratory designated and
retained by the Contractor shall test a trial batch of each of the preliminary concrete
mixes submitted by the Contractor. The trial batches shall be prepared using the
aggregates, cement, supplementary cementitious materials, and admixtures proposed
for the project. The trial batch materials shall be of a quantity such that the testing
laboratory can obtain enough samples to satisfy requirements stated below. Tests on
individual materials stated in PRODUCTS should already be performed before any trial
mix is done. The cost of laboratory trial batch tests for each specified concrete mix will
be borne by the Contractor and the Contractor shall furnish and deliver the materials to
the testing laboratory at no cost to the Owner.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-15
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. The independent testing laboratory shall prepare a minimum of fifteen (15) standard test
cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31 in addition to conducting slump (ASTM C143),
air content (ASTM C231) and density (ASTM C138) tests. Compressive strength test on
the cylinders shall subsequently be performed by the same laboratory in accordance
with ASTM C39 as follows: Test 3 cylinders at age 7 days; test 3 cylinders at age 21
days; test 3 cylinders at age 28 days and test 3 cylinders at 56 days. The cylinders shall
be carefully identified as "Trial Mix, Contract No. “. If the average 28-day compressive
strength of the trial mix is less than that specified, or if any single cylinder falls below the
required strength by more than 500 psi, the mix shall be corrected, another trial batch
prepared, test cylinders taken, and new tests performed as before. Any such additional
trial batch testing required shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
Adjustments to the mix shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not
be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor.
3.02
FIELD EXPERIENCE RECORDS
A. When field experience records are provided in lieu of trial mixes for proposed concrete
mixes, field experience records shall meet the following criteria:
1.
Field experience records shall have been obtained within the past 24 months from
project Notice to Proceed and shall have occurred over a duration of no less than
45 calendar days.
2.
Field experience records shall be based on data from a single group of at least 15
consecutive compressive strength tests or two groups of consecutive compressive
strength tests totaling at least 30 tests with neither of the two groups consisting of
fewer than 10 tests.
3.
Concrete for field experience records shall have the same mix proportions and
properties as the proposed concrete mix, including compressive strength and air
content within a range of 4.5% to 7.5%.
4.
Concrete for field experience records shall have identical material sources as the
proposed concrete mix. These materials shall include cement, fly ash, slag
cement, coarse aggregates, fine aggregates, and admixtures.
5.
If all criteria for field experience records cannot be met, the contractor shall
perform trial mixes for the proposed concrete mixes.
3.03
SHRINKAGE TESTS
A. Concurrent with the trial batch requirements stated in Article 3.01, the testing laboratory
shall perform drying shrinkage tests for the trial batches as specified herein. Shrinkage
testing is only required for concrete to be used for environmental concrete structures
(Class A1).
8/15/2025
03 30 00-16
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Fabricate, cure, dry, and measure specimens in accordance with ASTM C157 modified
as follows:
1.
Remove specimens from molds at an age of 23 hours ± 1 hour after trial batching.
2.
Place specimens immediately in water at 70 oF ± 3 oF for at least 30 minutes.
3.
Measure within 30 minutes thereafter to determine original length, then submerge
in saturated lime water at 73 oF ± 3 oF.
4.
At age seven days, measure to determine expansion, expressed as a percentage
of original length. This length at age seven days shall be the base length for drying
shrinkage calculations (zero days’ drying age).
5.
Store specimens immediately in a humidity-controlled room maintained at
73 oF ± 3 oF and 50 percent ± 4 percent relative humidity for the remainder of the
test.
6.
Make and report separately measurements to determine shrinkage expressed as
base length percentage for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist
curing.
C. Compute the drying shrinkage deformation for each specimen as the difference between
the base length (at zero days’ drying age) and the length after drying at each test age.
Compute the average drying shrinkage deformation for the specimens to the nearest
0.0001 inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage for any specimen departs from the
average test age for that test by more than 0.0004 inch, disregard the results obtained
from that specimen. Report results from the shrinkage test to the nearest 0.001 percent
of shrinkage. Take compression test specimens in each case from the same concrete
used for preparing drying shrinkage specimens. These tests shall be considered part of
the normal compression tests for the project.
D. The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial
batch, as measured at 21-day drying age or at 28-day drying age, shall be 0.036 or
0.042 percent, respectively. Use a mix design for construction that has first met the trial
batch shrinkage requirements.
E. If the trial batch specimens do not meet both the strength and shrinkage requirements,
revise the mix designs and/or materials and retest.
3.04
PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. All concrete shall be machine mixed. Hand mixing of concrete will not be permitted. The
Contractor may supply concrete from a ready-mix concrete plant or from a site mixed
plant. In selecting the source for concrete production, the Contractor shall carefully
consider its capability for providing quality concrete at a rate commensurate with the
8/15/2025
03 30 00-17
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
requirements of the placements so that well bonded, homogenous concrete, free of cold
joints, is assured.
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete
1.
At the Contractor's option, ready-mixed concrete may be used meeting the
requirements for materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as specified
herein and in accordance with ASTM C94.
2.
Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the
number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter
shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab.
The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds.
3.
Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 100
revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the
manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials
including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution
counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing.
4.
Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the
mixed batch, as discharged, is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to
consistency, mix and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4
points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than one inch
when the specified slump is 3 inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2 inches
when the specified slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the
work unless the causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is
verified by additional slump tests. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as
water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of
rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit and clearance of the drum, shall
be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted.
5.
Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site for the work and discharge
shall be completed within the time requirements stated in Article 3.05 of this
Section.
6.
Every concrete delivery shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket containing at
least the following information:
a.
Date and truck number
b.
Ticket number
c.
Mix designation of concrete
8/15/2025
03 30 00-18
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Cubic yards of concrete
e.
Cement brand, type, and weight in pounds
f.
Weight in pounds of fine aggregate (sand)
g.
Weight in pounds of coarse aggregate (stone)
h.
Air entraining agent, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces
i.
Other admixtures, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces
j.
Water, in gallons, stored in attached tank
k.
Water, in gallons, maximum that can be added without exceeding design
water/cementitious materials ratio
l.
Water, in gallons, used (by truck driver)
m.
Time of loading
n.
Time of delivery to job (by truck driver)
7.
Any truck delivering concrete to the job site, which is not accompanied by a
delivery ticket showing the above information will be rejected and such truck shall
immediately depart from the job site.
8.
The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not
be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed
concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-
mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to inspection at the
batching plant by the Engineer.
C. Site Mixed Concrete
1.
Site Mixed Concrete shall only be used where specifically approved by the
Engineer.
2.
Scales for weighing concrete ingredients shall be accurate when in use within ±0.4
percent of their total capacities. Standard test weights shall be available to permit
checking scale accuracy.
3.
Operation of batching equipment shall be such that the concrete ingredients are
consistently measured within the following tolerances:
a.
Cement, fly ash, or slag cement
± 1 percent
8/15/2025
03 30 00-19
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
b.
Water
± 1 percent
c.
Aggregates
± 2 percent
d.
Admixtures
± 3 percent
4.
Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in
advance of the cement and aggregates. Water shall continue for a period which
may extend to the end of the first 25 percent of the specified mixing time. Controls
shall be provided to prevent batched ingredients from entering the mixer before the
previous batch has been completely discharged.
5.
The concrete shall be mixed in a batch mixer capable of thoroughly combining the
aggregates, cement, and water into a uniform mass within the specified mixing
time, and of discharging the concrete without harmful segregation. The mixer shall
bear a manufacturer's rating plate indicating the rate capacity and the
recommended revolutions per minute and shall be operated in accordance
therewith.
6.
Mixers with a rated capacity of one cubic yard or larger shall conform to the
requirements of the Plant Mixer Manufacturers' Division of the Concrete Plant
Manufacturers' Bureau.
7.
Except as provided below, batches of one cubic yard or less shall be mixed for not
less than one minute. The mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each
cubic yard or fraction thereof of additional capacity.
8.
Shorter mixing time may be permitted provided performance tests made in
accordance with of ASTM C94 indicate that the time is sufficient to produce
uniform concrete.
9.
Controls shall be provided to ensure that the batch cannot be discharged until the
required mixing time has elapsed. At least three-quarters of the required mixing
time shall take place after the last of the mixing water has been added.
10.
The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations that will interfere with
mixing action. Mixer blades shall be replaced when they have lost 10 percent of
their original height.
11.
Air-entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures shall be charged into the
mixer as solutions and shall be measured by means of an approved mechanical
dispensing device. The liquid shall be considered a part of the mixing water.
Admixtures that cannot be added in solution may be weighed or may be measured
by volume if recommended by the manufacturer.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-20
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
12.
If two or more admixtures are used in the concrete, they shall be added separately
to avoid possible interaction that might interfere with the efficiency of either
admixture or adversely affect the concrete.
13.
Addition of retarding admixtures shall be completed within one minute after
addition of water to the cement has been completed, or prior to the beginning of
the last three-quarters of the required mixing, whichever occurs first. Retarding
admixtures shall not be used unless approved by the Engineer.
14.
Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use and within the time
and mixing requirements of ASTM C94.
3.05
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. No concrete shall be placed prior to approval of the concrete mix design. Concrete
placement shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 304.
B. Prior to concrete placement, all reinforcement shall be securely and properly fastened in
its correct position. Formwork shall be clean, oiled and form ties at construction joints
shall be retightened. All bucks, sleeves, castings, hangers, pipe, conduits, bolts,
anchors, wire, and any other fixtures required to be embedded therein shall be in place.
Forms for openings to be left in the concrete shall be in place and anchored by the
Contractor. All loose debris in bottoms of forms or in keyways shall be removed and all
debris, water, snow, ice, and foreign matter shall be removed from the space to be
occupied by the concrete. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of
placement, allowing sufficient time for a concurrent inspection and for any corrective
measures required.
C. On horizontal joints where concrete is to be placed on hardened concrete, flowing
concrete containing a high range water reducing admixture shall be placed with a slump
not less than 8 inches for the initial placement at the base of the wall. Concrete or
cement grout shall meet all strength and service requirements specified herein for
applicable class of concrete. This concrete shall be worked well into the irregularities of
the hard surface.
D. All concrete shall be placed during the daylight hours except with the consent of the
Engineer. If special permission is obtained to carry on work during the night, adequate
lighting must be provided.
E. When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, as
indicated by the Specifications, water may be added to bring the concrete within the
specified slump range provided the design water-cementitious materials ratio is not
exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of
the total mixing required. Water may be added only to full trucks. On-site tempering shall
not relieve the Contractor from furnishing a concrete mix meeting all specified
requirements.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-21
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
F. Concrete shall be conveyed as rapidly as practical to the point of deposit by methods
which prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. The concrete shall be deposited
so that additional handling will be unnecessary. Discharge of the concrete to its point of
deposit shall be completed within 90 minutes after the addition of the cement to the
aggregates unless workability-retaining admixtures are included and approved by the
Engineer. In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the
concrete, the time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregates and
discharge shall not exceed the requirements stated in Article 3.11 of this Section.
G. Where concrete is conveyed to position by chutes, a continuous flow in the chute shall
be maintained. The angle and discharge arrangement of the chute shall be such to
prevent segregation of the concrete ingredients. The delivery end of the chute shall be
as close as possible to the point of deposit and in no case shall the free pour from the
delivery end of the chute exceed five feet, unless approved otherwise.
H. Special care must be exercised to prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with
concrete, and any such splashes or accumulations of hardened or partially hardened
concrete on the forms or reinforcement above the general level of the concrete already
in place must be removed before the work proceeds.
I.
Placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressure caused by the wet concrete shall
not exceed that used in the design of the forms.
J.
All concrete for walls shall be placed through openings in the form spaced at frequent
intervals or through tremies (heavy duct canvas, rubber, etc.), equipped with suitable
hopper heads. Tremies shall be of variable lengths so the free fall shall not exceed five
(5) feet, and enough tremies shall be placed in the form to ensure the concrete remains
level.
K. When placing concrete which will be exposed, sufficient illumination shall be provided in
the interior of the forms so the concrete, at places of deposit, is visible from deck and
runways.
L.
Concrete shall be placed to thoroughly embed all reinforcement, inserts, and fixtures.
M. When forms are removed, surfaces shall be even and dense, free from aggregate
pockets or honeycomb. Concrete shall be consolidated using mechanical vibration,
supplemented by forking and spading by hand in the corners and angle of forms and
along form surfaces while the concrete is plastic under the vibratory action.
Consolidation shall conform to ACI 309.
N. Mechanical vibration shall be applied directly to the concrete, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer. The bottom of vibrators used on floor slabs must not be permitted to
ride the form supporting the slab. Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in
freshly placed concrete by a vertical penetration of the vibrator. Vibrators shall not be
used to move concrete laterally within the forms.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-22
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
O. The intensity of vibration shall be sufficient to cause settlement of the concrete into place
and to produce monolithic joining with the preceding layer. Vibration shall be of sufficient
duration to accomplish thorough compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement
and fixtures with a vibrator transmitting not less than 7,500 impulses per minute. Since
the duration of vibration per square foot of surface is dependent on the frequency
(impulses per minute), size of vibrator, and slump of concrete, the length of time must
therefore be determined in the field. Vibration shall not be continued in any one location
to the extent that pools of grout are formed.
P. Care shall be taken to prevent cold joints when placing concrete in any portion of the
work. The concrete placing rate shall ensure that each layer is placed while the previous
layer is soft or plastic, so the two layers can be made monolithic by penetration of the
vibrators. Maximum thickness of concrete layers shall be 18 inches. The surface of the
concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped.
Q. To prevent featheredges, construction joints located at the tops of horizontal lifts near
sloping exposed concrete surfaces shall be inclined near the exposed surface, so the
angle between such inclined surface and the exposed concrete surface will be not less
than 50°.
R. In placing unformed concrete on slopes, the concrete shall be placed ahead of a non-
vibrated slip-form screed extending approximately 2-1/2 feet back from its leading edge.
The method of placement shall provide a uniform finished surface with the deviation from
the straight line less than 1/8 inch in any concrete placement. Concrete ahead of the
slip-form screed shall be consolidated by internal vibrators to ensure complete filling
under the slip-form. Prior to placement of concrete on sloped walls or slabs, the
Contractor shall submit a plan specifically detailing methods and sequence of
placements, proposed concrete screed equipment, location of construction joints and
water stops, and/or any proposed deviations from the stated requirements to the
Engineer for review and approval.
S. Concrete shall not be placed during rains sufficiently heavy or prolonged to prevent
washing of mortar from coarse aggregate on the forward slopes of the placement. Once
placement of concrete has commenced in a block, placement shall not be interrupted by
diverting the placing equipment to other uses.
3.06
PLACING FLOOR SLABS ON GROUND
A. The subgrade for slabs on ground shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform
loadbearing nature. The in-place density of the subgrade soils shall be at least the
minimum required by the specifications. No foundation, slab, or pavement concrete shall
be placed until the depth and character of the foundation soils have been inspected and
approved by the materials testing consultant.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-23
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If the temperature
inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below freezing, the temperature shall
be raised and maintained above 50° long enough to remove all frost from the subgrade.
C. The subgrade shall be moist at the time of concreting. If necessary, the subgrade shall
be dampened with water in advance of concreting, but no free water shall remain
standing on the subgrade nor any muddy or soft spots when the concrete is placed.
D. Thirty-pound felt-paper shall be provided between edges of slabs-on-ground and vertical
and horizontal concrete surfaces, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
E. Contraction joints shall be provided in slabs-on-ground at locations indicated on the
Drawings. Contraction joints shall be installed as per Section 03 15 16 − Joints in
Concrete.
F. Floor slabs shall be screeded level or pitched to drain as indicated on the Drawings.
Finishes shall conform with requirements of Section 03 35 00 − Concrete Finishes.
Interior floor slabs shall be placed with non-air-entrained concrete (Class A3) if a steel
troweled or hardened finish is required.
3.07
PLACING CONCRETE UNDERWATER (CLASS A5 CONCRETE)
A. Placing concrete underwater (tremie concrete) will be permitted only when shown on the
Drawings. Concrete deposited under water shall be carefully placed in a compacted
mass in final position by means of a tremie, a closed bottom dump bucket or other
approved method. Care must be exercised to maintain still water at the point of deposit.
Concrete shall not be placed in running water. Underwater formwork shall be watertight.
The consistency of the concrete shall be regulated to prevent segregation of materials.
The method of depositing concrete shall be regulated such that the concrete enters the
mass of the previously placed concrete from within, displacing water with a minimum
disturbance to the surface of the concrete.
B. Tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less than 10 inches and
constructed in sections having flanged couplings fitted with gaskets. The tremie shall be
supported to permit free movement of the discharge and over the entire top surface of
the work and shall permit rapid lowering when necessary to choke off or retard the flow.
The discharge end shall be sealed, and the tremie tube kept full to the bottom of the
hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the tremie shall be slightly raised, but
not out of the concrete at the bottom, until the batch discharges to the bottom of the
hopper. The flow shall then be stopped by lowering the tremie. The flow shall be
continuous until the placement has been completed.
3.08
PLACING CONCRETE UNDER PRESSURE
A. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure, the
equipment shall have the capacity for the operation. The operation of the pump shall
8/15/2025
03 30 00-24
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
produce a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets. To obtain the least line
resistance, the layout of the pipeline system shall contain minimum bends with no
change in pipe size. If two sizes of pipe must be used, the smaller diameter should be
used at the pump end and the larger at the discharge end. When pumping is completed,
the concrete remaining in the pipelines shall be ejected in such a manner that there will
be no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients.
B. Priming of the concrete pumping equipment shall be with cement grout only. Use of
specialty mix pump primers or pumping aids will not be allowed.
C. No aluminum parts shall be in contact with the concrete during the placing of concrete
under pressure.
D. Prior to placing concrete under pressure, the Contractor shall submit the concrete mix
design together with test results from a material’s testing consultant proving the
proposed mix meets all requirements. In addition, an actual pumping test under field
conditions is required prior to acceptance of the mix. This test requires a duplication of
anticipated site conditions from beginning to end. The batching and truck mixing shall be
the same as will be used during construction, and the pipe and pipe layouts will reflect
the maximum height and distance contemplated. All submissions shall be subject to
approval by the Engineer.
E. If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the Contractor shall
discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using
conventional methods.
F. The pumping equipment must have two cylinders and be designed to operate with one
cylinder only in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the
Contractor may have a standby pump on the site during pumping.
G. The minimum diameter of the hose (conduits) shall be four inches.
H. Pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not functioning properly shall be
replaced.
I.
Concrete samples for quality control in accordance with Article 3.12 will be taken at the
placement (discharge) end of the line.
3.09
ORDER OF PLACING CONCRETE
A. To minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be placed in units as bounded
by construction joints shown on the Drawings and maximum lengths as indicated on
Drawings. Where required on the Drawings and wherever else practical, the placing of
such units shall be done in a strip pattern in accordance with ACI 302.1. A minimum of
72 hours shall pass prior to placing concrete directly adjacent to previously placed
concrete.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-25
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.10
CONCRETE WORK IN COLD WEATHER
A. Cold weather concreting procedures shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.1.
B. The Engineer may prohibit the placing of concrete at any time when air temperature is
40°F. or lower. If concrete work is permitted, the concrete shall have a minimum
temperature, as placed, of 55°F. for placements less than 12" thick, 50°F. for
placements 12" to 36" thick, and 45°F. for placements greater than 36" thick. The
temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed these minimum values by more
than 20°F, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
C. All aggregate and water shall be preheated. Precautions shall be taken to avoid the
possibility of flash set when aggregate or water are heated to a temperature greater than
100°F. to meet concrete temperature requirements. The addition of admixtures to the
concrete to prevent freezing is not permitted. All reinforcement, forms, and concrete
accessories shall be defrosted by an approved method. No concrete shall be placed on
frozen ground.
3.11
CONCRETE WORK IN HOT WEATHER
A. Hot weather concreting procedures shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305.1.
B. When air temperatures exceed 85°F., or when extremely dry or high wind conditions
exist even at lower temperatures, the Contractor and the Contractor’s concrete supplier
shall exercise special and precautionary measures in preparing, delivering, placing,
finishing, curing, and protecting the concrete mix. The Contractor shall consult with the
Engineer regarding such measures prior to each day's placing operation, and the
Engineer reserves the right to modify the proposed measures consistent with the
requirements herein. All necessary materials and equipment shall be in place prior to
each placing operation.
C. Preparatory work at the job site shall include thorough wetting of all forms, reinforcing
steel and, in the case of slab pours on ground or subgrade, spraying the ground surface
on the preceding evening and again just prior to placing. No standing puddles of water
shall be permitted in those areas which are to receive the concrete.
D. The temperature of the concrete mix when placed shall not exceed 95°F.
E. Temperature of mixing water and aggregates shall be carefully controlled and monitored
at the supplier's plant, with haul distance to the job site being considered. Stockpiled
aggregates shall be shaded from the sun and sprinkled intermittently with water. If ice is
used in the mixing water for cooling purposes, the ice must be entirely melted prior to
addition of the water to the dry mix.
F. Delivery schedules shall be carefully considered in advance to ensure concrete is placed
as soon as practical after mixing. For hot weather concrete work (air temperature greater
8/15/2025
03 30 00-26
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
than 85°F), discharge of the concrete to its point of deposit shall be completed within
60 minutes from the time the concrete is batched, unless workability-retaining
admixtures are included and approved by the Engineer.
G. The Contractor shall arrange for an ample work force to be on hand to accomplish
transporting, vibrating, finishing, and covering of the fresh concrete as rapidly as
possible.
3.12
QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Testing of Concrete
1.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer's project representative the on-
site scheduling of the materials testing consultant personnel as required for
concrete testing.
2.
Concrete for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Owner, and the Contractor shall assist the materials testing consultant in obtaining
samples. The Contractor shall dispose of and clean up all excess material.
B. Consistency
1.
The consistency of the concrete will be checked by the materials testing consultant
by standard slump cone tests. The Contractor shall make any necessary
adjustments in the mix as the Engineer and/or the materials testing consultant may
direct and shall upon written order suspend all placing operations in the event the
consistency does not meet the intent of the specifications. No payment shall be
made for any delays, material, or labor costs due to such occurrences.
2.
Slump tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. Slump tests will be
performed as deemed necessary by the materials testing consultant and each time
compressive strength samples are taken.
3.
Concrete with a specified nominal slump shall be placed having a slump within 1”
(higher or lower) of the specified slump. Concrete with a specified maximum slump
shall be placed having a slump less than the specified slump.
C. Density
1.
Samples of freshly mixed concrete shall be tested for density by the materials
testing consultant in accordance with ASTM C138.
2.
Density tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the Engineer and each
time compressive strength samples are taken.
D. Air Content
8/15/2025
03 30 00-27
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Samples of freshly mixed concrete will be tested for entrained air content by the
materials testing consultant in accordance with ASTM C231.
2.
Air content tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the materials testing
consultant and each time compressive strength samples are taken.
3.
In the event test results are outside the limits specified, additional testing shall
occur. Admixture quantity adjustments shall be made immediately upon discovery
of incorrect air entrainment.
E. Compressive Strength
1.
Samples of freshly mixed concrete will be taken by the materials testing consultant
and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C172, C31, and
C39, except as modified herein.
2.
In general, one sampling shall be taken for each placement more than five (5)
cubic yards, with a minimum of one (1) sampling for each day of concrete
placement operations, or for each one hundred (100) cubic yards of concrete, or
for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls, whichever is greater.
If total volume of concrete is such that frequency of testing would provide fewer
than five (5) strength tests for a given concrete class, strength test specimens shall
be made from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from each batch if
fewer than five (5) batches are used.
3.
Each sampling shall consist of at least five (5) 6x12 cylinders or (8) 4x8 cylinders.
Each cylinder shall be identified by a tag, which shall be hooked or wired to the
side of the container. The materials testing consultant will fill out the required
information on the tag, and the Contractor shall satisfy themselves that such
information shown is correct.
4.
The Contractor shall be required to furnish labor to the Owner for assisting in
preparing test cylinders. The Contractor shall provide approved curing boxes for
storage of cylinders on site. The insulated curing box shall be of sufficient size and
strength to contain all the cylinders made in any four consecutive working days
and to protect the specimens from falling over, being jarred, or otherwise disturbed
during the period of initial curing. The box shall be erected, furnished, and
maintained by the Contractor. The box shall be equipped to provide the moisture
conditions and to regulate the temperature necessary to maintain the proper curing
conditions required by ASTM C31. The curing box shall be placed in an area free
from vibration such as pile driving and traffic of all kinds and such that all cylinders
are shielded from direct sunlight and/or radiant heating sources. No concrete
requiring testing shall be delivered to the site until the storage curing box has been
provided. Cylinders shall remain undisturbed in the curing box until ready for
delivery to the testing laboratory, but not less than sixteen hours.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-28
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the temperatures of the curing
box during the initial curing of cylinders with the temperature preserved between
60°F and 80°F as measured by a maximum-minimum thermometer. The
Contractor shall maintain a written record of curing box temperatures for each day
the curing box contains cylinders. Temperature shall be recorded a minimum of
three times a day with one recording at the start of the day and one recording at
the end of the day.
6.
When transported, the cylinders shall not be thrown, dropped, allowed to roll, or be
damaged in any way.
7.
Compression tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C39. For 6x12
cylinders, two test cylinders will be tested at seven days and two at 28 days. For
4x8 cylinders, three test cylinders will be tested at seven days, three at 28 days.
The remaining cylinders will be held to verify test results, if needed.
F. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete
1.
Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete shall be
according to the requirements of ACI 214, ACI 318, and ACI 350.
2.
The strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if the following
conditions are satisfied.
a.
Every arithmetic average of any three consecutive strength tests equals or
exceeds the minimum specified 28-day compressive strength for the mix
(see Article 2.11).
b.
No individual compressive strength test result falls below the minimum
specified strength by more than 500 psi.
3.
If any of the conditions listed above are not met, the mix proportions shall be
corrected for the next concrete placing operation.
4.
If condition 3.12.F.2.b is not met, additional tests in accordance with Article 3.12,
Paragraph H shall be performed.
5.
When a ratio between 7-day and 28-day strengths has been established by these
tests, the 7-day strengths shall subsequently be taken as a preliminary indication
of the 28-day strengths. Should the 7-day test strength from any sampling be more
than 10% below the established minimum strength, the Contractor shall:
a.
Immediately provide additional periods of curing in the affected area from
which the deficient test cylinders were taken.
b.
Maintain or add temporary structural support as required.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-29
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
Correct the mix for the next concrete placement operation, if required to
remedy the situation.
6.
All concrete which fails to meet the ACI requirements, and these specifications is
subject to removal and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner.
G. When non-compliant concrete is identified, test reports shall be sent immediately to the
Engineer for review.
H. Additional Tests
1.
When ordered by the Engineer, additional tests on in-place concrete shall be
provided and paid for by the Contractor.
2.
If the 28-day test cylinders fail to meet the minimum strength requirements as
outlined in Article 3.12, Paragraph F, the Contractor shall have concrete core
specimens obtained and tested from the affected area immediately.
a.
Three cores shall be taken for each sample in which the strength
requirements were not met.
b.
The drilled cores shall be obtained and tested in conformance with
ASTM C42. The tests shall be conducted by a materials testing consultant
approved by the Engineer.
c.
The location from which each core is taken shall be approved by the
Engineer. Each core specimen shall be located, when possible, so its axis is
perpendicular to the concrete surface and not near formed joints or obvious
edges of a unit of deposit.
d.
The core specimens shall be taken, if possible, so no reinforcing steel is
within the confines of the core.
e.
The diameter of core specimens should be at least 3 times the maximum
nominal size of the coarse aggregate used in the concrete but must be at
least 2-inches in diameter.
f.
The length of specimen, when capped, shall be at least twice the diameter of
the specimen.
g.
The core specimens shall be taken to the laboratory and when transported,
shall not be thrown, dropped, allowed to roll, or damaged in any way.
h.
Two (2) copies of test results shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. The
concrete in question will be considered acceptable if the average
compressive strength of a minimum of three test core specimens taken from
8/15/2025
03 30 00-30
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a given area equal or exceed 85% of the specified 28-day strength and if the
lowest core strength is greater than 75% of the specified 28-day strength.
3.
If the concrete placed by the Contractor is suspected of not having proper air
content, the Contractor shall engage a materials testing consultant approved by
the Engineer, to obtain and test samples for air content in accordance with ASTM
C457.
3.13
CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE
A. The Contractor shall protect all concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat,
lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance by the Owner.
Care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or
otherwise damaging the surface. Care shall be exercised to avoid jarring forms or
placing any strain on the ends of projecting reinforcing bars. Any concrete found to be
damaged, or which may have been originally defective, or which becomes defective at
any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed work, or which departs from the
established line or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and
replaced with acceptable concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Areas of honeycomb shall be chipped back to sound concrete and repaired as directed.
C. Concrete formwork blowouts or unacceptable deviations in tolerances for formed
surfaces due to improperly constructed or misaligned formwork shall be repaired as
directed. Bulging or protruding areas, which result from slipping or deflecting forms shall
be ground flush or chipped out and redressed as directed.
D. Areas of concrete in which cracking, spalling, or other signs of deterioration develop
prior to final acceptance shall be removed and replaced or repaired as directed. This
stipulation includes concrete that has experienced cracking due to drying or thermal
shrinkage of the concrete. Structural cracks shall be repaired using an approved epoxy
injection system. Non-structural cracks shall be repaired using an approved hydrophilic
resin pressure injected grout system unless other means of repair are deemed
necessary and approved. All repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to the
Owner.
E. Concrete which fails to meet the strength requirements as outlined in Article 3.12,
Paragraph F, will be analyzed as to its adequacy based upon loading conditions,
resultant stresses, and exposure conditions for the area of concrete in question. If the
concrete in question is found unacceptable based upon this analysis, that portion of the
structure shall be strengthened or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Owner. The method of strengthening or extent of replacement shall be as directed by the
Engineer.
8/15/2025
03 30 00-31
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
03 39 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 03 39 00
CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. Protect all freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and from the weather
elements. The concrete shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively
constant temperature for a period necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper
hardening of the concrete in accordance with the requirements specified herein.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.03
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work
herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All
referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available
at the time of Bid.
1.
ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete
2.
ACI 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
3.
ACI 305.1 – Specification for Hot Weather Concreting
4.
ACI 306.1 – Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting
5.
ACI 308.1 – Specification for Curing Concrete
6.
ASTM C171 – Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
7.
ASTM C309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete
8.
ASTM C1315 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete
8/15/2025
03 39 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
1.
Proposed procedures for protection of concrete under wet weather placement
conditions.
2.
Proposed normal procedures for protection and curing of concrete.
3.
Proposed special procedures for protection and curing of concrete under hot and
cold weather conditions.
4.
Proposed method of measuring concrete surface temperature changes.
5.
Manufacturer's literature and material certification for proposed curing compounds.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING CURING COMPOUND
A. Clear curing and sealing compound shall be a clear styrene acrylate type complying with
ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A with a minimum solids content of 30%. Moisture loss
shall not be greater than 0.40 kg/m2 when applied at manufacturer’s recommended
volume for square feet of area. Manufacturer’s certification is required. Acceptable
products are Super Diamond Clear VOX by the Euclid Chemical Company.
B. Where specifically approved by Engineer, on slabs to receive subsequent applied
finishes, compound shall conform to ASTM C 309. Acceptable products are “Kurez DR
VOX” or “Kurez W VOX” by the Euclid Chemical Company. Install in strict accordance
with manufacturer’s requirements.
2.02
EVAPORATION REDUCER
A. Evaporation reducer shall be "MasterKure ER 50” by Master Builders Solutions, or
"Euco-Bar" by Euclid Chemical Company.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
PROTECTION AND CURING
A. All freshly placed concrete shall be protected from the elements, flowing water and from
defacement of any nature during construction operations.
B. As soon as the concrete has been placed and horizontal top surfaces have received
their required finish, provisions shall be made for maintaining the concrete in a moist
8/15/2025
03 39 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
condition for at least a 7-day period thereafter, except for high early strength concrete,
for which the period shall be at least the first three days after placement. Horizontal
surfaces shall be kept covered, and intermittent, and localized drying will not be
permitted.
C. Walls that will be exposed on one side with either fluid or earth backfill on the opposite
side shall be continuously wet cured for a minimum of seven days. Use of a curing
compound will not be acceptable for applications of this type.
D. The Contractor shall use one of the following methods to ensure that the concrete
remains in a moist condition for the minimum period stated above.
1.
Ponding or continuous fogging or sprinkling.
2.
Application of mats or fabric kept continuously wet.
3.
Continuous application of steam (under 150°F).
4.
Application of sheet materials conforming to ASTM C171.
5.
If approved by the Engineer, application of a curing compound in accordance with
Article 3.04.
E. The Contractor shall keep absorbent wood forms wet until they are removed. After form
removal, the concrete shall be cured by one of the methods in paragraph D.
F. Any of the curing procedures used in Paragraph 3.01-D may be replaced by one of the
other curing procedures listed in Paragraph 3.01-D after the concrete is one-day old.
However, the concrete surface shall not be permitted to become dry at any time.
3.02
CURING CONCRETE UNDER COLD WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Suitable means shall be provided for a minimum of 72 hours after placing concrete to
maintain it at or above the minimum as placed temperatures specified in Section 03 30
00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete, for concrete work in cold weather. During the 72-hour
period, the concrete surface shall not be exposed to air more than 20°F above the
minimum as placed temperatures.
B. Stripping time for forms and supports shall be increased as necessary to allow for
retardation in concrete strength caused by colder temperatures. This retardation is
magnified when using concrete made with blended cements or containing fly ash or slag
cement. Therefore, curing times and stripping times shall be further increased as
necessary when using these types of concrete.
C. The methods of protecting the concrete shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be
such as will prevent local drying. Equipment and materials approved for this purpose
8/15/2025
03 39 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
shall be on the site in sufficient quantity before the work begins. The Contractor shall
assist the Engineer by providing holes in the forms and the concrete in which
thermometers can be placed to determine the adequacy of heating and protection. All
such thermometers shall be furnished by the Contractor in quantity and type which the
Engineer directs.
D. Curing procedures during cold weather conditions shall conform to the requirements of
ACI 306.
3.03
CURING CONCRETE UNDER HOT WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. When air temperatures exceed 85°F, the Contractor shall take extra care in placing and
finishing techniques to avoid formation of cold joints and plastic shrinkage cracking. If
ordered by the Engineer, temporary sunshades and/or windbreakers shall be erected to
guard against such developments, including generous use of wet burlap coverings and
fog sprays to prevent drying out of the exposed concrete surfaces.
B. Immediately after screeding, horizontal surfaces shall receive an application of
evaporation reducer. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish
work shall begin as soon as the mix has stiffened sufficiently to support the workmen.
C. Curing and protection of the concrete shall begin immediately after completion of the
finishing operation. Continuous moist-curing consisting of method 1 or 2 listed in
paragraph 3.01D is mandatory for at least the first 24 hours. Method 2 may be used only
if the finished surface is not marred or blemished during contact with the coverings.
D. At the end of the initial 24-hour period, curing and protection of the concrete shall
continue for at least six (6) additional days using one of the methods listed in paragraph
3.01D.
E. Curing procedures during hot weather conditions shall conform to the requirements of
ACI 305.
3.04
USE OF CURING COMPOUND
A. Curing compound shall be used only where specifically approved by the Engineer.
Curing compound shall never be used for curing exposed walls with fluid or earth backfill
on the opposite side. A continuous wet cure for a minimum of seven days is required for
these applications. Curing compound shall not be used on surfaces exposed to water in
potable water storage tanks and treatment plants unless curing compound is certified in
accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61.
B. When permitted, the curing compound shall maintain the concrete in a moist condition
for the required time, and the subsequent appearance of the concrete surface shall not
be affected.
8/15/2025
03 39 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. The compound shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations after water sheen has disappeared from the concrete surface and
after finishing operations. Coverage rates for the curing and sealing compound shall be
in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements for the specific type of finish
required. For rough surfaces, apply in two directions at right angles to each other.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
26 05 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 05 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment, and perform all
work and services necessary for, or incidental to, the furnishing and installation of all
electrical work as shown on the Drawings, and as specified in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract Documents and completely coordinate with the work of other
trades involved in the general construction. Although such work is not specifically shown
or specified, all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation shall be
furnished and installed as part of this work. The Contractor shall obtain approved Shop
Drawings showing wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, roughing-in, and hook-up
details for all equipment and comply therewith. All electrical work shall be complete and
left in operating condition in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and the
Specifications for the electrical work.
B. Reference Section 40 61 13 − Process Control System General Provisions and General
Requirements in Division 01 for scope of work details as they relate to the Division 40
C. The electrical scope of work for this project primarily includes, but is not limited to, the
following:
1.
Demolition of electrical equipment and raceway systems as shown on the
Drawings.
2.
Modifications to existing electrical equipment as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
3.
Furnish and install new medium voltage less-flammable liquid-filled, pad-mount
style transformers.
4.
Furnish and install low-voltage motor control equipment, including new MCC-
mounted VFDs in existing motor control centers, new MCC-mounted VFDs in new
motor control centers, and wall-mounted VFDs. Modify existing MCCs as required
to accommodate new equipment. Provide harmonic mitigation as required to
comply with IEEE 519.
5.
Furnish and install power panelboards, lighting panelboards, 600 V dry-type
transformers, and other low-voltage electrical power distribution equipment.
8/15/2025
26 05 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
6.
Furnish and install all aboveground raceway systems, including conduit, fittings,
boxes, supports, and other pertinent components.
7.
Furnish and install all underground raceway systems, including conduit, fittings,
manholes, handholes and other pertinent components.
8.
Furnish and install all low and medium voltage wire and cable resulting in a
complete and operable electrical system.
9.
Furnish and install new lighting systems and wiring devices.
10.
Furnish and install grounding systems as specified and indicated on the Drawings.
11.
For each new building, provide a lightning protection system if required based on a
lightning risk assessment performed in accordance with NFPA 780. The
Contractor shall retain a qualified subcontractor to perform the assessment. If the
assessment indicates that a system is warranted, furnish and install a complete
lightning protection system in compliance with NFPA 780.
12.
Furnish and install a fire alarm system in accordance with Section 28 46 20. The
Contractor shall retain a qualified fire alarm subcontractor to perform all design,
installation, and commissioning work in compliance with applicable local and
national codes and subject to approval by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
13.
Other electrical work as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
D. All material and equipment shall be the product of an established, reputable, and
approved manufacturer; shall be new and of first-class construction; shall be designed
and guaranteed to perform the service required; and shall bear a UL Listing or UL
Recognition mark, where such approval is available for the product of the listed
manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
E. When a specified or indicated item has been superseded or is no longer available, the
manufacturer's latest equivalent type or model of material or equipment as approved by
the Engineer shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Where the Contractor's selection of equipment of specified manufacturers or additionally
approved manufacturers requires changes or additions to the system design, the
Contractor shall be responsible for all engineering, coordination, and construction
changes required to accommodate the substituted equipment, subject to approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor's bid shall include all costs for all work of the Contract for all
trades made necessary by such changes, additions or modifications or resulting from
any approved substitution.
8/15/2025
26 05 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
G. Furnish and install all stands, racks, brackets, supports, and similar equipment required
to properly serve the equipment which is furnished under this Contract, or equipment
otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
H. All electrical components and systems (e.g., conduit and other raceways, freestanding
equipment, etc.) and their anchorage,, including electrical equipment foundations, shall
be designed to resist the controlling load combination “per ASCE 7” of gravity loads,
operational forces, wind forces, seismic forces, thermal loads, and any other applicable
forces required in accordance with the governing Building Code and Section 01 73 23 –
Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components. Seismic design of electrical
nonstructural components shall be in accordance with ASCE 7 Chapter 13 unless the
nonstructural component meets the criteria to be exempt.
1.02
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
A. The Drawings show the general location of feeders, transformers, equipment, devices,
conduits, and circuit arrangements. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not
possible to indicate all the details involved. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting the work and shall arrange such work
accordingly. The Contractor shall furnish and install such fittings, junction boxes, and
accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. The Contractor shall refer to
the entire Drawing set to verify openings, special surfaces, and the location of other
equipment, or other special equipment prior to roughing-in for panels, switches, and
other outlets. The Contractor shall verify all equipment dimensions against site
conditions to ensure proper fit, code clearances, and serviceability of installed equipment
within the space indicated.
B. Where outlets are shown near identified equipment furnished by this or other
Contractors, it is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings that the outlet be located
at the equipment to be served. The Contractor shall coordinate the location of these
outlets to be near the final location of the equipment served, regardless of whether the
outlet is shown accurately on the Drawings.
1.03
LOCAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall examine the site and become familiar with conditions affecting the
work. The Contractor shall investigate, determine, and verify locations of any overhead
or buried utilities on or near the site, and shall determine such locations by coordinating
with all public and private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction
(AHJs).
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 −
Submittal Procedures and the requirements of the individual Specification Sections, the
Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
8/15/2025
26 05 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3.
Spare Parts List
4.
Proposed Testing Methods and Reports of Certified Shop Tests
5.
Reports of Certified Field Tests
6.
Manufacturer’s Representative’s Certification
B. Submittals shall be sufficiently complete in detail to enable the Engineer to determine
compliance with Contract requirements.
C. Submittals will be approved only to the extent of the information shown. Approval of an
item of equipment shall not be construed to mean approval for components of that item
for which the Contractor has provided no information.
D. Some individual electrical specification sections may require a Compliance, Deviations,
and Exceptions (CD&E) letter to be submitted. If the CD&E letter is required and shop
drawings are submitted without the letter, the submittal will be rejected.
1.
The CD&E letter shall include all comments, deviations, and exceptions taken to
the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor AND Equipment
Manufacturer/Supplier.
2.
This letter shall include a copy of the applicable specification section(s).
3.
In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter "C", "D", or "E"
shall be typed or written in.
a.
The letter "C" shall be in full compliance with the requirement.
b.
The letter "D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement.
c.
The letter "E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement.
4.
Provide a typewritten explanation of each item marked with "D" or "E." Handwritten
explanation of the deviations/exceptions is not acceptable.
5.
The CD&E letter shall also address deviations and exceptions taken to each
Drawing related to the applicable specification section(s).
E. Submit design for all nonstructural electrical components and systems and their
anchorage in accordance with the governing Building Code and Section 01 73 23 –
Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components.
8/15/2025
26 05 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.05
APPLICABLE CODES AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Conformance
1.
Unless otherwise noted, all work, equipment, and materials furnished shall
conform with the latest available version of the rules, requirements, and
specifications of the following:
a.
Insurance Rating Organization having jurisdiction.
b.
The serving electric utility company.
c.
The currently adopted edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC).
d.
The National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
e.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
f.
The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
g.
ASTM International (formerly the American Society of Testing Materials).
h.
The American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
i.
The requirements of the Occupational Safety Hazards Act (OSHA).
j.
The National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Standard of
Installation.
k.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
l.
InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
m.
All other applicable Federal, State/Commonwealth, and local laws and
ordinances.
2.
All equipment and materials shall be Listed by and shall bear the Label of a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), such as Underwriter's
Laboratories Inc. (UL), if the material and equipment is of the type/class inspected
by said laboratories.
B. Nonconformance
1.
Any paragraph of requirements in these Specifications or Drawings deviating from
the rules, requirements, and specifications of the above organizations shall be
superseded by those codes and regulations. The Contractor shall be held
responsible for adherence to all rules, requirements, and specifications as set forth
8/15/2025
26 05 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
above. Any additional cost shall be included in the Bid and not considered a
change order. Ignorance of any rule, requirement, or specification shall not be
allowed as an excuse for nonconformity. Acceptance by the Engineer shall not
relieve the Contractor from the expense involved for the correction of any errors
which may exist in the drawings submitted or in the satisfactory operation of any
equipment.
C. Certification
1.
Where applicable, upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain
certificate(s) of inspection and approval from the inspection organization or AHJ
having jurisdiction and shall deliver same to the Engineer and the Owner.
1.06
PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall reference the General Conditions and Section 01 11 00 − Summary
of Work.
1.07
TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER
A. The Contractor shall reference the General Conditions and Section 01 51 00 −
Temporary Utilities.
1.08
TESTS
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall perform tests for operation, load
(Phase) balance, overloads, short circuits ground fault protection. Tests shall be
witnessed by and subject to the approval of the Owner and Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall perform all field tests and shall provide all labor, equipment, and
incidentals required for testing and shall pay for electric power required for the tests. All
defective material and workmanship disclosed shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that all circuits
and devices are in good operating condition. Test shall demonstrate that each item of
control equipment operates correctly for a minimum of five (5) cycles.
C. Refer to each individual specification section for detailed test requirements.
D. The Contractor shall complete the installation and field testing of the electrical
installation at least two (2) weeks prior to the start-up and testing of any equipment
served by that electrical equipment. During the period between the completion of
electrical installation and the start-up and testing of all other equipment, the Contractor
shall make all components of the Work available as it is completed for their use in
performing Preliminary and Final Field Tests.
8/15/2025
26 05 00-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. Before each test commences, the Contractor shall submit a detailed test procedure and
provide the test engineer’s resume, personnel, and scheduling information (e.g.,
proposed testing schedule) for the approval by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor
shall furnish detailed test procedures for any electrical equipment required as part of the
field tests of other systems. Submit procedures and qualifications at least two (2) weeks
prior to testing.
1.09
INFRARED INSPECTION
A. Just prior to the final acceptance of each equipment assembly, the Contractor shall
perform an infrared inspection to locate and correct all heating problems (i.e., thermal
anomalies) associated with electrical equipment terminations. The infrared inspection
shall be conducted by a qualified, independent, third-party testing company, not the
Electrical Contractor.
B. Any issues detected with portions of existing equipment that were not modified under
this Contract are not the responsibility of the Contractor. Despite the Contractor not
being held responsible for these problems, the Contractor shall report them to the Owner
and Engineer immediately for resolution.
C. The infrared inspection report shall include both digital photos and infrared (IR) photos
positioned side by side. Both digital and IR photos shall be clear and of high quality.
Fuzzy, grainy, or poorly illuminated photos are not acceptable. Each IR photo shall be
provided with a temperature scale beside it, and an indication of the hot spot
temperature in the photo. Submit printed and PDF copies of the report, with all pages
printed in full color, with equipment assemblies separated by tabs.
1.10
PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING AND TESTING
A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a field services organization to adjust, set,
calibrate, and test all new protective devices in the electrical system. Provide an optional
bid item to test existing electrical protective devices lacking test date indication stickers
from dates outside of the equipment at the site that lacks test stickers, in accordance
with NFPA 70B recommended maintenance intervals. The organization shall be a
subsidiary of, or have a franchise service agreement with, the primary new electrical
equipment manufacturer. Submit the organization’s qualifications and technician
resumes or certifications (e.g., NETA), along with all data forms required for field testing.
B. All protective devices in the electrical equipment shall be set, adjusted, calibrated, and
tested in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations, the coordination study,
NFPA, NETA, and best industry practice.
C. Proper operation of all equipment associated with the device under test and its
compartment shall be verified, as well as complete resistance, continuity, and polarity
tests of power, protective, and metering circuits. Any minor adjustments, repairs, and
8/15/2025
26 05 00-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
lubrication necessary to achieve proper operation shall be considered part of this
Contract.
D. All solid-state trip devices shall be checked and tested for setting and operation using
manufacturers’ recommended test devices and procedures.
E. Circuit breakers and contactors associated with the above devices shall be tested for trip
and close functions with their protective device.
F. When completed, the Contractor shall provide a comprehensive report for all equipment
tested, indicating condition, readings, and any faults or deficiencies identified.
Inoperative or defective equipment shall be brought immediately to the attention of the
Engineer.
G. Prior to placing any equipment in service, the correct operation of all protective devices
associated with this equipment shall be demonstrated by field testing under primary
injection or secondary/simulated injection for breakers with ratings less than 800 Amps.
1.11
POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A. The Contractor shall provide power system studies performed by a licensed Professional
Engineer (P.E.) in accordance with Section 26 05 73 – Power System Studies.
1.12
SCHEDULES AND FACILITY OPERATIONS
A. Become some testing will require equipment to be taken out of service, all testing
procedures and schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval at
least thirty (30) days before any work begins. Coordinate testing with the owner well in
advance of outages. Notify the Engineer and Owner at least 48-hours before any testing
begins, to allow time for load transfer or system adjustments. In addition, all testing that
requires temporary shutdown of facility equipment shall be coordinated with the
Owner/Engineer so as not to affect proper facility operations.
B. At the end of the workday, all equipment shall be in place and ready for immediate use
should a facility emergency arise. In addition, should an emergency condition occur
during testing, at the request of the Owner, the equipment shall be placed in service
immediately and turned over to Owner personnel.
C. In the event of accidental shutdown of Owner equipment, the Contractor shall notify
Owner personnel immediately to allow for an orderly restart of affected equipment.
D. Maintaining the operation of these facilities during the duration of the construction period
is essential and required. The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary equipment
as required to maintain facility operation. Reference Section 01 14 00 – Coordination
with Owner’s Operations for construction sequencing and specific operational constraint
information.
8/15/2025
26 05 00-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.13
EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND SPARE PARTS HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Materials arriving on the job site shall be stored in such a manner as to keep materials
free of rust and dirt and to keep materials properly aligned and true to shape. Rusty,
dirty, or misaligned material will be rejected. Electrical conduits shall be stored to provide
protection from the weather and accidental damage. Rigid non-metallic conduits shall be
stored on even supports and in locations not subject to direct sun rays or excessive
heat. Cables shall be sealed, stored, and handled carefully to avoid damage to the outer
covering or insulation and damage from moisture and weather. Adequate protection
shall be always required for electrical equipment and accessories until installed and
accepted. Materials damaged during shipment, storage, installation, or testing shall be
replaced or repaired in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer. If space heaters
are provided in a piece of electrical equipment, they shall be temporarily connected to a
power source during storage. The Contractor shall store equipment and materials in
accordance with Section 01 55 00 − Contractor Access and Parking.
B. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal for each Section, shall
indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms
such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable.
C. Spare parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts
inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate
number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same
parts number.
D. Spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long-term storage, bearing labels
clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are
intended.
E. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain.
The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such spare parts until completion of
the work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner.
1.14
WARRANTIES
A. Unless otherwise specified in an individual specification section, all electrical equipment
and electrical construction materials shall be provided with a warranty in accordance
with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 − Equipment General Provisions and the
General Conditions.
1.15
TRAINING
A. Unless otherwise specified in an individual specification section, all training for electrical
equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 −
Equipment General Provisions.
8/15/2025
26 05 00-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be provided under this Specification shall be
the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of all such items and
shall be the manufacturer's latest design. The products shall conform to the applicable
standards of UL and NEMA, unless specified otherwise. International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured,
and labeled in compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable.
B. All items of the same type or ratings shall be identical. This shall be further understood
to include products with the accessories indicated.
C. All equipment and materials shall be new, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
D. The Contractor shall submit proof if requested by the Engineer that the materials,
appliances, equipment, and devices that are provided under this Contract meet the
requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. with regard to fire and casualty hazards.
Documentation indicating Listing and Labeling by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., will be
accepted as meeting this requirement.
E. Where the above items are Labeled by (bearing the certification mark of) an OSHA
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) other than UL, and the NRTL is
authorized by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) to test and
certify those items to the same standard(s), then the certification mark of that NRTL shall
be accepted as equivalent to the ‘UL’ certification mark.
2.02
SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, any reference in the Specifications or on the
Drawings to any article, service, product, material, fixture, or item of equipment by name,
make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing the type, function, and
standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in
such cases may use any article, device, product, material, fixture, or item of equipment
which the Engineer, in writing, confirms is equivalent in type, function, performance, and
quality to that specified.
2.03
CONCRETE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all concrete required for the installation of all electrical work.
Concrete shall be Class A (minimum 4,000 psi at 28 days) unless otherwise specified.
Concrete and reinforcing steel shall meet the appropriate requirements of Cast-in-Place
concrete found in Division 03 of the Specifications.
8/15/2025
26 05 00-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. The Contractor shall provide concrete equipment pads for all free-standing electrical
apparatus and equipment located on new or existing floors or slabs. The Contractor shall
provide all necessary anchor bolts, channel iron sills, and other materials as required.
The exact location and dimensions shall be coordinated for each piece of equipment well
in advance of the scheduled placing of these pads. Equipment pads shall be 4 inches
high unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to the Standard
Detail for equipment pads shown on the Drawings. Equipment pads shall not have more
than 3 inches of excess concrete beyond the edges of the equipment.
2.04
RUBBER INSULATING MATTING
A. Rubber insulating matting shall be furnished and installed for each piece of electrical
equipment that is located indoors and installed under this Contract. Rubber insulating
matting shall not be installed outdoors. Matting shall be installed in the front of all
equipment and in the rear of equipment that is rear accessible. The mat shall be long
enough to cover the full length of the equipment. The mat shall be ¼-inch thick with
beveled edges, canvas back, solid type with corrugations running the entire length of the
mat. The matting shall meet OSHA requirements and the requirements of ASTM D-178
for Type 2, Class 2 insulating matting. Matting shall be 36 inches wide, minimum.
However, matting width shall be no less than the NEC working clearance for the
equipment with which it is associated.
B. Matting shall be provided for the following equipment:
1.
Motor Control Centers
2.
Switchboard Assemblies
3.
Variable Frequency Drives
4.
Panelboards
5.
Generator Control Panels
6.
Harmonic Correction Equipment
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Coordination
1.
The Work shall be coordinated between all trades to avoid delays and
unnecessary cutting, channeling, and drilling. Sleeves shall be placed in concrete
for passage of conduit wherever possible.
8/15/2025
26 05 00-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Damage
1.
The Contractor shall perform all chasing, channeling, drilling, and patching
necessary to the proper execution of this Contract. Any damage to the building,
structure, or any equipment shall be repaired by qualified personnel from the
applicable trades involved at the Contractor's expense. If, in the Engineer's
judgment, the repair of damaged equipment would not be satisfactory, then the
Contractor shall replace damaged equipment at the Contractor’s expense.
C. Existing Equipment
1.
Provide a suitable cover or plug for openings created in the existing equipment as
the result of work under this Contract. For example, provide round plugs in
equipment enclosures where the removal of a conduit creates a hole in the
enclosure. Covers and plugs shall maintain the NEMA rating of the equipment
enclosure. Covers and plugs shall be watertight when installed in equipment
located outdoors.
3.02
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfill required for the installation of all
electrical work. All excavation and backfilling shall be in complete accordance with the
applicable requirements of Division 31.
3.03
CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Wherever dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, come into contact, the
Contractor shall isolate these metals as required with neoprene washers, nine (9) mil
polyethylene tape, or gaskets.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
26 05 53-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. This Section includes identification for all electrical systems and components, including
but not limited to raceways, conductors, junction boxes, panels, devices, and equipment.
It applies to both field- and factory-installed components.
1.02
THE REQUIREMENT
A. All electrical equipment shall be properly identified in accordance with these
Specifications and the Contract Drawings. All electrical equipment shall be identified in
the manner described, or in an equally approved manner.
B. The types of electrical identification specified in this Section include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1.
Operational instructions and warnings.
2.
Danger signs.
3.
Equipment/system identification signs.
4.
Nameplates.
5.
Cable/conductor identification
6.
Junction, device, and pull box labeling
1.03
SIGNS
A. Provide danger/warning signs at equipment and locations with multiple power sources,
automatic start features, overhead power line exposure, or arc flash risk in accordance
with ANSI Z535.4 and NFPA 70E. Signs shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
"DANGER - HIGH-VOLTAGE" signs shall be securely mounted on the entry doors
of all electrical rooms.
2.
"DANGER – ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD – EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE
POWER SOURCES"
3.
“WARNING – EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY”
8/15/2025
26 05 53-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
“DANGER – OVERHEAD POWER LINES – KEEP CLEAR”
1.04
LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
the electrical identification work with the corresponding designations shown, specified, or
scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering, and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and
operation/maintenance of the electrical systems and equipment.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit shop drawings. Each submittal shall be identified by
the applicable Specification Section.
1.06
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without
review for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to:
1.
Product data sheets for all identification products, including labels, nameplates,
tags, signs, conduit markers, and operational signage. Include material
composition, dimensions, mounting details, and environmental ratings. Clearly
indicate compliance with UL 969 for adhesive products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.
All identification materials and methods shall comply with the latest versions of the
following:
a.
NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)
b.
NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace (Arc Flash and
Short Circuit Hazard Labeling)
c.
ANSI Z535.4 – Product Safety Signs and Labels
8/15/2025
26 05 53-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
IEEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code (For MV systems)
e.
UL 969 – Marking and Labeling Systems (Labeling and Marking Systems)
f.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145 – Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and
Tags (applies to signage in accessible areas and operator interfaces.)
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard material of
proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Material shall be
fabricated, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade,
and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as specified herein and shown on the
Drawings.
2.03
NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be two-layer or three-layer engraved plastic laminate (e.g., Traffolyte
or equivalent), with white background and black lettering unless otherwise indicated or
as required to match existing identification. Provide a font and label size consistently and
suitable for visibility in the installed location.
B. For NEMA 4X enclosures, secure nameplates using UL-recognized stainless steel
mounting hardware that preserves the enclosure’s type rating. Use Hoffman Type
AHK10324X mounting kits or an Engineer-approved equal. Do not penetrate the
enclosure in a way that compromises rating.
2.04
HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNS
A. Provide standard "DANGER" signs with baked enamel finish on 20-gauge steel. Signs
shall have red, black, and white graphics. Standard size is 14 in. by 10 in.; use 10 in. by
7 in. only where a larger size cannot be applied. Use larger signs where needed for
visibility.
B. Mount signs at electrical rooms, switchgear, transformer vaults, substations, and other
locations with conductors and terminations above 600 V.
2.05
CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Conduit identification shall comply with Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduit for Electrical
Systems and shall meet ANSI A13.1 for label format and spacing. Labels shall include
voltage and source panel/circuit identification.
8/15/2025
26 05 53-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.06
WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A. Field-installed wire and cable identification shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19 –
Low Voltage Conductors and Cable and Section 26 05 13 – Medium Voltage Cables.
B. Provide a plastic laminate nameplate at each panelboard, motor control center,
switchgear assembly, and switchboard assembly. This nameplate shall be used to
clearly convey the conductor identification means used at that piece of equipment (e.g.,
Phase A=Brown, Phase B=Orange, C = Yellow). Mount the nameplate on the inside of
the door where it will be visible during maintenance.
C. Wiring identification for factory-installed wiring within equipment enclosures shall be as
specified in the respective equipment Section and shall be documented in the equipment
wiring diagram.
2.07
BOX IDENTIFICATION
A. Pull, junction, and device box identification shall include circuit source panel and circuit
number(s), and the circuit’s voltage rating. See Section 26 05 33.16 – Boxes for
Electrical Systems for all requirements.
2.08
WEATHER RESISTANCE
A. Identification materials used outdoors or in damp, corrosive, or washdown areas shall be
constructed of weather-resistant, UV-stable, and corrosion-resistant materials. Signs
exposed to outdoor environments (e.g., overhead-line warnings, pad-mounted
equipment) shall be rated for exterior use with a minimum 5-year durability.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
NAMEPLATES
A. Secure nameplates to equipment enclosures using stainless steel sheet metal screws.
Use two screws for nameplates up to 2 inches wide; use four (4) screws (one in each
corner) for nameplates over 2 inches wide. Adhesive-only mounting is not permitted.
B. Nameplates shall include both the equipment designation (e.g., EF-1) and a brief,
descriptive label (e.g., “ELEC RM 210 CEILING EXHAUST FAN”) to assist field
personnel with identification and maintenance.
C. Descriptions shall include at a minimum description shown on the Contract Drawings.
3.02
OPERATIONAL IDENTIFICATION AND WARNINGS
A. Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of
the electrical systems and electrically connected mechanical systems and general
8/15/2025
26 05 53-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by
unauthorized personnel, install plastic signs or similar equivalent identification,
instruction, or warnings on switches, outlets, and other controls, devices, and covers or
electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide
plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for the intended purposes. Signs
shall be mounted using mechanical fasteners or rivets where feasible; do not use
adhesive-only methods except inside enclosures where permitted.
3.03
POWER SOURCE IDENTIFICATION
A. After installation of all field equipment (e.g., valves, motors, fans, unit heaters,
instruments, etc.) install nameplates at each power termination. Nameplate data shall
include equipment designation (tag number), power source (MCC number, panelboard,
etc.), circuit number, conduit ID from schedule, and voltage/phase.
B. Where applicable, include supplemental information such as equipment description,
served area, or room number to aid in identification, operation, and maintenance.
C. Contractor to coordinate with the Engineer and the Owner regarding exact nameplate
placement during construction.
D. Nameplates shall be as specified herein.
3.04
DISCONNECTS
1.
All disconnect means shall be clearly and durably labeled to indicate the source of
power, including panel name and circuit number, in accordance with NEC 110.22.
3.05
PANEL AND SWITCHBOARD SCHEDULES
A. Panel schedules shall clearly indicate the room number and room name for all lighting
and receptacle loads not associated with tagged equipment.
B. Use full, plain-language descriptions in panel schedules. Avoid abbreviations and
acronyms except for equipment IDs (e.g., AHU-1, EF-2), room number references (e.g.,
“RM 214”), or where space constraints require. Pair each equipment ID with a clear,
descriptive label to support positive identification, targeting clarity for the most junior field
personnel.
C. Refer to Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards and Section 26 24 13 – Switchboards for
additional labeling and schedule requirements specific to those assemblies.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
26 05 73-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 05 73
POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide all power system studies for the project as specified herein.
The following shall be performed:
1.
Short Circuit Studies
2.
Load Flow Analyses
3.
Protective Device Coordination Studies
4.
Equipment Evaluation
5.
Arc Flash Risk Assessment
B. The scope of the work for these studies shall include all existing and new electrical
equipment that is electrically connected to or affected by the scope of work under this
Contract at the project site.
C. The studies shall include all electric utility protective devices, transformers, generators,
cables, switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, individual motor controllers,
variable-frequency drives, panelboards, protective relays, busway systems, and control
panels.
D. Prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings for the
equipment proposed under this Contract and/or prior to release of that equipment for
manufacture, the Preliminary Report, as specified herein, shall be submitted and
approved. Contractor shall expedite the completion of the Preliminary Report so that final
approval of proposed equipment is not delayed.
E. The studies shall be performed with the aid of SKM Power Tools for Windows (PTW)
software, Version 11.0 or newer. No other software analysis packages are acceptable.
1.02
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the following Codes and Standards, as
applicable (latest edition, unless otherwise specified):
1.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
8/15/2025
26 05 73-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
Standard 141, Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants
b.
Standard 241, Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in
Commercial Buildings
c.
Standard 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
d.
Standard 3002.2, IEEE Recommended Practice for Conducting Load Flow
Studies and Analysis of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
e.
Standard 3002.3, IEEE Recommended Practice for Conducting Short-Circuit
Studies and Analysis of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
f.
Standard 1584-2018, IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard
Calculations
g.
IEEE 1584.1, Guide for the Specification of Scope and Deliverable
Requirements for an Arc-Flash Hazard Calculation Study
2.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
Standard C37.90, IEEE Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated
with Electric Power Apparatus
b.
Standard C37.91, Guide for Protective Relay Applications to Power
Transformers
c.
Standard C37.95, Guide for Protective Relaying of Utility-Consumer
Interconnections
d.
Standard C37.96, Guide for AC Motor Protection
e.
Standard C57.12.59, Guide Dry-Type Transformer Through-Fault Current
Duration
f.
Standard C.57.13, Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers
g.
Standard C57.109, Guide for Liquid-Immersed Transformer Through Fault-
Current Duration
h.
Standard Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels
3.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC)
8/15/2025
26 05 73-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
b.
NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
c.
NFPA 70B; Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit the following reports for review and approval:
1.
One (1) printed copy and one (1) electronic copy of the Preliminary Report.
2.
One (1) printed copy and one (1) electronic copy of the Pre-final Report.
3.
Four (4) printed copies and one (1) electronic copy of the Final Report.
B. The Contractor shall submit one (1) complete electronic copy of the final power system
model and all required database files generated by the software analysis package used,
including .PTW, LIB, FMT, etc. Files shall be placed on portable storage media (USB 3.0
flash storage device) or be uploaded to a cloud-based file sharing service and be
submitted with the Final Report. Furnish any necessary documentation requiring the
Owner’s signature to allow model to be transferred to the Owner.
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A. The studies shall be performed by a professional electrical engineer actively licensed in
the state or commonwealth in which the project is located. The licensed professional
electrical engineer shall have a minimum of five (5) years of direct experience
performing short circuit, coordination, and arc flash studies for low and medium voltage
AC power system.
B. The resume of the licensed professional electrical engineer shall be submitted for
approval prior to the start of work. An experience table shall also be provided detailing
the power system studies of similar scope to this Contract that have been performed by
the proposed engineer over the last two (2) years. Projects listed shall be similar in
voltage class, system complexity, and utility interface scope. At least one of the listed
projects shall include arc flash risk assessment with final labeling deliverables. The table
shall, at a minimum, list the facility owner’s name, facility contact person with phone
number and email address, and overall scope of work that was provided.
8/15/2025
26 05 73-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
DATA COLLECTION
A. The Contractor shall collect all required utility transformer impedance, X/R ratio,
available short-circuit current (minimum and maximum),and service configuration
information for use in these studies. The serving electric utility representative contact
information can be found in Section 26 05 00, Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. Approved equipment shop drawings and product information for all equipment furnished
under this Contract shall be used for these studies. Including data for equipment that is
not yet approved is not acceptable.
C. One (1) field visit to the project site to collect pertinent data from existing equipment by
the personnel performing the studies is permitted. The visit shall span as many days as
required to collect all necessary information. This visit shall occur as soon after the
Contract is awarded as possible and shall be coordinated with the Owner. The
Contractor and personnel performing these studies are responsible for collecting all
required data for these studies. If equipment is to be examined while energized parts are
exposed, the examining personnel shall wear appropriate PPE in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 70E. All data collection shall be documented with date-stamped
photos of nameplates and interior gear labels, and these shall be included in the
Preliminary Report submittal.
D. Using data from record drawings, “as-built” drawings, or a previous power system study
is not acceptable. All data for existing equipment shall be field verified.
3.02
STUDY PARAMETERS
A. The following parameters shall be used for all studies:
1.
Transformers 75kVA (nominal) and larger shall be modeled with actual nameplate
data including impedance data. Motors 30hp and larger shall be modeled with
actual nameplate power factor and efficiency data.
2.
Room heating and cooling loads are mutually exclusive. Only the larger of these
two load types shall be configured as in-service in the model.
3.
The sources that shall be used in these studies are the serving electric utility and
the standby generators. The generators are capable of paralleling with each other
AND with the utility source for extended periods of time. Therefore, each source
shall be considered both independently and in parallel for the purposes of these
studies.
8/15/2025
26 05 73-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Other parameters may apply for specific studies if noted in the respective study
requirements herein.
3.03
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDIES
A. The short circuit studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standard 3002.3.
B. The study input data shall include the short circuit contribution obtained from each
source. Short circuit close and latch duty values and interrupting duty values shall be
calculated on the basis of assumed three-phase bolted short circuits at each bus. Single-
line diagrams shall show the results of the analysis by using datablocks constructed as
shown in Appendix A. Provide the results of this study in a tabular format as well,
included as an appendix to the report.
C. The short circuit study report shall include recommendations for equipment selection
based on calculated short circuit values and all input and output data from the software
model.
3.04
PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDIES
A. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to provide the necessary
calculations and logic decisions required to select or to check the selection of power fuse
ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of
associated current transformers, and low voltage circuit breaker trip characteristics and
settings.
B. The coordination study shall include all equipment from the serving electric utility
company source protective devices down to and including all adjustable circuit protective
devices. The phase and ground overcurrent protection shall be included as well as
settings of all other adjustable protective devices.
C. The time-current characteristics of the proposed protective devices shall be printed on
log-log scale coordination plots as specified below.
1.
Each plot shall be accompanied by a representative single-line diagram. The
coordination plot and single-line diagram shall each occupy one-half of the same
printed sheet for ease of cross reference. Each printed sheet shall have a distinct
title that identifies the portion of the electrical system it represents.
2.
Each coordination plot shall include the following:
a.
Sufficient number of separate curves shall be used to clearly indicate the
coordination achieved
b.
Identification of each curve with its respective component’s name
8/15/2025
26 05 73-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
Complete operating bands for fuse and low voltage circuit breaker trip curves
d.
Transformer magnetizing inrush and ANSI transformer withstand parameters
e.
Cable thermal overcurrent withstand limits
f.
Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents for the portion of the
electrical system represented by the plot
3.
Each accompanying single-line shall include datablocks as described in Appendix
A.
4.
All restrictions of the National Electrical Code shall be adhered to, and proper
coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves shall be maintained.
D. The selection and settings of all protective devices shall be provided separately in the
report in a tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current
transformer ratios and connections, manufacturer and type, range of adjustment and
recommended settings.
3.05
LOAD FLOW ANALYSIS
A. The load flow analysis shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standard 3002.2.
B. A load flow analysis shall be performed to determine the steady-state loading profile of
the system(s) being studied. From the results of the load flow analysis, the report shall
indicate areas of overloaded conductors, busses, or other equipment in the power
distribution system. The load flow analysis results shall be presented in a tabular format
as well as a single-line diagram format. Single-line diagrams shall show the results of the
analysis by using datablocks constructed as shown in Appendix A. All assumptions
associated with the analysis shall be documented in the report.
3.06
EQUIPMENT EVALUATION
A. An equipment evaluation shall be performed to determine the adequacy of existing
circuit breakers, panelboards, motor control centers, automatic transfer switches,
busses, etc. located at the facility by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of
these devices with the calculated fault currents that result from the short circuit study.
B. Appropriate multiplying factors based on system X/R ratios and protective device rating
standards shall be applied. A table shall be provided in the report showing the calculated
fault currents and the corresponding short circuit ratings of the existing equipment along
with a pass or fail status for each piece of equipment.
8/15/2025
26 05 73-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.07
ARC FLASH RISK ASSESSMENT
A. An arc flash risk assessment shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Std. 1584-
2018, NFPA 70E, and OSHA 29-CFR, Part 1910 Subpart S. The assessment shall use
the incident energy analysis method. The arc flash PPE category method shall not be
used.
B. The following parameters shall be used for the arc flash risk assessment:
1.
Working distance for all equipment: 18 inches
2.
Arcing duration limit: 2 seconds, or higher (based on engineering judgement) for
equipment locations where additional time may be required to exit the arc flash
boundary.
3.
Equipment box dimensions and electrode configuration shall be entered for each
piece of equipment (existing and/or new) to be assessed. Using software default
dimensions and electrode configuration is not acceptable.
4.
For equipment operating at 240VAC or below, report incident energy as “<1.2
cal/cm2” if the bolted fault current is calculated to be less than 2000A.
5.
Any protective device settings changes that were recommended as part of these
studies shall be included. For devices where settings changes are recommended,
the “as-found” settings shall be documented separately in dedicated tables for
record purposes.
6.
Project specific operating scenarios shall be obtained from the customer, and
documented in the final report or the following scenarios shall be used, with the
worst-case values from each scenario being shown in the study report and on the
arc flash labels:
a.
Scenario 1: All tie circuit breakers at distribution equipment are open, all
main circuit breakers are closed, and the facility is served by the electric
utility source.
b.
Scenario 2: All A-side main circuit breakers at distribution equipment are
open, all tie circuit breakers are closed, all B-side main circuit breakers are
closed, and the facility is served by the electric utility source.
c.
Scenario 3: All B-side main circuit breakers at distribution equipment are
open, all tie circuit breakers are closed, all A-side main circuit breakers are
closed, and the facility is served by the electric utility source.
8/15/2025
26 05 73-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Scenario 4: All tie circuit breakers at distribution equipment are open, all
main circuit breakers are closed, and the facility is served by the standby
generator source.
e.
Scenario 5: All A-side main circuit breakers at distribution equipment are
open, all tie circuit breakers are closed, all B-side main circuit breakers are
closed, and the facility is served by the standby generator source.
f.
Scenario 6: All B-side main circuit breakers at distribution equipment are
open, all tie circuit breakers are closed, all A-side main circuit breakers are
closed, and the facility is served by the standby generator source.
C. The arc flash risk assessment report shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
A brief overview of what arc flash hazards are and how to avoid them.
2.
Definitions of key terms used in the report.
3.
Confirmation of all parameters and scenarios used in the report.
4.
Documentation of any assumptions made for the report.
5.
Serving electric utility information received. Copies of the information received
shall be included in an appendix.
6.
Any recommendations to reduce the arc flash incident energies via protective
device settings changes where incident energies are found to exceed 12 cal/cm2.
Protective device settings change recommendations shall not negatively impact
selective coordination.
7.
A copy of the PPE information from Table 130.5 G in NFPA 70E.
8.
Arc flash labels as specified herein.
9.
An NFPA 70E energized electrical work permit for each location where an arc flash
label is provided.
10.
An arc flash evaluation summary sheet, based on the worst-case scenario, that
contains the following minimum information:
a.
Bus name
b.
Protective device name
c.
Bus line-to-line voltage
d.
Bus bolted fault
8/15/2025
26 05 73-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
e.
Protective device bolted fault
f.
Protective device arcing fault
g.
Trip/delay time
h.
Breaker opening time
i.
Equipment type
j.
Gap
k.
Electrode configuration
l.
Box height, width, and depth
m.
Arc flash boundary
n.
Working distance
o.
Incident energy
p.
Notes
D. Arc Flash Labels
1.
Arc flash labels shall be provided for each piece of equipment that is likely to
require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. When
opening an enclosure exposes energized parts on both the line and load side of a
device, provide a label with the worst case (line versus load) incident energy
printed. The following equipment, at a minimum, shall be provided with labels in
the quantities specified:
a.
Switchgear/Switchboards – quantity of 1 label per section on front, 1 label
per section on rear if rear is accessible. Provide second label at main circuit
breaker sections where it is possible to open covers and separately expose
line side and load side energized parts.
b.
Motor control centers – quantity of 1 label per section on front, 1 label per
section on rear if rear is accessible. Provide second label at main circuit
breaker sections where it is possible to open covers and separately expose
line side and load side energized parts.
c.
Panelboards – quantity of 1
d.
Variable frequency drives – quantity of 1 label per section
8/15/2025
26 05 73-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
e.
Other stand-alone motor starters/controllers – quantity of 1 label per section
f.
Automatic and manual transfer switches – quantity of 1
g.
Enclosed circuit breakers – quantity of 1
2.
Arc flash labels shall be thermal transfer type that is printed on adhesive backed
polyester material. Labels shall be ANSI Z535.4 compliant, 4 inches tall by 6
inches wide, and provided with a 5-year warranty. For incident energy values of
less than 40 cal/cm2, the labels shall have an orange-colored header with the word
“WARNING”. For incident energy values equal to and above 40 cal/cm2, the labels
shall have a red-colored header with the word “DANGER”. Each label shall include
the following information:
a.
Equipment name
b.
Date of issue and name of firm performing assessment
c.
Incident energy
d.
Working distance
e.
Arc flash boundary
f.
Nominal system voltage
3.
A generic arc flash label that has a red-colored header with the word “DANGER”
and text in large letters that shows “ENERGIZED WORK NOT PERMITTED” shall
be provided for the following equipment:
a.
Any equipment that requires an arc flash label (as specified above) that is
located within a hazardous area.
b.
Any equipment found to be in poor working condition, where in the
judgement of the engineer performing the study, energized work should not
be performed at all, regardless of the outcome of the incident energy
analysis at that equipment.
c.
Any equipment with a portable generator connection point.
3.08
STUDY REPORTS
A. The results of the studies shall be documented in a series of reports. A total of three (3)
separate reports shall be provided as follows:
1.
Preliminary Report – The Preliminary Report shall consist of all power systems
studies as specified herein, with the following exceptions:
8/15/2025
26 05 73-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
NFPA 70E energized electrical work permits shall not be included.
b.
One (1) WARNING label and one (1) DANGER label shall be printed on
plain paper for format review purposes only. Actual adhesive labels with
calculated values shall not be included.
2.
Pre-final Report – The Pre-final Report shall incorporate all comments received
from the previous report review and shall include specific equipment data from the
approved shop drawings of the proposed electrical equipment. The Pre-final
Report shall consist of all power systems studies as specified herein, with the
following exceptions:
a.
NFPA 70E energized electrical work permits shall not be included.
b.
Sample arc flash hazard warning labels one (1) WARNING label and one (1)
DANGER label) shall be printed on the proposed adhesive material for
review purposes.
3.
Final Report – The Final Report shall consist of all power systems studies as
specified herein, including final adhesive arc flash hazard warning labels. Final
report shall incorporate all installed electrical equipment, including any field
changes made during construction, and all comments received from the previous
report review. All ‘as-left’ protective device settings shall be included in the report.
The Final Report shall bear the signature and seal of the professional electrical
engineer that performed the study.
B. Hard copies of reports shall be furnished in the quantities specified herein, neatly
organized into properly identified 3-ring binders. Tabs shall clearly separate each section
of the report.
C. Electronic copies of reports shall be provided in PDF file format. Electronic copies shall
have searchable text and bookmarks for each section of the report.
D. Each report shall begin with a table of contents followed by an executive summary. The
executive summary shall detail the configuration of the electrical system and summarize
any concerns or recommendations for the electrical distribution system that resulted
from the studies specified herein.
E. Reports shall include simplified single line diagrams with only the device name
information displayed for all equipment, as well as single line diagrams with specific data
displayed as specified herein for each study.
F. All data used in the reports such as conductor sizes and lengths, motor sizes, utility
contribution information, fault analysis input, fault contributions, and the like shall be
included in the appendices of the report.
8/15/2025
26 05 73-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
G. All single line diagrams and time current curves shall be provided in the reports on
11x17 paper, properly folded to fit into the report binder. Use of standard 8.5x11 paper
for these purposes is not permitted. Single line diagrams shall be appropriately split up
between several sheets (if required) to allow the drawing scale to be adjusted as
required to make text and symbols legible.
3.09
FIELD ADJUSTMENT
A. The Contractor shall adjust all relay and other protective device settings according to the
recommended settings table provided in the approved Pre-Final Report.
B. The Contractor shall make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish
conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies.
3.10
ARC FLASH LABEL PLACEMENT
A. The Contractor shall place approved adhesive arc flash labels on equipment after the
Final Report is reviewed and approved.
3.11
TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall train the Owner’s qualified electrical personnel of the potential arc
flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment. The training shall be
provided in two (2) separate sessions of no less than two (2) hours each. The training
shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the International Association
for Continuing Education Training (IACET), or equivalent. Training certificates shall be
provided for all attendees.
END OF SECTION
100121
8/15/2025
26 05 73-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
APPENDIX A – SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
8/15/2025
26 05 73-14
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
REQUIRED DATABLOCK CONTENTS FOR POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
Component Type
Input Data
Load Flow
Short Circuit
TCC Plots*
Utility
Nominal Voltage
Nominal Voltage
Current (A)
Power Factor
Power (kW)
Power (kVA)
Fault Contribution (3P RMS) and X/R Ratio
Fault Contribution (SLG RMS) and X/R Ratio
N/A
Generator
Nominal Voltage
Rating (kW)
Power Factor
Voltage Drop (%)
Power Factor
Power (kW)
Power (kVA)
Fault Contribution (3P RMS)
Fault Contribution (SLG RMS)
FLA
Bus
Voltage
Manufacturer
SCCR
Voltage Drop (%)
Study Voltage
Current (A)
Power Factor
Power (kW)
Power (kVA)
Fault Magnitude (3P RMS)
Fault Magnitude (SLG RMS)
N/A
Cable
Size (AWG or kcmil)
Parallel Sets
Length
Type (Cu/Al/Cu-Al)
Voltage Drop (%)
Current (A)
Power (kW)
Power (kVA)
Upstream Contribution (3P RMS)
Upstream Contribution (SLG RMS)
Downstream Contribution (3P RMS)
Downstream Contribution (SLG RMS)
N/A
Transformer
Rating (kVA)
Impedance (%Z)
X/R Ratio
Voltage Drop (%)
Sec. Current (A)
Power (kW)
Power (kVA)
Upstream Contribution (3P RMS)
Upstream Contribution (SLG RMS)
Downstream Contribution (3P RMS)
Downstream Contribution (SLG RMS)
N/A
Motor
Rating (hp)
Rated Voltage
FLA
Power Factor
Voltage Drop (%)
Study Voltage
Power Factor
Power (kW)
Power (kVA)
Upstream Contribution (3P RMS)
Upstream Contribution (SLG RMS)
FLA
LRA/FLA ratio
8/15/2025
26 05 73-15
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
Component Type
Input Data
Load Flow
Short Circuit
TCC Plots*
Non-Motor Load
Rating (A, kW, kVA)
Rated Voltage
Power Factor
Voltage Drop (%)
Study Voltage
Power Factor
Power (kW)
Power (kVA)
N/A
N/A
Fuse
Manufacturer
Model
Rating (A)
N/A
N/A
Same as Input Data
Relay**
Manufacturer
Model
CT Ratio
Curve Elements & Settings
N/A
N/A
Same as Input Data
Disconnect Switch
Manufacturer
SCCR (kA)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Circuit Breaker
(no integral trip unit)
Manufacturer
SCCR (kA)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Circuit Breaker***
(all others)
Manufacturer
Model
SCCR (kA)
Frame/Sensor/Plug Ratings
Settings***
LTPU
[LTD Curve Shape]
[LTD]
[STPU]
[STD and I2T On/Off]
INST
[GFPU]
[GFD and I2T On/Off]
[AF Maint. Setting/Curve]
N/A
N/A
Same as Input Data
8/15/2025
26 05 73-16
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
Component Type
Input Data
Load Flow
Short Circuit
TCC Plots*
Motor Circuit
Protector
Manufacturer
Model
SCCR (kA)
Frame/Trip Ratings
N/A
N/A
Same as Input Data
Motor Overload Relay
Manufacturer
Model
SCCR (kA)
Frame/Trip Ratings
Settings
N/A
N/A
Same as Input Data
* TCC single line diagrams shall not display datablocks.
** Complex and/or non-overcurrent settings for multifunction relays (e.g. bus/winding differential, motor thermal model parameters, under/overvoltage, RTD alarm
and trip setpoints, etc.) are excluded from the model.
*** Hide setting elements where not applicable for a given circuit breaker. Recommended settings for non-overcurrent settings for electronic trip circuit breakers
(e.g. under/overvoltage, zone-selective interlocking, alarm setpoints, etc.) are excluded from the model.
8/15/2025
26 09 16-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 09 16
ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in satisfactory operation all electric
controls and relays as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
B. Electrical control and relay systems shall be assembled using NEMA rated components.
Components designed and built to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured, and Labeled in
compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable.
C. Reference the following Specification Sections:
1.
Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements
2.
Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
1.02
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Products specified herein shall be designed, manufactured, and/or Listed to the following
standards as applicable:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/International Society of Automation
(ISA):
a.
ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 – Nonincendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I
and II, Division 2 and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified)
Locations.
2.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
3.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).
4.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a.
UL 508A – Standard for Industrial Control Panels.
8/15/2025
26 09 16-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
b.
UL-1203 – Standard for Explosion-proof and Dust-ignition-proof Electrical
Equipment for use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Spare Parts List
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section.
1.04
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without
review for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1.
Product data sheets.
D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the
Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met.
Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and
similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment
items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted.
1.05
SPARE PARTS
A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to
the Owner by the Contractor. In addition to the manufacturer recommended spare parts,
the following spare parts shall be provided for the local control stations:
1.
One (1) contact block of each type furnished on the project
2.
One (1) indicating light lens of each color furnished on the project
3.
One (1) LED lamp of each color furnished on the project
8/15/2025
26 09 16-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements for spare parts delivery and
handling requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
CONTROL COMPONENTS
A. Manufacturers
1.
Control components shall be manufactured by The Square D Company, Eaton, GE
by ABB, Allen-Bradley, Siemens Energy and Automation, or Engineer approved
equal.
B. Pilot Devices
1.
General
a.
All pilot devices shall be provided with a legend plate. Legend plates shall
have a white background and black lettering and indicate the function of the
respective pilot device. The text shown on the Drawings or indicated in the
specifications shall be used as the basis for legend plate engraving (e.g.,
HAND-OFF-AUTO, RUN, EMERGENCY STOP, etc.).
b.
All pilot devices shall be selected and properly installed to maintain the
NEMA 250 rating of the enclosure in which they are installed. All pilot
devices shall be UL 508 Listed.
c.
All pilot devices shall be 30.5mm in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
22mm devices are not acceptable.
d.
Pilot devices for all electrical equipment under this Contract shall be of the
same type and manufacturer unless otherwise specified herein or indicated
on the Drawings.
e.
In Class I Division 2 hazardous locations, pilot devices shall be the
hermetically-sealed type, constructed in accordance with ANSI/ISA 12.12.01.
2.
Pushbuttons
a.
Pushbuttons shall be non-illuminated, black in color, and have momentary
style operation unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b.
Pushbuttons shall have the quantity of normally closed and/or normally open
contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as required. In addition to the
required contacts, one (1) spare normally open and one (1) spare normally
closed contact shall be installed at each pushbutton. Contacts shall be rated
8/15/2025
26 09 16-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than required for the
application.
c.
Pushbuttons shall be provided with a full guard around the perimeter of the
button. Where a lockout style pushbutton is specified or indicated on the
Drawings, provide a padlockable guard.
3.
Selector Switches
a.
Selector switches shall be non-illuminated, black in color, and have the
number of maintained positions as indicated on the Drawings and as
required. Handles shall be the extended type that provide a greater surface
area for operation.
b.
Selector switches shall have the quantity of normally closed and/or normally
open contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as required. In addition to
the required contacts, one (1) spare normally open and one (1) spare
normally closed contact shall be installed at each selector switch. Contacts
shall be rated for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than required for
the application.
c.
Where indicated in the Drawings or Specifications, provide spring return
positions.
d.
Selector switches shall be provided with an indexing component that fits into
the keyed portion of the cutout for the device and prevents the switch from
spinning when operated.
4.
Indicating Lights
a.
Indicating lights shall be LED type, with the proper voltage rating to suit the
application, and push-to-test feature.
b.
Indicating light lens colors shall be as required in equipment specifications
and/or as indicated on the Drawings. If lens colors are not indicated, the
following colors shall be used:
Color
Designation
Red
"Run", "On", “Open”
Green
"Off", “Closed”
Amber
"Alarm", "Fail"
White
“Control Power On”
8/15/2025
26 09 16-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
Emergency Stop and Tagline Switches
a.
Emergency stop switches shall be non-illuminated, red in color, with a
minimum 35mm diameter mushroom head. Once activated, switch shall
maintain its position and require a manual pull to release/reset.
b.
Tagline switches shall have a plunger that activates upon tension from the
associated safety cable. Once activated, switch shall maintain its position
and require a manual release/reset.
c.
Emergency stop and tagline switches shall have the quantity of normally
closed and/or normally open contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as
required. In addition to the required contacts, one (1) spare normally open
and one (1) spare normally closed contact shall be installed at each switch.
Contacts shall be rated for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than
required for the application.
C. Relays and Timers
1.
General
a.
Relays and timers shall be furnished with an integral pilot light for positive
indication of coil energization.
b.
Relays and timers shall have tubular pin style terminals with matching 11-pin
DIN rail mount socket. Spade or blade style terminals are not acceptable.
c.
Relays and timers for all electrical equipment under this Contract shall be of
the same type and manufacturer unless otherwise specified herein or
indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Control and Pilot Relays
a.
Relays shall have a clear or translucent housing that allows the contacts to
be visually inspected without disassembly.
b.
Relays shall have coil voltage as required to suit the application and/or as
indicated on the Drawings.
c.
Relays shall be provided with contacts rated for 10A (resistive), minimum, at
120/240 VAC and 28 VDC. Relays shall have 3-pole, double-throw (3PDT)
contact arrangement.
3.
Time Delay Relays
8/15/2025
26 09 16-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
Timers delay relays shall utilize electronic timing technology. Mechanical
timing devices are not acceptable.
b.
Relays shall have coil voltage as required to suit the application and/or as
indicated on the Drawings.
c.
Relays shall be provided with contacts rated for 10A (resistive), minimum, at
120/240 VAC and 28 VDC. Relays shall have double-pole double-throw
(DPDT) contact arrangement.
d.
Time delay ranges shall be as indicated on the Drawings and/or as required
to suit the application. Timing range shall be adjustable from the front of the
relay. On delay and off delay timer configurations shall be provided as
indicated on the Drawings and/or as required to suit the application.
4.
Elapsed Time Meters
a.
Elapsed time meters shall be non-resettable type with no less than a four (4)
digit display. Coil voltage shall be as required to suit the application and/or
as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Control Terminal Blocks
1.
Control terminal blocks shall be assembled on non-current carrying galvanized
steel DIN mounting rails securely bolted to the enclosure or subpanel. Terminals
shall be tubular screw type with pressure plate that will accommodate wire size
range of #22 – #8 AWG.
2.
Control terminal blocks shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts and
20A. Separate terminal strips shall be provided for each type of control used (e.g.,
120VAC vs. 24VDC). Quantity of terminals shall be provided as required to suit the
application. In addition, there shall be a sufficient quantity of terminals for the
termination of all spare conductors.
3.
Terminals shall be marked with a permanent, continuous marking strip, with each
terminal numbered. One side of each terminal shall be reserved exclusively for
incoming field conductors. Common connections and jumpers required for internal
wiring shall not be made on the field side of the terminal.
2.02
LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS
A. Local control stations shall be furnished and installed complete with pushbuttons,
selector switches, indicating lights, and other devices as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Specific devices installed in local control stations shall be provided in accordance with
the requirements specified elsewhere in this Section.
8/15/2025
26 09 16-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. In non-hazardous locations, local control stations shall be furnished with the following
enclosure type and material of construction, dependent upon the designation of the area
in which they are to be installed. Area designations are indicated on the Drawings.
Area Designation
Enclosure Type and Material
Indoor Wet Process Area
NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel
Indoor Dry Process Area
NEMA 12, Die Cast Zinc
Indoor Dry Non-process Area
NEMA 12, Die Cast Zinc
Indoor Type 1 Chemical Storage/Transfer Area
NEMA 4X, Fiberglass or Thermoplastic Polyester
Indoor Type 2 Chemical Storage/Transfer Area
NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel
All Outdoor Areas
NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel
D. Local control stations for use in non-hazardous locations shall be UL-508 Listed.
E. Provide a nameplate on each local control station in accordance with Section 26 05 53 –
Identification for Electrical Systems. The name and/or number of the equipment
associated with each control station shall be engraved on the nameplate, followed by the
words “LOCAL CONTROL STATION”.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Local control stations shall be provided in the enclosure type and material of
construction required for the area in which it is installed. Reference the requirements in
Part 2 herein, and the area designations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Local control stations shall be mounted, nominally, at 4ft 6in above finished floor or
finished grade to the centerline of the enclosure, at the equipment height where
appropriate and permitted by the NEC, or as shown otherwise on the Drawings.
C. All control components shall be mounted in a manner that will permit servicing,
adjustment, testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving, or removing any other
component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on
removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable
unless shock mounting is required otherwise by the manufacturer to protect equipment
from vibration. Component's mounting shall be oriented in accordance with the
component manufacturer's and industries' standard practices.
D. Pilot devices shall be properly bonded to the equipment enclosure door where they are
installed. If proper bonding cannot be achieved through the locknuts that affix the device
8/15/2025
26 09 16-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
in place, a green colored bonding screw shall be provided on the pilot device. The
device shall be bonded to the equipment enclosure with an insulated green bonding
conductor.
E. Local control station covers shall be bonded to the local control station enclosure with an
insulated green bonding conductor.
F. Wiring to devices at each local control station shall be provided with enough slack to
permit the local control station cover to be removed and pulled at least 6 inches away
from the enclosure.
G. Terminal strips, relays, timers, and similar devices shall not be installed on the rear of
the panel/cabinet doors. Terminal strips, relays, timers, and similar devices shall not be
installed on the side walls of panel/cabinet interiors without written permission from the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
26 12 19-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 12 19
PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test liquid-filled, pad-mount transformers for
power distribution systems as specified herein, as indicated on the Drawings, and as
required for complete and operable electrical installation.
B. All equipment specified in this Section shall be furnished by the transformer
manufacturer, who shall be responsible for the suitability and compatibility of all the
equipment included.
C. Reference the following specifications:
1.
Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements
2.
Section 26 05 13 – Medium Voltage Cables
3.
Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Conductors and Cables.
4.
Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
1.02
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Transformers shall comply with the following codes and standards:
1.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a.
IEEE C57.12.00 – Latest Revision, IEEE Standard for General
Requirements for Liquid Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating
Transformers.
b.
IEEE C57.12.28 – Latest Revision, IEEE Standard for Pad-mounted
Equipment - Enclosure Integrity.
c.
IEEE C57.12.34 - Latest Revision, IEEE Standard Requirements for Pad-
Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution
Transformers 10MVA and Smaller; High-Voltage, 34.5kV Nominal System
Voltage and Below; Low-Voltage, 15kV Nominal System Voltage and Below.
d.
IEEE C57.12.70 – Latest Revision, IEEE Standard for Standard Terminal
Markings and Connections for Distribution and Power Transformers.
8/15/2025
26 12 19-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
e.
IEEE C57.12.90 – Latest Revision, IEEE Standard Test Code for Liquid-
Immersed Distribution Power, and Regulating Transformers
f.
IEEE 386-Latest Revision, IEEE Standard for Separable Insulated
Connectors for Power Distribution Systems Rated 2.5kV through 35kV.
g.
IEEE C57.154 – Latest Revision – Guide for the Design, Testing, and
Application of Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating
Transformers Using High-Temperature Insulation Systems and Natural
Ester-Based Fluids
2.
National Electrical Code (NEC)
3.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
a.
ANSI/NEMA ST 20 Latest Revision, Dry-Type and Liquid-Immersed
Distribution Transformers
b.
NEMA 260-1996 (2019) – Safety Labels for Pad-Mounted Switchgear and
Transformers Sited in Public Areas
4.
US Department of Energy
a.
10 CFR Part 431 – Energy Conservation Program for Commercial
Equipment: Distribution Transformers Energy Conservation Standards; Final
Rule
5.
Factory Mutual
a.
FM 3990 – Approval Standard for Less-Flammable Electrical Insulation
Liquids
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1.
Shop Drawings (as specified in Section 1.04)
2.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals (as specified in Section 1.05)
3.
Spare Parts List (as specified in Section 1.06)
4.
Special Tools List (as specified in Section 1.06)
5.
Reports of Certified Shop Tests
082624
8/15/2025
26 12 19-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
6.
Reports of Field Tests including Oil Analysis
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section.
C. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
1.04
PARTIAL, INCOMPLETE OR ILLEGIBLE SUBMITTALS WILL BE RETURNED TO
THE CONTRACTOR WITHOUT REVIEW FOR RESUBMITTAL.SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1.
Product data sheets.
2.
Sample equipment nameplate diagram.
3.
Drawings showing clearly marked overall dimensions for each transformer.
Drawings shall show conduit stub-up area locations.
4.
Weight of each transformer.
5.
Proof of ISO 9001 registration.
6.
Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter: Submittal shall include a
CD&E letter, or it will be rejected. Include all deviations comments, deviations, and
exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by both the Contractor and
Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. Attach a copy of this Specification Section.
Mark the left margin beside each paragraph/item with:
a.
"C" for full compliance
b.
"D" for deviation
c.
"E" for exception
d.
Provide a typewritten explanation for each "D" or "E" item. Handwritten
explanations are not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address drawing
deviations or exceptions.
B. The submittal information shall reflect the specific equipment identification number as
indicated on the Drawings.
C. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the
Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met.
Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and
8/15/2025
26 12 19-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment
items that the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the
procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01.
1.06
TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS
A. The transformers shall be furnished with all special tools necessary to disassemble,
service, repair and adjust the equipment. All spare parts as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. In addition
to the manufacturer’s recommended spare parts, the Contractor shall furnish the
following for each transformer.
No. Required
Description
1 set
Primary fuses of each size provided
B. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements for spare parts delivery and
handling requirements.
1.07
IDENTIFICATION
A. Each transformer shall be identified with the identification number indicated on the
Drawings (e.g. TX-DIS), the primary and secondary voltages, kVA rating, winding
configurations, and the transformer impedance. A nameplate shall be securely affixed in
a conspicuous place on the front of each transformer on the outside of the termination
compartment doors. Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 26 05 53 –
Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer’s warranty shall be for a minimum of three (3) years from date of
delivery, or two (2) years after overall Substantial Completion is awarded, whichever is
longer and shall include repair labor, parts, travel expense necessary for repairs at the
jobsite, and expendables used during the course of repair. Submittals received without
written warranties as specified shall be rejected in their entirety.
B. The Contractor shall provide a complete warranty covering the transformer as well as all
accessories and appurtenances that are furnished and installed with the transformer.
8/15/2025
26 12 19-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of
proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be
designed, constructed, and installed per the best practices of the trade, and shall
operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
B. All transformer manufacturers shall be registered as ISO 9001 manufacturers.
C. Transformers shall be by the following:
1.
Square D,
2.
Eaton,
3.
ABB, or
4.
an Engineer-approved equal.
2.02
TRANSFORMERS
A. General
1.
Transformers shall be of a compact design. All units shall be a pad-mounted
compartmental type, which when assembled shall be an integral unit for mounting
on a pad.
2.
The transformer kVA rating shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Units shall
comply with the efficiency and thermal performance requirements applicable under
DOE 10 CFR Part 431.
3.
All units shall be designed to comply with the short circuit capability requirements
of IEEE C57.12.00.
4.
The transformer and associated termination compartments shall be so designed
and constructed as to be tamper resistant per IEEE C57.12.28 and constructed to
prevent unauthorized access. There shall be no screws, bolts, or other fastening
devices which are externally removable.
5.
Transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation without a fence or other area
enclosure.
6.
All transformers shall be coated with a primer and finish coat to provide a tough,
non-chalking weather resistant finish. The finish coat shall be dark green Munsell-
7.5G.Y.3.29.1.5 (Olive Green). The paint thickness shall be a minimum of 2.5 mils.
7.
Transformers shall be designed for step-down use.
8/15/2025
26 12 19-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Tank
1.
The transformer shall be of sealed-tank construction or sufficient strength to
withstand a pressure of 10 psi without permanent distortion. A domed cover to aid
water run-off shall be provided and shall be welded and the fastenings
tamperproof. The transformer shall remain effectively sealed for a top liquid
temperature range of up to 105°C. Cooling panels or fins shall be provided on the
back and sides of the tank to meet the thermal performance and cooling class
requirements.
2.
Lifting provisions shall be permanently attached and arranged on the tank to
provide a distributed, balanced lift in a vertical direction for the completely
assembled transformer.
3.
Terminal designations shall be as defined by IEEE C57.12.70. The high and low
voltage terminal designations shall be indicated on the tank wall with oil resistant
yellow paint or decals.
4.
Tank grounding provisions shall be as stated in IEEE standards. The grounding
provisions shall be capped before painting the unit. The unit shall be shipped with
the caps in place.
5.
The following tank accessories shall be provided:
a.
A liquid level indicator.
b.
A dial type liquid temperature gauge with Form C contacts.
c.
A 1-inch NPT upper plug (or cap) for filling and pressure testing.
d.
A pressure vacuum gauge with Form C contacts.
e.
A pressure relief valve.
f.
An automatic pressure relief device (self-resealing w/indicator).
C. Windings
1.
The transformer shall carry its continuous rating with average winding temperature
rise by resistance that shall not exceed 55 degrees C rise, based on an average
ambient of 30 degrees C over 24 hours with a maximum of 40 degrees C. The
insulation system shall allow an additional 12% kVA output at 65 degrees C
average winding temperature rise by resistance, on a continuous basis, without
any decrease in normal transformer life, as defined by IEEE C57.12.00.
Impedance shall be 5.75% subject to NEMA/ANSI ± 7.5% impedance tolerance.
8/15/2025
26 12 19-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
The transformer shall be designed to be capable of withstanding short circuits
without damage on any winding, at a magnitude of fault current equal to the full
rated voltage divided by the per unit impedance with full voltage maintained on all
windings connected to the external source of power.
3.
The internal high voltage leads of the transformer shall be adequately insulated
and mechanically secured. Connection to the coil conductors shall be made by a
process ensuring avoidance of damage to the coil insulation. All high voltage
phase leads shall be installed rigidly and spaced to provide dielectric and
mechanical strength and ensure phase isolation.
4.
The high voltage windings shall be rated 12.47 kV and 95 kV BIL unless indicated
otherwise on the Drawings for use on a solidly grounded system and shall have
two (2) 2-1/2% full capacity taps above and below rated voltage.
5.
The low voltage windings shall be rated 480Y/277 VAC and 30 kV BIL unless
indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
6.
High and low voltage windings shall be copper.
7.
All high and low voltage windings shall be secured in place by use of B stage
epoxy pattern paper. The epoxy shall be thermally cured under pressure to ensure
the bonding of conductor and paper.
8.
Bolted connections shall be acceptable only from lead to bushing connection. All
other connections shall be welded or adequately crimped.
9.
The transformer shall be equipped with padlockable tap changer. The tap changer
shall be designed for deenergized operation. The operating handle shall give
permanent visual indication of the voltage position and have a provision for
securing it at the desired position. The tap changer shall be marked for
deenergized operation, and the handle shall be easily accessible and located
inside the high voltage compartment. By operating the handle, all three phases
shall be operated simultaneously.
D. Core
1.
Core laminations shall be annealed, free of burrs, and furnished with a heat-
resistant insulating coating. All core sections shall be grounded to the core clamp.
E. Termination Compartment
1.
Full height termination compartments with hinged doors shall be located side by
side separated by a steel barrier, with the high voltage compartment on the left.
The liftoff doors shall be equipped with stainless steel hinges to allow the doors to
be removed and door stops to hold the doors open if not removed while working in
8/15/2025
26 12 19-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
the compartments. The high voltage compartment shall be accessible only after
the door to the low voltage compartment has been opened. To facilitate making
connections and permit cable pulling, the doors shall be removable. The inside
base of the transformer sill shall have a flange for anchoring the cabinet to the
equipment pad. Removable door sill on compartments shall be provided to permit
rolling or skidding of unit into place over conduit "stub-ups" in foundation.
2.
High voltage termination compartment locking provisions shall be provided in
accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 utilizing a captive hex-head bolt that is
removeable with normal tools. Enclosure security shall conform with IEEE
C57.12.20. Low voltage termination compartment door shall have a 3-point latch
(top, bottom, middle) and be lockable with at least one padlock.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, termination compartments shall be
designed for conduit entry from below.
4.
Termination compartment depth shall be as required to accommodate all
terminations and accessories specified herein and shown on the Drawings on both
the primary and secondary sides. Provide extended-depth compartments where
required.
5.
Each transformer shall be provided with the following labels, designed for outdoor
application, permanently affixed to the door of each termination compartment.
a.
Danger Hazardous Voltage decal
(Shall be centered on the inside of the high voltage termination compartment
door)
b.
Secondary Voltage label
(Shall be centered 4-6 inches above the Danger Hazardous Voltage decal)
c.
kVA Rating label
(Shall be centered 4-6 inches above the Secondary Voltage decal).
d.
“Non-PCB's" label in conformance with EPA 40 CFR Part 761 (installed on
outside of the high voltage termination compartment door)
6.
A permanently marked diagrammatic instruction nameplate shall be located inside
the low voltage termination compartment door and be in accordance with all
provisions contained in IEEE C57.12.34.
F. Terminations
1.
High voltage terminations shall be dead front with universal bushing wells and
dead front inserts. Bushings shall be rated for 200A load-break.
8/15/2025
26 12 19-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
High voltage terminations shall be radial configuration.
3.
The low voltage terminations shall be live front with spade type externally clamped
bushings for phase connections and the neutral (if present). Spades shall be tin-
plated with NEMA 2-hole spacing with holes spaced per IEEE C57.12.34. Spades
shall be the appropriate horizontal length with the required hole pairs to support
the number of cables to be terminated as shown on the Drawings. Low voltage
bushings shall be supported with an insulating material in a manner designed to
counteract any downward forces resulting from the connection of multiple cables to
the bushings.
a.
Where a neutral termination is provided, the spade shall be fully insulated
from all connections and the tank. A ground pad shall be provided on the
outer surface of the tank with one or more externally removable ground
straps suitably sized for the short circuit rating of the transformer provided
and connected between the neutral bushing and the ground pad.
4.
Cable terminations at the transformers shall be as specified in Section 26 05 13 –
Medium Voltage Cables and Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Conductors and
Cables.
G. Coolant and Insulating Fluid
1.
Coolant and insulating fluid shall be less flammable/high fire point as defined per
the NEC. The transformer shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the
latest edition of Article 450 of the NEC and in accordance with the requirements of
the testing and listing agency of the liquid.
2.
All transformer insulating fluid shall be bulk tested for polychlorinated biphenyls
(PCBs) per ASTM D 4059 and certified, upon request, as having no detectable
level of PCB.
H. Fusing
1.
The fusing on the primary for each transformer shall be BAY-O-NET type oil
immersed fuses that are externally replaceable with a hot stick without opening the
transformer tank.
I.
Accessories and Appurtenances
1.
Furnish and install the following for each transformer under this Contract:
a.
An oil drain valve located outside of the primary and secondary termination
compartments. Valve shall be behind a hinged, lockable cover. Valve shall
8/15/2025
26 12 19-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
be accessible from outside the transformer without the need to open the
primary or secondary termination compartments.
b.
5kV distribution class lightning arresters for surge protection shall be
provided. For radial feed systems, three (3) arresters shall be provided.
Arresters shall be mounted in the high voltage compartment. Lightning
arrester MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) shall be 5 kV rms.
c.
Hot stick for operating internal switches and pulling fuses.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. The transformers shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by
the equipment manufacturer.
B. Prior to final completion of the work, all metal surfaces of the transformer shall be
cleaned thoroughly, and all scratches and abrasions shall be retouched with the same
lacquer as used for shop finishing coats.
C. Adjust primary taps such that the secondary voltage is within two (2) percent of rated
voltage.
3.02
TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General
Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required:
1.
Witnessed Shop Tests
a.
None required.
2.
Certified Shop Tests and Reports
a.
Submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus.
b.
Submit notarized and certified copies of all test reports.
c.
The transformers shall be given routine factory tests in accordance with the
requirements of the IEEE and NEMA standards. Temperature rises may be
certified from basic design. The tests shall be:
d.
Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection of
each unit and at the tap extremes of one unit only of a given rating.
8/15/2025
26 12 19-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1)
Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection and on all tap connections.
2)
Polarity and phase-relation tests on the rated voltage connections.
3)
No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
4)
Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
5)
Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage
connection of each unit and on the tap extremes of one unit only of a
given rating.
6)
Applied potential test.
7)
Induced potential tests.
3.
Field Tests
a.
Field tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified
in the General Conditions, Division 01, and NETA Acceptance Testing
Specifications, latest edition. All visual and mechanical inspections shall be
performed. All electrical tests shall be performed, including optional tests.
b.
Upon energization of each transformer, the Contractor shall take a sample of
the transformer insulating liquid in accordance with ASTM D-923 to be
analyzed and establish a baseline for future analysis. Analysis shall be
performed by an independent testing laboratory that regularly engages in
transformer insulating liquid testing. A report of the findings shall be
submitted to the Engineer and Owner. The sample shall be tested for the
following (minimum):
1)
Dielectric breakdown voltage per ASTM D-877 and/or ASTM D-1816.
2)
Acid neutralization number per ASTM D-974
3)
Specific gravity per ASTM D-1298
4)
Interfacial tension per ASTM D-971 or ASTM D-2285
5)
Color per ASTM D-1500
6)
Visual condition per ASTM D-1524
7)
Measure dissipation factor or liquid power factor per ASTM D-924
8)
Perform dissolved gas analysis per IEEE C57.104 or ASTM D-3612.
8/15/2025
26 12 19-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
26 24 13-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 24 13
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in satisfactory operation the low
voltage switchboards (SWBDs) as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
B. Reference the following Specification Sections:
1.
Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements
2.
Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
3.
Section 26 29 20 – Low Voltage Active Harmonic Filter System
4.
Section 26 09 16 – Electric Controls and Relays
5.
Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices
C. The SWBD line-ups shall contain circuit breakers, power quality metering equipment,
control devices, and all accessories as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, and
as required to result in a complete and operable power distribution equipment assembly.
D. The Contractor shall obtain the SWBDs from one manufacturer who shall also
manufacture the structure and major equipment components, which includes, but is not
limited to, circuit breakers, power monitoring equipment, relays, instrument transformers,
controls, and other components of the equipment assembly. Sub-contracting of wiring is
not acceptable.
E. The SWBDs shall be assembled using NEMA rated components. Components designed
and built to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards are not
recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured, and labeled in compliance with IEC
standards is not acceptable.
F. Bid Options
1.
Provide a separate optional deductive bid item for switchboard rated 42 kAIC in
lieu of the base rating of 65 kAIC
8/15/2025
26 24 13-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.02
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All equipment shall be Listed by and shall bear the Label of Underwriter's Laboratories,
Incorporated (UL).
B. The equipment shall be designed, manufactured, and/or Listed to the following
standards as applicable:
1.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
NEMA PB 2 – Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).
3.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a.
UL 489 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures.
b.
UL 891 – Switchboards.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Per the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01
33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment
manufacturer and submit the following:
1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3.
Spare Parts List
4.
Proposed Testing Methods
5.
Reports of Certified Shop and Field Tests
6.
Manufacturer’s Representatives Installation Certification
7.
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.04
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submissions will be returned to the Contractor without
review for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings for each SWBD assembly shall include but not be limited to:
1.
Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter: Submittal shall include a
CD&E letter, or it will be rejected. Include all deviations comments, deviations, and
exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by both the Contractor and
Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. Attach a copy of this Specification Section.
Mark the left margin beside each paragraph/item with:
a.
"C" for full compliance
b.
"D" for deviation
c.
"E" for exception
d.
Provide a typewritten explanation for each "D" or "E" item. Handwritten
explanations are not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address drawing
deviations or exceptions.
2.
Bill of material list for each SWBD assembly including each SWBD compartment.
3.
Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying all electrical ratings.
This information shall include all equipment and devices comprising the SWBD.
4.
Complete assembly, layout, anchoring, and installation drawings with clearly
marked dimensions. Plan, front, and side view drawings, including overall
dimensions of the SWBD assembly. Identify shipping splits and show conduit stub-
up area locations on the Drawings.
5.
Approximate total shipping weight of each shipping split and/or equipment
assembly, and total assembled equipment line-up weight.
6.
Complete, custom one-line diagram and complete three-line diagram for the
SWBD line-up. The diagrams shall indicate the devices comprising the SWBD
assembly including, but not limited to, circuit breakers, control power and
instrument transformers, relays, control devices, and other equipment comprising
the complete assembly. Clearly indicate electrical ratings of all devices.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
7.
Complete, custom internal wiring diagram of each SWBD compartment/assembly.
Each wiring diagram shall include wire identification and terminal numbers.
8.
Internal compartment-to-compartment interconnection wiring diagrams including
wiring identification and terminal numbers.
9.
Example equipment nameplate data sheet.
10.
Nameplate schedule for each compartment.
11.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
12.
Manufacturer's written warranty statement.
D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the
Engineer can determine if the requirements of these specifications are being met.
Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and
similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment
items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted.
1.05
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals per the procedures
and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. The manuals shall
include:
1.
Instruction books and/or leaflets.
2.
Spare parts list.
3.
Final as-built construction drawings (updated from those included in the shop
drawings) incorporating all changes made in the manufacturing and installation
process.
4.
All other drawings, product information, and other materials originally included in
the shop drawings, updated as necessary to reflect as-built conditions.
1.06
SPARE PARTS
A. The SWBDs shall be furnished with all spare parts as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer. Spaces in SWBDs shall be furnished with installed spare circuit breakers
where indicated on the Drawings.
B. In addition to the spare parts recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall
furnish the following minimum spare parts for each SWBD assembly:
8/15/2025
26 24 13-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
Number
Required
Description
1 set
Fuses of each size and type provided.
1
Control power transformer of each size and type provided.
C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements for spare parts delivery and
handling requirements.
1.07
IDENTIFICATION
A. Each SWBD line-up shall be identified with the identification name and/or number
indicated on the Drawings (e.g., SWBD-GAC). A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a
conspicuous place on the SWBD.
B. Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical
Systems.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. Contractor and Manufacturer shall warrant that the material and workmanship of all
components and the operation of the equipment is per the latest design practices and
meets the requirements of this Specification.
B. Warranty shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Replace equipment/components found to be faulty, make changes in equipment
arrangement, and/or make adjustments necessary to meet the equipment or
functional requirements of this Specification.
2.
System rewiring and component substitution/rebuild.
3.
All accessories and appurtenances provided by the equipment manufacturer.
C. Warranty for each SWBD line-up shall be in effect for a period of 24 months following
final acceptance of the SWBD.
1.09
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN (ITP)
1.
Submit an Inspection and Test Plan (ITP), including those testing requirements
associated with switchboard assemblies. The ITP shall be prepared in accordance
with the NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications (ATS), Section 26 05 00 – Basic
Electrical Requirements, and the applicable provisions of the NEC.
2.
The ITP shall specifically include, at a minimum:
8/15/2025
26 24 13-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
Submission Timeline: The ITP shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
and approval before commencement of field testing.
b.
Test Program Content: Identification of test methods, test documentation
forms, equipment to be used, approved device settings, and qualifications of
testing personnel.
c.
Specific System Testing Requirements: As indicated on the drawings, or
otherwise required:
1)
Ground Fault Protection System Testing: Verification of ground fault
protection system using primary injection (per NEC 230.95(C))
2)
Arc Energy Reduction Testing: Verification of arc energy reduction
(maintenance mode) functionality using primary injection (per NEC
240.87(C))
d.
Functional Testing: Confirmation of operation of control power, trip units, arc
energy reduction activation indicators, and associated components.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by these specifications is intended to be standard equipment of
proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be
designed, constructed, and installed per the best practices of the trade, and shall
operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
B. It is the intent of these specifications that the SWBDs be manufactured and assembled
by a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for matching all components and
providing equipment that functions together as a system. Subcontracting of wiring and/or
third-party assembly is not acceptable.
C. The SWBDs shall be:
1.
QED-2 LV Series as manufactured by Square-D by Schneider Electric
2.
Pow-R-Line Xpert (PRLX) as manufactured by Eaton
3.
Reliagear LVSB as manufactured by ABB
2.02
SWITCHBOARDS
A. General
1.
The SWBD assemblies shall be UL 891 Listed and bear a UL label indicating the
UL File Number. Where indicated on the Drawings, SWBD shall be suitable for use
8/15/2025
26 24 13-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
as service equipment and shall be clearly marked as such on the enclosure
exterior.
2.
The SWBD manufacturer shall provide all the proper cable lugs for all cable
connections as required for the cable sizes shown on the 1-line drawing to avoid
field modifications. Cable lugs for connecting to SWBD bus and/or circuit breakers
1600A and larger shall be irreversible compression type. Lugs for all smaller bus
connections shall be mechanical type lugs. Reference the Drawings for the
quantity and size of conductors.
3.
Circuit breakers shall be molded-case circuit breakers as specified herein.
B. Ratings
1.
Voltage rating shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The entire assembly shall be
suitable for 600 volts maximum AC service.
2.
The equipment assemblies shall be suitable for operation at the available fault
current, 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical (minimum), unless indicated otherwise
on the Drawings. The equipment assemblies shall be labeled to indicate the
maximum available fault current rating, considering the structure, bussing, main/tie
circuit breaker(s), and feeder/branch circuit devices. The short circuit current rating
shall not be less than that specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. All
overcurrent protective devices in the SWBD assembly shall be fully rated, series
rated systems are not acceptable.
3.
Main breakers shall be 100% rated. Feeder circuit breakers shall be 100% rated
where indicated on the Drawings.
C. Structures
1.
SWBDs shall be deadfront type, completely metal enclosed, with self-supporting
sections that are NEMA Type 1 industrial use enclosures. The sections shall be
totally accessible from the front and the sides. Equipment assemblies requiring
rear access are not acceptable. The framework shall be of UL gauge steel.
Ventilation shall be provided as required.
2.
Enclosure interior and exterior finish paint color shall be ANSI 49 or 61 grey, using
the manufacturer’s standard painting process. The color of the back panels located
within the enclosure shall be white.
3.
All wire troughs shall have hinged doors.
4.
Structure front covers shall not obscure any portion of the rating information or trip
unit of any circuit breaker.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
Main Circuit Breaker Section: The SWBD assembly shall include main circuit
breaker section.
a.
Main sections shall have grounded steel barriers to provide separation and
arc flash isolation from adjacent sections.
b.
Main circuit breakers shall be configured for top or bottom conduit entry as
required. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the structure top or
bottom conduit entry requirements with the SWBD manufacturer.
6.
The distribution sections shall include group-mounted and/or individually mounted
feeder/branch circuit breakers which shall be fully front accessible and front
connectable. Circuit breaker connections to the switchboard bussing shall be bolt-
on, designed to firmly grip the bus bars under high-fault conditions.
D. IR Windows
1.
Provide Infrared (IR) viewing windows for main and single-mounted draw out
feeder devices. Manufacturer shall optimize the arrangement to maximize usable
space, locating IR viewing windows in wireway, termination compartments, or on
switchboard side to allow thermographic inspection of main and single-mounted
draw out feeder terminations without removing covers.
E. Bus
1.
All bus bars shall be tin-plated copper. The bussing shall have a sufficient cross-
sectional area, as per UL 891, to limit the temperature rise on any current-carrying
part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above a maximum ambient temperature of 40
degrees C. The fully rated main bus shall have an ampacity as indicated on the
Drawings, be 100 percent rated, and extend the full length of the equipment. The
ground bus shall be sized according to UL 891 and installed along the entire length
of the equipment assembly.
2.
Where a 3-wire bus is indicated on the Drawings, the SWBD shall be furnished
with three-phase bus bar and a ground bus. In addition, if a transformer with a
grounded wye secondary is shown on the Drawings to be supplying a 3-wire
SWBD, a neutral landing pad shall be furnished within the SWBD for each
incoming supply to provide a place to terminate the grounded conductor. Providing
a 4-wire bus (3 phases plus neutral) for a 3-wire system is not acceptable.
3.
The distribution SWBD bus shall be rated as required by the rating of the mounted
feeder/branch devices, including spares or spaces. A full-height vertical bus shall
be provided to accommodate future circuit breakers. Vertical bus that is less than
full height or does not provide at least 20 percent spare mounting capacity shall
not be acceptable.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
Where required by the NEC, a bonding jumper, sized per the NEC, shall be
installed between the SWBD ground bus and the neutral bus or neutral landing
pad.
F. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
1.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, circuit breakers shall be manually
operated, molded-case type, UL 489 Listed, rated 480 VAC, three-pole, with 100
ampere or larger frames.
2.
Overload protection shall be provided on all poles with trip settings as indicated on
the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings, breakers shall have solid-state
electronic trip units (ETUs) with features and adjustable segments as shown.
a.
Long-time, short-time, and ground fault segments shall have both adjustable
pickup and adjustable delay.
b.
Instantaneous segments shall have an adjustable pickup in addition to any
high-fault trip override.
c.
Trip units shall be Square D Micrologic 5.0A/6.0A, Eaton PXR25, or ABB
Ekip Touch.
d.
For circuit breakers of frame size 250A or larger, ETUs shall be field
interchangeable.
e.
All main circuit breaker trip units (regardless of size) as well as feeder circuit
breaker trip units for circuit breakers 1200A frame or larger shall be provided
with an arc energy reduction mode to reduce arc-flash energy. Arc energy
reduction mode shall be activated by a factory-wired illuminated selector
switch mounted on the SWBD door with lockable cover (or switch-and-cover
with separate indicator light). Provide dry contact from the trip unit to make
arc energy reduction mode status available for remote monitoring.
3.
Circuit breakers shall be provided with permanently mounted hardware for
padlocking the circuit breaker in the open position. Padlocking shall prevent
operation of the circuit breaker handle.
G. Current Transformers (CTs)
1.
Provide CTs and Bus Access Provisions as required for active front-end harmonic
mitigation.
2.
Current transformers (CTs) shall be dry type, for indoor service, insulated for 600
volts, 10 kV BIL. Design shall have a mechanical and thermal rating to withstand
8/15/2025
26 24 13-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
short-circuit current, stresses, and heating effects equal to the rating of the circuit
breaker of the application.
3.
Identify the CTs for polarity with standard marking or symbols. The CTs shall be
capable of carrying rated primary current continuously without damage.
4.
Run secondary wiring from CTs in suitable wiring trough, or conduit, to proper
short-circuiting type terminal blocks for connection to relays, instruments, and
other devices.
5.
Door-mounted test blocks for all CTs in the SWBD shall be provided.
H. Potential Transformers (PTs)
1.
Any potential transformers (PTs) shall be indoor dry type, single-phase, 60 hertz.
2.
PTs shall have a 10kV BIL and an accuracy classification determined according to
ANSI Standards. The PTs shall be suitable for 0.3 metering accuracy at the
burden to be served for the required devices plus 20 percent. Primary and
secondary voltages shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Connect secondaries to potential buses as required. Protect PTs with primary and
secondary fuses. Protect primary side with current-limiting fuses.
4.
Door mounted test switches for all PTs in the SWBD shall be provided. Test switch
wiring shall be plainly marked to indicate the respective circuits to each pole of the
switch.
I.
Control Power Transformers (CPTs)
1.
Provide 480 to 120 VAC control power transformers, as required for power quality
meters, trip units, displays, and other control-related loads. Transformers shall be
sized with sufficient capacity and inrush margin for all connected loads.
2.
Protect control power transformers with both primary and secondary fuses.
3.
The primary shall be protected with current-limiting fuses and preceded by a
manual disconnect switch.
4.
Each control power transformers shall be sized to support, at a minimum, the
following control loads:
a.
Constant power for all trip unit controls and displays in the assembly.
5.
Provide separate control power transformers for any ancillary loads separate from
those used for the control circuits identified above.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
J.
Control Wiring and Control Terminal Blocks
1.
Wire and factory test the SWBD to verify compliance with the functional and
operational requirements described in the Drawings and Specifications.
2.
All control wiring shall be No. 14 AWG (minimum).
a.
Power wiring shall be sized for the maximum load rating of the connected
unit; but not less than No. 12 AWG.
b.
For current transformer (CT) circuits, use No. 12 AWG. Where reduced
resistance is required, No. 10 AWG or larger shall be used.
c.
All wiring shall be type MTW rated for 105°C.
3.
Route control wires for outgoing or "compartment-to-compartment" interconnecting
wiring to master terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips numbered in
agreement with the manufacturer's detailed wiring diagrams. Provide a minimum of
10 percent (10%) spare terminal blocks for each circuit breaker and auxiliary
compartment.
4.
Terminal blocks for control wiring shall be provided per Section 26 09 16 – Electric
Controls and Relays.
5.
Number wiring with shrink-type tag devices at both ends consistent with the
manufacturer's detailed wiring diagrams. Duplication of wire numbers and terminal
block numbers is not acceptable.
6.
All control wiring shall be neatly laced and include sufficient slack to maintain
flexibility at hinge locations.
K. Power Monitoring, Instruments, and Control Devices
1.
Where indicated on the Drawings, provide power monitors with door-mounted
graphic display modules. Power monitors shall be one of the following:
a.
PowerLogic ION7650 as manufactured by Square D by Schneider Electric,
b.
PXM1300 Series as manufactured by Eaton
c.
EPM 9900P by GE Multilin.
d.
The power monitor manufacturer shall match the manufacturer of the circuit
breakers and other components of the SWBD assembly.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
e.
Provide all associated potential transformers (PTs), current transformers
(CTs), control power supplies, communication modules, and wiring
necessary to deliver a complete and functioning power monitoring system,
whether shown explicitly on the Drawings or required for proper operation.
2.
Power monitors shall include:
a.
Sufficient on-board memory to store up to 50,000 user-defined event files
b.
An Ethernet network port supporting Modbus TCP/IP communications.
c.
Any necessary gateways or interface hardware necessary to integrate with
the control system.
d.
Monitoring and communication of the following minimum parameters:
1)
Current (all phases).
2)
Voltage (all phases).
3)
kW, kVAR, kVA.
4)
Power Factor.
3.
Furnish instruments, meters, control devices, and associated circuitry to perform
all specified functions as specified per the drawings and these Specifications.
4.
Furnish and install control devices as required and/or shown on the Drawings. The
following control devices shall be provided as specified in Section 26 09 16 –
Electric Controls and Relays:
a.
Pilot devices (e.g., switches, LED indicating lights, etc.).
b.
Relays and timers, if required.
L.
Nameplates and Legend Plates
1.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates to identify each SWBD, each compartment,
and associated door mounted devices and internal components. Nameplates shall
be as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
2.
Equipment names and/or numbers and device identification text shown on the
Drawings shall be used as the basis to engrave the nameplates and legend plates.
Where the equipment identification text would exceed the capacity of the SWBD
manufacturer’s standard nameplate/legend plate size, the manufacturer shall
provide larger nameplates and/or additional nameplates as necessary.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
Abbreviating equipment names/numbers and device identification text is not
acceptable.
3.
Provide a master nameplate listing SWBD designation, voltage rating, ampere
rating, short circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order number, and item
number.
4.
Control components mounted as part of the assembly, such as fuse blocks, control
relays, pushbuttons, switches, and similar devices, shall be suitably marked for
identification corresponding to appropriate designations on the manufacturer's
wiring diagrams.
M. Warning Signs
1.
Provide a minimum of two (2) warning signs on the front of the SWBD line-up (and
two (2) on the rear, where the rear of the line-up is accessible).
a.
Signs shall be construction of red laminated plastic with white engraved
lettering approximately ½-inch in height.
b.
Signs shall read: "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE"
c.
Provide arc-flash hazard warning label in accordance with NFPA 70, Article
110.16(A).
d.
Provide available fault current label in accordance with NFPA 70, Article
408.6, including calculation date.
N. Source Quality Control
1.
Completely assemble, wire, and test SWBDs at the factory. Detailed inspections
before and after assembly shall assure correctness of design and workmanship.
Provide groups of wires leaving the shipping-assembled equipment with terminal
blocks with suitable numbering strips.
2.
After assembly, provide the SWBDs with lifting channels having eyebolts for
attachment of crane slings to facilitate lifting and handling each shipping-assembly
unit. These lifting channels shall be removable after equipment is placed on
permanent foundations.
O. Accessories
1.
SWBD accessories shall be provided as follows:
a.
Provide an optional line item quote for a 4” infrared inspection port in the
front door of each main circuit breaker section. IR ports shall be located to
8/15/2025
26 24 13-14
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
allow IR observation of the cable terminations within the compartment. IR
ports shall meet the requirements of IEEE C37.20.2, shall maintain the
NEMA rating of SWBD enclosure when in use.
P. Surge Protective Devices
1.
Surge protective devices (SPD) shall be provided integral to the SWBD enclosure,
as indicated on the Drawings. See Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices
for SPD requirements.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Prior to equipment purchase, the Contractor shall verify by field measurement that the
available space is sufficient to accommodate the switchboard, including all required
working clearances, conduit entry locations, and installation tolerances. Equipment
dimensions shall be coordinated with actual site conditions and the approved shop
drawings. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies prior to procurement.
B. The SWBD shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings and per the
manufacturer's installation instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be
included with the equipment at time of shipment. The equipment shall be suitably
protected until accepted by the Owner.
C. The equipment shall be installed and checked per the manufacturer's recommendations.
This shall include but not limited to:
1.
Checking to ensure that the pad location is level to within .125 inches over 3 feet in
any direction.
2.
Checking to ensure that all bus bars are torqued to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.
Assemble all shipping sections, remove all shipping braces, and connect all
shipping split mechanical and electrical connections.
4.
Secure assemblies to foundation or floor channels.
5.
Inspect and install all circuit breakers in their proper places.
6.
Install power cable lashing as outlined in the manufacturer’s installation
instructions for the equipment.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-15
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.02
PAINTING
A. Prior to final completion of the work, all metal surfaces of the equipment shall be cleaned
thoroughly, and all scratches and abrasions shall be retouched with the same coating as
used for factory finishing coats.
3.03
TESTING AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. All tests shall be performed per the requirements of the General Conditions and Division
01. The following tests are required:
1.
Witness Shop Tests
a.
Shop witness testing is not required.
2.
Certified Shop Tests and Reports
a.
Submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus.
b.
Submit notarized and certified copies of all test reports, prior to shipment. At
a minimum, the entire SWBD assembly must undergo a quality inspection
before shipment. This inspection shall include, but is not limited to, the
following:
1)
Physical inspection of the structure and the electrical conductors,
including bussing, general wiring, and units.
2)
General electrical tests including power circuit phasing, control circuit
wiring, instrument transformers, meters, ground fault system, and
device electrical operation.
3)
AC dielectric tests of the power circuits and control circuits.
4)
Verify presence and legibility of all Markings and labels, including
instructional, Underwriters Laboratory (UL), and inspector's stamps.
c.
The manufacturer shall use integral quality control checks throughout the
manufacturing process to maintain the correctness of the SWBD.
3.
Field Tests
a.
Field testing shall be performed in accordance with the General Conditions,
Division 01, the latest edition of the NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications
(ATS), and Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements.
b.
8/15/2025
26 24 13-16
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.04
FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
A. All adjustable protective device settings shall be set in the field by the entity responsible
for protective device setting and testing as specified in Section 26 05 00 – Basic
Electrical Requirements, per the settings designated in the contractor-completed
coordination study per Section 26 05 73.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
26 24 19-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 24 19
LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in satisfactory operation, the motor
control centers as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall obtain the motor control centers from one manufacturer who shall
also manufacture the enclosure and major equipment components, which includes, but
is not limited to, motor starters, motor controllers, circuit breakers, power monitoring
equipment, and other components of the equipment assembly as indicated on the
Drawings. Subcontracting of wiring is not acceptable.
C. The motor control center shall be assembled using NEMA rated components.
Components designed and built to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured and labeled in
compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable.
D. Confirm all motor horsepower ratings, equipment loads, and control requirements
against approved shop drawings. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer.
E. Confirm all required instrumentation and control wiring for system completeness. Report
any discrepancies to the Engineer.
F. Bid Options
1.
Provide a separate optional deductive bid item for MCCs rated 42 kAIC in lieu of
the base rating of 65 kAIC
2.
Intelligent MCCs with associated expansion modules, as outlined below
G. Reference the following Specification Sections:
1.
Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements
2.
Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Conductors and Cables
3.
Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
4.
Section 26 09 16 – Electric Controls and Relays
5.
Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices
8/15/2025
26 24 19-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.02
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The equipment shall be designed, manufactured, and/or Listed to the following
standards as applicable:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers (IEEE):
a.
ANSI/IEEE C12.1 – Code for Electricity Metering.
b.
ANSI/IEEE C57.13 – Instrument Transformers.
2.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
b.
NEMA ICS 1 – Industrial and Control Systems General Requirements.
c.
NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and
Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts.
d.
NEMA ICS 18 – Motor Control Centers.
3.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).
4.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a.
UL 489 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures.
b.
UL 845 – Motor Control Centers.
c.
UL 508 – Standard for Industrial Control Equipment
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1.
Shop Drawings.
2.
Spare Parts List.
3.
Proposed Testing Methods and Reports of Certified Shop and Field Tests.
8/15/2025
26 24 19-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
Manufacturers Installation Certification
5.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section.
1.04
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings for each motor control center shall include but not be limited to:
1.
A compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter: Submittal shall include a
CD&E letter, or it will be rejected. Include all deviations comments, deviations, and
exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by both the Contractor and
Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. Attach a copy of this Specification Section.
Mark the left margin beside each paragraph/item with:
a.
"C" for full compliance
b.
"D" for deviation
c.
"E" for exception
d.
Provide a typewritten explanation for each "D" or "E" item. Handwritten
explanations are not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address drawing
deviations or exceptions.
2.
Product data sheets for all equipment comprising each MCC.
3.
Equipment nameplate data sheet.
4.
Approximate total shipping weight of each shipping split.
5.
Plan, front elevation, and side view drawings with overall dimensions. Identify
shipping splits and conduit stub-up area.
6.
Internal schematic and point-to-point wiring diagrams for each motor starter and/or
motor control unit. Standard wiring diagrams that are not custom created by the
manufacturer for the motor control centers for this project are not acceptable. One
wiring diagram which is typical for an equipment group (e.g. screw pumps,
equalization basin pumps, backwash pumps) is not acceptable. Each wiring
8/15/2025
26 24 19-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
diagram shall include wire identification and terminal numbers. Indicate all devices,
regardless of their physical location, on the diagrams. Identify on each respective
wiring diagram specific equipment names and equipment numbers consistent with
those indicated on the Drawings.
7.
Complete single-line diagrams for each motor control center showing circuit
breakers, motor starter units, motor controllers, and other equipment connected to
the bus in the MCC. Indicate electrical ratings of equipment and devices on these
single-line diagrams or in a tabular schedule format. Ratings shall include starter
size and type, motor circuit protector continuous current rating, circuit breaker
frame size and trip rating, instrument transformers, meters, relays, timers, control
devices, motor horsepower and full load current, and similar information.
8.
Bill of material schedule for each motor control center and each motor control unit
(starter, feeders, and associated devices).
9.
Nameplate schedule for each motor control center bucket.
10.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
11.
Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
12.
Manufacturer’s Warranty Statement
13.
Table listing all motor loads connected to the motor control center. Table shall
include the full load amps and locked rotor amps of the APPROVED motors. Final
approval of MCC shop drawings cannot be given until all motor loads for MCC
have been reviewed, approved, and shown in this table.
D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the
Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met.
Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and
similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment
items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the
procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. The
manuals shall include, but not be limited to:
1.
Instruction books and/or leaflets.
2.
Spare parts list.
8/15/2025
26 24 19-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.
Final as-built construction drawings (updated from those included in the Shop
Drawings) incorporating all changes made in the manufacturing and installation
process.
4.
All other drawings, product information, and other materials originally included in
the Shop Drawings, updated as necessary to reflect as-built conditions.
1.06
SPARE PARTS
A. MCCs shall be furnished with installed spare circuit breakers and/or motor
starters/controllers where indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide all manufacturer-recommended spare parts as an optional line item. Coordinate
final spare parts purchased with the Owner. In addition, provide a separate line item cost
adder for the following spare parts for each motor control center:
Number
Required
Description
1
Circuit breaker of each type, size, and rating provided (except main circuit
breakers).
1
Motor circuit protector (MCP) for each type, size, and rating provided.
1
Relay of each type and size provided.
1
Starter coil and complete set of contacts for each size and type of starter
provided.
2 sets
Fuses of each size and type provided.
1
Control power transformers of each size and type provided.
1
Pilot device (e.g., pushbutton, selector switch, etc.) complete with contact
blocks and legend plates for each type, color, size, and rating provided.
C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements for spare parts delivery and
handling requirements.
1.07
IDENTIFICATION
A. Each motor control center shall be identified with the identification number indicated on
the Drawings (e.g., MCC-DF, etc.). A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a
conspicuous place on each motor control center. Nameplates shall be as specified in
Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.08
WARRANTY
8/15/2025
26 24 19-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
A. Contractor and Manufacturer shall warrant that the material and workmanship of all
components and the operation of the equipment is in accordance with the latest design
practices and meets the requirements of this Specification.
B. Warranty shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Replace equipment/components found to be faulty, make changes in equipment
arrangement, and/or make adjustments necessary to meet the equipment or
functional requirements of this Specification.
2.
System rewiring and component substitution/rebuild.
3.
All accessories and appurtenances provided by the equipment manufacturer.
C. Warranty for each MCC line-up shall be in effect for a period of 24 months following final
acceptance of the MCC.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide factory-standard motor control center equipment with a documented record of
reliable performance. Equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in
accordance with recognized industry best practices, and shall function as intended when
installed as shown on the Drawings.
B. All components of the motor control center shall be provided supplied by a single
manufacturer. That manufacturer shall be solely responsibility for the integration and
compatibility of all components to ensure complete and functional system performance.
The motor control center manufacturer shall also be the manufacturer of the motor
controllers. Third-party sourcing or assembly of these components is not acceptable.
C. Acceptable motor control centers products shall be:
1.
Intelligent Model 6 with Modbus TCP/IP communications, manufactured by Square
D by Schneider Electric
2.
Freedom series, manufactured by Eaton
3.
Centerline 2100, manufactured by Allen-Bradley
2.02
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
A. General
8/15/2025
26 24 19-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
The motor control centers shall be 600 VAC class suitable for operation on a
three-phase, 60 Hz system. The motor control centers and their components shall
conform to the requirements of applicable standards of NEMA ICS 2 and
Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. UL 845. Wiring shall be NEMA ICS 18 Class II,
Type B. Each vertical section shall be a NEMA type 1 (gasketed) or NEMA 12
industrial use enclosure unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2.
The enclosures shall be cleaned, primed, and finish coated in accordance with the
manufacturer’s standard process. The pre-treatment process shall be a zinc
chromate primer followed by a “One Coat” paint process that is monitored to meet
the manufacturer’s specifications for paint color, texture, thickness, and durability.
Enclosure interior and exterior finish color shall be ANSI 49 or ANSI 61. The color
of the back panel/bucket located within the MCC enclosure shall be white.
3.
The motor control centers shall be capable of withstanding the fault current
available at its line terminals. Minimum bus bracing, withstand, and interrupting
ratings are specified herein.
4.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, each vertical section
shall be approximately 20 inches wide, and 90 inches high, 20 inches deep. No
section shall contain more than six NEMA Size 1 starters. Motor control centers
shown “back-to-back” on the Contract Drawings shall be complete motor control
assemblies placed back-to-back in the location shown. Motor control center
sections with common horizontal and/or vertical bus systems are unacceptable.
5.
Continuous horizontal wiring troughs shall be provided at both the top and bottom
of each section. These troughs shall line up to form a continuous wireway for the
full length of the motor control center. Each section shall be provided with a large,
continuous, full height vertical wiring trough in the right side of each section. Each
vertical wiring trough shall be furnished complete with tie bars for conductor
support.
6.
All control wiring shall be No. 14 AWG (minimum) labeled at each end in
accordance with the wiring numbers shown on the accepted shop drawings. Power
wiring shall be sized to suit the maximum horsepower rating of unit; No. 12 AWG
(minimum). Wiring shall be type MTW rated for 105°C. Wire color coding shall be
red for control and black for power. Wire numbers shall not be repeated in a motor
control center.
7.
Starter units shall contain the number of auxiliary contacts, unit-mounted pilot
devices and indicating lights, control relays, elapsed time meters, and other
devices as shown on the Drawings and required for the applications. A minimum of
two (2) normally open (NO) and two (2) normally closed (NC) spare contacts shall
be provided for each magnetic starter. These spare contacts shall be shown on the
submittal wiring diagrams.
8/15/2025
26 24 19-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
8.
The motor control centers shall be furnished with warning signs to notify
maintenance personnel of multiple sources of power within the motor control units,
as required.
B. Power
1.
The motor control centers shall be supplied from a 480V, 3-phase, 3 or 4 wire as
indicated on the Drawings, 60 Hz power source. The incoming power feeders shall
be sized as shown on the Drawings.
C. IR Windows
1.
Provide Infrared (IR) viewing windows for main and single-mounted drawout
feeder devices. Manufacturer shall optimize the arrangement to maximize usable
space, locating IR viewing windows in wireway, termination compartments, or on
MCC side to allow thermographic inspection of main and single-mounted drawout
feeder terminations without removing covers.
D. Bus
1.
Main horizontal bus shall be installed through all MCC sections, be made of tin-
plated copper, and have an ampacity rating as shown on the Drawings. Where a
4-wire bus is shown on the Drawings, a horizontal neutral bus shall also be
installed through all MCC sections, be made of tin-plated copper, and have an
ampacity to match the main horizontal bus.
2.
Full-height vertical bus shall be installed in all sections including those containing
spare units and "prepared" spaces. The vertical bus shall have an ampacity
sufficient to accommodate the units in each section but shall be no less than 300A.
Vertical bus for sections containing “prepared” spaces shall have an ampacity of
no less than 600A. Vertical bus shall be tin-plated copper.
3.
The bus shall be braced for 65,000A rms symmetrical at 480V unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings. The horizontal bus shall be effectively isolated from all
wiring troughs and other working areas. Vertical bus extensions shall be isolated
by rigid, UL recognized glass-polyester moldings to be a separate, self-supported
assembly. No extra safety jacks or similar devices shall be required to obtain a
dead-front condition, without the need for additional safety devices. Access shall
be provided for inspection and maintenance from the front. Bus sizing shall be in
accordance with UL 845 to limit the temperature rise on any current-carrying part
to a maximum of 65 degrees C above a maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.
4.
The horizontal ground bus shall be tin-plated copper and located in the bottom
horizontal wireway. The minimum size of the horizontal ground bus shall be ¼-inch
x 1 inch (6.35mm x 25.4mm) or 33% of the main horizontal bus ampacity,
whichever is greater.
8/15/2025
26 24 19-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
Compression lugs shall be mounted on the ground bus in each section, in the size
and quantity as required for the termination of system and equipment grounding
conductors.
6.
The vertical ground bus shall be tin-plated copper and be solidly connected to the
horizontal ground bus. This ground bus, in combination with the unit ground bus
stab, establishes unit grounding before the plug-in power stabs engage the power
bus. Conversely as the unit is withdrawn, grounding is maintained until after the
plug-in power stabs are disengaged, per UL 845.
E. Incoming Line Units
1.
Each incoming line unit shall contain a main circuit breaker or main lug-only
connections as indicated on the Drawings. Main lug-only sections shall include all
required buswork, fittings as required with UL-listed cable lugs sized for cables and
quantities shown on the Drawings. For bus ratings 1600A and above, provide
irreversible compression lugs. For smaller bus ratings, provide mechanical lugs. All
cable lugs shall be UL listed and suitable for copper or aluminum conductors, as
applicable.
2.
Main circuit breaker and main lug sections shall be configured for top or bottom
conduit entry as required. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor is responsible
for coordinating top or bottom conduit entry requirements with the MCC
Manufacturer.
3.
A neutral landing pad shall be furnished in the main circuit breaker section. A
neutral landing pad is required to terminate the grounded conductor from the utility
transformer in accordance with the NEC.
F. The Unit Compartments
1.
Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front door hinged to the
vertical structure. Each plug-in unit shall be supported and guided by a removable
unit support pan, so that the unit rearrangement is easily accomplished. The
rearrangement of the unit support pan from one location to the other shall be
accomplished without use of tools. After insertion, each plug-in unit shall be held in
place by at least one multi-turn latch, located at the front of the unit. The latch shall
be located for front accessibility and installation convenience. An additional
mechanical interlock shall be provided to prevent withdrawal of the unit from the
stationary structure with the operating mechanism in the ON position.
2.
The unit plug in power stabs shall be electromagnetically tin-plated copper to yield
a low resistance connection and designed to tighten during heavy current surges
and short circuits. The stab shall be backed by spring steel clips to provide and
maintain a high pressure, two-point connection to the vertical bus. They shall be
free floating and self-loading plug-in. Wiring from the unit disconnecting means to
8/15/2025
26 24 19-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
the plug-in stab shall be exposed at the rear of the unit. The power cable
terminations at the plug-in stab shall be mounted in a two-piece, glass polyester
support assembly. This support assembly shall provide a separate isolated
pathway for each phase, minimizing the probability of a unit fault condition
reaching the power bus system.
3.
NEMA Size 1 through Size 5 non-reversing starters shall be plug-in units. Size 1,
2, and 3 shall utilize stab assembly rated 100A. Stab assemblies for Size 4 and
Size 5 starters shall be rated for the starters maximum output current rating.
4.
An industrial, heavy-duty flange handle mechanism shall be supplied for the
control of each disconnecting means. This mechanism shall be engaged with the
disconnect device at all times as an integral part of the unit regardless of the unit
door position. The operator handles shall have an up-down motion with the down
position as off. The ON-OFF condition of the disconnecting means shall be
permanently marked on the handle operator. It shall be possible to lock the handle
in the "OFF" position with up to three (3) 3/8-inch diameter shackle padlocks and
in the "ON" position with one (1) 3/8 inch diameter shackle padlock.
5.
The operator handle of all units shall be interlocked with the door units so that the
disconnect means cannot be switched unless the door unit is closed. A means
shall be provided for purposely defeating the interlock during maintenance or
testing. This interlock shall also prevent opening the unit door unless the
disconnecting means is in the off position. An externally operated defeater
requiring the use of a screwdriver shall provide access to the unit without
interrupting service.
6.
The overload relays shall be resettable from the outside of the enclosure by means
of an insulated bar or button.
G. Isolation and Insulation
1.
Horizontal bus access covers and vertical bus covers shall isolate the energized
buses to guard against the hazard of accidental contact. These covers shall be
molded of a glass polyester material.
2.
The horizontal bus shall be isolated from the top horizontal wireway by a grounded
steel barrier. This barrier shall be removable to allow access to the bus and
connections for maintenance.
3.
The vertical bus cover shall provide unit plug-in openings which shall permit unit
plug-in stab assemblies to pass through and engage the vertical bus. The unit
plug-in openings shall be sized to minimize the probability of inadvertent contact
with the vertical bus.
8/15/2025
26 24 19-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
Isolation of unused stab openings shall be accomplished by use of a manual
shutter to close off the stab opening. These shutters shall be attached to the
structure so that when they are removed (to allow a stab connection) they are
retained in the structure and are readily accessible for use should a plug-in unit be
removed from the motor control center.
5.
All units shall be isolated from one another, above and below, by unit support pans
or steel barriers, which can remain in place when the units are withdrawn.
6.
Incoming line compartments shall be isolated from horizontal and vertical wireways
by steel barriers.
7.
A molded unit isolating barrier shall be provided to isolate the unit from the vertical
wireway.
H. Combination Motor Control Units
1.
Motor branch circuits shall be protected by motor circuit protectors (MCPs). MCP
sizes shall be selected by the MCC manufacturer based on motor nameplate and
full-load ampere (FLA) data shown on the one-line diagrams. The MCC
manufacturer shall compile this information into a schedule of MCC components
associated with each load, as required above. MCPs shall have an adjustable
instantaneous trip range from 800% to 1200% of motor nameplate FLA.
2.
The motor circuit protector shall be operated by a toggle type handle and shall
have a quick make, quick break overcenter switching mechanism that is
mechanically trip free from the handle, so that the contacts cannot be held closed
against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping shall be clearly indicated by
the handle automatically assuming a position midway between the manual ON and
OFF positions. All latch surfaces shall be ground and polished. All poles shall be
so constructed that they open, close, and trip simultaneously.
3.
Each pole of these motor circuit protectors shall provide instantaneous short circuit
protection by means of an adjustable magnetic only element. Contacts shall be of
non-welding silver alloy. Arc extinction must be accomplished by means of arc
chutes, consisting of metal grids mounted in an insulating support.
4.
The motor circuit protectors in combination with a contactor and overload relay
shall have an interrupting rating that matches the motor control center short circuit
rating at 480V.
I.
Motor Starters
1.
Motor starters shall conform to NEMA Standard ICS 1 and shall be for across-the-
line starting, unless otherwise indicated. IEC rated equipment is not acceptable
and shall be used as a basis for rejection of the equipment. The size of the starter
8/15/2025
26 24 19-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
shall be as required for the particular load. Minimum starter size shall be NEMA
Size 1. Size 1 and 2 starters shall be completely drawout type, so that units may
be withdrawn without disconnecting any wiring. Size 3 and 4 full-voltage, non-
reversing starters shall be drawout type after disconnecting power leads only.
Starters over three-space units high may be bolt-on type. A positive guidance
system shall be provided to assure proper alignment of wedge-shaped power
stabs in deadfront openings in vertical power bus.
2.
A suitable control disconnect device(s) to comply with the requirements of the NEC
shall be provided.
3.
Magnetic starters and contactors shall be electromagnetic vertical or horizontal lift
design with double break cadmium oxide silver contacts. Design shall meet or
exceed the requirements of UL and NEMA Standards. Coils shall be hot molded
construction to protect the coils from mechanical and environmental damage.
4.
Each starter shall be able to accommodate a minimum of three (3) auxiliary
contacts in addition to the hold-in contact.
5.
Each starter shall be supplied with a three-pole, manual test and reset overload
relay. The relay shall meet the requirements specified in this Section. The relay
shall be an:
a.
Tesys T LTMR as manufactured by Square D
b.
C440 as manufactured by Eaton
c.
E300 manufactured by Allen-Bradley
6.
Each motor starter coil shall be equipped with a surge-suppression device for
protection of the solid-state equipment (e.g. programmable logic controller) wired
as part of the control circuit.
7.
The Contractor and motor control center manufacturer shall review the Contract
Documents for additional requirements for space heaters, power factor correction
capacitors, and similar equipment which may not be specified in this Division or
shown on the Drawings. Control power transformers shall be fused on both the
primary and secondary sides. The minimum control power transformer VA
requirements are shown below. Control power transformers shall be sized as
required for the connected loads, plus 25% spare capacity.
a.
Size 1-75 VA
b.
Size 2-75 VA
c.
Size 3-200 VA
8/15/2025
26 24 19-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Size 4-300 VA
e.
Size 5-500 VA
8.
Provide cost and schedule impacts for intelligent MCCs equipped with the
following expansion modules:
a.
Expansion modules shall be supplied with four (4) input points and two (2)
output points. The output points shall offer direct control of motor starter coils
up to NEMA Size 5. The output points shall also provide direct control of
other electrical devices within the electrical ratings limits of the module.:
b.
Tesys T LMTE as manufactured by Square D Company,
c.
C440 as manufactured by Eaton,
d.
E300 as manufactured by Allen-Bradley.
J.
Circuit Breakers
1.
Where specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, or required, the main circuit
breaker(s) shall be rated for service entrance and bear a service entrance label.
2.
Circuit breakers shall be UL 489 Listed molded case type with trip and frame
ratings as indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, circuit breakers
shall be manually operable, with automatic trip-free operation, and shall provide
inverse-time-limit overload and instantaneous short-circuit protection. Where
indicated on the Drawings, circuit breakers shall be 100% rated.
3.
Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, circuit breakers shall be rated 480
VAC, 3-pole, and shall have 100-ampere or larger frames. The interrupting rating
shall match that of the MCC short circuit rating at 480V.
4.
Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, circuit breakers with smaller than
225-ampere frames shall be the thermal-magnetic type. Thermal and magnetic trip
elements may be fixed or adjustable. Horizontally mounted operator handles for
feeder circuit breaker units up to 225A are permissible if accepted in writing by the
Engineer.
5.
All circuit breakers with 225-ampere frames and larger, and smaller frame circuit
breakers where specifically indicated on the Drawings, shall have interchangeable
electronic trip units (ETU) and adjustable trip elements and time delays. Provide
electronic trip units with the adjustable functions indicated on the Drawings (e.g.,
Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground, etc.).
8/15/2025
26 24 19-14
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
6.
The MCC manufacturer shall provide all of the proper lugs for all cable
connections as required to avoid field modifications. Cable lugs for connecting to
circuit breakers 1600A and larger shall be irreversible compression type, lugs for
all smaller circuit breaker connections shall be mechanical type lugs. Reference
the Drawings for the quantity and size of conductors.
7.
For circuit breakers rated 1200A and larger, trip units shall be provided with a
reduced energy let-thru mode to reduce arc-flash energy. Provide a lockable
panel-mounted selector switch, normally open contacts, and a panel-mounted
indicator light for control and indication of reduced energy let-thru mode. Provide
all required appurtenances, factory wired, to enable the reduced energy let-thru
feature.
K. Terminal Blocks
1.
Terminal blocks associated with removable units within the motor control center
shall be provided as follows:
a.
Terminal blocks shall be mounted within the unit insert and in the front for
ease of accessibility.
b.
Pull-apart style terminal block assemblies shall be provided. Terminal block
assembly shall consist of a male and female component held together with
captive screws or positive retention clips. The terminal block assembly shall
be designed to withstand the effects of vibration, yet be able to be pulled
apart without difficulty. The terminals of the assembly shall be recessed to
isolate them from accidental contact. Terminal markings shall be provided for
the purpose of identifying terminations. Terminal strips shall be suitable for
use as a disconnecting means of foreign interlock voltages.
c.
For starters, Size 2 and smaller, terminate all starter wiring (power and
control) and external field wiring on terminal blocks provided in each unit.
d.
For starters, Size 3 and larger, terminate control wiring and external field
control wiring on terminal blocks provided in each unit.
2.
Terminal blocks associated with non-removable units within the motor control
center shall be provided in accordance with Section 26 09 16 – Electric Controls
and Relays.
3.
Provide a minimum of four (4) spare terminals in each terminal block assembly.
L.
Control Devices
8/15/2025
26 24 19-15
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Furnish and install control devices as required and/or shown on the Drawings. The
following control devices shall be provided as specified in Section 26 09 16 –
Electric Controls and Relays:
a.
Pilot devices (switches, indicating lights, etc.)
b.
Relays and timers
M. Nameplates
1.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates to identify the motor control center, each unit
compartment, door mounted devices, and internal components.
2.
Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical
Systems. Equipment names and numbers as indicated on the single line diagrams
shall be used as the basis to engrave the nameplates.
3.
Provide a master nameplate giving motor control center designation, voltage
rating, ampere rating, short circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order
number and item number.
4.
Control components mounted as part of the assembly, such as fuse blocks, control
relays, pushbuttons, switches, and similar devices, shall be suitably marked for
identification corresponding to appropriate designations on the manufacturer's
wiring diagrams.
N. Future Space Requirements
1.
Provide spaces for future combination starter and other units in the motor control
centers. Furnish spaces with hardware to accommodate future plug-in control unit
without modification of vertical sections. Provide the number of spaces required for
future units as indicated on the Drawings, minimum.
2.
Provide additional vertical sections to ensure total number of spaces as indicated
on the Drawings. The number of vertical sections is contingent upon specific
manufacturer's final proposed and Engineer-accepted configuration of motor
control center units.
O. Motor Control Center Additions
1.
The Contractor shall furnish and install complete motor control center sections or
individual motor control center units to be added to existing motor control centers
in accordance with these Specifications and as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
These additions shall be of the same manufacturer, type, rating, and color as the
existing motor control centers. Furnish and install all hardware necessary to
8/15/2025
26 24 19-16
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
connect the buses of the new and existing motor control centers, including ground
buses. Enclosures shall match existing.
P. Motor Control Center Modifications
1.
The Contractor shall modify existing motor control centers and specific motor
control center units as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. These
modifications include, but are not limited to, additions of door mounted pilot
devices, modifications to existing motor control circuits and other work.
Q. Power Monitors
1.
Where indicated on the Drawings, provide power monitors with door-mounted
graphic display modules. Power monitors shall be PowerLogic ION7650 as
manufactured by Square D Compnay, PXM1300 Series as manufactured by
Eaton, or EPM 9900P by Multilin. Power monitor manufacturer shall match the
manufacturer of the other components of the MCC assembly. All PTs and CTs,
power supplies, wiring, and other devices indicated on the Drawings, and as
required, shall be provided for a complete monitoring system.
2.
Power monitors shall be provided with sufficient on-board memory to store up to
50,000 user-defined event files and a network communications port to
communicate with the control system via Modbus TCP/IP protocol. Provide any
necessary hardware gateways to provide this communication capability. The
following parameters shall be communicated as a minimum:
a.
Current (all phases).
b.
Voltage (all phases).
c.
KW, KVAR, KVA.
d.
Power Factor.
R. Surge Protective Devices
1.
Surge protective devices (SPD) shall be provided either integral to the MCC
enclosure or as a separate unit external to the MCC enclosure, as indicated on the
Drawings. See Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices for SPD
requirements.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
8/15/2025
26 24 19-17
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
A. The motor control centers shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Install motor control centers to allow complete unit door swing required for unit removal.
This is specifically required where a vertical section of motor control center is installed
next to a wall to the left of the motor control center section.
C. Where motor control center structures are located away from walls to allow bottom
conduit entry, the Contractor shall furnish and install sheet metal coverings for openings
along the sides and top of the motor control center line-up. The purpose of the coverings
is to minimize dust, dirt, and undesirable materials from collecting behind the equipment.
The sheet metal coverings shall be of the same material, gauge, and finish as the motor
control center.
D. Motor control centers shall be furnished with anchor bolts as required for aligning and
mounting. Floor channels with end covers shall be of type recommended by the
manufacturer and shall be furnished for installation in a concrete pad.
E. All field wiring that is terminated directly to a unit within the motor control center shall be
neatly routed in a manner that does not hinder the ability to service, adjust, or replace
components within that unit. Field wiring shall be properly anchored to the motor control
center and individual unit structures.
F. Prior to final completion of the work, all metal surfaces of the equipment shall be cleaned
thoroughly, and all scratches and abrasions shall be retouched with the same lacquer as
used for shop finishing coats.
3.02
TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General
Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required:
1.
Witnessed Shop Tests
a.
None required.
2.
Certified Shop Tests and Reports
a.
Submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus.
Submit notarized and certified copies of all test reports.
b.
As a minimum, the entire motor control center shall go through a quality
inspection before shipment. This inspection shall include, but is not limited
to, the following:
8/15/2025
26 24 19-18
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1)
Physical inspection of the structure and the electrical conductors
including bussing, general wiring, and units.
2)
General electrical tests including power circuit phasing, control circuit
wiring, instrument transformers, meters, ground fault system, and
device electrical operation.
3)
AC dielectric tests of the power circuits and control circuits.
4)
Markings/labels, including instructional type, Underwriters Laboratory
(UL), and inspector's stamps.
3.
The manufacturer shall use integral quality control checks throughout the
manufacturing process to maintain the correctness of the motor control center.
B. Field Tests
1.
Field tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in the
General Conditions, Division 01, and NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications,
latest edition.
3.03
FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
A. All adjustable settings of circuit breakers shall be set in the field by the entity responsible
for protective device setting and testing as specified in Section 26 05 00 – Basic
Electrical Requirements, in accordance with the settings designated in the coordination
study.
B. The settings of the motor circuit protectors and overload relays shall be developed and
set by the entity responsible for protective device setting and testing as specified in
Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements. The settings shall be in accordance
with NEC requirements based on the motor nameplate data of the motors installed.
3.04
SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified, factory-trained manufacturer's
technical representative who shall adequately supervise the installation and testing of all
equipment furnished under this Contract. The manufacturer's representative shall certify
in writing that the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. No further testing or equipment startup may take place until this
certification is accepted by the Owner.
B. The manufacturer’s technical representative shall perform startup and functional testing
of the equipment as specified herein.
8/15/2025
26 24 19-19
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. The Contractor shall provide training for Owner personnel. Training shall be conducted
by the manufacturer's factory-trained representative who shall instruct Owner personnel
in operation and maintenance of all equipment provided under this Section. Training
shall be provided for two (2) sessions of two (2) hours each. Training shall be at times
coordinated with the Owner. Training shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions.
D. The services of the manufacturer's representative shall be provided for a period of not
less than as follows:
1.
One (1) trip of one (1) working day during the installation and startup of the
equipment.
2.
One (1) trip of one (1) working day two (2) months before the warranty expiration
to identify any issues to be corrected under warranty.
3.
One (1) trip of one (1) working day to perform training as specified herein.
E. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation shall be at
the expense of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
26 29 23-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 29 23
LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, connect, test and place in satisfactory operating
condition all variable frequency drives (VFDs) as specified herein and indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Reference the following Specification Sections:
1.
Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements
2.
Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
3.
Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices
4.
Section 26 29 13.13 – Low-Voltage Enclosed Motor Controllers-Full Voltage
5.
Section 26 29 13.16 – Low-Voltage Enclosed Motor Controllers-Reduced Voltage
6.
Section 26 09 16 – Electric Controls and Relays
C. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the driven equipment manufacturer
and the VFD manufacturer to ensure that the VFD is sized properly to meet all the
requirements herein. This includes, but is not limited to, accounting for motor RPM and
variable or constant torque applications. Coordination shall occur prior to submittal. The
Contractor is responsible for including any costs related to equipment upsizing, conduit
and wire upsizing, etc. that results from selecting equipment with a higher full load amp
rating than was specified or used as the basis for design.
D. The variable frequency drives shall be assembled using NEMA rated components.
Components designed and built to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured, and labeled in
compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable.
1.02
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. VFDs shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as
applicable:
1.
NEMA 250 – Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
8/15/2025
26 29 23-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
IEEE 519 – Recommended Practice and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electric Power Systems
3.
NEMA ICS 7 – Adjustable-Speed Drives
4.
NEMA 61800-2 – Rating Specifications for Low Voltage Adjustable Frequency AC
Power Drive Systems
5.
UL 489 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures
6.
UL 508A – Standard for Industrial Control Panels (VFD Enclosure)
7.
UL 508C – Standard for Power Conversion Equipment (VFD)
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions are provided for clarity regarding the language used in this
Specification:
1.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) –The complete factory-packaged or integrated
assembly consisting of a VFD unit and all specified auxiliary components (e.g.,
disconnects, contactors, filters, and control devices) enclosed in a single
enclosure.
2.
VFD Unit –The solid-state power conversion device consisting of rectifier, DC bus,
and inverter sections, which modulates output voltage and frequency to control the
speed of an AC motor.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in General Conditions and
Section 01 30 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3.
Spare Parts List
4.
Reports of Certified Shop and Field Tests
5.
Manufacturer’s Field Start-up Report
6.
Manufacturer’s Representative’s Installation Certification
8/15/2025
26 29 23-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
7.
Pre- Equipment-Selection Harmonic Study Report
1.05
PRE-EQUIPMENT-SELECTION HARMONIC STUDY
A. A comprehensive pre-equipment-selection harmonic study shall be prepared by the
Contractor. The results of this study shall be submitted to the Engineer as part of the
required submittals. If this study indicate the need for additional tuned filters, line
reactors, isolation transformers, or other harmonic mitigation equipment, these shall be
supplied and included in the Bid. Indicate the proposed location of the harmonic
mitigation equipment in the submittal data. Location is subject to acceptance by the
Engineer.
B. The harmonic distortion values resulting from operation of all or any variable frequency
drive-driven motor-load combinations operating at full load shall be as defined in latest
edition of IEEE Standard 519.
C. System single line diagrams and field access to the plant site will be provided to the
Contractor for the purpose of providing this study. The contractor shall obtain from
others other information that may be necessary to complete this study. Input data and
other pertinent information used in harmonic study shall be coordinated by the
Contractor with the following:
1.
Input data/information/results of the short circuit fault analysis specified herein.
2.
Electrical system configuration and electrical equipment shop drawing submittal
data including, but not being limited to new non-linear loads, new linear loads, and
new capacitors.
1.06
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without
review for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings for each VFD shall include but not be limited to:
1.
Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter: Submittal shall include a
CD&E letter, or it will be rejected. Include all deviations comments, deviations, and
exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by both the Contractor and
Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. Attach a copy of this Specification Section.
Mark the left margin beside each paragraph/item with:
a.
"C" for full compliance
8/15/2025
26 29 23-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
b.
"D" for deviation
c.
"E" for exception
d.
Provide a typewritten explanation for each "D" or "E" item. Handwritten
explanations are not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address drawing
deviations or exceptions.
2.
Complete bill of material and catalog data sheets for all equipment and devices
comprising the VFD.
3.
Heat loss data for each VFD.
4.
Manufacturer’s warranty information.
5.
Product data sheets for all system components, including but not limited to:
a.
VFD units
b.
Harmonic correction devices and/or equipment, e.g. line reactors, passive
filters, and phase-shifting transformers
c.
Output reactors and/or output filters
d.
Pilot lights and pilot devices
e.
Control and timing relays
f.
Enclosure fans
g.
Contactors
h.
Power supplies
i.
Control power transformers
j.
Current transformers
k.
Potential transformers
l.
Circuit breakers and/or motor circuit protectors
m.
Fuses
n.
Terminal blocks (power, control, and shorting)
o.
Surge protective devices
8/15/2025
26 29 23-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
6.
Layout drawings of the VFD that include:
a.
All cabinet or enclosure dimensions, access details, and weights.
b.
Required clearances around the enclosure, e.g. ventilation.
c.
Conduit entry areas and/or stub-up locations.
d.
Nameplate sizes, colors, and locations.
e.
Physical arrangement of door mounted devices located on the variable
frequency drive enclosure.
f.
Physical arrangement of all interior components, including DIN-rail-mounted
devices.
General "catalog data sheet" layout drawings which are not specific to the
systems specified herein are not acceptable.
7.
Custom schematic and interconnection wiring diagrams of all electrical work,
including but not limited to, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, contactors,
instrument transformers, meters, relays, timers, control devices, terminal blocks
and identification numbers, wire numbers, and other equipment comprising the
complete system.
a.
These drawings shall be circuit specific for each motor-load combination
(e.g. Backwash Pumps, Equalization Basin Pumps, Screw Press, etc.).
Specific equipment names consistent with the Drawings shall appear on
each respective diagram.
b.
Indicate all devices, regardless of their physical location, on the schematic
diagrams.
c.
Electrical ratings of all equipment and devices shall be clearly indicated on
the schematic diagrams.
Standard schematics and wiring diagrams that are not custom created by the
manufacturer for the variable frequency drives for this project are not
acceptable.
8.
Confirmation of spare parts requirements as specified herein.
9.
Table listing all motor loads connected to the VFD. The table shall include the full
load amps of the APPROVED motors. Final approval of VFD shop drawings
cannot be given until all motor loads for each VFD have been reviewed, approved,
and shown in this table.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the
Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met.
Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from catalogs, and similar information
which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor
intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the
procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions, Section 01 30 00 –
Submittal Procedures and Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions.
B. Prior to completion and final acceptance of the project, the Contractor shall furnish and
install "as-built" wiring diagrams for each VFD. These final drawings shall be included in
the O&M manuals and an additional copy that is plastic laminated shall be securely
placed inside each VFD.
C. The O&M manual shall include the “as-commissioned” parameters of each VFD in both
print and digital formats.
D. If the VFDs require computer software or configuration, the O&M manual shall include
copies of all programming guides/manuals.
1.08
SPARE PARTS
A. The VFDs and accessories shall be furnished with all spare parts as recommended by
the equipment manufacturer. In addition to the manufacturer’s recommended spare
parts, the Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts:
1.
Two (2) sets of fuses for each size and type of fuse provided.
2.
One (1) HMI per type of HMI provided.
3.
One (1) set of enclosure air filters for each VFD.
4.
For each VFD unit without field-replaceable internals, furnish one (1) spare VFD
unit per size provided.
5.
For each VFD unit with field-replaceable internals, furnish one (1) fully functional
main control circuit board per VFD unit size provided.
B. The spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long-term storage, bearing
labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are
intended.
C. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain.
The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such spare parts until completion of
the Work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner.
D. Spare parts lists included with the shop drawing submittal shall indicate specific sizes,
quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of
packing material" are not acceptable.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory
control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those
parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same parts number.
1.09
WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall warrant that the material and workmanship of all components and
the operation of the VFDs and auxiliary equipment is in accordance with the latest
design practices and meets the requirements of this Specification.
B. Warranty shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Replace components found to be faulty and make changes in equipment
arrangement or make adjustments necessary to meet the equipment or functional
requirements or this Specification.
2.
System rewiring and component substitution/rebuild.
3.
All accessories and appurtenances provided by the VFD manufacturer.
C. The warranty shall be in effect for a period of 24 months following final acceptance of
each VFD.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be equipment of proven
performance. Equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance
with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as
shown on the Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall obtain the VFDs from one manufacturer who shall also manufacture
and assemble the enclosure and major equipment components including but not limited
to the VFD unit and bypass starters. The manufacturer shall have five years minimum of
experience in the manufacture of similar units and shall have a general distribution to the
electrical trade. Subcontracting of wiring and/or third-party assembly is not
acceptable. The VFD assembly shall be listed under UL 508A.
C. The VFDs shall be manufactured by Yaskawa, the Square D Company, Eaton or
Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley).
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the successful application and operation of the
entire drive and control system serving the motor and driven equipment. This includes
the responsibility for obtaining all load, torque, speed and performance requirements
8/15/2025
26 29 23-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
from the appropriate sources and integrating these into a VFD that fulfills the
requirements of this Specification.
2.02
VFD SYSTEMS
A. Operating Conditions
1.
The following operating conditions are applicable for all equipment of this
Specification.
a.
Humidity: 0-95%.
b.
Ambient Temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius.
c.
Altitude: up to 3,300 feet
B. Basic Design and Performance
1.
Each VFD shall be a complete alternating current electric drive system including all
the hardware and software necessary to accomplish variable speed operation of a
motor and load combination. VFDs shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements indicated on the Drawings and as described in these Specifications.
2.
Each VFD shall be suitable for operation as part of a 480 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hertz
power distribution system. The complete VFD system shall have a minimum short
circuit current rating of 65,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage.
3.
The Contractor is fully responsible for the review of the full Contract Documents
to determine specified motor speed, horsepower and full load ampere
requirements for each motor-driven load. In addition, the Contractor shall size and
select the VFD, and components as follows:
a.
Each VFD shall provide continuously, motor load current equal to 100% of
the direct on-line motor nameplate full load current.
b.
Each VFD shall be selected for Variable Torque (Normal Duty) or Constant
Torque (Heavy Duty) based on its respective load type served as shown in
the Load Type tables below.
Variable Torque (Normal Duty)
Load Types
Constant Torque (Heavy Duty)
Load Types
Vertical Turbine Pumps
Rotary Lobe Pumps
Submersible Non-Clog Pumps
Progressive Cavity Pumps
Dewatered Sludge Screw Conveyors
8/15/2025
26 29 23-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
The Load Type tables above are intended to exhaustively cover all possible
equipment controlled by VFDs to be provided under Division 26 for this
Contract. If a piece of equipment is found that is not explicitly listed in these
tables, this discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer (in
writing) immediately for resolution prior to submitting the Bid for this
Contract.
4.
Each VFD shall be suitable to operate, at times, on a limited power source engine-
generator set. The VFD shall be provided with equipment and devices to prevent
waveform distortion as specified herein.
5.
Each VFD shall be provided with control and sequence logic as specified herein
and indicated on the Drawings. Control and sequence logic shall be designed such
that the motor-load combination can be operated in the manual mode upon control
and sequence logic failure, including all necessary personnel and equipment
safety interlocks. Each VFD shall be designed such that specific control and
protection functions can be attained through simple programming by either factory
engineers or Owner's trained operating personnel. In addition, refer to Section 40
61 96 – Process Control Descriptions, for a description of the operation of each
VFD.
6.
Unless otherwise accepted in writing by the Engineer, VFDs shall be provided with
output reactors or filters to prevent elevated voltage levels at the motor terminals
that exceed the ratings of the inverter duty rated motor winding insulation.
a.
The Contractor is responsible for providing the VFD manufacturer with
estimated and field-verified cable lengths between each VFD and its
respective motor. The VFD manufacturer shall select and size the output
reactors or filters based on the cable lengths provided by the Contractor. Any
change in output filter or reactor selection and/or size from the Bid shall be
immediately brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing for resolution.
b.
The output filters or reactors shall be manufactured by TCI, MTE
Corporation, Mirus International, or engineer approved equal and shall be
sized by the manufacturer for IEEE 519 compliance
7.
Motor control circuits shall be wired in accordance with the requirements specified
herein and/or indicated on the Drawings.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. Components
1.
Each VFD shall contain the number of VFD units as shown on the Drawings and
required for the applications.
2.
Each VFD shall contain the harmonic correction equipment as shown on the
Drawings and required for the applications. Harmonic correction equipment shall
be as specified elsewhere in this Specification.
3.
Each VFD shall contain the number of auxiliary contacts, control power
transformer(s), pilot devices and indicating lights, control relays, elapsed time
meters, and other devices as specified herein, shown on the Drawings and
required for the applications. The following components shall meet the
requirements of Section 26 09 16 – Electrical Controls and Relays:
a.
Pilot devices (switches, indicating lights, etc.)
b.
Relays and timers
c.
Terminal blocks
4.
Power terminal blocks for VFD output to the motor shall be fixed-mounted to a
backplane or the enclosure. Mounting the terminal blocks on DIN rails is not
acceptable.
5.
Electrical bus, including ground bus, shall be tin-plated copper. Power and control
wiring shall be copper, color coded and identified in accordance with these
Specifications.
6.
Each VFD shall be of modular construction allowing normal maintenance and
repair to be done with ordinary hand tools. Design and install power electronic
component assemblies so that, where practicable, components can be individually
removed and replaced.
7.
Auxiliaries, including fans, that are required for a rated load operation at maximum
ambient temperature, shall be 100% redundant. New and unused spare
replacement fan(s) or air conditioning unit(s), shipped in original carton, may be
provided in lieu of 100% redundant auxiliaries if accepted in writing by the
Engineer.
8.
Circuit boards and electrical components shall meet the corrosion protection
requirements specified in these Specifications. Varnished or epoxy encapsulated
circuit boards and tropicalized contactors suitable for corrosive environments shall
be furnished.
9.
Circuit Breakers
8/15/2025
26 29 23-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
Where indicated on the Drawings, VFDs shall be protected by a UL 489
Listed circuit breaker.
b.
Unless otherwise indicated, circuit breakers shall be manually operable and
shall provide thermal-magnetic, inverse-time-limit overload, and
instantaneous short-circuit protection.
c.
Circuit breakers shall be molded case type, rated 480 VAC, 3 pole and have
100 ampere or larger frames. The interrupting rating shall match that of the
VFD short circuit rating at 480V.
d.
Overload protection shall be provided on all poles with trip settings as
indicated on the Drawings. Breakers of 225-ampere frames and larger shall
have interchangeable solid-state electronic trip units.
e.
Where indicated on the Drawings, shunt trip devices shall be provided to trip
a circuit from a remote location by means of a trip coil energized from a
separate circuit. A 120V shunt trip shall be capable of operating at 55% or
more of rated voltage. All other shunt trips shall be capable of operating at
75% or more of rated voltage.
D. Controls
1.
Each VFD shall be provided with automatic and manual controls as shown on the
Drawings and as required to comply with all Specifications. Controls and indicators
to accomplish operation and maintenance shall be located on the variable
frequency drive equipment assembly as specified herein and indicated on the
Drawings.
2.
The Elementary Control Schematics shown on the Drawings are representative
of design intent only. The manufacturer shall be responsible for providing all
additional components, controls, and internal wiring necessary to meet the design
intent.
3.
VFD circuitry shall be designed such that the enclosure cooling fans only run when
the VFD unit is producing output power. Designs that allow the enclosure cooling
fans to run continuously when the VFD unit is energized but not producing output
power are not acceptable. Fans that are used exclusively to provide cooling for the
VFD unit (and not the overall enclosure) are permitted to run continuously if
required by the VFD manufacturer’s design standards/practices.
E. Enclosures
1.
Equipment within the VFD enclosure shall be arranged so that it does not interfere
with the entry of conduits and cables into the enclosure.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
All pilot devices (selector switches, pushbuttons, indicating lights, etc.) and the
human machine interface (HMI, specified elsewhere herein) shall be door mounted
on the exterior of each VFD enclosure. Manipulation of the pilot devices or HMI,
viewing of the information on the HMI, or viewing that status of pilot devices shall
not require the VFD enclosure door to be opened.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, VFDs in non-hazardous locations,
shall be furnished with the following enclosure type and material of construction,
dependent upon the designation of the area in which they are to be installed. Area
designations are indicated on the Drawings.
Area Designation
Enclosure Type and Material
Indoor Wet Process Area
NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel
Indoor Dry Process Area
NEMA 12, Painted Steel
All Outdoor Areas
NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel
4.
VFDs shall not be installed in hazardous locations.
5.
NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 VFD enclosures shall be force ventilated with front
accessibility and the following:
a.
Enclosures shall be provided with externally accessible (door-mounted)
washable enclosure air intake filters that can be replaced while the enclosure
door remains closed.
b.
Enclosures shall be designed for bottom or top entry of conduits and cables
as required.
c.
Enclosures shall be finished in ANSI-61 gray enamel or in a color to match
the complete line-up of equipment as indicated on the Drawings and
accepted by the Engineer.
6.
NEMA 4X VFD enclosures shall be air conditioned, dead-front, with front
accessibility and the following:
a.
The air conditioning system shall utilize a heat-exchange method that allows
for cooling of the enclosure interior without circulating outside air through the
enclosure.
b.
Enclosures shall be furnished with tubular type enclosure space heaters.
Space heaters shall be rated at 500V or 250V and operated at 240V or
120V, respectively.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-14
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
VFDs shall be furnished with an additional control power transformer sized to
provide power exclusively for the air conditioning system and enclosure
space heater.
d.
VFDs shall be furnished with a tamper-resistant hinged cover with a clear
polycarbonate viewing window over the door-mounted pilot devices.
e.
VFDs shall be designed for bottom entry of cables/conduits only.
7.
Each VFD shall be designed such that rear access to the enclosure is not required
for operations, maintenance, or repair tasks.
8.
The Contractor shall reference the Drawings for maximum dimensions of the
VFDs. The Engineer shall be notified prior to the initial shop drawing submittal if
exceptions to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings are to be requested.
9.
Integrating VFDs into a motor control center assembly is not permitted unless
specifically shown as integrated on the Drawings.
10.
Enclosure doors shall have full length piano type hinges and shall be braced to
prevent sag when fully open.
11.
Each VFD enclosure shall be supplied with an industrial, heavy-duty flange-mount
handle mechanism for the operation of the VFDs disconnecting means as follows:
a.
The mechanism shall be engaged with the disconnect device at all times as
an integral part of the unit regardless of the unit door position.
b.
The operator handle shall have an up-down motion with the down position as
off. The ON-OFF condition of the disconnecting means shall be permanently
marked on the handle operator.
c.
It shall be possible to lock the handle in the "OFF" position with up to three
(3) 3/8-inch diameter shackle padlocks and in the "ON" position with one (1)
3/8-inch diameter shackle padlock.
d.
The operator handle shall be mechanically interlocked such that the
disconnecting means cannot be closed with the enclosure door open, nor
can the enclosure door be opened when the disconnecting means is closed.
A defeater mechanism shall be provided so that qualified personnel can
bypass these interlocks for maintenance and testing purposes. The defeater
mechanism shall allow the enclosure door to be opened without interrupting
the operation of the VFD.
F. Nameplates and Legend Plates
8/15/2025
26 29 23-15
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates and legend plates to identify each VFD and
associated door mounted devices and internal components. Nameplates shall be
as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
2.
Equipment names and/or numbers and device identification text shown on the
Drawings shall be used as the basis to engrave the nameplates and legend plates.
Where the equipment identification text would exceed the capacity of the VFD
manufacturer’s standard nameplate/legend plate size, the manufacturer shall
provide larger nameplates and/or additional nameplates as necessary.
Abbreviating equipment names/numbers and device identification text is not
acceptable.
3.
Control components mounted as part of the assembly, such as fuse blocks, control
relays, pushbuttons, switches, and similar devices, shall be suitably marked with
identification corresponding to appropriate designations on the manufacturer's
wiring diagrams.
2.03
VFD UNITS
A. The VFD unit shall be the Yaskawa GA800/U1000, Square D Altivar 600 series, Eaton
PowerXL DG1 series, or Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) PowerFlex 750 series.
B. Basic Design and Performance
1.
Each VFD unit shall be of adjustable frequency, adjustable voltage, pulse width
modulated (PWM) design. The units shall be microprocessor controlled, fully
digitally programmable, and capable of precise and repeatable speed regulation of
three phase 480 VAC NEMA Design A or B induction motors. Units for other than
NEMA Design A or B induction motors (e.g., NEMA Design C) shall be coordinated
with the requirements of that respective load.
2.
Each VFD unit shall consist of a semiconductor rectifier system, direct current link,
and pulse width modulated inverter. The inverter shall invert the direct current
voltage into an alternating current voltage at a frequency which shall be
proportional to the desired speed. This alternating current voltage and frequency
shall both vary simultaneously at a constant "Volts-Per-Hertz" ratio to operate the
motor at the desired speed.
3.
Each VFD unit shall operate the motor and produce full rated nameplate
horsepower at the motor output shaft without exceeding motor nameplate full load
current and with the motor not exceeding rated total temperature not including the
additional temperature increment that constitutes the motor service factor. Motor
shall retain its service factor when operated by the variable frequency drive.
4.
The overall efficiency of each VFD unit shall be a minimum of 95% when operating
the specified motor-load combination at rated voltage, frequency, and current.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-16
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
5.
Each VFD unit shall provide smooth, stepless changes in motor speed and
acceleration over the entire operating speed range from minimum to maximum
speed. The VFD unit shall be provided with adjustable maximum and minimum
frequency limits.
6.
Each VFD unit shall maintain a desired output frequency (setpoint) with a steady
state accuracy of 0.5% of rated frequency of 60 Hertz for a 24-hour period and a
repeatability of 0.1% of rated frequency of 60 Hertz.
7.
Each VFD unit shall be capable of operating the specified load continuously at any
speed within the operating speed range of 10% to 100% of rated speed. The
minimum and maximum continuous operating speeds shall each be adjustable
within this speed range. The variable frequency drive shall provide for field
adjustment of these setpoints.
8.
Each VFD unit shall be capable of controlled linear acceleration and deceleration.
Each VFD unit shall be capable of ramping the speed of the motor-load
combination from the minimum selected operating speed to the maximum selected
operating speed in a minimum of 30 seconds. Each VFD unit shall have two (2)
field-adjustable speed setpoints for the variable frequency drive to skip equipment
resonant frequencies. The acceleration and deceleration time limits shall be field
adjustable to values up to 120 seconds.
9.
Voltage or current unbalance between phases of the VFD unit output voltage shall
not exceed 3% of the instantaneous values. The VFD unit shall continuously
monitor the output voltages and generate an alarm condition when the unbalance
exceeds 3%. The system shall detect and generate a separate alarm for loss of
any output phase voltage (single phasing). Phase unbalance shall be as defined
by NEMA Standard MG-1.
10.
Each VFD unit shall operate continuously without interruption of service or damage
to equipment during transient input voltage variations of plus or minus 10% for a
duration of 15 cycles. VFD unit output voltage regulation shall be plus or minus
2%.
C. Features and Characteristics
1.
Each VFD unit shall be furnished with a Human Machine Interface (HMI) to provide
controls and indication to accomplish maintenance and operational functions as
specified herein and shown on the Drawings. The HMI shall be password
protected after startup to prevent unauthorized personnel from making changes.
The HMI shall at minimum provide indication of the following:
a.
Input Voltage
b.
Output Voltage
8/15/2025
26 29 23-17
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
Output Current
d.
Output Frequency
e.
Output Speed from 0-100%
f.
Alarm Read-out
2.
Each VFD unit shall provide a 4-20 mADC output signal that is proportional to the
drive output frequency for use as speed feedback/speed indication to external
equipment.
3.
Each VFD unit shall accept a 4-20 mADC speed input command signal to control
the output frequency in the automatic and/or manual control modes as specified
herein or indicated on the Drawings. The system shall accept the input
increase/decrease command with a resolution that permits incremental changes in
speed equal to or less than 0.1% of rated speed.
a.
Where shown on the Drawings, VFD units shall also accept a 0-10VDC input
from a speed potentiometer for manual speed control. Each VFD unit shall
be capable of automatically switching between the input speed command
signals as shown on the Drawings.
4.
Input Voltage Loss Handling
a.
The VFD unit shall shut down upon a loss of one or more input phases, a 3-
phase complete input power loss, or a sustained input undervoltage event. A
sustained input undervoltage event is defined as voltage that is less 75% of
nominal, for more than 0.5 seconds.
b.
Upon restoration of 3-phase power that is at an acceptable voltage level, the
VFD unit shall automatically reset (after an adjustable time delay, 0-2
minutes) and be capable of being restarted and ramping up to speed when
remotely commanded through the control system or locally commanded at
any local controls. Personnel shall not be required to reset the VFD unit
manually after a shutdown caused by any input voltage loss event.
c.
Automatic reset of the VFD unit shall be achieved through
programming/parameter setpoints, time delay relays, or a combination of
both.
5.
Each VFD unit shall have a multiple attempt restart feature.
6.
Each VFD unit shall have an automatic current limit feature to control motor
currents during startup and provide a "soft start" torque profile for the motor-load
combination. The VFD unit shall also limit current due to motor winding or motor
8/15/2025
26 29 23-18
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
lead phase-to-phase short circuit or phase-to-ground short circuit. The current limit
protection setting shall be field adjustable.
7.
Each VFD unit shall be furnished with programmable electronic overload and
torque limits.
8.
Each VFD unit shall have an automatic trip feature which will remove the drive
output from the motor and allow it to decelerate safely. This automatic system shall
lock-out the VFD unit and indicate the fault only upon the following conditions:
a.
Output voltage unbalance (trip threshold field set).
b.
Loss of phase on output.
c.
Motor overload.
d.
Motor stator winding fault (phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase).
e.
Unacceptable voltage variation.
f.
High variable frequency drive equipment temperature.
g.
VFD failure as determined by the manufacturer.
h.
Component failure.
i.
Overcurrent.
9.
Provide each VFD unit with transmitted and received radio interference protection.
In addition, provide protection against starting a rotating motor, both directions
(coasting to zero speed and backspin). In the event that a motor automatic restart
feature (catch the motor "on-the-fly") is provided in the VFD unit, this feature shall
be capable of being disabled.
10.
Each VFD unit shall include on-line diagnostics, with an automatic self-check
feature that will detect a variable frequency drive failure.
a.
Diagnostics shall operate a visual alarm indicator on the HMI.
b.
Diagnostics shall provide an easily readable output that can be used to
isolate a failure.
c.
Provide an event and diagnostic recorder to printout in narrative English of
the specific fault(s) and the sequence in which the faults occurred. An
indication of the "First Out" failure is a minimum for fault sequence detection.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-19
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
d.
Provide normally open and/or normally closed dry contacts as indicated on
the Drawings for VFD failure conditions .
11.
Each VFD unit shall communicate the following parameters to the control system
via Modbus TCP/IP protocol. Provide any necessary hardware gateways to
provide this communication capability. The following parameters, at a minimum,
shall be communicated:
a.
Motor current (all phases)
b.
Motor voltage (all phases)
c.
Motor KW
12.
Each VFD unit shall be provided with input/output (I/O) cards including expansion
cards as necessary to facilitate connection of all I/O specified herein and shown on
the Drawings.
2.04
HARMONIC CORRECTION
A. Harmonic correction devices for each VFD shall be as specified herein and located as
shown on the Drawings.
B. Input Line Reactors
1.
All VFDs shall be 6-pulse type with input line reactor and/or integral DC link
reactor. Total reactor impedance shall be a minimum of 3% and shall not exceed
5%.
C. Passive Filters
1.
Where indicated on the Drawings or where additional harmonic correction is
required, 6-pulse VFD units shall be provided with a passive harmonic filter in
addition to the integral DC link reactor specified above (if present.)
2.
Passive harmonic filters shall be sized to attenuate harmonics resulting from
operation of the VFD-driven motor load to no more than 5% THID when operating
at full load, and no more than 8% THID when operating at 30% of full load. The
filter shall be equipped with power contactors configured to remove the capacitors
from the circuit when the VFD-driven loads are not in operation. The harmonic
filters shall be as manufactured by TCI, MTE Corporation, Mirus International, or
Engineer approved equal.
3.
Passive filters shall be integrated into the VFD unless accepted in writing by the
Engineer or shown as separately mounted from the VFD on the Drawings.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-20
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. Active Front End (AFE) VFDs and 18-Pulse
1.
Where indicated on the Drawings, AFE VFDs shall consist of a VFD unit with IGBT
based active front end (AFE).
2.
18-pulse VFDs are not acceptable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. The VFDs shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Install VFDs to allow complete door swing required for component removal.
3.02
TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General
Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required:
1.
Witnessed Shop Tests
a.
None required.
2.
Certified Shop Tests and Reports
a.
Submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus.
b.
Factory test the complete VFD in accordance with IEEE and NEMA
standards.
c.
Submit factory bench-test data to indicate that the manufacturer's proposed
equipment has been tested in the specified arrangement and found to
achieve specified accuracy.
3.
Field Tests
a.
Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in
the General Conditions, Division 01, and NETA acceptance testing
specifications referenced in Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical
Requirements.
b.
The Contractor shall field measure actual harmonic distortion with tests
performed by an independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner after
8/15/2025
26 29 23-21
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
satisfactory full-load operation. The Contractor shall provide the harmonic
distortion reports with the O&M Manual.
c.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the harmonic distortion
measurements shall be made at each load center where VFDs are present.
d.
Harmonic distortion measurements shall be made after VFD installation. One
set of measurements shall be made with the VFD loads inactive, and one set
of measurements shall be made with the VFD loads running at design
capacity.
B. Acceptance of a shop test does not relieve Contractor from requirements to meet field
installation tests under specified operating conditions, nor does the inspection relieve the
Contractor of responsibilities.
C. Certification on materials and records of shop tests necessary for the inspector to verify
that the requirements of the Specifications are met, shall be made available to the
inspector.
D. Submit signed and dated certification that all of the factory inspection and testing
procedures described herein have been successfully performed by the Contractor prior
to shipment.
8/15/2025
26 29 23-22
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.03
SERVICES OF A MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's factory-trained
technical representative who shall adequately supervise the installation and startup of all
equipment furnished under this Contract. The manufacturer's representative shall certify
in writing that the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. No further testing or equipment startup may take place until this
certification is accepted by the Owner.
B. The manufacturer’s technical representative shall perform all startup and field
acceptance testing as specified herein.
C. The Contractor shall provide training for the Owner’s personnel. Training shall be
conducted by the manufacturer's factory-trained representative who shall instruct
Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of all equipment provided under this
Section. Training shall be provided for two (2) sessions of four (4) hours each. Training
shall not take place until after the VFDs have been installed and tested. Training shall be
conducted at times coordinated with the Owner.
D. The services of the manufacturer's representative shall be provided for a period of not
less than as follows:
1.
One (1) trip of one (1) working day during installation of the motor controllers.
2.
One (1) trip of one (1) working day to perform startup and field acceptance testing
of the motor controllers.
3.
One (1) trip of one (1) working day to perform training as specified herein.
4.
One (1) trip of one (1) working day two (2) months before the expiration of the
warranty to identify any issues to be corrected under warranty.
E. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation shall be at
the expense of the Contractor.
3.04
PAINTING
A. Prior to final completion of the work, all metal surfaces of the equipment shall be cleaned
thoroughly, and all scratches and abrasions shall be retouched with the same coating as
used for factory finishing coats.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
26 43 13-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 26 43 13
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place in satisfactory operation the surge
protective devices (SPD) as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide Type PC1 for switchgear or PC3 at switchboards, motor control centers, or
panelboards.
C. Reference the following Specification Sections:
1.
Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables
2.
Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.02
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All SPDs shall be Listed to UL 1449, latest edition,and shall bear the Label of
Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated (UL).
B. The equipment shall be designed, manufactured, and/or Listed to the following
standards as applicable:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical & Electronic
Engineers (IEEE):
a.
C62.41.1 – IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V
and less) AC Power Circuits.
b.
C62.41.2 – IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in
Low -Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.
c.
C62.45 – IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment
Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.
d.
C62.62 – IEEE Standard Test Specifications for Surge -Protective Devices
(SPDs) for Use on the Load Side of the Service Equipment in Low Voltage
(1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
8/15/2025
26 43 13-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).
3.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a.
UL 1283, latest edition – Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
b.
UL 1449, latest edition – Surge Protective Devices.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in General Conditions and
Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.04
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without
review for re-submittal.
C. Drawings submitted by the manufacturer shall be complete and documented to provide
the Owner with operations and maintenance capabilities.
D. Shop drawings for each SPD shall include but not be limited to:
1.
Product Data Sheets.
2.
Detailed drawings showing weights and dimensions.
3.
Wiring diagrams showing field connections, including all protection modes
provided (L-N, L-G, L-L, N-G)
4.
Manufacturer’s Warranty period and covered items
E. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the
Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met.
Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "Soft Cover" catalogs, and
similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment
items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted.
8/15/2025
26 43 13-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the
procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01.
1.06
SPARE PARTS
A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished by
the Contractor to the Owner.
B. If the SPD model provided includes field-replaceable modules, furnish one (1) spare
module of each type and rating.
C. Reference Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements for spare parts delivery and
handling requirements.
1.07
IDENTIFICATION
A. Each SPD shall be identified by the circuit number and equipment name as indicated on
the Drawings. A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each
SPD. Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical
Systems.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. All SPDs, associated hardware, and supporting components shall be warranted to be
free from defects in materials and workmanship, under normal use and in accordance
with the instructions provided, for a period of ten (10) years after acceptance of the
equipment by the Owner.
B. Any component or subassembly contained within the surge protection system that
shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period, shall be
replaced by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. The SPD units shall be UL 1449 Listed. Units that are “manufactured in accordance
with” UL 1449 or “component recognized” SPDs are not acceptable and will be rejected.
B. Type II SPD units shall be UL 1283 Listed. Units that are “manufactured in accordance
with” UL 1283 or “component recognized” SPDs are not acceptable and will be rejected.
8/15/2025
26 43 13-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.02
PRODUCTS
A. Type I surge protective devices (SPD) shall be furnished and installed when shown
without upstream overcurrent protection on the Drawings. Type II SPDs shall be
provided in all other locations. Type II SPDs shall not require the use of a specific
upstream overcurrent device. SPDs shall be provided in the location and quantity as
shown on the Drawings.
B. Each SPD shall be rated for the voltage and configuration of the equipment to which it is
connected.
C. Where specified, Type II SPD shall include UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI filtering with
minimum attenuation of -50dB at 100kHz.
D. The short circuit current rating (SCCR) of each SPD shall be equal to or greater than the
rating of the equipment to which it is connected. The Contractor shall reference the
Drawings for the short-circuit current rating of each piece of equipment.
E. Each SPD system shall provide surge protection in all possible modes. Surge protection
shall be as follows:
System Configuration
Modes of
Protection
Number of
Modes
3-Phase Wye (Solidly
Grounded)
L-N (3), L-G (3),
N-G
7
3-Phase Delta
L-L, L-G
6
F. Each SPD shall have a Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) of at least
115% of the nominal voltage of the equipment to which it is connected.
G. The Nominal Discharge Current (In) of each SPD shall be 20kA (per mode). The peak
surge current ratings shall not be used as a basis for applying the SPD to the system.
H. The Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) of each SPD shall not exceed the following:
System Voltage
L-N
L-G
L-L
N-G
208Y/120
800V
800V
1200V
800V
480Y/277
1200V
1200V
1800V
1200V
480 DELTA
N/A
1800V
1800V
N/A
I.
The surge current rating for each SPD shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Surge
current ratings are indicated on single-line diagrams and in panel schedules. Surge
current rating indicated is on a per phase basis.
8/15/2025
26 43 13-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
J.
SPDs indicated to be externally mounted (from the equipment that they protect) shall be
provided in a separate enclosure. The enclosure shall have a NEMA rating equal to or
greater than that of the equipment it serves (e.g., NEMA 1, NEMA 12, NEMA 4X, etc.).
K. Each SPD shall be provided with the following accessories:
1.
Each individual module shall include an LED status showing weather all surge
protection components are operational. Loss of protection in any component shall
cause that module’s LED to turn off and activate a system-level and individual
component LED Fault indicator.
2.
Surge counter and audible alarm with reset/silence switch.
3.
One set of Form C (SPDT) dry contacts rated for at least 5A at 120VAC.
L.
SPDs that are indicated to be installed integral to (within) the equipment that they protect
shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the equipment. SPDs that are
shown to be installed externally/separately mounted from the equipment they serve shall
be manufactured by Square D (Schneider Electric), Eaton, ASCO(Emerson), Current
Technologies, GE(by ABB), or Siemens
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. The SPD units shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. SPDs which are shown on the drawings to be located inside equipment component
boundaries (e.g., panels, and switchgear) shall be installed within the enclosure for that
equipment.
C. Prior to energizing, the following shall be performed for each SPD:
1.
Verify that the SPD unit voltage and configuration is suitable for the system to
which it is connected.
2.
Verify that neutral-to-ground bonding jumpers are installed where required by the
system design and applicable codes, and omitted where prohibited.
3.02
TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 01
requirements. The following tests shall be conducted:
1.
Shop Tests
8/15/2025
26 43 13-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
a.
Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this
Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA,
ANSI, and UL standards.
b.
All surge protective devices, subassemblies, and components shall be 100%
tested and certified by the manufacturer to meet their published performance
parameters.
2.
Field Tests
a.
None required.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
31 00 01-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 31 00 01
EARTHWORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete all
work associated with excavation (including off-site borrow excavation), fill and backfill
placement and compaction, coordinate testing of soil materials and compaction by an
independent Materials Testing Consultant (Furnished by Contractor), constructing
embankments, dewatering, construction of drainage layers, installing foundation and
backfill aggregate, placing filter and separation fabrics, stockpiling topsoil and any
excess suitable material, designing, installing, maintaining and removing excavation
support systems, disposing of all excess and unsuitable materials, providing erosion and
sedimentation control, encasing utility conduits, site grading, preparation of pavement
and structure subgrades, and other related and incidental work as required to complete
the work shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. All excavations shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown
on the Drawings or established by the Engineer.
C. It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor conduct the construction activities
in such a manner that erosion of disturbed areas and off-site sedimentation be
absolutely minimized.
D. Earthwork performed under this Contract shall be done in conformance with these
specifications. Items and activities not addressed herein shall be subject to the
limitations the latest editions of the City of Chandler Specifications and Standard Details
and Maricopa Association of Governments (MAG) Standard Specifications and Details.
E. Erosion and Sediment Control shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 25 00
of these specifications and with the latest edition of the City of Chandler Civil
Engineering Review Checklist section “EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN
(ESCP) REQUIREMENTS”.
F. All fill materials (soil, aggregate, topsoil, etc.) imported to the site and onsite materials to
be reused as fill, backfill, or embankment shall be subjected to the testing requirements
contained in Part 3.0 of this Section. The Contractor shall retain a Materials Testing
Consultant who shall perform all testing. The test results shall be used to determine if a
material meets the requirements included herein. The Contractor shall furnish all
necessary samples for laboratory testing and shall provide assistance and cooperation
12-20-2023
8/15/2025
31 00 01-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
during field tests. The Contractor shall plan their operations to allow adequate time for
laboratory tests and to permit taking of field density tests during compaction.
G. Any costs for re-testing required as a result of failure to meet compaction requirements
shall be borne solely by the Contractor, consistent with City of Chandler General
Conditions Section 4.1.14(c).
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Requirements of related work are included in Divisions 02, 31, and 32 of these
Specifications.
B. See City General Conditions Sections 3.1–3.3 for MAG and City standards applicability.
1.03
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work
herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All
referenced Specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available
at the time of Bid.
1.
Maricopa Association of Governments Standard Details and Specifications as
adopted and amended by the City of Chandler (in accordance with General
Conditions Section 3.3).
2.
Arizona Department of Transportation Materials Testing Manual, latest edition.
3.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.
ASTM C 127 – Standard Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.
b.
ASTM C 136 – Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
c.
ASTM D 698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
d.
ASTM D 1140 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Amount of
Material Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Soils by Washing
e.
ASTM D 1556 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by Sand Cone Method.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
f.
ASTM D 1557 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/lb3 (2,700 kN-
m/m3)).
g.
ASTM D 1883 – Standard Test Method for California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of
Laboratory-Compacted Soils.
h.
ASTM D 2216 – Test for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture)
Content of Soil and Rock by Mass.
i.
ASTM D 2487 – Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System).
j.
ASTM D 4253 – Standard Test Method for Maximum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.
k.
ASTM D 4318 – Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils.
l.
ASTM D 6913 - Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution
(Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis
m.
ASTM D 6938 – Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water
Content of Soil and Soil Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
1.04
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Information on subsurface conditions is referenced under Division 01, General
Requirements. Also reference to City General Conditions Section 4.4.10 regarding
underground facilities location and coordination.
B. Attention is directed to the possible location of water pipes, sanitary pipes, storm drains,
and other utilities located in the area of proposed excavation. In the event excavation
activities disrupt service, the Contractor shall perform all repairs at no additional cost to
the Owner. The Contractor shall contact Arizona 811 (arizona811.com or 1-800-782-
5348) to request underground utility location mark-out at least three (3) working days,
not including the day the request is called in, but no more than ten (10) working days
prior to the beginning of excavation. The Contractor shall also contact and request utility
location mark-out from buried utility owners with utilities on the project site that are not
participants of Arizona 811.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal timelines shall align with City General Conditions Section 4.2 Contractor’s Pre-
Agreement and Pre-Work Deliverables.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 –
Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following:
1.
Evidence the Contractor has a minimum of five (5) years of experience performing
excavation and backfill on projects similar in size to the work for this project.
2.
Name and location of all material suppliers.
3.
Certificate of compliance with the standards specified herein for each source of
each material.
4.
List of disposal sites for waste and unsuitable materials and all required permits for
use of those sites.
5.
Plans and cross sections of open cut excavations showing side slopes and limits
of the excavation at grade.
6.
Procedures for dewatering proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review and approval prior to any earthwork operations.
7.
Samples of synthetic filter fabric and reinforced plastic membrane with
manufacturer's certificates or catalog cuts stating the mechanical and physical
properties. Samples shall be at least one (1) foot wide and four (4) feet long taken
across the roll with the warp direction appropriately marked.
8.
Construction drawings and structural calculations for any types of excavation
support required. Drawings and calculations shall be sealed by a currently
registered Professional Engineer in the in the State of Arizona.
9.
Monitoring plan and pre-construction condition inspection and documentation of all
adjacent structures, utilities, and roadways near proposed installation of
excavation support systems and near areas where dewatering is required to
facilitate construction.
10.
A representative sample of the on-site or off-site source of each class of fill
material weighing approximately 50 lbs. The sample shall be delivered to a
location designated by the Engineer.
11.
The Contractor shall be required to submit plans of open cut excavation for review
by the Engineer before approval is given to proceed.
12.
Submit excavation support installer qualifications with installation history.
13.
Drawings and calculations on proposed excavation support systems sealed by a
Professional Engineer currently registered in the in the State of Arizona.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
14.
Contractor shall also submit a monitoring plan developed by the excavation
support design engineer.
15.
Earthwork contractor qualifications.
16.
All required permits and a list of disposal sites for unsuitable materials within thirty
(30) consecutive days after Notice to Proceed. If the disposal site is located on
private property, the submittal shall also include written permission from the owner
of record.
17.
Except where borrow is to be obtained from a commercial source, a borrow source
development, use, and reclamation plan jointly developed by the Contractor and
the property owner prior to engaging in any land disturbing activity on the
proposed source (other than material sampling that may be necessary). The
Contractor's plan shall address the following
a.
Drainage: The source shall be graded to drain such that no water will collect
or stand and a functioning drainage system shall be provided. Surface
drainage should not be permitted to drain towards structures, foundations,
footings, or on paved areas. Positive drainage is defined as a slope of 2
percent or more for a distance of 5 feet or more from structures.
b.
Slopes: The source shall be dressed and shaped in a continuous manner to
contours which are comparable to and blend in with the adjacent
topography, but in no case will slopes steeper than 3:1 be permitted.
c.
Erosion Control: Except where borrow is to be obtained from a commercial
source, the Contractor and the property owner shall jointly submit a Borrow
Source Development, Use, and Erosion Control Plan to the appropriate
State or Local permitting authority for approval and provide evidence of such
to the Engineer for their approval prior to engaging in any land disturbing
activity on the proposed source other than material sampling that may be
necessary.
1.06
PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Soil and rock material shall be excavated, transported, placed, and stored in a manner
so as to prevent contamination, segregation and excessive wetting. Materials which
have become contaminated or segregated will not be permitted in the performance of
the work and shall be removed from the site.
B. Refer to City of Chandler General Conditions Section 4.5 Control of the Project Site for
site management requirements.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.07
USE OF EXPLOSIVES
A. The use of explosives will not be allowed for the prosecution of this work.
B. Refer to General Conditions Section 4.4 Performance of the Work for safety compliance.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
FILL MATERIALS
A. The contractor shall be responsible for providing fill materials meeting the gradation
requirements included herein and with reference to General Conditions Section 4.5 for
site storage and erosion control requirements.
B. All fill materials shall be free of organic material, environmental contaminants, snow, ice,
frozen soil, or other unsuitable material.
C. Bedding material installed above and below the water table shall meet the requirements
of the ADOT Standard Specifications and MAG Standard Details and Specifications as
amended by the City of Chandler.
D. Below-grade walls shall be backfilled with Select Fill.
E. When the excavated material from required excavations meets the requirements of
Select Fill or Common Fill, but is replaced with off-site borrow material for the
Contractor’s convenience, the costs associated with such work and material shall be
borne by the Contractor.
F. Where excavated material does not meet requirements for Select Fill or Common Fill,
the Contractor shall furnish off-site borrow material meeting the specified requirements
herein. Determination of whether the borrow material will be paid for as an extra cost
will be made based on the contract documents.
G. Contractor may stockpile excavated material to be used as Select Fill, Common Fill,
Drainage Fill or Topsoil on site in areas designated in the Contract Documents. Soil
materials may be stockpiled as necessary to sort, segregate, test, and transfer the
materials. Excess material and materials considered unsuitable for reuse by the
Engineer shall be removed from the site for off-site disposal. No stockpiling of excavated
material is allowed in a manner or location that would permit erosion and its subsequent
sedimentation in wetlands or other natural areas.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.02
SELECT FILL
A. Select fill shall be used where shown on the Contract Drawings. MAG and City
standards apply per General Conditions Section 3.3.
B. Select fill shall not include particles or lumps larger than 3 inches.
C. Select fill used as backfill against walls shall not contain any rock larger than 1½ -inches.
D. Select fill shall have a Plasticity Index (PI) of 15 or less. Soils with PI values up to 25
may be used as select fill within the trench backfill zone situated 1-foot above the pipe
invert level and 3-feet below the new pavement surface.
E. Select fill shall consist of non-plastic materials classifying as GW, GW-GM, GP, SW,
SW-SM, SP-SM, or SP per ASTM D-2487.
F. Select fill in contact with concrete should have a soluble sulfate content of less than 0.1
percent. Fill materials in contact with ferrous metals should also have low corrosion
potential (minimum resistivity more than 2,000 ohm-cm, chloride contents less than 25
parts per million) if no corrosion protection techniques are implemented (e.g. cathodic
protection, pipe wrapping, etc.).
G. Select fill shall be free of organic material, environmental contaminants, snow, ice,
frozen soil, or other unsuitable material.
H. Open-graded and dense-graded aggregates meeting the gradation requirements above
may be used as Select Fill.
I.
Select Fill to be used as pavement subbase material shall be Aggregate Base Course
per MAG Specifications 701 and 310.
J.
Select Fill shall be placed in 8-inch-thick lifts, with the exception of Select Fill to be used
as pavement subbase material, which shall be placed in 6-inch-thick lifts.
K. Select Fill shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density
obtainable by ASTM D 698 and does not contain unsuitable material.
L.
Select Fill shall be compacted at a moisture content within 20 percent of the optimum
moisture content of the fill material in accordance with the ASTM D 698, Standard
Proctor.
M. All materials used as Select Fill are subject to approval by the Engineer.
2.03
DRAINAGE FILL
A. Drainage Fill shall be used where shown on the Contract Drawings.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Drainage Fill shall consist of ADOT No. 57 aggregate or MAG ABC.
2.04
COMMON FILL
A. Common Fill shall be used where shown on the Contract Drawings. AG and City
standards apply per City of Chandler General Conditions Section 3.3.
B. Common Fill shall consist of non-organic on-site soils classifying as CH, MH, CL, ML,
SC, SM, SP, SW, GC, GM, GP, or GW according to ASTM D 2487.
C. Common Fill shall be placed in 8-inch-thick loose lifts.
D. Common Fill shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density
obtainable by ASTM D 698 and does not contain unsuitable material.
E. Common Fill shall be compacted at a moisture content within 2 percent of the optimum
moisture content of the fill material in accordance with the ASTM D 698, Standard
Proctor.
F. All material used as common fill is subject to approval by the Engineer. If there is
insufficient suitable material onsite, import whatever additional material is required which
conforms to the specifications, at no additional cost to the Owner.
G. Select Fill may be used as Common Fill, subject to approval by the Engineer. Select fill
may be used as Common Fill at no change in the Contract Price.
2.05
GEOTEXTILES
A. The Contractor shall provide geotextiles as indicated on the Contract Drawings and
specified herein. The materials and placement shall be as indicated under Section 31 05
19 - Geotextiles.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
A. In all areas to be excavated, filled, or paved, the topsoil shall be stripped to its full depth.
B. Topsoil may be stockpiled for subsequent reuse on site at locations shown on the
Contract Drawings or designated by the Owner or Engineer. Topsoil shall be kept
separated from other excavated materials and shall be piled free of roots and other
undesirable materials. Topsoil shall not be stored in areas where it will interfere with
surface drainage or with the conservation of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to
remain. No stockpile shall be placed within 50-feet of a pond, stream, wetland, or
stormwater inlet.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.02
EXCAVATION
A. Coordinate excavation activities per General Conditions 4.4.10 and 4.4.13. All material
excavated, regardless of its nature or composition, shall be classified as
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION. Excavation shall include the removal of all soil, rock,
weathered rock, rocks of all types, boulders, conduits, pipe, all other obstacles
encountered, and all other obstacles shown to be removed within the limits of excavation
shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein. The cost of excavation shall be
included in the Lump Sum Bid Price and no additional payment will be made for the
removal of obstacles encountered within the excavation limits shown on the Drawings
and specified herein.
B. All suitable material removed in the excavation shall be used as far as practicable in the
formation of embankments, subgrades, and shoulders, and at such other places as may
be indicated on the Drawings or indicated by the Engineer. No excavation shall be
wasted except as may be permitted by the Engineer. Refer to the drawings for specific
location and placement of suitable excavated materials in the formation of
embankments, backfill, and structural and roadway foundations. THE ENGINEER
AND/OR MATERIALS TESTING CONSULTANT WILL DESIGNATE MATERIALS THAT
ARE UNSUITABLE. The Contractor shall furnish off-site disposal areas for the
unsuitable material. Where suitable materials containing excessive moisture are
encountered above grade in cuts, the Contractor shall construct above grade ditch
drains prior to the excavation of the cut material when in the opinion of the Engineer
and/or materials testing consultant such measures are necessary to provide proper
construction.
C. All excavations shall be made in the dry and in such a manner and to such widths as will
give ample room for properly constructing and inspecting the structures and/or piping
they are to contain and for such excavation support, pumping and drainage as may be
required. Excavation shall be made in accordance with the grades and details shown on
the Drawings and as specified herein.
D. Excavation slopes shall be flat enough to avoid slides that will cause disturbance of the
subgrade or damage of adjacent areas. Excavation requirements and slopes shall be as
indicated in the Drawings.
E. The Contractor shall intercept and collect surface runoff both at the top and bottom of cut
slopes. The intersection of slopes with natural ground surfaces, including the beginning
and ending of cut slopes, shall be uniformly rounded as shown on the Drawings or as
may be indicated by the Engineer. Concurrent with the excavation of cuts the Contractor
shall construct intercepting berm ditches or earth berms along and on top of the cut
slopes at locations shown on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer. All slopes
shall be finished to reasonably uniform surfaces acceptable for seeding and mulching
operations. No rock or boulders shall be left in place which protrude more than 1 foot
8/15/2025
31 00 01-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
within the typical section cut slope lines, and all rock cuts shall be cleaned of loose and
overhanging material. All protruding roots and other objectionable vegetation shall be
removed from slopes.
F. It is the intent of these Specifications that all structures shall bear on an aggregate base,
crushed stone or screened gravel bedding placed to the thickness shown on the
Drawings, specified in these Specifications, or not less than 6-inches. Bedding for
process piping shall be as specified in Section 40 05 00 – Basic Mechanical
Requirements, or as shown on the Drawings.
G. The bottom of all excavations for structures and pipes shall be examined by the
Engineer and/or materials testing consultant for bearing value and the presence of
unsuitable material. If, in the opinion of the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant,
additional excavation is required due to the low bearing value of the subgrade material,
or if the in place soils are soft, yielding, pumping or wet, the Contractor shall remove
such material to the required width and depth and replace it with thoroughly compacted
select fill, and/or crushed stone or screened gravel as indicated by the Engineer.
Payment for such additional work ordered by the Engineer shall be made as an extra by
a Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 01. No
payment will be made for subgrade disturbance caused by inadequate dewatering or
improper construction methods.
H. All cuts shall be brought to the grade and cross section shown on the Drawings, or
established by the Engineer, prior to final inspection and acceptance by the Engineer.
I.
Slides and over-breaks which occur due to negligence, carelessness or improper
construction techniques on the part of the Contractor shall be removed and disposed of
by the Contractor as indicated by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. If
grading operations are suspended for any reason whatsoever, partially completed cut
and fill slopes shall be brought to the required slope and the work of seeding and
mulching or other required erosion and sedimentation control operations shall be
performed.
J.
Where the excavation exposes sludge, sludge contaminated soil or other odorous
materials, the Contractor shall cover such material at the end of each workday with a
minimum of 6 inches and a maximum of 24-inches of Common fill. The work shall be an
odor abatement measure and the material shall be placed to the depth deemed
satisfactory by the Engineer for this purpose.
3.03
EXCAVATION SUPPORT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain such excavation support which may be
required to provide safe working conditions and support sides of excavation or to protect
structures, pipes, and utilities from possible. The Contractor shall be exclusively
8/15/2025
31 00 01-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
responsible for maintaining safe working conditions and structure integrity without
overstressing or damaging existing structures, pipes, and utilities resulting from the
Contractor temporarily placing, moving, or removing loads on or adjacent to existing
structures, pipes, and utilities. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient
or proper supports have not been provided, the Engineer may order additional supports
put in at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
adequacy of all supports used and for all damage resulting from failure of support
system or from placing, maintaining and removing the support system.
B. The selection of and design of any proposed excavation support systems is exclusively
the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall submit drawings and calculations to
the Engineer on the proposed systems sealed by a Professional Engineer currently
registered in the in the State of Arizona. Submittals shall comply with General
Conditions 4.6.11 for shoring/bracing responsibilities, as applicable.
C. The excavation support system shall be installed by a specialized contactor with a
minimum of five (5) years’ experience installing the type of excavation support system
proposed.
D. The Contractor shall exercise caution in the installation and removal of supports to
ensure no excessive or unusual loadings or vibrations are transmitted to any new or
existing structure. The Contractor shall promptly repair at their expense any and all
damage that can be reasonably attributed to installation or removal of excavation
support system.
E. Contractor shall monitor movement and vibration in the excavation support systems as
well as movement and vibration at adjacent structures, utilities and roadways near
excavation supports. Contractor shall submit a monitoring plan developed by the
excavation support design engineer. All pre-construction condition assessment and
documentation of adjacent structures on-site and off-site shall be performed by the
Contractor. If any sign of distress such as cracking or movement occurs in any adjacent
structure, utility or roadway during installation of supports, subsequent excavation,
service period of supports, subsequent backfill and construction, or removal of supports,
Engineer shall be notified immediately. The Contractor shall be exclusively responsible
for repair of any damage to any roadway, structure, utility, pipes, etc. both on-site and
off-site, as a result of their operations.
F. All excavation supports shall be removed upon completion of the work except as
indicated herein. The Engineer may permit supports to be left in place at the request and
expense of the Contractor. The Engineer may order certain supports left permanently in
place in addition to that required by the Contract. The cost of the materials so ordered
left in place, less a reasonable amount for the eliminated expense of the removal work
omitted, will be paid as an extra by a Change Order in accordance with the General
Conditions and Division 01. Vibrations of new and existing structures shall be considered
8/15/2025
31 00 01-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
when the Contractor decides whether to remove excavation supports or leave them in
place. Any excavation supports left in place shall be cut off at least two (2) feet below the
finished ground surface or as directed by the Engineer.
3.04
PROTECTION OF SUBGRADE
A. To minimize the disturbance of bearing materials and provide a firm foundation, the
Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
1.
Use of heavy rubber tired construction equipment shall not be permitted on the
final subgrade unless it can be demonstrated that drawdown of groundwater
throughout the entire area of the structure is at least 3 feet below the bottom of the
excavation (subgrade). Even then, the use of such equipment shall be prohibited
should subgrade disturbance result from concentrated wheel loads.
2.
Subgrade soils disturbed through the operations of the Contractor shall be
excavated and replaced with compacted select fill or crushed stone at the
Contractor's expense as indicated by the Engineer.
3.
The Contractor shall provide positive protection against penetration of frost into
materials below the bearing level during work in winter months. This protection can
consist of a temporary blanket of straw or salt hay covered with a plastic
membrane or other acceptable means.
3.05
PROOF-ROLLING
A. The subgrade of all structures and all areas that will support pavements or select fill shall
be proof-rolled. After stripping of topsoil, excavation to subgrade and prior to placement
of fills, the exposed subgrade shall be carefully inspected by probing and testing as
needed. Any topsoil or other organic material still in place, frozen, wet, soft, or loose soil,
and other undesirable materials shall be removed. The exposed subgrade shall be
proof-rolled with a heavily loaded tandem-wheeled dump truck to check for pockets of
soft material hidden beneath a thin crust of better soil. Any unsuitable materials thus
exposed shall be removed and replaced with an approved compacted material, as
directed by the Materials Consultant.
3.06
DEWATERING
A. The Contractor shall do all dewatering as required for the completion of the work.
Procedures for dewatering proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review prior to any earthwork operations.
B. All water removed by dewatering operations shall be disposed of in accordance with City
of Chandler Standard Specifications and the Arizona Erosion and Pollution Control
Manual, the more conservative of the two shall take precedence. Obtain all necessary
8/15/2025
31 00 01-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
permits in accordance with General Conditions 4.2.8 prior to dewatering operations
disposal/discharge.
C. The dewatering system shall be of sufficient size and capacity as required to control
groundwater or seepage to permit proper excavation operations, embankment
construction and reconstruction, subgrade preparation, and to allow concrete to be
placed in a dry condition. The system shall include a sump system or other equipment,
appurtenances and other related earthwork necessary for the required control of water.
The Contractor shall drawdown groundwater to at least 2 feet below the bottom of
excavations (subgrade), over the entire excavation area, at all times in order to maintain
a dry and undisturbed condition.
D. The Contractor shall control, by acceptable means, all water regardless of source. Water
shall be controlled, and its disposal provided for at each berm, structure, etc. The entire
periphery of the excavation areas shall be ditched and diked to prevent water from
entering the excavation. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for disposal of the
water and shall provide all necessary means at no additional expense to the Owner. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper design, installation, proper operation,
maintenance, and any failure of any component of the system.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair without cost to the Owner, any
damage to work in place and the excavation, including damage to the bottom due to
heave and including removal of material and pumping out of the excavated area. The
Contractor shall be responsible for damages to any other area or structure caused by
their failure to maintain and operate the dewatering system proposed and installed by
the Contractor.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair, without cost to the Owner, any
damage to work in place and nearby structures, roadways, and utilities which can be
reasonably attributed to dewatering operations. This includes settlement of structures,
roadways, and utilities due to dewatering of soils supporting the structures, roadways,
and utilities.
G. The Contractor shall take all the steps that they consider necessary to familiarize himself
with the surface and subsurface site conditions, and shall obtain the data that is required
to analyze the water and soil environment at the site and to assure that the materials
used for the dewatering systems will not erode, deteriorate, or clog to the extent that the
dewatering systems will not perform properly during the period of dewatering. Copies of
logs of borings and laboratory test results are available to the Contractor. This data is
furnished for information only, and it is expressly understood that the Owner and
Engineer will not be held responsible for any interpretations or conclusions drawn
therefrom by the Contractor.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-14
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
H. Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer shall jointly
survey the condition of adjoining structures. Photographs and records shall be made of
any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and the like, that may become
the subject of possible damage claims.
3.07
FILL OR EMBANKMENTS
A. Contractor shall perform the construction of fill or embankments in such a manner that
cut and fill slopes will be completed to final slopes and grade in a continuous operation.
The operation of removing excavation material from any cut and the placement of
embankment in any fill shall be a continuous operation to completion unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.
B. Subgrades upon which fill or embankments are to be constructed shall be stripped of
topsoil, organic material, rubbish and other extraneous materials. After stripping and
prior to placing fill or embankment material, the Contractor shall compact the top 12
inches of in place soil as specified under Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION.
C. Any soft or unsuitable materials revealed before or during placement fill or embankment
placement shall be removed as indicated by the Engineer and/or materials testing
consultant and replaced with select fill and compacted as required.
D. Fill subgrades on which fill or embankment is to be placed, shall be scarified or stepped
in a manner which will permit bonding of the embankment with the existing surface. The
fill or embankment soils shall be as specified under Part 2 - Products, and shall be
deposited and spread in successive, uniform, approximately horizontal layers. The loose
thickness of each lift shall not exceed the thickness for each fill type noted in Paragraph
3.09, COMPACTION.
E. Hauling shall be distributed over the full width of the embankment, and in no case will
deep ruts be allowed to form during the construction of the embankment. Fill or
embankment subgrades shall be properly drained at all times and kept free of flowing or
ponding water, snow, ice and frozen soils. Saturated soils, snow, ice, or frozen soils
shall be removed as recommended by the Engineer.
F. Each layer of the embankment shall be thoroughly compacted to the density specified
under Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION.
G. The embankment or fill material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content
before rolling to obtain the prescribed compaction. Moisture conditions and manipulation
of the fill or embankment material, when necessary, shall be performed to maintain a
uniform moisture content throughout the layer. Should the material be too wet or too dry
to permit proper compaction, earthwork operations shall be delayed until the material is
adequately moisture conditioned. Samples of all fill or embankment materials for testing,
both before and after placement and compaction, will be taken at frequent intervals.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-15
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
From these tests, corrections, adjustments, and modifications of methods, materials, and
moisture content will be made to construct the embankment.
H. Where fill or embankments materials are to be placed and compacted on sloped
subgrades steeper than 4:1 shall be benched. Benches shall be at least 6-feet wide.
I. When rock and other embankment material are excavated at approximately the same
time, the rock shall be incorporated into the outer portions of the embankments and the
other material which meets the requirements for select fill shall be incorporated into the
formation of the embankments. Stones or fragmentary rock larger than 4 inches in their
greatest dimension will not be allowed within the top 6 inches of the final grade. Stones,
fragmentary rock, or boulders larger than 12 inches in their greatest dimension will not
be allowed in any portions of embankments and shall be disposed of by the Contractor
as indicated by the Engineer. When rock fragments or stone are used in embankments,
the material shall be brought up in layers as specified or directed and every effort shall
be exerted to fill the voids with finer material to form a dense, compact mass which
meets the densities specified for embankment compaction.
3.08
BACKFILLING
A. All structures and pipes shall be backfilled with the type of materials shown on the
Drawings and specified herein. Fill placed as structure or utility backfill shall be
deposited in successive, uniform, approximately horizontal lifts. The thickness of each lift
shall not exceed the requirements of Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION.
B. Each lift of fill placed backfill shall be thoroughly compacted to the density specified for
each type of fill included in Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION.
C. Where excavation support is used, the Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to
prevent loss of support beneath and adjacent to pipes and existing structures when
supports are removed. If significant volumes of soil cannot be prevented from clinging to
the extracted supports, the voids shall be continuously backfilled as rapidly as possible.
The Contractor shall thereafter limit the depth below subgrade that supports will be
installed in similar soil conditions or employ other appropriate means to prevent loss of
support.
D. Backfill against concrete or masonry structure shall not be performed until the Work has
been reviewed and backfilling permitted. Backfill against walls shall also be deferred
until the structural slab for floors above the top fill line have been placed and attained
design strength or earlier at the discretion of the Engineer. Partial backfilling against
adequately braced wall may be considered by the Engineer on an individual situation
basis. Where walls are to be waterproofed, all Work shall be completed and membrane
materials dried or cured according to the manufacturer’s instructions before backfilling.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-16
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. Backfill against tanks and other structures which are to retain liquids shall not be
performed until leakage tests are completed and accepted by the Engineer in
accordance with the Section entitled “Water Tightness Testing”.
3.09
COMPACTION
A. The Contractor shall compact embankments, backfill, crushed stone, aggregate base,
and in place subgrade in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The densities
specified herein refer to percentages of maximum density as determined by the noted
test methods. Compaction of materials on the project shall be in accordance with the
schedule on the following page:
8/15/2025
31 00 01-17
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Compaction Near Existing Structures
1.
Vibratory equipment shall not be used with 25 feet of any existing structure.
2.
Within 25 feet of any existing structure, non-vibratory compaction equipment such
as a drum roller with a maximum weight of 4 tons should be used. Within 5 feet of
any existing structure, a walk behind vibratory sled or roller shall be used.
C. Field density tests will be made by the Materials Testing Consultant to determine if the
specified densities have been achieved, and these tests shall be the basis for accepting
or rejecting the compaction. In-place density tests will be performed in accordance with
Density %
Standard Proctor
(D 698)
Density %
Mod. Proctor (D 1557)
Max. Lift Thickness
as Compacted
Inches
Embankments Beneath
Structures, Roadways, and
Sidewalks*
98
92
8
Common Fill Areas
95
90
8
Backfill Around Structures
95
90
8
Backfill in Pipe Trenches I within
2 feet below pavement
100
95
8
Backfill in Pipe Trenches –
Deeper than 2 feet below
pavement
95
90
8
Crushed Stone Beneath
Structures
**
**
12
Select Sand
98
92
8
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Beneath asphalt concrete
pavement
100
95
6
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
Beneath Portland cement
concrete pavements, driveways,
curb & gutter, sidewalks, and
roadway shoulders
95
90
6
Crushed Stone Backfill
**
**
12
Crushed Stone Pipe Bedding
**
**
12
In Place Subgrade Beneath
Structures, Roadways, and
Sidewalks
98
92
Top 12-inches
* Embankments beneath structures shall be considered to include a zone 10 feet out from the
foundation of the structure extending down to the natural ground on a 45 slope.
** The aggregate shall be compacted to a degree acceptable to the Engineer by use of a vibratory
compactor and/or crawler tractor.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-18
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 1557, or ASTM D 6938. The Engineer, in conjunction with the
Materials Testing Consultant, will be the judge as to which test method will be the most
appropriate. Failure to achieve the specified densities shall require the Contractor to
recompact the material or remove it as required. The Contractor shall, if necessary,
increase the compactive effort by increasing the number of passes, using heavier or
more suitable compaction equipment, or by reducing the thickness of the layers. The
Contractor shall adjust the moisture contents of the soils to bring them within the
optimum range by drying them or adding water as required.
D. Testing will be performed as frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer and/or
Materials Testing Consultant. As a minimum, one in place density test shall be
performed for each 1000 cubic yards of embankment placed and 500 cubic yards of
backfill placed or one test performed each day for either or as directed by the Engineer
or recommended by Material Testing Consultant.
3.10
VIBRATION MONITORING
A. Vibration monitoring shall be performed at nearby structures when compaction work is
ongoing. A single monitoring point using vibration monitoring equipment capable of
detecting velocities of 0.1 inch/second or less and survey measurements shall be used
for vibration monitoring at each of the nearest structures. An elevation measurement on
nearby structures shall be taken before compaction work starts, and then at least twice a
day during the work with one reading taken at the conclusion of the day’s operations.
Elevation measurements shall be recorded to an accuracy of 0.005 foot. If at any time
the Contractor detects settlement or heave of 0.005-feet or more, or vibration levels of
1.0 inch/second or more, the vibratory compaction shall be stopped immediately, and the
Engineer notified.
3.11
REMOVAL OF EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIALS
A. Disposal activities shall be performed in accordance with General Conditions 4.5.1 and
4.5.4. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of off-site all excess and unsuitable
materials. Within thirty (30) consecutive days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for review all required permits and a list of disposal sites for
the unsuitable materials. If the disposal site is located on private property, the submittal
shall also include written permission from the owner of record.
B. All excess and unsuitable materials shall be disposed of in locations and under
conditions that comply with federal, state/commonwealth and local laws and regulations.
C. The Contractor shall obtain an off-site disposal area prior to beginning demolition or
excavation operations.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-19
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. All excess and unsuitable materials shall be hauled in trucks of sufficient capacity and
tight construction to prevent spillage. Trucks shall be covered to prevent the propagation
of dust.
E. When all excess and unsuitable material disposal operations are completed, the
Contractor shall leave the disposal sites in a condition acceptable to the Owner and
Owner(s) of the disposal site(s).
3.12
BORROW EXCAVATION
A. Description
1.
The work covered by this section consists of the excavation of approved material
from borrow sources and the hauling and utilization of such material as required on
the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. It shall also include the removing,
stockpiling, and replacement of topsoil on the borrow source; the satisfactory
disposition of material from the borrow source which is not suitable for use; and
the satisfactory restoration of the borrow source and haul roads to an acceptable
condition upon completion of the work.
2.
Borrow excavation shall not be used before all available suitable unclassified
excavation has been used for backfilling and incorporated into the embankments.
B. Coordination with Seeding Operations
1.
The Contractor shall coordinate the work covered by this section with the
construction of embankments and area fill so the requirements of Section 32 90 00
– Final Grading and Landscaping are met.
C. Borrow Materials
1.
All material shall meet the requirements of Section 2 for Select Fill or shall meet
the requirements of Common Fill and classify as SM or coarser according to
ASTM D 2487.
D. Construction Methods
1.
General
a.
The surface of the borrow area shall be thoroughly cleared and grubbed and
cleaned of all unsuitable material including all organics, topsoil, etc., before
beginning the excavation. Disposal of material resulting from clearing and
grubbing shall be in accordance with Section 31 10 00 – Clearing, Grubbing,
and Site Preparation.
8/15/2025
31 00 01-20
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
b.
Each borrow operation shall not be allowed to accumulate exposed, erodible
slope area in excess of 1 acre at any one given time without the Contractor's
beginning permanent seeding and mulching of the borrow source or other
erosion control measures as may be approved by the Engineer.
c.
The topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled at locations that will not interfere
with the borrow operations and that meet the approval of the Engineer.
Temporary erosion control measures shall be installed as necessary to
prevent the erosion of the stockpile material. Once all borrow material has
been removed from the source or portion thereof, the stockpiled topsoil shall
be spread uniformly over the source.
d.
Where it is necessary to haul borrow material over existing roads, the
Contractor shall use all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the
existing roads. The Contractor shall also conduct hauling operations in such
a manner as to not interfere with the normal flow of traffic and shall always
keep the traffic lanes free from spillage.
2.
Owner Furnished Sources
a.
Where borrow sources are furnished by the Owner the location of such
sources will be as designated on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
b.
The Owner will furnish the necessary haul road right-of-way at locations
designated by the Engineer. All haul roads required shall be built,
maintained, and when directed by the Engineer, obliterated, at no cost to the
Owner. Where the haul road is to be reclaimed for cultivation the Contractor
shall plow or scarify the area to a minimum depth of 8 inches, or to the depth
requested by the property owner.
c.
The borrow sources shall be left in a neat and presentable condition after
use. All slopes shall be smoothed, rounded, and constructed not steeper
than 3:1. Where the source is to be reclaimed for cultivation the source shall
be plowed or scarified to a minimum depth of 8 inches, disc harrowed, and
terraces constructed. The source shall be graded to drain such that no water
will collect or stand, and a functioning drainage system shall be provided.
d.
All sources shall be seeded and mulched in accordance with Section 32 90
00 – Final Grading and Landscaping.
3.
Contractor Furnished Sources
a.
Prior to the approval of any off-site borrow source(s) developed for use on
this project, the Contractor shall obtain certification from the
8/15/2025
31 00 01-21
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
State/Commonwealth Historic Preservation Officer of the
State/Commonwealth Department of Cultural Resources certifying that the
removal of the borrow material from the borrow source(s) will have no effect
on any known district, site building, structure, or object that is included or
eligible for inclusion in the National Register of Historic Places. A copy of this
certification shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to performing any work
on the proposed borrow source.
b.
The approval of borrow sources furnished by the Contractor shall be subject
to the following conditions:
1)
The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring the right to take the
material and any rights of access that may be necessary; for locating
and developing the source; and any clearing and grubbing and
drainage ditches necessary.
a)
Such right shall be in writing and shall include an agreement with
the Owner that the borrow source may be dressed, shaped,
seeded, mulched, and drained as required by these
Specifications after all borrow has been removed.
2)
The Contractor and the property owner shall jointly submit a borrow
source development, use, and reclamation plan to the Engineer, as
described in Paragraph 1.05, for approval prior to engaging in any land
disturbing activity on the proposed source other than material sampling
that may be necessary.
4.
Maintenance
a.
During construction and until final acceptance the Contractor shall use any
methods approved by the Engineer which are necessary to maintain the
work covered by this Section so that the work will not contribute to excessive
soil erosion.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
31 10 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 31 10 00
CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. Includes all labor, material, equipment and appliances required for the complete
execution of any additions, modifications, or alterations to existing building(s) and new
construction work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
B. Principal items of work include:
1.
Coordinate with utility owners per General Conditions 4.4.10 and provide
additional notifications as required for project-specific sequencing.Clearing the site
within the Contract Limit Lines, including removal of grass, brush, shrubs, trees,
loose debris and other encumbrances except for trees marked to remain.
2.
Boxing and protecting all trees, shrubs, lawns and the like within areas to be
preserved. Relocating trees and shrubs, so indicated on the Drawings, to
designated areas.
3.
Repairing all injury to trees, shrubs, and other plants caused by site preparation
operations shall be repaired immediately. Work shall be done by qualified
personnel in accordance with standard horticultural practice and as approved by
the Engineer.
4.
Removing topsoil to its full depth from designated areas and stockpiling on site
where directed by the Engineer for future use.
5.
Disposing from the site all debris resulting from work under this Section.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork
B. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control
1.03
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Latest Edition of City of Chandler Specifications and Standards, and Maricopa
Association of Governments (MAG) Standard Specifications Section 201.
8/15/2025
31 10 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.04
STREET AND ROAD BLOCKAGE
A. Closing of streets and roads during progress of the work shall be in compliance with the
requirements of the Owner and other authorities having jurisdiction. Access shall be
provided to all facilities remaining in operation.
1.05
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A. Perform work in accordance with General Conditions 4.6 and supplement with these
section-specific requirements.
B. All work shall be performed in such a manner to protect all personnel, workmen,
pedestrians and adjacent property and structures from possible injury and damage.
C. All conduits, wires, cables and appurtenances above or below ground shall be protected
from damage.
D. Provide warning and barrier fence where shown on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
PART 2 – EXECUTION
2.01
CLEARING OF SITE
A. Before removal of topsoil, and start of excavation and grading operations, the areas
within the clearing limits shall be cleared and grubbed. Per MAG Standard Specifications
Section 201.
B. General Conditions 4.5 and 4.4.10 provide requirements for site control and utility
protection when developing the clearing/grubbing plan. Clearing shall consist of cutting,
removal, and satisfactory disposal of all trees, fallen timber, brush, bushes, rubbish,
sanitary landfill material, fencing, and other perishable and objectionable material within
the areas to be excavated or other designated areas.. Should it become necessary to
remove a tree, bush, brush or other plants adjacent to the area to be excavated, the
Contractor shall do so only after permission has been granted by the Engineer.
C. Excavation resulting from the removal of trees, roots and the like shall be filled with
suitable material, as approved by the Engineer, and thoroughly compacted per the
requirements contained in Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork.
D. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the Contractor shall clear and grub a strip at least
15-ft. wide along all permanent fence lines installed under this Contract.
E. In temporary construction easement locations, only those trees and shrubs shall be
removed which are in actual interference with excavation or grading work under this
8/15/2025
31 10 00-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
Contract, and removal shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. However, the
Engineer reserves the right to order additional trees and shrubs removed at no additional
cost to the Owner, if such, in their opinion, are too close to the work to be maintained or
have become damaged due to the Contractor's operations.
2.02
STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING EXISTING TOPSOIL
A. Erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be installed as per the Federal, State
or Locally approved Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan for the project and
Specification Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control before any stripping
and stockpiling of topsoil can occur.
B. Existing topsoil and sod on the site within areas designated on the Drawings shall be
stripped to whatever depth it may occur and stored in locations directed by the Engineer.
C. The topsoil shall be free of stones, roots, brush, rubbish, or other unsuitable materials
before stockpiling the topsoil.
D. Care shall be taken not to contaminate the stockpiled topsoil with any unsuitable
materials.
2.03
GRUBBING
A. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all stumps, roots, logs, sticks and
other perishable materials to a depth of at least 6-inches below ground surfaces.
B. Large stumps located in areas to be excavated may be removed during grading
operations, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.04
DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
A. Dispose of debris per General Conditions 4.5 debris control requirements and
supplement with these project-specific provisions. . Material designated by the Engineer
to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as directed by the Engineer for
reuse in this Project or removal by others.
B. Burning of any debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work will not be permitted
at the site.
2.05
WARNING AND BARRIER FENCE
A. The fence shall be made of a visible, lightweight, flexible, high strength polyethylene
material. The fence shall be Guardian Visual Barrier as manufactured by TEMAX, or
equal.
8/15/2025
31 10 00-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Physical Properties
Fence
Color
International Orange
Roll Size
4' x 100'
Roll weight
9 lbs.
Mesh opening
1-3/4" x 1-3/4"
Posts
ASTM Designation:
ASTM 702
Length:
6 feet long (T-Type)
Weight:
1.25 #/Foot (min)
Area of Anchor Plate:
14 Sq. In.
C. Drive posts 18 inches into ground every 8'. Wrap fence material around first terminal
post allowing overlap of one material opening. Use metal tie wire or plastic tie wrap to
fasten material to itself at top, middle and bottom. At final post, cut with utility knife or
scissors at a point halfway across an opening. Wrap around and tie at final post in the
same way as the first post.
D. Use tie wire or tie wrap at intermediate posts and splices as well. Thread ties around a
vertical member of the fence material and the post and bind tightly against the post. For
the most secure fastening, tie at top, middle and bottom. Overlap splices a minimum of
four fence openings, tie as above, fastening both edges of the fence material splice
overlap.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
31 10 00-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
31 10 00-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
31 23 13-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 31 23 13
FOUNDATION PREPARATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The work included in this Section comprises cleaning and preparing the foundation and
abutments of appurtenant structures including but not limited to concrete pads prior to
placement of embankment fill, drainage materials, or structural concrete. The Contractor
shall provide all supervision, labor, materials, equipment, tools, instruments and supplies
required for the completion of foundation preparation in accordance with these
Specifications and the Contract Documents, including the City of Chandler General
Conditions..
B. The work shall include but not be limited to:
1.
Provide required submittals.
2.
Smooth and prepare excavated soil surfaces as specified.
3.
Smooth rock surfaces by removing promontories, overhangs, and loose blocks of
rock as specified.
4.
Clean sound rock surfaces and exposed rock joints with hand tools and water and
air jets, as specified.
5.
Slush grout rock surfaces as specified.
6.
Fill deep depressions in the rock surface with concrete, as specified.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork
1.03
REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
C144 – Standard Specification for Aggregate or Masonry Mortar
2.
C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement
082905
8/15/2025
31 23 13-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer all necessary data and
certifications listed below in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and General Conditions
Section 4.2.5.2.
1.
Certificates of conformance: Submit certificates from manufacturers attesting that
grout materials used meet specified requirements.
2.
Contractor-furnished grout mix design: The Contractor shall submit his mix design
for each type of grout proposed for approval by the Engineer.
3.
As-built information: After completion of the foundation preparation, the Contractor
shall submit as-built information. At a minimum, the information shall consist of a
plan of the embankment dam and spillway foundation showing the limits of soil and
rock materials exposed at subgrade, the location and widths of major rock joints,
and the extent of slush grouting within the foundation.
B. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the submittals and as-built drawings no
later than the number of calendar days given below:
Item
Days
Certificates of conformance
28 days prior to slush grouting
Grout mix design
28 days prior to slush grouting
As-built drawings
At completion of work
1.05
DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Cement: Store bagged cement upon delivery in a weatherproof structure. Elevate bags
above ground. Store bulk materials in air tight and weatherproof containers. All cement
shall be free of lumps at its time of mixing in compliance with General Conditions Section
4.5.4.
B. Aggregate: Store fine aggregate on a clean hard surface and cover to prevent dusting.
C. Admixture: Store approved admixtures in a protected area.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A. Slush grout material shall meet the following specifications:
8/15/2025
31 23 13-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Portland Cement – ASTM C 150, Type II, fine ground to pass in wet mix through a
mechanically vibrated 100 mesh screen.
2.
Water – Potable
3.
Fine Aggregate – Masonry Aggregate, ASTM C 144.
4.
Admixtures – Only those approved will be permitted.
B. Grout Mix shall be a workable slush grout mix using cement and fine aggregate. A
plasticizer admixture shall be used to reduce the water-cement ratio of the mix. The
following typical mix is suggested for initial slush grouting:
Component
Proportion by Weight
Cement
1
Water and Plasticizer
As required to produce a workable mix
Sand
2
C. The grout shall be mixed in a concrete or grout mixer and used in the work within 1/2
hour after mixing.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall smooth and prepare the soil and weathered rock foundation to
provide a foundation surface such that the uppermost foundation materials will be
compact, impervious and well bonded to the first layer of fill placed, and such that the
first layer of fill, particularly the embankment core, will be well compacted and free of
loose zones in contact with the foundation.
B. The Contractor shall smooth and prepare the foundation surface for appurtenant
structures prior to placing structural concrete or drainage material. Bedrock subgrade for
the diversion conduit and footings for spillway retaining walls shall be slush grouted to
seal surface joints.
C. The Contractor shall not slush grout the rock surface within 50 feet of the grout curtain
until the pressure grouting for the cutoff curtain has been completed.
D. Proof rolling shall consist of four coverages of all portions of the soil and weathered rock
subgrade with a rubber-tired roller with minimum wheel loads of 15 kips per wheel and a
minimum tire inflation pressure of 65 psi.
8/15/2025
31 23 13-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. No material shall be placed in any portion of the embankment dam or appurtenant
structures until the foundation has been suitably prepared and slush grouted as required
and has been approved by the Engineer and in compliance with inspection requirements
of General Conditions Section 4.4.13.
F. The foundation surface downstream of the core shall be upgraded to provide drainage
towards the drainage collection system.
G. The embankment dam foundation and appurtenant structure foundations shall be free of
organic material, topsoil, and other objectionable or disturbed materials.
3.02
FOUNDATION FOR TYPE 1 FILL
A. Soil Foundation Preparation: Soil shall be excavated to a smooth surface and the
foundation surface shall be dewatered, moistened or dried as required, proofrolled, and
scarified so that the uppermost materials of the foundation will be as impervious,
compact, and as well bonded with the first layer of fill as specified herein for the
subsequent layers of fill. Any soft zones in the subgrade shall be removed and replaced
with compacted Type 1 Fill.
B. Weathered Rock Foundation Preparation: Weathered rock, if sufficiently soft to be
excavated with earth moving equipment, shall be excavated to a smooth surface. If
isolated weathered rock blocks at foundation level are loosened or disturbed during
excavation, they shall be removed and replaced with hand tamped Type 1 fill. The
foundation surface shall be dewatered, moistened or dried as required, and proof rolled
so that the uppermost foundation materials will be compact and well bonded to the first
layer of fill. Any soft zones in the subgrade shall be removed and replaced with
compacted Type 1 Fill.
C. Sound Rock Foundation Preparation: Rock promontories and overhangs on the
foundation surface shall be carefully removed by hand tools or blasting with small
charges. Explosives shall be of such quantity and power as will neither open seams nor
otherwise disturb the foundation rock.
1.
The rock surface shall be cleaned using hand tools and water and air jets to
remove all loose or objectionable material. Any open joints or seams shall be
cleaned to a depth not less than three times the width of the cleaned joint or seam.
2.
The foundation surface shall receive a complete coverage of slush grout, and deep
depressions shall be filled with backfill lean concrete, as directed by the Engineer.
Slush grouting shall be scheduled, as directed by the Engineer. Slush grouting
shall be scheduled so that at least 2 days, but no more than 7 days, will elapse
between the application of slush grout and the covering of the slush grout with the
dam embankment. Where slush grout or concrete backfill is damaged before or
while being covered with the dam embankment, all affected portions of the work
shall be removed and replaced. Foundation surfaces shall be moist at the time of
8/15/2025
31 23 13-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
slush grouting, and surplus water shall be removed from pockets and depressions.
The grout shall be broomed or compacted onto foundation surfaces in such a
manner as to fill thoroughly all joints, cracks, crevices and minor imperfections in
the rock. The slush grout layer shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8 to 1/4 inches
over the rock surface and the slush grouted rock surface shall have a maximum
relief of 4 inches in a local area.
3.
The slush grout shall be water cured by placing moist burlap or other approved
material on the slush grouted rock surface. All slush grouted surfaces shall be kept
continually (not periodically) wet until fill is placed. Slush grouting will be permitted
only when the air temperature is between 50°F and 80°F.
3.03
FOUNDATION FOR TYPES 2 AND 2A FILL
A. Foundation preparation for Types 2 and 2A embankment fill shall be the same as for
Type 1, excepting that slush grouting will not be required on rock foundations. However,
joints greater than one-half inch in width that appear to be continuous or a possible
source of water from the pool shall be cleaned and grouted. Depressions in the rock
surface in which fill cannot be adequately compacted with the Contractor's compaction
equipment, in the judgement of the Engineer, shall be filled with lean backfill concrete.
3.04
FOUNDATION FOR TYPES 3, 3A, 4, 4A, 4B, AND 4C FILL
A. Foundations for Types 3, 3A, 4, 4A, 4B, and 4C embankment fill shall be made smooth
and cleaned to the extend required to remove all loose, disturbed, or other objectionable
material. Soil and weathered rock exposed at subgrade shall be proof rolled prior to
placing fill. The foundation surface shall be free of water immediately prior to placing fill.
3.05
FOUNDATION FOR SPILLWAY RETAINING WALLS
A. Remove loose rock and slush grout the rock surface within the limits of the spillway
retaining wall footings as in Section A. Fill large depressions with structural concrete.
Where subgrade is weathered rock or soil, smooth its surface and proofroll as in Section
A.
3.06
FOUNDATION FOR SPILLWAY SLAB
A. Remove loose rock and smooth and proofroll soil and weathered rock surfaces as in
Section A prior to placement of drainage blanket. The excavation surface shall provide
for an average thickness of the drainage blanket that is at least 6 inches. Where the
subgrade material is rock, isolated projections of rock will be acceptable, provided a
minimum stone cover of 3 inches is obtained and the overall average depth of stone is 6
inches. No slush grouting of rock shall be performed. Clean rock surfaces as in Section
A.
8/15/2025
31 23 13-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.07
FOUNDATION FOR OGEES AND CUTOFF WALLS
A. The trench for the cut-off key beneath the ogees and cut-off walls shall be excavated
with vertical sides to the elevations shown on the drawings. Where sound bedrock is
encountered above the drawing elevations the excavation shall be terminated provided a
minimum 5 ft. depth of key is obtained. Sound bedrock shall be drilled and blasted only
where necessary to obtain this minimum 5 ft. depth of key. Any sheeting required for the
excavation of the cut-off key shall be removed prior or during the placing of the concrete
so that continuous contact is obtained between the poured concrete and the soil and
rock of the trench walls.
3.08
FOUNDATION FOR OTHER APPURTENANT STRUCTURES
A. Treat footing subgrades as in Section B, excepting that depressions in the rock surface
shall be filled with structural concrete. Treat subgrades for slabs without underdrainage
similarly.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
31 23 13-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
31 23 13-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
31 23 24-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 31 23 24
FLOWABLE FILL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials and services, including
pumping equipment and application, necessary for the manufacture, transportation and
placement of all cementitious flowable fill as shown on the Contract Drawings or as
ordered by the Engineer, except for the work specifically included under other items.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A. Division 03 - Concrete
1.03
SUBMISSIONS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in City General Conditions
Section 4.7 – Materials Quality, Substitutions, and Shop Drawings, and Division 01, the
Contractor shall submit the following:
1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Certifications of specification compliance for all sources of each material
3.
Manufacturer’s data on all admixtures
4.
Mix design and trial mix test results
5.
Aggregate gradation
1.04
QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a testing laboratory, with the qualifications
required by Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete, and experienced in the design
and testing of flowable fill materials and mixes, to perform material evaluation tests and
to design mixes for flowable fill. A trial mix shall be performed to verify the flowable fill
mix design. The trial mix shall also report slump, air content, yield, cement content, and
dry unit weight per ASTM C143 and ASTM D6023.
01222025
8/15/2025
31 23 24-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2 – MATERIALS
2.01
CEMENTITIOUS FLOWABLE FILL
A. Flowable fill (controlled low strength material) shall be a uniform mixture of sand, Type II
Portland cement or Type IL blended cement, fly ash, admixtures and water. The mix
design shall produce a flowable material with little or no bleed water, which produces a
minimum compressive strength of 50 psi and maximum compressive strength of 100 psi
at 56 days. The cured material shall be excavatable and have a maximum dry weight of
100 pounds per cubic foot. Slump of mix at the point of application shall be 7-inches to
10-inches.
B. Admixtures specifically designed for flowable fill shall be used to improve flowability,
reduce unit weight, control strength development, reduce settlement and reduce bleed
water. Admixtures shall be Mastercell 25 by BASF Construction Chemicals; Darafill by
Grace Construction Products; or approved equal. Cement and all other materials shall
be as specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Fine Aggregate (Sand) shall consist of natural or manufactured siliceous sand, clean
and free from deleterious substances, and graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing by
Weight
3/8"
100
No. 4
95 to 100
No. 8
80 to 100
No. 16
50 to 85
No. 30
25 to 60
No. 50
10 to 30
No. 100*
2 to 10
*For manufactured sand, the percent passing the
No. 100 Sieve may be increased up to 20%.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
PLACEMENT OF FLOWABLE FILL
A. Flowable fill shall be batched and premixed by an approved producer, dispensed from
ready-mix trucks, and placed by approved methods and equipment in accordance with
General Conditions Section 4.4 – Performance of the Work.
8/15/2025
31 23 24-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. Flowable fill shall be placed as needed to completely fill the space to receive it with no
trapped air pockets or other voids. Positive means of allowing the air to escape shall be
provided where necessary and after approval of the Engineer. Where placed against,
around and inside existing structures, lift heights shall be limited so as not to overload
the structure. The Engineer shall approve lift heights and procedures. Specific
procedures and methods shall be included in the Contractor’s shop drawing submittals.
C. Where flowable fill is placed around piping and other elements subject to floating within
the fill space, positive means shall be taken to provide temporary balancing loads to
prevent uplift or fill lift heights shall be limited to prevent uplift.
D. Application of loads or placement of other fill materials or concrete on top of flowable fill
shall not occur until the flowable fill surface is determined to be suitable for loading per
ASTM D6024 subject to the approval of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
31 23 24-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
31 23 25-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 31 23 25
DYNAMIC COMPACTION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to complete all work associated with
dynamic compaction required for the in-place densification of the subgrade soils as
indicated on the Drawings. The effect of the process shall create a known and verifiable,
uniform condition and a subgrade soil bearing capacity of at least 3500 psf, which limits
total settlement to 1-inch and differential settlements to 1/2-inch.
B. All work under this Contract shall be done in conformance with and subject to the
limitations of the latest editions of the Maricopa Association of Governments Standard
Details and Specifications as adopted and amended by the City of Chandler.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Requirements of related work are included in Division 01 and Division 02 of these
Specifications.
1.03
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. The current editions and addenda of the following publications are made part of the
Specifications and are applicable to the extent indicated by the specific reference.
Testing performed shall conform to the following applicable standards:
1.
Maricopa Association of Governments Standard Details and Specifications as
adopted and amended by the City of Chandler.
2.
Arizona Department of Transportation Materials Testing Manual, latest edition.
3.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.
ASTM D2049 – Test Method for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils.
b.
ASTM D2167 – Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber-Balloon
Method.
c.
ASTM D2922 – Test for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
121311
8/15/2025
31 23 25-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.04
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Information on subsurface conditions is referenced under Division 01, General
Requirements.
B. Attention is directed to the fact that there may be water pipes, storm drains and other
utilities located in the area of proposed dynamic compaction. Perform all repairs to same
in the event that excavation activities disrupt service.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 –
Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following:
1.
Name and qualification of specialty subcontractor performing dynamic compaction.
2.
Name and qualification of geotechnical engineer who will monitor dynamic
compaction, provide supervision of the operation and perform required testing to
substantiate compaction results.
3.
Program and plan to monitor vibrations associated with dynamic compaction
operations.
4.
Work plan for dynamic compaction.
1.06
CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall obtain the services of an approved specialty subcontractor who is
regularly engaged and experienced in dynamic compaction work. The subcontractor
shall have at least five (5) years of experience in performing dynamic compaction and
have completed at least fifteen (15) projects of similar scope, difficulty, and comparable
size.
B. The Contractor or specialty subcontractor shall have on his staff or shall obtain the
services of a geotechnical engineer to provide constant field supervision to monitor and
record daily activities and performance of work. The geotechnical engineer shall perform
appropriate tests to determine the depth of compaction and density of the subgrade soils
prior to excavation operations in advance of final subgrade preparations.
C. The specialty subcontractor and geotechnical engineer shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to construction. Engineer's approval will be based on the minimum
experience criteria designated herein.
8/15/2025
31 23 25-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
A. Following clearing and topsoil stripping operations, the site shall be graded at a grade
not exceeding 4 percent.
B. Dynamic Compaction shall be performed over the designated area utilizing a crane
suitably powered and dimensioned for the work. The crane's mechanism shall allow a
weight (pounder) to free fall from a height of 50 to 60 feet impacting the earth with high
compactive energy. A minimum weight of 10 tons shall be used. The number of drops
per impact point shall be field determined after performing initial drops. A minimum of 6
drops per impact point shall be performed, unless conditions and acceptable results
allow fewer drops. The geotechnical engineer shall constantly monitor the operation
recommending modifications as necessary. The spacing of drops shall be established in
a square pattern over the entire area. The spacing shall be no more than 8 feet unless
approved otherwise by the Engineer. Multiple passes may be required to apply the total
energy necessary to achieve the specified compaction results.
C. After the dynamic compaction operation is complete and the densities of the subgrade
soils have been determined to be satisfactory, the grading and excavation of the site
shall proceed which will include cut and fill placement to fill the craters created by the
dynamic compaction operation and to reach the specified subgrades. Excavation and
embankment operations shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 00 01 –
Earthwork. Placement of structural fill and select fill shall be as indicated on the
Drawings. If the required densification of the deeper soils has not be attained as
determined by the Engineer after the site has been graded to the required subgrade
elevations, the Contractor shall perform additional compaction procedures acceptable to
the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a technical work plan two weeks prior to the
start of the operation indicating his proposed plan to dynamically compact the subgrade
soils. The submittal shall include crane data, proposed weight (pounder), drop height,
impact spacing, number of passes and work sequence.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible to monitor the site to document vibrations leaving
the site during the dynamic compaction operation. Vibrations shall be monitored utilizing
a seismograph capable of providing a record of particle velocity along three mutually
perpendicular axes utilizing internal calibration. A pre-construction condition inspection
and documentation of adjacent structures on-site and off-site shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to damage property on-
site and off-site. The Contractor shall notify each adjoining property owner within 500
yards of the proposed work of the anticipated vibrations and noise which will occur due
to his operation. This notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the adjacent
8/15/2025
31 23 25-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
property owners to take whatever precautions they may consider necessary. The
Contractor shall limit his operations to minimize any disturbance to the adjacent property
owners if necessary. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any
structure or utility line, pipes, etc., on-site and off-site as a result of his operations.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
32 11 00-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 32 11 00
SURFACE RESTORATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for final grading, topsoil
placement, and miscellaneous site work not included under other Sections but required
to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork
B. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control
PART 2 – MATERIALS
2.01
TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall meet the requirements of Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
FINAL GRADING
A. Following approval of rough grading the subgrade shall be prepared as follows:
1.
For riprap, bare soil 24 inches below finish grade or as directed by Engineer.
2.
For topsoil, scarify 2-inches deep at 4 inches below finish grade.
3.02
TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
A. Topsoil shall be placed over all areas disturbed during construction under any contract
except those areas which will be paved, graveled or rip rapped.
B. Topsoil shall be spread in place for lawn and road shoulder seed areas at a 4-inch
consolidated depth and at a sufficient quantity for plant beds and backfill for shrubs and
trees.
C. Topsoil shall not be placed in a frozen or muddy condition.
082905
8/15/2025
32 11 00-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. Final surface shall be hand or mechanically raked to an even finished surface to finish
grade as shown on Drawings.
E. All stones, roots over 4-inches,rubbish, and other deleterious materials shall be removed
and disposed of.
END OF SECTION
8/15/2025
32 31 13-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 32 31 13
STEEL FENCING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install steel fencing, posts, gates, etc., where shown on
the Drawings and in compliance with these Specifications.
B. Fencing shall be of the chain link type topped with barbed wire. The 6-foot high fabric
shall clear the final grade by 3 inches and shall be topped with three strands of barbed
wire. The barbed wire shall be angled outward at the top. All components which are to
be galvanized shall be hot dipped galvanized, coating to be 1.8 ounces per square foot
of surface. Alternate coatings which employ a zinc coating of less than 1.8 ounces per
square foot are not acceptable.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
CHAIN LINK FABRIC
A. Fabric shall be 9-gauge aluminum coated wire woven in a 2-inch diamond mesh
conforming to ASTM A491. Top and bottom selvage to have a barbed finish. Minimum
weight of coating shall be 0.40 ounce per square foot of wire surface. The coated wire
shall have a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 lbs. per square inch.
B. Install fabric 3 inches above ground level. Fence shall be stretched tight and securely
fastened to posts at points spaced 12 inches apart maximum.
2.02
POSTS
A. Posts and rails shall be galvanized standard weight pipe conforming to the requirements
of ASTM F1083.
083005
8/15/2025
32 31 13-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Line Posts: Line posts shall be Schedule 40, 2-7/8 inch O.D. galvanized pipe with
minimum bending strength of 201 pounds under a 6-foot cantilever load. Line
posts shall be spaced at a maximum 10-foot O.C.
2.
Terminal Posts: All end, corner, intermediate, and pull posts and gate leaves 6'0"
wide and less shall be 3-½ inch O.D. galvanized Schedule 40 pipe with minimum
bending strength of 381 pounds on 6-foot cantilever load. Gate posts for gate
leaves shall be Schedule 40 pipe complying with ASTM F1083 of diameters as
follows:
Gate Leaf Width
Pipe O.D.
Weight per Ft.
0' to 6'
3-1/2"
9.11 lbs.
Over 6' to 13'
4"
10.79 lbs.
Over 13' to 18'
6-5/8"
18.97 lbs.
Over 18'
8-5/8"
24.7 lbs.
2.03
TENSION WIRE
A. Top and bottom tension wire shall be No. 7 gauge aluminum coated steel wire. Fabric
shall be securely tied to tension wire at intervals not to exceed 24-inches.
2.04
POST TOPS AND BARBED WIRE SUPPORTS
A. Gate, end, corner and line post tops shall be malleable iron or pressed steel and shall be
hot dipped galvanized conforming to ASTM A153.
B. Extension arms for supporting the three (3) strands of barbed wire for line posts shall be
of pressed steel with malleable iron base, or solid aluminum alloy castings.
C. Angles for line post extension arms shall be approximately 45 degrees from the vertical
and the top slot for barbed wire shall be a minimum of 12 inches above the fabric and a
minimum of 10 inches from the fence line.
2.05
BARBED WIRE
A. Barbed wire shall consist of three strands of 12-1/2 gauge aluminum coated steel wire
with 4-point barbs of 14 gauge aluminum wire spaced 5 inches apart, conforming to
ASTM A585.
B. Additional strands of barbed wire shall be added beneath the chain link fabric at all ditch
crossings to maintain the security of the fence installation.
8/15/2025
32 31 13-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.06
BRACES AND TOP RAILS
A. Braces and top rails (where shown on the Drawings) shall be 1.66-inch O.D., Schedule
40 galvanized pipe with minimum vertical bending strength of 202 pounds on 10-foot
span.
B. Top rails shall be continuous and shall pass through the post tops. The coupling used to
join the top rail lengths shall allow for expansion. Brace rails shall be provided at all
terminal posts, located between the top and grade lines and extend from the terminal
post to the first adjacent post. Braces shall be securely fastened at both ends. Brace
ends for receiving brace rails shall be malleable iron or castings of 356.0 (formerly
SG70A) alloy, or equivalent of ASTM B26 or B108.
C. Truss and stretcher bands shall be 1/8-inch x 7/8-inch pressed steel, supplied with
carriage bolts and nuts. Bolts shall be 5/16-inch by 1 1/4-inch. Truss rods shall be
3/8-inch nominal diameter.
2.07
FABRIC TIES
A. Wire ties shall be pre-formed 0.148-inch diameter (9 gauge) aluminum. Flat band type
ties shall be 1100-H18 or 3003-H14, .064-inch thick by 1/2-inch wide.
B. Hog rings for attaching tension wire to fabric shall be 0.105-inch diameter, Alloy
1100-H14.
2.08
GATES
A. Gate frames shall be made of 2-inch O.D. ASTM F1083 pipe, 2.72 lbs. per foot hot
dipped galvanized. Fabric shall match fence. Gate frames shall be welded or assembled
with riveted corner castings. Gate frames shall be equipped with 3/8-inch diameter
adjustable truss bars. Hinges shall be ball and socket.
B. Gate shall be equipped with positive latching device with provision for padlocking.
Personnel gates shall be minimum 36-inch clear opening.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. All line posts shall be spaced equidistant in the fence line on a maximum of 10-foot
centers. Posts shall be set plumb in concrete bases as detailed on Drawings. The top of
the posts shall be brought to a smooth grade line. The wire fence shall be set accurately
to line and grade and shall be plumb.
8/15/2025
32 31 13-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
B. End, corner, pull or intermediate posts shall be placed in the following locations: corners;
changes in direction; abrupt changes in grade; intervals no greater than 500 feet in the
fence line. Each end or gate post shall have one brace assembly and each corner or
intermediate post shall have two brace assemblies.
C. Horizontal braces shall be provided at all terminal posts, corner posts, and intermediate
posts between top rail and ground and shall extend from the above-mentioned posts to
the first adjacent line posts. Braces shall be securely fastened to the line posts by brace
ends and brace bands and to the terminal posts by approved rail end connectors.
Diagonal brace rods shall be trussed from the brace end on the line post back to the
terminal post, corner post or intermediate post and fastened to it by an approved
connector.
3.02
POST FOUNDATIONS
A. Post holes shall be in true alignment and of sufficient size to provide a permanent
foundation of concrete. Holes shall be well centered on the posts. A minimum diameter
of 12 inches shall be required for all posts.
B. Post foundations shall be carefully rodded or tamped into place. The top of concrete
shall extend 2 inches above ground line and shall be neatly troweled and leveled up
from edges to the posts so as to have a pitch outward in all directions.
C. No materials shall be installed on the posts, nor shall any load be applied to the posts
within 3 days after the individual post foundation is completed.
D. All concrete shall be Class "B" in conformance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
3.03
RESETTING OF EXISTING FENCE
A. Where shown on the Drawings that resetting of existing fence is required, the fence,
after resetting, shall be in a condition that is equal to or better than before the fence was
removed.
B. The Contractor shall replace any of the fence components which have been
unnecessarily damaged by him.
3.04
PADLOCK AND KEYS
A. One solid brass padlock shall be furnished with each gate. Padlocks shall be master
keyed to the system specified under Section 08 71 00 – Finish Hardware.
8/15/2025
32 31 13-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.05
TEMPORARY FENCING
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary fencing and appurtenances as
shown on the Drawings or as required during construction to adequately secure the site
prior to installation of the permanent fence.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-1
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 40 05 24.23A
STEEL PIPE FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER SERVICE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall submit certification that the steel pipe has been designed to resist
all loads implied and reasonably anticipated for the means and methods of installation
applied by the Contractor.
B. Design pipe layout in accordance with AWWA M11
1.
Use base stationing and elevation convention as shown on Drawings.
2.
Include at minimum:
a.
Specific number, location, and direction of each pipe, joint, and fitting.
Number each pipe in installation sequence.
b.
Station and centerline elevation at changes in grade or horizontal alignment.
c.
Location of mitered pipe sections, beveled ends for alignment conformance,
butt straps, and temperature stress control joints.
C. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)
1.
Qualified by testing in accordance with ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code
(BPVC) SEC IX for shop welds and ASME B31.1 and B31.3.
2.
Procedure Qualifications Records conducted on unlisted base metal to be
production welded as required in the referenced welding Code shall be traceable
to heat lots.
3.
Written WPS required for welds, both shop and field.
D. Stulling: Design for pipe and fittings such that over-deflection and damage is avoided
during handling, storage, and installation, including backfill and compaction.
E. The AWWA Specifications referenced in this Section are supplemented as follows:
1.
An affidavit of compliance is required from the pipe manufacturer stating the pipe
material is manufactured to the requirements of the Specifications and referenced
standards.
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-2
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
The pipe manufacturer shall include mill specifications on coil steel used in the
production of the pipe. The steel manufacturer’s certification that the material
meets the ASTM Specification will be accepted in lieu of tests on specimens taken
from the fabricated pipe. The manufacturer may purchase steel plates on the
chemical basis and shall submit certified test reports.
1.02
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of installation and testing of welded steel
pipe.
B. Pipe and fittings shall be designed by Supplier where thickness is not indicated on the
drawings.
C. Design criteria for pipe and pipe fittings: In accordance with AWWA Manual M11 with the
following modifications:
1.
Wall thickness: As designed, as shown on the drawings, or minimum specified
thickness, whichever is thicker.
2.
Inside diameter of unlined pipe: Nominal.
3.
Inside diameter of lined pipe: As measured from face to face of liner, but not less
than nominal.
4.
Working stress of steel: Maximum 50 percent of yield stress.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings showing pipe layout including all fittings and straight sections in one
complete package from the main pipe supplier.
B. Material list and steel reinforcement schedules for materials specified.
C. Fabrication Information
1.
Pipe and fitting details for temporary and permanent facilities indicating:
a.
Cylinder thickness
b.
Manufacturing tolerances
2.
Welded joint details including:
a.
Butt Joints
b.
Miter-cut ends for alignment conformance
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-3
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
c.
Fittings
D. Welding Data (Shop and Field Welding)
1.
Show on a weld map, complete information regarding base metal specification
designation location, type, size, and extent of welds with reference called out for
WPS and nondestructive examination numbers in tail of welding symbol.
2.
Indicate, by welding symbols or sketches, details of welded joints and preparation
of base metal. Provide complete joint welding details showing bevels, groove
angles, and root openings for all welds.
3.
Submit welding data together with Shop Drawings as a complete package.
4.
Fittings: Provide a joint weld beveling diagram. Refer to ASME B31.1 and B31.3.
E. Product data for the following:
1.
Material data
2.
Chemical and physical test reports showing data consistent with specified
requirements for each heat of steel proposed for use.
F. Certificates
1.
Lining Materials: Certificate that lining system is currently approved for potable
water contact in accordance with NSF 61 and satisfies current applicable
governmental health and safety requirements for use in potable water.
G. Pipe Manufacturer’s written Quality Assurance/Control Plan
H. Statements of Qualification
1.
Pipe Manufacturer
2.
Fittings and specials fabricator
3.
Welder Logs
a.
Name of welder
b.
Welding procedure/positions for which welder is qualified to weld
c.
Assigned certification stamp number
d.
Certification Date
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-4
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
e.
Current certification status
4.
Contractor’s Shop Inspector
5.
Contractor’s Field Inspection Firm and Personnel
6.
Nondestructive Testing Quality Control Firm and Personnel
I.
Procedures
1.
Shop and field welding information; at a minimum include complete welding code
paper trail with linkage to Shop Drawings.
a.
Written WPS and Procedure Qualification Record.
b.
Written Nondestructive Testing procedures.
c.
Current Welder Performance Qualifications.
d.
Written weld repair procedures for Work.
J.
Reports
1.
Source Quality Control Test Reports: Nondestructive weld testing (shop and field)
K. Design calculations prepared by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State or
Commonwealth in which the construction of the project is occurring, for fittings, including
opening reinforcement details of collars, wrappers, crotch plates; and harnessed joint
assemblies.
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Pipe Manufacturer
1.
Steel Plate Fabricators Association (SPFA) Certification of ISO 9000 Certification.
2.
Experienced in fabricating pipe of similar diameters, lengths, and wall thickness
required for the Work.
3.
Demonstrate current production capability for volume of work required for this
project.
4.
Experience shall be applicable to fabrication plant facilities and personnel; not
company or corporation that currently owns fabrication facility or employs
personnel.
B. Pipe and Fittings Fabricator
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-5
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
Pipe: Successful fabrication of at least 100,000 lineal feet of the same diameter (or
larger) and same wall thickness (or greater) within the past five years with the type
of joint specified.
2.
Fittings: Successful fabrication to AWWA C200 and AWWA C208 standards of at
least 25 fittings of the same diameter or larger pipe, with wall thickness 3/16-inch
or greater, within the past five years.
C. Welders and Welding Operators
1.
Shop Welders: In accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX
2.
Field Welders: In accordance with ASME B31.1 and B31.3
D. Contractor’s Shop Inspector
1.
In accordance with AWWA C200
2.
Responsibilities
a.
Monitor conformance to approved WPS
b.
Monitor conformance to approved Nondestructive Testing procedure
specifications.
c.
Monitor conformance of Welder Performance Qualifications.
d.
Provide 100 percent visual inspection before, during, and after shop welding.
e.
Coordinate Nondestructive Testing work and review test results.
f.
Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of inspection and
testing.
E. Pipe Manufacturer Field Representative: The field service representative shall have a
minimum of 5 years’ experience installing pipe with joints, linings, and coatings of the
pipe to be furnished.
1.05
DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Fittings shall be marked at each end with “TOP FIELD CENTERLINE”.
B. Securely bulkhead or otherwise seal ends of pipe and fittings prior to loading at
manufacturing site.
C. Pipe ends shall remain sealed until installation.
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-6
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
D. The Contractor shall ensure the proper protection of piping materials during shipment,
handling, storage, and installation as directed by the pipe manufacturer.
E. Damage to pipe and fittings, including linings and coatings shall be repaired to
Engineer’s satisfaction or removed from Site and replaced.
F. Support pipe securely to prevent accidental rolling and to avoid contact with mud, water,
or other deleterious materials.
G. Support on sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 3-inches in diameter.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel pipe and fittings shall be under direction of the main pipe supplier. All straight pipe
sections shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. Fittings may be
manufactured by a different manufacturer. Main pipe supplier shall be responsible for
coordinating work of other suppliers for either fittings or pipe.
B. All steel pipe shall be supplied by American Spiralweld Pipe Company or Northwest Pipe
Company or approved equal.
2.02
STEEL PIPE
A. General:
1.
Steel pipe and fittings shall be manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked to
comply with AWWA C200 and additional requirements of these Contract
Documents.
2.
Materials in contact with internal conveyed liquid shall be NSF 61 approved for use
with potable water.
3.
Pipe shall be furnished principally in 40-feet net laying lengths with shorter lengths,
field trim pieces and closure pieces as required by the Drawings for locations of
fittings, or as required for construction.
B. Pipe Barrel
1.
The steel pipe shall be mill type, smooth wall, spiral welded, or steel plate for
straight seam welded steel pipe per AWWA for nominal pipe sizes 6-inches and
larger. Steel pipe shall be new and shall meet or exceed the manufacturer and
material requirements of ASTM A139, Grade C, or D, or ASTM A1011/ASTM
A1018 Grade 40 or 45. Plates used for reinforcement collars, anchor rings, and
crotch plates shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM A36 or A572 Grade
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-7
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
50. Steel pipe shall be designed for embankment (wide-trench) conditions and in
accordance with AWWA M11 Steel Pipe – A Guide for Design and Installation,
latest edition, as supplemented by this Section. and as follows:
a.
Minimum Yield Strength of 42,000 psi
b.
Minimum Tensile Strength of 60,000 psi
2.
The inside diameter, including the lining, shall be a minimum of the nominal
diameter of the pipe specified.
C. Buried steel pipe shall be manufactured to the nominal pipe sizes as shown on the
drawings and shall have the following minimum wall thicknesses:
Buried Steel Pipe Schedule
Nominal Inside
Diameter (inches)
Interior Lining
Type
Thickness of Mortar
Lining (inches)
Minimum Sheet or Plate
Thickness (inches)
16
Cement Mortar
Lined
0.500
0.250
48
Cement Mortar
Lined
0.500
0.375
2.03
FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C208. Pipe material used in
fittings shall be of the same material and pressure class as the adjoining pipe. The
minimum radius of elbows shall be 2 ½ times the pipe diameter and the maximum miter
angle on each section of the elbow shall not exceed 11 ¼-degrees (one cut elbow up to
22 ½-degrees). If elbow radius is less than 2 ½ times the pipe diameter, per the approval
of the Engineer, stresses shall be checked per AWWA M11 and the pressure class
increased if necessary.
B. Specials and fittings: unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, shall be made of
segmental welded sections from hydrostatically tested pipe, with ends compatible with
the type of joint or coupling specified for the pipe.
C. Laterals and outlets shall be reinforced in accordance with ASME Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, Paragraph G-37 or the latest version of AWWA M11.
D. Fabricate collar or wrapper reinforcement using same steel as specified for main pipe
barrel.
2.04
INTERIOR LINING
A. Cement Mortar Lining
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-8
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1.
All steel pipe shall be manufactured to include cement mortar lining. Cement
mortar lining conforming to AWWA C602 for in-place lining, or AWWA C205 for
shop lined applied lining shall be provided. The minimum thickness of the mortar
lining shall be as indicated in the pipe schedule. Shop lining of welded joint pipe
shall be held back as shown on the Drawings to facilitate welding.
2.
Holdbacks shall receive a prime coat and be provided as shown on the approved
shop drawings. Holdbacks shall be filled with cement mortar after joint completion
per AWWA C205.
3.
Defective linings as identified in AWWA C205 shall be removed from the pipe wall
and shall be replaced to the full thickness required. Defective linings shall be cut
back to a square shoulder in order to avoid feather edged joints.
4.
Fittings shall be cement-mortar lined per AWWA C205.
2.05
EXTERIOR COATING
A. Tape Wrap for Buried Steel Pipe and Fittings
1.
The outside of all buried steel pipe and fittings shall receive a prime coat per the
exterior tape system manufacturer's recommendations, except for areas of pipe to
be field welded.
2.
The outside of buried steel pipe shall receive, over the prime coat, a multi-layered,
cold-applied tape wrap system which shall be shop applied and consist of a rubber
and synthetic resin primer, one (20 mils) layer of inner wrapping and two (30 mils
each) layer of outer wrap for a total system thickness of 80 mils. The cold applied
tape wrap shall operate satisfactorily at a temperature of 150°F.
3.
The wrap shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C214 and as specified
herein.
4.
Windings shall be spiral wrapped with at least 1" of overlap. All fittings shall be
wrapped in accordance with AWWA C209 and C214. Successive layers shall be
applied such that windings are staggered and overlay the midpoints of previous
tape widths. The wrapping shall terminate 6" from outside field weld sites.
5.
Polyethylene backed coatings shall be protected from sunlight at all times.
6.
The tape wrap system shall be the YG III system as manufactured by the Polyken
Division of Kendall Co., Boston MA, or equal.
7.
Interior Welded Pipe: Finish wrap or heat shrink sleeves per AWWA C216 shall be
applied to each joint of the pipe for continuous wrapping of all steel piping.
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-9
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
Contractor shall complete internal welding prior to applying heat shrink sleeve and
prior to backfilling.
8.
Any tape wrap damaged during installation shall be repaired in accordance with
AWWA C214 to the Engineer’s satisfaction prior to backfilling operations.
B. Exterior Painting for Exposed Steel Pipe (Indoor and Outdoor)
1.
Prepare surface to be coated in accordance with the coating manufacturers
recommendations immediately prior to applying any coating.
2.
Except for areas of pipe to be welded, the exterior of exposed steel pipe shall
receive a prime coat of 5 to 10 mils (dry) of inorganic zinc primer rated for 300°F
continuous service and shall be Carbozinc 11 as manufactured by Carboline,
Tnemec-zinc Series 90-97, or equal.
3.
Areas of pipe to be welded shall receive 1 mil (dry) of weldable primer as
manufactured by Carboline, Tnemec, or equal. After welding and pressure and
leakage testing are completed, welded joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
foreign matter and any scale or rust and primed as previously specified.
4.
Over the prime coat shall be a finish coat of 3 to 5 mils (dry) of a polyurethane
coating and shall be Carbothane 133 HB, Tnemec Series 1075, or equal.
5.
Field touch-ups shall be electrically inspected by the use of a holiday detector in
accordance with AWWA C209.
2.06
JOINTS
A. All unwelded pipe joints shall be bonded for electrical continuity in accordance with the
Pipe Manufacturer’s recommendations unless otherwise specified in the Drawings.
B. Flanges, Flange Gaskets, and Bolting Materials
1.
Flanged joints shall be used as shown on the Drawings. Flanges shall be AWWA
C207, standard ring type, slip-on welding flanges.
2.
Bolts and nuts shall be per the requirements of AWWA C207. The bolts shall have
hexagonal heads and nuts. No washers shall be used.
3.
All gaskets shall be the “Ring-Gasket” type, 1/8-inch minimum thickness.
Segmented gaskets will not be acceptable. Gaskets for flanged joints must follow
AWWA C207.
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-10
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
4.
Where isolation is required between dissimilar metals or for cathodic protection,
insulating joints shall be provided using isolation gasket kits. Isolating sleeves for
bolt holes shall be mylar, and isolating washer material shall be GRE-G10.
5.
Shop lining and coating shall be continuous to the end of the pipe or back of the
flange. Flange faces shall be shop coated with a soluble rust preventive
compound.
C. Lap and Butt-strap Welds
1.
Lap welds or butt-strap welds shall be in accordance with AWWA C200, AWWA
C206 (for field welding) and AWWA M11.
2.
Lap and butt-strap field welded joints shall be used where restrained joints are
required or indicated on the Drawings. The minimum lap shall be 1-inch.
3.
Lap welded joints shall be welded as shown on the drawings. Holdbacks for
coating and linings shall be provided as shown on the approved shop drawings.
4.
If pipe restraint is not required, lap or butt-strap or butt welding may be used at the
Contractors option.
D. Butt Weld Joints
1.
Butt welded joints shall conform to AWWA C200, AWWA C206 (for field welding),
and AWWA M11.
2.
Butt welded joints shall be used where indicated on the Drawings, or at the
Contractor’s choice in lieu of lap and butt-strap welds. Butt welds shall be
complete joint penetration welds (applies to single and double welded joint), and
the ends of the pipe shall be appropriately beveled for an acceptable butt weld.
3.
Butt welds shall be accurately aligned and retained in position during the welding
operation so that in the finished joint the abutting pipe sections shall not be
misaligned by more than 20 percent of the pipe wall thickness or a maximum of
1/8”, whichever is less.
4.
Holdbacks for coating and linings shall be provided as shown on the approved
shop drawings.
E. Rolled Groove Rubber Gasket Joints
1.
The standard joint for unrestrained steel pipe shall be a rolled groove rubber
gasket joint unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Rolled groove rubber gasket
joints shall conform to AWWA C200 and AWWA M11.
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-11
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.
The O-ring gasket shall have sufficient volume to approximately fill the area of the
groove and shall conform to AWWA C200.
3.
The joint shall be suitable for a working pressure equal to the class of pipe
furnished and shall operate satisfactorily with a deflection angle, the tangent of
which is not to exceed 1.00/D where D is the outside diameter of the pipe in inches
with a pull-out of 1-inch.
F. Mechanical Couplings
1.
Mechanical couplings (unrestrained applications) where indicated on the Drawings
shall be Smith Blair Style 411, Baker Style 200, Romac Industries, Inc. Style 400,
or equal.
2.
Restrained mechanical couplings where indicated on the Drawings shall be Smith
Blair Style 414, Baker Style 216, Victaulic Style 232, or equal. Rodded connections
may also be used to restrain couplings where approved by the Engineer.
3.
Where two different pipe materials are joined, insulating mechanical couplings
shall be provided and shall be double insulated Smith Blair Style 416, Baker Style
216, Romac Industries Inc. Style IC400, or equal for working pressures up to 150
psi only.
4.
Couplings for buried service shall have all metal parts fusion epoxy coated in
accordance with AWWA C213.
5.
Pipe ends for mechanical couplings shall conform to AWWA C200 and AWWA
M11. The shop applied outside coating shall be held back as required for field
assembly of the mechanical coupling or to the harness lugs or rings. Harness lugs
or rings shall be fusion epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA C213 and pipe
ends shall be painted with one shop coat of polyurethane conforming to AWWA
C222.
6.
Pipe for use with sleeve-type couplings shall have plain ends at right angles to the
axis.
G. The piping layout shown on the Drawings is based upon standard fittings available in
ductile iron pipe. Welded joints will not be acceptable where such joints would interfere
with the removal of valves or equipment or create sections of piping too large for
removal from structures as determined by the Engineer.
H. Harnessed flexible couplings may also be used in lieu of flanges at locations approved
by the Engineer. Lugs or retainer rings shall be welded to the pipe in accordance with
the requirements of AWWA Manual M11 for Steel pipe where required for harnessing of
flexible couplings.
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-12
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
2.07
WELD TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be qualified under the provision of
AWS B2.1 or ASME Section IX.
B. All welds made after hydrostatic testing of the straight sections and fittings of pipe shall
be tested per the following paragraphs.
C. Shop Non-Destructive Testing
a.
100 percent visually examined by Contractor’s Shop Inspector
b.
Hydrostatic testing 100 percent of straight pipe sections per AWWA C200
D. Field Non-Destructive Testing
a.
All field welds shall be performed by AWS certified welders in conformance
with standard procedures and shall be visually inspected and tested by an
approved quality assurance testing firm in accordance with ASME B31.1 and
B31.3.
b.
The Contractor shall be responsible for contracting with an approved testing
firm. Nondestructive testing methods shall be used unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
c.
At minimum, all field welds shall be inspected in accordance with the
following:
d.
Visual: 100 percent of all welds.
1)
Magnetic particle or Ultrasonic: 100 percent of all butt welds.
2)
Magnetic particle: 100 percent of all lap and butt-strap welds.
3)
Hydrostatic testing 100 percent of pipeline per AWWA C200.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Furnish feeler gauges of proper size, type, and shape for use during installation.
B. Damaged Coatings and Linings: Repair using coating and lining materials in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications.
8/15/2025
40 05 24.23A-13
70048-013
GMP2
PSWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. General
a.
Install pipe in accordance with the requirements included in AWWA M11.
b.
Join pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, unless
otherwise shown or specified.
3.03
MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. The services of an experienced, competent and authorized field service representative
acceptable to the Owner shall be provided for a period of not less than 3 days to perform
all field services specified herein.
B. The field service representative shall visit the site to advise and consult with the
Contractor and to review and instruct the Contractor in procedures for pipe handling,
laying, and jointing at the start of pipe installation for each crew and shall coordinate his
services with the Contractor. The field services representative shall not directly
supervise the Contractor’s personnel. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the
piping installation work.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
THE REQUIREMENT
A.
1.02
PIPING SCHEDULES
A.
B.
PIPE SIZE
MATERIAL
TYPE OF JOINT
CLASS/DESIGN
TEST PRESSURE
FLANGED (EXPOSED)
CLASS 53
RESTRAINED (BURIED)
PRESSURE CLASS 350
LESS THAN 4-IN
PVC/CPVC (2)
SOCKET
SCH 80
(1)
1.03
VALVE SCHEDULES
A.
B.
1.04
GATE SCHEDULES
A.
Valves not listed in this Section shall be manually operated, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings
SECTION 40 06 20A
PROCESS PIPE, VALVE, AND GATE SCHEDULES
Reference Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
Piping requirements for this Section are outlined on the Drawings and in the Piping Schedules.
In the absence of a specified test pressure, pipe shall be tested at the greater of: 1) 150 percent
of working pressure as determined by the Engineer or 2) 10 psig, unless the Schedule indicates
no test is required.
If the pipe material is not shown on the Piping Schedule or otherwise specified, the following
materials shall be used.
DIP
Gates shall be tagged by the manufacturer according to locations listed in this Section.
(1)
4-IN AND LARGER
(1) Test at 150 percent of working pressure or 10 psi, whichever is greater.
(2) For all PVC / CPVC designations, if piping is exposed to direct sunlight or if heat tracing is required, CPVC shall be used.
Otherwise, PVC shall be used.
All valves shall be tagged by the manufacturer according to the control valve designations listed
in this Section.
11-03-21
8/15/2025
GMP2
40 06 20A-2
70048-013
PSWTP Improvements
BURIED
AWWA C200 FABRICATED
WELDED STEEL
SECTION
40 05 24.23a
CEMENT-MORTAR: AWWA C205
WELDED
ENCASED
AWWA C200 FABRICATED
WELDED STEEL
SECTION
40 05 24.23a
CEMENT-MORTAR: AWWA C205
WELDED
EXPOSED
AWWA C200 FABRICATED
WELDED STEEL
SECTION
40 05 24.23a
CEMENT-MORTAR: AWWA C205
WELDED/
FLANGED4
BURIED
AWWA C200 FABRICATED
WELDED STEEL
SECTION
40 05 24.23a
CEMENT-MORTAR: AWWA C205
WELDED
ENCASED
AWWA C200 FABRICATED
WELDED STEEL
SECTION
40 05 24.23a
CEMENT-MORTAR: AWWA C205
WELDED
EXPOSED
AWWA C200 FABRICATED
WELDED STEEL
SECTION
40 05 24.23a
CEMENT-MORTAR: AWWA C205
WELDED/
FLANGED4
JOINTS
SIZE (IN)
1) Surge pressure is the maximum pressure in the system during a surge event. Restraint pressure shall be used to determine pipe joint design and if required, the size, number, material, and dimensions of tabs and threaded-rods and thrust blocking for thrust restraint of
piping and piping system components specified.
2) Provide heat tracing and insulation as specified in Section 40 41 13 on all exposed outdoor piping indicated.
3) For all PVC / CPVC designations, if piping is exposed to direct sunlight or if heat tracing is required, CPVC shall be used. Otherwise, PVC shall be used.
4) Flanges shall be provided as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
GAC
EFFLUENT
GE
CONTACTOR TO
WASTE
CTW
PIPE TYPE
WATER TREATMENT PLANT PIPING SCHEDULE
SERVICE
FLOW STREAM
ID
MATERIAL
16, 48
16
COATING
LINING
EXPOSURE
OPERATING
PRESSURE
(PSIG)
TEST
PRESSURE
(PSIG) AND
TYPE
20
30
20
30
CARBON STEEL
CARBON STEEL
8/15/2025
GMP2
40 06 20A-1
70048-013
PSWTP Improvements
EXHIBIT D
Project Name: Water System Upgrades Program
Page D-1
Project No.: WA2100.402
Rev. 1/16/2024
ACCEPTED GMP/PRICE PROPOSAL
FINAL SUBMITTAL FOR
REVIEW
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER SYSTEMS UPGRADE PROGRAM
WA2100.251
SUBMITTAL TASK #17.7
GMP-2 PROPOSAL
SUBMITTED BY: ARCHER WESTERN CONSTRUCTION, LLC
PHOENIX, AZ
DATE SUBMITTED: SEPTEMBER 30, 2025
SECTION A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Bookmark Summary
COVER PAGE
A. TABLE OF CONTENTS
B. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
C. GMP PROPOSAL
C.1. EXHIBIT D GMP SUMMARY
C.2 DETAILED COST ESTIMATE
C.3 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
C.4 BACK UP QUOTES
SURVEY QUOTES
VIBRATION MONITORING QUOTES
CONCRETE READY MIX QUOTES
ASPHALT SAW CUTTING QUOTES
REBAR QUOTES
EI&C QUOTES
SHORING QUOTES
FENCE & GATE QUOTES
PIPE GENERAL QUOTES
WELDING QUOTES
WELDING INSPECTION QUOTES
D. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
E. PROJECT SCHEDULE
F. CONSTRUCTION PHASING
G. LIST OF GMP PLANS AND SPECS
H. ASSUMPTIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS
SECTION B
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The Pecos Surface Water Treatment Plant (PSWTP) Improvement Project will provide both pre-
construction and construction services to implement a series of upgrades to the facility’s liquid and solid
treatment processes. These improvements are designed to enhance water quality, operational
efficiency, and long-term reliability throughout the City of Chandler’s water system. Planned
improvements include:
Replacement of GAC (granular activated carbon) media in existing filters
Concrete repair and rehabilitation of existing filters
Installation of new post-filter GAC, pump station, and seal weir structure
Construction of new dewatering equipment and associated building
Construction of a new chlorine dioxide generation facility
Replacement and reconfiguration of EQ submersible pumps
Miscellaneous electrical and yard piping improvements
Identified Projects to Meet Program Goals:
42.1 – Filter 9–12 Rehabilitation
43.1 – Post-Filter GAC Contactors
86.1 – Chlorine Dioxide (pending pilot test results)
65.1A – EQ Pumps
75.1D – Dewatering Building
Project Delivery and Schedule:
The program will be delivered through multiple design and construction packages over the period of Q3
2024 through Q2 2028. Pre-construction services began in Q3 2024, with construction anticipated to
start in Q1 2025 and continue through Q2 2028.
Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) Packages:
1. Filters 9 to 12 construction
2. Long Lead Procurement and Early Construction Work
3. Remaining Construction
2.
SCOPE OF WORK
This GMP covers the work related to Long Lead Procurement and Early Construction Work. The work
under this project will address new and/or rehabilitated tertiary granular filters, concrete repair and
rehabilitation of existing Filters 9-12.
The scope of work includes the following:
01 Civil Work
o 02D Demolition:
CMU Wall
Concrete Slab
Asphalt Pavement
Curb & Gutter
Relocate Conex Boxes
Polymer Structure
Polymer Piping
Remove fiber optic lines and structures
o 31E Erosion Control
Install and Maintain Silt Fence
Install and Maintain Inlet Protection
Install Construction Exits
Street Sweeping
o 31EW Earthwork
Remove and Stockpile DG
Construct Temp Access Berms
Construct Stormwater Bypass Ditch (rough cut only)
o 32FN Fencing
Install 8-ft Chain Link Temporary Fence w/ Privacy Screen
o 33UT Utilities
Relocate PD Line
Install Temp Polymer Lines
Support Existing Utilities (inside excavation zone)
Install WSP 48-in GAC Effluent (GE) (below GAC slab)
Concrete Encasement for 48-in GE
Install 16-in WSP Contactor to Waste (CTW) (below GAC slab) with CLSM backfill
Concrete Encasement for 16-in CTW
43 Post Filter GAC Contactors
o 26E EI&C
Procure Long Lead Electrical Gear
One (1) Eaton Gear Package Based on GMP2 Final Drawings and GMP2
Final Specifications
o One (1) TX-DIS,
o One (1) PWTP-GAC-SWBD1,
o One (1) AHF-GAC,
o One (1) PWTP-DWT-MCC1,
o VFD-4321,
o VFD-4322,
o VFD-4323,
o VFD-4311,
o VFD-4312,
o VFD-4313,
o VFD-4314,
o Start-Up, Training, ArcFlash/Power Study, Harmonic Analysis,
and Spare Parts.
o 31EW Earthwork
Excavate GAC, Weir and Pump Station (including shoring on two sides)
Excavate Access Ramp for Construction
Backfill Access Ramp
o 99 Construction Management / General Conditions
Construction Management Supervision
Construction Equipment
Because of the schedule implications of performing the work with an expected GMP-3 in July 2026,
Archer Western has also included the additional work in the direct cost. Since there isn’t any final design
completed for this work, this is budgetary in nature and we expect to reconcile the final cost as the
design is completed in GMP-3.
01 Civil Work
o 33UT Utilities
Duct bank installation in GAC area
Additional underground piping in GAC area
43 Post Filter GAC Contactors
o 03C Concrete
Construct GAC Chamber SOG Elev 1227.17
Construct GAC Pipe Gallery Walls Elev 1247.17
Construct GAC Chamber Exterior Walls Elev 1247.67
3.
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
The following individuals and their reporting system will be used during the construction phase of the
project:
Felix Construction Employee – Assigned
AWC Employee – Assigned
AWC Employee – General Oversight (Overhead)
4.
ROLES & RESPONSIBILITIES
Several supervision staff are included in the project. Descriptions of their roles and responsibilities are
provided below.
1.1 Project Director
1.1.1 Purpose:
Responsible for the overall direction, completion, financial outcome, technical success and quality of a
very large, complex construction project or multiple projects simultaneously. The Project Director also
establishes and manages strategic client relationships. Identifies opportunities to expand company
relationships and business opportunities.
1.1.2 Major Responsibilities:
Plans, organizes, coordinates and controls projects in accordance with established policies,
procedures, systems and requirements approved by the Company. Creates and manages processes
for tracking projects and associated deliverables, collects and analyzes data, and works closely with
field personnel, designers, engineers, vendors and subcontractors to manage various programmatic
and project processes.
Leads interdisciplinary teams, such as preconstruction, to deliver projects that reside within a major
business group or function. Determines staffing needs, personnel development, performance
management and training for the project team. Provides leadership, guidance and direction to the
project team members. Ensures projects are completed, tracked and reported on in accordance with
all compliance regulations and goals. Completes and/or approves Performance Reviews for
subordinates.
Maintains exceptional relationships with owners, subcontractors, design partners and unions.
Responsible for day-to-day contact as well as contact of a multifaceted nature.
Assists with bid package development, pre-qualification activities and budget preparation. May draft
budget/estimate documents and provide oversight for the estimating process.
Leads efforts to analyze risk and define schedule-related issues, including analysis of long lead
materials or equipment which may impact project cost or scheduled delivery.
Analyzes and presents project delivery approaches, develops alternative approaches and facilitates
implementation, ensuring compliance with corporate, federal and state regulations.
Serves as the primary contact for senior department managers relative to critical business issues.
Helps allocate regional assets and resources to projects within business group. Maintains
vehicle/equipment database in online management tool in conjunction with EOG/Project Engineer.
Assists with obtaining vehicle registrations and vehicle repairs. Tracks and monitors vehicle
assignments to ensure vehicle availability and mitigate risk.
Participates in the design and execution of project safety planning activities to ensure that projects
are completed within established safety goals.
1.2 Assistant Project Manager
1.2.1 Purpose:
Responsible for assisting the Project Manager with the overall direction, completion and financial
outcome of a construction project.
1.2.2 Major Responsibilities:
Prepare, review and negotiate project contracts, subcontractor agreements, subcontractor services
agreements, purchase orders, quality acceptance agreements, etc.
Responsible for procurement of materials. From contract execution, through submittal phase,
release for fabrication, and tracking of deliveries to ensure schedule of the project is maintained.
Review owner contracts. Draft and articulate argument/positions on owner contracts. Negotiate
owner change orders and claims for extra work. Develop change management and
allowance/contingency controls. Review and prepare time and material allowance/contingency
usage for execution. Aid in preparation of revenue forecasts.
Records equipment and material deliveries to ensure accuracy and to ensure that project remains
on schedule.
Coordinate the purchase/renewal of insurance policies on the project. Pursue or aid in pursuing
insurance claims on the projects.
Establish and administer document control procedures.
Work with Operations team on a daily basis on risk management, and contractual and commercial
issues.
Plans, organizes, coordinates and controls project(s) in accordance with established policies,
procedures, systems and requirements approved by the Company.
Supervises work of project administration, superintendents, and engineers to ensure that work is
accomplished in an efficient, effective, profitable and safe manner and meets all quality standards.
Reviews cost-coding of timesheets and invoices, reviews daily production reports and supervises
forecasted final cost/revenue reporting to ensure that profitability goals are met.
Reviews submittal of change orders and analyzes impact on project schedules. Participates in work
planning of self-performed activities.
Gathers and records subcontractor log and weather conditions and makes recommendations
accordingly. May coordinate and schedule subcontractors.
May coordinate with owners and engineers for project scheduling and issue resolution.
Assists with the development and review of detailed MOPO plans.
Manages allowance and contingency tracking and gathering supporting documentation.
Attend weekly owner progress meetings and support the Project Manager as required.
1.3 Project Superintendent
1.3.1 Purpose:
In conjunction with Project Management, responsible for the direct supervision of field forces, and the
efficient scheduling of the physical completion of all project work.
1.3.2 Major Responsibilities:
The superintendent will be the day-to-day contact on the project for any site activities taking place
under the contract.
Coordinates subcontracts, drawings, and specifications to ensure conformity. Examines drawings
and specifications for various work tasks and ensures current information is passed down to front
line supervision and trades personnel. Carries out inspections as needed.
Responsible for daily planning, creation and maintenance of project schedules, including
subcontractor specialty schedules and short interval schedules. Involved in creating work plans for
each specific work activity.
Supervises and organizes workers; ensures workers are available and fully qualified to perform
assigned duties. Reports on labor and materials. Schedules crews according to available work
packages for the project and all required equipment and materials necessary to complete tasks.
Monitors timely delivery of necessary materials to assure continued productivity.
Responsible for controlling costs, adhering to budgets and managing equipment-related expenses.
Ensures staff is aware of production rates for assigned items of work.
Conducts regular safety meetings; maintains a safe work environment with the goal of keeping
accidents and injuries to a minimum and complying with company and regulatory safety procedures.
Complies with EPA requirements for hazardous materials.
Coordinates subcontractors through a regular and disciplined series of meetings, questioning and
verifying their plans and efforts, changing or augmenting as needed.
Assists project management team ensuring compliance with the legal and regulatory requirements
of the city, state and federal government applicable to the project. Alerts management to any
potential concerns.
Participates in the development and implementation of appropriate portions of the jobsite quality,
safety and production plans; ensures maintenance of all records in accordance with project
standards.
Coordinates with internal staff to build professional and productive relationships with owners,
architects, engineers and subcontractors.
SECTION C
GMP PROPOSAL
EXHIBIT D
CM@RISK GMP SUMMARY
EXHIBIT D
CMAR GMP SUMMARY
Project Name: Pecos Surface Water Treatment Plant Improvements
Date: 9/30/2025
Project Location: 1475 E Pecos Rd
City of Chandler Project No WA2100.251
GMP-2
A. Cost of Work
A.1 Cost of Work (self-perform, no mark-ups)
3,594,763.63
$
A.2. Cost of Work - Subcontracts
3,023,841.12
$
A.3. Escalation on Subs & Material (0%)
TOTAL COST OF WORK:
6,618,604.75
$
B. General Conditions
1,624,772.26
$
SUBTOTAL 1 (Cost of Work) (A+B)
8,243,377.01
$
C. CMAR's Fee (8.0%)
659,470.16
$
SUBTOTAL 2 (A+B+C):
8,902,847.17
$
D. Bonds and Insurance
D.1. Bonds (Payment and Performance)
98,720.49
$
D.2. Insurance
191,952.92
$
TOTAL BONDS & INSURANCE:
290,673.41
$
SUBTOTAL 3 (SUBTOTAL 2 + BONDS & INS):
9,193,520.58
$
E. Sales Tax
E.1. Sales Tax (5.07%)
466,111.49
$
E.2. Tax Credits
-
$
TOTAL SALES TAX:
466,111.49
$
TOTAL BASELINE ESTIMATE WITHOUT ALLOWANCES/CONTINGENCIES:
9,659,632.07
$
F. Approved Allowances
F.1. Concrete Work (To be Reconciled in GMP 3)
2,750,000.00
$
F.2. GAC Media Purchase
TOTAL ALLOWANCES:
2,750,000.00
$
G. Contingencies
G. 1. Design Evolution
500,000.00
$
G. 2. Construction Contingency
-
$
G. 3. Owner Contingency
-
$
TOTAL CONTINGENCIES:
500,000.00
$
TOTAL BASELINE PROPOSAL:
12,909,632.07
$
H. Previously Approved GMPs
H. 1. N/A
TOTAL PREVIOUS APPROVED GMPS:
-
$
TOTAL PROPOSAL:
12,909,632.07
$
Establishment of Values:
a. Cost of Work (A) and Allowances (F) to be submitted with GMP Proposal.
b. General Conditions Cost (B) to be established in Baseline Cost Model.
c. CMAR Fee as set forth in Section 3.7.3. of this Agreement.
EXHIBIT D: ALLOWANCE DESCRIPTIONS
One allowance is included for concrete work. This allowance will only in the event Archer Western
completes work included in GMP-2 and prior to the final GMP-3 is being developed and approved.
EXHIBIT D: CONTINGENCY DESCRIPTIONS
G.1. Design Evolution Contingency
The Design Evolution Contingency will be set at $500,000 and will be used to address design changes.
G.2. Construction Contingency
The Construction Contingency will be set at $0.
G.3. Owner Contingency
Owner contingency is to be determined by the City and will be used as directed by General Conditions
15.4.2.
GENERAL NOTE
The GMP Worksheet includes bonds, insurance, and taxes for the full value of the project. Any
allowance and contingency usage will only have fee added beyond the cost of work shown.
DETAILED COST ESTIMATE
FACILITY
AREA
DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
MANHOURS
LABOR
MATERIAL
SUBCONTRACTOR
EQUIPMENT
TOTAL
01
SITE WORK
1
LS
12,197 $ 909,960 $ 1,247,030 $ 1,170,454 $ 262,798 $ 3,590,242
DEMO
1
LS
373 $ 22,467 $ - $ 33,685 $ 16,708 $ 72,860
02.01.100
DEMO 8' CMU WALL
537
LF
129
7,853
$
23,667
$
6,128
$
37,648
$
02.01.113
DEMO CONCRETE SLAB
2,235
SF
54
3,268
$
7,036
$
2,553
$
12,858
$
02.01.114
DEMO ASPHALT PAVEMENT
1,101
SF
24
1,462
$
1,605
$
627
$
3,695
$
02.01.115
REMOVE EX. CURB & GUTTER
70
LF
24
1,462
$
397
$
98
$
1,957
$
02.01.120
RELOCATE CONEX BOXES
2
EA
24
1,462
$
1,217
$
2,679
$
02.01.121
DEMO/SALVAGE POLYMER STRUCTURE-7' DIA.
1
EA
48
2,925
$
850
$
2,434
$
6,209
$
02.01.122
DEMO/REMOVE EX. POLYMER LINES
280
LF
70
4,034
$
129
$
3,651
$
7,814
$
EROSION CONTROL
1
LS
327 $ 18,265 $ 17,066 $ 14,400 $ 12,608 $ 62,339
31.01.100
INSTALL SILT FENCE
1,000
LF
60
3,351
$
550
$
2,853
$
6,754
$
31.01.101
MONTHLY MAINTENANCE OF SILT FENCE
8
MO
120
6,703
$
4,000
$
2,113
$
12,816
$
31.01.103
INLET PROTECTION
10
EA
48
2,681
$
650
$
2,853
$
6,184
$
31.01.104
MONTHLY MAINTENANCE OF INLET PROTECTION
8
MO
24
1,341
$
1,200
$
1,141
$
3,682
$
31.01.106
INSTALL CONSTRUCTION EXITS
2
EA
75
4,189
$
10,666
$
3,648
$
18,504
$
31.01.108
STREET SWEEPING
8
MO
14,400
$
14,400
$
EARTHWORK
1
LS
1,340 $ 135,072 $ 20,480 $ - $ 53,279 $ 208,830
19020
SELF-PERFORM SUPERVISION
1
LS
693
92,883
$
18,584
$
111,467
$
31.01.120
REMOVE/STOCKPILE 3" DG
880
CY
118
7,672
$
440
$
9,717
$
17,829
$
31.01.121
CONSTRUCT TEMPORARY ACCESS BERMS
128
CY
48
3,131
$
64
$
3,953
$
7,148
$
31.01.122
CONSTRUCT STORMWATER BYPASS DITCH
802
LF
481
31,385
$
1,392
$
39,609
$
72,386
$
FENCING
1
LS
- $ - $ - $ 72,076 $ - $ 72,076
32.101.114
8' CHAIN LINK FENCE W/ PRIVACY SCREEN
965
LF
72,076
$
72,076
$
UTILITIES
1
LS
10,158 $ 734,156 $ 1,209,484 $ 1,050,294 $ 180,203 $ 3,174,137
19020
SELF-PERFORM SUPERVISION
1
LS
2,080
278,863
$
55,796
$
334,659
$
33.01.400
RELOCATE 4" PVC PD LINE
155
LF
90
4,999
$
3,603
$
7,000
$
2,727
$
18,329
$
33.01.401
INSTALL TEMP POLYMER LINES (ASSUMED 3" CPVC)
595
LF
370
20,639
$
29,204
$
8,750
$
12,997
$
71,590
$
33.01.402
SUPPORT EX. UTILITY LINE IN EXCAVATION
7
EA
84
4,692
$
17,500
$
1,875
$
2,545
$
26,612
$
33.43.100
48" WSP GAC EFFLUENT (GE) UNDER STRUCTURE
144
LF
3,069
190,671
$
392,696
$
163,667
$
112,369
$
859,403
$
33.43.101
CONCRETE ENCASEMENT FOR 48" WSP (GE) UNDER STRUCTURE
144
LF
1,044
52,217
$
66,427
$
47,830
$
166,474
$
33.43.102
FLOWABBLE FILL AROUND PIPE/UNDER SLAB
4,528
CY
1,006
42,965
$
591,363
$
181,129
$
815,457
$
33.43.200
16" WSP CONTRACTOR TO WASTE (CTW) UNDER STRUCTURE
281
LF
1,798
108,180
$
19,715
$
9,671
$
49,565
$
187,131
$
33.43.201
CONCRETE ENCASEMENT FOR 16" WSP (CTW) UNDER STRUCTURE
281
LF
617
30,930
$
33,180
$
5,372
$
69,482
$
33.43.300
ALLOWANCE: DUCTBANK
1
LS
100,000
$
100,000
$
33.43.305
ALLOWANCE: ADDITIONAL PIPE TO GET OUT OF EXCAVATION
1
LS
525,000
$
525,000
$
43
POST FILTER GAC CONTACTORS
1
LS
6,808 $ 467,293 $ 63,010 $ 1,796,997 $ 174,426 $ 2,501,726
EI&C
1
LS
- $ - $ - $ 1,196,508 $ - $ 1,196,508
26.43.801
LONG LEAD ELECTRICAL WORK
1
LS
1,196,508
$
1,196,508
$
EARTHWORK
1
LS
6,808 $ 467,293 $ 63,010 $ 600,489 $ 174,426 $ 1,305,218
19020
SELF-PERFORM SUPERVISION
1
LS
2,080
278,863
$
55,796
$
334,659
$
31.43.300
EXCAVATE GAC, WEIR, & PUMP STATION
14,027
CY
4,412
167,771
$
7,014
$
587,989
$
162,733
$
925,506
$
31.43.301
EXCAVATE ACCESS RAMP FOR CONSTRUCTION
500
CY
167
10,874
$
100
$
12,500
$
6,160
$
29,634
$
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
COST MODEL SUMMARY- GMP 2
DETAILED COST SUMMARY
FACILITY
AREA
DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
MANHOURS
LABOR
MATERIAL
SUBCONTRACTOR
EQUIPMENT
TOTAL
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
COST MODEL SUMMARY- GMP 2
DETAILED COST SUMMARY
31.43.302
BACKFILL ACCESS RAMP FOR CONSTRUCTION
500
CY
150
9,786
$
100
$
5,533
$
15,419
$
99
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
LS
12,274 $ 1,600,511 $ 261,477 $ 56,390 $ 233,031 $ 2,151,409
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
LS
8,754 $ 1,306,906 $ 261,477 $ 56,390 $ - $ 1,624,772
19010
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION
1
LS
8,754
1,306,906
$
261,477
$
56,390
$
1,624,772
$
SITE-WIDE EQUIPMENT
1
LS
3,520 $ 293,605 $ - $ - $ 233,031 $ 526,636
19030
SITE WIDE EQUIPMENT
1
LS
3,520
293,605
$
233,031
$
526,636
$
SUBTOTAL COST OF WORK
1
LS
31,280
2,977,764
$
1,571,516
$
3,023,841
$
670,255
$
8,243,377
$
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
SEE EXHIBIT G FOR LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND BACKUP QUOTES
SECTION D
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
TO BE ADDED UPON APPROVED GMP
SECTION E
PROJECT SCHEDULE
Activity ID
Activity Name
Original
Duration
Remaining
Duration
Start
Finish
Total Float
Chandler Pecos WTP
Chandler Pecos WTP GMP2 60% Schedule
460
460 30-Oct-25 A
19-Aug-27
0
GENERAL CONDITIO
GENERAL CONDITIONS
3
3 30-Oct-25 A
06-Jan-26
0
A1010
NTP GMP-2
0
0 30-Oct-25 A
A1200
Mobilize
3
3 02-Jan-26*
06-Jan-26
0
PROCUREMENT
PROCUREMENT
460
460 30-Oct-25
19-Aug-27
0
CONTRACTS
CONTRACTS
45
45 30-Oct-25
05-Jan-26
395
GMP-2 LONG LEAD
GMP-2 LONG LEAD
45
45 30-Oct-25
05-Jan-26
395
Contract 260000
Electrical and Instrumentation Contract
30
30 30-Oct-25
11-Dec-25
0
Contract 323113
Steel Fencing Contract
15
15 30-Oct-25
19-Nov-25
295
Contract 312343
Surveying RLS Contract (if required)
10
10 30-Oct-25
12-Nov-25
405
Contract 312333
Shoring Contract
20
20 04-Nov-25
02-Dec-25
310
Contract 261000
Fiber Optic Contract
20
20 04-Nov-25
02-Dec-25
357
Contract 400524
Steel Pipe Contract
20
20 13-Nov-25
11-Dec-25
200
Contract 400531
PVC/CPVC Pipe Contract
20
20 13-Nov-25
11-Dec-25
297
Contract 400519
Ductile Iron Pipe Contract
20
20 13-Nov-25
11-Dec-25
385
Contract 034000
Precast Concrete Contract
20
20 13-Nov-25
11-Dec-25
310
Contract 033000
Concrete and CLSM Contract
15
15 20-Nov-25
11-Dec-25
385
Contract 400529
Field Welding Contract
20
20 28-Nov-25
26-Dec-25
350
Contract 014523
Testing Contract
20
20 28-Nov-25
26-Dec-25
380
Contract 310516
Aggregate Base Contract
15
15 05-Dec-25
26-Dec-25
370
Contract 032100
Rebar Contract
20
20 05-Dec-25
05-Jan-26
395
DETAIL DESIGN
DETAIL DESIGN
460
460 30-Oct-25
19-Aug-27
0
SUBMITTALS
SUBMITTALS
160
160 30-Oct-25
16-Jun-26
300
Submittal 012973
Schedule of Values Submittal
10
10 30-Oct-25
12-Nov-25
425
Submittal 024100-01
Site Demolition Plan
10
10 30-Oct-25
12-Nov-25
335
Submittal 010000
Safety Plan Submittal
10
10 30-Oct-25
12-Nov-25
425
Submittal 312343
Surveyor RLS Qualifications Submittal (if required)
20
20 13-Nov-25
11-Dec-25
405
Submittal 323113
Steel Fencing - Product Data and Lay Drawings Submittal
10
10 20-Nov-25
04-Dec-25
295
Submittal 312333
Pump Station Shoring - Calculations and Plan Submittal
25
25 03-Dec-25
08-Jan-26
332
Submittal 034000-01
Precast Concrete (Electrical) Submittal
30
30 03-Dec-25
15-Jan-26
367
Submittal 261000-01
Fiber Optic Cable - Product Data Submittal
20
20 03-Dec-25
31-Dec-25
357
Submittal 261000-02
Fiber Optic Cable - Lay Drawing Submittal
20
20 03-Dec-25
31-Dec-25
377
Submittal 261219
Pad Mounted, Liquid-Filled, Medium-Voltage Transformers Submittal
50
50 12-Dec-25
23-Feb-26
105
Submittal 262413
Low Voltage Switchboards Submittal
55
55 12-Dec-25
02-Mar-26
65
Submittal 262419
Low Voltage Motor Control Centers Submittal
130
130 12-Dec-25
16-Jun-26
0
Submittal 262923
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Submittal
60
60 12-Dec-25
09-Mar-26
170
Submittal 033000-01
Ready-Mix - Product Data Submittal
10
10 12-Dec-25
26-Dec-25
385
Submittal 312324
Flowable Fill - Product Data Submittal
10
10 12-Dec-25
26-Dec-25
420
Submittal 400524-01
Steel Pipe - Product Data Submittal
30
30 12-Dec-25
26-Jan-26
200
Submittal 400524-02
Steel Pipe - Underground Design Calculations Submittal
40
40 12-Dec-25
09-Feb-26
340
Submittal 400531
PVC/CPVC Pipe - Product Data Submittal
10
10 12-Dec-25
26-Dec-25
297
Submittal 400519
Ductile Iron Pipe - Product Data Submittal
10
10 12-Dec-25
26-Dec-25
385
Submittal 034000-02
Precast Concrete (Mechanical) Submittal
30
30 12-Dec-25
26-Jan-26
310
Submittal 032100-02
Rebar - 48"-GE-WSP and 16"-GE-WSP Shop Drawings Submittal
20
20 12-Dec-25
12-Jan-26
320
Submittal 032100-03
Rebar - 16"-CTW-WSP Shop Drawings Submittal
20
20 12-Dec-25
12-Jan-26
345
Submittal 310516
Aggregate Base - Engineered Fill Product Data Submittal
15
15 29-Dec-25
19-Jan-26
370
Oct
N
D Jan
F
M Apr
M
J
Jul
A
S Oct
N
D Jan
F
M Apr
M
J
Jul
A
S Oct
N
D
2026
2027
Chandler Pecos W
GENERAL CONDITIONS
NTP GMP-2
Mobilize
PROCUREMENT
CONTRACTS
GMP-2 LONG LEAD
Electrical and Instrumentation Contract
Steel Fencing Contract
Surveying RLS Contract (if required)
Shoring Contract
Fiber Optic Contract
Steel Pipe Contract
PVC/CPVC Pipe Contract
Ductile Iron Pipe Contract
Precast Concrete Contract
Concrete and CLSM Contract
Field Welding Contract
Testing Contract
Aggregate Base Contract
Rebar Contract
DETAIL DESIGN
SUBMITTALS
Schedule of Values Submittal
Site Demolition Plan
Safety Plan Submittal
Surveyor RLS Qualifications Submittal (if required)
Steel Fencing - Product Data and Lay Drawings Submittal
Pump Station Shoring - Calculations and Plan Submittal
Precast Concrete (Electrical) Submittal
Fiber Optic Cable - Product Data Submittal
Fiber Optic Cable - Lay Drawing Submittal
Pad Mounted, Liquid-Filled, Medium-Voltage Transformers Submittal
Low Voltage Switchboards Submittal
Low Voltage Motor Control Centers Submittal
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Submittal
Ready-Mix - Product Data Submittal
Flowable Fill - Product Data Submittal
Steel Pipe - Product Data Submittal
Steel Pipe - Underground Design Calculations Submittal
PVC/CPVC Pipe - Product Data Submittal
Ductile Iron Pipe - Product Data Submittal
Precast Concrete (Mechanical) Submittal
Rebar - 48"-GE-WSP and 16"-GE-WSP Shop Drawings Submittal
Rebar - 16"-CTW-WSP Shop Drawings Submittal
Aggregate Base - Engineered Fill Product Data Submittal
Chandler Pecos WTP GMP2 60% Schedule
19-Sep-25 15:14
Activity ID
Activity Name
Original
Duration
Remaining
Duration
Start
Finish
Total Float
Submittal 400524-05
Field Welding Procedure Submittal
20
20 29-Dec-25
26-Jan-26
350
Submittal 014523
Testing Qualifications Submittal
15
15 29-Dec-25
19-Jan-26
380
Submittal 031500
Concrete Accessories - Product Data Submittal
10
10 29-Dec-25
12-Jan-26
385
Submittal 310001
Earthwork and Excavation Plan Submittal
10
10 02-Jan-26
15-Jan-26
290
Submittal 032100-01
Rebar - Product Data Submittal
20
20 06-Jan-26
02-Feb-26
395
Submittal 031100-01
Formwork Lumber - Product Data Submittal
10
10 07-Jan-26
20-Jan-26
359
Submittal 400524-04
GAC Underslab Piping - GE Lay Drawings Submittal
40
40 24-Mar-26
18-May-26
200
Submittal 400524-03
GAC Underslab Piping - CTW Lay Drawings Submittal
40
40 24-Mar-26
18-May-26
200
REVIEW & APPROVAL
REVIEW & APPROVALS
210
210 30-Oct-25
26-Aug-26
250
Rev & Apr 032100-01
Rebar - Product Data Review & Approval
30
30 30-Oct-25
11-Dec-25
320
Rev & Apr 312324
Flowable Fill - Product Data Review & Approval
25
25 30-Oct-25
04-Dec-25
435
Rev & Apr 260000
Fiber Optic Cable - Product Data Review & Approval
30
30 30-Oct-25
11-Dec-25
430
Rev & Apr 034000
Precast Concrete Review & Approval
30
30 30-Oct-25
11-Dec-25
430
Rev & Apr 012973
Schedule of Values Review & Approval
25
25 13-Nov-25
18-Dec-25
425
Rev & Apr 024100-01
Site Demolition Plan
15
15 13-Nov-25
04-Dec-25
335
Rev & Apr 010000
Safety Plan Review & Approval
25
25 13-Nov-25
18-Dec-25
425
Rev & Apr 323113
Steel Fencing - Product Data and Lay Drawings Review & Approval
15
15 05-Dec-25
26-Dec-25
295
Rev & Apr 312343
Surveying RLS Qualifications Review & Approval (if required)
25
25 12-Dec-25
19-Jan-26
405
Rev & Apr 033000-01
Ready-Mix - Product Data Review & Approval
30
30 29-Dec-25
09-Feb-26
385
Rev & Apr 400531
PVC/CPVC Pipe - Product Data Review & Approval
30
30 29-Dec-25
09-Feb-26
297
Rev & Apr 400519
Ductile Iron Pipe - Product Data Review & Approval
30
30 29-Dec-25
09-Feb-26
385
Rev & Apr 261000-01
Fiber Optic Cable - Product Data Submittal
30
30 02-Jan-26
12-Feb-26
357
Rev & Apr 261000-02
Fiber Optic Cable - Lay Drawing Submittal
40
40 02-Jan-26
26-Feb-26
377
Rev & Apr 312333
GAC and Pump Station Shoring - Calculations and Plan Review & Approval
30
30 09-Jan-26
19-Feb-26
332
Rev & Apr 031500
Concrete Accessories - Product Data Review & Approval
25
25 13-Jan-26
16-Feb-26
385
Rev & Apr 032100-02
Rebar - 48"-GE-WSP and 16"-GE-WSP Shop Drawings Review & Approval
40
40 13-Jan-26
09-Mar-26
320
Rev & Apr 032100-03
Rebar - 16"-CTW-WSP Shop Drawings Review and Approval
40
40 13-Jan-26
09-Mar-26
345
Rev & Apr 034000-01
Precast Concrete (Electrical) Review & Approval
40
40 16-Jan-26
12-Mar-26
367
Rev & Apr 310001
Earthwork and Excavation Plan Review & Approval
35
35 16-Jan-26
05-Mar-26
290
Rev & Apr 310516
Aggregate Base - Engineered Fill Product Data Review & Approval
25
25 20-Jan-26
23-Feb-26
370
Rev & Apr 014523
Testing Qualifications Review & Approval
25
25 20-Jan-26
23-Feb-26
380
Rev & Apr 031100-01
Formwork Lumber - Product Data Review & Approval
25
25 21-Jan-26
24-Feb-26
359
Rev & Apr 400524-01
Steel Pipe - Product Data Review & Approval
40
40 27-Jan-26
23-Mar-26
200
Rev & Apr 400524-05
Field Welding Procedure Review & Approval
30
30 27-Jan-26
09-Mar-26
350
Rev & Apr 034000-02
Precast Concrete (Mechanical) Review & Approval
40
40 27-Jan-26
23-Mar-26
310
Rev & Apr 400524-02
Steel Pipe - Underground Design Calculations Review & Approval
50
50 10-Feb-26
20-Apr-26
340
Rev & Apr 261219
Pad Mounted, Liquid-Filled, Medium-Voltage Transformers Review & Approval
40
40 24-Feb-26
20-Apr-26
105
Rev & Apr 262413
Low Voltage Switchboards Review & Approval
40
40 03-Mar-26
27-Apr-26
65
Rev & Apr 262923
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Review & Approval
50
50 10-Mar-26
18-May-26
170
Rev & Apr 400524-04
GAC Underslab Piping - GE Lay Drawings Review & Approval
40
40 19-May-26
15-Jul-26
200
Rev & Apr 400524-03
GAC Underslab Piping - CTW Lay Drawings Review & Approval
40
40 19-May-26
15-Jul-26
200
Rev & Apr 262419
Low Voltage Motor Control Centers Review & Approval
50
50 17-Jun-26
26-Aug-26
0
FAB & DELIVER
FAB & DELIVER
460
460 30-Oct-25
19-Aug-27
0
Lead 032100
Rebar Lead Time
20
20 30-Oct-25
26-Nov-25
440
Lead 312324
Flowable Fill Lead Time
5
5 30-Oct-25
05-Nov-25
455
Lead 034000-01
Precast Concrete (Electrical) Lead Time
50
50 30-Oct-25
12-Jan-26
410
Lead 323113
Steel Fencing Lead Time
10
10 29-Dec-25
12-Jan-26
295
Oct
N
D Jan
F
M Apr
M
J
Jul
A
S Oct
N
D Jan
F
M Apr
M
J
Jul
A
S Oct
N
D
2026
2027
Field Welding Procedure Submittal
Testing Qualifications Submittal
Concrete Accessories - Product Data Submittal
Earthwork and Excavation Plan Submittal
Rebar - Product Data Submittal
Formwork Lumber - Product Data Submittal
GAC Underslab Piping - GE Lay Drawings Submittal
GAC Underslab Piping - CTW Lay Drawings Submittal
REVIEW & APPROVALS
Rebar - Product Data Review & Approval
Flowable Fill - Product Data Review & Approval
Fiber Optic Cable - Product Data Review & Approval
Precast Concrete Review & Approval
Schedule of Values Review & Approval
Site Demolition Plan
Safety Plan Review & Approval
Steel Fencing - Product Data and Lay Drawings Review & Approval
Surveying RLS Qualifications Review & Approval (if required)
Ready-Mix - Product Data Review & Approval
PVC/CPVC Pipe - Product Data Review & Approval
Ductile Iron Pipe - Product Data Review & Approval
Fiber Optic Cable - Product Data Submittal
Fiber Optic Cable - Lay Drawing Submittal
GAC and Pump Station Shoring - Calculations and Plan Review & Approval
Concrete Accessories - Product Data Review & Approval
Rebar - 48"-GE-WSP and 16"-GE-WSP Shop Drawings Review & Approval
Rebar - 16"-CTW-WSP Shop Drawings Review and Approval
Precast Concrete (Electrical) Review & Approval
Earthwork and Excavation Plan Review & Approval
Aggregate Base - Engineered Fill Product Data Review & Approval
Testing Qualifications Review & Approval
Formwork Lumber - Product Data Review & Approval
Steel Pipe - Product Data Review & Approval
Field Welding Procedure Review & Approval
Precast Concrete (Mechanical) Review & Approval
Steel Pipe - Underground Design Calculations Review & Approval
Pad Mounted, Liquid-Filled, Medium-Voltage Transformers Review & Approval
Low Voltage Switchboards Review & Approval
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Review & Approval
GAC Underslab Piping - GE Lay Drawings Review & Approval
GAC Underslab Piping - CTW Lay Drawings Review & Approval
Low Voltage Motor Control Centers Review & Approval
FAB & DELIVER
Rebar Lead Time
Flowable Fill Lead Time
Precast Concrete (Electrical) Lead Time
Steel Fencing Lead Time
Chandler Pecos WTP GMP2 60% Schedule
19-Sep-25 15:14
Activity ID
Activity Name
Original
Duration
Remaining
Duration
Start
Finish
Total Float
Lead 033000
Ready-Mix Lead Time
5
5 10-Feb-26
16-Feb-26
385
Lead 400531
PVC/CPVC Pipe Lead Time
5
5 10-Feb-26
16-Feb-26
297
Lead 400519
Ductile Iron Pipe Lead Time
5
5 10-Feb-26
16-Feb-26
385
Lead 261000
Fiber Optic Cable Lead Time
30
30 13-Feb-26
26-Mar-26
357
Lead 312333
Pump Station Shoring Lead Time
20
20 20-Feb-26
19-Mar-26
332
Lead 310516
Aggregate Base - Engineered Fill Lead Time
10
10 24-Feb-26
09-Mar-26
370
Lead 031100
Formwork Lumber Lead Time
20
20 25-Feb-26
24-Mar-26
359
Lead 400524-05
Field Welding Lead Time
20
20 10-Mar-26
06-Apr-26
350
Lead 034000-02
Precast Concrete (Mechanical) Lead Time
50
50 24-Mar-26
02-Jun-26
310
Lead 261219
Pad Mounted, Liquid-Filled, Medium-Voltage Transformers Lead Time
235
235 21-Apr-26
23-Mar-27
105
Lead 262413
Low Voltage Switchboards Lead Time
270
270 28-Apr-26
18-May-27
65
Lead 262923
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Lead Time
150
150 19-May-26
18-Dec-26
170
Lead 400524-04
GAC Underslab Piping - GE Pipe Lead Time
80
80 16-Jul-26
05-Nov-26
200
Lead 400524-03
GAC Underslab Piping - CTW Pipe Lead Time
80
80 16-Jul-26
05-Nov-26
200
Lead 262419
Low Voltage Motor Control Centers Lead Time
250
250 27-Aug-26
19-Aug-27
0
CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION
170
170 30-Oct-25
30-Jun-26
290
SITE WORK
SITE WORK
83
83 30-Oct-25
26-Feb-26
377
SITE WORK
SITE WORK
83
83 30-Oct-25
26-Feb-26
377
A2850
Excavation Permit
5
5 30-Oct-25
05-Nov-25
338
A1020
SWPPP
5
5 02-Jan-26
08-Jan-26
412
A2920
Surveying RLS Controls Set up and Verification
2
2 07-Jan-26
08-Jan-26
295
A1030
Clear, Grub, & Survey Staking
2
2 09-Jan-26
12-Jan-26
295
A1040
Install Temporary Steel Fence
15
15 13-Jan-26
02-Feb-26
295
A1060
Relocate 2 Conex Boxes and Demo Concrete Pad
2
2 13-Jan-26
14-Jan-26
313
A2930
Remove/Stockpile DG
2
2 13-Jan-26
14-Jan-26
395
A1080
Demo 8ft CMU Fence
5
5 03-Feb-26
09-Feb-26
295
A2900
Re-Route Retention Basin Overflow
10
10 10-Feb-26
23-Feb-26
377
A2910
Temporary Berm Retention Basin Overflow
3
3 24-Feb-26
26-Feb-26
377
YARD PIPE & DUCT BA
YARD PIPE & DUCT BANKS
13
13 10-Feb-26
26-Feb-26
377
AREA 1
AREA 1
0
0
0
AREA 2
AREA 2
13
13 10-Feb-26
26-Feb-26
377
A1320
DLB Re-Route Fiber Optic Cable and Structures
5
5 10-Feb-26
16-Feb-26
295
A1110
DLB POLY Re-Route Lines and Structure
3
3 10-Feb-26
12-Feb-26
299
A1300
MOPO - POLY Re-Route Lines
1
1 13-Feb-26
13-Feb-26
383
A1310
Demo Existing POLY Lines
3
3 16-Feb-26
18-Feb-26
383
A1050
DLB 4"-PD
3
3 17-Feb-26
19-Feb-26
297
A1330
MOPO - Re-Route Fiber Optic Cable
5
5 17-Feb-26
23-Feb-26
295
A1100
MOPO - 4"-PD
1
1 20-Feb-26
20-Feb-26
297
A1090
Demo Existing 4"-PD
2
2 23-Feb-26
24-Feb-26
297
A1340
Demo Existing Fiber Optic Cable and Structures
3
3 24-Feb-26
26-Feb-26
295
AREA 4
AREA 4
0
0
0
SURFACE FINISHES
SURFACE FINISHES
0
0
0
SEAL WEIR STRUCTUR
SEAL WEIR STRUCTURE
0
0
0
GAC FACILITY
GAC FACILITY
82
82 06-Mar-26
30-Jun-26
290
UNDERGROUND AND
UNDERGROUND AND EXCAVATION
82
82 06-Mar-26
30-Jun-26
290
GAC CONTACTORS
GAC CONTACTORS
82
82 06-Mar-26
30-Jun-26
290
A2860
Excavate GAC Facility Area
10
10 06-Mar-26
19-Mar-26
290
A1350
Install 48"-GE-WSP
20
20 20-Mar-26
16-Apr-26
290
Oct
N
D Jan
F
M Apr
M
J
Jul
A
S Oct
N
D Jan
F
M Apr
M
J
Jul
A
S Oct
N
D
2026
2027
Ready-Mix Lead Time
PVC/CPVC Pipe Lead Time
Ductile Iron Pipe Lead Time
Fiber Optic Cable Lead Time
Pump Station Shoring Lead Time
Aggregate Base - Engineered Fill Lead Time
Formwork Lumber Lead Time
Field Welding Lead Time
Precast Concrete (Mechanical) Lead Time
Pad Mounted, Liquid-Filled, Medium-Volt
Low Voltage Switchboards Lead
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Lead
GAC Underslab Piping - GE Pipe Lead Time
GAC Underslab Piping - CTW Pipe Lead Time
Low Voltage Moto
CONSTRUCTION
SITE WORK
SITE WORK
Excavation Permit
SWPPP
Surveying RLS Controls Set up and Verification
Clear, Grub, & Survey Staking
Install Temporary Steel Fence
Relocate 2 Conex Boxes and Demo Concrete Pad
Remove/Stockpile DG
Demo 8ft CMU Fence
Re-Route Retention Basin Overflow
Temporary Berm Retention Basin Overflow
YARD PIPE & DUCT BANKS
AREA 2
DLB Re-Route Fiber Optic Cable and Structures
DLB POLY Re-Route Lines and Structure
MOPO - POLY Re-Route Lines
Demo Existing POLY Lines
DLB 4"-PD
MOPO - Re-Route Fiber Optic Cable
MOPO - 4"-PD
Demo Existing 4"-PD
Demo Existing Fiber Optic Cable and Structures
GAC FACILITY
UNDERGROUND AND EXCAVATION
GAC CONTACTORS
Excavate GAC Facility Area
Install 48"-GE-WSP
Chandler Pecos WTP GMP2 60% Schedule
19-Sep-25 15:14
Activity ID
Activity Name
Original
Duration
Remaining
Duration
Start
Finish
Total Float
A1360
Temp Support at north end of the GAC Facility spanning the length of the Pump Statio
5
5 20-Mar-26
26-Mar-26
290
A2870
Install 16"-GE-WSP
8
8 15-Apr-26
24-Apr-26
290
A1530
FRPS 48"-GE-WSP & 16"-GE-WSP (7 pours)
15
15 21-Apr-26
11-May-26
290
A1540
Slurry Backfill GAC Contactor Excavation to EL. 1216.58' (1025 cu yds)
10
10 12-May-26
26-May-26
290
A2880
Install 16"-CTW-WSP
15
15 27-May-26
16-Jun-26
290
A1520
FRPS 16"-CTW-WSP (6 pours)
10
10 17-Jun-26
30-Jun-26
290
GAC PUMP STATION
GAC PUMP STATION
30
30 27-Mar-26
07-May-26
317
A1420
Excavation Pump Station Area
30
30 27-Mar-26
07-May-26
302
A1070
Hark Shoring for Pump Station
20
20 03-Apr-26
30-Apr-26
322
GAC EFFUENT WEIR
GAC EFFUENT WEIR STRUCTURE
15
15 08-May-26
29-May-26
302
A1790
Excavation Weir Structure Area
15
15 08-May-26
29-May-26
302
GAC ELEC BUILDIN
GAC ELEC BUILDING
10
10 01-Jun-26
12-Jun-26
302
A1860
Excavation GAC Electrical Building
10
10 01-Jun-26
12-Jun-26
302
STRUCTURAL
STRUCTURAL
0
0
0
MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL
0
0
0
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
0
0
0
START-UP AND COMM
START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
0
0
0
EQ BASINS
EQ BASINS
0
0
0
UNDERGROUND AND
UNDERGROUND AND EXCAVATION
0
0
0
CONCRETE
CONCRETE
0
0
0
MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL
0
0
0
STRUCTURAL
STRUCTURAL
0
0
0
START-UP AND COMM
START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
0
0
0
DEWATERING FACILITY
DEWATERING FACILITY
0
0
0
UNDERGROUND AND
UNDERGROUND AND EXCAVATION
0
0
0
STRUCTRUAL
STRUCTRUAL
0
0
0
MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL
0
0
0
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
0
0
0
START-UP AND COMM
START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
0
0
0
CHLORINE DIOXIDE GE
CHLORINE DIOXIDE GENERATION FACILITY
0
0
0
UNDERGROUND AND
UNDERGROUND AND EXCAVATION
0
0
0
STRUCTURAL
STRUCTURAL
0
0
0
MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL
0
0
0
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
0
0
0
START-UP AND COMM
START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
0
0
0
COMPLETE COMMIS
COMPLETE COMMISSIONING
0
0
0
Oct
N
D Jan
F
M Apr
M
J
Jul
A
S Oct
N
D Jan
F
M Apr
M
J
Jul
A
S Oct
N
D
2026
2027
Temp Support at north end of the GAC Facility spanning the length of the Pump Station
Install 16"-GE-WSP
FRPS 48"-GE-WSP & 16"-GE-WSP (7 pours)
Slurry Backfill GAC Contactor Excavation to EL. 1216.58' (1025 cu yds)
Install 16"-CTW-WSP
FRPS 16"-CTW-WSP (6 pours)
GAC PUMP STATION
Excavation Pump Station Area
Hark Shoring for Pump Station
GAC EFFUENT WEIR STRUCTURE
Excavation Weir Structure Area
GAC ELEC BUILDING
Excavation GAC Electrical Building
Chandler Pecos WTP GMP2 60% Schedule
19-Sep-25 15:14
Sept
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
PROCUREMENT - SES AND DISTRIBUTION
PROCUREMENT - MCCS AND VFDS
PROCUREMENT - GENERATORS
PROCUREMENT - HW EQUIPMENT
CONSTRUCTION GMPS
GMP 2
GMP 3
DEMO/SWPPP
EXCAVATION AND SHORING
UTILITIES
GAC CONRETE SLAB
EARTHWORK / YARD PIPE EQUIPMENT
01 - SITE WORK
Work Package Lead/APM
1.0
Working FM/Assitant Super
1.0
Survey Lead
1.0
Field Engineer
1.0
01 - YARD PIPE
Work Package Lead/APM
1.0
1.0
1.0
Working FM/Assitant Super
1.0
1.0
1.0
Survey Lead
1.0
1.0
1.0
Field Engineer
1.0
1.0
1.0
43 - GAC PUMP STATION & GAC CONTACTOR FACILITY
Work Package Lead/APM
1.0
1.0
1.0
Working FM/Assitant Super
1.0
1.0
1.0
Survey Lead
1.0
1.0
1.0
Field Engineer
1.0
1.0
1.0
CONCRETE
43 - GAC CONTACTOR FACILITY
Work Package Lead/APM
1.0
1.0
1.0
Working FM/Assitant Super
1.0
1.0
1.0
Survey Lead
1.0
1.0
1.0
Field Engineer
1.0
1.0
1.0
ACTIVITY / DATE
2025
2026
2027
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
SUPERVISION SCHEDULE - GMP-2
GMP-3
GMP-2
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME (NEED TO CONFIRM STILL)
Sept
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
PROCUREMENT - SES AND DISTRIBUTION
PROCUREMENT - MCCS AND VFDS
PROCUREMENT - GENERATORS
PROCUREMENT - HW EQUIPMENT
CONSTRUCTION GMPS
GMP 2
GMP 3
DEMO/SWPPP
EXCAVATION AND SHORING
UTILITIES
GAC CONRETE SLAB
ACTIVITY / DATE
2025
2026
2027
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
SUPERVISION SCHEDULE - GMP-2
GMP-3
GMP-2
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME (NEED TO CONFIRM STILL)
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION
Project Director
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
Project Manager
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
General Superintendent
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Procurement Manager
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Safety Manager
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Quality Manager
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Jobsite Admin
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
*Yellow Highlight means in Allowance for Concrete Work
Sept
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
PROCUREMENT - SES AND DISTRIBUTION
PROCUREMENT - MCCS AND VFDS
PROCUREMENT - GENERATORS
PROCUREMENT - HW EQUIPMENT
CONSTRUCTION GMPS
GMP
2
GMP
3
DEMO/SWPPP
EXCAVATION AND SHORING
UTILITIES
GAC CONRETE SLAB
EARTHWORK / YARD PIPE EQUIPMENT
01 - SITE WORK
Excavator (Cat 330)-TOTAL
1
Backhoe Loader (Cat 430) -TOTAL
1
Loader (Volvo L90)-TOTAL
1
Rammax Roller-TOTAL
Crew Truck-TOTAL
1
01 - YARD PIPE
Excavator (Cat 330)-TOTAL
Backhoe Loader (Cat 430)-TOTAL
1
1
1
Loader (Volvo L90)-TOTAL
1
1
1
75 Ton Picker Hydraulic Crane-TOTAL
1
1
1
Rammax Roller-TOTAL
1
1
1
Crew Truck-TOTAL
1
1
1
43 - GAC PUMP STATION & GAC CONTACTOR FACILITY
Excavator (Cat 330)-TOTAL
1
1
1
Backhoe Loader (Cat 430) -TOTAL
1
1
1
ACTIVITY / DATE
2025
2026
2027
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - GMP-2
GMP-3
GMP-2
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME (NEED TO CONFIRM STILL)
Sept
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
PROCUREMENT - SES AND DISTRIBUTION
PROCUREMENT - MCCS AND VFDS
PROCUREMENT - GENERATORS
PROCUREMENT - HW EQUIPMENT
CONSTRUCTION GMPS
GMP
2
GMP
3
DEMO/SWPPP
EXCAVATION AND SHORING
UTILITIES
GAC CONRETE SLAB
ACTIVITY / DATE
2025
2026
2027
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - GMP-2
GMP-3
GMP-2
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME
CONTRACT/SUBMITTAL
APPROVAL
LEAD TIME (NEED TO CONFIRM STILL)
Loader (Volvo L90)-TOTAL
1
1
1
Rammax Roller-TOTAL
1
1
1
Crew Truck-TOTAL
1
1
1
CONCRETE EQUIPMENT
43 - GAC CONTACTOR FACILITY
75 Ton Picker Hydraulic Crane-TOTAL
1
1
1
Forklift 12K-TOTAL
1
1
1
Crew Truck-TOTAL
2
2
2
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT
Forklift 12K*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Water Truck*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*Yellow Highlight means in Allowance for Concrete Work
SECTION F
CONSTRUCTION PHASING
1.
CONSTRUCTION PHASING
The phasing will consist of the following activities:
Phase 1: Mobilization
Phase 2: Demolition, clear and grub work
Phase 3: Excavation, shoring, and erosion control
Phase 4: Underground utility installation, testing, and backfill
Phase 5: Concrete slabs and walls (if allowance approved)
SECTION G
LIST OF GMP PLANS &
SPECIFICATIONS
1.
LIST OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Archer Western utilized the following plans and specifications issued by Hazen to complete this GMP
Proposal. All files reside on the ACC site uploaded on September 5, 2025.
2025.08.01 GMP2 Electrical Specs (115 pages)
2025.08.15 GMP2 Final Drawings (24 pages)
2025.08.15 GMP2 Final Specifications (404 pages)
Alpha Final Geotechnical Report dated August 1, 2025 (91 pages)
SECTION H
ASSUMPTIONS AND
CLARIFICATIONS
Item
Design
Stage
Facility
Work Package
Assumption or Clarification
1
100 Pct
01-Site Work
02-Demo
Assume no work with solar field (by COC)
2
100 Pct
01-Site Work
26-EI&C
For duct banks, assuming concrete encasement under structures and roads. Assuming native / sand backfill in other areas.
3
100 Pct
01-Site Work
26-EI&C
Excludes Antenna Pole, Antenna Pole Calculations, Antenna, Antenna Accessories, Radio, and Radio Path Study.
4
100 Pct
01-Site Work
26-EI&C
Excludes Automatic Transfer Switch, Manual Transfer Switch, and/or Standby Generator
5
100 Pct
01-Site Work
26-EI&C
Excludes Lightning Protection for Existing Buildings and Structures
6
100 Pct
01-Site Work
31-Earthwork
All landscaping is currently excluded from this cost model.
7
30 Pct
01-Site Work
32-Flatwork
Assumed all existing asphalt on site is 4" Thick.
8
100 Pct
01-Site Work
33-Utilities
For yard pipe, assuming CLSM encasement for all WSP, native backfill above bedding zone for all pipe with a 2-ft CLSM cap if utility is within
the roadway. Reinforced concrete encasement for pipe under all structures. Assumed native backfill is suitable for utilities above pipe zone
of trench.
9
100 Pct
01-Site Work
33-Utilities
Metal pipe and fittings located below grade will be polywrapped.
10
100 Pct
01-Site Work
33-Utilities
Assume cathodic protection will not be required. Metallic pipe will be encased in CLSM or bagged.
11
100 Pct
01-Site Work
99-GC/GR
All demo material generated assumed to be hauled to off-site landfill and is not hazardous.
26
100 Pct
01-Site Work
32-Flatwork
Temp fencing will be chain link fencing without barbed wire.
12
100 Pct
43-Post Filter GAC
40-Process Pipe &
Valves
Spec 40 05 24.23A-2. Item 1.03 A. Assume contractor may submit lay drawings per the specifications by area per system for clarity and
shorter review durations.
13
100 Pct
43-Post Filter GAC
40-Process Pipe &
Valves
Spec 40 05 24.23A-7. Item 2.03 Assume contractor may use 1.5D elbows versus 2.5D elbows.
14
100 Pct
43-Post Filter GAC
40-Process Pipe &
Valves
Spec 40 05 24.23A-9. Item 2.06 B.1. Assume contractor may add flanges as needed for constructability, if needed.
15
100 Pct
99-GC/GR
99-GC/GR
Excluding engineer's trailer at this time, assuming the Hazen & City team will operate out of City facility
16
100 Pct
99-GC/GR
99-GC/GR
Carrying part time quality and safety staff per Supervision Schedule in 30% cost model.
17
100 Pct
99-GC/GR
99-GC/GR
Constrution water meter and backflow preventer will be installed and rented by the City of Chandler. Metered water will be invoiced to City.
18
100 Pct
XX-Numerous
03-Concrete
Assuming no supplemental air entrainment will be required for ready-mix.
19
100 Pct
XX-Numerous
03-Concrete
A concrete curb has been added to each building as a starter wall.
20
100 Pct
XX-Numerous
03-Concrete
Ready-mix per the Cal-Portland proposal.
21
100 Pct
XX-Numerous
03-Concrete
Excluding petrographic analysis of the aggregate.
22
100 Pct
XX-Numerous
26-EI&C
Assume PVC-SCH 40 for underground conduit
23
100 Pct
XX-Numerous
XX-Numerous
Provisions for differential settling have not been included but may be added into the design at a later time.
24
100 Pct
XX-Numerous
XX-Numerous
See suplemental support documents for additional assumptions and clarifications.
25
100 Pct
XX-Numerous
XX-Numerous
Assume factory witness testing, if required, will not be paid for by CMAR.
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
ASSUMPTIONS & CLARIFICATIONS LOG - GMP-2
Hazardous existing conditions or materials are not anticipated and this GMP does not include any provisions if they are encountered.
ID
Design Stage
Document
Page Index
Page Label
Comment Date
CMAR Author
CMAR Comment
Comment Type
Cost
Impact?
Schedule
Impact?
Priority?
Hazen Due Date
Hazen Response
Discipline
Hazen Author
Response Date
301
GMP-2
Final Drawings
7
[7] M43-01
08/21/25
dpost
This will require dimensions and coordinates for the centers of the pipe at the turn
ups through the slab in order for the shop drawings and the installation of the pipe.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
Noted. Dimensions and coordinates for pipe turn-ups through the slab can be included in
the next submittal.
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
302
GMP-2
Final Drawings
3
[3] G-03
08/21/25
dpost
This note may be a difficult task to accomplish based on the work required for the
GAC and pump station structures
CON
Low
08/29/25
The note reflects a City grading and drainage requirement. The contractor shall include a
phasing or temporary drainage approach as part of their erosion and sediment control plan
submission for review.
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
303
GMP-2
Final Drawings
11
[11] S43-03
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
I think this will open up on us and be closer to a 2:1
RR
Medium
08/29/25
Noted. If the assumption of flatter slopes (closer to 2:1) is based on on-site experience,
then the need for anticipated shoring will need to be defined by Archer in GMP estimate.
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
304
GMP-2
Final Drawings
10
[10] S43-02
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
I think this will open up on us and be closer to a 2:1
RR
Medium
08/29/25
Noted. If the assumption of flatter slopes (closer to 2:1) is based on on-site experience,
then the need for anticipated shoring will need to be defined by Archer in GMP estimate.
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
305
GMP-2
Final Drawings
6
[6] C-03
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
We will need to construct an access ramp for materials and proof rolling. This will
need to be about a 10:1 slope.
CON
High
08/29/25
Archer to submit alternative means, methods and/or approaches for review and
communication with the City and Hazen.
Scott Williamson
8/25/25
306
GMP-2
Final Drawings
6
[6] C-03
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
It has been my experience, in these soil conditions, even though we try to slope at a
1.5:1, the material will open up more than that and slopes will end up being closer to
a 2:1. We need to discuss this further with the engineer.
RR
High
08/29/25
If the request is to use slopes flatter than 1.5H:1V, this is acceptable to Alpha. Please
confirm the anticipated duration that the excavation will remain open. As slopes dry, they
may tend to flatten further. Moisture conditioning (e.g., periodic wetting) may be
implemented to reduce raveling and maintain slope stability.
If steeper slopes are being considered, please clarify the proposed inclination (e.g.,
2H:1V) and the height of excavation. Based on this information, Alpha will evaluate slope
stability and determine if a formal slope analysis is required.
Alpha Geotech
8/29/25
307
GMP-2
Final Drawings
6
[6] C-03
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
RFI: What elevation are these water lines? Unless they are deep, they will need to be
relocated.
RFI
High
08/29/25
We need to high priority potholing performed.
Scott Williamson
8/25/25
308
GMP-2
Final Drawings
6
[6] C-03
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
RFI: What elevation is this 4" PD line? Unless it's super deep, this will be in the air
~10' and very expensive to support.
RFI
High
08/29/25
Hazen does not anticipate this line is being "super deep". It daylights into the existing
retention basin and is a Pump Storm Water line. There could be bends on the line,
however, there is minimal information available on its construction.
Scott Williamson
8/25/25
309
GMP-2
Final Drawings
24
[24] E-11
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: BECAUSE OF THE SMALL HP OF THESE DRIVES AND THE LARGE TRANSFORMER
FEEDING THEM, A HARMONIC FILTER WILL NOT BE REQUIRED HERE. RECOMMEND
A 3% LINE REACTOR.
VE
Medium
08/29/25
Per note #1: "VFD VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE HARMONIC MITIGATION AS REQUIRED TO
COMPLY WITH IEEE 519 RESULTING IN NO MORE THAN 5% THD," the intent is to indicate
that the final harmonic mitigation design is pending completion of the harmonic study.
Thanks for the recommendation. We anticipate refining the design based on the study
results and will ensure compliance with the harmonic performance requirements outlined
in the specification. A 3% line reactor is a form of passive harmonic mitigation. If the study
confirms that IEEE 519 limits for TDD and THDV are met using only line reactors, the
design will be updated accordingly. Final submittals should include the harmonic study
verifying compliance.
Per meeting 08/26 - cut a 10' wide hole and see how it behaves, if shoring is needed.
Include as a separate allowance item instead of in risk register.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
310
GMP-2
Final Drawings
6
[6] C-03
08/19/25
AMinerva
RR: Slope for excavation needs to be more than 1.5/1
RR
High
08/29/25
If steeper slopes are being considered, please clarify the proposed inclination (e.g.,
2H:1V) and the height of excavation. Based on this information, Alpha will evaluate slope
stability and determine if a formal slope analysis is required.
Alpha Geotech
8/29/25
311
GMP-2
Final Drawings
11
[11] S43-03
08/19/25
AMinerva
A/C: Scope of Work for GMP 2 is under slab pipe, flowable fill, and concrete pipe
encasement up to EL 1219.67
A/C
Medium
08/29/25
TBA
Pouya Shahsana
312
GMP-2
Final Drawings
5
[5] C-02
08/19/25
AMinerva
A/C: Any curb or asphalt replacement will be in GMP 3
A/C
Low
08/29/25
If alternation effects City operation, the contractor is responsible to restore under GMP2.
GMP3 may include planned new/replacement paving, but it doesn’t relieve performing
needed repairs now without approval from the City/Engineer.
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
313
GMP-2
Final Drawings
12
[12] S43-04
08/19/25
AMinerva
A/C: Everything outside Flowable fill/pipe encasement will be GMP 3
A/C
Medium
08/29/25
TBA
Pouya Shahsana
314
GMP-2
Final Drawings
11
[11] S43-03
08/19/25
AMinerva
A/C: Any backfill material outside of flowable fill material will be in GMP 3
A/C
Medium
08/29/25
Applicable in most cases; however, incidental backfill required to restore areas around
GMP2 excavations (even if outside of flowable fill zones) remains a GMP2 responsibility.
Excavations performed under this GMP must be backfilled in a manner suitable for
ongoing operations and/or preparation for GMP3 work. Please confirm this is maintained
within the limits of the attached GMP2 scope of work.
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
315
GMP-2
Final Drawings
23
[23] E-10
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: ONE LINE SHOWS A ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SO THIS COULD BE A 3% LINE
REACTOR.
VE
Medium
08/29/25
Per note #1: "VFD VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE HARMONIC MITIGATION AS REQUIRED TO
COMPLY WITH IEEE 519 RESULTING IN NO MORE THAN 5% THD," the intent is to indicate
that the final harmonic mitigation design is pending completion of the harmonic study.
Thanks for the recommendation. We anticipate refining the design based on the study
results and will ensure compliance with the harmonic performance requirements outlined
in the specification. A 3% line reactor is a form of passive harmonic mitigation. If the study
confirms that IEEE 519 limits for TDD and THDV are met using only line reactors, the
design will be updated accordingly. Final submittals should include the harmonic study
verifying compliance.
Michael Laub / Nick Shor
8/25/25
316
GMP-2
Final Drawings
23
[23] E-10
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: NORMALLY DO NOT SEE THIS UNLESS THERE IS A VFD OR THE MOTOR IS
MUCH LARGER. CONSIDER REMOVING.
VE
Medium
08/29/25
Our understanding is that most of these motors are provided with temperature switches.
As this is a 60% design submittal and the final vendor is not yet selected, we plan to retain
these. These temperature switches are typically included in our scope. In the worst case,
the relay becomes a spare.
Michael Laub / Nick Shor
8/25/25
317
GMP-2
Final Drawings
23
[23] E-10
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
RFI: CONFIRM THE CONVEYOR WILL HAVE THIS. NORMALLY SEE THIS FOR BELT
DRIVEN EQUIPMENT.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Thanks for checking, but we have confirmed this with the vendor.
Michael Laub / Nick Shor
8/25/25
318
GMP-2
Final Drawings
23
[23] E-10
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
CONSIDER ADDING A MOTOR HIGH TEMPERATURE SWITCH LIKE SHOWN ON THE
PREVIOUS SCHEMATIC
VE
Medium
08/29/25
Agree. Added TSH-757X to a "High Motor Temp."
Michael Laub / Nick Shor
8/25/25
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
DESIGN REVIEW LOG GMP-2
ID
Design Stage
Document
Page Index
Page Label
Comment Date
CMAR Author
CMAR Comment
Comment Type
Cost
Impact?
Schedule
Impact?
Priority?
Hazen Due Date
Hazen Response
Discipline
Hazen Author
Response Date
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
DESIGN REVIEW LOG GMP-2
319
GMP-2
Final Drawings
23
[23] E-10
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: IS THIS MOTOR TEMP OR PUMP TEMP?
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
It is the "High Motor Temp." I double checked with Nick and he confirmed that this will be
from the motor.
Michael Laub / Nick Shor
8/25/25
320
GMP-2
Final Drawings
22
[22] E-09
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: SHOULD THIS BE LOCATED IN THE FIELD?
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
We are planning on matching the existing basins which have their LOR and Start Buttons
on the VFDs.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
321
GMP-2
Final Drawings
22
[22] E-09
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: THE LINES ARE NOT NUMBERED.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
Agree. The lines will be put back. The lines were previously on top of the table. When we
asked to have the lines removed from the table the designers went too far.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
322
GMP-2
Final Drawings
21
[21] E-08
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
VE: CONSIDER GOING WITH 4/0 CU CONDUCTORS.
VE
Medium
08/29/25
Conductors were based from a 150HP motor, will update to 4/0 CU Conductors
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
323
GMP-2
Final Drawings
21
[21] E-08
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
IT DOESN'T LOOK LIKE THESE CONDUCTORS CAN FIT INTO A 3" CONDUIT AND MEET
THE NEC.
CON
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, provide parallel feed (3) 5KV MV-105 #3/0 AWG and (1) #3 GND
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
324
GMP-2
Final Drawings
19
[19] E-06
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: CONFIRM THIS IS CORRECT. PER PREVIOUS DWGS BUCKET 4C HAS AN
EXISTING 90AT BREAKER.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, breaker to be 60A. Will update to plot black to indicate new
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
325
GMP-2
Final Drawings
19
[19] E-06
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: CONFIRM THIS IS CORRECT. PER PREVIOUS DWGS BUCKET 4B HAS AN
EXISTING 90AT BREAKER.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, breaker to be 60A. Will update to plot black to indicate new
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
326
GMP-2
Final Drawings
19
[19] E-06
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: CONFIRM THIS IS CORRECT. PER PREVIOUS DWGS BUCKET 3E HAS AN
EXISTING 60AT BREAKER.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, breaker to be 25A. Will update to plot black to indicate new
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
327
GMP-2
Final Drawings
19
[19] E-06
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: CONFIRM THIS IS CORRECT. PER PREVIOUS DWGS BUCKET 3C HAS AN
EXISTING 60AT BREAKER.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, breaker to be 25A. Will update to plot black to indicate new
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
328
GMP-2
Final Drawings
19
[19] E-06
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: CONFIRM THIS IS CORRECT. PER PREVIOUS DWGS THE EXISTING
DISCONNECT SWITCH IS 100 AMP.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, disconnect to be replace with new 60A. Will update to plot black to indicate new
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
329
GMP-2
Final Drawings
19
[19] E-06
08/19/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: CONFIRM THIS IS CORRECT. PER PREVIOUS DWGS THE EXISTING
DISCONNECT SWITCH IS 100 AMP.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, disconnect to be replace with new 60A. Will update to plot black to indicate new
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
330
GMP-2
Final Drawings
13
[13] S43-05
08/18/25
AMinerva
A/C: Soil underneath the Weir Structure and Pump Station is assumed to be desirable
and will not be over excavated/replace with any additional backfill.
A/C
Medium
08/29/25
This assumption is correct based on current geotechnical recommendations. If unsuitable
material is encountered during excavation, then requirements for over-excavation and
replacement will brought up at that time.
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
331
GMP-2
Final Drawings
13
[13] S43-05
08/18/25
AMinerva
STRUCTURE OUTLINE INFORMATION SHOWN ON THIS SHEET IS FOR REFERENCE
ONLY AND NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION. THE PURPOSE OF THIS SHEET IS
TO INDICATE THE REQUIRED DIMENSIONS FOR EXCAVATION EXTENTS ONLY.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
DISREGARD per Archer
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
332
GMP-2
Final Drawings
6
[6] C-03
08/18/25
AMinerva
RFI: Geotech says any slopes larger than 10' need to be evaluated by Alpha to confirm
that they can be excavated at 1.5 to 1. Please confirm that it is acceptable to
excavate at 1.5 to 1 for the GAC/Pump Station.
RFI
High
08/29/25
Please confirm the anticipated excavation depth. Based on our review, depths may extend
to approximately 27 feet. At this depth, a slope stability evaluation will be required to
assess excavation slope.
Alpha Geotech
8/29/25
333
GMP-2
Final Drawings
6
[6] C-03
08/18/25
AMinerva
A/C: Assuming 1.5/1 ratio for excavation does not need to have shoring.
A/C
High
08/29/25
Our assumption was this slope ratio was for anything less than 10' depth only. Depths
greater than 10' require concurrence from Alpha Geotech.
Deran Pursoo
8/25/25
334
GMP-2
Final Drawings
19
[19] E-06
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: CONFIRM THIS IS CORRECT. PER PREVIOUS DWGS THE EXISTING
DISCONNECT SWITCH IS 60 AMP.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, disconnect to be replace with new 30A. Will update to plot black to indicate new
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
335
GMP-2
Final Drawings
19
[19] E-06
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: CONFIRM THIS IS CORRECT. PER PREVIOUS DWGS THE EXISTING
DISCONNECT SWITCH IS 60 AMP.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Agreed, disconnect to be replace with new 30A. Will update to plot black to indicate new
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
336
GMP-2
Final Drawings
18
[18] E-05
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: IT IS DOUBTFUL THESE WILL FIT INTO 6" BUCKETS. MORE LIKELY THEY WILL BE
12" BUCKETS.
CON
Medium
08/29/25
MCC elevations are based on layouts prepared by the Square D design team as part of the
procurement package. IJ and IL were shown in 6" buckets based on initial vendor-provided
elevations and will be confirmed once final vendor details are available.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
337
GMP-2
Final Drawings
18
[18] E-05
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: RECOMMEND TO CALL OUT THE WIDTH OF EACH SECTION
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
Agree. I have asked our design team to "Please call out the width of each section as well as
the overall width, based on Square-D documents."
Michael Laub
8/25/25
338
GMP-2
Final Drawings
18
[18] E-05
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: THE ASSUMPTION IS THESE ARE ALL NEMA STARTERS WHICH MEANS THEY
SHOULD ALL BE SZE 1. REPLACE THE AMPERAGE CALL OUTS WITH "SIZE 1".
A/C
Medium
08/29/25
Agree
Michael Laub
8/25/25
339
GMP-2
Final Drawings
18
[18] E-05
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
VE: THIS COULD BE A 6" BUCKET.(TYP FOR ALL 100AF BREAKERS)
VE
Medium
08/29/25
MCC elevations are based on layouts prepared by the Square D design team as part of the
procurement package. To be conservative and ensure sufficient space, 100AF breakers
are currently shown in 12" buckets instead of 6". Elevations will be updated as the design
is finalized.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
340
GMP-2
Final Drawings
18
[18] E-05
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: THIS SHOULD BE A LINE REACTOR(TYP OF 4). A FILTER IS NOT NEEDED SINCE
THERE IS AN ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SPECIFIED.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
At the 60% design stage, our intent is to remain open to multiple compliant approaches for
meeting harmonic requirements. Based on current cost considerations, we expect that a
combination of 6-pulse drives with input filtering and a shared bus-connected active filter
may prove to be the most economical. As you noted, an alternative is to use upgraded
drives with integrated AFE, which we also consider a valid solution.
Our goal at this stage is to preserve flexibility so that both options remain viable until a
final decision is made by the 90% design milestone.
Refer to Construction Note #2 on the drawings, which states: “VFD vendor shall provide
harmonic mitigation as required to comply with IEEE 519, resulting in no more than 5%
THD.” In hindsight, we could have clarified that the 90% documents will specify either AFE
or individual harmonic filters—but this will be resolved as part of the upcoming design
development.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
341
GMP-2
Final Drawings
18
[18] E-05
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: THIS SHOULD BE REMOVED.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
See above. We wanted to be conservative, and flexible.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
342
GMP-2
Final Drawings
17
[17] E-04
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: IF 6P REFERS TO 6 PULSE, THEN "6P' SHOULD BE REMOVED. THE CHOICES
AVAILABLE ARE 6 PULSE, 18 PULSE , AND AFE. IT LOOKS LIKE THE ENGINEER HAS
DECIDED ON AFE SO 6P SHOULD BE REMOVED.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
At the 60% design stage, our intent is to remain open to multiple compliant approaches for
meeting harmonic requirements. Based on current cost considerations, we expect that a
combination of 6-pulse drives with input filtering and a shared bus-connected active filter
may prove to be the most economical. As you noted, an alternative is to use upgraded
drives with integrated AFE, which we also consider a valid solution.
Our goal at this stage is to preserve flexibility so that both options remain viable until a
final decision is made by the 90% design milestone.
Refer to Construction Note #2 on the drawings, which states: “VFD vendor shall provide
harmonic mitigation as required to comply with IEEE 519, resulting in no more than 5%
THD.” In hindsight, we could have clarified that the 90% documents will specify either AFE
or individual harmonic filters—but this will be resolved as part of the upcoming design
development.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
ID
Design Stage
Document
Page Index
Page Label
Comment Date
CMAR Author
CMAR Comment
Comment Type
Cost
Impact?
Schedule
Impact?
Priority?
Hazen Due Date
Hazen Response
Discipline
Hazen Author
Response Date
CITY OF CHANDLER
PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS WA2100.251
DESIGN REVIEW LOG GMP-2
343
GMP-2
Final Drawings
17
[17] E-04
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: HARMONIC FILTER WILL NOT BE NEEDED WITH ACTIVE FRONTEND(AFE)
DRIVES.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
See the comment above.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
344
GMP-2
Final Drawings
17
[17] E-04
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: THIS SHOULD BE REMOVED.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
See the comment above.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
345
GMP-2
Final Drawings
17
[17] E-04
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: PREVIOUS DWG CALLS FOR THIS TO BE 1200AT
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
Will modify trip to be 1600A
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
346
GMP-2
Final Drawings
16
[16] E-03
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: THIS SHOULD BE BLACK TO REPRESENT NEW
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
Agree
Michael Laub
8/25/25
347
GMP-2
Final Drawings
16
[16] E-03
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
A/C: THIS FUSE AMPERAGE RATING IS TOO HIGH
CON
Medium
08/29/25
Will modify fuse size to 400A
Daniel Thompson
8/25/25
348
GMP-2
Final Drawings
17
[17] E-04
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER WILL NOT BE NEEDED WITH ACTIVE FRONTEND(AFE)
DRIVES.
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
See the comment above.
Michael Laub
8/25/25
349
GMP-2
Final Drawings
16
[16] E-03
08/18/25
Brad Fransen
VOLTAGE
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
Agree
Michael Laub
8/25/25
350
GMP-2
Final Specs
377
377
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
Section 31 23 25: Dynamic Compaction RFI: Will this be required? It is my
understanding this has not been required on other portions of this project. This will
be very costly and we will need to work with a specialty geotechnical contractor who
are typically 6+ months from availability.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
No recommendation of dynamic compaction.
Alpha Geotech
8/29/25
351
GMP-2
Final Specs
348
348
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
SECTION 31 00 01 EARTHWORK, Section 3.05 Proof-Rolling: RFI: This is going to be
very challenging at the GAC and the Wet Well. We will need to construct a ramp to
access the 30' deep wet well and this will be much longer than the 1.5:1 slope. We
need to modify this requirement for other methods that will be cheaper.
CON
Medium
08/29/25
The Hazen spec proof-rolling requirement in Section 3.05 applies to subgrade areas that
will directly support structures, pavements, or select fill. At deep excavations, subgrade
evaluation methods (e.g., density/moisture testing, plate load testing, or other
geotechnical consultant–approved methods) may be submitted for review. Alternative
approaches must be approved by Alpha Geotech, Engineer and Owner for proof-rolling to
be omitted for deep structure excavations.
Alpha Geotech
8/29/25
352
GMP-2
Final Specs
345
345
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
RFI: Per the soils report, native materials are not suitable, are we to assume they are
and use native?
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
On our Hazen/Archer/Alpha Geotech Meeting on morning of 07/03, Alpha Geotech Andrew
Walton recommended the following:
• On-site soils with <3% swell acceptable under slabs.
• For mat foundations: swell allowance can increase to 3.3% (reinforced).
• Above 10 ft depth → use engineered fill (2 ft min).
• Below 10 ft → native clay soils may be left in place (moist, undisturbed).
• No aggregate base (can worsen swell by wicking moisture).
• No recompaction needed for deep native clay.
Alpha Geotech
8/29/25
353
GMP-2
Final Geotech Report
34
34
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
Onsite soils do not meet these requirements
Note to Hazen
Medium
08/29/25
Based on available data, most soils within the upper 10 feet appear to meet the specified
requirements. Final confirmation should be obtained by the materials testing firm during
construction.
Alpha Geotech
8/29/25
354
GMP-2
Final Geotech Report
30
30
08/21/25
Ed Kluber
RFI: Has this evaluation been completed for the GAC/Wet Well structures? In these
soil conditions, it has been my experience that the hole will open up wider than our
sloped 1.5:1.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
Similar to earlier question. See response to ID 306.
Alpha Geotech
8/29/25
355
GMP-2
Final Geotech Report
18
18
08/18/25
AMinerva
or the wet well at the Post Filter GAC Contactors structure, the deeper mat-type
foundations founded at depths greater than 20 feet bgs can be supported by dense or
stiff, undisturbed natural soils.
RFI
Medium
08/29/25
DISREGARD per Archer
n/a
n/a
356
GMP-2
Final Geotech Report
30
30
08/18/25
AMinerva
Within this system, the classification of the on-site soils is considered to be Type C.
Unsupported temporary cut slopes in these soils be made no steeper than 1.5H to
1V (1.5 Horizontal to 1 Vertical) for excavations less than 10 feet deep. Deeper
excavations or taller temporary slopes should be evaluated on an individual basis by
Alpha.
A/C
Medium
08/29/25
DISREGARD per Archer
n/a
n/a
357
GMP-2
Final Geotech Report
18
18
08/18/25
AMinerva
foundations should be founded on at least 2.0 feet of properly compacted
engineered fill
A/C
Medium
08/29/25
DISREGARD per Archer
n/a
n/a
358
GMP-2
Final Geotech Report
18
18
08/18/25
AMinerva
If the sides are too large for this approach, then the engineered fill materials beneath
the sides of the structure should be sloped / benched down on the interior sides with
no vertical faces greater than 1.5 feet.
A/C
Medium
08/29/25
DISREGARD per Archer
n/a
n/a
SOIL NAIL WALL
EXHIBIT E
Project Name: [TITLE]
Page SUB-1
Project No.: [####]
Rev. 1/16/2024
SUBCONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS WITH CM@RISK
Any subcontractor assumptions, clarifications, exclusions, terms & conditions, signature blocks, etc. included are strictly between the CM@RISK
and their subcontractors, and do not apply to the Agreement between the CM@RISK and the City.
SUBCONTRACTOR’S LIST FORM
If CM@Risk intends to subcontract any portion of this Agreement, the CM@Risk must submit the name, address, and contractor’s license number (if
applicable) of each subcontractor, including the work component of such subcontracting. Include the form with the bid submittal documents. CM@Risk
may make multiple copies of this form as needed.
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Elevate GEO 3D
Gene Feickert
gfeickert@eg3d.com
707-338-6086
Surveying
<1%
Certerra
Taylor Scott
taylor@bigapplegroupny.com
718.767.2900
Vibration Monitoring
1.1%
Concrete Saw Cutting
A-Core
Jeff Frehner
jeff.frehner@a-core.com
(480) 964-8662
<1%
Scott Pasternak
602-321-3638
<1%
Rebar
Tyler Reinforcing
scott@tylerreinforcing.com
Felix Construction
Zachary Watts
zachw@felixconstruction.com
602-814-3877
Electrical
15.7%
Hark Drilling
Shoring
Bobby Fletcher
bobby.fletcher@harkdrilling.com
623-434-3105
3.7%
EXHIBIT E
Project Name: [TITLE]
Page SUB-1
Project No.: [####]
Rev. 1/16/2024
SUBCONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS WITH CM@RISK
Any subcontractor assumptions, clarifications, exclusions, terms & conditions, signature blocks, etc. included are strictly between the CM@RISK
and their subcontractors, and do not apply to the Agreement between the CM@RISK and the City.
SUBCONTRACTOR’S LIST FORM
If CM@Risk intends to subcontract any portion of this Agreement, the CM@Risk must submit the name, address, and contractor’s license number (if
applicable) of each subcontractor, including the work component of such subcontracting. Include the form with the bid submittal documents. CM@Risk
may make multiple copies of this form as needed.
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Fences & Gates
<1%
Hurricane Fence Co.
Matthew Mitchell
mattm@hurricanefenceco.com
(480) 640-7750
Welding
<1%
Professional Piping Systems
Eric Johnson
602-510-2638
ejohnson@ppsphx.com
Welding Inspection
1.6%
Crosspoint Testing & Inspection Services
480-988-6602
Brent Couch
brent.couch@crosspointtesting.com
EXHIBIT F
Project Name: Water System Upgrades Program
Page F-1
Project No.: WA2100.402
Rev 1/16/2024
GIS / GPS DATA DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
N/A
EXHIBIT G
Project Name: Water System Upgrades Program
Page E-1
Project No.: WA2100.402
Rev 1/16/2024
SUBCONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS WITH CM@RISK
Any subcontractor assumptions, clarifications, exclusions, terms & conditions,
signature blocks, etc. included are strictly between the CM@Risk and their
subcontractors, and do not apply to the Agreement between the CM@Risk and the City.
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
C.5 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Archer Western will utilize the following subcontractors:
Quality Control: Ninyo & Moore
Surveying: Elevate Geo 3D LLC
Vibration Monitoring: Certerra
Concrete Ready-Mix: Cal-Portland
Asphalt Saw Cutting: A-Core
Rebar supply and installation: Tyler Reinforcing
Electrical material supply and installation: Felix Construction Company
Shoring: Hark Drilling
Trucking & Hauling: TBD
Fencing: Hurricane Fence Co
Pipe, General – Ferguson
Pipe, Carbon Steel: TBD
Welding: PPS
Weld Inspection: CrossPoint Testing
BACK-UP
QUOTES
SURVEYING QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
SURVEYING
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
99
19010
SITE SURVEY
1
LS
7,264.00
$
7,264.00
$
7,264.00
$
0.00%
-
$
0.24%
17.43
$
7,281.43
$
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
ELEVATE GEO 3D LLC
BID QUANTITIES
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
18521 E QUEEN CREEK RD. SUITE
105-458 QUEEN CREEK, AZ 85142
Page 1 of 1
September 2, 2025
REF: Pecos Water System GMP 2, Chandler, AZ
ATTN: Ed Kluber
Construction Staking Proposal AZ306
1. Project Control and Verification:
1.1 Project Control: Verify existing control and set additional control as necessary for
layout. Control work needs to be performed before demolition.
Provide one set of stakes for each of the following:
2. Rough Grade:
2.1 Limits: Provide stakes or marks at all angle points and at 50ft intervals.
2.2 Excavation: Provide offset stakes at 50ft intervals along perimeter: Provide grade stakes
for bottom at 50ft intervals.
2.3 Temp Fence: Provide offset stakes at 100ft intervals.
3. Utilities:
3.1 Under Slab Piping: Provide offset stakes at 25ft intervals.
3.2 Electrical: Provide offset stakes at 50ft intervals, two offset stakes per box.
4. Final As-Builts: Per City Standards.
Total = $7,264.00
•
Conditions of Proposal:
•
EG3D, LLC. Requests Electronic Payments via ACH, whenever available.
•
Please contact Gene Feickert on his cell at 707-338-6086 or at gfeickert@eg3d.com should you have
any questions regarding this proposal.
Thank you for the opportunity to bid on this project.
Sincerely,
Gene Feickert
VIBRATION MONITORING QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
VIBRATION MONITORING
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
43
31.43.300
PRECONSTRUCTION SURVEY, MONITORING PLAN, INSTALLATION OF REMOTE SYSTEM
1
LS
15,950.00
$
15,950.00
$
VIBRATION MONITORING & REPORTING (ASSUMED 21 WD/MO)
11
MO
6,500.00
$
71,500.00
$
87,450.00
$
0.00%
-
$
0.24%
209.88
$
87,659.88
$
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
CERTERRA
BID QUANTITIES
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
CONFIDENTIAL PRICING
MONITORING PROPOSAL
City of Chandler – Water System Program, Phase 1
– City Project No. PW3-925-4631, GMP 2
Ed Kluber
Archer Western Construction
4710 East Elwood Street, Suite 6 Phoenix, AZ 85040
Date: September 2, 2025
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
Ed Kluber
Archer Western Construction
4710 East Elwood Street, Suite 6 Phoenix, AZ 85040
Re: City of Chandler – Water System Program, Phase 1 – City Project No. PW3-925-
4631, GMP 2
Thank you for the opportunity to provide our proposal. We appreciate your interest in our company and look forward to
working with you.
At Certerra, we are committed to providing our clients with exceptional service. It is our priority to assess each individual
project’s need and provide a comprehensive proposal for all the quality assurance services identified as required.
Please let us know if you have any questions or need any guidance throughout any stage of your project’s life cycle. We
attribute the success of our company directly to the satisfaction of our customers – Thank You.
We hope you will think of us as your partner.
Respectfully,
Certerra
Taylor Scott
Business Development Manager
taylor@bigapplegroupny.com
T : 718.767.2900
D : 856.229.1012
September 2, 2025
Proposal No. 15-XXXXXX-P
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
Scope of Services
Pre-Construction Condition Survey
Pre- & Post-Condition Survey will include a non-invasive visual observation by digital photography and/or video (if-
required) highlighting evidence of structural faults cometic faults, deficiencies, cracks, settlement, water, damage,
and/or repairs.
Survey will include all areas available for observation at time of visit. This includes walls & slabs. No destructive or
non-destructive testing will be performed. No objects or movable building features (e.g., furniture, inventory,
storage items, interior partitions, suspended ceiling tiles, etc.) will be moved to evaluate or identify nonvisible
existing conditions.
Pre/Post-Construction Condition Surveys areas of inspection to include exterior of the structures to the roofline,
interior of first floor, basement, all common areas and commercial areas, if allowed.
The reports will be submitted to the contractor for review prior to the start of any demolition or construction
activities. The reports will be in an 8 1/2 x 11-inch format with an index and property listing. Respective
photographs or video shall be in digital format and sent via cloud-based platform or flash drive. Each photograph
on the cloud-based platform or flash drive will be date stamped and attached within the formal report. Actual prints
of the photographs can be provided at an additional administrative charge. Certerra will generate a complete
formal report and submit in a timely manner. If an additional report is required on a specific property, it can be
prepared at the rate for secretarial office time and report preparation.
Certerra will make no assessment and provide no opinion as to the nature, cause, or character of any detected
change in condition, nor will it provide any assessment or opinion as to repairs or other actions to be taken in
connection with such change in condition.
Structures Included (Adjacent to project)
•
Disinfectant Buildings adjacent to vibration generating activities
Monitoring Plan
Construction methods and equipment will be analyzed to determine the vibration generation potential of
operations. A list of equipment and their specs to be used on the project will be submitted by the contractor.
The Monitoring Plan represents the instrumentation requirements, monitoring procedures, and locations of
monitoring points that are recommended to be implemented for the protection and safeguarding of the structures
adjacent to the project site and is to be reviewed by the project’s structural engineer.
Certerra’s Licensed New York PE will sign and seal the plan.
Vibration Monitoring
Certerra will furnish and install required remote vibration monitoring systems housed in a secure lockbox at
locations per the project plans/specifications, monitoring plan, or as directed by client in writing. Installed
locations of equipment will be added to the monitoring plan.
Systems will be equipped with internal battery power with AC charger and modems linked real-time via
cellular account to our central database.
Client shall be responsible to provide power for units unless solar power is specified prior to installation
(pricing available upon request).
Upon receipt of any notifications indicating vibrations have exceeded the predetermined threshold, cellular
and/or email notification, as specified, will be provided to the contractor immediately.
Certerra will use Instantel Micromate™ Plus portable field seismographs capable of recording three
independent particle-velocity channels and A-weighted sound levels continuously for 24-hours (if necessary).
Might be an issue in AZ
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
Optical Monitoring
Certerra will install and maintain optical monitoring points and station locations, and/or Automated Robotic Total
Station (AMTS).
Station, control points, and optical monitoring points locations will be established during installation and a baseline
reading will be recorded.
Settlement monitoring points will be installed with a minimum of three (3) per structure up to 16’ high at a
maximum of twenty-five (25) foot spacing. Locations of equipment/stations will be added to the monitoring plan.
Certerra will return to the site to obtain horizontal and vertical measurements for the settlement prisms as
frequently as specified in the specifications/plans, monitoring plan, or as directed by client in writing.
The values of the points will be compiled into a tabular format illustrating the new values, as well as any settlement
from the previous site visit. If any reading shows settlement, client will be emailed a notification to the email
address(es) or phone numbers specified.
Certerra will complete the monitoring of Optical Monitoring points under the supervision of a NY State
Professional Engineer, in accordance with Article 145 Section 7208.e. of the New York Educational Law.
Servicing AMTS and Associated Equipment Maintenance can include leveling the AMTS to ensure accurate
readings, checking and fixing control points for stability and precision, inspecting and repairing settlement prisms
as needed, verifying the functionality and calibration of the AMTS system, cleaning lenses and sensors to remove
debris or obstructions, updating or troubleshooting software and firmware if necessary, securing equipment
mounts to prevent shifts or misalignments, and documenting any adjustments, repairs, or updates performed
during servicing for recordkeeping and reporting.
Crack Monitoring
Certerra will furnish and install crack gauges on any open joints in the permanent structures on neighboring
properties in locations on a sight-as-seen basis specified by client and the engineer on record (EOR).
Certerra will also install crack gauges where we observe cracks up to 16’ high on a building. We assume no duty,
however, to identify all cracks that exist or may exist.
Any locations where we install crack gauges will be added to our Monitoring Plan
Might be an issue in AZ
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
Fee Schedule
Pre-Construction Condition Survey
Pre-Construction Condition Survey
$2,000.00 (Lump Sum)
Post-Construction Condition Survey
$2,000.00 (Lump Sum)
Monitoring Plan
Development/Implementing of Monitoring Plan
$2,000.00 (Lump Sum)
Vibration/Noise Monitoring
Remote Vibration Monitoring
Vibration/Noise Monitor Installation/Programming
$ 400.00 per Monitor
Vibration/Noise Monitor Removal
$ 250.00 per Monitor
Vibration/Noise Monitor Relocation/Equipment Check
$ 500.00 per Visit
Remote Vibration Equipment Rental & Monitoring
$ 500.00 Per Unit Per Month
Solar Power
$ 50.00 Per Unit Per Month
Optical Monitoring
Automated Remote Monitoring
Installation/Positioning of Automated Motorized Total
Stations and Target Prisms
$ 7,000.00 Per Installed Total Station
Removal of Automated Motorized Total Stations and
Target Prisms
$ 1,000.00 Per Removed Total Station
Automated Motorized Total Station Monitoring and
Report Preparation
$4,500.00 per Month per Total Station
Relocation of Automated Motorized Total Station
$ 2,500.00 per Relocation
Servicing ATMS/Equipment Maintenance
$ 700.00 per Visit
Crack Monitoring
Option 1: Manual Crack Monitoring
Installation of Avongard Crack Monitors
$ 700.00 (Lump Sum)
Includes up to five (5) installed crack gauges. Additional
gauges are $70.00 each
Manual Reading of Crack Monitoring Points by Field
Technician
$ 500.00 per Visit
Option 2: Automated Crack Monitoring
Installation of Automated Crack Monitors
$ 700.00 per Installed Crack Monitor
Automated Crack Monitor Monitoring and Equipment
Rental
$ 250.00 per Monitor per Month
Weekly Reports/Instrumentation Website
Preparation of Weekly Reports/Instrumentation
Website for Vibration Monitoring, Optical Monitoring,
Crack Monitoring
$100.00 per Week
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
Certerra Engineering Services (if necessary)
Hourly Rates
Item No.
Description
Unit Price
Unit
1
Principal Engineer
$ 325.00 per hour
2
Senior Engineer (P.E.)
$ 250.00 per hour
3
Senior Technician
$ 200.00 per hour
4
Project Manager
$ 150.00 per hour
5
Staff Engineer (E.I.T.)
$ 100.00 per hour
6
Field Technician
$ 75.00 per hour
7
Administrative/Office
$ 60.00 per hour
Clarifications:
The following estimation is an approximate of what the client will be charged based on Certerra’s experience with
projects of similar size and scope
M-F Regular Business Hours. OT/Nights/SAT will be billed at 1.5x the listed rate. SUN/Holidays will be billed at
2.0x the listed rate.
Client will be responsible for any damages to equipment, including, but not limited to, theft, abuse, damage,
negligence, vandalism, or unexplained disappearances.
Client shall be responsible for repair charges due to accidents or mishandling, including, but not limited to, power
surges, water damage, construction activities, etc
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
Estimation of Scope of Services
Estimation - One Time Charges
Service
Quantity
Units
Unit Price
Extended
Price
Condition Surveys
Pre-Construction Condition Survey
1
Lump Sum
$2,000.00
$2,000.00
Post-Construction Condition Survey
1
Lump Sum
$2,000.00
$2,000.00
Monitoring Plan
Development/Implementing of Monitoring Plan
1
Lump Sum
$2,000.00
$2,000.00
Vibration/Noise Monitoring
Vibration/Noise Monitoring Install
3
per Monitor
$400.00
$1,200.00
Vibration/Noise Monitoring Removal
3
per Monitor
$250.00
$750.00
Optical Monitoring
Installation/Positioning of Automated Motorized Total Stations
and Target Prisms
1
per Installed Total
Station
$7,000.00
$7,000.00
Removal of Automated Motorized Total Stations and Target
Prisms
1
per Removed Total
Station
$1,000.00
$1,000.00
Total (One Time Charges)
$15,950.00
Estimation - per Month
Service
Quantity
Units
Unit Price
Extended
Price
Vibration/Noise Monitoring
Vibration Monitoring and Equipment Rental
3
per Unit per Month
$500.00
$1,500.00
Optical Monitoring
Automated Motorized Total Station Monitoring and Report
Preparation
1
per Month per Total
Station
$4,500.00
$4,500.00
Weekly Reports/Instrumentation Website
4
per Week
$100.00
$400.00
Total (Per Month)
$6,400.00
Pricing Summary - Estimated 6 Month Span
Service
Quantity
Units
Unit Price
Extended
Price
One Time Charges
1
Lump Sum
$15,950.00
$15,950.00
Monthly Charges
6
per Month
$6,400.00
$38,400.00
Total (6 Months)
$54,350.00
11
$71,500.00
$87,450.00
5
$500.00
$6,500.00
$6,500.00
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
Project: City of Chandler – Water System Program, Phase 1 – City Project No. PW3-
925-4631, GMP 2
By signing below, you hereby authorize Certerra to proceed with services outlined in this proposal or requested by you
and agree that all services and anything arising out of or in any way related to this proposal will be governed by Certerra’s
Fee Schedule and General Conditions which are attached hereto and are incorporated herein by reference. This
authorization to proceed constitutes an agreement between you and Certerra and is made in consideration of the mutual
promises and covenants contained herein and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of
which is hereby acknowledged.
Thank you for the opportunity to submit this proposal. We look forward to working with you on this project. If you have any
questions regarding this proposal, please contact the undersigned.
Authorized By:
Respectfully submitted,
Client
Name:____________________________
Contact
Printed:___________________________
Contact
Signature:_________________________
Certerra
Taylor Scott
Business Development Manager
taylor@bigapplegroupny.com
T : 718.767.2900
D : 856.229.1012
certerra.com
13 Fern Avenue, Collingswood, NJ, 08108
T: 718.767.2900
GENERAL CONDITIONS
AGREEMENT. This agreement is made by and between Certerra
Instrumentation and Monitoring, LLC (“CERTERRA”) and the party that
accepted CERTERRA’s proposal or requested that CERTERRA perform
Services (“Client”). CERTERRA shall mean the aforementioned entity, any
of its affiliates or subsidiaries to the extent same are performing any of the
Services under this Agreement, and their respective engineers and
employees. This "Agreement” includes CERTERRA’s proposal and any
exhibits or attachments noted in the proposal or incorporated by reference
including but not limited to these General Conditions. Requesting Services
from CERTERRA shall constitute acceptance of the terms of these General
Conditions.
1. SCOPE OF SERVICES. Services means the service(s) performed by
CERTERRA for Client or at Client's direction. CERTERRA’s findings,
opinions, and recommendations are based upon data and information
obtained by and furnished to CERTERRA at the time of the Services.
CERTERRA may rely upon information provided by the Client or third
parties. Client may request additional work or changes beyond the scope
of Services described in CERTERRA’s Proposal. If any alteration or addition
of Services are requested by the Client (“Additional Services”), CERTERRA
may provide a proposal detailing the additional scope of work, time
extension and associated fees for Client’s review. Client shall provide written
acceptance of such. CERTERRA shall not be obligated to perform the
Additional Services, if Client does not follow these procedures, but instead
directs, authorizes, or permits CERTERRA to perform the Additional
Services without written acceptance. To the extent CERTERRA does
perform the Additional Services without written acceptance, CERTERRA
will be paid for this work according to its proposal for same or current fee
schedule.
2. DELAYS. CERTERRA shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the
project schedule and compensation to compensate CERTERRA for any
increase in time or costs necessary to perform the Services under this
Agreement due to any cause beyond CERTERRA’s reasonable control. All
promises related to the time of the Services are approximations by
CERTERRA and are subject to the Client and contractor's schedules,
weather conditions, travel conditions, disputes with workmen or parties,
accidents, strikes, natural disasters, health emergencies, discovery of
hazardous materials, differing or unforeseeable site conditions or project
conditions, acts of governmental agencies or authorities, or other causes.
In no event shall CERTERRA be responsible for any damage or expense
due to delays from any cause, other than to the extent the damage or
expense is directly caused by CERTERRA’s own proven negligence after
having been warned in writing by the Client of the damage or expense which
may result from the delay.
3. CERTERRA RESPONSIBILITIES. Services performed by CERTERRA
under this Agreement will be conducted in a manner consistent with the
level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by members of the same
profession currently providing the same or similar services under similar
circumstances in the same locality and in accordance with applicable
standards in effect at the time the Services are performed. CERTERRA
MAKES NO OTHER REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Testing
or inspection Services may require the destruction of a sample or sample
location. Client understands that, in the normal course of performing the
Services, some damage may occur, and understands that CERTERRA is not
responsible for the correction of any such damage or for replacing samples.
Client
acknowledges
that
opinions,
data,
interpretations
and
recommendations prepared by CERTERRA are based on limited data and
recognizes that subsurface conditions or other actual conditions may vary
from those encountered at the location where inspections, tests, borings,
surveys, or explorations are made by CERTERRA and may vary from those
depicted on logs of discrete borings, test pits, or other exploratory Services
or from information provided to CERTERRA by Client. There is an inherent
risk that samples or observations may not be representative of materials or
locations not sampled or seen and that conditions may change over time.
Variations between inspected or tested discrete locations may occur and
the risk of such occurrence is understood and accepted by Client. Client is
responsible for notifying the appropriate party or professional regarding the
correction of any deviations or deficiencies noted by CERTERRA and
CERTERRA accepts no liability in connection therewith. CERTERRA shall
not be responsible for the interpretation by others of information developed
by
CERTERRA
and
makes
no
guarantee
that
CERTERRA’s
recommendations are properly implemented by any party. CERTERRA shall
not be held liable for problems that may occur if CERTERRA’s
recommendations are not followed. To the fullest extent permitted by law,
Client shall indemnify and hold harmless the Indemnitees (as defined below)
from any and all Losses (as defined below) arising from or related to
interpretations made by others.
4. SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS. Client understands CERTERRA’s
layout of boring and test locations is approximate and that CERTERRA may
deviate a reasonable distance from those locations. Client acknowledges
that it is impossible for CERTERRA to know the exact composition of a site’s
subsurface, even after conducting a comprehensive exploratory program.
There is a risk that drilling and sampling may result in contamination of
certain subsurface areas. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Client
waives any claim against, and agrees to defend, indemnify and save the
Indemnitees harmless from any Losses which may arise as a result of
subsurface contamination caused by drilling, sampling, or monitoring well
installation. Client also agrees to adequately compensate CERTERRA for
any time spent and expenses incurred in defense of any such claim.
5. CLIENT PARTICIPATION. Client will make available to CERTERRA all
information in its possession regarding existing and proposed conditions at
the site, of which CERTERRA may rely on to perform its Services. Such
information shall include, but not be limited to engineering reports, plot
plans, topographic surveys, hydrographic data, soil data including borings,
field and laboratory tests and written reports. Client shall immediately
transmit to CERTERRA any new information concerning site condition
which becomes available, and any change in plans or specifications
concerning the project. CERTERRA shall not be liable for any inaccurate or
incorrect advice, judgment or decision which is based on any inaccurate
information furnished by Client and Client, to the fullest extent permitted by
law, shall indemnify the Indemnitees against any and all Losses arising out
of, or contributed to, by such inaccurate information. In the event Client, the
project owner, or other party makes any changes in the plans and
specifications, Client agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to
indemnify and hold the Indemnitees harmless from any and all Losses
arising out of such changes, and Client assumes full responsibility unless
Client has given CERTERRA prior notice and has received CERTERRA’s
written consent for such changes. CERTERRA does not assume
responsibility for any conditions at the Client's site(s) that may present a
danger, either potential or real, to health, safety, or the environment. Client
hereby agrees that it is the Client's responsibility to notify any and all
appropriate federal, state, or local authorities, as required by law, of the
existence of any such potential or real danger and otherwise to disclose to
all appropriate or affected individuals or entities, in a timely manner, any
information that may be necessary to prevent any danger to health, safety,
or the environment. Client assumes sole responsibility for determining
whether the quantity and the nature of Services ordered by Client is
adequate and sufficient for Client’s intended purpose.
6. THIRD PARTIES. To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent
not resulting from CERTERRA’s proven negligence, Client agrees to defend,
indemnify, and hold harmless CERTERRA and all of its agents, affiliates,
subsidiaries, officers, directors, representatives, and employees and their
successors (collectively the “Indemnitees”) from any and all claims, losses,
causes of action, demands, suits, losses, charges, liability, expenses, costs,
defense costs, disbursements (including attorney fees and costs at trial and
appeal), and/or allegations of responsibility (“Losses”) by any and all third
parties including but not limited to, contractors, subcontractors, agents,
employees (including without limitation Client’s employees), assignees
transferees, successors, invitees, neighbors, and the public relating in any
way to this Agreement, the Services, or the project. It is expressly
understood and agreed that the enforcement of these terms and conditions
shall be reserved to the Client and CERTERRA. Nothing contained in this
Agreement shall give or allow any claim or right of action whatsoever by any
third person. It is the express intent of the Client and CERTERRA that any
such person or entity, other than Client or CERTERRA, receiving services
or benefits under this Agreement shall be deemed an incidental beneficiary.
Neither party may assign this Agreement or any right or obligation
hereunder without the prior written consent of the other party, which shall
not be unreasonably withheld or delayed; provided, however, that no
consent shall be necessary in the event of an assignment to a successor
entity resulting from a merger, acquisition or consolidation by or of
CERTERRA or an assignment to an affiliate or subsidiary of CERTERRA.
7. SAMPLE DISPOSAL. Samples are consumed in testing or disposed of
upon completion of tests or upon report completion (unless stated
otherwise in the Services). Client acknowledges that contaminated drill
cuttings, sample spoils, wash water, and other materials may be produced
as a result of encountering hazardous materials at the site. In such event,
Client shall be responsible for their proper transportation and disposal.
CERTERRA may be able to arrange for the transportation and disposal of
hazardous materials at Client’s request. In no event shall CERTERRA be
required to sign a hazardous waste manifest or take title to any hazardous
materials. Contaminated samples delivered to or taken to CERTERRA’s
laboratory for testing shall remain the property of Client and Client is
responsible for ultimate disposal of any samples which are found to be
contaminated. On request, Client shall retrieve contaminated samples from
CERTERRA’s laboratory and dispose of them in an approved manner.
8. DISCOVERY OF UNANTICIPATED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. Client
shall furnish to CERTERRA all documents and information known or
available to Client that relate to the identity, location, quantity, nature, or
characteristic of any hazardous waste, toxic, radioactive, or contaminated
materials prior to commencement of the Services. Client warrants that it
has made reasonable efforts to disclose known or suspected hazardous
materials on or near the project site. Client agrees that the discovery of such
unanticipated hazardous materials constitutes a changed condition which
may require either a re- negotiation of the scope of CERTERRA’s Services,
time for completion, and compensation or termination of such Services or
this Agreement. Client recognizes that the discovery of hazardous materials
may necessitate immediate protective measures to safeguard the public
health and safety and agrees to compensate CERTERRA for measures that
in CERTERRA’s professional opinion are justified to preserve and protect
the health and safety of site personnel and the public. Client agrees to
compensate CERTERRA for any equipment decontamination or other costs
incident to the discovery of unanticipated hazardous materials. Client
agrees that in the event of the discovery of hazardous materials at the site
it will report such discovery to the proper authorities as required by federal,
state, and local regulations. Client also agrees to inform the project site
owner in the event that hazardous materials are encountered at the site.
Notwithstanding any other provision of the agreement, to the fullest extent
permitted by law, Client waives any claim against CERTERRA and agrees to
defend, indemnify, and save the Indemnitees harmless from any and all
Losses arising from the presence of hazardous materials on the project site.
9. SITE CONDITIONS. Client shall secure all necessary approvals, notices,
permits, licenses, and consents from all owners, lessees, contractors, and
other possessors of the project, necessary to commence and complete the
Services, and will provide CERTERRA access to the project site for all
equipment and personnel necessary for the performance of the Services.
CERTERRA shall be allowed free access to the site. Client understands and
agrees that CERTERRA shall only be responsible for losses which directly
result from CERTERRA’s negligence. Client is responsible for the accuracy
of locations for all subterranean structures and utilities. To the fullest extent
permitted by law, Client waives any claim against CERTERRA, and agrees
to defend, indemnify, and hold the Indemnitees harmless from any and all
Losses arising from damage done to subterranean structures and utilities
not identified or accurately located. In addition, Client agrees to compensate
CERTERRA for any time spent or expenses incurred by CERTERRA in
defense of any such claim.
10. ENVIRONMENTAL LIABILITY. Neither this Agreement nor the
providing of Services will operate to make CERTERRA an owner, operator,
generator, transporter, treater, storer, or arranger for disposal or treatment
within the meaning of the Resource Conservation Recovery Act,
Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act,
or within the meaning of any other law governing the handling, treatment,
storage, or disposal of hazardous materials. To the fullest extent permitted
by law, Client will indemnify, defend and hold the Indemnitees harmless from
and against any and all Losses arising or claimed to arise from violations by
Client of any and all environmental laws, rules and regulations relating to
the existence, generation , current or future ownership, storage, transport
or disposal of pre-existing hazardous substances and wastes, but this
indemnity shall not cover such loss, damage, cost or expense to the extent
caused by CERTERRA’s proven negligence in performing the Services
under this Agreement. For purposes of this Agreement, a pre-existing
hazardous substance is any hazardous substance or hazardous waste
having been generated by Client or existing on Client's premises prior to
the date of this Agreement.
11. OWNERSHIP AND LEGAL USE OF DOCUMENTS. All notes, data,
reports, original final reproducible drawings, plans, specifications,
calculations, and studies memoranda assembled or prepared by
CERTERRA are instruments of service with respect to the subject project,
and CERTERRA shall retain an ownership and property interest therein,
whether or not the project is completed. The Client may make and retain
copies for information and reference in connection with the subject project;
however, such documents are not intended or represented to be suitable
for re-use by the Client or others. Any modification, changes, or reuse
without written verification or adaptation by CERTERRA for the specific
purpose intended will be at the Client's sole risk and without liability or legal
exposure to CERTERRA, and the Client, to the fullest extent permitted by
law, agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Indemnitees against any
and all Losses whatsoever arising out of or resulting therefrom.
12. ALLOCATION OF RISK AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. The parties
have evaluated the respective risks and remedies under this Agreement and
agree to allocate the risks and restrict the remedies to reflect that
evaluation. Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary in this
Agreement and to the fullest extent permitted by law, Client agrees to
restrict its remedies under this Agreement against CERTERRA, its parents,
affiliates and subsidiaries (“CERTERRA Covered Parties”), so that the total
aggregate liability of CERTERRA Covered Parties shall not exceed $50,000
or the actual paid compensation for the Services performed by CERTERRA
under this Agreement, whichever is greater. This restriction of remedies
shall apply to any and all Losses of any nature arising from or related to this
Agreement without regard to the legal theory under which such liability is
imposed. Claims must be brought within one calendar year from
performance of the Services.
13. LIABILITY FOR OTHERS. CERTERRA shall not be responsible for
supervising, overseeing, or controlling the Client’s contractors or for their
means and methods, procedures, performance, or site safety. CERTERRA
shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Client, owner,
architect, architect’s other consultants, contractor, subcontractors, other
third parties or their respective agents, employees, assigns, successors, or
any other persons (“Others"). CERTERRA shall have no authority to control
Others regarding their work or their safety practices. CERTERRA does not
control or guarantee the work of Others. CERTERRA has no duty to inspect
or correct health and safety deficiencies of Others. CERTERRA will not be
responsible for the failure of Others to perform in accordance with their
undertakings and the providing of CERTERRA’s Services shall not relieve
Others of their responsibilities to the Client or Others. CERTERRA reserves
the right to report to the Client any unsafe conditions observed at the project
without altering the foregoing.
14. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WAIVER. Notwithstanding anything to
the contrary in this agreement and to the fullest extent permitted by law,
Client and CERTERRA waive against each other any and all claims for or
entitlement to special, incidental, indirect, consequential, delay, punitive, or
similar losses or damages arising out of, resulting from, or in any way related
to the project or this Agreement.
15. INSURANCE. CERTERRA will maintain the following insurance
coverages and amounts: (1) Workers Compensation insurance as required
by law, (2) Employer’s Liability insurance with coverage of $1,000,000 per
each accident/employee, (3) Commercial General Liability insurance with
coverage of $1,000,000 per occurrence/aggregate, (4) Automobile Liability
insurance with coverage of $1,000,000 combined single limit, and (5) If
CERTERRA is providing professional services, Professional Liability
insurance with coverage of $1,000,000 per claim/aggregate. Client shall
name CERTERRA as additional insured on its Builder’s Risk policy. Client
shall require any general contractors working on the project site to include
CERTERRA in any indemnity that the Client requires such contractors to
provide to the Client and as an additional insured under any such
contractor’s general liability insurance policy. Client shall provide
CERTERRA with a certificate of insurance evidencing the required
insurance.
16. RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES. Client shall not be entitled to assert a
Claim against CERTERRA based on any theory of professional negligence
unless and until Client has obtained the written opinion from an independent
and reputable Professional Engineer (P.E.), licensed architect (A.I.A.), or
Registered Geologist (R.G.) that CERTERRA has violated the standard of
care applicable to CERTERRA’s performance of the Services. Such party
shall be currently practicing in the same discipline as CERTERRA and be
licensed in the state where the project is located. This written opinion shall
specify the acts or omissions that the independent engineer, architect, or
geologist contends are not in conformance with the standard of care for
professional services performed by local consultants under similar
circumstances; and state in detail the basis for their independent opinion
that such acts or omissions do not conform to that standard of care. Client
shall provide this opinion to CERTERRA and the parties shall endeavor to
resolve the dispute within 30 days. This Agreement shall be governed by
and construed in accordance with the laws of the state where the
CERTERRA office originating the work or proposal is located. Exclusive of
lien claims, any legal action or proceeding brought to enforce or otherwise
arising out of or relating to this Agreement shall be brought in the county
where the CERTERRA office originating the work or proposal is located.
Each party waives its right to a jury trial in any court action arising between
the parties, whether under this Agreement or otherwise related to the work
being performed under this Agreement.
17. COMPENSATION AND PAYMENT TERMS. Client agrees that an
invoice amount is due when received unless otherwise agreed. A service
charge of one and one-half percent (1-½%) per month (but not exceeding
the maximum allowable by law) will be added to any account not paid within
30 days after the invoice date. In the event that any portion of the account
remains unpaid 30 days after the invoice date, CERTERRA may immediately
discontinue Services on any and all projects for Client, or withhold any final
report or instrument of service, or demand prepayment of fees at
CERTERRA’s option. Client shall pay all costs incurred by CERTERRA in
collecting any delinquent amount, including staff time, court costs and
attorney fees. To the fullest extent permitted by law, failure to make payment
within sixty (60) days of invoice shall constitute a release of CERTERRA
from any and all claims which Client may have, either in tort or contract, and
whether known or unknown at the time. Should Services based on a fee
schedule be performed beyond the end of the calendar year, CERTERRA’s
current fee schedule shall apply unless otherwise negotiated in advance.
18. TERMINATION. This Agreement may be terminated without cause by
either party upon thirty (30) days written notice, and at any time by either
party if the other party defaults in the performance of any material provision
of this Agreement and such default continues for a period of seven (7) days
after written notice thereof. In the event of termination, CERTERRA will be
paid for Services performed through the date of termination, plus
reasonable termination expenses, including the cost of completing
analyses, demobilization, records and reports necessary to document job
status at the time of termination.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement
between the parties and shall supersede other prior agreements and
representations. No amendments to this Agreement shall be valid unless
made in writing and signed by the parties. If Client uses its standard
business forms, all pre-printed terms and conditions contained in or on
such forms shall be deemed stricken and null and void. If the terms and
conditions of this Agreement conflict with the terms and conditions of any
other agreement or document this Agreement shall govern and control
over any such conflict. The invalidity or unenforceability of any portion(s)
of this Agreement shall in no way affect the validity or enforceability of any
other portion(s) hereof. Any invalid or unenforceable portion shall be
severed from the Agreement and the balance of the Agreement shall be
construed and enforced as if the Agreement did not contain a particular
portion held to be invalid or unenforceable. This Agreement may be
executed in several counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an
original having identical legal effect. The titles, captions and headings of
this Agreement are included for ease of reference only and will be
disregarded in interpreting or construing this Agreement. CERTERRA shall
not be bound by any language incorporating by reference any contract or
term of any contract unless the term or terms incorporated by reference
are specifically furnished to CERTERRA and are expressly agreed to in a
writing signed by CERTERRA.
CONCRETE READY MIX QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
CONCRETE READY-MIX
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
01
33.43.101
4500 PSI READY MIX
134.29
CY
151.75
$
20,378.51
$
157.00
$
21,083.53
$
144.00
$
19,337.76
$
01
33.43.101
4500 PSI READY MIX
285.02
CY
151.75
$
43,251.79
$
157.00
$
44,748.14
$
144.00
$
41,042.88
$
01
33.43.102
1/2 SAK PHCLSM SLURRY
4528.22
CY
103.75
$
469,802.83
$
113.00
$
511,688.86
$
105.00
$
475,463.10
$
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARGE
551
LD
-
$
-
$
25.00
$
13,775.00
$
29.25
$
16,116.75
$
TECH ADMIN FEE
551
LD
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
PARTIAL LOAD DELIVERY FEE (3.5-6.5 CY; 2 EA FOR 4500 PSI & 3 EA FOR CLSM)
5
LD
200.00
$
1,000.00
$
200.00
$
1,000.00
$
200.00
$
1,000.00
$
DIESEL FUEL SURCHARGE (PER EIA PUBLISHED RATES; BASED ON $4.50 - $5.00/GAL)
551
LD
20.00
$
11,020.00
$
20.00
$
11,020.00
$
20.00
$
11,020.00
$
ESCALATION ON MATERIALS
4947.53
CY
10.00
$
49,475.30
$
10.00
$
49,475.30
$
10.00
$
49,475.30
$
594,928.42
$
652,790.83
$
613,455.79
$
2.00%
11,898.57
$
2.00%
13,055.82
$
2.00%
12,269.12
$
0.24%
1,456.38
$
0.24%
1,598.03
$
0.24%
1,501.74
$
608,283.37
$
667,444.68
$
627,226.65
$
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
DESERT READY MIX (WRONG MIX)
CAL PORTLAND
ROCK SOLID (DOESN'T MEET SPECS)
BID QUANTITIES
ROCK SOLID
6741 W. Rock Solid Way, Box 5062, Chandler, AZ 85226
480 496-9633 (office); 480-496-4511 (dispatch)
www.rocksolidconcrete.com
Quote Number
Acct Pending
MATERIAL PRICE QUOTE
Quote Date
8/19/25
Prices Expire on:
3/1/2026
Customer Name Archer Western Construction
Project Name Pecos Water Supply Phs 1 GMP 2
Project Address 1475 east Pecos, Chandler
Contact Name Ed Kluber
Contact Phone 385-237-7704
Contact email ekluber@walshgroup.com
Source Plant:
2
Quantity Product Code
Description
Application
Price
U of M
Notes
TBD
A4040
Mag AA 4000 PSI Ash
SITE
$151.75
A3040
Mag A 3000 PSI Ash
$146.75
A1050
1/2 Sack ABC CLSM
$103.75
A1100
1 Sack ABC CLSM
$108.75
NOTE
THIS IS AN ALTERNATE QUOTE ONLY
AS IT DOSNT MEET THE NSF/ANSI SPEC.
P40
Environmental Fee
$0.00
CY
P16
Tempered Water
$0.00
CY
FSC
Fuel Surcharge
See Attached Letter
Price Escalation:
General Terms and Conditions:
Pricing above is based on Monday-Friday Delivery.
Customer is responsible for safe access to project point-of-delivery and mixer wash out area for all shipments.
Quote is valid for 30 days. Pricing is confirmed only upon receipt of signed acceptance (below) within 30 days of quote date.
Rock Solid Is not responsible for hardened concrete color and color variations between shipments of concrete containing color granules
Payment Terms: Net 30 days; 2% discount allowed if payment received by the 10th of the month following delivery.
Prices do not include sales taxes. If Sales Tax Exemption Documents are not received prior to first delivery, sales taxes will be charged.
Cancellation of orders within 24 hours of shipment will result in a charge of $10 per cubic yard, minimum $250.
Standby Charges: Allowance of 6 min per cy to unload concrete. Thereafter, subject to fee of $1.50/minute to unload.
Delivery Charges: Less than 5 cy--$200
Saturday Plant Opening Fee: $2500
Hydration Stabilizer: $1.10/level (approximately 30 min. per level)
Color washout Charge: $50 per load
Rock Solid mix designs include low alkali cement and fly ash to help mitigate potential for Alkali-Silica Reactivity
(ASR) in concrete mixes. Purchaser assumes ASR liability for mixes requested without fly ash or low alkali cement.
Rock Solid is not currently bidding any air entrained concrete mixes.
Quoted by: Frank Campbell
Accepted by:
email: fcampbell@rocksolidconcrete.com
Date:
ver 10.10.24
Non-Chloride Accelerator: $1.00/unit, 4 units= 1%;
Customer Name
ARCHER WESTERN CONSTRUCTION
Attention
Project Name
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM
City
CHANDLER
Project Address
1475 EAST PECOS ROAD
C/St
Office Phone
Fax
Email
Date
09/03/2025
Sales
WIL WITTMANN
Cell #
(480) 978-7820
Email
wwittmann@calportland.com
Quote #
153748
Customer #
1029364
Job Start
09/03/2025
Job End
04/01/2026
Volume
Product Number
Description
Unit Price
UOM
Comments
5000.00 PHCLSM
0.5 SK ABC SLURRY (PHCLSM 1/2)
$113.00
CY
W42257F1
4500 PSI 1" 0.42 W/C ASH FLOWABLE
$157.00
CY
5000
Total Volume
$ 25.00
LOAD
Environmental Fee
$ 20.00
LOAD
Energy Fee
Fly ash and lightweight mixes subject to daily availability / All aggregates meet ASTM C 33.
Comments : PRICE INCLUDES 10/1/25 INCREASE, PRICE INCREASE $10CY 4/1/26, PRICE INCREASE $10CY 10/1/26, PRICE EXPIRES 12/31/26
*NOT BID TO SPEC, AIR ENTRAINMENT NOT INCLUDED.
Subject to availability. CalPortland warrants that the concrete as delivered to this project will meet or exceed the design strength specified on the delivery ticket when evaluated
in accordance with applicable ACI and ASTM standards. CalPortland does not provide Contractor Quality Control. CalPortland guarantees ticketed mix designs of less than
5,000psi for load of three yards or more. Mix strength for loads less than three yards is not guaranteed. Ticketed mix designs of 5,000psi or greater require a four-yard minimum.
Three-yard minimum for all colored concrete. Concrete is a natural product. Seller cannot be responsible for variations in color, surface discoloration, popouts or variations in
the finished product caused by finishing techniques or job site conditions. Due to potential reactive aggregates in Arizona, CalPortland recommends the use of a Class F Fly
Ash to mitigate Alkali Silica Reactivity (ASR). Purchaser shall assume the liability for the use of a cement-only mix. On-site addition of allowable water per ASTM C94. CalPortland
cannot guarantee single source materials.
CalPortland reserves the right to postpone or cancel any quotes, current jobs or accepted deliveries if unable to perform due to raw material shortages, allocations or government
regulations. Prices subject to change due to drastic cost changes of the major components of concrete or Fees.
Concrete is batched and delivered at current ambient temperatures. Buyer is responsible for temperature controlled concrete (Ice/Tempered Water). Prices for temperature
controlled concrete are available upon request.
Contractor is responsible for providing safe access to the point of delivery. CalPortland accepts no responsibility for damages to the premises beyond the curb line.
Customer shall provide and assume responsibility for an area or container for clean out of the concrete truck chutes. Additional color added by Buyer on-site subject to wash
out fees.
All products quoted per Buyers request. Additional products or services ordered are subject to applicable charges.
The Energy and Environmental Fees charged herein may be more or less than the actual environmental or energy costs incurred by Seller in the production, storage and/or
delivery of materials and are not designed nor intended to represent the specific environmental and/or energy costs incurred for any individual order.
Standard Operating
hours
Loads batched outside Standard Operating Hours subject to applicable charges.
Summer: 3:00AM – 2:00PM
Winter: 5:00AM – 3:00PM
Saturday: 5:00AM – 12:00PM
Standing Time:
$2.00 per minute beyond 5 minutes per CY.
Minimum Load Charges:
Excessive Trucking Fee:
Energy Fee:
One Minimum Load Charge waived on orders of 1 full load or more.
Under 6 CY = $200.00
Split Loads or multiple Order Backs subject to Excessive Trucking Fees.
Variable Energy Fee based on U.S. Energy Information Administration On-Highway Diesel Energy Price Index and is adjusted weekly.
https://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/
Terms:
All pricing is net 30 days with a valid credit application on file. All applicable sales taxes will be added to price.
Financing:
All invoices are due and payable within 30 days of the original billing date. A Finance Charge of 1.5% per month on a pro-
rated portion thereof (12% Annual Percentage Rate) will be charged upon all balances not paid within 30 days or first
appearance on a Statement.
We impose a Fee of 2.25% on the transaction amount on all credit card products, which is not greater than our cost of
processing. We do not Fee debit cards.
General Terms &
Conditions of Sale:
Acceptance:
CalPortland Co. Terms and Conditions are applicable and included as page two of this quote. If you did not receive a copy,
please contact CalPortland Sales Department at (602) 817-6950.
For this job quotation to be effective, written acceptance must be received no later than 30 days after quote date.
Ready Mix Terms and Conditions
Price Expiration:
04/01/2026
See acceptance clause below
Buyer Acceptance:
Name / Title:
Date:
This will be prior to us purchasing
Customer #
1029364
Customer Name
ARCHER WESTERN CONSTRUCTION
Quote #
153748
Project Title
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER
SYSTEM
Tempered Water:
Heated Water $2.00 per cubic yard.
Ice:
$0.50 per pound (Requires 3 – 5 business days notice).
Non-Chloride Accelerator:
$0.09 per ounce.
Recover Set Delay Admixture:
$0.20 per ounce.
Micro Fiber:
$6.50 per pound.
Macro Fiber:
(Structural) Priced individually
Please see manufacturer recommendation / specifications for suggested dosage
rate.
Standard Liquid Color:
See mix detail for per yard pricing. Actual color of concrete may vary due to
differences in cement, aggregates, job site conditions and finishing methods.
Three-yard minimum load required.
Color Washouts:
$25.00 per load
Standby Charges:
$2.00 per minute beyond 5 minutes per cubic yard.
Minimum Load:
Under 6 CY = $200.00
Excessive Trucking:
One Excessive Trucking Fee of $200 will be assessed for each additional load
required due to load sizes or multiple Order Backs.
Saturday Service:
$10.00 per cubic yard
Saturday operating hours 5:00am – 12:00pm
Loads delivered outside of operating hours subject to additional charges
Split Load Charges:
$250.00 per load.
Cancellation Charges:
All orders cancelled within 24 hours of scheduled delivery will be charged $10.00 per
cubic yard or $250.00. Whichever is greater.
Return Concrete:
All loads returned with 5 cubic yards or more will be charged a Return Concrete Fee
of $300.00 per load.
Special Provisions:
DESERT READY MIX
READY MIX CONCRETE SALES AND SERVICE
4011 PRESIDO STREET
MESA, AZ 85215
OFFICE: 480-428-2280 FAX: 480-985-4248
* E – Environmental | S – Saturday Fee | F – Fuel Surcharge
Begin Date:
September 5, 2025
Quote # :
29092
Expiration Date:
December 31, 2025
MAP/GRID
Item Code
Item Description
Est. Qty
Price
A203051
MAG A 3000 NAT POZZ
420
$142.00
F203051
MAG A 3000 FLOW NAT POZZ
$144.00
S500501
PHCLSM.5 (1/2 SK SLURRY COP)
4530
$105.00
TC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
$1.00
Additional Fees Minimum Load Fee
Quoted By:
Kristopher Kepler
Customer:
ARCHER WESTERN CONSTRUCTION, LLC
Customer Code:
ARCH001
Address:
PHOENIX, AZ 85040
Contact:
HANNAH EPPS
Phone:
602-246-1485
Fax:
Project:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER PHASE 1
Job Address:
1475 EAST PECOS ROAD
Terms Description:
2% 10TH NET 30
Fee ID *
UOM
Price
ENV
PER YARD
$3.25
FSC
PER LOAD
TBD
Less than or equal to
UOM
Price
2
Load
0
3.5
Load
0
5.5
Load
0
•
Normal operating hours are Mon-Fri, Sat, Sun or Holidays are subject to surcharges.
•
Color added at no expressed guarantee.
•
Drivers do not accept cash or make change.
•
Desert Ready Mix reserves the right to increase prices due to RAW Material cost increases
such as Cement, Fly Ash, Aggregates or unexpected Fuel increases.
•
All specialized aggregate sales are based on availability.
•
Deliveries less than 6 Cubic yards are subject to our minimum load charges.
•
This quote does not guarantee product or service availability
•
All Aggregates and Concrete deliveries include a per load fuel surcharge.
These are the wrong
mix designs, should
be 4500 PSI
CONCRETE SAW CUTTING QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
CONCRETE SAW CUTTING
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
01
02.01.114
SAWCUT ASPHALT-04" THICK
70
LF
5.00
$
350.00
$
13.28
$
929.60
$
1.20
$
84.00
$
6.43
$
450.10
$
MOBILIZATION
1
EA
100.00
$
100.00
$
-
$
-
$
385.00
$
385.00
$
-
$
-
$
450.00
$
929.60
$
469.00
$
450.10
$
0.00%
-
$
0.00%
-
$
0.00%
-
$
0.00%
-
$
0.24%
1.08
$
0.24%
2.23
$
0.24%
1.13
$
0.24%
1.08
$
451.08
$
931.83
$
470.13
$
451.18
$
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
SWB PAVING
COPPER VALLEY CONTRACTORS
ADVANCED GPR
A-CORE
BID QUANTITIES
Date:
Quote: 34299
28 Aug 2025
27 Sep 2025
Expires:
A-Core Concrete Cutting, Inc. | 605 Drew St Mesa AZ 85210
Phone# (480) 964-8662 | Fax # | License# 196637 CR-5
Jeff Frehner
(480) -
jeff.frehner@a-core.com
Quoted By:
Job Information
Qty
Description
ARCHER WESTERN CONTRACTORS
1475 East Pecos Road
Chandler, AZ 85225
Chandler Pecos Water System
Customer
Price
Adj
Total
4710 E. Elwood St.
PHOENIX, AZ 85040
(602) 246-1485
Ed Kluber
ekluber@walshgroup.com
Contact
(385) 237-7704
Flat Saw
1
350.00
350.00
Min
Linear Feet:
Depth:
Material:
70'
4"
Asphalt
Mobilization
1
100.00
100.00
Each
Description:
Service truck
450.00
Total
Printed: 08/28/2025 11:04:01 AM
Page 1 of 2
Clarifications:
**Minimum trip to project for one truck is $350.00 plus mobilization or lineal ft/mob charge, whichever is more**
**Stand-by for layout, engineering, access, etc. billed at $175.00 per hour
Excludes:
- Layout with string line by others prior to our arrival
- Additional depth at additional cost
- Water Control
- Traffic Control
- Load/unload saw for multiple locations at additional cost
Exclusions
-All Layout is to be completed by Contractor
-All access to work areas via. ladders, lifts, cranes, shoring etc.to be provided by Contractor when applicable
-All shoring to be provided by and installed by Contractor ( when applicable )
-All Traffic control, barricades, flaggers, message boards, Highway Patrol etc. is to be provided by Contractor
-Any Slurry / water control is to be provided by and disposed of by Contractor
-Double time will apply for work on Sundays and holidays
-A-Core can provide slurry / water control at an additional charge
-Contractor to provide Eco-Pans and dispose of the slurry / water
-Any X-Raying / GPR / Scanning to be provided by Contractor or A-Core can provide for an additional charge
-Any standby time waiting for access, layout, traffic control, engineer's decision, public,
-Transportation operations etc. will be charged the same hourly / unit rate of that task
-Contractor to provide all 811 & add A-Core Inc. as a duplicate permit holder & on a rental agreement that covers it.
-Price is subject to change due to inclement weather.
Special Instructions
- Protection of existing conditions by others
General Terms & Conditions
This document is to be accepted before the expiration date listed above; otherwise, price is subject to change.
- If we hit extra heavy amounts of rebar/steel or anything else unforeseen buried in the concrete that would cause excessive wear or
damage to our diamond bits, blades or equipment, we will charge you accordingly for this.
- A-Core Inc. will not be responsible for repairs from cutting buried utilities or structures.
- Contractor is responsible for all layout of cut lines & holes.
- Price subject to change if conditions and scope on job vary from this quotation.
- If a bond is required there will be a 3% charge of the bond amount.
- A-Core reserves the right to have an escalation clause as part of this estimate.
Job Exclusions
- All layout to be completed by contractor
- All shoring to be installed and provided by contractor (when applicable)
- X-Raying or scanning by contractor or can be provided by A-Core at an additional charge
- All traffic control, barricades, message boards etc. is to be provided by Contractor
- Contractor to provide all Blue staking & add A-Core Inc. as a duplicate permit holder/rental agreement
- Contractor to provide all access via scaffold,lifts, hoists, etc. to work areas when applicable
- A-Core Payments terms are Net 30 with 0% retention, for current account holders.
- Finance charge of 1.5% per month (APR 18%) on invoices unpaid 30 days from billing date. In event of default of payment, buyer agrees
to pay collection costs, lien fees, and reasonable attorney fees. Lien(s) may be filed in accordance with prevailing state lien law on any
unpaid invoice or amount. We do not assume responsibility for layout or damage caused by buried pipe, conduit, voids, and steel beams.
Customer has 30 (thirty) calendar days to dispute any charge. After the 30-day period, all charges are considered valid and must be paid
in full.
Printed: 08/28/2025 11:04:01 AM
Page 2 of 2
Service
Demolition
Joint Saw & Seal
Grinding & Grooving
Accepted By:
**As of January 1, 2025, all payments made by credit card will be assessed a convenience fee of 2.75%.**
Please contact your local branch to discuss alternative payment options that do not include fees.
September 3, 2025
NAICS: 541370, 561990, 541330, 238910, 238310, 238910, 238110
ROC: 347764 & 354905 & 356070 (Page 6)
SBE Certified & TPT License (Page 6) Master COI & License (Page 7)
Archer Western Construction
Ed Kluber
4710 East Elwood Street, Suite 6
Phoenix, AZ 85040
385-237-7704
Re: PROPOSAL
Site Address: City of Chandler Pecos Water System Program, Phase 1 (GMP 2)- 1475 East Pecos Road, Chandler, AZ
85286
Thank you for your interest in Advanced GPR Corporation. Please forward all communication to your assigned
representative. The representative that has been assigned to your project is:
Advanced GPR Corporation
Attn: Kevin Pine
Office: (602) 875 - 0909
Email: kevinpine@advancedgpr.com
SCOPE OF WORK
We understand the scope of this project will be for Asphalt Cutting not to exceed 70' long by 15' wide by 4" thick.
Client will provide any lifts, ladders, or scaffolds for access. Areas should be clear of any obstructions and layout marked
by client prior to technician arrival.
COST TO CONDUCT SCANNING
Asphalt Cutting charged flat $929 including trip fee not to exceed 70' long by 15' wide by 4" thick. If any additional
locations or wait time occurs this will be charged $555 for up to 3 hours, portal-to-portal, and then $185 per hour
thereafter, per technician. This includes all expenses, written report, and time onsite. After 8hrs, overtime hours will be
charged at $277.50 per hour thereafter portal to portal, per technician. Final payment is due within 30 days. Interest will
be charged on any unpaid amounts after 30 days at the annual rate 18%. Confirmation of services, additional services,
etc. either orally, verbal, or written will also bind client to this contract upon receipt.
Advanced GPR Corporation:
Client:
Sign:_________________________
Sign:_________________________________
Date:_________________________
Print:_________________________________
Date:_________________________________
Purchase Order Number: ________________
Job Number: __________________________
Page of
1
7
Advanced GPR 6846 E Vernon Ave Scottsdale AZ 85257
ARIZONA: 602.875.0909
NEW YORK: 646.849.4141 NEW JERSEY: 551.258.4300
Advanced GPR Corporation assumes no liability or obligation, except as expressly provided herein. In no event shall the liability of Advanced GPR Corporation to customer for claims under
warranty or negligence be greater than fees paid by the customer for the actual services provided. The customer hereby agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Advanced GPR
Corporation and its shareholders, directors, officers, employees, agents, successors and assigns from and against any and all liabilities, losses, fines, damages, penalties, costs, or expenses,
including reasonable attorney’s fees, from claims by anyone other than customer that they may sustain, incur or be required to pay arising out of, or in any way related to, services provided to
customer by Advanced GPR Corporation. Any additional insurance above and beyond Advanced GPR's current coverage will be charged above and beyond Advanced GPR's total service fees.
Page of
2
7
Advanced GPR 6846 E Vernon Ave Scottsdale AZ 85257
ARIZONA: 602.875.0909
NEW YORK: 646.849.4141 NEW JERSEY: 551.258.4300
PROJECT SCHEDULE
An Advanced GPR Technician will arrive on site for service call each day
of scheduled services and scan every 4”-6” where coring is specified by
the client. GPR cannot see through metal at all. GPR cannot see through
raised floors, stucco or where roof drainage, conduit, mechanical, etc. that
are attached to the slab face or within 3” from walls, pipe, or impediment.
GPR must be directly on the concrete/asphalt or soil. Diameters of
reinforcement cannot be given. Metal vs PVC can be given when possible.
Data is not kept unless requested in advance and additional charges
would apply. Rebar/wire mesh, conduit, or telephone lines closer together
than 5” on-center or offset mats will not allow for full penetration depth.
Each day of services will be no more than one - 8 hour day or overtime
rates will be charged. We require the areas of investigation to be cleared
of all moveable surface obstructions prior to our arrival. "Typical scenarios"
are: smooth concrete, wide open areas, all demo completed and marked
out prior to technician's arrival, typical slab on grade with no mounds of
soil, equipment, or materials blocking path. If excavator or demo operator
comes in contact with anything not depicted within the report they must
stop and not cut through, demo, or drill through or damage data lines, duct
banks, water lines, gas lines, or conduit. A written report, with camera
pictures of locations marked for trenching, as best as possible, will be
created during each service call and provided with this investigation as
requested by the client.
Equipment and Limitations
Concrete will be scanned to a depth of 12” thick using a a1600MHz. Live
Conduit that can be located within the areas marked by the client will be
marked in red permanent marker directly on the soil/asphalt/concrete. The
antenna to be utilized for this project will be a 400 MHz antenna. The 400
MHz antenna will allow a maximum possible depth penetration of
approximately 9’ within dry soil. Conduit not live and pulling current at the
time of services will not be locatable by GPR. A live conduit locator will be
used to find only live conduit pulling current while the technician is using
that device while on-site over the area being scanned. GPR cannot see
through wire mesh, vapor barriers, rebar spacing less than 12” with the
400 MHz, voids, or metal of any kind. Live Conduit near EMF emitting
sources such as transformers or Communications panels can create a bad
data situation. Telephone lines may or may not be differentiated or
detectable using live conduit locator. Bad data areas will still require
payment. Advanced GPR cannot work in wet conditions or during any rain.
Conduit must be live and pulling alternating current during the time of
services for location; data and fiber optic lines may not be detectable due
to size or shielding. GPR cannot see through air gaps, metal or wood
bottom plate studs, or air gaps. Advanced GPR cannot guarantee the
utility’s orientation will allow for the core path proposed by the client and
may take additional time to reroute around existing reinforcement if
necessary. Time Spent due to lifts, required training, meetings, etc will be
charged at the same daily rate as indicated in the Cost to Conduct
Scanning within this proposal. Any locations that will not work for your
intended purposes will be explained to the on-site contact and additional
locations scanned at daily cost. Moved locations, if that is required due to reinforcement layout, is charged per hour in excess
Page of
3
7
Advanced GPR 6846 E Vernon Ave Scottsdale AZ 85257
ARIZONA: 602.875.0909
NEW YORK: 646.849.4141 NEW JERSEY: 551.258.4300
GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
1 SERVICES
1. Advanced GPR Corporation (“AGPR”) will perform services for Client. “Services” means non-destructive testing services, utilizing ground
penetrating radar to assess subsurface conditions to form and provide an opinion as to the suitability of drilling, cutting, coring, or otherwise
disturbing a specific area. "Client" refers to the person or business entity ordering the services.
2. The term AGPR services may be further defined in addendum to this Agreement or the Proposal or Statement of Work (“SOW”) more
specifically detailing services on a project basis. Upon receipt of written approval of Client in the form of email or other written modes of
communication, AGPR may provide additional services that are not included in this SOW.
2. PAYMENT TERMS
2.1.Price. Client will pay AGPR in accordance with the price terms for the AGPR services listed on an addendum to this Agreement Proposal,
SOW or invoice. If additional services are requested outside the proposal, scope of the addendum or SOW, AGPR standard rate will apply,
unless the parties agree otherwise in writing.
2.2.Taxes. Client is responsible for the payment of all applicable sales, use and/or other similar taxes (except for taxes based on AGPR’s
income or personnel costs) which may be levied or assessed in connection with this Agreement.
2.3. Payment. Client will pay AGPR within 30 days of the date of each invoice submitted for all AGPR services. AGPR’s acceptance of payment
of any amount less than the full amount due will not be a waiver of the remaining amount due. AGPR may apply any overpayment on any
invoice or proposal to any other amount due from Client. Past due obligations will bear interest at the rate of 18% per annum, or the
maximum rate allowed by law, whichever is less. Any interest charged or received greater than the maximum amount allowed by law will be
applied to the principal obligations, or if none is owed, will be refunded to Client. If any Client payment becomes past due, AGPR will have
the right to retain possession of any Client property in AGPR’s possession, and any Images produced by AGPR, and AGPR may suspend
performance on any work in process. Client will pay AGPR all attorneys’ fees, collection agency charges, court costs and all other expenses
incurred by AGPR in connection with any Client defaults on its obligations to AGPR.
2.4.Disputed Amounts. Client may dispute any amounts invoiced provided that the dispute is made in good faith. Any amounts disputed may be
deducted from the invoice; however, a disputed amount does not relieve the Client from payment obligations for the remainder of the
invoice. The remainder amount of any invoice containing a disputed amount must be paid within 30 days of the date of the invoice. The
disputed amount and the reasons for disputing the amount must be submitted to AGPR in writing within 15 days of receipt of the invoice.
AGPR will work together with Client in good faith to resolve such disputes in a mutually acceptable manner. Client agrees to pay any
disputed amounts within 5 business days once the dispute has been resolved.
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.Commencement of Work. AGPR will begin scheduling of Client work upon receipt of a signed Proposal, SOW or email approval from the
Client.
3.2.The services set forth in AGPR’s Proposal or SOW will be accomplished in a timely, workmanlike, and professional manner by an AGPR
technician at the price quoted. If AGPR is required to delay commencement of the work or if, upon embarking upon its work, AGPR is
required to stop or interrupt the progress of its work as a result of changes in the scope of the work requested by Client, to fulfill the
requirements of third parties, interruptions in the progress of construction, or other causes beyond the direct reasonable control of AGPR,
additional charges will be applicable and payable by Client.
3.3.Access to Site. Client will arrange and provide such access to the site as is necessary for AGPR to perform the work. AGPR shall take
reasonable measures and precautions to minimize damage to the site and any improvements located thereon as the result of its work or the
use of its equipment. AGPR has not included in its fee the cost of restoration of damage that may occur during the ordinary course of work.
3.4.Sample Disposal. Unless otherwise agreed in writing digital scans will be deleted from the hard drive of the equipment before leaving the
site, concrete core samples will be disposed of after being tested.
3.5.Limited Responsibility. AGPR's work shall not include determining, supervising or implementing the means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures of construction. AGPR shall not be responsible for evaluating, reporting, or affecting job conditions concerning
health, safety or welfare. AGPR's services or failure to perform shall not excuse any contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or other party from
performance of its own contractual obligations.Advanced GPR does not take liability for severed conduit. Coring operator must have at
minimum 1 year experience and be competent to know when conduit has been detected by coring or drilling equipment.
3.6.Cancelation. Scheduled services may be cancelled by either party upon seven (7) day’s prior written notice. In the event Client cancels
scheduled work, Client shall pay a charge for the reimbursement of any expenses incurred by AGPR before or after the dates of services,
including but not limited to, airline tickets, rental car agreements, hotel reservations, or equipment shipping charges. Client shall be charged
for costs incurred, including but not limited to, reimbursable expenses and administrative costs associated with the cancellation, which are
reasonably necessary to place AGPR's files in order and/or protect its professional reputation. In the event of work
3.7.cancellation, AGPR shall be compensated by Client for all services rendered up to and including the cancellation date. Cancellations made
within 24 hours of the date of services will also incur an additional half-day charge of the quoted daily rate as noted in the SOW, proposal,
email, or other written agreement. Cancellations not rescheduled within 90 days shall be deemed a Termination.
3.8.Personnel. The work that AGPR performs is highly technical in nature and requires significant time, resources and cost to hire, train, and
provide continuous education to its employees. Client shall make no offers of employment to any of AGPR’s staff for any reason without the
express written consent of one of AGPR’s owners or managers.
Page of
4
7
Advanced GPR 6846 E Vernon Ave Scottsdale AZ 85257
ARIZONA: 602.875.0909
NEW YORK: 646.849.4141 NEW JERSEY: 551.258.4300
3.9.Ground Penetrating Radar Service. AGPR's services will be performed, its findings obtained and any agreed upon reports prepared in
accordance with the Proposal or SOW. In performing its services, AGPR will use the appropriate standard of care, including the skill and
judgment that is reasonably expected by similarly situated technical professionals. Differentiations of embedded materials made on site or
on AGPR reports are opinions based upon technical judgment and experience and are not to be construed as representations of fact. It is
the Client’s responsibility to use the data provided by AGPR to determine whether the drilling, cutting, or coring through any embedded
material within concrete is safe and appropriate. AGPR only recommends drilling, cutting, or coring through areas completely clear of any
embedded materials when dealing with a Post Tensioned Cable and/or embedded conduit slab. Drilling, Cutting, and Coring through Post
Tensioned Cable is extremely dangerous, possibly fatal, and can damage the facade or structure of the building, additionally, a severed
cable may be propelled out of the concrete slab and travel airborne up to ¼ mile away causing injury and/or death to surrounding persons
or damage to surrounding structures and personal property. In the event that during drilling, cutting, or coring Client or third party comes in
contact with an unmarked embedded member, within an area previously scanned by an AGPR technician, that individual shall immediately
stop all actions to avoid cutting though that embedded material. AGPR is not liable for severed embedded materials or any subsequent
resulting damages. Client agrees that the individual drilling, cutting, coring, or digging shall be a competent person in their field, having a
minimum of 3 years of experience, and trained to recognize when an embedded material is struck or encountered and contact AGPR to
investigate immediately.
4. CONFIDENTIALITY
4.1.Confidential Information. "Confidential Information" shall mean any non-public information of the other Party that is designated as
confidential, or that the receiving Party knew or reasonably should have known was confidential because it derives independent value
from not being generally known to the public. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the terms and conditions of this Agreement
shall be considered Client and AGPR Confidential Information. Confidential Information shall not include any information which: (a) a Party
can demonstrate was rightfully in its possession prior to the date of disclosure to it by the other Party; (b) at the time of disclosure or later,
is published or becomes part of the public domain through no act or failure to act on the part of a Party; (c) a Party has developed
independently without reference to any Confidential Information of the other Party; or (d) a Party can demonstrate came into its
possession from a third party who had a bona fide right to make such information available.
4.2.The Party receiving Confidential Information will not at any time disclose to any person or use for its own benefit or the benefit of anyone,
Confidential Information of the other Party without the prior written consent of said Party. Each Party shall limit disclosure of Confidential
Information to its employees or agents who have a need to know related to the Parties' business relationship.
4.3.Upon termination of a services or this Agreement, the recipient of Confidential Information shall promptly deliver to the other Party or
destroy any and all such information in its possession or under its control, and any copies made thereof which the recipient of said
information may have made, except as the Parties by prior express written permission have agreed to retain.
4.4.Neither Party shall be liable for disclosure of Confidential Information if made in response to a valid order of a court or authorized agency
of government; provided that, if available, five (5) days' notice first be given to the other Party so a protective order, if appropriate, may be
sought by such Party. The Parties acknowledge and agree that a breach of its obligations under this Section may cause harm to the other
Party for which monetary damages are not a sufficient remedy. In such event the Parties understand and agree that the non-defaulting
Party shall be entitled to seek to obtain from a court of appropriate jurisdiction immediate injunctive or other equitable relief to which it may
be entitled under the circumstances in addition to other remedies allowed under this Agreement and under applicable law.
5. REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES & COVENANTS.
5.1. Compliance with Laws. AGPR warrants that the services will not violate, and AGPR will obtain all permits required to comply with, any
applicable law, rule, regulation, ordinance, order, direction and regulation (as they may be amended from time to time) of the applicable
government agencies having jurisdiction over the provision and use of the services.
5.2.Mutual Obligations. Each party represents, warrants, and covenants that: (a) it has the requisite power and authority to execute, deliver
and perform its obligations under this Agreement; (b) it is in compliance with all applicable laws related to such performance, including it
having obtained all necessary permits and licenses; and (c) it is authorized to perform requested services.
5.3.Loss or Damage. Client assumes all risk or loss or damage related to Client’s documents or other materials provided to AGPR, except as
provided in this Agreement. AGPR will use reasonable care when any documents or other materials are provided to AGPR by Client or at
the request or direction of Client; during the time such documents and materials are in AGPR’ offices.
5.4.Client Indemnity. Client will indemnify AGPR against all claims for damages made by any third party arising out of Client’s construction
activity, and/or related to AGPR providing services to Client or to any other party at Client’s request, and Client will defend AGPR against
all such claims (using counsel approved by AGPR, which approval may be made in AGPR’s sole discretion) and Client will indemnify
AGPR for its attorney’s fees and other expenses related to any such claim, even if such loss or damage, or any portion thereof, is caused
by AGPR’s negligence.
5.5.Limited Warranty. AGPR shall perform the services in good faith and in a timely and professional manner. AGPR shall exercise the same
level of professional care that is reasonably expected by similarly situated technical professionals. THE FOREGOING LIMITED
WARRANTY IS AGPR’S SOLE WARRANTY FOR ANY SERVICES AND/OR PRODUCTS PROVIDED HEREUNDER OR ARISING OUT
OF THIS AGREEMENT, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ALL SUCH WARRANTIES BEING HEREBY FULLY
DISCLAIMED.
Page of
5
7
Advanced GPR 6846 E Vernon Ave Scottsdale AZ 85257
ARIZONA: 602.875.0909
NEW YORK: 646.849.4141 NEW JERSEY: 551.258.4300
5.6.Limitation of Liability. Regardless of any other provision, AGPR liability for damages to Client for any cause whatsoever, and
regardless of the form of action, whether in contract, tort or other theory of liability, including negligence, will be limited to the
aggregate sum of payments made to AGPR by Client for the AGPR services directly related to any claim. AGPR will never be liable
for any damage caused wholly or partially by Client’s drilling, cutting, coring or other construction activity. Furthermore, AGPR will
never be liable to Client or any other person for any indirect, special or consequential damages, including without limitation, lost
profits, business revenue or goodwill, however caused and whether arising under contract, tort or other theory of liability. The
foregoing limitations shall apply notwithstanding the failure of the essential purpose of any limited remedy.
6. TERMINATION
6.1 Either party may elect to terminate this Agreement by providing written notice to the other party. This Agreement’s Termination
Date is defined as the date that notice of termination is received by the non-terminating party. Should Client elect to terminate this
Agreement, Client will still be charged and responsible for all services performed by AGPR prior to the date of termination, in addition
to, any cancellation charges, plus a termination charge which shall be equal to 10% (ten percent) of the contract price. The
termination charge is a contractual option available to Client, it is not a liquidated damages formula. No liquidated damages are
contemplated herein.
7.0 COMMUNICATIONS
7.1Notices. Notices of default shall be sent by e-mail and overnight mail to the parties contacts provided below. All certificates,
reports, records, subordinate agreements (and their applicable amendments), notices, requests, demands and other communications
under this Agreement shall be in writing and sent by e-mail and shall be deemed to have been duly given: (a) on the date of service if
served personally on the party hereto to whom notice is to be given; (b) on the date of confirmed transmission if sent via facsimile to
the number given below, and telephonic confirmation of transmission is obtained promptly after completion of transmission, and
followed by mail delivery; (c) on the day after delivery to commercial or postal overnight carrier service; or (d) on the fifth day after
mailing, if mailed to the party to whom such notice is to be given, by first class mail, registered or certified, postage prepaid and
properly addressed, to the party as follows:
Page of
6
7
Advanced GPR 6846 E Vernon Ave Scottsdale AZ 85257
ARIZONA: 602.875.0909
NEW YORK: 646.849.4141 NEW JERSEY: 551.258.4300
Page of
7
7
Advanced GPR 6846 E Vernon Ave Scottsdale AZ 85257
ARIZONA: 602.875.0909
NEW YORK: 646.849.4141 NEW JERSEY: 551.258.4300
ACORD
®
CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE
I
DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)
2
06/01/2024
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS
CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES
BELOW.
THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.
IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to
the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the
certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
PRODUCER
CONTACT
Jodie R. Kramer Cole
NAME:
Nexus Partners Insurance
wg
N
:o Extl: 480 376 0894
I FAX
IA/C Nol:
1475 South Price Road
flJss: jodie.cole@nexuspartnersinsurance.com
Chandler AZ 85286
INSURERISl AFFORDING COVERAGE
NAIC#
INSURER A: Sentinel Insurance Compnay Ltd
INSURED
INSURER B: Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company
Advaned G.P.R. Corporation
INSURER C: Hartford Fire Insurance Company
6846 E Vernon Ave
INSURER D :
Scottsdale AZ 85257
INSURER E:
INSURER F:
COVERAGES
CERTIFICATE NUMBER:
REVISION NUMBER:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR
ADDL SUBR
,:gM& , g
J&
LTR
TYPE OF INSURANCE
,.,c:D wvn
POLICY NUMBER
LIMITS
GENERAL LIABILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE
$
1,000,000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
DAMAGE TO RENTED
1,000,000
PREMISES /Ea occurrence)
$
3 D CLAIMS-MADE [X] OCCUR
MED EXP (Any one person)
$
10,000
A
y
y
59 SBA BH4012
06/01/2024 06/01/2025
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY
$
1,000,000
3
GENERAL AGGREGATE
$
2,000,000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:
PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG
$
2,000,000
n POLICY rxi P,f P,:
nLOC
$
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
fEtflNGLE LIMIT
3
$
1,000,000
ANY AUTO
BODILY INJURY (Per person)
$
X ALL OWNED
4 SCHEDULED
B
AUTOS
AUTOS
y
y
59 UEC 886025
06/01/2024 06/01/2025
BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $
K
X
NON-OWNED
PROPERTY DAMAGE
$
HIRED AUTOS
AUTOS
/Per accident)
$
K
UMBRELLA LIAB
OCCUR
EACH OCCURRENCE
$
5,000,000
A
EXCESS LIAB
CLAIMS-MADE y
y
59 SBA BH4012
06/01/2024 06/01/2025
AGGREGATE
$
5,000,000
OED I
I
RETENTION $
$
WORKERS COMPENSATION
X I WC STATU- I
I OTH-
AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
TORY• IMITS
ER
Y/ N
1,000,000
C
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE □
y
59 WEC AL9DBC
06/01/2024 06/01/2025
E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
$
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED?
N/ A
(Mandatory in NH)
E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $
1,000,000
If yes, describe under
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below
E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT
$
1,000,000
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/ LOCATIONS/ VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, If more space Is required)
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE
THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,
NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED
IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
I
Cp K-
ACORD 25 (2010/05)
© 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD
Advanced G.P.R Corporation
6846 E Vernon Ave
Scottsdale, AZ 85257
Sent proposal: $469
Submitted Aug 22, 2025 at 1:11 PM MST
Copper Valley Contractors LLC
510 S Lewis, Mesa, AZ 85210, United States of America
Colin O'Brien | +1 602-568-3084 | colin@coppervalleycontractors.com
Line Items
Description
Quantity
Unit Cost
Total Cost
Asphalt - Saw Cutting @ 4" Thick
70
× $1.20 /linear foot
$84
Mobilization
1
× $385 /each
$385
Base Bid
$469
Scope-Specific Clarifications
Work will begin on the early release package late 2025/early 2026.
This project is not federally funded so no Davis Bacon Wages.
Bid Proposal: Asphalt - Saw Cutting
Printed on Aug 25, 2025 at 9:13 AM MST
City of Chandler Pecos Water System Program, Phase 1 (GMP 2)
1475 East Pecos Road, Chandler, AZ 85286, United States of America
Page 1 of 1
powered by
QUANTITY
Units
DESCRIPTION
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
CUSTOMER
70
LF
4" Asphalt Saw Cutting - Includes (1) Mobilization
Min Charge
$450.00
Archer Western
Paving Includes Preparation Work (Such as moving trench
plates), Tack Oil and Crack Seal.
ESTIMATE NO
Excludes Any Grading, Demo, Concrete, Night & Weekend
Work, Micro Seal/ Slurry Seal, Special Hot Mix Asphalt,
Manhole or Valve Adjustments, Striping and Traffic Control
Unless Specifically Called Out in Above Scope Of Work
25K-0042
Any additional mobilization for reasons out of SWB Paving
control will be charged at the quote rates
DATE
SUBTOTAL
$450.00
8/28/2025
UNIT PRICES ABOVE EXCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:
TAX RATE
PROJECT
SALES TAX
Chandler pecos Water System
Program
OTHER
PROJECT LOCATION
TOTAL
$450.00
1475 E. Pecos Rd, Chandler AZ
PREPARED BY:
Karl Thorpe
Date
Sign Below to Accept Quote:
Authorized Rep
Davis-Bacon Wages, Survey, Quality Control, SWPP, Dust Control, Traffic
Control, Bonds, Sales Tax, Testing and Permits.
Our bid is based on the following conditions;
Construction water supplied by others within 500' of job site.
Quantities are estimates only. Final billing will reflect actual field quantities used.
SWB Paving is not responsible for any issues with the grade, including but not limited
to drainage issues, handicap issues, ponding of water. Paving will follow the grade.
If a passing compaction test is not available before paving then SWB Paving will not
warranty the asphalt paving work.
Fuel Surcharges and Standby may apply.
Important Note: Paving minimum charge is $1,850 ; Saw Cutting minimum charge is
Office - 602-788-2222
Estimating - Ext. 217 Karl@swbarricades.com
22425 N. 16th St. Suite 1
Phoenix, AZ 85024
PROPOSAL ROC 325429
Phone 602-228-3027
REBAR QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
REBAR
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
01
33.43.101
#6 REBAR IN 20' LENGTHS
205
EA
18.03
$
3,696.15
$
#5 U BAR-4.5'X4.5'
316
EA
13.15
$
4,155.40
$
#5 REBAR-20' LENGTHS
70
EA
12.52
$
876.40
$
#5 U BAR-2'X2'
240
EA
5.71
$
1,370.40
$
01
33.43.201
#5 REBAR-20' LENGTHS
175
EA
12.52
$
2,191.00
$
#5 U BAR-2'X2'
620
EA
5.71
$
3,540.20
$
FREIGHT
1
LS
400.00
$
400.00
$
FURNISH & INSTALL REBAR FOR PIPE ENCASEMENT
496
LF
73.27
$
36,341.92
$
AWC INSTALLATION
1
LS
25,000.00
$
25,000.00
$
41,229.55
$
36,341.92
$
0.00%
-
$
0.00%
-
$
0.24%
98.95
$
0.24%
87.22
$
41,328.50
$
36,429.14
$
INCLUDED BELOW
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
INCLUDED ABOVE
INCLUDED BELOW
INCLUDED BELOW
INCLUDED BELOW
INCLUDED BELOW
INCLUDED BELOW
INCLUDED BELOW
INCLUDED ABOVE
TYLER REINFORCING
NUCOR REBAR & FABRICATION
BID QUANTITIES
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
Nucor Rebar Fabrication Southwest Inc
Quote No:
2101 W. Jackson St
Date:
Phoenix, AZ 85005
Quoted by:
Ph (602) 254-0091
Fax (602) 340-0977
Retail No:
Lic No. AZ ROC092145 L62
To:
Project:
Address:
Ref. No.:
City, St:
Address:
Attn:
City, St:
Ph:
Fax:
UOM
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
Notes:
Subtotal=
Misc=
Freight=
TERMS:
Subtotal=
1. Payment Terms……
Sales Tax
@
8.60% =
2. Cost of Sales or Use Taxes excluded. (Unless noted otherwise)
Total=
3.
10 day notice required for fabrication and delivery.
4. All Loads assumed to be verified by Buyer, no shortages will be accepted after 24 hours from delivery.
5. Buyer to provide hoisting for unloading of material if required by Seller.
6. Prices based on
1
truck load(s) of material to jobsite. Additional loads will be at
per load.
7. Quote valid for 10 days from dated listed above.
8. Indeminfication will be per AIA Document A401, 1987 Edition, Section 4.6
Deliver to:
Customer Approval:
CUSTOMER
Approved at above price.
Please fill out
Mill Certs Required
and fax back
By:
to number
Ship Date:
Title:
above.
Contact Name:
Date:
Phone No:
PO #:
ekluber@walshgroup.com
430 #5 U Bars W/Hooks @ Top- 3 Sides-2'9x2'9
Qnty
1.00
4
LMRET-079
9/3/2025
LJM
$3,066.60
1475 E. Pecos Rd
Total
$3,694.80
Chandler, AZ 85286
Archer Western
Ed Kluber
Chandler Pecos Water Sys. P1
385 237 7704
$17,619.11
$16,223.86
$15,823.86
$400.00
$1,395.25
$16,223.86
Sales Tax Value
Current Lead Time- 7 Days For Detailing: 10 Days For Fabrication
5
3
316 #5 U Bars- 6'x6'x6' Encasement
1.00
1.00
1.00
$4,153.10
2
Item #
1
Unit Price
$3,694.80
Description
205 #6- 20'0" Bars
245 #5- 20'0" Bars
1.00
$3,066.60
$4,153.10
$3,328.80
$3,328.80
$1,580.56
$1,580.56
430 #5 Cap Bars W/Hooks For- 1 Side
$400.00
Material Fabricated, Shipped To Jobsite FOB.
Price Based Off Of Quantities Provide From Bid List.
Net 30
**PLEASE INDICATE BELOW IF MILL CERTS ARE REQUIRED**
9/3/2025 @ 12:13 PM
These are for the 2' U Bars
as an alternate method and
uses 1/2 the qty
No installation
"We Reinforce Confidence"
PO Box 6520
Phoenix, AZ 85005
(888) 70-REBAR
Lic No: AZ ROC #296786
Bid Proposal
Proposal No:
250817
Proposal Date:
09/03/2025
This proposal is valid for
10 days from date shown above.
SECTION I - GENERAL INFORMATION
Proposal to: Archer-Western Construction
Project Name: Chandler Pecos Water System Ph1
Attn: Ed Kluber
Ref. No.:
4710 E. Elwood, Ste 6
Phoenix, Arizona 85040
1476 E Pecos Rd
Tempe, AZ 85288
Drwgs Quoted: S43-01 August 2025
Specs: Provided
Addendums: None
SECTION II - SCOPE OF WORK
> Concrete Deformed Reinforcing Steel Detailed, Furnished & Installed per ACI & CRSI Standards.
SECTION III - PRICES
Bid Item Description
Quantity
Unit
Unit Price
Extended
1
496
LF
$73.27
$36,341.92
Pipe Encasement
SUPPLY & INSTALL
Grand Total=
$36,341.92
Notes:
1.
2.
Taxes are Excluded from prices shown.
Prices shown are for the complete project and no single bid item price or
group of bid item prices are valid alone without the consent of the Seller.
SECTION IV - SPECIAL CONDITIONS, EXCLUSIONS AND/OR CLARIFICATION FOR THIS PROJECT
1
Prices are based on a StartDate of not later than 10/01/25 and shall remain valid through 12/31/25. Any material shipped AND/OR installed after that date will
be subject to and increase of $40.00/ton every 2 months.
2
Prices based on 1 truck load(s) of material to jobsite. Additional load(s) will be at $450.00 per load. Truck Loads are based on 38,000 lbs per Load. Reduction
in weight on loads will be an Extra to Contract.
3
Proposal based on Prevailing Wages: No
4
Above prices based on NO RETENTION for contracts of $50,000 or less.
5
6
7
8
SECTION V - CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AT NO COST TO SELLER
1. All lines, grades, racks, forms, layout and rigid templates accurately in place before installation, except those forms or other materials that will hinder the installation.
2. Firm, level, subgrade at elevation shown on drawings including all levels, datum lines, elevations, openings and dowel outs for concrete &/or masonry.
3. Clear access roads & ramps for unloading of trailer/truck deliveries to within 50 feet of point of installation, and reasonable storage and lay-down areas.
4. Cages for drilled piers, shafts, caissons, and light pole standards will be tied and stockpiled by Subcontractor.
© 2025 Tyler Reinforcing LLC UNAUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION PROHIBITED
Sep 02, 2025 13:05
1 of 4
Includes supply and
installation.
5. Suitable equipment fully operated for hoisting/lowering reinforcing steel, personnel, wire mesh, etc, including unloading trucks, staging of reinforcing to points of
installation (into foundations, and onto elevated decks, etc) setting columns, wall cages and/or any other pre-tied assemblies including power placing of individual
bars as required.
6. Copies of all contract documents in quantities as reasonably requested.
7. Parking area and/or cost of parking for field crews and provide area for jobsite office including utility hookup.
8. Furnish design information, location of pour joints and construction schedules in sufficient time to allow for the preparation and approval of detail drawings plus a
minimum of seven (7) working days for fabrication and delivery. 48 hours notice is required for cancellation of previously scheduled deliveries and two (2) weeks
notice of job requirements.
9. This proposal is based on pouring the walls and top slabs in all reinforced concrete box culverts monolithically.
10. 24 hour notice for workman at jobsite and placement to be done on normal 8 hour shift excluding weekends and holidays.
SECTION VI - STANDARD EXCLUSIONS BY SELLER & FURNISHED BY BUYER
1. Cost of Inspections, crane inspections, testing, bonds, permits, penalties or Liquidated Damages.
2. Inserts, sleeves, rubatex, water stops, smooth dowels and /or dowel baskets, galvanized or epoxy coated dowels, threaded rebar, stud rails and placing of stud rails.
3. Cleaning, cutting, straightening, locating or rework of existing reinforcing steel, reinforcing extending from piles, or precast
4. Cutting, drilling of holes, grouting, field bending or dry-packing of reinforcing steel.
5. Burning, cutting, or drilling of structural steel/miscellaneous iron to pass reinforcing steel.
6. Protection and/or cleaning of others work, covering, painting, greasing or wrapping of reinforcing steel or smooth dowels.
7. Rebar Safety Caps or devices for covering rebar ends.
8. All welding and rebar welded to structural/miscellaneous iron.
9. Blocking, chairing, wrapping and/or pulling of welded wire fabric.
10. All dead men, cables, labor and engineering of system for guying of rebar, if required.
11. Cleaning of tie wire clippings, tags and other spoils from work areas, cost of dumpster and composite crew cleanup, except as mutually agreed.
12. Lines, grades, steel racks, templates, scaffolding, safety rails, work platforms & ramps, sanitary facilities and jobsite access to drinking water.
13. Removal, grinding &/or patching of staples, nails, bolts and/or any other device used for the placement of concrete reinforcing accessories.
14. Reinforcing for Anchor Points (and the Anchor Points) for Shotcrete, Precast, Closure Pours, Precast Connections and Prestressing Items.
15. Sand Plated Chairs.
16. Test bars and test couplers. (except those specifically called out in specs)
17. Adequate power and lighting when necessary.
18. Cost of reworking or replacing reinforcing steel damaged or lost due to flood, actions of buyer, other subcontractors or other acts of God.
19. Blocks, inspection tubes, wheels or spacers for clearances in drilled shafts or caissons.
20. Tie wire, accessories and field placing aids for F.O.B. materials.
21. Prevailing Wage Rates or Job Specific Labor Agreement Rates. Proposal based on Open Shop wages.
22. Design Engineering, Engineer stamping of drawings, Field Measurements and As-Built drawings.
23. Sitework, Masonry Rebar, Mock Ups, MSE Walls, Electrical Duct Bank, Equipment Pads, Pipe Encasement &/or Supports. (Unless specifically stated as included)
24. Supply & Installation of reinforcing for stair landings and treads.
25. Layout of TOW, TOF, EOW, expansion/construction joints, corners, doorways, blockouts and/or openings of any kind and Masonry Dowels.
26. Separate Pour Watchman, Fire Watchman, Safety Manager, QC Mgr, Traffic Control or Onsite Security.
27. Trim reinforcing for openings, penetrations, and inserts not specifically located on Structural Drawings.
28. Double handling costs, including costs to transport material from an unreasonably located area.
29. Unloading, handling &/or setting of FOB materials. (including Prebuilt Drilled Shaft Cages)
30. Dust control, Storm Water management and/or similar enviromental programs.
31. Third party invoicing processing fees or enrollment in third party invoicing services.
32. Re-Detailing of shop drawings & reviewing/processing of changes will be at $110.00/Hr.
33. Building Information Modeling (BIM), 3D Modeling and similar, unless specifically stated otherwise. (TRLLC retains ownership of any 3D model it creates)
34. Non-standard work week and/or special work hours. (This bid proposal based on M-F, 8hrs/workday, daylight hours, unless specifically stated otherwise.)
35. LEED (or similar) certifcation.
SECTION VII - TERMS AND CONDITIONS
© 2025 Tyler Reinforcing LLC UNAUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION PROHIBITED
Sep 02, 2025 13:05
2 of 4
1. Terms of Sale:
Payment Terms - Subject to on-going credit approval: Net 30 days from date of invoice. Interest will be charged on all past due balances per
the maximum rate allowed by law. Legal fees and costs will be paid as awarded to the prevailing party in the event of a legal dispute. Seller reserves the right to
stop Work or demand security as required. Buyer agrees to pay Seller in accordance with the escalation policy as specifically identified in this proposal. "Work"
is hereby defined as the performance of all work as listed above and included in any accepted Agreement, plus any changes, acceleration/out of sequence work,
damages, escalation and costs incurred for the cause or benefit of Buyer or others.
2. Acceptance: Prices of individual bid items are subject to renegotiation if Buyer elects not to accept this complete proposal as presented. If Seller is requested to
proceed with the work prior to the execution of a mutually agreed Contract, or if the work is completed prior thereto, the Terms and Conditions herein shall govern
pending said Agreement. No assignment of this proposal shall be made without our prior written consent. We reserve the right to sublet portions of our Work.
3. Schedule:
Seller's price is based upon detailing, fabrication, and placing on a normal 5-day, Monday to Friday, 40 hour work week, daylight hours unless
explicitly noted on the face hereof. Performance will be based on bid documents as provided for tender and industry standards/CRSI. Schedule and schedule
changes to be mutually agreed. Buyer to provide Seller (48) hours' notice of cancellation or modifications to schedule deliveries, Buyer agrees to provide
adequate notice for workmen required at the jobsite and sufficient work for at least one full shift. Detailing submittals will be sequenced in a manner appropriate to
the construction schedule. Working schedules to be made by mutual agreement of the Contractor and Subcontractor to conform to Contractor's master schedule.
In event duration times are provided by Subcontractor, it is agreed that time starts only when work areas are provided ready to receive installation in all respects,
in accordance with OSHA and State safety regulations.
4. Back Charges/Shipping Discrepancies: No charges for labor or materials furnished by the Buyer shall be allowed as a credit unless authorized in writing by
Seller within five (5) days of said occurrence. After a twenty four (24) hour period, all loads will be assumed to be verified.
5. Safety:
Buyer will provide at no cost to Seller, general jobsite conditions conforming to OSHA standards and local governing authorities, including, but not
limited to, adequate protection to ensure the safety of those working above reinforced steel as required, furnishing and installation of rebar safety caps or other
OSHA compliant impalement hazard protection as required; Detection of/protection from underground and other utilities; Safe access, signage and other required
warnings, flagging, barriers/barricades, general site and task lighting as required; Shoring, fall-protection anchorage points, walkways, approved scaffolding and
staging in place as required, trenches, rails, snow and ice removal, all weather truck access; safe access to points of storage and work, etc. all as required.
6. Insurance:
General Liability insurance will be provided solely for work performed by Seller and/or its engaged parties. Seller is not providing insurance for any
liabilities that exceed Sellers responsibilities and/or liabilities. Additional Insured Endorsements may limit liabilities to those assumed under the Agreement and
exclude Professional Liabilities. XCU, subsidence, Professional Liability, Aircraft, Pollution Liability and mold coverage are excluded as not applicable to this
trade. Additional coverage or alternate requirements not set forth herein and mutually agreed are subject to availability and any additional costs. Seller excludes
Builders Risk Insurance and return receipt requested notices for all certificates of insurance. Compliance requirements for any hired sub-subcontractors are subject
to availability. This bid proposal is based on Seller providing General Liability insurance of $5,000,000.00. Any additional coverage may result in additional costs.
SECTION VIII - CONDITIONS OF SALE EXCLUDED:
1. Pay if paid or "Pay when paid" conditions precedent for all properly completed work, including base scope of work, changes, acceleration/out of sequence work,
damages, escalation and costs incurred for the cause or benefit of Buyer or others("Work"); Retention exceeding the rate withheld by Owner; Retention on F.O.B.
items.
2. Indemnification, claim, and defense liabilities, responsibilities or damages exceeding any proportionate extent of cause by Seller's active negligence or willful misconduct.
3. Minority, DBE, DVBE, SBE, WBE and other special hiring status content, affiliation, or contribution to such requirements.
4. Risk, liabilities and responsibilities arising from existing conditions and preceding work exceeding visual inspection, including, but not limited to, field
measurements, surveying, layout, forming and materials supplied by others; Costs arising from differing conditions and/or requirements from plans or drawings or
bar lists provided for performance.
5. Design engineering and related Professional Liabilities and responsibilities; Costs and damages due to varying conditions and requirements.
6. Waiving any rights of dispute or redress; Costs/risks of claims against Owner for undisputed portions of our Work.
7. Forms and information requirements not mutually agreed; Unconditional forms of release in advance of receipt of funds; Releases that fail to exclude pending
changes, unpaid balances, and retention as applicable; Releases for claims unrelated to payment for work performed; Non-conforming forms of waivers and
releases within States that provide Statutory release language.
8. Reports, waivers, and other forms and contractual obligations related to bulk suppliers to our inventory stock who do not have lien rights.
9. Warranties exceeding Seller's scope of responsibilities or one (1) year; Guaranties of work performed by others; any forms of warranties, express or implied, of
merchantability or fitness for purposes intended.
© 2025 Tyler Reinforcing LLC UNAUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION PROHIBITED
Sep 02, 2025 13:05
3 of 4
10. Risks and responsibilities for equipment and/or employees of Buyer or others providing services, or manning equipment used in connection with, but not within,
Seller's scope of Work.
11. Liquidated and delay damages exceeding actual damages incurred, our scope of responsibility and/or our proportionate extent of cause, and for Force Majeure;
Property damage, remedial work and/or replacement of Work and the work of others to the extent made necessary by others or Force Majeure.
12. Increased labor and material costs and/or damage in the event of project suspension or delay.
13. General Liability credits for any wrap-up insurance programs.
14. Prime contract terms, conditions, and scope in addition to, and/or in conflict with, a mutually agreed contract and Seller's scope of work and responsibilities as
described herein.
15. Reports, submittals and data requirements not applicable to our trade, reasonably required or mutually agreed; Release of proprietary or other confidential information.
16. Any portion of fines or penalties exceeding the extent of cause by Seller; Any increased, surcharged or escalated portion of fines incurred by Buyer.
17. Enrollment/contributions to unions to which Subcontractor is not signatory; compliance with any additional or conflicting term, condition, or rate of pay, etc.
between Seller's labor agreement and others affiliated with the Project.
18. Guarantors.
19. Site security.
SECTION IX - ACCEPTANCE
The above proposal including all attached and referenced documents shall constitute a contract or shall be part of a contract is subject to on-going credit approval.
Prices shown are for the complete project and NO single item price or group of prices are valid alone without the consent of the Seller. We reserve the right to
modify/negotiate amendments to any Contractor issued forms of Agreement, as required to properly describe scope of work, pricing and mutually agreed terms and conditions.
Buyer:
By:
Title:
Date:
Seller:
By:
Title:
Date:
Scott Pasternak
Scott Pasternak
Tyler Reinforcing LLC
Heavy Sales Manager
09/02/2025
© 2025 Tyler Reinforcing LLC UNAUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION PROHIBITED
Sep 02, 2025 13:05
4 of 4
ELECTRICAL I&C QUOTES
Felix Construction Company
License #
L11 - 172036
Project
City of Chandler - Pecos Water System Improvements - GMP-2
Date
8/27/2025
By
By
Felix E/I&C
Others
1
NOTE 1: This bid is based on City of Chandler - Pecos Water System
Upgrades - Long Lead GMP Bid Package, Construction Plans and
Specifications.
NOTE
NOTE
2
CIVIL (100) -
N/A
N/A
3
CONDUIT (200) -
N/A
N/A
4
CABLE & WIRE (300) -
N/A
N/A
5
LIGHTING (400) -
N/A
N/A
6
GEAR (500) - One (1) Eaton Gear Package Based on GMP2 Final Drawings
and GMP2 Final Specifications. Please See Attached Quote and Bill of
Materials for Details.
Provided by
Felix E/I&C
N/A
7
GENERATOR (500) -
N/A
N/A
8
INSTRUMENTATION (600) -
N/A
N/A
9
CONTROL AND PUMP PANELS (600) -
N/A
N/A
10
FABRICATION (700) -
N/A
N/A
11
OTHER MISC. (800) - Felix EI&C to Provide Electronic Submittals and O&Ms
for All Long Lead Procured Equipment, Project Management Labor to Procure
Electrical Equipment, Manage Submittals and Electrical Equipment Vendors,
Track Submittals and Electrical Equipment Status, and Attend Progress
Meetings and Submittal/Design Workshops.
Provided by
Felix E/I&C
N/A
12
Programming - Not Included in Bid.
N/A
N/A
13
Spare Parts - Not included in bid.
N/A
N/A
Quoted Scope of Work
Number
Description
1
By
By
Felix E/I&C
Others
Number
Description
14
Private Locating and Blue Stake
√
15
Painting and Coatings
√
16
Shade Structures SES or other Exterior Locations
√
17
Coordination / Arc Flash Study
√
18
As-Built / Red Lines
√
19
Start-up/Calibrate Felix supplied Controls and Instruments
√
20
Testing and Commissioning
√
21
Plant MOPO's
√
22
Owner Site Training
√
23
Concrete Pad's, Foundations, Curb's
√
24
Concrete embed sill's and custom specialty items
√
25
Concrete Coring, Saw cutting and Surface Restoration
√
26
Painting and Surface Restorations
√
27
Accelerated Schedules / Off Shift and Overtime Work
Excluded
Excluded
28
Trash Receptacles
√
29
Sanitary Facilities
√
30
Temporary Power
√
31
Construction Water
√
32
Permits / Permit Fees
√
33
Utility & Utility Fees
√
34
Taxes
√
Long Lead Switchgear - One (1) TX-DIS, One (1) PWTP-GAC-SWBD1, One
(1) AHF-GAC, One (1) PWTP-DWT-MCC1, VFD-4321, VFD-4322, VFD-4323,
VFD-4311, VFD-4312, VFD-4313, VFD-4314, Start-Up, Training, Arc-
Flash/Power Study, Harmonic Analysis, and Spare Parts.
$ 999,500.00
Submittals & O&Ms - Electronic Submittals and O&Ms for All Long Lead
Procured Equipment.
$ 28,110.00
Project Management - Project Management Labor to Procure Electrical
Equipment, Manage Submittals and Electrical Equipment Vendors, Track
Submittals and Electrical Equipment Status, and Attend Progress Meetings and
Submittal/Design Workshops, and Project Manager Truck.
$ 42,250.00
OH&P - 10% Markup
$ 109,662.47
Per Bid Scope, Construction Plans & Specifications
$ 1,179,522.47
Signature:
Date:
Estimator: Zachary Watts (602) 814-3877
zachw@felixconstruction.com
1
BOND=$14,113.53
TEXTURA= $2,872
TOTAL=$1,196,508
ARCHER WESTERN CONSTRUCTION NOTES
Project:
Date:
Revision:
#
1
2
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
1
#
1
2
#
1
#
1
#
1
#
1
2
3
4
#
1
2
3
Tax's, Bonds, Insurance, and Permits - Provided by Archer Western.
Excludes:
Normal Working Hours
Any Electrical Equipment on E-06.
Other Material and Labor for Project Requirements Provided in Later GMP.
Clarifications:
Due to current market volatility, material pricing is subject to the terms stated on the included material quotes, some of which may establish that final
pricing will be determined at the time of shipment.
Price Assumes:
Anything Not Listed Includes or Quoted Scope of Work.
N/A
Project Allowance Details:
N/A
Assumes Owner to Provide:
Access to Site.
Project Contingency Usage:
All General Conditions - Provided by Archer Western.
Installation Labor for All Long Lead Provided Electrical Equipment - Installation Labor Provided in Later GMP.
Felix EI&C to Provide Electronic Submittals and O&Ms for All Long Lead Procured Equipment, Project Management Labor to Procure
Electrical Equipment, Manage Submittals and Electrical Equipment Vendors, Track Submittals and Electrical Equipment Status, and Attend Progress
Meetings and Submittal/Design Workshops.
All Other Material and Labor for Project Requirements, Such As: Concrete Encased Duct Banks, Underground and Above Ground Conduit, Cable,
Grounding, Lighting and Trim Devices, Gear and Generator Installation, Local Control Panels and Remote Terminal Units, Instrumentation, Antenna or
Fiber Optic Requirements, Programming, Fabrication Materials, Additional Submittals and O&Ms, As-Builts, MOPOs, Testing and Start-Up Services -
Provided in Later GMP
Proposal Clarifications
City of Chandler - Pecos Water System Upgrades - Long Lead GMP
8/27/2025
Rev 0
Felix Construction:
Includes:
One (1) Eaton Gear Package Based on GMP2 Final Drawings and GMP2 Final Specifications. Please See Attached Quote and Bill of
Materials for Details: One (1) TX-DIS, One (1) PWTP-GAC-SWBD1, One (1) AHF-GAC, One (1) PWTP-DWT-MCC1, VFD-4321, VFD-4322, VFD-4323, VFD-
4311, VFD-4312, VFD-4313, VFD-4314, Start-Up, Training, Arc-Flash/Power Study, Harmonic Analysis, and Spare Parts.
Drives 125HP NEMA 1 Per James Hayes Call with Engineer.
General Comments:
Eaton:
MCC: 6-Pulse Drives, 15HP, No Passive Filter, Line Reactor and DVDT Filter Included. 120K Active Harmonic Filter Built into MCC.
200A AHF Separate Off Switchboard.
NOTE: $39K of Spare Parts Included.
Hitachi:
General Comments:
Orders with an agreed ship date(s) less than 52-weeks from the original PO acceptance date will not be subject to price adjustment prior to shipment.
This quotation is based solely on the following:
- e-mail correspondence entitled: CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER IMPROVEMENTS : EATON NEG PX500805X5K3 ALT 0000 New RFQ - CITY OF
CHANDLER PECOS IMPROVEMENTS.
- Specification: SECTION 26 12 19 PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS.
Standard Hitachi Energy 3-year warranty is provided. Warranty period is 36 months from shipment or 30 months from energization, whichever comes
first. Hitachi Energy is not responsible for ""In/Out"" charges.
New Utility Transformers, Primary Conduits and Cable, Secondary Conductors, and Switchgear/Control Transformer.
VFD-6513 & VFD-6523, and their Associated Breakers - Not Enough Information to Provide at This Time.
480VAC Panelboards, 120VAC Panelboards, Dry-Type Transformers, and Disconnects - Provided in Later GMP.
#
1
2
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
1
2
3
4
5
No field services provided or available. All field services, including installation, field testing and training, are to be provided by others.
Witness testing / source inspections are not included.
Clarifications:
Lead Times:
MCC:
- Submittals: 24 Weeks
- Shipment After Release: 45-48 Weeks
Stand Alone VFDs:
- Submittals: 6-8 Weeks
- Shipment After Release: 25-28 Weeks
Active Harmonic Filter:
- Submittals: 6-8 Weeks
- Shipment After Release: 12-16 Weeks
Medium Voltage Transformer:
- Submittals: 6-8 Weeks
- Shipment After Release: 38-45 Weeks
Switchboard:
- Submittals: 6-9 Weeks
- Shipment After Release: 49-52 Weeks
Unless stated otherwise in the quoted bill of materials, routine production/quality tests ONLY are included. ROUTINE TESTS INCLUDED:
- Transformer turns ratio, all tap positions
- Polarity (and Phase Relation)
- No-load loss and exciting current test at rated voltage
- Resistance, load loss, and impedance test at rated voltage
- Low frequency test
- Induced voltage (Applied potential, Induced Potential)
- Impulse/ Lightning Impulse
- Leaks
Exceptions:
Reference Sections were not provided and therefore are not taken into consideration.
Hitachi Energy Jefferson City takes exception to all documentation other than the standard submittal documents listed below:
- General Arrangement Drawing
- Nameplate Drawing
- Control Wiring Diagram (if applicable)
- Fuse Coordination Curve (if applicable)
- Spare Parts List (if applicable. No pricing included)
Transformer test reports will be provided when available. All documents are provided in electronic format (.PDF) only. Drawings are available in 2-D
format only. The documents listed above will follow Hitachi Energy standard format. Exception is taken to any template or format from the customer.
Electronic format transformer O&M manuals are available upon request. Manuals are not shipped with transformers.
Section 26 05 13 and Section 26 05 19 were not provided and therefore are not taken into consideration.
Section 01 33 00 was not provided and therefore is not taken into consideration.
General Conditions and Division 01 was not provided and therefore is not taken into consideration.
Section 26 05 00 was not provided and therefore is not taken into consideration.
600 A bushings are not directly compatible with dead front elbow arresters. A separate T-OP connector is necessary to make this connection. T-OP
connector is not supplied by Hitachi Energy and is the responsibility of others.
Detail Bill of Material
Page 1 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
EESS SAT
***See Approval Drawings for Comments and Clarifications***
Site Contact: Contractor
PHILLIP FULMER
Estimated Testing Date:
A Coordination Study does not exist.
Catalog No
U0210-104
Designation
EATON STARTUP AND TRAINING
Qty
List of Materials
1 EESS Office: Phoenix, AZ, quote as of 8/27/2025 5:20:01 PM
1 Jobsite: , CHANDLER, Arizona 85295
1 Drive Time: 0.27 Hours
1 1 Test Equipment Setup Location(s)
4 Customer Training Provided by EESS: 4 Hours
1 Service Entrance Ground Fault / ARMS Testing
1 Power Transformers
7 Drives - Enclosed
1 PRLX Switchboard
1 Freedom MCC
1 Harmonic Correction Unit
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
EESS Services
EESS Short Circuit and Coordination Studies: Arc Flash Hazard
Analysis, Arc Flash Labels - Standard, PE Review / Stamp
Required - Arizona
***See Approval Drawings for Clarifications and Exceptions***
PHILLIP FULMER
Catalog No
U0130-107
Designation
EATON ARC - COOR STUDY
Qty
List of Materials
1 EESS Study - Bid Manager
1 Initial Modeling and Data Request
1 PE Review Stamp Required (Arizona)
1 Arc Flash Study
1 Arc Flash Labels - Standard
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Engineering Services
HARMONIC STUDY PRELIM-TEST- FINAL REPORT,
HARMONIC STUDY PRELIM ,TEST , FINAL REPORT
Catalog No
HARMONIC STUDY PRELIM-TES
Designation
HARMONIC STUDY PRELIM ,TEST , FINAL REPORT
Detail Bill of Material
Page 2 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Power Transformers
Power Transformer, 1, 72215 - Hitachi Liquid Filled Padmount,
2000 KVA
Catalog No
CN_72215_2000
Designation
2000 KVA TX-DIS
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
CN_72215_2000
1 Tamper-Resist, Pad Mount, Liquid Filled, 2000KVA
Notes
Neg # QT-25-01071461
CHAMPS QUOTATION – NCC 8/27/2025
We are pleased to offer you this quote.
Project: Eaton Corp / CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER IMPROVEMENTS
General Comments and Exceptions
•
Orders with agreed ship dates less than 52-weeks from the original PO acceptance date will not be subject to price adjustment prior to
shipment.
•
This quotation is based solely on the following:
- e-mail correspondence entitled: CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER IMPROVEMENTS : EATON NEG PX500805X5K3 ALT 0000
New RFQ - CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS IMPROVEMENTS - Due 08/20/2025; Dated: 08/06/2025
- Specification: SECTION 26 12 19 PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS; Dated: 8/4/2025
•
1.01.C; Exception, refference Sections were not provided and therefore are not taken into consideration.
1.03; Hitachi Energy Jefferson City takes exception to all documentation other than the standard submittal documents listed below:
1. General Arrangement Drawing
2. Nameplate Drawing
3. Control Wiring Diagram (if applicable)
4. Fuse Coordination Curve (if applicable)
5. Spare Parts List (if applicable. No pricing included)
Transformer test reports will be provided when available.
All documents are provided in electronic format (.PDF) only. Drawings are available in 2-D format only. The documents listed above will follow Hitachi
Energy standard format. Exception is taken to any template or format from the customer. Electronic format transformer O&M manuals are available upon
request. Manuals are not shipped with transformers.
1.03.A; Exception, Section 01 33 00 was not provided and therefore is not taken into consideration.
1.05.A; Exception, General Conditions and Division 01 was not provided and therefore is not taken into consideration.
1.06.B; Exception, Section 26 05 00 was not provided and therefore is not taken into consideration.
1.08; Standard Hitachi Energy 3-year warranty is provided. Warranty period is 36 months from shipment or 30 months from energization, whichever
comes first. Hitachi Energy is not responsible for ""In/Out"" charges.
2.02.F.4; Exception, Section 26 05 13 and Section 26 05 19 were not provided and therefore are not taken into consideration.
2.02.I.1.b; Clarification, 600 A bushings are not directly compatible with dead front elbow arresters. A separate T-OP connector is necessary to make this
connection. T-OP connector is not supplied by Hitachi Energy and is the responsibility of others.
Detail Bill of Material
Page 3 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
PART 3; Exception taken to entirety of Part 3. No field services provided or available. All field services, including installation, field testing and training, are
to be provided by others.
3.02; Clarification, unless stated otherwise in the quoted bill of materials, routine production/quality tests ONLY are included.
ROUTINE TESTS INCLUDED:
- Transformer turns ratio, all tap positions
- Polarity (and Phase Relation)
- No-load loss and exciting current test at rated voltage
- Resistance, load loss, and impedance test at rated voltage
- Low frequency test
- Induced voltage (Applied potential, Induced Potential)
- Impulse/ Lightning Impulse
- Leaks
Witness testing / source inspections are not included. (see following pages for pricing)
**Required to be added prior to order processing.
•
Shipping terms are FCA, Jefferson City MO, Freight prepaid and allowed. DAP (customer's desired shipping location-USA mainland only) is
available for an additional 3%.
Item
Alt
Qty
Description
Price Each (USD)
1
1
2000/2240 KVA Liquid Filled Padmounted Transformer
2401 - Distribution Transformers, Jefferson City, USA (8DAG301441), PDC: 9AAC30400623, DTAN-L3M135 130,500
ITEM
QTY
kVA
EACH (USD)
Conductor %Z
1
1
2000/2240130,500
Cu/Cu
5.75
Description:
Type
:
Liquid-Filled MTR Padmounted Transformer
Fluid
:
Natural Ester Fluid
Core
:
Grain Oriented Steel
Phase
:
3 Phase
Frequency
:
60 Hz
Average Winding Rise
:
55/65 °C
Ambient Temperature:
30 °C
High Voltage
:
4160 Delta
High Voltage Taps
:
+2 -2 2.5%
High Voltage BIL
:
60kV BIL
Low Voltage
:
480Y/277
Low Voltage BIL
:
30kV BIL
Low Voltage Neutral :
X0 bushing with ground strap
Feed Configuration
:
Radial feed
Color
:
Bell Green (Munsell 7GY 3.29/1.5)
Customer Specification
:
SECTION 26 12 19, 8/4/2025
Detail Bill of Material
Page 4 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Features (included in price):
TANK & CABINET
Dry Nitrogen Blanket
Hex-head cabinet handle bolt
BUSHINGS
600 amp dead-break bushings (dead front) x 3
ANSI C57.12.34 Fig 9&10 dead front/radial (minimum)
10-hole Integral Spade Bushings x 4
Spade Supports
ANSI C57.12.26 Fig 3&4a minimum stgrd LV bushing pattern
ARRESTERS
6 kV MCOV 5.10 elbow arrester - 15 kV interface x 3
FUSES
Bayonet high-amp expulsion fuse w/ integral cartridge x 3
Parallel oil-immersed partial range current limiting fuse x 6
Spare expulsion fuses (silver contacts) x 3
MONITORING
Pressure vacuum gauge with 2 contacts 1 NO & 1 NC each Qualitrol 148-013-01
Thermometer w 2 alarm contacts 1 NO & 1 NC each Qualitrol 167-288-01 p/n 30C6637H01
Schrader valve
Large pressure relief device 208-60E p/n1B25045031
Liquid level Gauge Q 020-555-01 2B12840H01
Pressure Relief Valve
FITTINGS
Drain valve and sampler
Upper Filter Press Connection (1.0" Fill Coupling)
External drain valve padlockable box
MARKINGS
Three (3) DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE Signs
UL Listed on Nameplate
Factory Mutual Nameplate - FM Outdoor Approved
Tap Changer Warning Sign
"Non-PCB" on Nameplate
Factory Mutual Nameplate
Internal KVA Stencil
OTHER
GO###, Item #### (On Title block)
9.5" x 17.5" Tank Handhole Cover
24" deep cabinet
4ft hot stick
DOE Efficiency (2016)
RTE tap changer (300 amp)
Factory Mutual
TESTS
Impedance and load loss rated voltage and extreme tap
Winding resistance test at rated tap and extreme tap
Contains less-flammable biodegradable natural ester fluid with no detectable level of PCB, less than 1PPM, at the time of manufacture.
For information about natural ester fluid, go to: http://www.cargill.com/products/industrial/dielectric-ester-fluids/envirotemp-fr3/index.jsp
Lead Times:
Detail Bill of Material
Page 5 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Drawing Submittal
: 3-4 Weeks after receipt of order. after receipt of order.
Orders requiring drawing approval (i.e. Approval orders): The shipping date from our Jefferson City Factory will be confirmed after we receive approved
drawings back from the customer.
Orders NOT requiring drawing approvals (i.e. Firm Orders): 36-38 Weeks after the acceptance of order.
Quoted lead times are based on current production levels. Actual lead times are dependent on available production space at time of firm order entry
and/or release to manufacturing.
** GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE **
This quotation is effective for 60 days from 8/19/2025, unless otherwise authorized by Hitachi Energy USA Inc..
Unless stated otherwise in the quotation, the following terms and conditions of sale will apply.
1.
Payment Terms: Due in 30 days invoice date.
2.
Freight Terms: Shipment is FCA - Free Carrier.
3.
Warranty: 24 months from delivery.
4.
Terms and conditions of sale are based upon Hitachi Energy USA Inc. General Terms and Conditions of Sale.
5.
Approval Orders: Prices are valid for units released for shipment within 60 days from the initial mailing date of approval drawings (typically 2
weeks ARO). Prices are valid for quoted shipment or best available lead-time at time of release. Orders on hold pending drawing approval beyond 60
days of initial drawing date are subject to price adjustment every 30 days. Pricing will be determined at time of release for agreed upon delivery.
6.
Lead times for orders subject to drawing approval will be confirmed upon receipt of approval and release to manufacturing.
7.
Transformers are designed, built, and tested to ANSI/IEEE C57 Transformer Standards for distribution class transformers. No other
Codes/Standards apply unless noted on quote.
Russia-Ukraine Situation
For the purpose hereof,
(i) “Russia-Ukraine Situation” means (1) the conflict between Russia and Ukraine which began on or around 24 February 2022 and/or (2) any other or
further conflict which may arise out of or in connection with the same and/or (3) any economic and other sanctions imposed by, amongst others the
United Nations, U.S., EU, UK, Japan Switzerland or any agency or authority against Russia, Russian entities and individuals, Russian goods, products,
services, technology which may arise out of or in connection therewith, and/or (4) any economic and other sanctions imposed by, amongst others the
United Nations, U.S., EU, UK, Japan Switzerland or any agency or authority thereof against any other country, entities and individuals, Russian goods,
products, services, technology which may arise out of or in connection therewith;
(ii) “Electronic Component Shortage” means the continuing global shortage of microchips or apparatus or components which include microchips.
The Parties acknowledge that the Russia-Ukraine Situation and/or the Electronic Component Shortage is affecting or may have an adverse impact on
[Hitachi Energy’s] ability to perform the [offer] including but not limited to price increases, transportation and logistics constraints, shortages and price
increases in the procurement of products and commodities (e.g. copper, aluminum, steel, oil and gas).
If the Russia-Ukraine Situation and/or the Electronic Component Shortage continue affecting, will or may have any adverse impact, whether direct or
indirect, on [Hitachi Energy’s] ability to perform the [offer] in accordance with its terms [and/or the [Law]], the Parties shall, if so requested in writing by
[Hitachi Energy /], negotiate in good faith and agree without delay reasonable amendments to the terms and conditions of the [offer], including, but not
limited to, revisions of the [Schedule] and/or any increase in the [Contract Price].
In the absence of such agreement, [Hitachi Energy] shall, if it suffers delay and/or incurs additional [Costs] due to any direct or indirect impact of the
Russia-Ukraine Situation and/or the Electronic Component Shortage, in any case be entitled to an extension of the [Time for Completion] and
compensation for any additional [Costs].
Detail Bill of Material
Page 6 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Change in Laws
Hitachi Energy shall comply with all federal, state and local laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, statutes, orders, codes and practices (“Applicable
Laws”). If there is a change in any of the Applicable Laws after a purchase order is issued, Hitachi Energy shall notify Customer, and the parties agree to
meet in good faith to discuss such change. The price and time to perform the work, shall be increased or decreased, based on the change and
consistent with the time and price to perform the original scope of work. For purposes of this provision, "Change in Law” means any change in any
Applicable Laws or Applicable Codes and Standards as in effect on the Effective Date, including the enactment, adoption, promulgation, implementation
of laws passed but not yet effective or imposition of any new Applicable Laws with substantively different terms, or change in the application or in the
interpretation by any governmental authority of any Applicable Laws after the Effective Date. Any tariffs/custom duties, import/export restrictions or
embargoes that may result from any executive orders, proclamations or other Applicable Laws that have been or will be issued after January 20th, 2025
shall be considered a ‘Change in Law’ event and entitle Hitachi Energy to equitable adjustment of cost and price and extension of time of performance.
Transportation/Delivery
Purchaser has the responsibility to guarantee clear access to the delivery point. If Seller encounters obstructions preventing or hindering delivery,
Purchaser shall be responsible for removal and replacement to permit Seller’s clear access. Seller shall not be responsible for any added costs or
delivery delays caused by such obstructions, nor any state or local regulations that impede or restrict the ability of the originally planned shipping vehicle
to reach Purchaser's destination.
In the event the Purchaser does not collect and/or agree to accept shipment of the products at delivery (unless otherwise stipulated in the contract),
Seller will locate local storage facilities to which the products will be delivered, at which point contractual delivery will be deemed complete. Storage at
such facilities will be at the Purchaser’s expense. The Purchaser shall be liable for costs arising from such delay, including the Supplier’s costs relating to
storage, insurance, and handling of the products.
Storage Fees
Transformer Rating
Weekly Storage Fee
750KVA and below
$375 per week per transformer
Above 750KVA
$425 per week per transformer
Handling Fees
Transformer Rating
Crane Charge Per Move
750KVA and below
$750
Above 750KVA
$1250
Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT)
•
Witness Testing can be added for $5,000 per transformer. Only two (2) transformers can be witness tested per day.
•
Final Inspection can be added for $2,000 per day of inspection. Dependent upon availability of product at time of inspection.
•
Please confirm intent to witness testing and/or perform final inspection by the time of release to manufacture otherwise FAT services will be
considered waived.
Price Adjustment Policy (PAC)
To facilitate order acceptance, please reference this quote number and acknowledge acceptance of this PAC, on the order document.
Due to extended delivery dates, pricing is not held constant between order placement and shipment. The price shall be adjusted per the price adjustment
clause described below 3 months prior to shipment.
A weighted index WPU117409 will be used for price adjustment. If the percentage change is less than +/-2%, then no change will apply.
Should the specified indices be discontinued, proper indices shall be submitted by mutual agreement of both parties.
Detail Bill of Material
Page 7 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
The Index Baseline will be the month and year in which the proposal is issued.
Cancellation Fees
Approval Orders
•
20% after order entry
•
50% after submittal of approval drawings
•
80% after procurement of major materials
•
100% 6 weeks prior to planned start of manufacture
Firm Orders
•
50% after order entry
•
80% after procurement of major materials
•
100% 6 weeks prior to planned start of manufacture
We appreciate the opportunity to quote on this business. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. has had many years of experience building reliable, high quality
transformers and we look forward to supplying this equipment.
Price Validity - Eaton
Prices are valid for units released for manufacture within 60 days from initial mailing date of approval drawings. Price validity applies to shipment within
quoted leadtime, or best available shipment at time of release. For extended order validity, add 2% per month up to a maximum of 120 days from initial
approval drawing mailing date (2% adder for 90 day validity, 4% adder for 120 day validity). Orders not released within the validity period may be subject
to price escalation at time of release.
Minimum Order Charge
A minimum order charge of $250 USD applies to all orders.
KVA
FEED
A
B
C
D
E
F
WT
2000
Radial (Dead)
72
96
82.8
68.8
70
24
12800
All weights and dimensions are approximate. Dimensions may change to meet specific customer requirements. Weights are in pounds. Dimensions are
in inches.
Cooling fins may be required on the back and/or side of the tank if necessary. Maximum cooling fin depth is 16".
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER IMPROVEMENTS
8/19/2025 3-Phase Padmounted Transformer
Hitachi Energy USA Inc., Jefferson City, MO
Hitachi Energy USA Inc.
GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE
Detail Bill of Material
Page 8 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
1. General. The terms and conditions contained herein, together with any additional or different terms contained in Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s Proposal, if
any, submitted to Purchaser (which Proposal shall control over any conflicting terms), constitute the entire agreement (the "Agreement") between the
parties with respect to the order and supersede all prior communications and agreements regarding the order. Acceptance by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. of
the order, or Purchaser's acceptance of Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s Proposal, is expressly limited to and conditioned upon Purchaser's acceptance of
these terms and conditions, payment for or acceptance of any performance by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. being acceptance. These terms and conditions
may not be changed or superseded by any different or additional terms and conditions proposed by Purchaser to which terms Hitachi Energy USA Inc.
hereby objects. Unless the context otherwise requires, the term "Equipment" as used herein means all of the equipment, parts, accessories sold, and all
software and software documentation, if any, licensed to Purchaser by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. ("Software") under the order. Unless the context
otherwise requires, the term "Services" as used herein means all labor, supervisory, technical and engineering, installation, repair, consulting or other
services provided by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. under the order. As used herein, the term "Purchaser" shall include the initial end use of the Equipment
and/or services; provided, however, that Paragraph 13(a) shall apply exclusively to the initial end user.
2. Prices.
(a) Unless otherwise specified in writing, all Proposals expire thirty (30) days from the date thereof.
(b) Unless otherwise stated herein, Services prices are based on normal business hours (8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Friday). Overtime and
Saturday hours will be billed at one and one-half (1 1/2) times the hourly rate; and Sunday hours will be billed at two (2) times the hourly rate; holiday
hours will be billed at three (3) times the hourly rate. If a Services rate sheet is attached hereto, the applicable Services rates shall be those set forth in
the rate sheet. Rates are subject to change without notice.
(c) The price does not include any federal, state or local property, license, privilege, sales, use, excise, gross receipts, or other like taxes which may now
or hereafter be applicable. Purchaser agrees to pay or reimburse any such taxes which Hitachi Energy USA Inc. or its suppliers are required to pay or
collect. If Purchaser is exempt from the payment of any tax or holds a direct payment permit, Purchaser shall, upon order placement, provide Hitachi
Energy USA Inc. a copy, acceptable to the relevant governmental authorities of any such certificate or permit.
(d) The price includes customs duties and other importation or exportation fees, if any, at the rates in effect on the date of Hitachi Energy USA Inc.’s
Proposal. Any change after that date in such duties, fees, or rates, shall increase the price by Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s additional cost.
3. Payment.
(a) Unless specified to the contrary in writing by Hitachi Energy USA Inc., payment terms are net cash, payable without offset, in United States Dollars,
30 days from date of invoice by wire transfer to the account designated by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. in the Proposal.
(b) If in the judgment of Hitachi Energy USA Inc. the financial condition of Purchaser at any time prior to delivery does not justify the terms of payment
specified, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. may require payment in advance, payment security satisfactory to Hitachi Energy USA Inc., or may terminate the
order, whereupon Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall be entitled to receive reasonable cancellation charges. If delivery is delayed by Purchaser, payment
shall be due on the date Hitachi Energy USA Inc. is prepared to make delivery. Delays in delivery or nonconformities in any installments delivered shall
not relieve Purchaser of its obligation to accept and pay for remaining installments.
(c) Purchaser shall pay, in addition to the overdue payment, a late charge equal to the lesser of 1 1/2% per month or any part thereof or the highest
applicable rate allowed by law on all such overdue amounts plus Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s attorneys' fees and court costs incurred in connection with
collection.
4. Changes.
(a) Any changes requested by Purchaser affecting the ordered scope of work must be accepted by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. and resulting adjustments to
affected provisions, including price, schedule, and guarantees mutually agreed in writing prior to implementation of the change.
(b) Hitachi Energy USA Inc. may, at its expense, make such changes in the Equipment or Services as it deems necessary, in its sole discretion, to
conform the Equipment or Services to the applicable specifications. If Purchaser objects to any such changes, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall be relieved
of its obligation to conform to the applicable specifications to the extent that conformance may be affected by such objection.
5. Delivery.
(a) All Equipment manufactured, assembled or warehoused in the continental United States is delivered F.O.B. point of shipment. Equipment shipped
from outside the continental United States is delivered F.O.B. United States port of entry. Purchaser shall be responsible for any and all demurrage or
detention charges.
(b) If the scheduled delivery of Equipment is delayed by Purchaser or by Force Majeure, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. may move the Equipment to storage
for the account of and at the risk of Purchaser whereupon it shall be deemed to be delivered.
(c) Shipping and delivery dates are contingent upon Purchaser's timely approvals and delivery by Purchaser of any documentation required for Hitachi
Energy USA Inc.'s performance hereunder.
(d) Claims for shortages or other errors in delivery must be made in writing to Hitachi Energy USA Inc. within ten days of delivery. Equipment may not be
Detail Bill of Material
Page 9 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
returned except with the prior written consent of and subject to terms specified by Hitachi Energy USA Inc.. Claims for damage after delivery shall be
made directly by Purchaser with the common carrier
6. Title & Risk of Loss. Except with respect to Software (for which title shall not pass, use being licensed) title to Equipment shall remain in Hitachi
Energy USA Inc. until fully paid for. Notwithstanding any agreement with respect to delivery terms or payment of transportation charges, risk of loss or
damage shall pass to Purchaser upon delivery.
7. Inspection, Testing and Acceptance.
(a) Any inspection by Purchaser of Equipment on Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s premises shall be scheduled in advance to be performed during normal
working hours.
(b) If the order provides for factory acceptance testing, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall notify Purchaser when Hitachi Energy USA Inc. will conduct such
testing prior to shipment. Unless Purchaser states specific objections in writing within ten
(10) days after completion of factory acceptance testing, completion of the acceptance test constitutes Purchaser's factory acceptance of the Equipment
and its authorization for shipment.
(c) If the order provides for site acceptance testing, testing will be performed by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. personnel to verify that the Equipment has
arrived at site complete, without physical damage, and in good operating condition. Completion of site acceptance testing constitutes full and final
acceptance of the Equipment. If, through no fault of Hitachi Energy USA Inc., acceptance testing is not completed within thirty (30) days after arrival of
the Equipment at the site, the site acceptance test shall be deemed completed and the Equipment shall be deemed accepted.
8. Warranties and Remedies.
(a) Equipment and Services Warranty. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. warrants that Equipment (excluding Software, which is warranted as specified in
paragraph (d) below) shall be delivered free of defects in material and workmanship and that Services shall be free of defects in workmanship. The
Warranty Remedy Period for Equipment (excluding Software, Spare Parts and Refurbished or Repaired Parts) shall end twelve (12) months after
installation or eighteen (18) months after date of shipment, whichever first occurs. The Warranty Remedy Period for new spare parts shall end twelve
(12) months after date of shipment. The Warranty Remedy Period for refurbished or repaired parts shall end ninety (90) days after date of shipment. The
Warranty Remedy Period for Services shall end ninety (90) days after the date of completion of Services.
(b) Equipment and Services Remedy. If a nonconformity to the foregoing warranty is discovered in the Equipment or Services during the applicable
Warranty Remedy Period, as specified above, under normal and proper use and provided the Equipment has been properly stored, installed, operated
and maintained
and written notice of such nonconformity is provided to Hitachi Energy USA Inc. promptly after such discovery and within the applicable Warranty
Remedy Period, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall, at its option, either (i) repair or replace the nonconforming portion of the Equipment or re-perform the
nonconforming Services or (ii) refund the portion of the price applicable to the nonconforming portion of Equipment or Services. If any portion of the
Equipment or Services so repaired, replaced or re-performed fails to conform to the foregoing warranty, and written notice of such nonconformity is
provided to Hitachi Energy USA Inc. promptly after discovery and within the original Warranty Remedy Period applicable to such Equipment or Services
or 30 days from completion of such repair, replacement or re-performance, whichever is later, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. will repair or replace such
nonconforming Equipment or re-perform the nonconforming Services. The original Warranty Remedy Period shall not otherwise be extended.
(c) Exceptions. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall not be responsible for providing working access to the nonconforming Equipment, including disassembly
and re-assembly of non-Hitachi Energy USA Inc. supplied equipment, or for providing transportation to or from any repair facility, all of which shall be at
Purchaser's risk and expense. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall have no obligation hereunder with respect to any Equipment which (i) has been improperly
repaired or altered; (ii) has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident; (iii) has been used in a manner contrary to Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s
instructions; (iv) is comprised of materials provided by or a design specified by Purchaser; or (v) has failed as a result of ordinary wear and tear.
Equipment supplied by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. but manufactured by others is warranted only to the extent of the manufacturer’s warranty, and only the
remedies, if any, provided by the manufacturer will be allowed.
(d) Software Warranty and Remedies. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. warrants that, except as specified below, the Software will, when properly installed,
execute in accordance with Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s published specification. If a nonconformity to the foregoing warranty is discovered during the
period ending one (1) year after the date of shipment and written notice of such nonconformity is provided to Hitachi Energy USA Inc. promptly after such
discovery and within that period, including a description of the nonconformity and complete information about the manner of its discovery, Hitachi Energy
USA Inc. shall correct the nonconformity by, at its option, either (i) modifying or making available to the Purchaser instructions for modifying the Software;
or (ii) making available at Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s facility necessary corrected or replacement programs. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall have no
obligation with respect to any nonconformities resulting from (i) unauthorized modification of the Software or (ii) Purchaser-supplied software or
interfacing. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. does not warrant that the functions contained in the software will operate in combinations which may be selected for
use by the Purchaser, or that the software products are free from
errors in the nature of what is commonly categorized by the computer industry as "bugs".
Detail Bill of Material
Page 10 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
(e) THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE,
WHETHER WRITTEN, ORAL OR IMPLIED, AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USAGE OF TRADE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. THE REMEDIES STATED HEREIN CONSTITUTE
PURCHASER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND Hitachi Energy USA Inc.’S ENTIRE LIABILITY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
9. Patent Indemnity.
(a) Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall defend at its own expense any action brought against Purchaser alleging that the Equipment or the use of the
Equipment to practice any process for which such Equipment is specified by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. (a “Process”) directly infringes any claim of a
patent of the United States of America and to pay all damages and costs finally awarded in any such action, provided that Purchaser has given Hitachi
Energy USA Inc. prompt written notice of such action, all necessary assistance in the defense thereof and the right to control all aspects of the defense
thereof including the right to settle or otherwise terminate such action in behalf of Purchaser.
(b) Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall have no obligation hereunder and this provision shall not apply to: (i) any other equipment or processes, including
Equipment or Processes which have been modified or combined with other equipment or process not supplied by Hitachi Energy USA Inc.; (ii) any
Equipment or Process supplied according to a design, other than an Hitachi Energy USA Inc. design, required by Purchaser; (iii) any products
manufactured by the Equipment or Process; (iv) any patent issued after the date hereof; or (v) any action settled or otherwise terminated without the prior
written consent of Hitachi Energy USA Inc..
(c) If, in any such action, the Equipment is held to constitute an infringement, or the practice of any Process using the Equipment is finally enjoined,
Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall, at its option and its own expense, procure for Purchaser the right to continue using said Equipment; or modify or replace it
with non-infringing equipment or, with Purchaser's assistance, modify the Process so that it becomes non-infringing; or remove it and refund the portion
of the price allocable to the infringing Equipment.
THE FOREGOING PARAGRAPHS STATE THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF Hitachi Energy USA Inc. AND EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER FOR ANY
PATENT INFRINGEMENT.
(d) To the extent that said Equipment or any part thereof is modified by Purchaser, or combined by Purchaser with equipment or processes not furnished
hereunder (except to the extent that Hitachi Energy USA Inc. is a contributory infringer) or said Equipment or any part thereof is used by Purchaser to
perform a process not furnished hereunder by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. or to produce an article, and by reason of said modification, combination,
performance or production, an action is brought against Hitachi Energy USA Inc., Purchaser shall defend and indemnify Hitachi Energy USA Inc. in the
same manner and to the same extent that Hitachi Energy USA Inc. would be obligated to indemnify Purchaser under this "Patent Indemnity" provision.
10. Limitation of Liability.
(a) In no event shall Hitachi Energy USA Inc., its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, whether
in contract, warranty, tort, negligence, strict liability or otherwise, including, but not limited to, loss of profits or revenue, loss of use of the Equipment or
any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute equipment, facilities or services, downtime costs, delays, and claims of customers of the
Purchaser or other third parties for any damages. Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s liability for any claim whether in contract, warranty, tort, negligence, strict
liability, or otherwise for any loss or damage arising out of, connected with, or resulting from this Agreement or the performance or breach thereof, or
from the design, manufacture, sale, delivery, resale, repair, replacement, installation, technical direction of installation, inspection, operation or use of any
equipment covered by or furnished under this Agreement, or from any services rendered in connection therewith, shall in no case (except as provided in
the section entitled "Patent Indemnity") exceed one-half (1/2) of the purchase price allocable to the Equipment or part thereof or Services which gives
rise to the claim.
(b) All causes of action against Hitachi Energy USA Inc. arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the performance or breach hereof shall expire
unless brought within one year of the time of accrual thereof.
(c) In no event, regardless of cause, shall Hitachi Energy USA Inc. be liable for penalties or penalty clauses of any description or for indemnification of
Purchaser or others for costs, damages, or expenses arising out of or related to the Equipment and/Services.
11. Laws and Regulations. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. does not assume any responsibility for compliance with federal, state or local laws and regulations,
except as expressly set forth herein, and compliance with any laws and regulations relating to the operation or use of the Equipment or Software is the
sole responsibility of the Purchaser. All laws and regulations referenced herein shall be those in effect as of the Proposal date. In the event of any
subsequent revisions or changes thereto, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. assumes no responsibility for compliance therewith. If Purchaser desires a
modification as a result of any such change or revision, it shall be treated as a change per Article 4. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as
imposing responsibility or liability upon Hitachi Energy USA Inc. for obtaining any permits, licenses or approvals from any agency required in connection
with the supply, erection or operation of the Equipment. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, but excluding the
provisions of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and excluding New York law with respect to conflicts of law.
Purchaser agrees that all causes of action against Hitachi Energy USA Inc. under this Agreement shall be brought in the State Courts of the State of
New York, or the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of New York. If any provision hereof, partly or completely, shall be held invalid or
Detail Bill of Material
Page 11 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
unenforceable, such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect any other provision or portion hereof and these terms shall be construed as if such
invalid or unenforceable provision or portion thereof had never existed.
12. OSHA. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. warrants that the Equipment will comply with the relevant standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of
1970 ("OSHA") and the regulations promulgated thereunder as of the date of the Proposal. Upon prompt written notice from the Purchaser of a breach of
this warranty, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. will replace
the affected part or modify it so that it conforms to such standard or regulation. Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s obligation shall be limited to such replacement
or modification. In no event shall Hitachi Energy USA Inc. be responsible for liability arising out of the violation of any OSHA standards relating to or
caused by Purchaser's design, location, operation, or maintenance of the Equipment, its use in association with other equipment of Purchaser, or the
alteration of the Equipment by any party other than Hitachi Energy USA Inc..
13. Software License.
(a) Hitachi Energy USA Inc. owns all rights in or has the right to sublicense all of the Software, if any, to be delivered to Purchaser under this Agreement.
As part of the sale made hereunder Purchaser hereby obtains a limited license to use the Software, subject to the following: (i) The Software may be
used only in conjunction with equipment specified by Hitachi Energy USA Inc.; (ii) The Software shall be kept strictly confidential; (iii) The Software shall
not be copied, reverse engineered, or modified; (iv) The Purchaser's right to use the Software shall terminate immediately when the specified equipment
is no longer used by the Purchaser or when otherwise terminated, e.g. for breach, hereunder; and (v) the rights to use the Software are non-exclusive
and non-transferable, except with Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s prior written consent.
(b) Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to convey to Purchaser any title to or ownership in the Software or the intellectual property contained
therein in whole or in part, nor to designate the Software a "work made for hire" under the Copyright Act, nor to confer upon any person who is not a
named party to this Agreement any right or remedy under or by reason of this Agreement. In the event of termination of this License, Purchaser shall
immediately cease using the Software and, without retaining any copies, notes or excerpts thereof, return to Hitachi Energy USA Inc. the Software and
all copies thereof and shall remove all machine readable Software from all of Purchaser's storage media.
14. Inventions and Information. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. and Purchaser, all right, title and interest in any
inventions, developments, improvements or modifications of or for Equipment and Services shall remain with Hitachi Energy USA Inc.. Any design,
manufacturing drawings or other information submitted to the Purchaser remains the exclusive property of Hitachi Energy USA Inc.. Purchaser shall not,
without Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s prior written consent, copy or disclose such information to a third party. Such information shall be used solely for the
operation or maintenance of the Equipment and not for any other purpose, including the duplication thereof in whole or in part.
15. Force Majeure. Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall neither be liable for loss, damage, detention or delay nor be deemed to be in default for failure to
perform when prevented from doing so by causes beyond its reasonable control including but not limited to acts of war (declared or undeclared), Acts of
God, fire, strike, labor difficulties, acts or omissions of any governmental authority or of Purchaser, compliance with government regulations, insurrection
or riot, embargo, delays or shortages in transportation or inability to obtain necessary labor, materials, or manufacturing facilities from usual sources or
from defects or delays in the performance of its suppliers or subcontractors due to any of the foregoing enumerated causes. In the event of delay due to
any such cause, the date of delivery will be extended by period equal to the delay plus a reasonable time to resume production, and the price will be
adjusted to compensate Hitachi Energy USA Inc. for such delay.
16. Cancellation. Any order may be cancelled by Purchaser only upon prior written notice and payment of termination charges, including but not limited
to, all costs identified to the order incurred prior to the effective date of notice of termination and all expenses incurred by Hitachi Energy USA Inc.
attributable to the termination, plus a fixed sum of ten (10) percent of the final total price to compensate for disruption in scheduling, planned production
and other indirect costs.
17. Termination. No termination by Purchaser for default shall be effective unless, within fifteen (15) days after receipt by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. of
Purchaser's written notice specifying such default, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall have failed to initiate and pursue with due diligence correction of such
specified default.
18. Export Control.
(a) Purchaser represents and warrants that the Equipment and Services provided hereunder and the "direct product" thereof are intended for civil use
only and will not be used, directly or indirectly, for the production of chemical or biological weapons or of precursor chemicals for such weapons, or for
any direct or indirect nuclear end use. Purchaser agrees not to disclose, use, export or re-export, directly or indirectly, any information provided by
Hitachi Energy USA Inc. or the "direct product" thereof as defined in the Export Control Regulations of the United States Department of Commerce,
except in compliance with such Regulations.
Detail Bill of Material
Page 12 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
(b) If applicable, Hitachi Energy USA Inc. shall file for a U.S. export license, but only after appropriate documentation for the license application has been
provided by Purchaser. Purchaser shall furnish such documentation within Hitachi Energy USA Inc. a reasonable time after order acceptance. Any delay
in obtaining such license shall suspend performance of this Agreement by Hitachi Energy USA Inc.. If an export license is not granted or, if once granted,
is thereafter revoked or modified by the appropriate authorities, this Agreement may be canceled by Hitachi Energy USA Inc. without liability for damages
of any kind resulting from such cancellation. At Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s request, Purchaser shall provide to Hitachi Energy USA Inc. a Letter of
Assurance and End-User Statement in a form reasonably satisfactory to Hitachi Energy USA Inc..
19. Assignment. Any assignment of this Agreement or of any rights or obligations under the Agreement without prior written consent of Hitachi Energy
USA Inc. shall be void.
20. Nuclear Insurance – Indemnity. For applications in nuclear projects, the Purchaser and/or its end user customer shall have complete insurance
protection against liability and property damage resulting from a nuclear incident to and shall indemnify Hitachi Energy USA Inc., its subcontractors,
suppliers and vendors against all claims resulting from a nuclear incident.
21. Resale. If Purchaser resells any of the Equipment, the sale terms shall limit Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s liability to the buyer to the same extent that
Hitachi Energy USA Inc.'s liability to Purchaser is limited hereunder.
22. Entire Agreement. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between Hitachi Energy USA Inc. and Purchaser. There are no agreements,
understandings, restrictions, warranties, or representations between Hitachi Energy USA Inc. and Purchaser other than those set forth herein or herein
provided.
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Switchboards
Pow-R-Line Xpert Switchboard, Front Access/ Front and Rear
Align, Type 1, 480V 3-Phase 3-Wire, 1600 Tin Plated Copper,
Minimum Interrupting Rating: 65kA, Bus Bracing Rating: 65kA,
Depth: 30 In
Catalog No
XSBAFENNNCS10SNN6F1D1A2CX
Designation
PWTP-GAC-SWBD1
Structure
1
1600 Amp Tin Plated CU Main Structure
Compartment 1 - Metering And Surge Protective Device (SPD) PXE2
Meter, 1600 Amp CTs, Comm. Exp Card, with Display, PXM1K-
ETHMULT-NW (Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, HTTP, BACnet-IP,
EtherNet/IP)
SPD Series 250kA SPD, Standard w/ Surge Counter, w/ Fusible
Disconnect
Compartment 2 - Breaker 1600A 3P PDG63M Breaker [1600A Frame]
Mechanical (5) 3/0-750 kcmil
PXR20 LSIG Trip Unit w/ ARMS Option M no control wiring
Trip Unit Amps 1600A, Sensor 1600A
ARMS (Local using breaker interface)
Detail Bill of Material
Page 13 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Structure
2
1600 Amp Tin Plated CU Distribution Structure
Compartment 1 - Breaker 300A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 2 - Breaker 300A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 3 - Breaker 300A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 4 - Breaker 300A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 5 - Breaker 300A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 6 - Breaker 300A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 7 - Breaker 300A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 8 - Breaker 400A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Compartment 9 - Breaker 400A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame]
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
Compartment 10 - Breaker 3P PD3-P
Compartment 11 - Breaker 200A, 3P PDG23M Breaker [225A Frame]
Mechanical (1) #4-4/0
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 12 - Breaker 200A, 3P PDG23M Breaker [225A Frame]
Mechanical (1) #4-4/0
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Compartment 13 - Breaker 3P PD2-P
Compartment 14 - Breaker 200A, 3P PDG23M Breaker [225A Frame]
Mechanical (1) #4-4/0
Thermal Mag Trip - Standard
Qty
List of Materials
1 1600 Amp Tin Plated CU Main Structure
1 Mechanical (5) 3/0-750 kcmil
16 Screw On Nameplate - White with Black letters
13 Padlockable lockoff device
1 PXE2 Meter, 1600 Amp CTs, Comm. Exp Card, with Display, PXM1K-
ETHMULT-NW (Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, HTTP, BACnet-IP,
EtherNet/IP)
1 SPD Series 250kA SPD, Standard w/ Surge Counter, w/ Fusible
Disconnect
2 Tin Plated Copper Ground Bus
1 1600 Amp Tin Plated CU Distribution Structure
9 Mechanical (1) 2/0-500 kcmil
3 Mechanical (1) #4-4/0
Detail Bill of Material
Page 14 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Qty
List of Materials
1 1600A 3P PDG63M Breaker [1600A Frame], Trip 1600 A, PXR20 LSIG/A
w/ ARMS, (5) 3/0-750 kcmil, Mechanical, Bottom
7 300A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame], Trip 300 A, Thermal Mag, (1)
2/0-500 kcmil, Mechanical
2 400A, 3P PDG33M Breaker [400A Frame], Trip 400 A, Thermal Mag, (1)
2/0-500 kcmil, Mechanical
3 200A, 3P PDG23M Breaker [225A Frame], Trip 200 A, Thermal Mag, (1)
#4-4/0, Mechanical
1 3P PD3-P
1 3P PD2-P
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Power Factor Correction
Harmonic Correction Unit
Catalog No
HCU2200D5N1
Designation
AHF-GAC ( 200AMP ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER )
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
HCU2200D5N1
1 HCU 200A 380-480V 3PH WallMounted NEMA1
TX2
3 3000:5 MultiTap SpltCore Current Xformer
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Motor Control Centers
60 Hz, Class 2B wiring, 480V 3-Phase Service, 65,000 Bracing, 65
Short Circuit Rating, Bottom Incoming, NEMA 1 Gasketed 21"
Front Mt Only enclosure, 600A Copper Main Horizontal Bus, No
Neutral, Main Breaker. Used X-Space: 79, Blank X-Space: 29,
Future X-Space: 0, MCC Lead Time Code: U.
Designation
PWTP-DWT-MCC1
Qty
List of Materials
1 PXE2 MTR DISP 1A/5A 415AC/ 300DC, 4CT
1 LGH Main Bkr (400A trip), Lugs: 2-#2-500 kcmil
1 PXE2MB1A4
3 600A Current transformer
1 120A Active Harmonic Correction Unit (EESS startup services
required.Price/sched services separately)
5 FVR Starter Size 1 [HMCP]
4 DG1 VFD, Constant torque, 23 FLA, 480V, HMCP
3 E125HCompact Bkr (40A trip)
1 J250HCompact Bkr (200A trip)
5 Size 1, STARTER-100VA Typical, w/extra 50VA
8 D15 Timer w/C-H C320 10-180 Sec
9 3 Pos. Sel. Sw. (Hand-Off-Auto)
9 Terminal Block - Latching Pull-Apart, Std.
5 Solid State Overload Relay (Standard C440)
4 2 Unit PB 10250T (Start/Stop)
9 1 Unit PB (Reset)
32 Other Specify
5 1 Unit PB (Emerg)
9 Wiremarkers at Each End
5 2 Unit PB 10250T (Fwd/Rev)
Detail Bill of Material
Page 15 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Qty
List of Materials
5 D15 On/Off Delay Timer
63 D7 4P 120V Relay
9 #16awg, MTW Control Wire
13 Standard Trip
4 Blank Device Panel
4 DG1 Dv/Dt Output Filter - FR2
1 RMS 310+ LSI Trip
1 250KA, SPD Standard + Surge Counter Features Package, with Circuit
Breaker
1 6" Door
8 12" Door
4 18" Door
9 Fire Wall Barriers between each section
9 600A Vertical Bus (Tin-plated cu)
1 2B Wiring
9 Bottom Vertical Bus Barrier
9 Labyrinth, Isolated/Insulated vertical bus barrier with shutters
9 300A Horiz. Cu Gnd Bus, 1/4" x 1" Bar
9 65KA Bus Bracing
1 PXM1K-ETHMULTI - PXM 1K COMMS - IPV6, ModbusTCP, BACNET IP,
ETHERNET IP, NON-WIFI
9 Tin Plated horizontal bus
9 600A 50Deg C, Copper Frnt Mtd 21" NEMA 1 Gasketed
4 3 % LINE REACTOR 15HP DRIVES ( PMP-7521,22,23,24)
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
MCC Aftermarket
SPEC 26 24 19 - 1.06-B MCC SPARE PARTS
SPEC 26 24 19 - 1.06-B MCC SPARE PARTS
B. Provide all manufacturer-recommended spare parts as an optional line
item. Coordinate
final spare parts purchased with the Owner. In addition, provide a separate
line item cost
adder for the following spare parts for each motor control center:
Number Required Description
1 Circuit breaker of each type, size, and rating provided (except main circuit
breakers).
1 Motor circuit protector (MCP) for each type, size, and rating provided.
1 Relay of each type and size provided.
1 Starter coil and complete set of contacts for each size and type of starter
provided.
2 sets Fuses of each size and type provided.
1 Control power transformers of each size and type provided.
1 Pilot device (e.g., pushbutton, selector switch, etc.) complete with contact
blocks and legend plates for each type, color, size, and rating provided.
Catalog No
SPEC 26 24 19 - 1.06-B M
Designation
SPEC 26 24 19 - 1.06-B MCC SPARE PARTS
Detail Bill of Material
Page 16 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Drives - Enclosed
RGX High Performance Regenerative Enclosed Drive, 125 HP (93
KW) High Overload (IH) Rated, 480VAC Three Phase Input,
NEMA 1 FILTERED Enclosure
Catalog No
RGX1564G650GC10900+
Designation
PMP-4321 BACKWASH PUMP NO. 1 156 FLA
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
Isolation Fuses
1 Isolation Fuses
Engineered
Options
1 Engineered Options
Circuit Breaker
1 Circuit Breaker
SPD (40KA per
phase)
1 SPD (40KA per phase)
Output Contactor
1 Output Contactor
DV/DT Filter
1 DV/DT Filter
Reset Button
1 30mm Reset Button - 10250T Series
Timer Relay
1 Timer Relay
Heavy Duty
Control Relay
5 Heavy Duty Control Relay
Start/Stop Buttons
1 30mm Start (Green) & Stop (Red) Buttons - 10250T Series
HOA Switch
1 30mm HOA Switch - 10250T Series
Spare Terminal
Block
4 Spare Terminal Block
Light Kit
1 30mm Power On (White), Drive Run (Green), & Drive Fault (Red) Push-To-
Test Light Kit - 10250T Series
CA Drawings by
Plant
1 CA Drawings by Plant
Modbus TCP/IP
1 Exp Comm - Modbus TCP/IP
Standard freight
1 Standard freight
1 Special: Price Adjustment
1 Special: nameplate white background and black letters Secure nameplates
to equipment enclosures using stainless steel sheet metal screws.
1 Special: relays, timers and contactor must be nema rated (D15 relays, TRF
timers and nema rated contactors)
1 Special: Power terminal blocks for VFD output to the motor shall be fixed-
mounted to a backplane or the enclosure. Mounting the terminal blocks on
DIN rails is not acceptable.
1 Special: Electrical bus, including ground bus, shall be tin-plated copper
1 Special: varnish boards
1 Special: VFD circuitry shall be designed such that the enclosure cooling
fans only run when the VFD unit is producing output power. Designs that
allow the enclosure cooling fans to run continuously when the VFD unit is
energized but not producing output power are not acceptable
1 Special: phase relay
1 Special: Motor space Heater CKT
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Drives - Enclosed
RGX High Performance Regenerative Enclosed Drive, 125 HP (93
KW) High Overload (IH) Rated, 480VAC Three Phase Input,
NEMA 1 FILTERED Enclosure
Catalog No
RGX1564G650GC10900+
Designation
PMP-4322 BACKWASH PUMP NO. 2 156 FLA
Detail Bill of Material
Page 17 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
Isolation Fuses
1 Isolation Fuses
Engineered
Options
1 Engineered Options
Circuit Breaker
1 Circuit Breaker
SPD (40KA per
phase)
1 SPD (40KA per phase)
Output Contactor
1 Output Contactor
DV/DT Filter
1 DV/DT Filter
Reset Button
1 30mm Reset Button - 10250T Series
Timer Relay
1 Timer Relay
Heavy Duty
Control Relay
5 Heavy Duty Control Relay
Start/Stop Buttons
1 30mm Start (Green) & Stop (Red) Buttons - 10250T Series
HOA Switch
1 30mm HOA Switch - 10250T Series
Spare Terminal
Block
4 Spare Terminal Block
Light Kit
1 30mm Power On (White), Drive Run (Green), & Drive Fault (Red) Push-To-
Test Light Kit - 10250T Series
CA Drawings by
Plant
1 CA Drawings by Plant
Modbus TCP/IP
1 Exp Comm - Modbus TCP/IP
Standard freight
1 Standard freight
1 Special: Price Adjustment
1 Special: nameplate white background and black letters Secure nameplates
to equipment enclosures using stainless steel sheet metal screws.
1 Special: relays, timers and contactor must be nema rated (D15 relays, TRF
timers and nema rated contactors)
1 Special: Power terminal blocks for VFD output to the motor shall be fixed-
mounted to a backplane or the enclosure. Mounting the terminal blocks on
DIN rails is not acceptable.
1 Special: Electrical bus, including ground bus, shall be tin-plated copper
1 Special: varnish boards
1 Special: VFD circuitry shall be designed such that the enclosure cooling
fans only run when the VFD unit is producing output power. Designs that
allow the enclosure cooling fans to run continuously when the VFD unit is
energized but not producing output power are not acceptable
1 Special: phase relay
1 Special: Motor space Heater CKT
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Drives - Enclosed
RGX High Performance Regenerative Enclosed Drive, 125 HP (93
KW) High Overload (IH) Rated, 480VAC Three Phase Input,
NEMA 1 FILTERED Enclosure
Catalog No
RGX1564G650GC10900+
Designation
PMP-4323 BACKWASH PUMP NO. 3 (STANDBY) 156 FLA
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
Isolation Fuses
1 Isolation Fuses
Engineered
Options
1 Engineered Options
Circuit Breaker
1 Circuit Breaker
SPD (40KA per
phase)
1 SPD (40KA per phase)
Output Contactor
1 Output Contactor
Detail Bill of Material
Page 18 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
DV/DT Filter
1 DV/DT Filter
Reset Button
1 30mm Reset Button - 10250T Series
Timer Relay
1 Timer Relay
Heavy Duty
Control Relay
5 Heavy Duty Control Relay
Start/Stop Buttons
1 30mm Start (Green) & Stop (Red) Buttons - 10250T Series
HOA Switch
1 30mm HOA Switch - 10250T Series
Spare Terminal
Block
4 Spare Terminal Block
Light Kit
1 30mm Power On (White), Drive Run (Green), & Drive Fault (Red) Push-To-
Test Light Kit - 10250T Series
CA Drawings by
Plant
1 CA Drawings by Plant
Modbus TCP/IP
1 Exp Comm - Modbus TCP/IP
Standard freight
1 Standard freight
1 Special: Price Adjustment
1 Special: nameplate white background and black letters Secure nameplates
to equipment enclosures using stainless steel sheet metal screws.
1 Special: relays, timers and contactor must be nema rated (D15 relays, TRF
timers and nema rated contactors)
1 Special: Power terminal blocks for VFD output to the motor shall be fixed-
mounted to a backplane or the enclosure. Mounting the terminal blocks on
DIN rails is not acceptable.
1 Special: Electrical bus, including ground bus, shall be tin-plated copper
1 Special: varnish boards
1 Special: VFD circuitry shall be designed such that the enclosure cooling
fans only run when the VFD unit is producing output power. Designs that
allow the enclosure cooling fans to run continuously when the VFD unit is
energized but not producing output power are not acceptable
1 Special: phase relay
1 Special: Motor space Heater CKT
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Drives - Enclosed
RGX High Performance Regenerative Enclosed Drive, 125 HP (93
KW) High Overload (IH) Rated, 480VAC Three Phase Input,
NEMA 1 FILTERED Enclosure
Catalog No
RGX1564G650GC10900+
Designation
PMP-4311 CONTACTOR FEED PUMP NO. 1 156 FLA
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
Isolation Fuses
1 Isolation Fuses
Engineered
Options
1 Engineered Options
Circuit Breaker
1 Circuit Breaker
SPD (40KA per
phase)
1 SPD (40KA per phase)
Output Contactor
1 Output Contactor
DV/DT Filter
1 DV/DT Filter
Reset Button
1 30mm Reset Button - 10250T Series
Timer Relay
1 Timer Relay
Heavy Duty
Control Relay
5 Heavy Duty Control Relay
Start/Stop Buttons
1 30mm Start (Green) & Stop (Red) Buttons - 10250T Series
Detail Bill of Material
Page 19 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
HOA Switch
1 30mm HOA Switch - 10250T Series
Spare Terminal
Block
4 Spare Terminal Block
Light Kit
1 30mm Power On (White), Drive Run (Green), & Drive Fault (Red) Push-To-
Test Light Kit - 10250T Series
CA Drawings by
Plant
1 CA Drawings by Plant
Modbus TCP/IP
1 Exp Comm - Modbus TCP/IP
Standard freight
1 Standard freight
1 Special: Price Adjustment
1 Special: nameplate white background and black letters Secure nameplates
to equipment enclosures using stainless steel sheet metal screws.
1 Special: relays, timers and contactor must be nema rated (D15 relays, TRF
timers and nema rated contactors)
1 Special: Power terminal blocks for VFD output to the motor shall be fixed-
mounted to a backplane or the enclosure. Mounting the terminal blocks on
DIN rails is not acceptable.
1 Special: Electrical bus, including ground bus, shall be tin-plated copper
1 Special: varnish boards
1 Special: VFD circuitry shall be designed such that the enclosure cooling
fans only run when the VFD unit is producing output power. Designs that
allow the enclosure cooling fans to run continuously when the VFD unit is
energized but not producing output power are not acceptable
1 Special: phase relay
1 Special: Motor space Heater CKT
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Drives - Enclosed
RGX High Performance Regenerative Enclosed Drive, 125 HP (93
KW) High Overload (IH) Rated, 480VAC Three Phase Input,
NEMA 1 FILTERED Enclosure
Catalog No
RGX1564G650GC10900+
Designation
PMP-4312 CONTACTOR FEED PUMP NO. 2 156 FLA
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
Isolation Fuses
1 Isolation Fuses
Engineered
Options
1 Engineered Options
Circuit Breaker
1 Circuit Breaker
SPD (40KA per
phase)
1 SPD (40KA per phase)
Output Contactor
1 Output Contactor
DV/DT Filter
1 DV/DT Filter
Reset Button
1 30mm Reset Button - 10250T Series
Timer Relay
1 Timer Relay
Heavy Duty
Control Relay
5 Heavy Duty Control Relay
Start/Stop Buttons
1 30mm Start (Green) & Stop (Red) Buttons - 10250T Series
HOA Switch
1 30mm HOA Switch - 10250T Series
Spare Terminal
Block
4 Spare Terminal Block
Light Kit
1 30mm Power On (White), Drive Run (Green), & Drive Fault (Red) Push-To-
Test Light Kit - 10250T Series
CA Drawings by
Plant
1 CA Drawings by Plant
Modbus TCP/IP
1 Exp Comm - Modbus TCP/IP
Detail Bill of Material
Page 20 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
Standard freight
1 Standard freight
1 Special: Price Adjustment
1 Special: nameplate white background and black letters Secure nameplates
to equipment enclosures using stainless steel sheet metal screws.
1 Special: relays, timers and contactor must be nema rated (D15 relays, TRF
timers and nema rated contactors)
1 Special: Power terminal blocks for VFD output to the motor shall be fixed-
mounted to a backplane or the enclosure. Mounting the terminal blocks on
DIN rails is not acceptable.
1 Special: Electrical bus, including ground bus, shall be tin-plated copper
1 Special: varnish boards
1 Special: VFD circuitry shall be designed such that the enclosure cooling
fans only run when the VFD unit is producing output power. Designs that
allow the enclosure cooling fans to run continuously when the VFD unit is
energized but not producing output power are not acceptable
1 Special: phase relay
1 Special: Motor space Heater CKT
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Drives - Enclosed
RGX High Performance Regenerative Enclosed Drive, 125 HP (93
KW) High Overload (IH) Rated, 480VAC Three Phase Input,
NEMA 1 FILTERED Enclosure
Catalog No
RGX1564G650GC10900+
Designation
PMP-4313 CONTACTOR FEED PUMP NO. 3 156 FLA
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
Isolation Fuses
1 Isolation Fuses
Engineered
Options
1 Engineered Options
Circuit Breaker
1 Circuit Breaker
SPD (40KA per
phase)
1 SPD (40KA per phase)
Output Contactor
1 Output Contactor
DV/DT Filter
1 DV/DT Filter
Reset Button
1 30mm Reset Button - 10250T Series
Timer Relay
1 Timer Relay
Heavy Duty
Control Relay
5 Heavy Duty Control Relay
Start/Stop Buttons
1 30mm Start (Green) & Stop (Red) Buttons - 10250T Series
HOA Switch
1 30mm HOA Switch - 10250T Series
Spare Terminal
Block
4 Spare Terminal Block
Light Kit
1 30mm Power On (White), Drive Run (Green), & Drive Fault (Red) Push-To-
Test Light Kit - 10250T Series
CA Drawings by
Plant
1 CA Drawings by Plant
Modbus TCP/IP
1 Exp Comm - Modbus TCP/IP
Standard freight
1 Standard freight
1 Special: Price Adjustment
1 Special: nameplate white background and black letters Secure nameplates
to equipment enclosures using stainless steel sheet metal screws.
1 Special: relays, timers and contactor must be nema rated (D15 relays, TRF
timers and nema rated contactors)
1 Special: Power terminal blocks for VFD output to the motor shall be fixed-
mounted to a backplane or the enclosure. Mounting the terminal blocks on
DIN rails is not acceptable.
Detail Bill of Material
Page 21 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
1 Special: Electrical bus, including ground bus, shall be tin-plated copper
1 Special: varnish boards
1 Special: VFD circuitry shall be designed such that the enclosure cooling
fans only run when the VFD unit is producing output power. Designs that
allow the enclosure cooling fans to run continuously when the VFD unit is
energized but not producing output power are not acceptable
1 Special: phase relay
1 Special: Motor space Heater CKT
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Drives - Enclosed
RGX High Performance Regenerative Enclosed Drive, 125 HP (93
KW) High Overload (IH) Rated, 480VAC Three Phase Input,
NEMA 1 FILTERED Enclosure
Catalog No
RGX1564G650GC10900+
Designation
PMP-4314 CONTACTOR FEED PUMP NO. 4 (STANDBY) 156 F
Catalog No
Qty
List of Materials
Isolation Fuses
1 Isolation Fuses
Engineered
Options
1 Engineered Options
Circuit Breaker
1 Circuit Breaker
SPD (40KA per
phase)
1 SPD (40KA per phase)
Output Contactor
1 Output Contactor
DV/DT Filter
1 DV/DT Filter
Reset Button
1 30mm Reset Button - 10250T Series
Timer Relay
1 Timer Relay
Heavy Duty
Control Relay
5 Heavy Duty Control Relay
Start/Stop Buttons
1 30mm Start (Green) & Stop (Red) Buttons - 10250T Series
HOA Switch
1 30mm HOA Switch - 10250T Series
Spare Terminal
Block
4 Spare Terminal Block
Light Kit
1 30mm Power On (White), Drive Run (Green), & Drive Fault (Red) Push-To-
Test Light Kit - 10250T Series
CA Drawings by
Plant
1 CA Drawings by Plant
Modbus TCP/IP
1 Exp Comm - Modbus TCP/IP
Standard freight
1 Standard freight
1 Special: Price Adjustment
1 Special: nameplate white background and black letters Secure nameplates
to equipment enclosures using stainless steel sheet metal screws.
1 Special: relays, timers and contactor must be nema rated (D15 relays, TRF
timers and nema rated contactors)
1 Special: Power terminal blocks for VFD output to the motor shall be fixed-
mounted to a backplane or the enclosure. Mounting the terminal blocks on
DIN rails is not acceptable.
1 Special: Electrical bus, including ground bus, shall be tin-plated copper
1 Special: varnish boards
1 Special: VFD circuitry shall be designed such that the enclosure cooling
fans only run when the VFD unit is producing output power. Designs that
allow the enclosure cooling fans to run continuously when the VFD unit is
energized but not producing output power are not acceptable
1 Special: phase relay
1 Special: Motor space Heater CKT
Detail Bill of Material
Page 22 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Adjustable Frequency
Drive
SPEC 26 29 23 - 1.08--A-E VFD SPARE PARTS
SPEC 26 29 23 - 1.08--A-E VFD SPARE PARTS
1.08 SPARE PARTS
A. The VFDs and accessories shall be furnished with all spare parts as
recommended by
the equipment manufacturer. In addition to the manufacturer’s recommended
spare
parts, the Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts:
1. Two (2) sets of fuses for each size and type of fuse provided.
2. One (1) HMI per type of HMI provided.
3. One (1) set of enclosure air filters for each VFD.
4. For each VFD unit without field-replaceable internals, furnish one (1)
spare VFD
unit per size provided.
5. For each VFD unit with field-replaceable internals, furnish one (1) fully
functional
main control circuit board per VFD unit size provided.
B. The spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long-term
storage, bearing
labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which
they are
intended.
C. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to
which they pertain.
The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such spare parts until
completion of
the Work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner.
D. Spare parts lists included with the shop drawing submittal shall indicate
specific sizes,
quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1
lot of
packing material" are not acceptable.
8/4/2025 26 29 23 70048-013
GMP2 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate
parts inventory
control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate
number. Those
parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same parts
number.
Catalog No
SPEC 26 29 23 - 1.08--A-
Designation
(15HP) SPEC 26 29 23 - 1.08--A-E VFD SPARE PARTS
Detail Bill of Material
Page 23 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
Item No.
Qty
Product
Description
1
Adjustable Frequency
Drive
SPEC 26 29 23 - 1.08--A-E VFD SPARE PARTS
SPEC 26 29 23 - 1.08--A-E VFD SPARE PARTS
1.08 SPARE PARTS
A. The VFDs and accessories shall be furnished with all spare parts as
recommended by
the equipment manufacturer. In addition to the manufacturer’s recommended
spare
parts, the Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts:
1. Two (2) sets of fuses for each size and type of fuse provided.
2. One (1) HMI per type of HMI provided.
3. One (1) set of enclosure air filters for each VFD.
4. For each VFD unit without field-replaceable internals, furnish one (1)
spare VFD
unit per size provided.
5. For each VFD unit with field-replaceable internals, furnish one (1) fully
functional
main control circuit board per VFD unit size provided.
B. The spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long-term
storage, bearing
labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which
they are
intended.
C. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to
which they pertain.
The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such spare parts until
completion of
the Work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner.
D. Spare parts lists included with the shop drawing submittal shall indicate
specific sizes,
quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1
lot of
packing material" are not acceptable.
8/4/2025 26 29 23 70048-013
GMP2 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION PECOS SWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate
parts inventory
control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate
number. Those
parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same parts
number.
Catalog No
SPEC 26 29 23 - 1.08--A-
Designation
(125HP) SPEC 26 29 23 - 1.08--A-E VFD SPARE PARTS
Eaton Selling Policy 25-000 applies.
Detail Bill of Material
Page 24 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
NET CONTRACTOR $$ 999,500.00
NOTES TO CONTRACTOR
1) MCC:; 6 PULSE DRIVES 15HP NO PASSIVE FILTER , LINE REACTOR AND
DVDT FILTER INCLUDED. 120KA ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER BUILT IN TO
MCC
2) DRIVES 125HP NEMA 1 PER JAMES HAYES CALL TO ENGINEER
3) 200 AMP AHF SEPARATE OFF SWB
4) NOTE THERE IS $39K PLUS OF SPARE PARTS INCLUDED,
SUBMITTALS :
2000KVA 6-8 WEEKS SHIPMENT AFTER RELEASE 38-45 WEEKS
SWITCHBOARD PWTP-GAC-SWBD1 SUBMITTALS 6-9 WEEKS SHIP AFTER RLEASE 49-52-WEEKS
MCC 24 WEEKS SHIPMENT AFTER RELEASE 45 -48 WEEKS SHIP AFTER RELEASE
DRIVES SUBMITTALS 6-8 WEEKS SHIP AFTER RELEASE 25-28-WEEKS
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SUBMITTALS 6-8 WEEKS SHIP AFTER RLEASE 12-16 -WEEKS
Detail Bill of Material
Page 25 of 25
Project Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS
WATER IMPROVEMENTS
Negotiation No:
PX500805X5K3
General Order No:
Alternate No:
0000
Phillip Fulmer
08/27/2025 7:21 PM
If Eaton and the buyer entity listed on this purchase order have a separate executed written agreement for the products/services herein, then that
agreement applies. Otherwise, Eaton’s Selling Policy 25000 (https://www.eaton.com/ca/en-gb/support/terms-conditions.html) controls and supersedes
all prior correspondence or communications between Eaton and the buyer, and any additional or different terms proposed by the buyer are rejected.
All orders must be released for manufacture within 90 days of date of order entry. If approval drawings are required, drawings must be returned
approved for release within 60 days of mailing. If drawings are not returned accordingly, and/or if shipment is delayed for any reason, the price of the
order will increase by 1.0% per month or fraction thereof for the time the shipment is delayed.
Seller shall not be responsible for any failure to perform, or delay in performance of, its obligations resulting from the COVID-19 pandemic or any
future epidemic, and Buyer shall not be entitled to any damages resulting thereof.
SHORING QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
SHORING
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
43
31.43.301
MOBLIZATION
1
LS
6,000.00
$
6,000.00
$
ENGINEERING
1
LS
5,000.00
$
5,000.00
$
SOIL NAIL SHORING
4884
SF
55.00
$
268,620.00
$
279,620.00
$
2.00%
5,592.40
$
0.24%
684.51
$
285,896.91
$
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
HARK DRILLING INC.
BID QUANTITIES
Date:
Sep 3, 2025
To:
Ed Kluber / Archer Western
Project:
Chandler Pacos GMP 2
RE:
Temp Shoring
Hark Drilling is pleased to present the following proposal for the installation of temp shoring for
the GMP 2 shoring.
Pricing may vary depending on the final stamped design.
If there are any questions related to this scope of work, feel free to contact Brandon Larsen with
Hark Drilling.
Bid Item
Quantity
Units of
Measure
Unit Price
ESTIMATED COSTS
1. Mobilization
1
EA
$6,000.00
$6,000.00
2. Engineering
1
EA
$5,000.00
$5,000.00
3. GMP 2 Shoring
4884
SF
$55.00
$268,620.00
Scope Clarifications & Exclusions
•
Pricing assumes – This proposal becomes part of the contract, or that all exclusions,
inclusions, and clarifications make it in the contract.
•
Location, removal, and protection of utilities interfering with platform pile installation
to be performed by others.
•
Access to site for a drill rig, truck, crane, manlift accessible and maintained by others.
•
Pricing Includes – Calc package and Engineering.
•
Pricing Includes – Nail testing.
•
Pricing Excludes – Any and All excavation and spoil haul off.
•
Pricing Excludes – Any Material testing or inspections.
•
Pricing Excludes – Any and all utility locating, removal and relocation.
•
Pricing Excludes – Traffic/Pedestrian control.
•
Pricing Excludes – Surveying of any kind.
•
Pricing Excludes - Movement monitoring and vibration monitoring.
•
Pricing Excludes - Storm water control and planning.
HD
HARK DRILLING INCORPORATED
12225 W Peoria Ave. Suite A
210 West 5th Avenue
El Mirage, AZ 85335
Murray, UT 84107
Phone: 623-434-3105 Fax: 623-434-3175
Phone: 833-918-1234
•
Pricing Excludes – Railroad, road, and traffic protection / control.
•
Pricing Excludes – Any and all removals of work beyond proposed.
•
Pricing Excludes – Bonds; can be added for approximately 2%.
•
Pricing Excludes – Certified payroll unless specified at time of bidding.
•
Purchaser to obtain easements / permits required for system installation.
•
Potable water to be provided at drill site by client at a rate not to hinder operations.
This is all required to perform the work stated in the proposal. This proposal will be
valid for 5 days.
Payment Terms: Full payment without retention is due within 30 days of invoice.
Unpaid amounts shall accrue interest at rate of 1.5% per month. Customer shall be
liable for all costs of collecting amounts due and unpaid, including reasonable
attorney's fees. This proposal is based on today’s market prices for materials, certain
materials, and goods (oil/diesel, cement, concrete, steel, and wood) have
experienced rapid changes in pricing. The contract will be executed based on market
prices at time of construction.
Once Hark Drilling, Inc.'s work has commenced and the project happens to
delay to no fault of Hark Drilling, a standby rate of $525 per hour will be applied
to the invoice.
Hark Drilling, Incorporated appreciates your business and will do everything within
control to meet your needs and make your project a success.
Sincerely,
HARK DRILLING, INC
FENCES & GATES QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
FENCES & GATES
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
01
32.101.114
MOBILIZATION
1
EA
1,500.00
$
1,500.00
$
-
$
-
$
INSTALL 8' CHAINLINK FENCE W/ PRIVACY SCREEN
965
LF
108.00
$
104,220.00
$
74.51
$
71,900.00
$
105,720.00
$
71,900.00
$
0.00%
-
$
0.00%
-
$
0.24%
253.73
$
0.24%
172.56
$
105,973.73
$
72,072.56
$
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
HURRICANE FENCE CO.
ADAMS FENCE LLC
BID QUANTITIES
DATE
Contractor
PROJECT
Job Address
Addenda(s)
noted
Alternate
NONE
QTY
UNIT PRICE
LINE TOTAL
1
$1,500.00
$1,500.00
965
$108.00
$104,220.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
SUBTOTAL
$105,720.00
SALES TAX
$0.00
TOTAL
$105,720.00
EA Mobilization
Archer Western Construction
Attn: Ed Kluber
385-237-7704
1475 E. Pecos Rd.
ekluber@walshgroup.com
Total
$105,720.00
LF install 8' H chain link fence w/privacy screen
City of Chandler Pecos Water P1 (GMP2)
September 3, 2025
503 W Watkins St.
Chandler, AZ 85286
Phoenix, AZ 85040
FAX : (602) 256-7801
4710 E. Elwood St., Ste. 6
Licensed, Bonded & Insured Since 2006
Phoenix, AZ 85003
PHONE: (602) 256-7800
ROC 224210
Base Bid
$105,720.00
DESCRIPTION
QUOTE
EXCLUSIONS: grading, staking taxes, permits, bonds, fire dept., locks, boxes,
signs, mow curbs, saw cutting, and core drilling.
Contact Person: Steve Adams
602-399-2486/steve@adamsfence.net
HURRICANE FENCE AGREES TO PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING:
mattm@hurricanefenceco.com
TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCE (POUNDED POSTS - WIRE TOP) - $61,660.00
PROPOSAL ASSUMES FENCE LINE, END, CORNER, GATE POST LOCATIONS TO BE STAKED BY OTHERS
PROPOSAL DOES NOT INCLUDE STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING OR DEFERRED SUBMITTAL AS PART OF BASE BID
PROPOSAL ASSUMES ALL CONCRETE / ASPHALT SAW CUTTING BY OTHERS
PROPOSAL ASSUMES ALL CONCRETE / ASPHALT CORING BY OTHERS
FIRE DEPARTMENT PERMIT NOT INCLUDED IN BID / CAN BE OBTAIN BY HURRICANE FENCE FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS
ALL FIRE DEVICES AND SIGNS PROVIDED BY OTHERS, HFC TO INSTALL ONLY
ALL ACCESS CONTROL & POWER / CONDUITS / WIRE BY OTHERS
ALL HARDWARE AND PANIC HARDWARE BY OTHERS
ekluber@walshgroup.com
385-237-7704
GRADING, STAKING, PERMITS, SURVEY, CONCRETE OTHER THAN POST FOOTINGS, CORE DRILLING, REMOVAL OF
EXCLUSIONS:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM, PHASE 1 (GMP 2)
1475 EAST PECOS ROAD
CHANDLER
ARIZONA
85286
ALTERNATE
965 LF - 8' + 1' HIGH GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH PRIVACY WINDSCREEN SCREEN & BARBWIRE
TERMINAL / PULL POSTS SET IN CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS
PROPOSAL ASSUMES NORMAL DIGGING CONDITIONS
COMMERCIAL / INDUSTRIAL CHAIN LINK & ORNAMENTAL IRON - GATE AUTOMATION
ARCHER WESTERN CONSTRUCTION
ED KLUBER
9/2/25
P.O. BOX 18166
PHOENIX, AZ 85005
OFFICE: (602) 484-9005
www.hurricanefenceco.com
WO & WOSB CERTIFIED
BID PROPOSAL
BASE BID - $71,900.00
TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCE
965 LF - 8' + 1' HIGH GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH PRIVACY WINDSCREEN SCREEN & BARB WIRE (PER SPECIFICATION)
PLEASE CALL WITH ANY QUESTIONS,
MATTHEW MITCHELL
(480) 640-7750
SPOILS OR VEGETATION, BONDS, KNOX BOXES, HARDWARE OTHER THAN GATE HINGES, SECURITY CLEARANCES,
LANDSCAPE DAMAGE OR REPAIRS, ELECTRICAL, SIGNAGE, DUST CONTROL, BACKFILL, MULTIPLE MOBILIZATIONS,
GROUNDING, DEFERRED SUBMITTALS, DELEGATED DESIGNS, ENGINEERING AND CONDUITS.
CERTIFIED WO & WOSB BUSINESS
LINE POSTS DRIVEN INTO GROUND - NO CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS
7 GAUGE WIRE TOP & BOTTOM
1-5/8" BRACE & TRUSS AT TERMINAL / PULL POSTS
NONE
NOTES AND CLARIFICATIONS:
SPOILS TO BE STOCK PILED ON SITE, NO REMOVAL.
ADDENDUM NOTED:
PROPOSAL ASSUMES SURVEY BY OTHERS
PROPOSAL ASSUMES PRIVATE LOCATE OF UTILITIES BY OTHERS
PROPOSAL ASSUMES UNDERGROUND UTLITIES LOCATED BY OTHERS
PROPOSAL ASSUMES POSTS & FENCING TO BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO FINISH LANDSCAPE AND/OR CONCRETE FLATWORK
PROPOSAL ASSUMES AREAS OF FENCE & GATES WILL BE CLEARED, GRADED & GRUBBED BEFORE INSTALLATION
PROPOSAL ASSUMES GRADE WILL BE SET BY OWNER BEFORE POSTS ARE INSTALLED
PROPOSAL ASSUMES POTHOLING / HYDRO-VAC EXCAVATION OF HOLES BY OTHERS
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:
CITY:
ATTN:
ZIP:
DATE:
STATE:
PROJECT ADDRESS:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:
CITY:
ATTN:
ZIP:
DATE:
STATE:
PROJECT ADDRESS:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:
CITY:
ATTN:
ZIP:
DATE:
STATE:
PROJECT ADDRESS:
EMAIL:
PHONE:
PIPE – GENERAL QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
PIPE - GENERAL
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
01
31.01.100
SILT FENCE
1000
LF
0.562
$
562.00
$
0.55
$
550.00
$
0.60
$
600.00
$
0.60
$
600.00
$
01
31.01.103
INLET PROTECTION
10
EA
147.50
$
1,475.00
$
65.00
$
650.00
$
150.00
$
1,500.00
$
150.00
$
1,500.00
$
01
31.01.106
MIRAFI FABRIC
1
RL
311.43
$
311.43
$
466.36
$
466.36
$
475.00
$
475.00
$
475.00
$
475.00
$
01
33.01.400
4" PVC
160
LF
2.28
$
364.80
$
2.51
$
401.60
$
3.00
$
480.00
$
2.83
$
452.80
$
01
33.01.400
4" PVC 45 BEND
2
EA
14.72
$
29.44
$
30.07
$
60.14
$
30.00
$
60.00
$
27.85
$
55.70
$
01
33.01.400
4" PVC CONNECTION COUPLING
1
EA
6.21
$
6.21
$
10.00
$
10.00
$
10.00
$
10.00
$
10.00
$
10.00
$
01
33.01.401
6" CPVC
600
LF
47.19
$
28,314.00
$
31.55
$
18,930.00
$
50.00
$
30,000.00
$
50.00
$
30,000.00
$
01
33.01.401
6" CPVC 90 BEND
10
EA
129.20
$
1,292.00
$
139.14
$
1,391.40
$
140.00
$
1,400.00
$
140.00
$
1,400.00
$
01
33.01.401
6" CPVC CONNECTION COUPLING
4
EA
75.43
$
301.72
$
297.68
$
1,190.72
$
300.00
$
1,200.00
$
300.00
$
1,200.00
$
01
33.43.100
48" WSP & 16" WSP GE LINES
144
LF
EXCLUDED
250,000.00
$
345,223.00
$
662,150.00
$
566,283.00
$
01
33.43.200
16" WSP CTW LINES
281
LF
EXCLUDED
100,000.00
$
382,656.60
$
368,873.22
$
697,875.00
$
601,976.50
$
1.00%
3,826.57
$
1.00%
3,688.73
$
0.00%
-
$
1.00%
6,019.77
$
0.24%
927.56
$
0.24%
894.15
$
0.24%
1,674.90
$
0.24%
1,459.19
$
387,410.73
$
373,456.10
$
699,549.90
$
609,455.46
$
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
HD FOWLER
STRUCTURAL STEEL & PLATE
FABRICATION
FERGUSON WATERWORKS
CORE & MAIN
BID QUANTITIES
INCLUDED ABOVE
INCLUDED ABOVE
INCLUDED ABOVE
ARCHER WESTERN PIPELINE
4710 E ELWOOD STREET SUITE 6
PHOENIX, AZ 85040
Job
City of Chandler Pecos Water System
chandler, AZ
Bid Date: 08/26/2025
Bid #: 4412325
Sales Representative
Christopher Harrison
(T) 602-268-8781
(F) 602-268-8973
Chris.Harrison@coreandmain.com
Core & Main
1410 W Harvard Ave
Gilbert, AZ 85233
(T) 4809267003
08/27/2025 - 8:01 AM
Actual taxes may vary
Page 1 of 2
Bid Proposal for City of Chandler Pecos Water System
CUSTOMER
CONTACT
NOTES
Seq#
Qty
Description
Units
Price
Ext Price
10
ALL PRICING GOOD FOR 30 DAYS
20
FROM ORIGINAL BID DATE
30
40
QUOTED TO:ED
50
140
4 PVC SDR35 SWR PIPE (G) 20'
FT
2.28
319.20
60
2
4 PVC SDR35 SWR 45 GXG
EA
14.72
29.44
70
1
1056-44 4 CI/PVCXCI/PVC CPLG
EA
6.21
6.21
80
600
6 SCH80 CPVC PIPE SWB
FT
47.19
28,314.00
90
10
6 CPVC S80 90 HXH 806-060C
EA
129.20
1,292.00
100
4
6 CPVC S80 CPLG HXH 829-060C
EA
75.43
301.72
110
10
36"X100'ROLL SILT FENCE W/POST
RL
56.20
562.00
120
1
MIRAFI 3XT 12'X150' GEOGRID 200SY
EA
311.43
311.43
130
10
3X3 DANDY CURB BAG
EA
147.50
1,475.00
Sub Total
32,611.00
Tax
0.00
Total
32,611.00
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED HEREIN, PRICES QUOTED ARE VALID IF ACCEPTED BY CUSTOMER AND PRODUCTS ARE RELEASED BY
CUSTOMER FOR MANUFACTURE WITHIN THIRTY (30) CALENDAR DAYS FROM THE DATE OF THIS QUOTATION. CORE & MAIN LP
RESERVES THE RIGHT TO INCREASE PRICES TO ADDRESS FACTORS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS,
TARIFFS, TRANSPORTATION, FUEL AND RAW MATERIAL COSTS. DELIVERY WILL COMMENCE BASED UPON MANUFACTURER LEAD
TIMES. ANY MATERIAL DELIVERIES DELAYED BEYOND MANUFACTURER LEAD TIMES MAY BE SUBJECT TO PRICE INCREASES AND/OR
APPLICABLE STORAGE FEES. THIS BID PROPOSAL IS CONTINGENT UPON BUYER’S ACCEPTANCE OF SELLER’S TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF SALE, AS MODIFIED FROM TIME TO TIME, WHICH CAN BE FOUND AT: https://coreandmain.com/terms-of-sale/
THIS BID MAY INCLUDE GLOBALLY SOURCED (IMPORTED) MATERIALS THAT ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGING TARIFFS. PRICES ARE
SUBJECT TO CHANGE DUE TO POTENTIAL ADDITIONAL TARIFFS IMPOSED BY THE U.S. GOVERNMENT. IF IMPOSED, PRICES WILL
INCREASE BY THE SAME PERCENTAGE AND WILL BE EFFECTIVE ON THE DATE THAT THE NEW TARIFFS ARE IMPLEMENTED. THESE
ITEMS SHOULD BE PURCHASED WITH HASTE TO AVOID ANY ADDITIONAL RISING TARIFF COSTS.
08/27/2025 - 8:01 AM
Actual taxes may vary
Page 2 of 2
ARCHER WESTERN PIPELINE
Job Location: chandler, AZ
Bid Date: 08/26/2025
Core & Main Bid #: 4412325
Core & Main
1410 W Harvard Ave
Gilbert, AZ 85233
Phone: 4809267003
Fax: 4809267050
Bid Proposal for City of Chandler Pecos Water System
Project
COC Pecos Water System Phs1 GMP2 DB100
Chandler, AZ
USA
Bid Date
9/3/2025
Bid Time
5:00 PM
Sales Contact
Rick Chavez
Outside Sales
Ferguson Waterworks
C:(480) 619-2550
E: rick.chavez@ferguson.com
PLEASE FOLLOW LINK BELOW TO MARKED UP DRAWINGS USED IN
PREPARING THIS INTIAL SCOPE. ( Small and Misc. Items may not be marked)
Click to view marked up drawings
Click to view Misc Job Site Materials and Safety Equipment catalog
Click to View Geo-Synthetics Material
Click to View Ferguson Terms and Conditions of Sale
CONTACT YOUR SALES REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY FOR ASSISTANCE
WITH DBE/MBE/WBE/SMALL BUSINESS REQUIREMENTS
Click to View US Distributor Alliance Program Policy
Ferguson WW Quote Total: $345,634.38
Revised Grand Total: $345,634.38
Project Manager
James Nelson
Estimator
James Nelson
Notes
ATTENTION
QUALIFICATIONS & DELIVERY SCHEDULE
The Ferguson Plant Division Qualifications and Delivery Schedule for this project are
shown in separate worksheets within this document. See corresponding tab titles below.
Please review these documents thoroughly prior to acting upon this proposal. Both
documents are required in order for this quotation to be considered complete.
ESCALATION
The following suggested escalation terms are offered for consideration and applied at
Bidder's discretion and risk to pricing contained within this quotation.
A.) 2.5% price escalation every 30-days for all volatile commodity product outlined in
the Qualifications Page.
B.) 5% price escalation every 90-days for all other products.
Suggested escalation terms are not guaranteed and meant for budgetary puposes only.
Manufacturer excalation terms, if applicable, will be verified post-bid once Buyer's
written commitment is received.
DRAWINGS
The Ferguson Plant Division is pleased to offer line drawing services for supplied exposed
ductile iron systems, 3" and larger, at a cost of $1,000 per sheet, including up to two (2)
revisions. Drawing services for underground piping and other exposed systems can be
quoted upon request. Please contact your Ferguson sales representative for more
information.
TERMS
This quotation is offered contingent upon the Buyer's acceptance of Seller's terms
and conditions which are incorporated into the project qualifications sheet referenced
above, or on the web at https://www.ferguson.com/content/website-info/terms-of-sale.
This scope, the terms and conditions herein, and all supplemental attachments shall be
incorporated as part of a purchase agreement should this proposal be accepted.
In providing this proposal, we appreciate the opportunity to support you in the successful
pursuit of this project.
Thank you!
Page 1
9/17/2025 10:27 AM
PROJECT NAME
Ductile Iron Pipe Package
-
$
Carbon Steel Fabrication Package
345,223
$
Stainless Steel Fabrication Package
-
$
Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe Package
-
$
Process Valve Package
-
$
Pipe Support Package
-
$
Project Misc Package
412
$
Additional Packages
-
$
PACKAGE TOTALS
345,634
$
Report by PACKAGE SUMMARY
Page 1
9/17/2025 10:27 AM
PROJECT NAME
ID
DESCRIPTION
AMOUNT
1170.000
PVC SEWER PIPE - GASKETED BELL JOINT
351
1180.000
PVC SEWER FITTINGS - GASKETED / SOLVENT WELD
60
1495.000
CARBON STEEL PACKAGE
345,223
Total
345,634
Report by GROUP SUMMARY
125 West 500 North, North Salt Lake, UT 84054 | www.ssandpf.com | Phone 801.292.8484
9.4.2025
1 | P a g e
Proposal No: 251289 | Budgetary Quote
To:
Ed Kluber| Archer Western Construction
Re:
City of Chandler Pecos Water System
Location:
Chandler, Arizona
Budgetary Scope / Customer Provided Drawings:
•
Underslab Piping Plan per drawings M43-01 thru M43-02
o 48” and 16” Cement lined pipe
o Pipe Supplied in 30 ft sections (Segments shown in by orange line)
General Notes:
•
Price is based on the awarding of all items included.
•
All fabrication will be in strict accordance with the AISC Steel Construction Manual and Code of Standard
Practice, latest edition, including all supplements and Commentary.
•
All audits required by the customer will be an additional cost to the contractor.
•
All engineering and engineering stamp costs are not included in our price if required.
•
Schedule, pricing, and material are in effect and to be confirmed at time of order.
•
Welding procedures can be submitted for approval upon request.
•
SS&PF Standard Tolerances of plus or minus 1/8”
•
48” pipe material has a 13 week Lead time
Inclusions:
•
Structural Steel per the above drawings and/or Scope.
•
SSPC6 blast Profile.
•
Painted per specification:
o One coat of Tnemec Tneme-zinc 90-97, 5.0 mils DFT.
o One Topcoat Tnemec 73,3-5 mils DFT. (Color TBD)
•
Up to 1 Gallon of Touch up Paint.
125 West 500 North, North Salt Lake, UT 84054 | www.ssandpf.com | Phone 801.292.8484
9.4.2025
2 | P a g e
•
Permits and transportation FOB: Chandler, Arizona
•
Structural detailed drawings for submittal.
o One redline/drawing approval submittal – thereafter cost will be validated based on hours spent on
changes ($110.00 per hour).
•
Dimensional & Visual Inspection.
Exclusions:
•
Unloading at delivery site.
•
Misc. bolts wood to wood, wood to concrete
and masonry.
•
Grout or dry packing, & Concrete fill.
•
Costs of tests and inspections (shop and field)
beyond inclusion list.
•
Cost of bonds, permits or special insurance.
•
All items shown on Architectural, Mechanical,
Electrical, Plumbing, Civil or Landscape drawings
(UNO).
•
All material 1/8” (10ga.) or lighter (UNO).
•
All Sleeves and Anchor bolts.
•
Fasteners for other trades.
•
Rebar and mesh, including welding of same.
•
Liquidated damages.
•
Steel Erection and Field measurements.
•
Openings for other trades not shown on
structural drawings.
•
All demolition and onsite work.
•
Connection design, & all engineering in its
entirety.
•
Stamped Drawings.
•
Any and all materials not specifically listed in
above drawings/scope
Sequential Schedule:
•
Detailed Drawings
Weeks 0-2
•
Customer Approval
Weeks 2-3
•
Materials Procurement
Weeks 12-14
•
Fabrication
Weeks 15-17 (After receipt of Customer Approved Fabrication IFC Drawings)
•
Painting
Weeks 2-3
•
Allow
32-35 Weeks for normal delivery (Negotiable)
125 West 500 North, North Salt Lake, UT 84054 | www.ssandpf.com | Phone 801.292.8484
9.4.2025
3 | P a g e
This schedule is subject to the following:
a. Shop load at time of order placement.
b. Receipt of Approved Fabrication Drawings.
c. Supply chain and Production is not impacted by shelter in place.
d. A 2-5 Day scrub of drawings after receipt of approval drawings, but prior to
release to shop. (Not included in schedule as it varies depending on project)
e. 24 Hour RFI turnaround times.
An expedited schedule can be negotiated depending on customer needs.
Terms:
50% NET 30 upon receipt of order. 50% NET 30 upon completed fabrication in monthly progress payments.
Quote Pricing is based on above “Payment Terms”. Any Adjustments to these terms can/will change total amount of
proposal pricing.
Budgetary Pricing:
Fabrication (66,414 lbs)
$649,150.00 (excludes tax & freight)
Freight
$13,000.00
Bid Validity: Material price to be confirmed at time of order. Not to exceed 10% of material cost, in increases from today
9-4-25 to 10-4-25
Respectfully,
Nathan Parker
Estimator
Nathan@ssandpf.com
Main Office: (801) 292-8484 Ext. 151
Page 1 of 2
Salt Lake Branch
1980 S 900 W
Salt Lake City, UT 84104
(801) 896-8800
Date: 09/05/25
Project: CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM, PHASE Quote #: Q603168
Location: CHANDLER, AZ 85225
Bid Date: 09/03/25 @ 1:00pm
Estimator: Steve Quiroz
Engineer: HAZEN & SAWYER (JASON CURL) stevequ@hdfowler.com
Owner/Agency: CITY OF CHANDLER
TO CONTRACTORS:
FOB: Our Yard
PIPE - FOB factory with freight prepaid and
allowed on full truckload shipments, buyer to
Payment Terms: Net 10th Prox.
(subject to Credit approval)
Required drawings of any kind are not included in this proposal unless specifically stated as a line item.
Prices of fabricated piping are based on lengths shown. Contractor is advised to verify lengths, tap and seep ring locations
prior to ordering. All products from our fabrication shop are made by non-union employees.
Bolt, nut, stud, gasket and other fastener products are for estimating purposes only. Required fasteners need to be
determined by the contractor.
The prices quoted on pipe are based on shipping full truckloads direct from the factory. In the event quantity ordered is less
than truckload, shipment would have to be combined with others to make full truck and delivery time would depend on our
ability to do so.
Prices on copper tubing are extremely volatile and subject to change. They will be billed at the price in effect at time of
shipment.
Due to varying trench depths and pumper thread specifications, we advise confirmation on fire hydrant requirements prior to
ordering.
Due to unstable market conditions, rising fuel and raw materials costs, HD Fowler Company requests that you carefully
evaluate material costs and the duration of price protection we are able to offer and plan accordingly. We value your
business and will do our best to communicate changes in market conditions while assisting you through this difficult situation.
Due to current unstable price conditions, unless specifically stated otherwise, the prices in this proposal are subject to change
and material will be invoiced at the prices in effect at the time of shipment.
QUOTATION
Attached is the HD Fowler Company quotation for materials we are offering on the above-listed project. This quotation is
based on our interpretation of the plans and specifications. To accurately bid any project, it is necessary for the contractor to
perform his own item and quantity take-off. We also strongly suggest that the contractor confirm the material list before
ordering. Please carefully review the Terms & Conditions of Sale which also accompany this bid.
All products quoted are furnished with the factory's standard shop coating, unless otherwise stated in our quote. The
provisions for field startup and the technical service of a manufacturer's representative are not included, unless otherwise
stated in our quote.
Prices quoted are based on quantities shown and are subject to revision if quantities ordered vary substantially.
Page 2 of 2
unload. Balance - FOB our yard. Contech: FOB
factory with freight allowed to jobsite and
unloading by others at a truck accessible
location. Deliveries made by H.D. Fowler Company
may include a truck charge. Contractor to provide
all rigging, equipment and personnel to offload
material onsite.
Delivery: PLEASE NOTE: Our industry continues to experience
supply chain disruptions beyond our control. Raw
material shortages, manufacturing backlogs,
imported cargo delays and availability of domestic
freight carriers are all impacted. Any lead
times given or implied are subject to change
without notice. Please carefully consider these
realities in your bidding and procurement
processes for this project.
Addenda Received for this project:
Bid No: Q603168 Page 1 of 2
Quote #:
Q603168
Bid Date:
9/3/2025
Line
Qty UoM Description
Unit Price
Extended Price
GENERAL BID NOTES:
1
2
THE PRICES OF THIS QUOTE ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE
FOLLOWING ANY NEW OR INCREASED TARIFFS, DUTIES, OR
OTHER GOVERNMENT-IMPOSED COSTS ON MATERIALS. PRICES
FOR IMPACTED MATERIALS WILL BE REVISED AT TIME OF
SHIPMENT TO REFLECT THE ACTUAL INCREASED COSTS TO HD
FOWLER.
3
Subtotal
0.00
Fabricated Steel Pipe
4
1
EA
LOT OF 16" AND 48" FABRICATED STEEL PIPE THAT IS SHEET M43-01 AND
M43-02. LIMITS OF PIPE WILL BE THE FLANGE AT 1221 AND WITH A
FLANGED CONNECTION WHERE THE PIPE LEAVES THE STRUCTURE ON
SHEET M43-01. THERE ARE FLANGED CONNECTIONS ON THE MAIN RUN TO
AVOID ANY FIELD WELDING AND WALL RINGS ARE WELDED AT ALL THE
PIECES GOING THROUGH THE FLOOR. DRAWINGS AND FREIGHT ARE
INCLUDED. THE PIPE IS BEING QUOTED AS CEMENT MORTAR LINED AND
POLYURETHANE COATED.
566,283.00
566,283.00
5
TAPE WRAP TO BE PROVIDED AND APPLIED BY OTHERS.
Note Not quoted per spec
6
THE SPECS CALL FOR A CONCRETE ENCASEMENT OF STEEL PIPE. EVEN
THOUGH WE HAVE INCLUDED A POLYUREHTANE COATING - IT MAY NOT BE
REQUIRED
Note
7
2
EA
48" STEEL FLANGE BOLT KIT, 316 STAINLESS STEEL, 44 EACH 1 1/2" X 8"
BOLT WITH NUT
1,834.86
3,669.72
Not part of GMP 2
8
2
EA
48" TORUSEAL 1/8" DUAL BULB FULL FACE GASKET, NSF-61 SBR BLACK
632.86
1,265.72
Not part of GMP 2
9
15
EA
16" STEEL FLANGE BOLT KIT, 316 STAINLESS STEEL, 16 EACH 1" X 4 1/2"
BOLT WITH NUT
164.78
2,471.70
Not part of GMP 2
10
15
EA
16" TORUSEAL 1/8" DUAL BULB FULL FACE GASKET, NSF-61 SBR BLACK,
350PSI RATED DOMESTIC
179.08
2,686.20
Not part of GMP 2
Subtotal
576,376.34
Fabricated Steel Pipe Subtotal
576,376.34
Relocate 4" Drain Pipe
11
140
FT
4" SDR35 3034 GASKETED PVC SEWER PIPE 14' LENGTH
2.83
396.20
12
2
EA
4" PSM 45 ELBOW GASKETED FOR SEWER OR DRAIN
27.85
55.70
13
1
EA
4" RODENT SCREEN W/ SET SCREWS
176.48
176.48 Not Needed
Subtotal
628.38
Relocate 4" Drain Pipe Subtotal
628.38
Misc Project Costs
Estimator:
Steve Quiroz
Job Name:
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM, PHASE 1
Location:
CHANDLER, AZ 85225
Customer:
ARCHER WESTERN CONSTRUCTION LLC
Bid No: Q603168 Page 2 of 2
14
1
ESTIMATED SUBMITTAL PACKET FEE
200.00
200.00
15
1
ESTIMATED OUTBOUND FREIGHT CHARGE
1,000.00
1,000.00
Subtotal
1,200.00 Added this to the WSP
Misc Project Costs Subtotal
1,200.00
Approximate Total
578,204.72
Estimated Tax
45,099.99
Approximate Grand Total
623,304.71
HD Fowler Company TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE
1. AGREEMENT; ACCEPTANCE.
This document (Agreement) contains all of the terms and conditions with respect to the sale and purchase of the material ordered by Purchaser and sold by HD Fowler Company (Fowler). This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Fowler and Purchaser; it will not be amended, altered, or changed except by a written agreement signed by both parties. Purchasers acceptance of the material shall conclusively evidence Purchasers
acceptance of these terms and conditions.
2. SHIPPING AND DELIVERY.
Shipment or delivery dates are estimates only. Fowler will not be liable for any failure or delay in making shipment or delivery caused by any contingency beyond Fowlers control, or the control of Fowlers vendors, with whom
Fowler has contracted to cover this offer to sell materials to Purchaser. Such contingencies include but are not limited to: labor conditions, material shortages, carrier delays, acts of God, fire, weather, accidents, embargoes, war,
insurrection, riots, government regulations, pandemics, or other causes beyond the control of Fowler and its vendors. Any time periods for Fowlers performance under this Agreement shall be extended accordingly. When
materials are sold freight on board (FOB) shipping point or FOB shipping point freight allowed, Fowlers responsibility for loss or damage in transit terminates upon acceptance of material by the carrier. When sold FOB
destination, Fowlers responsibility for loss or damage terminates upon tender of delivery by the carrier. Upon receipt of shipments, it shall be the Purchasers responsibility to inspect materials and secure written
acknowledgement from the delivering carrier for any loss or damage. Claims for incorrect materials or shortages (other than loss in transit), must be made to Fowler in writing within five (5) calendar days after receipt of
shipment. Following Fowlers receipt of notice of incorrect materials, Fowler will promptly arrange for pickup of such items at Purchasers location (Purchaser shall load the materials to be returned). As Purchasers sole remedy,
Fowler will, at its election, either replace the incorrect materials or refund the purchase price paid for the incorrect materials. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Fowler shall have no responsibility for incorrect materials after
installation of such items.
3. RETURNS.
Except as otherwise provided herein, material may not be returned without Fowlers prior written consent, in its sole discretion. If a return is approved by Fowler, standard items normally carried in Fowlers stock, returned in a
new condition, will be credited less fifteen percent (15%) to cover handling costs. Special items manufactured to order may not be returned. All returned material must be shipped freight prepaid and the risk of loss will remain
with the Purchaser until Fowler receives the materials.
4. TAXES.
Purchaser shall be responsible for the payment of all federal, state, provincial, county, local, or government taxes, including but not limited to, sales tax, use tax, value added tax, goods and services tax, or other excise tax that
may be applied on the material (Taxes), and shall defend, indemnify and hold Fowler harmless from those Taxes. Fowler shall be responsible for any tax based solely upon its net income. Purchaser may supply Fowler with a
valid Resale Certificate or other form certifying an exemption from the payment of Taxes from the taxing authority having proper jurisdiction over the order.
5. PAYMENT TERMS.
Fowler will submit invoices to Purchaser upon the shipment of materials. Invoices shall be paid by Purchaser on or before the tenth (10th) day of the following month. Late payments shall accrue interest at the rate of one percent
(1%) per month until paid, commencing on the first (1st) day of the month after the month in which payment was due. Prices are based on current published freight rates and are subject to adjustment if freight rates are
increased. Prices include domestic packing for commercial truck shipment only. Fowlers offer herein is subject to approval by Fowlers Credit Department after Purchasers acceptance.
If Purchaser fails to comply with terms of payment or sale, or if Purchasers financial responsibility becomes impaired or unsatisfactory to Fowler, Fowler reserves the right to withhold further deliveries on partially filled orders
and to require payment in advance or satisfactory security or guarantee that invoices will be paid when due. Purchaser agrees to accept and pay for partial shipments.
6. LIMITED WARRANTY; LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
The materials supplied hereunder are subject to the relevant third-party manufacturers warranties, which shall pass to Purchaser to the extent assignable. When provided reasonable notice, Fowler agrees to use commercially
reasonable efforts to assist Purchaser with pursuing remedies under the manufacturers warranties for up to one (1) year from the date of sale, provided that Fowler shall not be required to incur any expenses. FOWLER
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FOWLER SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY OR RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE DESIGN OF THE PROJECT IN WHICH THE MATERIALS WILL BE INSTALLED.
FOWLER SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO HOLD THE MATERIALS FREE OF THE CLAIM OF ANY THIRD PERSON BY WAY OF PATENT OR TRADEMARK INFRINGEMENT, PROVIDED THAT THE
FOREGOING SHALL NOT BE DEEMED TO AFFECT ANY REMEDIES AVAILABLE TO PURCHASER UNDER APPLICABLE THIRD-PARTY MANUFACTURERS WARRANTIES.
IN NO EVENT SHALL FOWLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY, OR OTHER DAMAGES AND/OR LOSS OF PROFITS BASED ON
PRODUCT LIABILITY, STRICT LIABILITY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), BREACH OF CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE. FOWLERS TOTAL LIABILITY FOR ANY AND ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES,
LIABILITIES, AND/OR INDEMNITIES ARISING UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT, UNDER ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID TO
FOWLER FOR THE APPLICABLE MATERIALS THAT ARE THE SUBJECT OF THE CLAIM.
7. INDEMNIFICATION.
Purchaser agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold Fowler harmless from any and all claims, demands, losses, and liabilities to or by third parties arising from, resulting from, or connected with the material to be finished under
this Agreement, even though such claims may prove to be false, groundless, or fraudulent, to the fullest extent permitted by law and subject to the limitations provided below. Purchasers duty to indemnify Fowler shall not apply
to liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damage to property caused by, or resulting from, the sole negligence of Fowler. Purchasers duty to indemnify Fowler for liability for damages arising out of bodily
injury to persons or damage to property caused by, or resulting from, the concurrent negligence of Fowler and Purchaser, shall apply only to the extent of negligence of Purchaser. Further, the indemnification obligation under
this Agreement shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable to or for any third party under workers compensation acts, disability benefits acts, or other
employee benefits acts; provided, Purchasers waiver of immunity by the provisions of this paragraph extends only to claims against Purchaser by Fowler, and does not include, or extend to, any claims by Purchasers employees
directly against Purchaser. Subject to Purchasers duty to defend Fowler, if applicable, Fowlers right to recovery of its defense costs shall include all fees (of attorneys and experts), costs, and expenses. In addition, Fowler shall
be entitled to recover compensation for all of its in-house expenses (including materials and labor) consumed in its defense.
8. TERM AND TERMINATION.
The terms within this Agreement shall survive the completion, suspension or termination of this Agreement and the exchange of material governed under this Agreement.
9. Successors and Assigns.
Fowlers successors and assigns shall be entitled to assume the liabilities and obligations, and succeed to the rights and interests, of Fowler under this Agreement at any time and without limitation. This Agreement may not be
assigned by Purchaser without Fowlers prior written consent, in Fowlers sole discretion.
10. MEDIATION AND BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION.
In the event of any dispute relating to this Agreement, the parties agree to enter into mediation under the Construction Industry Rules of the American Arbitration Association. The costs of the mediator shall be paid equally. The
parties agree that mediation shall occur in Seattle, Washington. In the event mediation fails to resolve the dispute, the parties agree to submit any and all disputes to binding arbitration in accordance with the Construction
Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association. The parties agree that arbitration shall occur in Seattle, Washington. In any arbitration proceeding between Fowler and Purchaser, the prevailing party shall be
awarded its reasonable attorneys fees and costs. The parties shall mutually agree upon the mediator or arbitrator, as applicable, to be used for the dispute resolution procedures set forth above. If the parties do not mutually agree
to a mediator or arbitrator, either party may apply to the King County Superior Court, requesting the appointment of a mediator or arbitrator.
11. APPLICABLE LAW.
This Agreement shall be governed by and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Washington without giving effect to principles regarding conflict of laws.
12. Delays or Omissions.
No delay or omission to exercise any right, power, or remedy accruing to either party upon any breach or default of the other party hereto shall impair any such right, power, or remedy of such non-defaulting party, nor shall it be
construed to be a waiver of any such breach or default or an acquiescence therein, or of any similar breach or default thereafter occurring. A waiver of a breach or default by a party shall not be deemed to be a waiver of any
other breach or default.
13. SEVERABILITY.
In the event any provision herein should be held unenforceable, such provision shall be deemed to be amended so that it will be enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law, and all remaining provisions shall continue in full
force without being affected, impaired, or invalidated thereby in any way.
14. Rules of Construction.
The parties acknowledge that they have been represented by, or had an opportunity to consult with, competent counsel with respect to this Agreement and therefore waive the application of any law, regulation, holding, or rule
of construction providing that ambiguities in an agreement will be construed against the party drafting such agreement.
15. Effect of Headings.
The section headings herein are for convenience only and shall not affect the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.
HD Fowler Company, Inc.
Terms and Conditions of Sale 2020
WELDING QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
WELDING
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
01
33.43.100
WELD 48" WSP
5
EA
3,360.00
$
16,800.00
$
01
33.43.100
WELD 16" WSP
12
EA
804.00
$
9,648.00
$
01
33.43.100
WELD PASS THROUGH HOLES
3
EA
1,150.00
$
3,450.00
$
01
33.43.100
CONCRETE LINING PATCH FOR 48"
5
EA
950.00
$
4,750.00
$
01
33.43.100
CONCRETE COATING PATCH FOR 48"
5
EA
795.00
$
3,975.00
$
01
33.43.100
CONCRETE COATING PATCH FOR 16"
12
EA
695.00
$
8,340.00
$
01
33.43.200
WELD 16" WSP
12
EA
804.00
$
9,648.00
$
01
33.43.200
CONCRETE COATING PATCH FOR 16"
12
EA
695.00
$
8,340.00
$
01
33.43.100
CONFINDED SPACE MONITORING
1
LS
6,000.00
$
6,000.00
$
70,951.00
$
0.00%
-
$
0.24%
170.28
$
71,121.28
$
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
PROFESSIONAL PIPING SYSTEMS
BID QUANTITIES
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
ATTEN: Ed Kluber
Archer Western
PROFESSIONAL PIPING SYSTEMS
738 S 52ND STREET
Tempe, AZ 85281
PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE 1
QUOTE: PPS 25-1263
ERIC JOHNSON
Estimator
Professional Piping Systems LLC
319 E. Pioneer Street
Phoenix, AZ 85040
C: 602-510-2638
www.ppsphx.com
Professional Piping Systems, LLC
738 S 52nd Street
Tempe, AZ 85281
www.ppsphx.com
9/3/2025
Proposal 25-1263 | Professional Piping Systems, 738 S 52nd Street, Tempe, AZ 85281
Attachment 1
Scope of work
Drawings Provided for Estimating
• NONE PROVIDED
Material Grades
• A53 B STD
Procedures
•
Inspection criteria
o 100% Visual Inspection
Coatings
•
NONE QUOTED
Clarifications and Assumptions
•
IN THE EVENT THAT TARIFFS, DUTIES, OR OTHER GOVERNMENT-IMPOSED FEES ARE
ENACTED, MODIFIED, OR INCREASSED AFTER THE DATE OF THIS PROPOSAL AND SUCH
TARIFFS DIRECTLY IMPACT THE COST OF RAW MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR THE PERFORMANCE
OF THE WORK, THE QUOTED PRICE SHALL BE SUBJECT TO ADJUSTMENT. THE ADJUSTMENT
SHALL REFLECT THE ACTUAL INCREASE IN MATERIAL COSTS INCURRED BY PPS DUE TO THE
TARIFF CHANGES. PPS SHALL PROVIDE REASONABLE DOCUMENTATION TO SUBSTANTIATE
THE ADDITIONAL COSTS. THE CUSTOMER AND PPS AGREE TO NEGOTIATE IN GOOD FAITH TO
EQUITABLY ADJUST THE CONTRACT PRICE TO ACCOUNT FOR SUCH INCREASED COSTS.
•
NDT OTHER THAN VISUAL INSPECTION IS ONLY INCLUDED IF IT IS SPECIFICALLY NOTED IN
THIS PROPOSAL.
•
THIS PRICING IS GOOD FOR 15 DAYS FROM THE DATE ON THIS PROPOSAL. IF PO OR NOTICE
TO PROCEED IS GIVEN 15 DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF THIS PROPOSAL.
•
PPS WILL NOT BE BOUND TO ANY SCHEDULE IN WHICH WE HAVE NOT FULLY PARTICIPATED.
FURTHER, WE WILL NOT ALLOW OUR WORK ACTIVITIES TO BE COMPRESSED DUE TO THE
SCHEDULE SLIPPAGE OF OTHER TRADES OF SUPPLIERS FOR WHICH WE ARE NOT
RESPONSIBLE.
•
PPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DELAYS RESULTING FROM INDUSTRY CONDITIONS
CONSTRICTING THE SUPPLY OF ESSENTIAL COMPONENTS OF MATERIALS, INCLUDING THE
INTERRUPTION IN THE SUPPLY OF STEEL PRODUCTS.
•
ALL PRICING IS CALCULATED WITH STRAIGHT TIME BEING WORKED.
•
PPS WILL PROVIDE CONFINED SPACE ENTRY WATCH WHILE WELDING THE 48” PIPE.
•
PPS PRICED THIS PROJECT AS WELDING ONLY. NO INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT WAS
INCLUDED.
•
PPS HAS ADDED OPTIONAL PRICING FOR CONCRETE PATCH OF THE WELD AREAS.
•
ALL LABOR AND MATERIAL HAS A ONE YEAR WARRANTY.
Professional Piping Systems, LLC
738 S 52nd Street
Tempe, AZ 85281
www.ppsphx.com
9/3/2025
Proposal 25-1263 | Professional Piping Systems, 738 S 52nd Street, Tempe, AZ 85281
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
•
WELD 24 EACH 16” LAP WELDS
•
WELD 5 EACH 48” LAP WELDS
•
WELD 3EA 5” PASS THROUGH HOLES
Attachment 2
Proposed Schedule and Pricing
Leadtime
• TBD by job schedule
Shipping
• Not included
Total Proposal
Weld Total = $36,096.00 (16” $804 ea) (48” $3,360 ea)
Hole watch for confined space = $6,000.00
Concrete lining patch for 5ea 48” = $4,750.00
Concrete coating patch for 5ea 48” = $3,975.00
Concrete coating patch for 24ea 16” = $16,680.00
Pass through welds inside and outside 3ea 5” $3,450.00
Terms
•
PAID WHEN COMPLETE
• NET-30
Attachment 3
PPS HAS INCLUDED THE FOLLOWING:
• 1ea fit and 1ea Butt Weld per Joint
• Confined entry watch, 1 man 1 week. (during the 48” pipe welding)
• Optional pricing for concrete lining and coating patch.
• 1 YEAR WARRANTY ON ALL LABOR.
Professional Piping Systems, LLC
738 S 52nd Street
Tempe, AZ 85281
www.ppsphx.com
9/3/2025
Proposal 25-1263 | Professional Piping Systems, 738 S 52nd Street, Tempe, AZ 85281
Attachment 4
PPS HAS SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED FROM THIS PROPOSAL THE FOLLOWING:
• FIELD INSTALLATION.
• Any material.
• Any equipment necessary to set or move the pipe.
• Pressure testing the pipe after welding.
• Any NDT weld testing.
• TAXES OR BONDS.
• ANYTHING NOT SPECIFICALLY ADDRESSED IN THIS PROPOSAL.
Attachment 5
Terms & Conditions
The following terms and conditions (these "Terms & Conditions") apply to the sale of
goods, materials or products (collectively, "Products") or provision of services (collectively,
"Services") by Professional Piping Systems, LLC, an Arizona limited liability company
("PPS"), to the customer identified on the Purchase Order to which these Terms &
Conditions are attached (the "Customer") and all purchase orders and the provision of all
Products or Services by PPS are subject to the Terms & Conditions.
1.
Prices. Except as provided herein, prices offered by PPS for Services or Products in
any written quote or estimate (“Quote”) will remain in effect for a period of fifteen (15)
days after the date of the Quote (the "Quote Date"). After said fifteen (15) day period,
prices are subject to change. Prices for Products to be used in any Work (hereafter
defined) which are obtained by PPS from a third party, are subject to change at any time
to account for any fluctuations in the market price after the Quote Date.
2.
Purchase Orders. All Services or Products to be provided by PPS to Customer shall
be pursuant to a written purchase order executed by PPS and the Customer (a "Purchase
Order"), referencing the scope of work described on the Quote, which will, at a minimum,
include a description of the Services or Products to be provided by PPS (collectively, the
"Work"), and the compensation to PPS therefor. PPS shall have no obligation to proceed
with any Work until such time that it has received a fully executed Purchase Order and
any initial deposit required there under.
Professional Piping Systems, LLC
738 S 52nd Street
Tempe, AZ 85281
www.ppsphx.com
9/3/2025
Proposal 25-1263 | Professional Piping Systems, 738 S 52nd Street, Tempe, AZ 85281
3.
Change Orders. The parties may only modify or add to the Work described in the
Purchase Order by executing a written change order describing in reasonable detail the
modified or additional Work to be completed and any adjustments to the schedule or the
compensation to PPS therefore (a "Change Order"). PPS shall have no obligation
whatsoever to commence or complete any additional or modified Work unless and until
Customer and PPS have executed a Change Order.
4.
Plans and Specifications; Scheduling. PPS shall complete or provide all Work in
substantial conformity with written specifications, drawings and descriptions provided by
Customer to PPS (collectively, "Customer Specifications"). PPS shall have no liability to
Customer for any delays, damages or claims of any kind arising from defects, omissions,
errors or deficiencies in the Customer Specifications and Customer shall defend, indemnify
and hold PPS harmless for, from and against any and all liability, damages, claims, losses
and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and costs, arising therefrom or related thereto.
PPS will furnish detailed joint design, pipeline layouts and manufacturing drawings for
Customers’ approval prior to commencing pipe manufacture at no extra cost. Drawings
will be provided one (1) week after receipt of the approved layout.
5.
Shipping. Shipping rate and delivery date will be arranged by mutual written
agreement between PPS and Customer upon receipt of approved drawings. Any revised
delivery schedule will be negotiated between PPS and Customer and will take into account
PPS’ current schedules of work on hand as well as current availability and prices of
materials. Any delays on the project resulting in production or delivery delays longer than
thirty (30) days may result in an escalation charge in an amount determined by PPS in its
sole discretion. Prices are based on delivers in full truckload lots. Deliveries requested for
material in quantities less than truckload lots will be billed to Customer at the full truck
load rate. Internal bracing, stulling, and shoring are placed in pipe at the time of
manufacture for the purpose of limited pipe deflection during hauling and handling. PPS is
not responsible for internal bracing required for the installation or grouting of the pipe.
Any special requirements, i.e. vertical elongation etc., will be the sole responsibility of
Customer. Shipping Cradles and stull are the property of PPS and are to be grouped and
reloaded on trucks, at Customer’s expense, for reuse by PPS, if requested. Any bunks or
stulls not returned in reusable condition will be billed to the Customer’s account at full
replacement cost. Risk of loss or damage shall pass to Customer when Products are
delivered to Customer or delivered to or picked up by the shipping company.
6.
Payment Terms. Payment terms are net thirty (30) days from the date that PPS
sends an invoice to Customer for the amounts due. Any amounts not paid within such
thirty (30) day period shall accrue interest thereafter until paid in full at a rate which is
the lesser of eighteen percent (18%) per annum or the highest rate allowed under
applicable laws, computed on a 365/360 day year basis. In addition, in the event that the
Customer fails to pay the full amount due within thirty (30) days after PPS has sent
Customer an invoice, PPS shall be entitled to exercise any of its available remedies under
applicable law, which include suspension of any further work by PPS and retention of any
equipment or other personal property owned by the Customer and in PPS' possession, until
all past due amounts owing to PPS have been paid in full. PPS will invoice Customer for
100% of raw material (no retention) upon its arrival at PPS’ facility. PPS will invoice
Professional Piping Systems, LLC
738 S 52nd Street
Tempe, AZ 85281
www.ppsphx.com
9/3/2025
Proposal 25-1263 | Professional Piping Systems, 738 S 52nd Street, Tempe, AZ 85281
Customer monthly for progress payments (less retention) per a PPS supplied schedule of
values. PPS will invoice for all final amounts including retention amounts, after
completion of the Work.
6.
Warranty. PPS warrants that Products and Services provided by PPS to Customers
are free from defects in material and workmanship. PPS' obligation under this warranty is
limited to correction of defects in Products or Services which were provided by PPS.
Within ten (10) calendar days after discovery of any defective Services or Products
provided by PPS, Customer shall provide PPS written notice of such defect. This warranty
does not cover any repairs or replacement required due to a Customer or third parties’
accident, abuse, misuse, failure to maintain, disassembly, repair, modification,
negligence, fault, or natural or man-made disaster. PPS shall have no liability to Customer
for any: (a) consequential, special, indirect, incidental, punitive, or liquidated damages;
or, (b) damages to or from products or services not furnished by PPS; or, (c) repair,
replacement or other expenses incurred by Customer in correcting defective Products or
Services provided by PPS. PPS' warranty will remain in effect for a period of twelve (12)
months from the date the Products or Services were provided or completed.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to new equipment, PPS' warranty will remain
in effect until the earlier of: (i) twelve (12) months from the time the new equipment is
placed into service; or, (ii) eighteen (18) months from the date of delivery to the
Customer. PPS' warranty for new equipment shall apply only if Customer properly stores,
maintains and operates said equipment in accordance with the original equipment
manufacturer's procedures and specifications. EXCEPT FOR PPS' EXPRESS WARRANTY
CONTAINED HEREIN, PPS IS NOT MAKING AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY OTHER
IMPLIED OR EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE SERVICES AND PRODUCTS.
WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, PPS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
7.
Indemnification. PPS will indemnify and hold Customer harmless for, from and
against any and all claims, damages, liability, losses, or expenses, including reasonable
attorneys’ fees and costs pursuant to Arizona statutes, arising from or relating to PPS'
breach of the Purchase Order or the Terms & Conditions. Customer will indemnify and hold
PPS harmless for, from, and against any and all claims, damages, liability, losses or
expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs pursuant to Arizona statutes,
arising from or relating to Customer’s breach of the Purchase Order or the Terms &
Conditions. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, under no circumstances will either
party be liable to the other party for consequential, special, indirect, incidental, punitive,
or liquidated damages.
8.
Shortages, Defects or Errors. Customer shall give prompt written notice to PPS of
any shortages, defects or errors in any Products or Services, which notice shall be given to
PPS no later than ten (10) business days of Customer's receipt of the Product or the
provision of Services.
9.
Title. Title to Products provided by PPS shall not pass to Customer until PPS has
received full payment of all amounts due for all Services performed and Products provided
by PPS.
Professional Piping Systems, LLC
738 S 52nd Street
Tempe, AZ 85281
www.ppsphx.com
9/3/2025
Proposal 25-1263 | Professional Piping Systems, 738 S 52nd Street, Tempe, AZ 85281
10.
Cancellation. Customer may cancel a Purchase Order by providing written notice to
PPS, provided, however, Customer will be obligated for all unpaid Work completed up to
and including the date that PPS receives written notice of cancellation, plus PPS'
reasonable profit for uncompleted Work under the Purchase Order.
11.
Force Majeure. Neither PPS nor the Customer shall be liable for any damages,
claims or liability of any kind arising from delay in performance caused by a "Force
Majeure Event". As used herein, "Force Majeure Event" shall mean acts of God; acts of
terrorism; explosion; fire; extreme weather conditions; flood; drought; epidemic;
pandemic; earthquake; riot; insurrection; blockade; war or other hostilities; strike,
lockout or other industrial disturbance; act or restraint of governmental authority whether
valid or invalid; the refusal or failure of any governmental authority to promptly issue or
grant any necessary governmental authorizations, permits, licenses, certificates or
approvals or the action or inaction of any governmental authority which causes the lapse
or expiration of any of the foregoing; shortages of materials or Products to be
incorporated in the Work, and any other cause or event which is reasonably beyond the
control of the party and which the party is not able to overcome by the exercise of
reasonable diligence, provided, however, that neither party shall be required to settle any
strike, work stoppage or other labor dispute on terms which, in its opinion, are
unsatisfactory. If any delay in PPS' performance is attributable to a Force Majeure Event,
the time for performance shall be extended for a period equal to the time of the delay
caused by the Force Majeure Event. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the occurrence of a
Force Majeure Event shall not excuse or delay any payment obligation under the Purchase
Order or the Terms & Conditions.
12.
Access and Cooperation. Customer shall provide PPS access to the Work site at all
times during PPS' normal hours of business to enable PPS to complete the Work and shall
otherwise cooperate with PPS so that the Work may be completed on a timely and
efficient basis. Such cooperation shall include providing information to PPS necessary to
obtain permits or other required governmental approvals for the Work and coordination
with Customer's other contractors or employees to enable PPS to complete the Work
without interference or interruption.
13.
Jurisdiction, Venue and Waiver of Jury Trial. These Terms & Conditions and all
Purchase Orders between PPS and Customer shall be interpreted and enforced according
to Arizona substantive laws, without regard to Arizona's choice of law provisions. Any
disputes between the parties arising from these Terms & Conditions or the Purchase Order
shall be brought and maintained in a court of competent jurisdiction in Maricopa County,
Arizona. PPS and Customer hereby irrevocably waive any and all rights they have to
demand that any action, proceeding or counterclaim arising out of or in any way related
to these Terms & Conditions or any Purchase Order be tried by jury.
14.
Attorney Fees. In the event that either party hereto institutes an action or other
proceeding to enforce any rights arising under these Terms & Conditions or any Purchase
Order, the party prevailing in such action or other proceeding shall be paid all reasonable
costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees by the other party pursuant to Arizona statutes.
15.
Entire Agreement. Incorporation and Modification. These Terms & Conditions and
the applicable Purchase Order contain the entire agreement between the parties. These
Terms & Conditions and the Purchase Order have been negotiated among the parties and,
Professional Piping Systems, LLC
738 S 52nd Street
Tempe, AZ 85281
www.ppsphx.com
9/3/2025
Proposal 25-1263 | Professional Piping Systems, 738 S 52nd Street, Tempe, AZ 85281
if there is any ambiguity, no presumption construing these Terms & Conditions or the
Purchase Order shall be imposed because the same were prepared by such party or its
attorney. These Terms & Conditions are hereby incorporated in and as a part of all
Purchase Orders. To the extent that there is any conflict in the terms of these Terms &
Conditions and the terms of a Purchase Order, these Terms & Conditions shall control,
unless the Purchase Order, by its express terms, supersedes these Terms & Conditions by
specific reference to the provision of these Terms & Conditions so modified. No
modification of these Terms & Conditions or any Purchase Order shall be of any force or
effect unless such modification is in writing and executed by both of the parties. These
Terms & Conditions shall control over all additional or conflicting terms and conditions
that may appear on Customer written documents, including purchase orders, delivery
tickets, service order tickets, invoices or any other document and PPS' signature on any
Customer written document shall not constitute PPS' consent to any terms and conditions
set forth in such document. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the terms of the Purchase
Order shall control over any conflicting Customer Specifications.
16.
Notices. All notices or other communications required or provided to be given by
either party shall be in writing and shall be hand delivered, transmitted by email or by
United States first class mail, postage prepaid. Notices shall be deemed given upon hand
delivery, or if sent via email, upon transmission provided the same is also sent on the date
of transmission by first class mail, postage prepaid, or if mailed, three (3) calendar days
after such notice is deposited in the mail, in each case, addressed to the parties to the
addresses set forth in the Purchase Order. Any party may change the address to which
notice shall be delivered or mailed or emailed by written notice duly given.
17.
Severability and Waiver. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision hereof
shall in no way affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision hereof. Any
waivers must be in writing and signed by the party sought to be charged. The waiver by
any party of a right provided thereunder shall not be deemed to be a continuing waiver of
that right or a waiver of any other right.
18.
Miscellaneous. In these Term & Conditions: (i) the singular includes the
plural and vice versa and reference to any gender includes each other gender; (ii)
reference to any person includes such person’s successors and assigns but only if such
successors and assigns are not prohibited by these Term & Conditions; (iii) “hereunder,”
“hereof,” “hereto,” and words of similar import shall be deemed references to these
Terms and Conditions as a whole; (iv) reference to any agreement, document or
instrument means such agreement, document or instrument as amended or modified and
in effect from time to time in accordance with the terms thereof; (v) references to
documents, instruments or agreements shall be deemed to refer as well to all addenda,
exhibits, schedules, restatement, supplements or amendments thereto; (vi) references to
“day” or “days” mean calendar days; (vii) “including” (and with correlative meaning
“include”) means including without limiting the generality of any description preceding
the word “including”; (viii) where specific language is used to clarify by example a general
statement contained herein, such specific language shall not be deemed to modify, limit
or restrict in any manner; (ix) “or” is used in the inclusive sense of “and/or”; (x) with
respect to the determination of any period of time, “from” means “from and including”
and “to” means “to but excluding”; (xi) references to amounts of money expressed in
Dollars are references to United States Dollars; and (xii) any action required hereunder to
Professional Piping Systems, LLC
738 S 52nd Street
Tempe, AZ 85281
www.ppsphx.com
9/3/2025
Proposal 25-1263 | Professional Piping Systems, 738 S 52nd Street, Tempe, AZ 85281
be taken within a certain number of days shall, except as may otherwise be expressly
provided herein, be taken within that number of days excluding the day on which the
counting is initiated and including the final day of the period.
WELDING INSPECTION QUOTES
CITY OF CHANDLER PECOS WATER SYSTEM PROGRAM PHASE I (GMP 2)
9/11/2025
CITY OF CHANDLER
HAZEN & SAWYER
WELDING INSPECTION
EK
FACILITY
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
UNIT AMOUNT
BID
01
33.43.100
VERIFICATION OF FIT-UP, IN-PROCESS, & COMPLETE WELDING OF FABRICATED PIPE SPOOLS
1
LS
23,455.00
$
23,455.00
$
01
33.43.100
VERIFICATIONS OF FIT-UP, IN-PROCESS, & COMPLETE WELDING UNDER SLAB PIPING SPOOL
& TIE-IN LOCATIONS-OUTSIDE OF PIPE
1
LS
44,195.00
$
44,195.00
$
01
33.43.100
VERIFICATIONS OF FIT-UP, IN-PROCESS, & COMPLETE WELDING UNDER SLAB PIPING SPOOL
& TIE-IN LOCATIONS-INSIDE OF PIPE
1
LS
52,300.00
$
52,300.00
$
119,950.00
$
0.00%
-
$
0.24%
287.88
$
120,237.88
$
PROJECT NAME
ESTIMATOR INITIALS
SCOPE
ENGINEER
OWNER
BID DATE
BID AMOUNT TOTAL
TEXTURA TOTAL
BOND TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
CROSSPOINT TESTING & INSPECTION
SERVICES, LLC
BID QUANTITIES
7931 E Pecos Rd. Suite 203
Mesa, AZ 85212
www.crosspointtesting.com
Page 1 of 1
480-988-6602 Office
Info@crosspointtesting.com
Quotation
Date: 08/27/2025
Client: Archer-Western
Prepared by: Brent Couch
Quotation Valid until: 03/27/26
Quote #001
Comments or Special Instructions:
This quotation is based on the contract drawings and specifications provided. Any additional hours required to complete
the required to complete the project will be billed at the quoted rates below. Quotation is based on an 8 hour work day.
Overtime and Saturday work will be billed at 1.25 times the quoted rate. Holiday and Sunday work will be billed at 1.5 times
the quoted rate unless otherwise agreed on prior to the start of the project. Billing is from portal to portal. No re-
inspection costs have been included in this bid. All re-inspection costs are the responsibility of the contractor.
Project Requirements: Perform verification of fit-up, in-process and completed welding for fabricated pipe
spools as required by project specification Section 40 05 24.23A Part 1- 1.04D.
Terms-
Net 15
Date
Service
Service Description
Hrs.
Rate
Miles
Continuous Shop Inspection
TBD
CWI-VT
Daily shop verification of fit-up, in-process
185
$95.00
$17,575.00
and completed welding of pipe spools as
required per ASME B31.1, B31.3
TBD
HYDRO
Hydrostatic testing of straight pipe
48
$95.00
$4,560.00
sections as required.
Notes: All access to areas of inspection shall be provided by the contractor. CTIS is not responsible
for providing lifts, ladders, scaffolding or other types of inspection access. Contractor to provide
special safety equipment and requirements if applicable for confined space, fall protection, lock-out
tag out procedures.
Sub-
Total
-
Total
$23,455.00
Project & Location:
City of Chandler Pecos Surface Water
Treatment Plant GMP 2
Improvements
Mobilization- 18
$55.00
$990.00
Mobilization- 6
$330.00
We will have this
7931 E Pecos Rd. Suite 203
Mesa, AZ 85212
www.crosspointtesting.com
Page 1 of 1
480-988-6602 Office
Info@crosspointtesting.com
Quotation
Date: 08/27/2025
Client: Archer-Western
Prepared by: Brent Couch
Quotation Valid until:
12/31/2025 Quote #002
Comments or Special Instructions:
This quotation is based on the contract drawings and specifications provided. Any additional hours required to complete the
required to complete the project will be billed at the quoted rates below. Quotation is based on an 8 hour work day. Overtime
and Saturday work will be billed at 1.25 times the quoted rate. Holiday and Sunday work will be billed at 1.5 times the quoted
rate unless otherwise agreed on prior to the start of the project. Billing is from portal to portal. No re-inspection costs have
been included in this bid. All re-inspection costs are the responsibility of the contractor.
Project Requirements: Perform verification of fit-up, in-process and completed welding under slab
piping spool and tie in locations as required by project specification Section 40 05 24.23A Part 2- 2.07D
Terms-
Net 15
Date
Service
Service Description
Hrs.
Rate
Miles
Field Inspection
TBD
CWI-VT
Field verification of fit-up, in-process and
215
$95.00
$20,425.00
completed welding as required per
ASME B31.1, B31.3
Mobilization- 22
$55.00
$1,210.00
TBD
HYDRO
Hydrostatic testing of completed
32
$95.00
$4,560.00
piping spools as required.
Mobilization- 4
$55.00
$220.00
TBD
NDE
Magnetic Particle or Ultrasonic
175
$95.00
$16,625.00
Testing of completed weldments as
required.
Mobilization- 21
$55.00
$1,155.00
Notes: All access to areas of inspection shall be provided by the contractor. CTIS is not responsible
for providing lifts, ladders, scaffolding or other types of inspection access. Contractor to provide
special safety equipment and requirements if applicable for confined space, fall protection, lock-out
tag out procedures.
Sub-
Total
-
Total
$44,195.00
Project & Location:
City of Chandler Pecos Surface Water
Treatment Plant GMP 2
Improvements
7931 E Pecos Rd. Suite 203
Mesa, AZ 85212
www.crosspointtesting.com
Page 1 of 1
480-988-6602 Office
Info@crosspointtesting.com
Quotation
Date: 08/27/2025
Client: Archer-Western
Prepared by: Brent Couch
Quotation Valid until: 03/27/2026
Quote #003
Comments or Special Instructions:
This quotation is based on the contract drawings and specifications provided. Any additional hours required to complete the
required to complete the project will be billed at the quoted rates below. Quotation is based on an 8 hour work day. Overtime
and Saturday work will be billed at 1.25 times the quoted rate. Holiday and Sunday work will be billed at 1.5 times the quoted
rate unless otherwise agreed on prior to the start of the project. Billing is from portal to portal. No re-inspection costs have
been included in this bid. All re-inspection costs are the responsibility of the contractor.
Project Requirements: Perform verification of fit-up, in-process and completed welding under slab
piping spool and tie in locations as required by project specification Section 40 05 24.23A Part 2- 2.07D
Terms-
Net 15
Date
Service
Service Description
Hrs.
Rate
Miles
Field Inspection – Inside diameter verification and testing, if required.
TBD
CWI-VT
Field verification of fit-up, in-process and
278
$95.00
$26,410.00
completed welding as required per
ASME B31.1, B31.3
Mobilization- 24
$55.00
$1,320.00
TBD
HYDRO
Hydrostatic testing of completed
32
$95.00
$4,560.00
piping spools as required.
Mobilization- 4
$55.00
$220.00
TBD
NDE
Magnetic Particle or Ultrasonic
195
$95.00
$18,525.00
Testing of completed weldments as
required.
Mobilization- 23
$55.00
$1,265.00
Notes: All access to areas of inspection shall be provided by the contractor. CTIS is not responsible
for providing lifts, ladders, scaffolding or other types of inspection access. Contractor to provide
special safety equipment and requirements if applicable for confined space, fall protection, lock-out
tag out procedures.
Sub-
Total
-
Total
$52,300.00
Project & Location:
City of Chandler Pecos Surface Water
Treatment Plant GMP 2
Improvements
Not sure if this will be required. The specs did not specifically state this was needed, but included
the price in GMP .